(497)
¨sÁUÀ 1
gÁdå ¸ÀPÁðgÀzÀ ªÀÄÄRå DzÉñÀUÀ¼ÀÄ ºÁUÀÆ ¸ÀÄvÉÆÛÃ¯É ªÀÄÄAvÁzÀ
J¯Áè E¯ÁSÉUÀ½UÀÆ ¸ÀA§A¢ü¹zÀ DzÉñÀUÀ¼ÀÄ
PÀAzÁAiÀÄ ¸ÀaªÁ®AiÀÄ
«µÀAiÀÄ :
GvÀÛgÀ PÀ£ÀßqÀ f¯ÉèAiÀÄ eÉÆÃ¬ÄqÁ vÁ®ÆQ£À gÁªÀÄ£ÀUÀgÀ UÁæªÀÄzÀ ¸ÀgÀPÁj ¥ÀqÀ j.¸À.
£ÀA.55 gÀ°è PÉëÃvÀæ 0-03 UÀÄAmÉ d«ÄãÀ£ÀÄß ²æÃ gÁªÀİAUÀ zÉêÀ¸ÁÜ£ÀPÉÌ ªÀÄAdÆgÀÄ
ªÀiÁqÀĪÀ §UÉÎ.
NzÀ¯ÁVzÉ :
¥ÁæzÉòPÀ DAiÀÄÄPÀÛgÀÄ, ¨É¼ÀUÁ« «¨sÁUÀ, ¨É¼ÀUÁ« EªÀgÀ ¥ÀvÀæ ¸ÀA:¥ÁæD¨É:¨sÀÆ«Ä:4:
J¯ïJ£ïr:¹Dgï: 99/2013-14 ¢£ÁAPÀ 26-09-2014
¥Àæ¸ÁÛªÀ£É:-
¥ÁæzÉòPÀ DAiÀÄÄPÀÛgÀÄ, ¨É¼ÀUÁ« «¨sÁUÀ, ¨É¼ÀUÁ« EªÀgÀ ªÉÄÃ¯É NzÀ¯ÁzÀ ¥ÀvÀæzÀ°è GvÀÛgÀ PÀ£ÀßqÀ f¯ÉèAiÀÄ eÉÆÃ¬ÄqÁ vÁ®ÆQ£À
gÁªÀÄ£ÀUÀgÀ UÁæªÀÄzÀ ¸ÀgÀPÁj ¥ÀqÀ j.¸À. £ÀA.55 gÀ°è PÉëÃvÀæ 0-03 UÀÄAmÉ d«ÄãÀ£ÀÄß ²æÃ gÁªÀİAUÀ zÉêÀ¸ÁÜ£À ¸À®ÄªÁV ²æÃ gÁªÀİAUÀ
zÉêÀ¸ÁÜ£À ªÀåªÀ¸ÁÜ¥À£À PÀ«Än PÉêÀ¯Éð (gÁªÀÄ£ÀUÀgÀ) EªÀjUÉ ªÀÄAdÆgÀÄ ªÀiÁqÀĪÀ §UÉÎ ²¥sÁgÀ¹ì£ÉÆA¢UÉ ¥Àæ¸ÁÛªÀ£É ¸À°è¹gÀÄvÁÛgÉ.
¥ÁæzÉòPÀ DAiÀÄÄPÀÛgÀÄ ¨É¼ÀUÁ« «¨sÁUÀ EªÀgÀÄ vÀªÀÄä ¥ÀvÀæzÀ°è PÉÆÃjgÀĪÀ d«ÄãÀÄ ¸ÀÆ¥Á(eÉÆÃ¬ÄqÁ) vÁ®ÆèQ£À
gÁªÀÄ£ÀUÀgÀ(²ÃvÁªÁqÀ) UÁæªÀÄzÀ j.¸À.£ÀA.55 gÀ MlÄÖ PÉëÃvÀæ 41-14 JPÀgÉ d«ÄãÀÄ EzÀÄÝ, ªÀÄÆ®vÀ CgÀtå d«ÄãÁVzÀÄÝ £ÀAvÀgÀ ¸ÀPÁðgÀzÀ
DzÉñÀ £ÀA. J¥sïJ¥sïr-79/J¥sïfJ¯ï-79 ¢£ÁAPÀ:01-05-1980 gÀ£ÀéAiÀÄ CgÀtå d«ÄãÀÄ £À«ÃPÀgÀt C¢ü¸ÀÆZÀ£É gÀ°è 39-27 UÀÄAmÉ
d«ÄãÀÄ ¸ÀgÀPÁj ¥ÀqÀªÉAzÀÄ ¥ÀjªÀvÀð£É ºÉÆA¢gÀÄvÀÛzÉ. ¨Á®Q G½zÀ 1-26 UÀÄAmÉ 10 DuÉ d«ÄãÀÄ PÁ¢lÖ ¥sÁgɸïÖ ºÁUÀÆ ¸ÀPÁðj
¥ÀqÁ JAzÀÄ PÁ®A £ÀA. 9 gÀ°è zÁR¯ÁVgÀĪÀÅzÁV ºÁUÀÆ PÁ®A £ÀA. 11 gÀ°è PÁ½ £À¢ d® «zÀÄåvï AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄr ªÀÄļÀÄUÀqÉAiÀiÁzÀ
¤gÁ²ævÀjUÉ ªÀÄAdÆgÁVgÀÄvÀÛzÉ. ªÀÄÄRå C©üAiÀÄAvÀgÀÄ PÉ.¦.¹ UÀuÉñÀUÀÄr EªÀgÀÄ ¯ÉÃOmï £ÀPÉë vÀAiÀiÁj¹zÀÄÝ CzÀgÀAvÉ ¤gÁ²ævÀjUÉ 1135
¥sÁèmïUÀ¼À£ÀÄß ¤«Äð¹ ¥ÀÄ£ÀðªÀ¸Àw PÀ®à¹ PÉÆqÀ¯ÁV F ¯ÉÃOmï £ÀPÉë ¥ÀæPÁgÀ gÁªÀİAUÀ zÉêÀ¸ÁÜ£À, ªÀĹâ ºÁUÀÆ ZÀZÀðUÀ½UÉ ¥Áèmï
«ÄøÀ°nÖzÀÄÝ ¥ÀÄ£ÀðªÀ¸Àw PÉÃAzÀæUÀ¼À°è ªÀÄAdÆj¹zÀ ¥ÁèmïUÀ¼À£ÀÄß ºÉÆgÀvÀÄ¥Àr¹ G½zÀ RįÁè eÁUÀzÀ°è ºÀ®ªÁgÀÄ ªÀµÀðUÀ¼À »AzÉAiÉÄÃ
zÉêÀ¸ÁÜ£ÀUÀ¼À£ÀÄß C£À¢üPÀÈvÀªÁV ¤«Äð¸À¯ÁVzÀÄÝ J¯Áè zÉêÀ¸ÁÜ£ÀUÀ¼À£ÀÄß £ÉÆÃAzÀt ºÁUÀÆ ªÀÄÄzÁæAPÀ E¯ÁSÉAiÀİè læ¸ïÖ rÃqï ªÀÄÆ®PÀ
£ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¹gÀĪÀÅzÁV w½¹gÀÄvÁÛgÉ. PÀ£ÁðlPÀ ¨sÀÆ ªÀÄAdÆgÁw ¤AiÀĪÀÄUÀ¼ÀÄ 1969gÀ ¤AiÀĪÀÄ 21 gÀ£ÀéAiÀÄ ªÀiÁgÀÄPÀmÉÖ ¨É¯ÉAiÀÄ ±ÉÃPÀqÁ 50
gÀµÀÄÖ ªÀiË®åªÀ£ÀÄß «¢ü¹ ²æÃ gÁªÀİAUÀ zÉêÀ¸ÁÛ£ÀPÉÌ 0-03 UÀÄAmÉ d«ÄãÀÄ ªÀÄAdÆgÀÄ ªÀiÁqÀĪÀ PÀÄjvÀÄ ¸ÀPÁðgÀzÀ ¥ÀƪÁð£ÀÄªÉÆÃzÀ£É
¤ÃqÀĪÀ PÀÄjvÀÄ F PɼÀPÀAqÀ µÀgÀvÀÄÛUÀ½UÉÆ¼À¥ÀlÄÖ ªÀÄAdÆgÀÄ ªÀiÁqÀĪÀAvÉ ²¥sÁgÀ¸ÀÄì ªÀiÁrgÀÄvÁÛgÉ.
1.
GzÉÝòvÀ d«Ä£À£ÀÄß AiÀiÁªÀ GzÉÝñÀPÁÌV ªÀÄAdÆj¸À¯ÁVzÉAiÉÆÃ CzÉà GzÉÝñÀPÁÌV G¥ÀAiÉÆÃV¸ÀvÀPÀÌzÀÄÝ.
2.
¸ÀzÀj d«Ää£À°è AiÀiÁªÀÅzÉà jÃwAiÀÄ CwPÀæªÀÄtªÁUÀzÀAvÉ £ÉÆÃrPÉÆ¼ÀîvÀPÀÌzÀÄ.
3.
ªÀiÁgÀÄPÀmÉÖ ¨É¯É ±ÉÃPÀqÁ 50 gÀµÀÄÖ ªÀiË®å ºÁUÀÆ E¤ßvÀgÀ ±ÀÄ®ÌUÀ¼À ¸À»vÀ ¸ÀPÁðgÀPÉÌ ¨sÀj¸ÀĪÀ µÀgÀwÛUÉÆ¼À¥ÀlÄÖ.
4.
ªÉÄîÌAqÀ µÀgÀvÀÄÛUÀ¼À£ÀÄß G®èAX¹zÀ°è ¸ÀzÀj d«ÄãÀ£ÀÄß ¸ÀPÁðgÀzÀ ªÀ±ÀPÉÌ vÉUÉzÀÄPÉÆ¼Àî¯ÁUÀĪÀÅzÀÄ.
¥Àæ¸ÁÛªÀ£ÉAiÀİè£À CA±ÀUÀ¼À£ÀÄß PÀÆ®APÀĵÀªÁV ¥Àj²Ã°¹ F PɼÀPÀAqÀAvÉ DzÉò¹zÉ:-
¸ÀPÁðgÀzÀ DzÉñÀ ¸ÀASÉå: Dgïr 37 J¯ïfJ£ï 2014, ¢£ÁAPÀ: 13.04.2017
¥Àæ¸ÁÛªÀ£ÉAiÀÄ°è «ªÀj¹gÀĪÀ CA±ÀUÀ¼À »£É߯ÉAiÀÄ°è ²æÃ gÁªÀİAUÀ zÉêÀ¸ÁÜ£À ªÀåªÀ¸ÁÜ¥À£À PÀ«Än PÉêÀ¯Éð (gÁªÀÄ£ÀUÀgÀ) EªÀjUÉ
GvÀÛgÀ PÀ£ÀßqÀ f¯ÉèAiÀÄ eÉÆÃ¬ÄqÁ vÁ®ÆèQ£À gÁªÀÄ£ÀUÀgÀ(²ÃvÀªÁqÀ) UÁæªÀÄzÀ ¸À.£ÀA.55 gÀ°è 0-03 UÀÄAmÉ d«ÄãÀ£ÀÄß PÀ£ÁðlPÀ ¨sÀÆ
¸ÀA¥ÀÄl 152
Volume 152
¨ÉAUÀ¼ÀÆgÀÄ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017 (ªÉʱÁR 28, ±ÀPÀ ªÀµÀð 1939)
Bengaluru, Thursday, May 18, 2017 ( Vaishakha 28, Shaka Varsha 1939)
¸ÀAaPÉ 20
Issue 20
498
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
¨sÁUÀ 1
ªÀÄAdÆgÁw ¤AiÀĪÀÄUÀ¼ÀÄ 1969gÀ ¤AiÀĪÀÄ 21 gÀ£ÀéAiÀÄ ªÀiÁgÀÄPÀmÉÖ ¨É¯ÉAiÀÄ ±ÉÃPÀqÁ 50% ªÀiË®å ºÁUÀÆ E¤ßvÀgÀ ±ÀÄ®ÌUÀ¼À£ÀÄß ¥ÁªÀw¹PÉÆAqÀÄ
F PɼÀPÀAqÀ µÀgÀvÀÄÛUÀ½UÉÆ¼À¥ÀlÄÖ ²æÃ gÁªÀİAUÀ zÉêÀ¸ÁÜ£ÀPÉÌ ªÀÄAdÆgÀÄ ªÀiÁqÀ®Ä C£ÀÄªÉÆÃzÀ£É ¤ÃqÀ¯ÁVzÉ.
1.
GzÉÝòvÀ d«Ä£À£ÀÄß AiÀiÁªÀ GzÉÝñÀPÁÌV ªÀÄAdÆj¸À¯ÁVzÉAiÉÆÃ CzÉà GzÉÝñÀPÁÌV G¥ÀAiÉÆÃV¸ÀvÀPÀÌzÀÄÝ ºÁUÀÆ AiÀiÁªÀÅzÉÃ
PÁgÀtPÀÆÌ ¥ÀgÀ¨sÁgÉ ªÀiÁqÀvÀPÀÌzÀÝ®è.
2.
¸ÀzÀj d«Ää£À°è AiÀiÁªÀÅzÉà jÃwAiÀÄ CwPÀæªÀÄtªÁUÀzÀAvÉ £ÉÆÃrPÉÆ¼ÀîvÀPÀÌzÀÄ.
3.
¥ÀæZÀ°vÀ ªÀiÁgÀÄPÀmÉÖ ¨É¯ÉAiÀÄ ±ÉÃPÀqÁ 50 gÀµÀÄÖ ºÁUÀÆ E¤ßvÀgÀ ±ÀÄ®ÌUÀ¼À ¸À»vÀ ¸ÀPÁðgÀPÉÌ ¨sÀj¸ÀĪÀ µÀgÀwÛUÉÆ¼À¥ÀlÄÖ.
4.
ªÉÄîÌAqÀ µÀgÀvÀÄÛUÀ¼À£ÀÄß G®èAX¹zÀ°è ¸ÀzÀj d«ÄãÀ£ÀÄß ¸ÀPÁðgÀzÀ ªÀ±ÀPÉÌ vÉUÉzÀÄPÉÆ¼Àî¯ÁUÀĪÀÅzÀÄ.
PR - 137
SC - 25
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥Á®gÀ DzÉñÁ£ÀĸÁgÀ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ CªÀgÀ ºÉ¸Àj£À°è,
GzÀAiÀÄ Dgï. £ÁAiÀÄPï
¦ÃoÁ¢üPÁj
PÀAzÁAiÀÄ E¯ÁSÉ (¨sÀÆ.ªÀÄA-2)
¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀaªÁ®AiÀÄ
«µÀAiÀÄ :
2017-18£Éà ¸Á°UÉ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ gÉÊvÀgÀ DgÉÆÃUÀå gÀPÀëuÁ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ£ÀÄß ªÀÄÄAzÀĪÀgɸÀ®Ä
ºÁUÀÆ ºÉƸÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄUÀ¼À£ÀÄß £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¸À®Ä DzÉñÀ ºÉÆgÀr¸ÀĪÀ §UÉÎ.
NzÀ¯ÁVzÉ :
¸ÀPÁðj DzÉñÀ ¸ÀASÉå: ¹M/162/¹J¯ïJ¸ï/2015, ¨ÉAUÀ¼ÀÆgÀÄ ¢£ÁAPÀ:15-04-2016
¥Àæ¸ÁÛªÀ£É:
ªÉÄÃ¯É NzÀ¯ÁzÀ ¸ÀPÁðgÀzÀ DzÉñÀzÀ°è AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ gÉÊvÀgÀ DgÉÆÃUÀå gÀPÀëuÁ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄr 2016-17£Éà ¸Á°£À°è ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ£ÀÄß
£ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¸À®Ä DzÉñÀ ºÉÆgÀr¸À¯ÁVvÀÄÛ. 2017-18£Éà ¸Á°UÉ F AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ°è ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ£ÀÄß £ÉÆÃAzÀtÂ/£À«ÃPÀj¸À®Ä DzÉñÀ
ºÉÆgÀr¸À¨ÉÃPÁUÀÄvÀÛzÉ.
¸ÀPÁðj DzÉñÀ ¸ÀASÉå: ¹M/695/¹J¯ïJ¸ï/2016, ¨ÉAUÀ¼ÀÆgÀÄ ¢£ÁAPÀ: 20-04-2017
¥Àæ¸ÁÛªÀ£ÉAiÀÄ°è «ªÀj¸À¯ÁzÀ CA±ÀUÀ¼À »£É߯ÉAiÀİè AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ gÉÊvÀgÀ DgÉÆÃUÀå gÀPÀëuÁ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄr 2017-18£Éà ¸Á°£À°è
UÁæ«ÄÃt ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀzÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ CªÀgÀ PÀÄlÄA§ ªÀUÀðzÀªÀgÀÄ £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¹PÉÆ¼Àî®Ä C£ÀĪÁUÀĪÀAvÉ ªÀÄÄA¢£À DzÉñÀzÀªÀgÉ«UÉ F
PɼÀPÀAqÀ DzÉñÀªÀ£ÀÄß ªÀiÁUÀð¸ÀÆaUÀ¼ÉÆA¢UÉ ºÉÆgÀr¹zÉ.
ªÀiÁUÀð¸ÀÆaUÀ¼ÀÄ :
1)
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À PÁAiÉÄÝ, 1959gÀ Cr CxÀªÁ PÀ£ÁðlPÀ ¸ËºÁzÀð ¸ÀºÀPÁjUÀ¼À PÁAiÉÄÝ, 1997gÀ Cr CxÀªÁ §ºÀÄ
gÁdå ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À PÁAiÉÄÝ, 2002gÀ Cr £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¹gÀĪÀ ºÁUÀÆ PÁAiÀÄð¤ªÀð»¸ÀÄwÛgÀĪÀ AiÀiÁªÀÅzÉà UÁæ«ÄÃt ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ
¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À°è M§â ªÀåQÛ ¸ÀzÀ¸Àå£ÁVzÀݰè, CªÀ£ÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ CªÀ£À PÀÄlÄA§ ªÀUÀðzÀªÀgÀÄ ¤UÀ¢vÀ ªÀAwUÉAiÀÄ£ÀÄß ¥ÁªÀw¹ AiÀıÀ¹é¤
¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ gÉÊvÀgÀ DgÉÆÃUÀå gÀPÀëuÁ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ ¸Ë®¨sÀå ¥ÀqÉAiÀÄ®Ä CºÀðjgÀÄvÁÛgÉ. FUÁUÀ¯Éà PÀ¼ÉzÀ ¸Á®ÄUÀ¼À°è
AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄrAiÀÄ°è ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀåvÀé ¥ÀqÉ¢zÀÝ°è ¥Àæ¸ÀPÀÛ ¸Á°UÀÆ ¸ÀºÀ CAvÀºÀªÀgÀÄUÀ¼ÀÄ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄrAiÀİè DAiÀiÁ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À°è
£À«ÃPÀj¸À®Ä/ £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¸À®Ä CºÀðgÁVvÁÛgÉ.
2)
f¯Áè PÉÃAzÀæ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¨ÁåAPÀÄUÀ¼À ºÁUÀÆ ¥ÁæxÀ«ÄPÀ PÀȶ ¥ÀwÛ£À ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À ªÀw¬ÄAzÀ ¸ÀAWÀn¸À®ànÖgÀĪÀ J¯Áè UÁæ«ÄÃt
¸Àé-¸ÀºÁAiÀÄ UÀÄA¥ÀÄUÀ¼À ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ CªÀgÀ PÀÄlÄA§ ªÀUÀðzÀªÀgÀÄ £À«ÃPÀj¸À®Ä/ £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¸À®Ä CºÀðgÁVvÁÛgÉ.
3)
C«¨sÀPÀÛ PÀÄlÄA§zÀ AiÀiÁªÀÅzÉà M§â ¸ÀzÀ¸Àå£ÀÄ/¸ÀzÀ¸Àå¼ÀÄ ªÉÄÃ¯É w½¹gÀĪÀ CºÀð ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀzÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÁV AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ
gÉÊvÀgÀ DgÉÆÃUÀå gÀPÀëuÁ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄr £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¸ÀĪÀ ¢£ÁAPÀPÉÌ 3 wAUÀ¼ÀÄ PÀ¼É¢gÀ¨ÉÃPÀÄ. ¸Àé-¸ÀºÁAiÀÄ UÀÄA¦£À ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÁzÀgÉ
CAvÀºÀB UÀÄA¥À£ÀÄß ¸Áܦ¹ 3 wAUÀ¼ÀÄ UÀw¹gÀ¨ÉÃPÀÄ. D PÀÄlÄA§zÀ ¥ÀæwAiÉÆ§â ¸ÀzÀ¸Àå£ÀÆ ªÁ¶ðPÀ ªÀAwUÉ ¥ÁªÀw¸ÀĪÀ ªÀÄÆ®PÀ
AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ gÉÊvÀgÀ DgÉÆÃUÀå gÀPÀëuÁ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ ¸Ë®¨sÀå ¥ÀqÉAiÀħºÀÄzÀÄ. C«¨sÀPÀÛ PÀÄlÄA§ CAzÀgÉ vÀAzÉ, vÁ¬Ä, UÀAqÀ/
ºÉAqÀw, UÀAqÀÄ ªÀÄPÀ̼ÀÄ & ªÀÄzÀĪÉAiÀiÁUÀzÀ ºÉtÄÚ ªÀÄPÀ̼ÀÄ, ¸ÉƸÉ, ªÉƪÀÄäPÀ̼ÀÆ ¸ÉÃj JAzÀÄ CxÉÊð¬Ä¸ÀĪÀÅzÀÄ.
4)
ªÀÄzÀĪÉAiÀiÁVgÀĪÀ ºÉtÄÚ ªÀÄUÀ¼ÀÄ ºÁUÀÆ CªÀ¼À ªÀÄPÀ̼ÀÄ vÀAzÉ/vÁ¬Ä/CtÚ/vÀªÀÄä EªÀgÀ PÀÄlÄA§zÀ°èAiÉÄà CAzÀgÉ ¥ÀæzsÁ£À
CfðzÁgÀgÀ PÀÄlÄA§zÀ°èAiÉÄà ªÁ¸ÀªÁVzÀÝgÉ, CªÀgÀ ¥Á°£À ªÀAwUÉ ºÀt ¥ÁªÀw¹zÀgÉ £À«ÃPÀgÀt / £ÉÆÃAzÀtÂUÉ ºÁUÀÆ
AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ ¸Ë®¨sÀå ¥ÀqÉAiÀÄ®Ä CºÀðgÁVgÀÄvÁÛgÉ. DzÁUÀÆå, 2017-18£Éà ¸Á°£À AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ CªÀ¢üAiÀİèü ªÀÄzÀĪÉAiÀiÁzÀ ºÉtÄÚ
ªÀÄUÀ¼ÀÄ vÀAzÉ/vÁ¬Ä/CtÚ/vÀªÀÄä EªÀgÀ eÉÆvÉ ªÁ¸ÀªÁVgÀzÉ ¸ÀAWÀzÀ PÁAiÀÄðªÁå¦ÛAiÀÄ ºÉÆgÀUÉ ªÁ¸À«zÀÝgÉ CAvÀºÀ ¸ÀAzÀ¨sÀðzÀ°è
ªÉÄÃ¯É «ªÀj¹zÀAvÉ C«¨sÀPÀÛ PÀÄlÄA§zÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÉåAiÀiÁVgÀzÉà EgÀĪÀÅzÀjAzÀ, F AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ ¸Ë®¨sÀåªÀ£ÀÄß ¥ÀqÉAiÀÄ®Ä
CºÀðgÁUÀĪÀÅ¢®è. DzÀgÉ, CªÀ¼Éà ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀzÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÉåAiÀiÁV 3 wAUÀ¼ÀÄ PÀ¼É¢zÀݰè, AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ gÉÊvÀgÀ DgÉÆÃUÀå gÀPÀëuÁ
AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ ¸Ë®¨sÀå ¥ÀqÉAiÀħºÀÄzÁVzÉ. ºÁUÀÆ ªÉÄÃ¯É w½¹gÀĪÀ F ¤§ðAzsÀ CAxÀªÀ½UÉ C£Àé¬Ä¸ÀĪÀÅ¢®è. ªÀÄzÀĪÉAiÀiÁV
UÀAqÀ£À ªÀÄ£ÉAiÀÄ°è ªÁ¸À ªÀiÁqÀÄwÛgÀĪÀ ºÁUÀÆ ¥ÀæzsÁ£À CfðzÁgÀgÀ eÉÆvÉAiÀÄ°è ªÁ¸À ªÀiÁqÀzÉà EgÀĪÀ ºÉtÄÚ ªÀÄPÀ̽AzÀ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ
¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼ÀÄ ªÀAwUÉAiÀÄ£ÀÄß ¹éÃPÀj¸ÀvÀPÀÌzÀ®è.
¨sÁUÀ 1
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
499
5)
2017-18£Éà ¸Á°£À°è ªÀÄzÀĪÉAiÀiÁUÀzÀ ºÉtÄÚªÀÄPÀ̽UÉ ¥ÀæzsÁ£À CfðzÁgÀgÀÄ ªÀAwUÉ ¥ÁªÀw¹zÀÄÝ, D£ÀAvÀgÀ ªÀÄzÀĪÉAiÀiÁVzÀݰè
CAvÀºÀ ªÀÄzÀĪÉAiÀiÁzÀ ºÉtÄÚ ªÀÄPÀ̼ÀÄ 31-05-2018gÀªÀgÉUÉ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ gÉÊvÀgÀ DgÉÆÃUÀå gÀPÀëuÁ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄrAiÀİè
¸Ë®¨sÀåªÀ£ÀÄß ¥ÀqÉAiÀħºÀÄzÁVzÉ.
6)
2017-18£Éà ¸Á°UÉ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ gÉÊvÀgÀ DgÉÆÃUÀå gÀPÀëuÁ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ ªÁ¶ðPÀ ªÀAwUÉAiÀÄ£ÀÄß ¥ÀæwAiÉÆ§âjUÉ `. 300/-PÉÌ
¤UÀ¢UÉÆ½¸À¯ÁVzÉ. F AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ ¥ÀæAiÉÆÃd£À ¥ÀqÉAiÀÄ®Ä ¥ÀæzsÁ£À CfðzÁgÀgÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ CªÀgÀ PÀÄlÄA§zÀ GzÉÝò¹zÀ
¥ÀæwAiÉÆ§â ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀåjUÉ PÀqÁØAiÀĪÁV `. 300/- ªÀAwUÉ ¥ÁªÀw ªÀiÁqÀ¨ÉÃPÀÄ. F ¥ÉÊQ ¸ÀAWÀzÀ ¸Á¢¯ÁégÀÄ ªÉZÀÑPÉÌ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ AiÀıÀ¹é¤
¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ gÉÊvÀgÀ DgÉÆÃUÀå gÀPÀëuÁ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄUÀ¼À£ÀÄß £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¸À®Ä ±Àæ«Ä¹zÀªÀjUÉ ¥ÉÆæÃvÁìºÀzsÀ£ÀªÁV ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ
¸ÀAWÀ/¸ÀA¸ÉÜAiÀÄÄ `. 10/-£ÀÄß ElÄÖPÉÆAqÀÄ, G½zÀ `. 290/-UÀ¼À£ÀÄß ºÀt ¹éÃPÀj¹zÀ 15 ¢£ÀUÀ¼ÉƼÀUÁV ¸ÀA§A¢ü¹zÀ f¯Áè
¸ÀºÀPÁj ¨ÁåAPÀÄUÀ¼À°è AiÀıÀ¹é¤ læ¸ïÖ ºÉÆA¢gÀĪÀ SÁvÉUÉ dªÀiÁ ªÀiÁqÀvÀPÀÌzÀÄÝ/ªÀUÁð¬Ä¸ÀvÀPÀÌzÀÄÝ. f¯Áè ¸ÀºÀPÁj ¨ÁåAPÀÄUÀ¼ÀÄ
dªÀiÁ DUÀĪÀ ªÀAwUÉAiÀÄ ªÉÆvÀÛªÀ£ÀÄß ¹éÃPÀj¹zÀ 7 ¢£ÀUÀ¼ÉƼÀUÁV C¥ÉPïì ¨ÁåAQ£À°ègÀĪÀ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ læ¸ïÖ SÁvÉUÉ dªÀiÁ
ªÀiÁqÀvÀPÀÌzÀÄÝ/ªÀUÁð¬Ä¸ÀvÀPÀÌzÀÄÝ. «¼ÀA§ªÁzÀ°è D ºÀtªÀ£ÀÄß ElÄÖPÉÆAqÀ ¸ÀºÀPÁj ¸ÀAWÀ/¸ÀA¸ÉÜAiÀĪÀgÀÄ ¨ÁåAQ£À ¤AiÀĪÀÄUÀ¼À
¥ÀæPÁgÀ «¼ÀA§zÀ CªÀ¢üUÉ §rØ ¥ÁªÀw ªÀiÁqÀ®Ä §zÀÞgÁUÀÄvÁÛgÉ. ¥Àj²µÀÖ eÁw/ ¥Àj²µÀÖ ªÀUÀðzÀªÀgÀÄ ªÁ¶ðPÀ ªÀAwUÉ `. 50/-£ÀÄß
¥ÁªÀw¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ G½zÀ gÀÆ. 250/-£ÀÄß ¸ÀPÁðgÀzÀ ªÀw¬ÄAzÀ ¸ÀºÁAiÀÄzsÀ£ÀªÁV ¥ÁªÀw¸À¯ÁUÀĪÀÅzÀÄ.
7)
AiÀiÁªÀÅzÉà MAzÀÄ PÀÄlÄA§zÀ°è LªÀgÀÄ CxÀªÁ CzÀQÌAvÀ ºÉaÑUÉ PÀÄlÄA§ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ£ÀÄß AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ gÉÊvÀgÀ DgÉÆÃUÀå gÀPÀëuÁ
AiÉÆÃd£ÉUÉ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ£ÁßV £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¹zÀ°è/£À«ÃPÀj¹zÀ°è CªÀgÀÄ ¥ÁªÀw¸À¨ÉÃPÁzÀ ªÀAwUÉ ºÀtzÀ°è CAzÀgÉ ¥Àæw ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀåjUÉ
gÀÆ.290/-gÀ°è ±ÉÃ.15gÀµÀÄÖ jAiÀiÁ¬Äw ¥ÀqÉAiÀÄ®Ä CºÀðjgÀÄvÁÛgÉ ºÁUÀÆ ¥Àj²µÀÖ eÁw / ¥Àj²µÀÖ ¥ÀAUÀqÀzÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀåjUÉ `. 40/-
gÀ°è ±ÉÃ.15 jAiÀiÁ¬Äw ¥ÀqÉAiÀÄ®Ä CºÀðjgÀÄvÁÛgÉ.
8)
AiÀıÀ¹é¤ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄr ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ £ÉÆÃAzÀtÂAiÀÄ£ÀÄß £À«ÃPÀj¸ÀĪÀ ¸ÀAzÀ¨sÀðzÀ°è PÀqÁØAiÀĪÁV ¥ÀæzsÁ£À CfðzÁgÀgÀÄ ªÀAwUÉAiÀÄ£ÀÄß
¥ÁªÀw¹ £À«ÃPÀj¹zÀ £ÀAvÀgÀªÉà G½zÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ ªÀAwUÉAiÀÄ£ÀÄß ¥ÀqÉzÀÄ £À«ÃPÀj¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ. ¥ÀæzsÁ£À CfðzÁgÀgÀÄ ªÀAwUÉAiÀÄ£ÀÄß
¥ÁªÀw¸ÀzÉà CªÀgÀ PÀÄlA§ ªÀUÀðzÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀåjAzÀ ªÀAwUÉAiÀÄ£ÀÄß ¥ÀqÉzÀÄ CªÀgÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀåvÀé£ÀÄß £À«ÃPÀj¸ÀzÀݰè CAvÀºÀ ¥ÀæPÀgÀtUÀ¼ÀÄ
AiÀıÀ¹é¤ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄr aQvÉìAiÀÄ£ÀÄß ¥ÀqÉAiÀÄ®Ä CºÀðvÉ ºÉÆAzÀĪÀÅ¢®è.
9)
AiÀıÀ¹é¤ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄr ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÁUÀ®Ä ªÀAiÉÆÃ«ÄwAiÀÄ ¤§ðAzsÀªÀÅ EgÀĪÀÅ¢®è.
10)
£ÀªÀeÁvÀ ²±ÀÄ«£À vÁ¬ÄAiÀÄ ºÉ¸ÀgÀÄ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ PÁqïð£À°èzÀÝgÉ 30 ¢£ÀUÀ¼ÀªÀgÉUÉ vÁ¬Ä ºÉ¸ÀgÀÄ EgÀĪÀ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ PÁrð£À DzsÁgÀzÀ
ªÉÄÃ¯É F AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄrAiÀÄ°è §gÀĪÀ ¸Ë®¨sÀåªÀ£ÀÄß ¥ÀqÉAiÀħºÀÄzÀÄ. 30 ¢£ÀUÀ¼À £ÀAvÀgÀzÀ°è ªÀÄUÀÄ«£À ºÉ¸Àj£ÉÆA¢UÉ D
ªÀµÀðzÀ°è AiÀiÁªÀ ¸ÀAzÀ¨sÀðzÀ°èAiÀÄÆ £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¹PÉÆAqÀÄ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ ¸ÀªÀ®vÀÄÛ ¥ÀqÉAiÀħºÀÄzÀÄ.
11)
2017-18£Éà ¸Á°£À°è PÀ¤µÀ× 50.00 ®PÀë ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄUÀ¼À£ÀÄß £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¸ÀĪÀ UÀÄj ¤UÀ¢ü¥Àr¸À¯ÁVzÉ. ¥Àæw f¯ÉèAiÀÄ ¥Àj¹ÜwAiÀÄ£ÀÄß
UÀªÀÄ£ÀzÀ°èlÄÖPÉÆAqÀÄ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À ¤§AzsÀPÀgÀÄ ¥Àæw f¯ÉèUÉ ¥ÀævÉåÃPÀ UÀÄj ¤UÀ¢üUÉÆ½¸ÀĪÀAvÉ ¸ÀÆa¸À¯ÁVzÉ. 2016-17£ÉÃ
¸Á°£À°è 41.47 ®PÀë ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ£ÁßV £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¹zÀÄÝ, CªÀgÉ®ègÀ£ÀÄß 2017-18£Éà ¸Á°UÉ £À«ÃPÀj¸À®Ä PÀæªÀÄ PÉÊUÉÆ¼ÀîvÀPÀÌzÀÄÝ.
12)
2017-18£Éà ¸Á°UÉ UÁæ«ÄÃt AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄUÀ¼À£ÀÄß £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¸À®Ä/£À«ÃPÀgÀtPÉÌ ¥ÁægÀA¨sÀzÀ ¢£ÁAPÀ: 01-05-2017 ªÀÄvÀÄÛ
PÉÆ£ÉAiÀÄ ¢£ÁAPÀ: 30-06-2017 DVgÀÄvÀÛzÉ.
13)
2017-18£Éà ¸Á°£À°è AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄUÀ¼À£ÀÄß ºÉƸÀzÁV £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¸À®Ä ºÉƸÀzÁV 2017-18£Éà ¸Á°UÉ £ÉÆAzÁªÀuÉ ¥sÁgÀA
MzÀV¸ÀĪÀ vÀ£ÀPÀ 2016-17£Éà ¸Á°£À°è ¸ÀgÀ§gÁdÄ ªÀiÁrgÀĪÀ ºÉƸÀ £ÉÆÃAzÀt ¥sÁgÀAUÀ¼À£ÀÄß ªÀiÁvÀæ G¥ÀAiÉÆÃV¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ
UÀÄgÀÄw£À aÃn MzÀV¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ. ¨ÉÃgÉ AiÀiÁªÀÅzÉà ªÀµÀðUÀ¼À°è ¤ÃrgÀĪÀ ¥sÁgÀAUÀ¼À£ÀÄß G¥ÀAiÉÆÃV¸ÀvÀPÀÌzÀÝ®è. ªÉÆzÀ®Ä 2016-17£ÉÃ
¸Á°£À ¸ÀgÀ§gÁf£À°è G½zÀ ¥sÁgÀAUÀ¼À£ÀÄß G¥ÀAiÉÆÃV¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ, D£ÀAvÀgÀ læ¸ïÖ¤AzÀ 2017-18£Éà ¸Á°UÉ ¸ÀgÀ§gÁdÄ ªÀiÁrzÀ
£ÉÆÃAzÀt ¥sÁgÀAUÀ¼À£ÀÄß G¥ÀAiÉÆÃV¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ.
F ªÀµÀðzÀ £ÉÆÃAzÀtÂUÉ ¨ÉÃPÁzÀ CªÀ±ÀåPÀ ¸ÀASÉåAiÀÄ ¥sÁgÀAUÀ¼À£ÀÄß f¯ÉèUÀ¼À ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À G¥À¤§AzsÀPÀgÀÄUÀ¼ÀÄ læ¸ïÖ
PÀbÉÃj¬ÄAzÀ ¥ÀqÉzÀÄ CªÀgÀ ªÁå¦ÛAiÀÄ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À PÁAiÀÄðzÀ²ðUÀ½UÉ ¥sÁgÀA/¥ÀĸÀÛPÀUÀ¼À£ÀÄß ºÀAvÀºÀAvÀªÁV ¥ÀÆgÉʹ ¹éÃPÀÈw
¥ÀqÉAiÀĨÉÃPÀÄ. MªÉÄä ¥ÀÆgÉʹzÀ ¥sÁgÀAUÀ¼À°è ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀzÀªÀgÀÄ ªÀiÁ»wAiÀÄ£ÀÄß ¥ÀÆwðAiÀiÁV £ÀªÀÄÆ¢¹ ªÀAwUÉ ºÀtªÀ£ÀÄß
¨ÁåAQUÉ ¥ÁªÀw ªÀiÁrzÀ £ÀAvÀgÀªÉà ¥ÀÄ£ÀB ¥sÁgÀAUÀ¼À£ÀÄß MzÀV¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ. ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀPÉÌ ¥sÁgÀA ¥ÀÆgÉʸÀĪÁUÀ ¥ÀĸÀÛPÀzÀ ¸ÀASÉå
ªÀÄvÀÄÛ AiÀÄĤPï L.r ¸ÀASÉåAiÀÄ£ÀÄß £ÀªÀÄÆ¢¹ PÁAiÀÄðzÀ²ð¬ÄAzÀ ¹éÃPÀÈw ¥ÀqÉzÀÄPÉÆ¼Àî¨ÉÃPÀÄ. F §UÉÎ ¥Àj²Ã®£ÉUÁV ¥ÀævÉåÃPÀ
¥ÀĸÀÛPÀzÀ°è §gÉ¢nÖgÀ¨ÉÃPÀÄ. £À«ÃPÀj¹zÀªÀjUÉ ºÉƸÀzÁV Lr PÁqïð PÉÆqÀvÀPÀÌzÀ®è, CªÀjUÉ ºÀt¥ÁªÀw¹zÀÝPÉÌ gÀ²Ãw PÉÆlÄÖ,
gÀ²ÃwAiÀİè FUÁUÀ¯Éà PÉÆnÖgÀĪÀ PÁqïð£À AiÀÄĤPï Lr £ÀA§gÀ£ÀÄß £ÀªÀÄÆ¢¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ. ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À PÁAiÀÄðzÀ²ðUÀ¼ÀÄ
£À«ÃPÀgÀtPÁÌV ¨sÀwð ªÀiÁrzÀ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ºÉƸÀzÁV £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¸À®Ä ¨sÀwð ªÀiÁrzÀ ¥sÁgÀAUÀ¼À PÀbÉÃj ¥ÀæwAiÀÄ£ÀÄß qÁmÁ JAnæUÉ
PÀ¼ÀÄ»¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ.
14)
2017-18£Éà ¸Á°£À°è £À«ÃPÀgÀt ªÀiÁqÀÄwÛgÀĪÀ/ ºÉƸÀzÁV £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¸ÀĪÀ ¥ÀæzsÁ£À CfðzÁgÀ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ CªÀgÀ PÀÄlÄA§ ªÀUÀðzÀªÀgÀ
DzsÁgÀ ¸ÀASÉåAiÀÄ£ÀÄß ¥ÀævÉåÃPÀªÁV £ÉÆÃAzÀt ¥sÁgÀA/ £À«ÃPÀgÀt gÀ¹Ã¢AiÀÄ ªÉÄÃ¯É ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À PÁAiÀÄðzÀ²ðAiÀĪÀgÀÄ
£ÀªÀÄÆ¢¸ÀvÀPÀÌzÀÄÝ. 2017-18£Éà ¸Á°¤AzÀ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ AiÉÆÃd£ÉUÉ DzsÁgï ¸ÀASÉåAiÀÄ£ÀÄß £ÀªÀÄÆ¢¸ÀĪÀÅzÀÄ PÀqÁØAiÀĪÁVgÀÄvÀÛzÉ. 2016-
17£Éà ¸Á°£À ¥sÁgÀAUÀ¼À£ÀÄß G¥ÀAiÉÆÃV¸ÀĪÀ ¸ÀAzÀ¨sÀðzÀ°èAiÀÄÆ J¯Áè ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ DzsÁgï ¸ÀASÉåAiÀÄ£ÀÄß CªÀgÀ ºÉ¸Àj£À ªÀÄÄAzÉ
£ÀªÀÄÆ¢¸ÀvÀPÀÌzÀÄÝ.
15)
CºÀð ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼ÀÄ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄUÀ½AzÀ ¤UÀ¢üvÀ ªÁ¶ðPÀ ªÀAwUÉ ºÀt ¥ÀqÉzÀÄ ºÀt ¹éÃPÀÈw gÀ²Ã¢AiÀÄ£ÀÄß PÉÆqÀ¨ÉÃPÀÄ.
¥sÁgÀA£À°è ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ£ÀÄß £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¹zÀ wAUÀ¼ÀÄ, ªÀµÀð ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¢£ÁAPÀªÀ£ÀÄß vÀ¥ÀàzÉ £ÀªÀÄÆ¢¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ. £ÉÆÃAzÁªÀuÉ ¥sÁgÀA£À
PɼÀ¨sÁUÀªÀ£ÀÄß ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀåjUÉ PÉÆqÀ¨ÉÃPÀÄ. ªÉÄïÁãUÀªÀ£ÀÄß qÁmÁ JAnæ ªÀiÁqÀ®Ä ¸ÀA§A¢ü¹zÀ f¯ÉèAiÀÄ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À
500
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
¨sÁUÀ 1
G¥À¤§AzsÀPÀjUÉ ¥Àæw wAUÀ¼À PÉÆ£ÉAiÀÄ°è ¸ÀAUÀ滹zÀ ªÀAwUÉAiÀÄ ºÀtªÀ£ÀÄß ¨ÁåAQUÉ dªÉÄ ªÀiÁr gÀ²Ã¢AiÉÆA¢UÉ PÀ¼ÀÄ»¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ
ªÀÄvÀÄÛ DVAzÁUÉÎ qÁmÁ JAnæ ªÀiÁqÀ®Ä C£ÀÄPÀÆ®ªÁUÀĪÀAvÉ ¥Àæw wAUÀ¼À PÉÆ£ÉAiÀÄ°è ºÉÆ¸À £ÉÆÃAzÁªÀuÉ Cfð/ £À«ÃPÀgÀtzÀ
«ªÀgÀUÀ¼À£ÀÄß CAzÀgÉ ºÉƸÀ CfðUÀ¼À°è ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄUÀ¼À ¥ÉÆÃmÉÆÃ CAn¹, J¯Áè «ªÀgÀUÀ¼ÉÆA¢UÉ ºÉƸÀzÁV £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¹zÀ
ªÀÄvÀÄÛ £À«ÃPÀgÀtªÁzÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄUÀ¼À vÀBSÉÛAiÉÆA¢UÉ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À G¥À¤§AzsÀPÀgÀ PÀbÉÃjUÉ ¤Ãr ¹éÃPÀÈw ¥ÀqÉAiÀĨÉÃPÀÄ.
16)
2017-18£Éà ¸Á°£À°è ºÉƸÀzÁV £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¸ÀĪÀªÀjUÉ ºÉƸÀ PÁqÀÄðUÀ¼À£ÀÄß PÉÆqÀ¯ÁUÀĪÀÅzÀÄ. ¥ÀæzsÁ£À CfðzÁgÀgÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ
CªÀgÀ PÀÄlÄA§zÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ JgÀqÀÄ ¨sÁªÀavÀæUÀ¼À£ÀÄß ¤ÃqÀ¨ÉÃPÀÄ. PÀbÉÃj ¥Àæw ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ ¥ÀæwAiÀÄ »A¨sÁUÀzÀ°è Cfð ¥sÁgÀA£À°è
PÀæªÀÄ ¸ÀASÉå C£ÀÄUÀÄtªÁV ¥ÉÆÃmÉÆÃUÀ¼À£ÀÄß CAn¹ ¨sÁªÀavÀæzÀ PɼÀUÉ CªÀgÀ ºÉ¸ÀgÀ£ÀÄß §gÉAiÀĨÉÃPÀÄ.
17)
FUÁUÀ¯Éà PÁqïð ºÉÆA¢gÀĪÀªÀgÀÄ £À«ÃPÀgÀt ¸ÀAzÀ¨sÀðzÀ°è ªÀAwUÉ vÀÄA© ºÉZÀÄѪÀjAiÀiÁV ºÉƸÀzÁV ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ£ÀÄß ¸ÉÃj¸À®Ä
§AiÀĹzÀݰè, ¥ÀæzsÁ£À CfðzÁgÀjUÉ ¤ÃrgÀĪÀ PÁrð£À°è ºÉƸÀ ªÀåQÛAiÀÄ ªÀiÁ»wAiÀÄ£ÀÄß ªÀÄÄR¥ÀÄlzÀ°è §gÉzÀÄ »A§¢AiÀİè
¥ÉÆÃmÉÆÃ CAn¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ ºÁUÀÆ Dåqï-D£ï PÁqïð£À°è ºÉƸÀzÁV ¸ÉÃ¥ÀðqÉUÉÆAqÀ ªÀåQÛAiÀÄ ªÀiÁ»wAiÀÄ£ÀÄß ªÀÄÄR¥ÀÄlzÀ°è
§gÉzÀÄ »A§¢AiÀÄ°è ¥ÉÆÃmÉÆÃ CAn¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ D Dåqï-D£ï PÁqïð£ÀÄß qÁmÁ JAnæUÉ ¸À°è¸ÀvÀPÀÌzÀÄÝ.
18)
2017-18£Éà ¸Á°£À°è ºÉƸÀzÁV £ÉÆÃAzÁªÀuÉ/£À«ÃPÀgÀtUÉÆAqÀ/ ¸ÉÃ¥ÀðqÉAiÀiÁzÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄUÀ½UÉ ¸ÀAWÀªÀÅ ªÁ¶ðPÀ ªÀAwUÉ ºÀt
¥ÀqÉzÀÄ ¤ÃrgÀĪÀ ¹éÃPÀÈw gÀ²Ã¢AiÀÄ£ÀÄß ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ºÉƸÀ £ÉÆÃAzÀt ¥sÁgÀA (L.r. PÁqïð) C£ÀÄß ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄ 2017-18£Éà ¸Á°£À
CAvÀåzÀªÀgÉUÉ ¸ÀÄgÀQëvÀªÁV ElÄÖPÉÆ¼Àî¨ÉÃPÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ ¸Ë®¨sÀåªÀ£ÀÄß ¥ÀqÉAiÀÄĪÀ ¸ÀAzÀ¨sÀðzÀ°è gÀ²Ã¢AiÀÄ£ÀÄß læ¸ïÖ¤AzÀ
CAVÃPÀj¸À®àlÖ D¸ÀàvÉæUÀ½UÉ PÀqÁØAiÀĪÁV ºÁdgÀÄ¥Àr¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ JA§ w¼ÀĪÀ½PÉAiÀÄ£ÀÄß ¸ÀAWÀªÀÅ £ÉÆAzÁ¬ÄvÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀåjUÉ w½¸ÀvÀPÀÌzÀÄÝ.
19)
»A¢£À ªÀµÀðUÀ¼À°è £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¹zÀÝ J¯Áè AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀåjUÀÆ AiÀÄÆ¤Pï Lr ¤Ãr ªÀiÁ»wAiÀÄ£ÀÄß AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ªÉ¨ï¸ÉÊmï
www.yeshasvini.kar.nic.in £À°è C¼ÀªÀr¸À¯ÁVzÉ. AiÀiÁªÀÅzÉà PÁgÀt¢AzÀ »A¢£À ªÀµÀðUÀ¼À°è £ÉÆAzÁ¬Ä¹PÉÆAqÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄ
£À«ÃPÀj¹PÉÆ¼Àî¢zÀݰè CAvÀºÀªÀgÀÄ F ªÀµÀð ºÉƸÀzÁV PÁqïð ¥ÀqÉAiÀħºÀÄzÀÄ.
20)
¥ÁæxÀ«ÄPÀ PÀȶ ¥ÀwÛ£À ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼ÀÄ, J¯Áè f¯Áè PÉÃAzÀæ ¨ÁåAPÀÄUÀ¼ÀÄ, UÁæ«ÄÃt ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼ÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ PCARD
¨ÁåAPÀÄUÀ¼ÀÄ vÀªÀÄä ¸Á®UÁgÀgÀ ªÀÄ£ÀªÉǰ¹ ¸Á®UÁgÀgÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ CªÀgÀ PÀÄlÄA§zÀ EvÀgÉ J¯Áè ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ£ÀÄß F AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄrAiÀİè
£ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¸À®Ä PÀæªÀÄ PÉÊUÉÆ¼Àî®Ä w½¹zÉ.
21)
ºÁ®Ä GvÁàzÀPÀgÀ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼ÀÄ, ¸ÀºÀPÁj ¸ÀPÀÌgÉ PÁSÁð£ÉUÀ¼ÀÄ, ¸ÀºÀPÁj £Àư£À VgÀtÂUÀ¼ÀÄ EvÁå¢ ¸ÀºÀPÁj ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼ÀÄ
CªÀgÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀåjUÉ ºÀt ¥ÁªÀw ªÀiÁqÀĪÁUÀ CAvÀºÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ PÀÄlÄA§zÀ CºÀð ªÀåQÛUÀ¼À£ÀÄß ªÀÄ£ÀªÉǰ¹ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ£ÁßV £ÉÆÃAzÀtÂ
ªÀiÁqÀ¨ÉÃPÀÄ. ¥ÀæzsÁ£À CfðzÁgÀgÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ CªÀgÀ PÀÄlÄA§zÀ AiÀiÁªÀÅzÉà ¸ÀzÀ¸Àå£ÀÄ ¸ÀPÁðj £ËPÀgÀ£ÁV CxÀªÁ SÁ¸ÀV PÀA¥À¤AiÀİè
PÁAiÀÄð¤ªÀð»¸ÀÄwÛzÀÄÝ, ¨ÉÃgÉ AiÀiÁªÀÅzÉà DgÉÆÃUÀå «ªÀiÁ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ ¸Ë®¨sÀåPÉÌ CºÀð£ÁVzÀݰè, CAvÀºÀªÀgÀ£ÀÄß AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ
gÉÊvÀgÀ DgÉÆÃUÀå gÀPÀëuÁ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ ¥sÀ¯Á£ÀĨsÀ«AiÀiÁV £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¸À¨ÁgÀzÀÄ. DzÁUÀÆå AiÀiÁªÀÅzÉà PÁgÀtPÁÌV
£ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¹zÀgÀÆ CªÀgÀÄ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ gÉÊvÀgÀ DgÉÆÃUÀå gÀPÀëuÁ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ ¸Ë®¨sÀå ¥ÀqÉAiÀÄ®Ä CºÀðgÁUÀĪÀÅ¢®è.
22)
gÁdåzÀ°è PÉ®ªÀÅ ºÁ®Ä GvÁàzÀPÀgÀ MPÀÆÌlUÀ¼ÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ PÉ®ªÀÅ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀ/¸ÀA¸ÉÜUÀ¼ÀÄ CªÀÅUÀ¼À ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ªÀAwUÉAiÀİè
¨sÁUÀ±ÀB ºÀtªÀ£ÀÄß ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀzÀ ¸ÀéAvÀ §AqÀªÁ¼À¢AzÀ ¨sÀj¸ÀÄwÛªÉ. F ¥ÀzÀÞwAiÀÄ£ÀÄß gÁdåzÀ J¯Áè ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀ ¸ÀA¸ÉÜUÀ¼ÀÆ
PÀÆqÀ C£ÀĸÀj¸ÀĪÀAvÉ ¥ÉÆæÃvÁ컸À®Ä ¸ÀÆa¸À¯ÁVzÉ.
23)
2017-18£Éà ¸Á°£À°è ºÉƸÀzÁV/£À«ÃPÀgÀt ªÀiÁrPÉÆ¼ÀÄîªÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄUÀ¼ÀÄ ¸ÀļÀÄî ªÀiÁ»w ªÀÄvÀÄÛ CPÀæªÀĪÁV, ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ CxÀªÁ
¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À vÀ¦à¤AzÁV DVzÀÝgÉ, UÉÆwÛzÀÄÝ CxÀªÁ UÉÆwÛ®èzÉAiÉÆÃ £ÉÆÃAzÀt ºÉÆA¢zÀÝgÉ CAvÀºÀ ªÀåQÛUÀ¼ÀÄ AiÀıÀ¹é¤
¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ gÉÊvÀgÀ DgÉÆÃUÀå gÀPÀëuÁ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄrAiÀÄ°è ¸Ë®¨sÀåªÀ£ÀÄß ¥ÀqÉAiÀÄ®Ä C£ÀºÀðgÀÄ ºÁUÀÆ ¥ÁªÀw¹zÀ ªÀAwUÉ ºÀtªÀ£ÀÄß
ªÀÄÄlÄÖUÉÆÃ®Ä ºÁQPÉÆ¼Àî¯ÁUÀĪÀÅzÀÄ. ºÁUÉAiÉÄà CAvÀºÀ ¥sÀ¯Á£ÀĨsÀ«UÀ¼À AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ gÉÊvÀgÀ DgÉÆÃUÀå gÀPÀëuÁ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ
¸ÀzÀ¸ÀåvÀé vÀAvÁ£Éà gÀzÀÄÝUÉÆ¼ÀÄîvÀÛzÉ, ¥ÀævÉåÃPÀ gÀzÀÝw DzÉñÀzÀ CªÀ±ÀåPÀvÉ EgÀĪÀÅ¢®è.
24)
AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ gÉÊvÀgÀ DgÉÆÃUÀå gÀPÀëuÁ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄrAiÀİè£À ªÀiÁ»wAiÀģɯ߼ÀUÉÆAqÀ ¨ÉÆæÃZÀgïUÀ¼À£ÀÄß ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼ÀÄ
2017-18£Éà ¸Á°UÉ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄrAiÀÄ°è ºÉÆ¸ÀzÁV £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¸ÀĪÀ/£À«ÃPÀgÀtUÉÆ¼ÀÄîªÀ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ PÁqïð ºÉÆA¢gÀĪÀ ¥ÀæzsÁ£À
CfðzÁgÀjUÉ PÉÆqÀvÀPÀÌzÀÄÝ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¨ÉÆæÃZÀgÀ£ÀÄß ¤ÃrgÀĪÀ §UÉÎ ¹éÃPÀÈwAiÀÄ£ÀÄß ¥ÀqÉzÀÄ ¸ÀAWÀzÀªÀgÀÄ ElÄÖPÉÆ¼ÀîvÀPÀÌzÀÄÝ. ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄ
¨ÉÆæÃZÀgÀ£ÀÄß PÉý PÀqÁØAiÀĪÁV ¥ÀqÉAiÀÄvÀPÀÌzÀÄÝ.
25)
F PɼÀPÀAqÀAvÉ ¸Ë®¨sÀåUÀ¼À£ÀÄß AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀåjUÉ MzÀV¸À¯ÁUÀĪÀÅzÀÄ.
A.
ªÁqïðUÀ¼À ¸Ë®¨sÀå : d£ÀgÀ¯ï ªÁqïð£À ¸Ë®¨sÀåzÀ°è AiÀıÀ¹é¤ £ÉmïªÀPïð D¸ÀàvÉæUÀ¼À°è C£ÀĪÀÄw¹zÀ 823 ±À¸ÀÛç
aQvÉìUÀ¼À£ÀÄß MzÀV¸À¯ÁUÀĪÀÅzÀÄ. AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄ ¸ÉàµÀ¯ï ªÁqïð£À°è aQvÉì ¥ÀqÉAiÀÄ®Ä EaѹzÀgÉ CAvÀºÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄ
DAiÀiÁ D¸ÀàvÉæUÀ¼ÀÄ ¸ÉàµÀ¯ï ªÁqïð£À°è aQvÉìUÉ ¤UÀ¢ü¥Àr¸ÀĪÀ ªÉZÀѪÀ£ÀÄß AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ gÉÊvÀgÀ DgÉÆÃUÀå gÀPÀëuÁ
AiÉÆÃd£É¬ÄAzÀ D¸ÀàvÉæUÉ zÉÆgÀPÀĪÀ aQvÁì ªÉZÀѪÀ£ÀÄß PÀ¼ÉzÀÄ G½zÀ ªÉÆvÀÛªÀ£ÀÄß ¥ÁªÀw¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ.
B.
jAiÀiÁ¬Äw zÀgÀzÀ ºÉÆgÀgÉÆÃV aQvÉì : 2017-18£Éà ¸Á°£À°èAiÀÄÆ jAiÀiÁ¬Äw zÀgÀzÀ°è CAzÀgÉ `. 100/- ¸ÁªÀiÁ£Àå
ºÉÆgÀgÉÆÃV vÀ¥Á¸ÀuÉUÉ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄ ¥ÁªÀw¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ. «±ÉõÀ ºÉÆgÀgÉÆÃV vÀ¥Á¸ÀuÉUÉ `. 200/- ¥ÁªÀw¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ
ªÀÄvÀÄÛ CªÀgÀÄ vÀ¥Á¸ÀuÉUÁV ¥ÁªÀw¹zÀ gÀ²ÃwAiÀÄ ªÉÄÃ¯É 3 wAUÀ¼ÀªÀgÉUÉ ªÉÄÃ¯É ºÉýzÀ ºÉÆgÀgÉÆÃV aQvÉìUÀ¼À£ÀÄß
GavÀªÁV ¥ÀqÉAiÀħºÀÄzÀÄ.
¨sÁUÀ 1
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
501
C.
QèäPÀ¯ï E£Éé¹ÖUÉõÀ£ï: 2017-18£Éà ¸Á°£À°èAiÀÄÆ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄ ±Éà 25 jAiÀiÁ¬Äw zÀgÀzÀ°è £ÉmïªÀPïð D¸ÀàvÉæUÀ¼À°è
Qè¤PÀ¯ï ªÀÄvÀÄÛ EvÀgÉ vÀ¥Á¸ÀuÉUÀ¼À£ÀÄß (Clinical & other Investigation) ¥ÀqÉAiÀħºÀÄzÀÄ.
D.
UÀjµÀÖ ªÉÆvÀÛzÀ aQvÉì : DAiÀiÁ ªÀµÀðzÀ°è MAzÀÄ ¨Áj zÁR¯ÁzÀgÉ `. 1.25 ®PÀëUÀ¼ÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ CzÉà ªÀµÀð C£ÉÃPÀ ¸Áj
D¸ÀàvÉæUÉ zÁR¯ÁzÀgÉ `. 2.00 ®PÀëUÀ¼ÀÄ
26)
2017-18£Éà ¸Á°£À°è PÉ®ªÀÅ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ªÀAwUÉ ºÀtªÀ£ÀÄß ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀPÉÌ ¥ÁªÀw ªÀiÁr, ¥ÉÆÃmÉÆÃ EvÁå¢ CªÀ±ÀåPÀ
zÁR¯ÉUÀ¼À£ÀÄß MzÀV¸ÀzÉ EzÀÝgÉ, F PÁgÀt¢AzÀ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀzÀ°è ¨ÁQ G½zÀ ªÀAwUÉAiÀÄ ªÉÆvÀÛªÀ£ÀÄß ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀªÀÅ
AiÀıÀ¹é¤ læ¸ïÖUÉ ¤ÃrzÀ zÉÃtÂUÉAiÉÄAzÀÄ ¥ÀjUÀt¹, læ¸ïÖ£À SÁvÉUÉ dªÀiÁªÀiÁqÀvÀPÀÌzÀÄÝ.
27)
AiÀıÀ¹é¤ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄr ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ£ÀÄß £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¸ÀĪÀ CªÀ¢üAiÀÄÄ ªÀÄÄVzÀ PÀÆqÀ¯ÉÃ, J¯Áè f¯Áè ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À G¥À
¤§AzsÀPÀgÀÄUÀ¼ÀÄ DAiÀiÁ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ½UÉ «vÀj¹gÀĪÀ DzÀgÉ §¼ÀPÉ DUÀzÉà EgÀĪÀ £ÉÆÃAzÀt ¥sÁgÀAUÀ¼ÀÄ PÀqÁØAiÀĪÁV 7
¢£ÀUÀ¼ÉƼÀUÁV ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ½AzÀ ªÁ¥À¸ÀÄì ¥ÀqÉzÀÄPÉÆ¼ÀîvÀPÀÌzÀÄÝ. ªÀÄÄAzÀĪÀgÉzÀÄ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀåjAzÀ ¸ÀAUÀ滹gÀĪÀ ªÀAwUÉAiÀÄ
ªÉÆvÀÛªÀ£ÀÄß ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À PÁAiÀÄðzÀ²ðUÀ¼ÀÄ DAiÀiÁ r¹¹ ¨ÁåAQ£À°ègÀĪÀ SÁvÉUÉ dªÀiÁ ªÀiÁrgÀĪÀ §UÉÎ
SÁvÀj¥Àr¹PÉÆ¼ÀîvÀPÀÌzÀÄÝ.
28)
2016-17£Éà ¸Á°£À AiÀıÀ¹é¤ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ CªÀ¢üAiÀÄÄ ¢£ÁAPÀ: 01-06-2016 jAzÀ ¥ÁægÀA¨sÀªÁV 31-05-2017PÉÌ ªÀÄÄVAiÀÄÄvÀÛzÉ.
F ¸ÀÄvÉÆÛÃ¯É C£ÀéAiÀÄ ºÉƸÀzÁV £ÉÆÃAzÁªÀuÉAiÀiÁUÀĪÀ/ ¸ÉÃ¥ÀðqÉAiÀiÁUÀĪÀ ¥sÀ¯Á£ÀĨsÀ«UÀ¼ÀÄ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ gÉÊvÀgÀ DgÉÆÃUÀå
gÀPÀëuÁ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ ¸Ë®¨sÀåªÀ£ÀÄß ¢£ÁAPÀ: 01-06-2017 jAzÀ eÁjUÉ §gÀĪÀAvÉ ªÀiÁvÀæ ¥ÀqÉAiÀÄ®Ä CºÀðgÁUÀÄvÁÛgÉ. DzÀÝjAzÀ
¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼ÀÄ ¤ÃqÀĪÀ ªÀAwUÉ ºÀt ¹éÃPÀÈw gÀ²Ã¢/¥sÀ¯Á£ÀĨsÀ«UÉ ¤ÃqÀĪÀ £ÉÆÃAzÀt £ÀªÀÄÆ£É ¨sÁUÀzÀ ¥ÀæwAiÀİè F ªÉÄð£À
CA±ÀªÀ£ÀÄß ¸ÀéµÀÖªÁV §gÉAiÀĨÉÃPÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ w¼ÀĪÀ½PÉAiÀÄ£ÀÄß ¸ÀºÀ ¥sÀ¯Á£ÀĨsÀ«UÉ ¤ÃqÀ¨ÉÃPÀÄ.
AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ gÉÊvÀgÀ DgÉÆÃUÀå gÀPÀëuÁ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ ªÀiÁUÀð¸ÀÆaUÀ¼À §UÉÎ w¼ÀĪÀ½PÉ ¤ÃqÀ®Ä DAiÀiÁ ¥ÁæAvÀzÀ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ
¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À dAn ¤§AzsÀPÀgÀÄ CªÀgÀ ªÁå¦ÛAiÀÄ E¯ÁSÁ¢üPÁjUÀ¼À, f¯Áè ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¨ÁåAPïUÀ¼À, ºÁ®Ä GvÁàzÀPÀgÀ MPÀÆÌlUÀ¼À ªÀÄvÀÄÛ EvÀgÉ
¥ÀæªÀÄÄR ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀ/¸ÀA¸ÉÜUÀ¼À ªÀÄÄRå PÁAiÀÄð¤ªÁðºÀuÁ¢üPÁjUÀ¼À ¸À¨sÉAiÀÄ£ÀÄß ¥ÁæAwÃAiÀÄ ªÀÄlÖzÀ°è ¤ªÀð»¸À®Ä ¸ÀÆa¹zÉ. £ÀAvÀgÀ
¢£ÁAPÀ 30-04-2017gÉÆ¼ÀUÉ J¯Áè f¯Áè ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À G¥À¤§AzsÀPÀgÀÄUÀ¼ÀÄ CªÀgÀ f¯ÉèAiÀÄ J¯Áè UÁæ«ÄÃt ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À CzsÀåPÀëgÀ
ªÀÄvÀÄÛ PÁAiÀÄðzÀ²ðAiÀĪÀgÀ, ¸Àé¸ÀºÁAiÀÄ UÀÄA¥ÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¸ÀA§A¢ü¹zÀ E¯ÁSÉUÀ¼À C¢üPÁjUÀ¼À ¸À¨sÉ PÀgÉzÀÄ PÁAiÀiÁðUÁgÀ K¥Àðr¹ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ
ªÀiÁUÀð¸ÀÆa ¤AiÀĪÀÄUÀ¼ÀÄ, Ew«ÄwUÀ¼ÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ AiÉÆÃd£É¬ÄAzÀ ¸Ë®¨sÀå ¥ÀqÉAiÀÄĪÀªÀgÀ §UÉÎ ªÀiÁ»wAiÀÄ£ÀÄß ¤Ãr, vÉUÉzÀÄPÉÆAqÀ PÀæªÀÄzÀ §UÉÎ
ªÀgÀ¢AiÀÄ£ÀÄß ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À ¤§AzsÀPÀjUÉ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¸ÀPÁðgÀPÉÌ ¸À°è¸À®Ä ¸ÀÆa¸À¯ÁVzÉ.
PR - 138
SC - 25
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥Á®gÀ DeÁÕ£ÀĸÁgÀ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ CªÀgÀ ºÉ¸Àj£À°è,
JA ªÉAPÀl¸Áé«Ä
«±ÉõÀ PÀvÀðªÁå¢üPÁj ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¥ÀzÀ¤«ÄvÀÛ
¸ÀPÁðgÀzÀ G¥À PÁAiÀÄðzÀ²ð.
¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ E¯ÁSÉ
¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀaªÁ®AiÀÄ
«µÀAiÀÄ :
2017-18£Éà ¸Á°UÉ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ £ÀUÀgÀ ¸ÀºÀPÁjUÀ¼À DgÉÆÃUÀå gÀPÀëuÁ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ£ÀÄß ªÀÄÄAzÀĪÀgɸÀ®Ä
ºÁUÀÆ ºÉƸÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄUÀ¼À£ÀÄß £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¸À®Ä DzÉñÀ ºÉÆgÀr¸ÀĪÀ §UÉÎ.
NzÀ¯ÁVzÉ :
¸ÀPÁðj DzÉñÀ ¸ÀASÉå: ¹M/163/¹J¯ïJ¸ï/2015, ¨ÉAUÀ¼ÀÆgÀÄ ¢£ÁAPÀ:15-04-2016
¥Àæ¸ÁÛªÀ£É :
NzÀ¯ÁzÀ ¸ÀPÁðgÀzÀ DzÉñÀzÀ°è AiÀıÀ¹é¤ £ÀUÀgÀ ¸ÀºÀPÁjUÀ¼À DgÉÆÃUÀå gÀPÀëuÁ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ C£ÀéAiÀÄ 2016-17£Éà ¸Á°£À°è ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ£ÀÄß
£ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¸À®Ä DzÉñÀ ºÉÆgÀr¸À¯ÁVvÀÄÛ. 2017-18£Éà ¸Á°UÉ F AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ°è ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ£ÀÄß £ÉÆÃAzÀtÂ/£À«ÃPÀj¸À®Ä DzÉñÀ
ºÉÆgÀr¸À¨ÉÃPÁUÀÄvÀÛzÉ.
¸ÀPÁðj DzÉñÀ ¸ÀASÉå: ¹M/695/¹J¯ïJ¸ï/2016, ¨ÉAUÀ¼ÀÆgÀÄ ¢£ÁAPÀ: 20-04-2017
¥Àæ¸ÁÛªÀ£ÉAiÀÄ°è «ªÀj¸À¯ÁzÀ CA±ÀUÀ¼À »£À߯ÉAiÀİè AiÀıÀ¹é¤ £ÀUÀgÀ ¸ÀºÀPÁjUÀ¼À DgÉÆÃUÀå gÀPÀëuÁ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀİè 2017-18£ÉÃ
¸Á°£À°è £ÀUÀgÀ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀzÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ CªÀgÀ PÀÄlÄA§ ªÀUÀðzÀªÀgÀÄ £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¹PÉÆ¼Àî®Ä C£ÀĪÁUÀĪÀAvÉ ªÀÄÄA¢£À
DzÉñÀzÀªÀgÉ«UÉ F PɼÀPÀAqÀ DzÉñÀªÀ£ÀÄß ªÀiÁUÀð¸ÀÆaUÀ¼ÉÆA¢UÉ ºÉÆgÀr¹zÉ.
ªÀiÁUÀð¸ÀÆaUÀ¼ÀÄ :
1)
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À PÁAiÉÄÝ, 1959gÀ Cr CxÀªÁ PÀ£ÁðlPÀ ¸ËºÁzÀð ¸ÀºÀPÁjUÀ¼À PÁAiÉÄÝ, 1997gÀ Cr CxÀªÁ §ºÀÄ
gÁdå ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À PÁAiÉÄÝ, 2002gÀ Cr £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¹gÀĪÀ ºÁUÀÆ £ÀUÀgÀ, ¥ÀlÖt ¥ÀæzÉñÀ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¥ÀÄgÀ¸À¨sÉ ªÁå¦ÛAiÀİè
PÁAiÀÄð¤gÀvÀªÁVgÀĪÀ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À°ègÀĪÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ CªÀgÀ PÀÄlÄA§ªÀUÀðzÀªÀjUÉ £ÀUÀgÀ ¸ÀºÀPÁjUÀ¼À AiÀıÀ¹é¤
AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄÄ C£Àé¬Ä¸ÀÄvÀÛzÉ. AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ°è £ÉÆAzÁ¬Ä¹PÉÆ¼Àî®Ä EaÒ¸ÀĪÀªÀgÀÄ læ¸ïÖ ¤UÀ¢ü¥Àr¹zÀ ªÁ¶ðPÀ ªÀAwUÉAiÀÄ£ÀÄß
¥ÁªÀw¹ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀåvÀé ¥ÀqÉAiÀħºÀÄzÀÄ. ¸ÀªÀiÁ¥À£ÉÀUÉÆArgÀĪÀ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À, ¤¶ÌçÃAiÀĪÁzÀ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À, £ËPÀgÀgÀ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ
¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À ¸ÀzÀå¸ÀjUÉ F AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄÄ C£ÀéAiÀĪÁUÀĪÀÅ¢®è.
502
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
¨sÁUÀ 1
2)
¸ÀAUÀæºÀªÁzÀ ªÀAwUÉ ºÀtªÀ£ÀÄß DAiÀÄ f¯Áè PÉÃAzÀæ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¨ÁåAQ£À°è vÉgÉ¢gÀĪÀ £ÀUÀgÀ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ SÁvÉUÉ dªÀiÁ ªÀiÁqÀ¨ÉÃPÀÄ. F
PÁgÀtPÁÌV J¯Áè f¯Áè PÉÃAzÀæ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¨ÁåAPÀÄUÀ¼ÀÄ vÀªÀÄä vÀªÀÄä vÁ®ÆèPÀÄ ¨ÁæAZÀÄUÀ¼À°è AiÀıÀ¹é¤ £ÀUÀgÀ ¸ÀºÀPÁjUÀ¼À DgÉÆÃUÀå
gÀPÀëuÁ AiÉÆÃd£ÉUÁV ¥ÀævÉåÃPÀ SÁvÉ vÉgÉAiÀĨÉÃPÀÄ. DAiÀiÁ f¯ÉèAiÀÄ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À G¥À¤§AzsÀPÀgÀÄ f¯Áè PÉÃAzÀæ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ
¨ÁåAPÀÄUÀ¼ÉÆqÀ£É ªÀåªÀºÀj¹ £ÀUÀgÀ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ AiÉÆÃd£ÉUÁV ¥ÀævÉåÃPÀ SÁvÉ vÉgÉAiÀÄĪÀAvÉ PÀæªÀĪÀ»¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ.
3)
f¯Áè PÉÃAzÀæ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¨ÁåAPÀÄUÀ¼À ªÀw¬ÄAzÀ ¸ÀAWÀn¸À®ànÖgÀĪÀ J¯Áè £ÀUÀgÀ ¥ÀæzÉñÀzÀ°ègÀĪÀ ¸Àé-¸ÀºÁAiÀÄ UÀÄA¥ÀÄUÀ¼À ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ
CªÀgÀ PÀÄlÄA§ ªÀUÀðzÀªÀgÀÆ ¸ÀºÀ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ £ÀUÀgÀ ¸ÀºÀPÁjUÀ¼À DgÉÆÃUÀå gÀPÀëuÁ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ°è £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¹PÉÆ¼Àî®Ä
CºÀðjgÀÄvÁÛgÉ, DzÀgÉ CAvÀºÀ ¸Àé¸ÀºÁAiÀÄ UÀÄA¥ÀÄUÀ¼À gÀZÀ£ÉAiÀiÁV 3 wAUÀ¼ÀÄ UÀw¹gÀ¨ÉÃPÀÄ.
4)
F »A¢£À ¥ÀzÀÝwAiÀÄAvÉ ¥ÀlÖt ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¨ÁåAPÀÄUÀ¼ÀÄ, ¥ÀºÀtÂAiÀÄ DzsÁgÀzÀ ªÉÄÃ¯É £ÀUÀgÀªÁ¹UÀ½UÉ UÁæ«ÄÃt AiÀıÀ¹é¤
AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄr £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¸ÀĪÀÅzÀ£ÀÄß ¤°è¸À¯ÁVzÉ.
5)
C«¨sÀPÀÛ PÀÄlÄA§zÀ AiÀiÁªÀÅzÉà M§â ¸ÀzÀ¸Àå£ÀÄ/¸ÀzÀ¸Àå¼ÀÄ ªÉÄÃ¯É w½¹gÀĪÀ CºÀð ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀzÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÁV AiÀıÀ¹é¤
AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄr £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¸ÀĪÀ ¢£ÁAPÀPÉÌ 3 wAUÀ¼ÀÄ PÀ¼É¢gÀ¨ÉÃPÀÄ ¸Àé-¸ÀºÁAiÀÄ UÀÄA¦£À ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÁzÀgÉ CAvÀºÀ ¸Àé-¸ÀºÁAiÀÄ
UÀÄA¥À£ÀÄß ¸Áܦ¹ 3 wAUÀ¼ÀÄ PÀ¼É¢gÀ¨ÉÃPÀÄ, D PÀÄlÄA§zÀ ¥ÀæwAiÉÆ§â ¸ÀzÀ¸Àå£ÀÆ ¤UÀ¢üvÀ CªÀ¢üAiÀÄ°è ªÁ¶ðPÀ ªÀAwUÉ ¥ÁªÀw¸ÀĪÀ
ªÀÄÆ®PÀ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ £ÀUÀgÀ ¸ÀºÀPÁjUÀ¼À DgÉÆÃUÀå gÀPÀëuÁ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ ¸Ë®¨sÀå ¥ÀqÉAiÀħºÀÄzÀÄ. C«¨sÀPÀÛ PÀÄlÄA§ CAzÀgÉ vÀAzÉ,
vÁ¬Ä, UÀAqÀ/ ºÉAqÀw, UÀAqÀÄ ªÀÄPÀ̼ÀÄ/ªÀÄzÀĪÉAiÀiÁUÀzÀ ºÉtÄÚ ªÀÄPÀ̼ÀÄ, ¸ÉƸÉ, ªÉƪÀÄäPÀ̼ÀÆ ¸ÉÃj JAzÀÄ CxÉÊð¬Ä¸ÀĪÀÅzÀÄ.
6)
ªÀÄzÀĪÉAiÀiÁVgÀĪÀ ºÉtÄÚ ªÀÄUÀ¼ÀÄ ºÁUÀÆ CªÀ¼À ªÀÄPÀ̼ÀÄ vÀAzÉ/vÁ¬Ä/CtÚ/vÀªÀÄä EªÀgÀ PÀÄlÄA§zÀ°èAiÉÄà CAzÀgÉ ¥ÀæzsÁ£À
CfðzÁgÀgÀ PÀÄlÄA§zÀ°èAiÉÄà ªÁ¸ÀªÁVzÀÝgÉ, CªÀgÀ ¥Á°£À ªÀAwUÉ ºÀt ¥ÁªÀw¹zÀgÉ £À«ÃPÀgÀt/£ÉÆÃAzÀtÂUÉ ºÁUÀÆ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ
¸Ë®¨sÀå ¥ÀqÉAiÀÄ®Ä CºÀðgÁVgÀÄvÁÛgÉ. DzÁUÀÆå, 2017-18£Éà ¸Á°£À AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ CªÀ¢üAiÀİèü ªÀÄzÀĪÉAiÀiÁzÀ ºÉtÄÚ ªÀÄUÀ¼ÀÄ
vÀAzÉ/vÁ¬Ä/CtÚ/vÀªÀÄä EªÀgÀ eÉÆvÉ ªÁ¸ÀªÁVgÀzÉ ¸ÀAWÀzÀ PÁAiÀÄðªÁå¦ÛAiÀÄ ºÉÆgÀUÉ ªÁ¸À«zÀÝgÉ CAvÀºÀ ¸ÀAzÀ¨sÀðzÀ°è ªÉÄïÉ
«ªÀj¹zÀAvÉ C«¨sÀPÀÛ PÀÄlÄA§zÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÉåAiÀiÁVgÀzÉà EgÀĪÀÅzÀjAzÀ F AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ ¸Ë®¨sÀåªÀ£ÀÄß ¥ÀqÉAiÀÄ®Ä CºÀðgÁUÀĪÀÅ¢®è.
DzÀgÉ, CªÀ¼Éà ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀzÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÉåAiÀiÁV 3 wAUÀ¼ÀÄ PÀ¼É¢zÀݰè, AiÀıÀ¹é¤ £ÀUÀgÀ ¸ÀºÀPÁjUÀ¼À DgÉÆÃUÀå gÀPÀëuÁ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ
¸Ë®¨sÀå ¥ÀqÉAiÀħºÀÄzÁVzÉ. ºÁUÀÆ ªÉÄÃ¯É w½¹gÀĪÀ F ¤§ðAzsÀ CAxÀªÀ½UÉ C£Àé¬Ä¸ÀĪÀÅ¢®è. ªÀÄzÀĪÉAiÀiÁV UÀAqÀ£À ªÀÄ£ÉAiÀİè
ªÁ¸À ªÀiÁqÀÄwÛgÀĪÀ ºÁUÀÆ ¥ÀæzsÁ£À CfðzÁgÀgÀ eÉÆvÉAiÀÄ°è ªÁ¸À ªÀiÁqÀzÉà EgÀĪÀ ºÉtÄÚ ªÀÄPÀ̽AzÀ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼ÀÄ
ªÀAwUÉAiÀÄ£ÀÄß ¹éÃPÀj¸ÀvÀPÀÌzÀ®è.
7)
2017-18 £Éà ¸Á°£À°è ªÀÄzÀĪÉAiÀiÁUÀzÀ ºÉtÄÚªÀÄPÀ̽UÉ ¥ÀæzsÁ£À CfðzÁgÀgÀÄ ªÀAwUÉ ¥ÁªÀw¹zÀÄÝ, D£ÀAvÀgÀ ªÀÄzÀĪÉAiÀiÁVzÀݰè
CAvÀºÀ ªÀÄzÀĪÉAiÀiÁzÀ ºÉtÄÚ ªÀÄPÀ̼ÀÄ ¥Àæ¸ÀPÀÛ ¸Á°£À°è 31-5-2018gÀªÀgÉUÉ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ £ÀUÀgÀ ¸ÀºÀPÁjUÀ¼À DgÉÆÃUÀå gÀPÀëuÁ
AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄrAiÀÄ°è ¸Ë®¨sÀåªÀ£ÀÄß ¥ÀqÉAiÀħºÀÄzÁVzÉ.
8)
2017-18£Éà ¸Á°UÉ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ £ÀUÀgÀ ¸ÀºÀPÁjUÀ¼À DgÉÆÃUÀå gÀPÀëuÁ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄr ªÁ¶ðPÀ ªÀAwUÉAiÀÄ£ÀÄß ¥ÀæwAiÉÆ§âjUÉ gÀÆ.710/-PÉÌ
¤UÀ¢üUÉÆ½¸À¯ÁVzÉ. F AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ ¥ÀæAiÉÆÃd£À ¥ÀqÉAiÀÄ®Ä GzÉÝò¸ÀĪÀ ¥ÀæwAiÉÆ§âgÀÄ `. 710/- gÀAvÉ ¥ÀæzsÁ£À CfðzÁgÀgÀÄ
ªÀÄvÀÄÛ CªÀgÀ PÀÄlÄA§zÀ ¥ÀæwAiÉÆ§â ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀåjUÉ PÀqÁØAiÀĪÁV ¥ÁªÀw ªÀiÁqÀ¨ÉÃPÀÄ. F ¥ÉÊQ `. 10/-£ÀÄß ¸ÀAWÀzÀ ¸Á¢¯ÁégÀÄ ªÉZÀÑPÉÌ
ªÀÄvÀÄÛ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄUÀ¼À£ÀÄß £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¸À®Ä ±Àæ«Ä¹zÀªÀjUÉ ¥ÉÆæÃvÁìºÀ zsÀ£ÀªÁV ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀ/ ¸ÀA¸ÉÜAiÀÄÄ ElÄÖPÉÆAqÀÄ,
G½zÀ `. 700/-UÀ¼À£ÀÄß ºÀt ¹éÃPÀj¹zÀ 15 ¢£ÀUÀ¼ÉƼÀUÁV ¸ÀA§A¢ü¹zÀ f¯Áè ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¨ÁåAPÀÄUÀ¼À°è AiÀıÀ¹é¤ læ¸ïÖ ºÉÆA¢gÀĪÀ
£ÀUÀgÀ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ SÁvÉUÉ dªÀiÁ ªÀiÁqÀvÀPÀÌzÀÄÝ/ªÀUÁð¬Ä¸ÀvÀPÀÌzÀÄÝ. f¯Áè ¸ÀºÀPÁj ¨ÁåAPÀÄUÀ¼ÀÄ dªÀiÁ DUÀĪÀ ªÀAwUÉAiÀÄ ªÉÆvÀÛªÀ£ÀÄß
¹éÃPÀj¹zÀ 7 ¢£ÀUÀ¼ÉƼÀUÁV C¥ÉPïì ¨ÁåAQ£À°ègÀĪÀ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ læ¸ïÖ SÁvÉUÉ dªÀiÁ ªÀiÁqÀvÀPÀÌzÀÄÝ/ªÀUÁð¬Ä¸ÀvÀPÀÌzÀÄÝ. «¼ÀA§ªÁzÀ°è D
ºÀtªÀ£ÀÄß ElÄÖPÉÆAqÀ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀ/¸ÀA¸ÉÜAiÀĪÀgÀÄ ¨ÁåAQ£À ¤AiÀĪÀÄUÀ¼À ¥ÀæPÁgÀ «¼ÀA§zÀ CªÀ¢üUÉ §rØ ¥ÁªÀw ªÀiÁqÀ®Ä
§zÀÞgÁUÀÄvÁÛgÉ. ¥Àj²µÀÖ eÁw / ¥Àj²µÀÖ ¥ÀAUÀqÀzÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄ `. 110/- ªÀiÁvÀæ ¥ÁªÀw¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ G½zÀ `. 600/-UÀ¼À£ÀÄß ¸ÀPÁðgÀ¢AzÀ
¸ÀºÁAiÀÄzsÀ£ÀªÁV ¥ÁªÀw¸À¯ÁUÀĪÀÅzÀÄ.
9)
MAzÉà PÀÄlÄA§zÀ LªÀgÀÄ CxÀªÁ CzÀQÌAvÀ ºÉaÑUÉ PÀÄlÄA§ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ£ÀÄß AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ£ÁßV £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¹zÀ°è/£À«ÃPÀj¹zÀ°è
CªÀgÀÄ ¥ÁªÀw¸À¨ÉÃPÁzÀ ªÀAwUÉ ºÀtzÀ°è CAzÀgÉ ¥Àæw ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀåjUÉ gÀÆ.700/-gÀ°è ±ÉÃ.15 jAiÀiÁ¬Äw ¥ÀqÉAiÀÄ®Ä CºÀðjgÀÄvÁÛgÉ
ºÁUÀÆ ¥Àj²µÀÖ eÁw / ¥Àj²µÀÖ ¥ÀAUÀqÀzÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀåjUÉ `. 110/-gÀ°è ±ÉÃ.15 jAiÀiÁ¬Äw ¥ÀqÉAiÀÄ®Ä CºÀðjgÀÄvÁÛgÉ.
10) AiÀıÀ¹é¤ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄr ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ £ÉÆÃAzÀtÂAiÀÄ£ÀÄß £À«ÃPÀj¸ÀĪÀ ¸ÀAzÀ¨sÀðzÀ°è PÀqÁØAiÀĪÁV ¥ÀæzsÁ£À CfðzÁgÀgÀÄ ªÀAwUÉAiÀÄ£ÀÄß
¥ÁªÀw¹ £À«ÃPÀj¹zÀ £ÀAvÀgÀªÉà G½zÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ ªÀAwUÉAiÀÄ£ÀÄß ¥ÀqÉzÀÄ £À«ÃPÀj¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ. ¥ÀæzsÁ£À CfðzÁgÀgÀÄ ªÀAwUÉAiÀÄ£ÀÄß
¥ÁªÀw¸ÀzÉà CªÀgÀ PÀÄlA§ ªÀUÀðzÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀåjAzÀ ªÀAwUÉAiÀÄ£ÀÄß ¥ÀqÉzÀÄ CªÀgÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀåvÀé£ÀÄß £À«ÃPÀj¸ÀzÀݰè CAvÀºÀ ¥ÀæPÀgÀtUÀ¼ÀÄ
AiÀıÀ¹é¤ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄr aQvÉìAiÀÄ£ÀÄß ¥ÀqÉAiÀÄ®Ä CºÀðvÉ ºÉÆAzÀĪÀÅ¢®è.
11) £ÀUÀgÀ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÁUÀ®Ä ªÀAiÉÆÃ«ÄwAiÀÄ ¤§ðAzsÀ«gÀĪÀÅ¢®è.
12) £ÀªÀeÁvÀ ²±ÀÄ«£À vÁ¬ÄAiÀÄ ºÉ¸ÀgÀÄ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ PÁqïð£À°èzÀÝgÉ 30 ¢£ÀUÀ¼ÀªÀgÉUÉ vÁ¬Ä ºÉ¸ÀgÀÄ EgÀĪÀ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ PÁrð£À DzsÁgÀzÀ
ªÉÄÃ¯É F AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄrAiÀÄ°è §gÀĪÀ ¸Ë®¨sÀåªÀ£ÀÄß ¥ÀqÉAiÀħºÀÄzÀÄ. 30 ¢£ÀUÀ¼À £ÀAvÀgÀzÀ°è ªÀÄUÀÄ«£À ºÉ¸Àj£ÉÆA¢UÉ D ªÀµÀðzÀ°è
AiÀiÁªÀ ¸ÀAzÀ¨sÀðzÀ°èAiÀÄÆ £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¹PÉÆAqÀÄ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ ¸ÀªÀ®vÀÄÛ ¥ÀqÉAiÀħºÀÄzÀÄ.
13) 2017-18£Éà ¸Á°£À°è PÀ¤µÀ× 20.00 ®PÀë ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄUÀ¼À£ÀÄß £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¸ÀĪÀ UÀÄj ¤UÀ¢ü¥Àr¸À¯ÁVzÉ. ¥Àæw f¯ÉèAiÀÄ ¥Àj¹ÜwAiÀÄ£ÀÄß
UÀªÀÄ£ÀzÀ°èlÄÖ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À ¤§AzsÀPÀgÀÄ ¥Àæw f¯ÉèUÉ ¥ÀævÉåÃPÀ UÀÄj ¤UÀ¢üUÉÆ½¸ÀĪÀAvÉ ¸ÀÆa¸À¯ÁVzÉ. 2016-17£Éà ¸Á°£À°è 2.25
®PÀë ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ£ÁßV £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¹zÀªÀgÉ®ègÀ£ÀÆß 2017-18£Éà ¸Á°UÉ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ £À«ÃPÀj¸ÀĪÀAvÉ PÀæªÀÄ PÉÊUÉÆ¼ÀîvÀPÀÌzÀÄÝ.
¨sÁUÀ 1
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
503
14) 2017-18£Éà ¸Á°UÉ £ÀUÀgÀ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄUÀ¼À£ÀÄß £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¸À®Ä/£À«ÃPÀgÀtPÉÌ ¥ÁægÀA¨sÀzÀ ¢£ÁAPÀ: 01-05-2017 ªÀÄvÀÄÛ PÉÆ£ÉAiÀÄ
¢£ÁAPÀ: 30-06-2017 DVgÀÄvÀÛzÉ.
15) 2017-18£Éà ¸Á°£À°è AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄUÀ¼À£ÀÄß ºÉƸÀzÁV £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¸À®Ä ºÉƸÀzÁV 2017-18£Éà ¸Á°UÉ £ÉÆAzÁªÀuÉ ¥sÁgÀA
MzÀV¸ÀĪÀ vÀ£ÀPÀ 2016-17£Éà ¸Á°£À°è ¸ÀgÀ§gÁdÄ ªÀiÁrgÀĪÀ £ÉÆÃAzÀt ¥sÁgÀAUÀ¼À£ÀÄß ªÀiÁvÀæ G¥ÀAiÉÆÃV¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛÀ UÀÄgÀÄw£À
aÃn MzÀV¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ. ¨ÉÃgÉ AiÀiÁªÀÅzÉà ªÀµÀðUÀ¼À°è ¤ÃrgÀĪÀ ¥sÁgÀAUÀ¼À£ÀÄß G¥ÀAiÉÆÃV¸ÀvÀPÀÌzÀÝ®è. ªÉÆzÀ®Ä 2016-17£Éà ¸Á°£À
¸ÀgÀ§gÁf£À°è G½zÀ ¥sÁgÀAUÀ¼À£ÀÄß G¥ÀAiÉÆÃV¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ, D£ÀAvÀgÀ læ¸ïÖ¤AzÀ 2017-18£Éà ¸Á°UÉ ¸ÀgÀ§gÁdÄ ªÀiÁrzÀ £ÉÆÃAzÀtÂ
¥sÁgÀAUÀ¼À£ÀÄß G¥ÀAiÉÆÃV¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ.
F ªÀµÀðzÀ £ÉÆÃAzÀtÂUÉ ¨ÉÃPÁzÀ CªÀ±ÀåPÀ ¸ÀASÉåAiÀÄ ¥sÁgÀAUÀ¼À£ÀÄß f¯ÉèUÀ¼À ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À G¥À¤§AzsÀPÀgÀÄUÀ¼ÀÄ læ¸ïÖ
PÀbÉÃj¬ÄAzÀ ¥ÀqÉzÀÄ CªÀgÀ ªÁå¦ÛAiÀÄ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À PÁAiÀÄðzÀ²ðUÀ½UÉ ¥sÁgÀA/¥ÀĸÀÛPÀUÀ¼À£ÀÄß ºÀAvÀºÀAvÀªÁV ¥ÀÆgÉʹ ¹éÃPÀÈw
¥ÀqÉAiÀĨÉÃPÀÄ. MªÉÄä ¥ÀÆgÉʹzÀ ¥sÁgÀAUÀ¼À°è ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀzÀªÀgÀÄ ªÀiÁ»wAiÀÄ£ÀÄß ¥ÀÆwðAiÀiÁV £ÀªÀÄÆ¢¹ ªÀAwUÉ ºÀtªÀ£ÀÄß
¨ÁåAQUÉ ¥ÁªÀw ªÀiÁrzÀ £ÀAvÀgÀªÉà ¥ÀÄ£ÀB ¥sÁgÀAUÀ¼À£ÀÄß MzÀV¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ. ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ½UÉ ¥sÁgÀA ¥ÀÆgÉʸÀĪÁUÀ ¥ÀĸÀÛPÀzÀ ¸ÀASÉå
ªÀÄvÀÄÛ AiÀÄĤPï L.r ¸ÀASÉåAiÀÄ£ÀÄß £ÀªÀÄÆ¢¹ PÁAiÀÄðzÀ²ð¬ÄAzÀ ¹éÃPÀÈw ¥ÀqÉzÀÄPÉÆ¼Àî¨ÉÃPÀÄ. F §UÉÎ ¥Àj²Ã®£ÉUÁV ¥ÀævÉåÃPÀ
¥ÀĸÀÛPÀzÀ°è §gÉ¢nÖgÀ¨ÉÃPÀÄ. £À«ÃPÀj¹zÀªÀjUÉ ºÉƸÀzÁV LrPÁqïÀð PÉÆqÀvÀPÀÌzÀ®è, CªÀjUÉ ºÀt¥Á«w¹zÀÝPÉÌ gÀ²Ãw PÉÆlÄÖ,
gÀ²ÃwAiÀİè FUÁUÀ¯Éà PÉÆnÖgÀĪÀ PÁqïð£À AiÀÄĤPï Lr £ÀA§gÀ£ÀÄß £ÀªÀÄÆ¢¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ. ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À PÁAiÀÄðzÀ²ðUÀ¼ÀÄ
£À«ÃPÀgÀtPÁÌV ¨sÀwð ªÀiÁrzÀ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ºÉƸÀzÁV £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¸À®Ä ¨sÀwð ªÀiÁrzÀ ¥sÁgÀAUÀ¼À PÀbÉÃj ¥ÀæwAiÀÄ£ÀÄß qÁmÁ JAnæUÉ
PÀ¼ÀÄ»¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ.
16) 2017-18£Éà ¸Á°£À°è £À«ÃPÀgÀt ªÀiÁqÀÄwÛgÀĪÀ/ ºÉƸÀzÁV £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¸ÀĪÀ ¥ÀæzsÁ£À CfðzÁgÀ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ CªÀgÀ PÀÄlÄA§ ªÀUÀðzÀªÀgÀ
DzsÁgÀ ¸ÀASÉåAiÀÄ£ÀÄß ¥ÀævÉåÃPÀªÁV £ÉÆÃAzÀt ¥sÁgÀA/ £À«ÃPÀgÀt gÀ¹Ã¢AiÀÄ ªÉÄÃ¯É ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À PÁAiÀÄðzÀ²ðAiÀĪÀgÀÄ
£ÀªÀÄÆ¢¸ÀvÀPÀÌzÀÄÝ. 2017-18£Éà ¸Á°¤AzÀ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ AiÉÆÃd£ÉUÉ DzsÁgï ¸ÀASÉåAiÀÄ£ÀÄß £ÀªÀÄÆ¢¸ÀĪÀÅzÀÄ PÀqÁØAiÀĪÁVgÀÄvÀÛzÉ. 2016-17£ÉÃ
¸Á°£À ¥sÁgÀAUÀ¼À£ÀÄß G¥ÀAiÉÆÃV¸ÀĪÀ ¸ÀAzÀ¨sÀðzÀ°èAiÀÄÆ J¯Áè ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ DzsÁgï ¸ÀASÉåAiÀÄ£ÀÄß CªÀgÀ ºÉ¸Àj£À ªÀÄÄAzÉ £ÀªÀÄÆ¢¸ÀvÀPÀÌzÀÄÝ.
17) CºÀð ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼ÀÄ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄUÀ½AzÀ ¤UÀ¢üvÀ ªÁ¶ðPÀ ªÀAwUÉ ºÀt ¥ÀqÉzÀÄ ¸ÀAWÀzÀ ºÀt ¹éÃPÀÈw gÀ²Ã¢AiÀÄ£ÀÄß PÉÆqÀ¨ÉÃPÀÄ.
¥sÁgÀA£À°è ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ£ÀÄß £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¹zÀ ¢£ÁAPÀªÀ£ÀÄß vÀ¥ÀàzÉ £ÀªÀÄÆ¢¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ. £ÉÆÃAzÀt ¥sÁgÀA£À PɼÀ¨sÁUÀªÀ£ÀÄß ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀåjUÉ
PÉÆqÀ¨ÉÃPÀÄ. ªÉÄïÁãUÀªÀ£ÀÄß qÁmÁ JAnæ ªÀiÁqÀ®Ä ¸ÀA§A¢ü¹zÀ f¯ÉèAiÀÄ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À G¥À¤§AzsÀPÀjUÉ ¥Àæw wAUÀ¼À
PÉÆ£ÉAiÀÄ°è ¸ÀAUÀ滹zÀ ªÀAwUÉAiÀÄ ºÀtªÀ£ÀÄß ¨ÁåAQUÉ dªÉÄ ªÀiÁr gÀ²Ã¢AiÉÆA¢UÉ PÀ¼ÀÄ»¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ DVAzÁUÉÎ qÁmÁ JAnæ
ªÀiÁqÀ®Ä C£ÀÄPÀÆ®ªÁUÀĪÀAvÉ ¥ÀæwwAUÀ¼À PÉÆ£ÉAiÀÄ°è ºÉÆ¸À £ÉÆÃAzÀt Cfð/£À«ÃPÀgÀtzÀ «ªÀgÀUÀ¼À£ÀÄß CAzÀgÉ ºÉƸÀ CfðUÀ¼À°è
¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄUÀ¼À ¥ÉÆÃmÉÆÃ CAn¹, J¯Áè «ªÀgÀUÀ¼ÉÆA¢UÉ ºÉƸÀzÁV £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¹zÀ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ £À«ÃPÀgÀtªÁzÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄUÀ¼À
vÀBSÉÛAiÉÆA¢UÉ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À G¥À¤§AzsÀPÀgÀ PÀbÉÃjUÉ ¤Ãr ¹éÃPÀÈw ¥ÀqÉAiÀĨÉÃPÀÄ.
18) 2017-18£Éà ¸Á°£À°è ºÉƸÀzÁV £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¸ÀĪÀªÀjUÉ ºÉƸÀ PÁqÀÄðUÀ¼À£ÀÄß PÉÆqÀ¯ÁUÀĪÀÅzÀÄ. ¥ÀæzsÁ£À CfðzÁgÀgÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ CªÀgÀ
PÀÄlÄA§zÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ JgÀqÀÄ ¨sÁªÀavÀæUÀ¼À£ÀÄß ¤ÃqÀ¨ÉÃPÀÄ. PÀbÉÃj ¥Àæw ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ ¥ÀæwAiÀÄ »A¨sÁUÀzÀ°è Cfð ¥sÁgÀA£À°è PÀæªÀÄ
¸ÀASÉå C£ÀÄUÀÄtªÁV ¥ÉÆÃmÉÆÃUÀ¼À£ÀÄß CAn¹ ¨sÁªÀavÀæzÀ PɼÀUÉ CªÀgÀ ºÉ¸ÀgÀ£ÀÄß §gÉAiÀĨÉÃPÀÄ.
19) FUÁUÀ¯Éà PÁqïð ºÉÆA¢gÀĪÀªÀgÀÄ £À«ÃPÀgÀt ¸ÀAzÀ¨sÀðzÀ°è ªÀAwUÉ vÀÄA© ºÉƸÀzÁV ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ£ÀÄß ¸ÉÃj¸À®Ä §AiÀĹzÀݰè, ¥ÀæzsÁ£À
CfðzÁgÀjUÉ ¤ÃrgÀĪÀ PÁrð£À°è ºÉƸÀ ªÀåQÛAiÀÄ ªÀiÁºÀwAiÀÄ£ÀÄß ªÀÄÄR¥ÀÄlzÀ°è §gÉzÀÄ »A§¢AiÀÄ°è ¥ÉÆÃmÉÆÃ CAn¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ
ºÁUÀÆ Dåqï-D£ï PÁqïð£À°è ºÉƸÀzÁV ¸ÉÃ¥ÀðqÉUÉÆAqÀ ªÀåQÛAiÀÄ ªÀiÁ»wAiÀÄ£ÀÄß ªÀÄÄR¥ÀÄlzÀ°è §gÉzÀÄ »A§¢AiÀÄ°è ¥ÉÆÃmÉÆÃ
CAn¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ D Dåqï-D£ï PÁqïð£ÀÄß qÁmÁ JAnæUÉ ¸À°è¸ÀvÀPÀÌzÀÄÝ.
20) 2017-18£Éà ¸Á°£À°è ºÉƸÀzÁV £ÉÆÃAzÀtÂ/£À«ÃPÀgÀtUÉÆAqÀ/¸ÉÃ¥ÀðqÉAiÀiÁzÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄUÀ½UÉ ¸ÀAWÀªÀÅ ªÁ¶ðPÀ ªÀAwUÉ ºÀt ¥ÀqÉzÀÄ
¤ÃrgÀĪÀ ¹éÃPÀÈw gÀ²Ã¢AiÀÄ£ÀÄß ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ºÉƸÀ £ÉÆÃAzÀt ¥sÁgÀA (L.r. PÁqïð) C£ÀÄß ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄ 2017-18£Éà ¸Á°£À CAvÀåzÀªÀgÉUÉ
¸ÀÄgÀQëvÀªÁV ElÄÖPÉÆ¼Àî¨ÉÃPÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ ¸Ë®¨sÀåªÀ£ÀÄß ¥ÀqÉAiÀÄĪÀ ¸ÀAzÀ¨sÀðzÀ°è gÀ²Ã¢AiÀÄ£ÀÄß læ¸ïÖ¤AzÀ CAVÃPÀj¸À®àlÖ
D¸ÀàvÉæUÀ½UÉ PÀqÁØAiÀĪÁV ºÁdgÀÄ¥Àr¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ JA§ w½ªÀ½PÉAiÀÄ£ÀÄß ¸ÀAWÀªÀÅ £ÉÆAzÁ¬ÄvÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀåjUÉ w½¸ÀvÀPÀÌzÀÄÝ.
21) »A¢£À ªÀµÀðUÀ¼À°è £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¹zÀÝ J¯Áè AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀåjUÀÆ AiÀÄÆ¤Pï Lr ¤Ãr ªÀiÁ»wAiÀÄ£ÀÄß AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ªÉ¨ï¸ÉÊmï
www.yeshasvini.kar.nic.in £À°è C¼ÀªÀr¸À¯ÁVzÉ. AiÀiÁªÀÅzÉà PÁgÀt¢AzÀ »A¢£À ªÀµÀðUÀ¼À°è £ÉÆAzÁ¬Ä¹PÉÆAqÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄ
£À«ÃPÀj¹PÉÆ¼Àî¢zÀݰè, CAvÀºÀªÀgÀÄ F ªÀµÀð ºÉƸÀzÁV PÁqïð ¥ÀqÉAiÀħºÀÄzÀÄ.
22) £ÀUÀgÀ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼ÀÄ CªÀgÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀåjUÉ ¸Á® «vÀj¸ÀĪÀ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ EvÀgÉ ¸ÀAzÀ¨sÀðzÀ°è ºÀt ¥ÁªÀw ªÀiÁqÀĪÁUÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ
ªÀÄ£ÀªÉǰ¹ CªÀgÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ CªÀgÀ PÀÄlÄA§zÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ£ÀÄß AiÀıÀ¹é¤ £ÀUÀgÀ ¸ÀºÀPÁjUÀ¼À DgÉÆÃUÀå gÀPÀëuÁ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄr £ÉÆÃAzÀtÂ
ªÀiÁqÀ¨ÉÃPÀÄ. ¥ÀæzsÁ£À CfðzÁgÀgÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ CªÀgÀ PÀÄlÄA§zÀ AiÀiÁªÀÅzÉà ¸ÀzÀ¸Àå£ÀÄ ¸ÀPÁðj £ËPÀgÀ£ÁV CxÀªÁ SÁ¸ÀV PÀA¥À¤AiÀİè
PÁAiÀÄð¤ªÀð»¸ÀÄwÛzÀÄÝ CxÀªÁ ¨ÉÃgÉ AiÀiÁªÀÅzÉà DgÉÆÃUÀå «ªÀiÁ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ ¸Ë®¨sÀåPÉÌ CºÀð£ÁVzÀݰè, CAvÀºÀªÀgÀ£ÀÄß AiÀıÀ¹é¤
AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ ¥sÀ¯Á£ÀĨsÀ«AiÀiÁV £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¸À¨ÁgÀzÀÄ. DzÁUÀÆå AiÀiÁªÀÅzÉà PÁgÀtPÁÌV £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¹zÀgÀÆ CªÀgÀÄ AiÀıÀ¹é¤
AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ ¸Ë®¨sÀå ¥ÀqÉAiÀÄ®Ä CºÀðgÁUÀĪÀÅ¢®è.
23) gÁdåzÀ°è PÉ®ªÀÅ ºÁ®Ä GvÁàzÀPÀgÀ MPÀÆÌlUÀ¼ÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ PÉ®ªÀÅ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀ/¸ÀA¸ÉÜUÀ¼ÀÄ CªÀÅUÀ¼À ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ªÀAwUÉAiÀİè
¨sÁUÀ±ÀB ºÀtªÀ£ÀÄß ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀzÀ ¸ÀéAvÀ §AqÀªÁ¼À¢AzÀ ¨sÀj¸ÀÄwÛªÉ. F ¥ÀzÀÞwAiÀÄ£ÀÄß gÁdåzÀ J¯Áè ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀ ¸ÀA¸ÉÜUÀ¼ÀÆ
PÀÆqÀ C£ÀĸÀj¸ÀĪÀAvÉ ¥ÉÆæÃvÁ컸À®Ä ¸ÀÆa¸À¯ÁVzÉ.
504
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
¨sÁUÀ 1
24) 2017-18£Éà ¸Á°£À°è ºÉƸÀzÁV/£À«ÃPÀgÀt ªÀiÁrPÉÆ¼ÀÄîªÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄUÀ¼ÀÄ ¸ÀļÀÄî ªÀiÁ»w ªÀÄvÀÄÛ CPÀæªÀĪÁV ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ CxÀªÁ
¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À vÀ¦à¤AzÁV DVzÀÝgÉ UÉÆwÛzÉÆÝà CxÀªÁ UÉÆwÛ®èzÉAiÉÆÃ £ÉÆÃAzÀt ºÉÆA¢zÀÝgÉ CAvÀºÀ ªÀåQÛUÀ¼ÀÄ AiÀıÀ¹é¤
AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄrAiÀÄ°è ¸Ë®¨sÀåªÀ£ÀÄß ¥ÀqÉAiÀÄ®Ä C£ÀºÀðgÀÄ ºÁUÀÆ ¥ÁªÀw¹zÀ ªÀAwUÉ ºÀtªÀ£ÀÄß ªÀÄÄlÄÖUÉÆÃ®Ä ºÁQPÉÆ¼Àî¯ÁUÀĪÀÅzÀÄ
ºÁUÉAiÉÄà CAvÀºÀ ¥sÀ¯Á£ÀĨsÀ«UÀ¼À AiÀıÀ¹é¤ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀåvÀé vÀAvÁ£Éà gÀzÀÄÝUÉÆ¼ÀÄîvÀÛzÉ, ¥ÀævÉåÃPÀ gÀzÀÝw DzÉñÀzÀ CªÀ±ÀåPÀvÉ
EgÀĪÀÅ¢®è.
25) AiÀıÀ¹é¤ £ÀUÀgÀ ¸ÀºÀPÁjUÀ¼À DgÉÆÃUÀå gÀPÀëuÁ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄrAiÀİè£À ªÀiÁ»wAiÀģɯ߼ÀUÉÆAqÀ ¨ÉÆæÃZÀgïUÀ¼À£ÀÄß ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼ÀÄ
2017-18£Éà ¸Á°UÉ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄrAiÀÄ°è ºÉÆ¸ÀzÁV £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¸ÀĪÀ/£À«ÃPÀgÀtUÉÆ¼ÀÄîªÀ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ PÁqïð ºÉÆA¢gÀĪÀ ¥ÀæzsÁ£À
CfðzÁgÀjUÉ PÉÆqÀvÀPÀÌzÀÄÝ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¨ÉÆæÃZÀgÀ£ÀÄß ¤ÃrgÀĪÀ §UÉÎ ¹éÃPÀÈwAiÀÄ£ÀÄß ¥ÀqÉzÀÄ ¸ÀAWÀzÀªÀgÀÄ ElÄÖPÉÆ¼ÀîvÀPÀÌzÀÄÝ. ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄ
¨ÉÆæÃZÀgÀ£ÀÄß PÉý PÀqÁØAiÀĪÁV ¥ÀqÉAiÀÄvÀPÀÌzÀÄÝ.
26) F PɼÀPÀAqÀAvÉ ¸Ë®¨sÀåUÀ¼À£ÀÄß AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀåjUÉ MzÀV¸À¯ÁUÀĪÀÅzÀÄ.
A. ªÁqïðUÀ¼À ¸Ë®¨sÀå : d£ÀgÀ¯ï ªÁqïð£À ¸Ë®¨sÀåzÀ°è AiÀıÀ¹é¤ £ÉmïªÀPïð D¸ÀàvÉæUÀ¼À°è C£ÀĪÀÄw¹zÀ 823 aQvÉìUÀ¼À£ÀÄß
MzÀV¸À¯ÁUÀĪÀÅzÀÄ. AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄ ¸ÉàµÀ¯ï ªÁqïð£À°è aQvÉì ¥ÀqÉAiÀÄ®Ä EaѹzÀgÉ CAvÀºÀ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄ DAiÀiÁ
D¸ÀàvÉæUÀ¼ÀÄ ¸ÉàµÀ¯ï ªÁqïð£À°è aQvÉìUÉ ¤UÀ¢ü¥Àr¸ÀĪÀ ªÉZÀѪÀ£ÀÄß AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ gÉÊvÀgÀ DgÉÆÃUÀå gÀPÀëuÁ
AiÉÆÃd£É¬ÄAzÀ D¸ÀàvÉæUÉ zÉÆgÀPÀĪÀ aQvÁì ªÉZÀѪÀ£ÀÄß PÀ¼ÉzÀÄ G½zÀ ªÉÆvÀÛªÀ£ÀÄß ¥ÁªÀw¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ.
B. jAiÀiÁ¬Äw zÀgÀzÀ ºÉÆgÀgÉÆÃV aQvÉì : 2017-18£Éà ¸Á°£À°èAiÀÄÆ jAiÀiÁ¬Äw zÀgÀzÀ°è CAzÀgÉ `. 100/- ¸ÁªÀiÁ£Àå
ºÉÆgÀgÉÆÃV vÀ¥Á¸ÀuÉUÉ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄ ¥ÁªÀw¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ. «±ÉõÀ ºÉÆgÀgÉÆÃV vÀ¥Á¸ÀuÉUÉ `. 200/- ¥ÁªÀw¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ
ªÀÄvÀÄÛ CªÀgÀÄ vÀ¥Á¸ÀuÉUÁV ¥ÁªÀw¹zÀ gÀ²ÃwAiÀÄ ªÉÄÃ¯É 3 wAUÀ¼ÀªÀgÉUÉ ªÉÄÃ¯É ºÉýzÀ ºÉÆgÀgÉÆÃV aQvÉìUÀ¼À£ÀÄß
GavÀªÁV ¥ÀqÉAiÀħºÀÄzÀÄ.
C. QèäPÀ¯ï E£Éé¹ÖUÉõÀ£ï : 2017-18£Éà ¸Á°£À°èAiÀÄÆ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄ ±Éà 25 jAiÀiÁ¬Äw zÀgÀzÀ°è £ÉmïªÀPïð
D¸ÀàvÉæUÀ¼À°è Qè¤PÀ¯ï ªÀÄvÀÄÛ EvÀgÉ vÀ¥Á¸ÀuÉUÀ¼À£ÀÄß (Clinical & other Investigation) ¥ÀqÉAiÀħºÀÄzÀÄ.
D. UÀjµÀÖ ªÉÆvÀÛzÀ aQvÉì : DAiÀiÁ ªÀµÀðzÀ°è MAzÀÄ ¨Áj zÁR¯ÁzÀgÉ `.1.75 ®PÀëUÀ¼ÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ CzÉà ªÀµÀð C£ÉÃPÀ ¸Áj
D¸ÀàvÉæUÉ zÁR¯ÁzÀgÉ gÀÆ. 2.50 ®PÀëUÀ¼ÀÄ.
27)
2017-18£Éà ¸Á°£À°è PÉ®ªÀÅ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀÄ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ ªÀAwUÉ ºÀtªÀ£ÀÄß ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀPÉÌ ¥ÁªÀw ªÀiÁr, ¥ÉÆÃmÉÆÃ EvÁå¢ CªÀ±ÀåPÀ
zÁR¯ÉUÀ¼À£ÀÄß MzÀV¸ÀzÉ EzÀÝgÉ, F PÁgÀt¢AzÀ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀzÀ°è ¨ÁQ G½zÀ ªÀAwUÉAiÀÄ ªÉÆvÀÛªÀ£ÀÄß ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀªÀÅ AiÀıÀ¹é¤
læ¸ïÖUÉ ¤ÃrzÀ zÉÃtÂUÉAiÉÄAzÀÄ ¥ÀjUÀt¹, læ¸ïÖ£À SÁvÉUÉ dªÀiÁªÀiÁqÀvÀPÀÌzÀÄÝ.
28)
AiÀıÀ¹é¤ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄr ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀågÀ£ÀÄß £ÉÆÃAzÁ¬Ä¸ÀĪÀ CªÀ¢üAiÀÄÄ ªÀÄÄVzÀ PÀÆqÀ¯ÉÃ, J¯Áè f¯Áè ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À G¥À
¤§AzsÀPÀgÀÄUÀ¼ÀÄ DAiÀiÁ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ½UÉ «vÀj¹gÀĪÀ DzÀgÉ §¼ÀPÉ DUÀzÉà EgÀĪÀ £ÉÆÃAzÀt ¥sÁgÀAUÀ¼ÀÄ PÀqÁØAiÀĪÁV 7
¢£ÀUÀ¼ÉƼÀUÁV ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ½AzÀ ªÁ¥À¸ÀÄì ¥ÀqÉzÀÄPÉÆ¼ÀîvÀPÀÌzÀÄÝ. ªÀÄÄAzÀĪÀgÉzÀÄ ¸ÀzÀ¸ÀåjAzÀ ¸ÀAUÀ滹gÀĪÀ ªÀAwUÉAiÀÄ ªÉÆvÀÛªÀ£ÀÄß
¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À PÁAiÀÄðzÀ²ðUÀ¼ÀÄ DAiÀiÁ r¹¹ ¨ÁåAQ£À°ègÀĪÀ SÁvÉUÉ dªÀiÁ ªÀiÁrgÀĪÀ §UÉÎ SÁvÀj¥Àr¹PÉÆ¼ÀîvÀPÀÌzÀÄÝ.
29)
2016-17£Éà ¸Á°£À AiÀıÀ¹é¤ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ CªÀ¢üAiÀÄÄ ¢£ÁAPÀ: 01-06-2016 jAzÀ ¥ÁægÀA¨sÀªÁV 31-05-2017PÉÌ ªÀÄÄVAiÀÄÄvÀÛzÉ.
DzÀ PÁgÀt F DzÉñÀzÀ£ÀéAiÀÄ ºÉƸÀzÁV £ÉÆÃAzÀtÂAiÀiÁUÀĪÀ/¸ÉÃ¥ÀðqÉAiÀiÁUÀĪÀ ¥sÀ¯Á£ÀĨsÀ«UÀ¼ÀÄ AiÀıÀ¹é¤ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ
¸Ë®¨sÀåªÀ£ÀÄß ¢£ÁAPÀ:01-06-2017 jAzÀ eÁjUÉ §gÀĪÀAvÉ ªÀiÁvÀæ ¥ÀqÉAiÀÄ®Ä CºÀðgÁUÀÄvÁÛgÉ. DzÀÝjAzÀ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼ÀÄ
¤ÃqÀĪÀ ªÀAwUÉ ºÀt ¹éÃPÀÈw gÀ²Ã¢/¥sÀ¯Á£ÀĨsÀ«UÉ ¤ÃqÀĪÀ £ÉÆÃAzÀt £ÀªÀÄÆ£É ¨sÁUÀzÀ ¥ÀæwAiÀİè F ªÉÄð£À CA±ÀªÀ£ÀÄß ¸ÀéµÀÖªÁV
§gÉAiÀĨÉÃPÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ w¼ÀĪÀ½PÉAiÀÄ£ÀÄß PÀÆqÀ ¥sÀ¯Á£ÀĨsÀ«UÉ ¤ÃqÀ¨ÉÃPÀÄ.
AiÀıÀ¹é¤ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ ªÀiÁUÀð¸ÀÆaUÀ¼À §UÉÎ w¼ÀĪÀ½PÉ ¤ÃqÀ®Ä DAiÀiÁ ¥ÁæAvÀzÀ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À dAn ¤§AzsÀPÀgÀÄ
CªÀgÀ ªÁå¦ÛAiÀÄ E¯ÁSÁ¢üPÁjUÀ¼À, J¯Áè ¥ÀlÖt ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ EvÀgÉ ¥ÀæªÀÄÄR ¥ÀlÖt ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀ/¸ÀA¸ÉÜUÀ¼À
ªÀÄÄRå PÁAiÀÄð¤ªÁðºÀuÁ¢üPÁjUÀ¼À ¸À¨sÉAiÀÄ£ÀÄß ¥ÁæAvÀ, f¯Áè ºÁUÀÆ vÁ®ÆèPÀÄ ªÀÄlÖzÀ°è ¤ªÀð»¸À®Ä ¸ÀÆa¹zÉ. £ÀAvÀgÀ
¢£ÁAPÀ:30-04-2017 gÉÆ¼ÀUÉ J¯Áè f¯Áè ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À G¥À¤§AzsÀPÀgÀÄUÀ¼ÀÄ CªÀgÀ f¯ÉèAiÀÄ J¯Áè £ÀUÀgÀ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À
CzsÀåPÀëgÀ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ PÁAiÀÄðzÀ²ðAiÀĪÀgÀ, ¸Àé¸ÀºÁAiÀÄ UÀÄA¥ÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¸ÀA§A¢ü¹zÀ E¯ÁSÉUÀ¼À C¢üPÁjUÀ¼À ¸À¨sÉ PÀgÉzÀÄ PÁAiÀiÁðUÁgÀ
K¥Àðr¹ AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ ªÀiÁUÀð¸ÀÆa ¤AiÀĪÀÄUÀ¼ÀÄ, Ew«ÄwUÀ¼ÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ AiÉÆÃd£É¬ÄAzÀ ¸Ë®¨sÀå ¥ÀqÉAiÀÄĪÀªÀgÀ §UÉÎ ªÀiÁ»wAiÀÄ£ÀÄß
¤Ãr, vÉUÉzÀÄPÉÆAqÀ PÀæªÀÄzÀ §UÉÎ ªÀgÀ¢AiÀÄ£ÀÄß ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ ¸ÀAWÀUÀ¼À ¤§AzsÀPÀjUÉ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¸ÀPÁðgÀPÉÌ ¸À°è¸À®Ä ¸ÀÆa¸À¯ÁVzÉ.
PR - 139
SC - 25
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥Á®gÀ DeÁÕ£ÀĸÁgÀ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ CªÀgÀ ºÉ¸Àj£À°è,
JA ªÉAPÀl¸Áé«Ä
«±ÉõÀ PÀvÀðªÁå¢üPÁj ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¥ÀzÀ¤«ÄvÀÛ
¸ÀPÁðgÀzÀ G¥À PÁAiÀÄðzÀ²ð.
¸ÀºÀPÁgÀ E¯ÁS
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
505
¨sÁUÀ 1
²PÀët ¸ÀaªÁ®AiÀÄ
«µÀAiÀÄ :
CAVÃPÀÈvÀ ªÁtÂdå ªÀÄvÀÄÛ UÀtPÀ AiÀÄAvÀæ ±Á¯ÉUÀ¼À°è ¨ÉÆÃ¢ü¸ÀÄwÛgÀĪÀ UÀtPÀAiÀÄAvÀæ ²PÀëtzÀ ¥ÀjµÀÌøvÀ
¥ÀoÀåPÀæªÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¥ÀoÀå¥ÀĸÀÛPÀUÀ¼À C£ÀÄªÉÆÃzÀ£É PÀÄjvÀÄ.
NzÀ¯ÁVzÉ: 1.
¤zÉÃð±ÀPÀgÀÄ(¥ËæqsÀ²PÀët), DAiÀÄÄPÀÛgÀ PÀbÉÃj, ¸ÁªÀðd¤PÀ ²PÀët E¯ÁSÉ, ¨ÉAUÀ¼ÀÆgÀÄ EªÀgÀ ¥Àæ¸ÁÛªÀ£É
¸ÀASÉå:ªÁ²/EvÀgÉ 43/ 2015-16 ¢£ÁAPÀ:18.01.2017.
2.
¸ÀPÁðgÀzÀ DzÉñÀ ¸ÀASÉå:Er 02 J¯ï¹E 2006 ¢£ÁAPÀ:30.12.2006.
3.
¸ÀPÁðgÀzÀ DzÉñÀ ¸ÀASÉå:Er 38 J¯ï¹E 2008 ¢£ÁAPÀ:10.02.2009.
¥Àæ¸ÁÛªÀ£É : -
ªÉÄÃ¯É NzÀ¯ÁzÀ PÀæªÀiÁAPÀ[2]gÀ ¸ÀPÁðgÀzÀ DzÉñÀzÀ°è ¨ÉgÀ¼ÀZÀÄÑ/²ÃWÀæ°¦ «µÀAiÀÄzÀ eÉÆvÉUÉ UÀtPÀ AiÀÄAvÀæ ²PÀëtªÀ£ÀÄß µÀgÀvÀÄÛUÀ¼À£ÀéAiÀÄ
C¼ÀªÀr¹PÉÆ¼Àî®Ä ºÁUÀÆ UÀtPÀ AiÀÄAvÀæ ¥ÀjÃPÉëAiÀÄ£ÀÄß PÀ£ÁðlPÀ ¥ËæqsÀ²PÀët ¥ÀjÃPÁë ªÀÄAqÀ½AiÀÄÄ £ÀqɸÀ®Ä C£ÀĪÀÄw ¤ÃqÀ¯ÁVgÀÄvÀÛzÉ,
PÀæªÀiÁAPÀ[3]gÀ ¸ÀPÀðgÀzÀ DzÉñÀzÀ°è ¥ÀoÁåªÀ½ ¸À«ÄwAiÀÄÄ vÀAiÀiÁj¹gÀĪÀ UÀtPÀ AiÀÄAvÀæ ²PÀëtzÀ ¥ÀoÀåªÀ£ÀÄß ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¥ÀoÀåPÀæªÀĪÀ£ÀÄß
C£ÀÄªÉÆÃ¢¸À¯ÁVgÀÄvÀÛzÉ, ºÁ° eÁjAiÀİègÀĪÀ UÀtPÀ AiÀÄAvÀæ ²PÀëtzÀ ¥ÀoÀåPÀæªÀÄ¢AzÀ ¥Àæ¸ÀÄÛvÀ ¥Àj¹ÜwUÉ «zÁåyðUÀ½UÉ ºÉZÀÄÑ
G¥ÀAiÀÄÄPÀÛªÁUÀÄwÛ®èªÉAzÀÄ w½¹ ¤zÉÃð±ÀPÀgÀÄ(¥ËæqsÀ²PÀët), DAiÀÄÄPÀÛgÀ PÀbÉÃj, ¸ÁªÀðd¤PÀ ²PÀët E¯ÁSÉ, ¨ÉAUÀ¼ÀÆgÀÄ gÀªÀgÀÄ PÀæªÀiÁAPÀ[1]gÀ
CAVÃPÀÈvÀ ªÁtÂdå ªÀÄvÀÄÛ UÀtPÀ AiÀÄAvÀæ ±Á¯ÉUÀ¼À°è ¨ÉÆÃ¢ü¸ÀÄwÛgÀĪÀ UÀtPÀAiÀÄAvÀæ ²PÀëtzÀ ¥ÀjµÀÌøvÀ ¥ÀoÀåPÀæªÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¥ÀoÀå¥ÀĸÀÛPÀUÀ¼À PÀgÀqÀ£ÀÄß
C£ÀÄªÉÆÃzÀ£ÉUÉ PÉÆÃjgÀÄvÁÛgÉ, ¤zÉÃð±ÀPÀgÀ ¥Àæ¸ÁÛªÀ£ÉAiÀÄ£ÀÄß ¥Àj²Ã°¹, CzÀgÀAvÉ F PɼÀPÀAqÀ DzÉñÀ.
¸ÀPÁðj DzÉñÀ ¸ÀASÉå:Er 34 J¸ïNºÉZï 2017, ¨ÉAUÀ¼ÀÆgÀÄ, ¢£ÁAPÀ: 18£Éà ªÀiÁZïð 2017
¥Àæ¸ÁÛªÀ£ÉAiÀÄ°è «ªÀj¹gÀĪÀ CA±ÀUÀ¼À »£É߯ÉAiÀİè gÁdåzÀ CAVÃPÀÈvÀ ªÁtÂdå ªÀÄvÀÄÛ UÀtPÀ AiÀÄAvÀæ ±Á¯ÉUÀ¼À°è ¨ÉÆÃ¢ü¸ÀÄwÛgÀĪÀ
UÀtPÀAiÀÄAvÀæ ²PÀëtzÀ «µÀAiÀÄUÀ¼ÁzÀ PÀA¥ÀÆålgï UÁæ¦üPïì ªÀÄvÀÄÛ PÀA¥ÀÆålgï DmÉÆÃªÉÄõÀ£ï ¥ÀoÀåPÀæªÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¥ÀoÀå¥ÀĸÀÛPÀzÀ PÀgÀqÀ£ÀÄß ¸ÀPÁðgÀªÀÅ
C£ÀÄªÉÆÃ¢¹zÉ.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥Á®gÀ DeÁÕ£ÀĸÁgÀ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ CªÀgÀ ºÉ¸Àj£À°è,
«.n.gÁd岿Ã
¸ÀPÁðgÀzÀ C¢üãÀ PÁAiÀÄðzÀ²ð,
²PÀët E¯ÁSÉ. [¥ËæqsÀ²PÀët].
¥ÀjµÀÌøvÀ ¥ÀoÀåªÀ¸ÀÄÛ«£ÀAvÉ
¹zÀÝ¥Àr¹gÀĪÀ UÀtPÀAiÀÄAvÀæ
²PÀët ¥ÀoÀå¥ÀĸÀÛPÀ
D¦üøï DmÉÆÃªÉÄñÀ£ï
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
506
¨sÁUÀ 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER- 1 COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS
Introduction
Computer - applications
Advantages of computer
Disadvantages of computer
Parts of computer
Hardware and software
Programming languages
Generations of computer.
History of computer
Classification of computer
Setting up and working of a computer
CHAPTER – 2 OPERATING SYSTEM
Introduction
Introduction to windows 7
Features of windows 7
The desktop
Computer screen
Quick search
Disk management
Burning data to a cd
Internet security
Windows sidebar
Gadgets
Different buttons used in windows
CHAPTER -3 FREE SOFTWARE
Calculator
Notepad
Paint brush
The ribbon
How to save a cutout
Word pad
CHAPTER - 4 WORD 2007
The office button
Parts of ms word 2007 window
The ribbon
Quick access & status bar
Home tab
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
507
¨sÁUÀ 1
Insert tab
Page layout tab
Reference tab
Create a table of contents
Insert table of figures
Mailings tab
Review tab
View tab
CHAPTER - 5 EXCEL 2007
Introduction
Ms excel window
Office button options:
Home tab
Insert tab
Page layout tab
Formulas tab
Text functions:
Data tab
Review tab
View tab
CHAPTER - 6 POWERPOINT 2007
Introduction
The office logo
The home tab
Insert tab
Design tab
Animations tab
Slide show tab
Review tab
View tab
Applying theme:
Layout
Slide transitions
Formatting slide design
Master slides
Animation schemes
Layout
Rehearse timing
CHAPTER – 7 INTERNET
Introduction
Application of internet
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
508
¨sÁUÀ 1
Advantages of internet
Network:
Browsing software:
Modem (modulator and demodulator):
Isp’s (internet service providers):
What is an e-mail ?
What is a website?
Web page:
Networking
Expansions
E-mail (electronic mail ) :
Surfing or browsing
Download
Search for relevant information
Book tickets
Shop online
Make friends
8. E banking
10. Online freelancer
Disadvantages of the internet
CHAPTER – 8 NUDI
CHAPTER -9 ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE
Introduction to tally erp.9
Tally user classification
Accounting
Basic accounting terms
Double entry systems of accounting :
Get started with tally:
Accounts group
Voucher:-
Reports in tally
Financial statements :
Budgets
Shortcut Keys
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
509
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS
COMPUTER
FUNDAMENTALS
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
510
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS
CHAPTER- 1
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS
INTRODUCTION
Are you new to computers? Do you wonder what they do and why you would want to use one?
This article gives an overview of computers: what they are, the different types, and what you can do
with them.
What are Computers?
Computers are machines that perform tasks or calculations according to a set of instructions, or
programs. The first fully electronic computers, introduced in the 1940s, were huge machines that
required teams of people to operate. Compared to those early machines, today's computers are amazing.
Not only they are thousands times faster, they can fit on your desk, in on your lap, or even in your
pocket.
Computers work through an interaction of Hardware and Software. Hardware refers to the
physical parts of a computer that you can see and touch, including the case and everything inside it. The
most important piece of hardware is a tiny rectangular chip inside your computer called the Central
Processing Unit (CPU), or microprocessor. It is called as "brain of computer”—the part that translates
instructions and performs calculations. Hardware items such as your monitor, keyboard, mouse, printer,
and other items are often called hardware devices. The set of programs or instructions given to the
computer to carry out a task is called program. The software is classified into System software and
Application software. The System software acts as a bridge between user and computer hardware. The
Word Processing program that you can use to write letters on your computer is a type of Application
Software. The Operating System (OS) is a System software that manages your computer and the
devices connected to it. Two well-known operating systems are Windows and Macintosh operating
system. Your computer uses the Windows operating system.
COMPUTER - APPLICATIONS
Following list demonstrates the various applications of Computers.
Business: The computer's characteristics such as high speed of calculation, diligence, accuracy,
reliability, or versatility has made it an integrated part in all business organizations.
Banking: Today Banking is totally dependent on computer for online transactions and other
calculations.
Insurance: Insurance companies are keeping all records up to date with the help of computer. The
Insurance Companies, Finance houses and Stock broking firms are widely using computers for their
concerns. Even these companies are transacting online.
Education The computer has provided a lot of facilities in the Education System.
Marketing With computers, advertising professionals create art and graphics, write and revise
copy, and print and disseminate ads with the goal of selling more products.
Health Care: Computers have become important part in all medical fields.
Engineering Design: Computers are widely used in engineering purposes.
Military Computers are largely used in defense. Modern tanks, missiles, weapons etc. employ
computerized control systems.
Communication: Communication means to convey a message, an idea, a picture or speech that is
received and understood clearly and correctly by the person for whom it is meant.
Government Applications: Computers play an important role in government applications like
sales tax department, income tax department and computerization of voters list, etc.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
511
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS
ADVANTAGES OF COMPUTER
1. Speed: It performs all the calculation within nano-seconds. (1/billionth part of a second.)
2. Accuracy: Computer can do all calculations without any error and gives 100% correct results.
3. Large Storage Capacity: It stores huge quantity of data in its memory.
4. Diligence: Computer will not get tired even if it works for 24 hours continuously.
5. Communication & Security: We can communicate & protect our documents from other user by
storing it in more secured way..
DISADVANTAGES OF COMPUTER
1. It creates unemployment.
2. If we work for 24 Hrs with the computer we may get headache, eye strain etc.
3. Needs electricity to work with computers.
4. The data stored on a computer can be accessed by unauthorized persons through networks. It has
created serious problems for the data security. Data security has to be provided.
5. The computer manufacturing processes and computer waste are polluting the environment. The
wasted parts of computer can release dangerous toxic materials. Green computer is a method to
reduce the electricity consumed and environmental waste generated when using a computer. It
includes recycling and regulating manufacturing processes. The used computers must be donated or
disposed of properly.
PARTS OF COMPUTER
If you use a desktop computer, you might already know that there isn't any single part called
the "Computer." A computer is really a system of many parts working together.
The illustration below shows the most common hardware in a desktop computer system. Your
system may look a little different, but it probably has most of these parts. A laptop computer has similar
parts but combines them into a single notebook-sized package.
Desktop computer system
To work with computer we should have two important equipments: Hardware and Software.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
512
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS
Block diagram of a computer
C.P.U
a. Input Unit: Input devices are those devices that can be used to insert data, instructions or
information into a computer. A few input devices are Mouse, Keyboard, Microphone, Joystick and
Scanner.
b. Central Processing Unit. (C.P.U) : It processes the information received from the user.
C.P.U.
Central Processing Unit. (Brain of Computer)
M.U
Memory Unit.
A.L.U
Arithmetic and Logical Unit.
C.U
Control Unit.
c. Output Unit: it sends the processed data to user.
INPUT DEVICES
Keyboard
We give data or instructions to a computer using
input devices. A Keyboard is used to enter data into a
computer. There are different types of keys and their
functions:
Typing keys: They include letters, numbers,
symbols, punctuations and space bar.
Control keys: Control key, alt key, the windows logo
key and the escape key are the control keys. These
keys are used alone or in combination with the other
keys to perform certain actions.
Function keys: These are labeled as f1, f2, f3, f4 and so on up to f12. The functionality of these
keys differs from program to program and is used to perform specific actions.
Navigation Keys: It means locating position. It helps you to move around in documents, data
sheets, presentations or WebPages and edit text. These include the arrow keys, home, end page up,
page down, delete and insert.
The Numeric keypad is designed like a conventional calculator used to input numbers.
Mouse ( Manually Operating User Symbolic Encoder)
A mouse is used as a pointing device to point to and interact with
items on the computer screen. When you move the mouse, you can see a
small moving arrow - this is called the ‘pointer’.
The pointer's
appearance might change depending on where it is positioned on your screen. The pointer can provide
data or instructions to the computer for processing. A mouse has two buttons - left and right. It also
includes a scroll wheel between the two buttons that helps you to move between documents and Web-
pages more easily
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
513
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS
.
Joystick
Joystick is a device which is used to move cursor position on a
monitor screen. It is a stick having a spherical ball at its both lower and
upper ends. The lower spherical ball moves in a socket. The Joystick can be
moved in all four directions. The function of joystick is similar to that of a
mouse. It is mainly used for playing computer games.
Light Pen
Light pen is a pointing device which is similar to a pen. It is used to
select a displayed menu item or draw pictures on the monitor screen. It
consists of a photocell and an optical system placed in a small tube. When
light pen's tip is moved over the monitor screen and pen button is pressed,
its photocell sensing element detects the screen location and sends the
corresponding signal to the CPU.
Track Ball
Track ball is an input device that is mostly used in notebook or
laptop instead of a mouse. This is a ball which is half inserted and by
moving fingers on ball, pointer can be moved. Since the whole device is not
moved, a track ball requires less space than a mouse. A track ball comes in
various shapes like a ball, a button or a square.
Scanner
Scanner is an input device which works more like a photocopy machine. It is used when some
information is available on a paper and it has to store in computer for further manipulation. Scanner
captures images from the source which are then converted into the digital form that can be stored on the
disc. These images can be edited before they are printed.
Scanners are classified into
Flat-Bed Scanner: Flat-bed scanners are some of the most commonly used
scanners as it has both home and office functions. The way they scan
documents is that a mechanism rolls under the document to obtain the image.
For businesses that have a need for high processing abilities, the flat-bed
scanner can scan any number of documents with a click of a button.
Sheet-Fed Scanner: Here the image is fed through the scanner and moves
along the beam to be read rather than the beam moving. This type is not useful for books, but only
for single sheets.
Drum Scanner: These types of scanners are used mainly for capturing a picture and producing at a
very high resolution rate. There are only a few companies that make these scanners, considering the
high cost of producing a scanner such as this. It is considered a tremendous upgrade to a regular
flat-bed scanner
Portable Scanner: Portable scanner are designed to capture text and other data while you are on
the go. The scanner is powered by batteries and once you scan the text, the content is stored on the
portable scanner. Once you get home, you can transfer the content to a computer. Transferring to
your computer is done by using a cable or a wireless connection.
Integrated Scanner: Integrated scanners are becoming one of the most modern types of scanners
when it comes to obtaining images. ATMs feature this type of built-in scanner for check-processing
and approval.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
514
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS
Magnetic Ink Card Reader (MICR)
MICR input device is generally used in banks as there are a
large number of cheques to be processed every day. The bank's code
number and cheque number are printed on the cheques with a special
type of ink that contains particles of magnetic material that are
machine readable. This reading process is called Magnetic Ink
Character Recognition (MICR). The main advantage of MICR is that
it is fast and less error prone.
Optical Character Reader (OCR)
OCR is an input device used to read a printed text. OCR scans text
optically character by character, converts them into a machine readable code
and stores the text on the system memory.
Optical Mark Reader (OMR)
OMR is a special type of optical scanner used to recognize the type of
mark made by pen or pencil. It is used where one out of a few alternatives is to be
selected and marked. It is specially used for checking the answer sheets of
examinations having multiple choice questions.
Bar Code Readers
Bar Code Reader is a device used for reading bar
coded data (data in form of light and dark lines). Bar coded
data is generally used in labeling goods, numbering the
books etc. It may be a hand held scanner or may be
embedded in a stationary scanner. Bar Code Reader scans a
bar code image, converts it into an alphanumeric value which is then fed to the computer.
CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT (C.P.U) / SYSTEM UNIT
The system unit is the core of a Computer System.
Usually it is a rectangular box placed on your desk. Inside
this box are many electronic components that process
information. The most important of these components is
the central processing unit (CPU), or Microprocessor,
which is also called as "brain of computer”. Another
component is Random Access Memory (RAM), which
temporarily stores information that the CPU uses while the
computer is on. The information stored in RAM will be
erased when the computer is turned off.
Almost every other part of your computer connects
to the System unit using cables. The cables plug into
specific ports (openings), typically on the back of the
system unit. Hardware that is not part of the system unit is sometimes called a peripheral device or
device.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
515
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS
Arithmetic And Logic Unit (ALU)
An arithmetic and logic unit (ALU) is a digital circuit that performs integer arithmetic and
logical calculations. The ALU is a fundamental building block of the central processing unit of a
computer. The processors found inside modern CPUs and graphics processing units (GPUs)
accommodate very powerful and very complex ALUs.
Control Unit
The control unit of the CPU contains circuit that uses electrical signals to direct the entire
computer system to carry out stored program instructions. The control unit does not execute program
instructions; rather, it directs other parts of the system to do so. The control unit must communicate
with both the arithmetic/logic unit and memory. It acts as a nervous system in our body.
Micro Processor
It is a multipurpose, programmable device that accepts digital data as input,
processes it according to instructions stored in its memory, and provides results as
output. A microprocessor incorporates the functions of a computer's central
processing unit (CPU) on a single integrated circuit (IC), or at most a few integrated
circuits.
A microprocessor -- also known as a CPU or central processing unit -- is a
complete computation engine that is fabricated on a single chip. The first microprocessor was the Intel
4004, introduced in 1971. The 4004 was not very powerful -- all it could do was add and subtract, and it
could only do that 4 bits at a time. But it was amazing that everything was on one chip. Prior to the
4004, engineers built computers either from collections of chips or from discrete components
(transistors wired one at a time). The 4004 powered one of the first portable electronic calculators.
MEMORY / STORAGE UNIT
When you know something, it is stored in your memory. In the same way, the place where computer
stores data and programs is called Computer Memory. Computer has 2 types of Memory - Primary/
Main Memory and Secondary Memory. The main memory is very fast. It is called Random Access
Memory or RAM. Data and instructions are stored in the main memory from where it can be retrieved
from CPU for processing results. RAM is the memory in which all the programs are stored during
execution. The speed of the computer depends on the RAM. Cache memory is a memory that is a part
of RAM and is very close to the processor. It is used to improve processing speed. The primary
memory is limited in size as it is expensive. so to store unlimited data we use secondary memory. Any
data or program that is kept in secondary memory has to be copied by RAM because the computer
cannot process data directly on secondary memory. The examples of Secondary Memory are – Pen
Drives, Hard Disk, Floppy Disk, Magnetic Tapes, Magnetic Bubble Memories and Optical Memories.
How does a computer store data in its memory?
Computer stores all information in 0’s and 1’s (i.e., using binary number system). A single
binary digit, i.e., a 1 or a 0 is called a bit. A group of eight bits is called a byte.
Unit
Description
Bit
1 bit = 1 or 0
Byte
1 B = 8 bits
Kilobyte (KB)
1 KB = 1024 Bytes
Megabyte (MB)
1 MB = 1024 KB
Gigabyte (GB)
1 GB = 1024 MB
Terabyte (TB
1 TB = 1024 GB
PetaByte (PB)
1 PB = 1024 TB
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
516
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS
Floppy disk drive
Floppy disk was developed in 1970’s they are cheap and faster storage
media. It stores less information and it is portable. The disk is made up of Ferro
Magnetic Oxide and covered with Mylar plastic cover to prevent from dust and
finger prints. To store the information the internal disk is divided into number of
concentric circles called as Tracks. And sub divided into segments called as Sectors.
A disk can store information on both sides. Now a days floppy disks are not used.
Hard Disk Drive
Your computer's hard disk drive
stores information on a hard disk, a rigid
platter or stack of platters with a magnetic
surface. Because hard disks can hold
massive amounts of information, they
usually serve as your computer's primary
means of storage, holding almost all of your
programs and files. The hard disk drive is
normally located inside the system unit. We
can find different capacity of Hard disks
like 10 GB, 20 GB, 40 GB, 80 GB, 160 GB,
500GB, 1000 GB,1TB etc.,
CD and DVD drives
Nearly all computers today come equipped with a CD or DVD drive,
usually located on the front panel of the system unit. CD drives use lasers to
read (retrieve) data from a CD, and many CD drives can also write (record)
data onto CDs. If you have a recordable disk drive, you can store copies of your
files on blank CDs. You can also use a CD drive to play music CDs on your
computer. It can store 640MB To 720MB; DVD drives can do everything that
CD drives can, plus read DVDs. If you have a DVD drive, you can watch movies on your computer.
Many DVD drives can record data onto blank DVDs. DVD can store up to 16 G.B
Pen drive It is an external storage device, in which we can store the information
from 256 M.B to 1 TB, which can be connected to USB ports in the CPU.
OUTPUT DEVICES
Output devices are used to display the result to the user. The main output devices are Monitor,
Printer, Speaker, Headphones and Projector. Following are few of the important output devices which
are used in Computer Systems
Monitor
A monitor displays information in visual
form, using text and graphics. The portion of the
monitor that displays the information is called the
screen. Like a television screen, a computer screen
can show still or moving pictures, text.
There are three basic types of monitors:
CRT (cathode ray tube) Monitors,
LCD (liquid crystal display) Monitors and
LCD monitor (left);
CRT monitor
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
517
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS
LED (Light Emitting Device) Monitors.
CRT monitors, however, are generally more affordable but occupies more space and power.
LCD and LED monitors have the advantage of being much thinner and lighter and they consume less
power.
Printer
A printer transfers data from a computer onto paper. You don't need a
printer to use your computer, but having one allows you to print e‑mail, cards,
invitations, announcements, and other materials. Many people also like being
able to print their own photos at home.
A. Impact Printer: These printers are made up of electro mechanical
mechanism. In this printer needles or hammers were used to get the printout.
These printers are slow printers. There are two types in Impact Printer.
Character Printer: Character Printer prints character by character at a time. It is also known
as Serial Printer. Ex: Dot Matrix, Daisy Wheel.
Line Printer: This printer prints line by line. Ex: Drum printer, Chain printer.
B. Non Impact Printer: These are the printers made up of Electronic Mechanism in which Thermal
Rays are used to get the printout. These printers are fast printers.
Page Printer: This Printer prints page by page. Ex: Laser Printer, Inkjet Printer
The two main types of printers are Inkjet printers and Laser printers. Inkjet printers are the most
popular printers for use at home. They can print in black and white or in full color and can produce
high-quality photographs when used with special paper. Laser printers are faster and generally better
able to handle heavy use.
Speakers
Speakers are used to play sound. They may be built into the system unit or
connected with cables. Speakers allows you to listen to music.
Headphones
Headphones give sound output from the computer. They are similar to speakers except that they
are worn on the ears, so that only one person can hear the output at a time.
Projectors
Projector is an output device with which a text or an image is projected onto a flat screen. A
projector is often used in meetings or to make presentations. It allows the display to be visible to many
people.
HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE
All physical components of a computer that can be touched or felt are called Hardware. The
electronic circuits and mechanical components such as Hard Disk, Printer, CPU, Keyboard and Mouse
are Hardware. Hardware devices are very important but they are useless without the instructions that
control them. The Instructions that are used to control hardware and accomplish tasks are called
Software. Software is a general term used for computer programs. These programs are planned step-
by--step set of instructions that direct the computer what to do and how to do. There are two types of
software : Application Software and System Software.
Application Software: An application is a job or a task that a user wants to accomplish through a
computer. Application Software is a program that helps the user to perform a specific job. It enables a
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
518
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS
user to write a letter or create a drawing. Microsoft Word and Microsoft Paint are examples of
Application Software.
System Software: The programs that are directly related to the computer hardware are called System
Software. For example, to run a computer you need an operating system, which is a System Software.
Translators are system software, which converts program from one level language to another level
language. Eg., Assembler, Compiler, Interpreter.
Assemblers: This is a translator that converts assembly level coding to machine level coding.
Compiler: This is a translator which converts a high level language program into its equivalent
machine level language and creates an object file.
Interpreter: This is a translator that reads high level code line by line, converts it into machine
level code and executes the commands. An object file is not created.
PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES
Language is a means of communication. The language which is used to communicate with the
computer is called as Programming Language.
There are two types
1. Low Level Language
2. High Level Language.
1. Low Level Language: Low Level Language is classified into two types.
a. Machine Level Language: It is used by first generation computer technicians who designed
the computer; it consists of 0’s and 1’s (Binary Codes).
Advantages:
1. Programs run very faster and saves time.
Disadvantages:
1. It is machine dependent language.
2. Difficult to write the programs and difficult to check the errors and modify.
b. Assembly Level Language: In this language the instructions are given in mnemonic codes
(Add, Sub, Mul, Div) and Binary codes.
Advantages:
1. Easy to understand when compared with Machine Level Language.
2. Easy to check and modify the errors when compared with Machine Level Language.
Disadvantages:
1. It is machine dependent.
2. It needs translators to convert codes.
2. High Level Language: It uses the structured English coding to give instructions. It is used to write
the programs in computer.
Ex: C, C++, VB, Oracle, Java.
Advantages:
1. It is machine independent.
2. Easy to learn.
3. Easy to check errors and modify.
Disadvantages:
It needs translators to convert high level language into machine level language.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
519
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS
GENERATIONS OF COMPUTER.
1st Generation (Vacuum Tubes)
Year
- 1945 - 1955
Size
- Room size (1500 Sq.ft)
Components
- Vacuum Tubes (1800)
Generating Heat
- More Heat
Processing Speed
- Very Slow
Example
- ENIAC, UNIVAC, EDSAC
2nd Generation (Transistors)
Year
- 1955 - 1964
Size
- Almara Size
Components
- Transistors
Generating Heat
- Less than 1st generation.
Processing Speed
- Faster than1st generation.
Example
- IBM1401
3rd Generation (Integrated Circuits)
Year
- 1964 - 1975
Size
- Office Table Size.
Components
- IC’S (Integrated Circuits)
Generating Heat
- Less than 2nd generation.
Processing Speed
- Faster than 2nd generation.
Example
- IBM 360.
4th Generation (Microprocessor)
Year
- 1975 - 2000
Size
- T.V. Size.
Components
- Micro Processor.
Generation Heat
- No heat (Fan in CPU)
Processing Speed
- Faster than 3rd generation.
Example
- Personal Computer
5th Generation (Artificial Intelligence)
Year
- 2000 - Till now
Size
- Long Note Book
Components
- Bio’s Cell (Basic Input Output System)
Generating Heat
- No heat
Processing Speed
- Very Fast
Example
- Laptop
HISTORY OF COMPUTER
1. ABACUS
It was the first mechanical device, developed in 2000B.C. This was performing calculations
like Addition, Subtraction. Abacus was introduced by China and Japan country people. Today, abacus
are often constructed as a bamboo frame with beads sliding on wires, but originally they were beads or
stones moved in grooves on sand or on tablets of wood, stone, or metal.
2. PASCAL ADDING MACHINE
This was the mechanical device, which was operated by Metal wheel dials. This was
Performing all the arithmetic operations like +,-, *, /. It was introduced in the year 1642 by French
Mathematician called Blaise Pascal.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
520
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS
3. JACQUARDS CARD OR PUNCHED CARD (1804)
This device designed as weaving patterns in the fabrics using cards with punched holes. This
was the beginning of the concept of punched cards. It was introduced by world’s largest company i.e.,
IBM (International Business Machine Corporation).
4. CHARLES BABBAGE (ANALYTICAL ENGINE)
He is the father of computer. He proposed a machine which has the ability to
perform all the arithmetic operations for any mathematical problem on date read
from punched cards. It consists of memory to store the result, input & output devices.
It was developed in the year 1833. He is known as the Father of Computer because
the device analytical engine has all the necessary parts of today’s computer. He is the
first person to give the necessary computer for components and also the shape of the computer. He was
a mathematician, philosopher, inventor and mechanical engineer, who is best, remembered now for
originating the concept of a programmable computer.
5. ENIAC (Electronic Numerical Integrator and Calculator)
It was the first electronic computer, it was the largest machine consists of 1800 vacuum tubes &
occupies 1500 sq.ft of space, It performs calculation in a day which normally requires 300 days. It had
the capacity to do 360 multiplications & 5000 additions per second.
6.UNIVAC (Universal Automatic Computer)
It was the world’s first commercial data processing machine. It is faster when compare to
ENIAC. In the year 1833 the Analytical engine was invented by “Charles Babbage”.
CLASSIFICATION OF COMPUTER
On the basis of DATA computer are classified into 3 types.
1. Analog Computer: This computer is used for measuring the physical quantities. They process the
information physical and continuous in nature and the result is displayed on the monitor. Ex:
Computers used in measurement of Temperature, Pressure, Speedometer etc.
2. Digital Computer: These computers are operates by counting the numbers and letters. This data is
called discrete data. Ex: These computers are used in cricket score board.
3. Hybrid Computer: These computers are the combination of Analog and Digital computers are
integrated. ex: These Computers are used in Hospitals (ICU).
Types of Computers (According to SIZE and CAPACITY)
Computers range in size and capability. At one end of the
scale are supercomputers, very large computers with thousands of
linked
microprocessors that perform extremely complex
calculations. At the other end are tiny computers embedded in
cars, TVs, stereo systems, calculators, and appliances. These
computers are built to perform a limited number of tasks.
The personal computer, or PC, is designed to be used
by one person at a time. This section describes the various kinds
of personal computers: desktops, laptops, handheld computers, and Tablet
PCs.
Desktop Computers
Desktop computers are designed for use at a desk or table. Desktop computers are made up of
separate components. The main component, called the system unit, is usually a rectangular case that sits
on a desk. Other components, such as the monitor, mouse, and keyboard, connect to the system unit.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
521
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS
Laptop Computers
Laptop computers are lightweight mobile PCs with a thin screen. They are
often called notebook computers because of their small size. Laptops can operate on
batteries, so you can take them anywhere. Unlike desktops, laptops combine the
CPU, screen, and keyboard in a single case. The screen folds down onto the keyboard
when not in use.
Handheld Computers
Handheld computers, also called personal digital assistants (PDAs), are battery-
powered computers small enough to carry almost anywhere. Although not as powerful as
desktops or laptops, handhelds are useful for scheduling appointments, storing addresses
and phone numbers, and playing games. Some have more advanced capabilities, such as
making telephone calls or accessing the Internet. Instead of keyboards, handhelds have
touch screens(Virtual keyboard) that you use with your finger or a stylus (a pen-shaped
pointing tool).
Tablet PCs
Tablet PCs are mobile PCs that combine features of laptops and
handhelds. Like laptops, they're powerful and have a built-in screen. Like
handhelds, they allow you to write notes or draw pictures on the screen, usually
with a tablet pen instead of a stylus. They can also convert your handwriting into
typed text. Some Tablet PCs are “convertibles” with a screen that swivels and unfolds to
reveal a keyboard underneath.
Types of Computers (According to their SPEED and COMPUTING POWER)
Computer can be broadly classified by their speed and computing power.
1.
PC (Personal Computer): Single user computer system. Moderately
powerful microprocessor.
2.
WorkStation: Single user computer system. Similar to
Personal Computer but have more powerful microprocessor.
3.
Mini Computer: Multi-user computer system. Capable of supporting
hundreds of users simultaneously.
4.
Main Frame: Multi-user computer system. Capable of supporting
hundreds of users simultaneously. Software technology is different from
minicomputer.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
522
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS
5.
Super Computer: An extremely fast computer which can perform
hundreds of millions of instructions per second.
SETTING UP AND WORKING OF A COMPUTER
HOW DO YOU USE A COMPUTER?
A computer or a computer system mainly consists of a system unit or case and other devices
such as Monitor, Keyboard, Mouse, Speakers and Microphone. In order to use a computer we need to
connect all the devices to the system unit.
HOW DO YOU CONNECT A COMPUTER?
You need to follow the following steps in order to connect a computer:
Place the computer on a desk or table.
Set the system unit next to the Monitor. Be sure of the place where the system unit is to be kept.
The place should be well ventilated and should have sufficient airflow which will prevent the
system unit from overheating.
The rear portion of the system unit has all the various connection slots or ports for connecting
various devices. First, connect the monitor to the system unit.
The video port of the system unit is called the VGA port. The color of the video port and the
connectors of the VGA cable are blue to make them easier to identify. Connect one end of the VGA
cable to the video port in the system unit and the other end to the monitor.
Now you need to connect the keyboard into the system unit. A keyboard has 2 types of connectors
– PS/2 connector and USB Connector. You can connect the keyboard to any of the 2 ports
depending on its type. Desktop computer keyboard often comes with a PS/2 connector. Connect the
keyboard to the keyboard port of the system unit.
A mouse has three models of connectors: (i) Mouse with PS/2 Connector; (ii) Mouse with USB
Connector; and (iii) Mouse with Serial Connector. You need to connect the mouse in the
appropriate port in the system unit. For example, if it has a serial connector, connect it to the serial
port in system unit.
Now, you need to connect the printer to the system unit. A printer has two models of connectors -
Parallel Port Connector and USB Port Connector. You can connect the printer to any one of the two
ports in the system unit depending on the type of connector in the printer.
Now that all the main components like the monitor, printer mouse and keyboard are connected to
the system unit, all you have to do is to provide power supply to the system unit and the monitor
using two power supply cables that come with the computer. Plug one power supply cable into the
power supply plug in the system unit; plug another power supply cable into the monitor. Now plug
both these power supply cables to the power plugs (outlets) in a switch board. The computer system
is now ready to be used.
STEPS TO START A COMPUTER
Switch on the power supply of both the system unit and the monitor.
Press the power button of the system unit. It is usually located in the front side of the system unit.
Ensure that the LED of the unit is switched on.
Now, switch on the monitor. Press the power button on the front bottom side of the monitor. Ensure
that the LED of the monitor is turned on.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
523
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS
In few seconds, the display appears on the monitor. The boot screen could be seen as soon as the
monitor starts. Wait until everything is loaded and Windows desktop screen is displayed on the
monitor. Now your computer is ready to use.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
524
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
OPERATING SYSTEM
OPERATING
SYSTEM
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
525
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
OPERATING SYSTEM
CHAPTER – 2
OPERATING SYSTEM
INTRODUCTION
Operating System is a collection of program that helps us to interact with other computer
programs and manages the resource of the computer system. The computer is useless without an operating
system. There are various types of operating systems available today. Computers use a different language
than us; this language is made up of digits. Computer can understand only machine level language. The
operating system acts as an interpreter. It helps us talk to the compute i.e., operating system is an interface
between user and computer. The Operating System also enables you to effectively use the system
resources and access other programs. All other programs need operating system to start them, but the
operating system starts by itself. This is why when we switch on a computer we see the respective
operating system’s screen. The Operating system starts the computer automatically when power is turned
on.
What are the functions of an Operating System?
The major functions of the Operating System are:
It controls and coordinates the operation of a computer
It eases the interaction between you and the computer
It controls input and output devices
It controls execution of computer programs
It manages the use of the main memory of Computer
It helps you to manage and manipulate files.
Classification of Operating System: Operating system can be user friendly with many icons and
images or it can be just text or character based. The Operating System can be classified into 2 types:
Character User Interface(CUI) and Graphical User Interface (GUI).
Character User Interface: Each and every task is performed by giving commands. Ex: DOS (Disk
Operating System).
Graphical User Interface: Here the task is performed either by clicking mouse or by giving commands.
It is more user friendly compared to CUI operating systems. Examples of GUI are Windows XP,
Windows NT, Windows 7, Ubuntu, etc.
OPERATING SYSTEM
There are quite a few operating systems that are totally free. Linux is popular with tinkerers and
there are hundreds of popular versions available for free. Ubuntu is probably the most popular and well-
known — it's probably the easiest to use, the easiest to learn (if you're coming from Windows) and there
is a lot of support & a lot of discussion forums to browse through if you need help. Other popular OS
include LinuxMint (which includes many 'mint' tools), Debian (known to be the most stable and
compatible), Mageia, Fedora, OpenSuse, FreeBSD, BOSS( Bharath Operating System Solution) and
others.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
526
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
OPERATING SYSTEM
WINDOWS OPERATING SYSTEM
Microsoft Windows is a series of graphical interface operating systems developed, marketed, and sold by
Microsoft. Most of the computers that we use come with preinstalled operating system of Microsoft
Windows. In case you have a computer system without the Windows operating system you can buy
licensed software from an authentic seller of the software. An alternative method of obtaining the software
could be through online websites such as Microsoft’s website.
HISTORY OF WINDOWS OPERATING SYSTEM
Year
Released Version
1983
Bill Gates announces Microsoft Windows November 10, 1983.
1985
Microsoft Windows 1.0
1987
Microsoft Windows 2.0
1992
Microsoft Windows 3.1
1993
Microsoft Windows NT 3.1
1995
Microsoft Windows 95
1995
Microsoft Windows 95 Service Pack
1996
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0
1996
Microsoft Windows 95 (4.00.950B)aka OSR2 with FAT32 & MMX
1998
Microsoft Windows 98 was released June, 1998.
1999
Microsoft Windows 98 SE (Second Edition)
2000
Microsoft Windows 2000 was released
2000
Microsoft Windows ME (Millennium)
2005
Microsoft Windows XP Professional x64 edition
2007
Microsoft releases Microsoft Windows Vista and Office
2008
Microsoft releases Microsoft Windows Server 2008 .
2009
Microsoft releases Windows 7
2012
Microsoft releases Windows Server 2012
2012
Microsoft releases Windows 8
2015
Microsoft releases Windows 10
Here in this book, we are concentrating on Microsoft Windows 7 Operating System. So Let us know more
about Windows 7 Operating system in the following sections.
INTRODUCTION TO WINDOWS 7
Welcome to Windows 7. Among the new features available in Windows 7, there are new security tools
that can use to keep your computer more secure, and new technologies that run in the background, making
your computer run more efficiently and reliably. A Windows 7 Operating System (OS) dictates how all
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
527
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
OPERATING SYSTEM
the parts (software and hardware resources) of your computer work together and how specific tasks (i.e.,
displaying and saving information) are to be performed.
Windows 7 is built primarily on Windows Vista technology which includes the best attributes of
previous Windows versions. People who already know and have used previous versions of Windows
should have no problems using Windows 7. Windows 7 offers several benefits over other versions,
namely, its built-in file encryption and password control capabilities provide basic data and access
security, increased reliability and performance ability, friendly graphical user interface (GUI), and The
new look to Taskbar, System Tray, its Web communication features. Mainly Windows 7 has
advancements in touch, speech, and handwriting recognition, support for virtual hard disks, support for
additional file formats, improved performance on multi-core processors, improved boot performance,
and kernel improvements. Windows 7 retains the Windows Aero graphical user interface and visual
style introduced in the operating system's predecessor, Windows Vista, but many areas have seen
enhancements.
Windows 7’s desktop is graphical which allows the user to click on icons to launch applications,
open files and folders, connect to a network, and perform many other functions.
Users should find that Windows 7 is more efficient and customizable than previous versions and
other platforms. The Start button on the bottom left corner of the screen allows easy access to just about
everything in the system. The Start button is used to initiate applications, opens or search for documents,
adjusts settings, activates the Help Support system, manages files, and maintains the entire system to meet
your specific needs.
FEATURES OF WINDOWS 7
1. It has a 32/64 bit of Operating System.
2. It provides G.U.I (Graphical User Interface) that allows communicating visually.
3. It is having better memory management.
4. It controls file, folder & documents.
5. It is very easy to manage & control the windows.
6. It is a Multi User & Multi Task.
7. It has new windows Themes, Quick view for recently used computer applications, Quick Search,
Quick Disk Management, Internet Security, and Gadgets and so on.
MULTI USER OS: The Operating system that supports more than one person at a time is called
multiuser operating system.
MULTI TASK OS: The Operating system that supports to process of more than one task at a time is
called multi tasking operating system.
When your computer starts for the first
time, what you see is called the Desktop.
The desktop has a background, which is
called Wallpaper. The small pictures on
the desktop are called Desktop Icons.
These icons represent shortcut for files,
programs and folders which could be
quickly and easily accessed.
The Desktop is split into two
areas. The Main area or a Desktop and a
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
528
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
OPERATING SYSTEM
taskbar.
The narrow strip at the bottom, with the clock to the right and the round Start button to the left, is
called the Taskbar. You can also pin the various programs to the task bar as icons to be used as quick
access to the programs. The Taskbar above is from Windows 7. You'll have the clock on the right hand
side. It is split into a number of different areas: a round Start button, Quick Launch icons, a
notification area, and a clock. All other areas are the Taskbar itself. The image below shows where the
different areas are:
The task bar displays all the running applications and programs as icons. It also helps you access many
applications and programs in the computer through these icons. The task bar provides an easy way to
switch between multiple programs running on the computer. If a number of applications are running and
there is not enough space available on the task bar to keep all the icons, then similar types of icons can
also be grouped together.
Through the Start button, you can access programs
and other system utilities. When you click on the start button,
the start menu appears listing various programs installed the
computer. You can use Control Panel in the start menu to
change various hardware and software settings in your
computer. You can also use Help and Support menu item in
the start menu to get any help you need while working with
Windows.
The left hand column is a list of recently used
programs and will change as you use your computer.
Below the left hand column is a search box. In this box you can type a file name, folder name,
program, or extension and search for the location on the computer. If you do not press enter after your
search your list of matching items will appear above the search box in the start menu. By clicking the
magnifying glass or pressing enter, a window will open with a list of the matching items.
With the help of start menu you can shut down your computer with a click only. You can also log
off from the computer, switch between users, restart the computer and lock the computer using the start
menu and hibernate the system.
The first option is to switch users. This will keep the
current user logged into the computer and bring you back to
the sign in window to log into another account.
Start Button
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
529
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
OPERATING SYSTEM
Log off will log the user off closing all programs and return you to the sign in menu.
Lock will lock the computer so a password will have to be entered before being able to log back
on. Any open programs will remain open untilit is closed by the user or the computer is shut
down.
Restart will log off all users shut down the computer and reboot it to the log in menu.
Sleep will keep all programs running but shut down the monitor and non essential components of
the computer. It will keep any programs open but will only use minimum resources to keep the
computer running.
Hibernate is used primarily for laptops. It uses even less power than sleep mode by placing your
open work on your hard drive and turning your computer off with the ability to recover any open
work when the computer is turned back on.
There is one more area on the Taskbar, and it's easily overlooked - the Show
Desktop button. In the images above, you can just see a narrow rectangle to the right of
the clock: Click this button to minimize all open programmers and reveal the desktop.
Here are some common items you’ll use on the Start Menu.
Account Name – The account name for our test computer is Guest. The user will find access to all of
their personal files and information stored in a single location.
Computer – Formerly known as “My Computer” this start menu item provides access to all storage
drives (hard drives, flash drives, network drives, CDs, etc) currently accessible through your computer.
Documents – Many users will remember this item as “My Documents”. From this menu item, users can
access all of their files stored in the location.
Pictures – From here, users can find all of their pictures stored in this location.
Music – Users will find their music files stored in this location.
All Programs Menu – Stores most of your options, such as the programs you have installed on your
computer including Microsoft Office.
Search programs and files– Allows you to quickly search for files, folder and programs on your entire
system.
Recently Used Programs – Provides quick access to programs that you use frequently by placing them
just above the Start button.
Help and Support – Takes you to the Windows 7 Help Center.
Devices and Printers – Allows you to view printers and devices currently installed on your
system.
Control Panel –Allows you quick access to programs that do everything from removing
your programs to adjusting your mouse settings and setting up a firewall.
Shut Down – Powers down the system. You can access more power options by clicking the
arrow to the right.
Run Command – The Run command gives you quick access to programs, websites, etc. Just
type in the name of the file or website and click OK. You can access the Run command by
typing “Run” (without quotations) into the Search programs and files box. The search field
can also be used as the old Run dialog box. Simply type in the program name and press the
Enter key on your keyboard.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
530
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
OPERATING SYSTEM
The Notification area, formally called the System Tray, is the area of the Taskbar where you can
view programs and tasks that are running in the background, as well as view
important messages about updating your computer. (Although the clock is
considered part of the Notification area, we'll look at this separately.)
In the image below, the Notification area shows three icons: The first one,
the white arrow, is for hidden icons. Click the white arrow to see which icons
have been hidden:
The second of the three icons in the Notification area is a white flag. This
flag alerts you to issues that need to be taken care of. Click the flag icon to see if
there are any problems:
As you can see, Windows 7 is telling us that there is 1
message, and that it's to do with Windows Defender. You can click on
the "1 message" heading at the top, or on the message itself. You can
also open the "Action Center" from here.
The third icon that appears in the Notification area (on our
computer, anyway) is a Network icon. This tells us that we have an
internet connection, and there are no problems. If the internet access is down, there will be a
red X through this icon: The red X will disappear when the problem with the internet is
solved.
THE DESKTOP
The Desktop is the main Windows 7 screen (see image below). It is the work area where dialog
boxes, windows, icons, and menus appear. Like an office desk, the Windows 7 desktop contains items you
can use to do your job. For instance, from your desktop, you can perform file-management tasks and run
software applications. You can customize the appearance of the desktop to suit your preferences.
Desktop Icons
The Desktop is
where
you’ll find icons (It is a symbolic
or graphical or small pictures
which we can see on the desktop)
for many of your most frequently
used programs. You’ll most likely
see
icons
for
Computer,
Documents,
Recycle
Bin,
and
Internet Explorer.
Computer – Allows you to see
what drives are attached to
your computer (for example,
your local hard disk drive, your CD/DVD drives, any networked shared drives, and external drives,
such as a USB flash drive). You can also view the files that are located on these drives.
Notification Area
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
531
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
OPERATING SYSTEM
Documents – Supplies a ‘catch-all’ place for your personal files. Within here you can see your files,
any shared files from other computer users and any music or pictures you may have stored. The
Documents folder will sometimes be identified by your name instead of the word “Documents.”
Recycle Bin – Stores any files you delete until you empty it.
Internet Explorer – Contains Windows’ built in web browser that integrates with other Windows
components (such as your folders and Documents).
On the other hand, you can also create and edit icons for your own use.
WORKING WITH ICONS
Creating Icons – To create an icon, right-click anywhere on the Desktop and choose New Shortcut.
Browse for the file or program you want to create the icon for, click next, name your icon, then click
Finish.
Deleting Icons – To delete an icon, either right-click on the icon and select Delete, or click once on the
icon and press the Delete key on your keyboard.
Renaming Icons – To rename an icon, right-click on the icon and choose rename. You can then type in
the new name. Also, try clicking once on the icon, wait half a second, then click it a second time. The text
area will be visible and you can type a new name or select an icon press F2, the text area will be visible
and you can type a new name and press enter key.
Arranging Icons – To arrange the icons on your desktop, right-click in an open area of the desktop, click
Sort By, and choose the appropriate option from the list below.
o Name – Sort the icons alphabetically from top to bottom, left to right.
o Size – Sort the icons by file size (the amount of space the file takes up on your local
computer).
o Type – Sorts the icons by the type of file, such as Word Documents, programs, etc.
o Date Modified – Arranges the icons with the most recent items on the top left hand corner.
Moving & Dragging – To move (drag) an icon, click on it once, holding down the click, and drag it to
another location. You can also arrange the items wherever you would like. Simply right-click on the open
area of the Desktop, select View, and choose Align icons to Grid.
Changing Desktop Properties
The Personalization (Display Properties) window allows you to change your wallpaper, screen
saver, and even your desktop theme. To access the window, right-click anywhere on an open space of
your desktop and click Personalize. Here’s a rundown of what each area is.
Change desktop icons – Allows you to select which items will appear on your desktop.
Change mouse pointers – Allows you to pick a different mouse pointer. You can also change how the
mouse pointer looks during such activities as clicking and selecting.
Desktop – Allows you to set the Desktop background picture.
Display – Allows you to set your screen resolution and other advanced monitor and video settings.
Screen Saver – Allows you to set a screen saver and its time interval. A screen saver is a picture or
animation that covers your screen and appears when your computer is idle for a set period of time.
Sounds – Changes which sounds are heard when you do everything from receiving e-mail to emptying
your Recycle Bin.
Window: The rectangle portion of a screen Known as window. It is classified into two types:
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
532
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
OPERATING SYSTEM
A. Application Window: It is a window, which is used for user’s application. It is also known as parent
window.
Ex: Notepad, Point Brush, word pad etc.,
B. Document Window: In this we can open more than one document at a time it is also called as child
window.
Ex: Excel book, Word documents etc.
Window Themes – Allows you to set a theme for Windows which includes changing visual or auditory
elements associated with menus, icons, backgrounds, screen savers, mouse pointers and some computer
sounds. Users can set some aspects of Windows 7 to visually look like Windows XP.
Changing System Date and Time
To change the system date and time, click on the date and time present on the right side of the
task bar. After this, a clock and a calendar appear. Following are the steps to change the system date and
time:
1: Click on the date and time on the taskbar
2: Click on the change date and time settings link
3: Click on the change date and time button
4: Set date and time
5: Click OK to save changes and return to the date and time dialog box
6: Click OK on the date and time dialog box to save changes and close the dialog box.
Desktop and its Display Settings
Desktop is the display area that you see when you log onto your computer. You can change the
appearance and personalization or the way the desktop behaves. Just like you decorate your room and
desk with pictures, you can decorate your desktop too by changing the Wallpaper or desktop background.
When you keep the computer idle for some time or if you do not work for a while on the computer, an
animation of pictures or text appears on the screen. This is called a Screen Saver. You can set a screen
saver of your choice or can even set a password and assign timing for the screen saver. Once you set the
timing, the screen saver starts by itself when the computer is left idle. Assigning a password to your
screen saver locks your screen, therefore, no one can access your desktop if you are away from your
computer for a long time. You can also change the theme of your Windows appearance and can customize
it as ‘My theme’. You can also change the color of Windows by using the Windows color icon.
Steps to Change the Desktop Background
1: Right click on the empty space on the desktop
2: Click on the personalize option from the menu
3: Click on the desktop background link
4: Choose a picture and set it as your desktop background
5: Click on the save changes button to save the changes.
Setting a Screen Saver
1: Right click on the empty space on the desktop
2: Click on the personalize option
3: Click on the screen saver link
4: Click on the screensaver dropdown menu and select a screen saver from the list
5: Set the time for the screen saver to start by selecting number of minutes from wait combo box
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
533
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
OPERATING SYSTEM
6: Click on the preview button preview the screen saver
7: Click on the apply button to apply the screen saver
8: Click on the OK button to save the changes
COMPUTER SCREEN
The
computer
screen
(formerly
known
as
My
Computer) has changed slightly
in Windows 7. Along with
showing all of the various drives
attached to your computer, you
also have an “Explorer” type
view on the left side that will
allow you easy access to the
contents of those drives.
Hard Disk Drives – This area
lists all of the physical hard
drives you have installed in your
computer. This does not include
any external hard drives or flash
drives.
Devices with Removable Storage – This area lists any external hard drives, flash drives, or CD/DVD
drives connected to computer.
Network Locations – This area lists any network drives you may be connected to. On-campus computers
will have access to the Home (H:\) drive, which is your personal network space, the Shared (K:\) drive,
which is shared among users in your department, and the Apps (I :\) drive, which stores applications that
user provides
Steps to Transfer files onto a USB flash drive/ Pen drive
1. Plug the USB flash drive directly into an available USB port. (Note: A message indicating that a
new device has been detected is displayed at the lower right hand of your taskbar. It may take few
seconds to be detected)
2. If the USB flash drive does not open, then goto Start menu Computer Double click on the
Removable disk associated with the USB flash drive.
3. Navigate to the folders in your computer containing files you want to transfer
4. Right click on the file you want to copy, then select copy
5. Return to the Removable disk window, right click within the window, then select paste
6. Or just select the file right click Send to Select removable drive name associated with the
USB flash drive.
QUICK SEARCH
Have you ever opened a window, such as the Control Panel, and have trouble finding what you
are looking for? Windows 7 allows users to search individual windows through Quick Search. In our
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
534
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
OPERATING SYSTEM
example, the user was able to find Windows Update by typing the word “update” (without quotations) in
the search filed located in the top right corner of the window.
DISK MANAGEMENT
To keep your system humming along, it’s a good idea to always keep a check on how your system
is running and where your files are located. Below are some things you should keep tabs on to help your
system run better.
Recycle Bin – It’s a good idea to empty your Recycle Bin occasionally. Files can build up in here and
take up valuable space. To do so, right-click on the Recycle Bin’s icon and select Empty Recycle
Bin.
Disk Cleanup – Allows you to clean up temporary files, etc. that are collecting dust on your system.
To use it, click on Start-> All Programs-> Accessories-> System Tools-> Disk Cleanup. You’ll see
a checklist of items that you can mark and remove.
Disk Defragmenter – Sometimes, Windows will throw bits and pieces of your files across your hard
drive, thus making the computer slower when trying to access these files. To remedy this, you need to
run Disk Defragmenter. To use it, click on Start-> All Programs-> Accessories-> System Tools->
Disk Defragmenter and follow the directions.
Tip: Run your virus and spyware scanners at least once a week and set them up to run automatic updates.
You can download free spyware and virus scanning software for your computer from the Connect Wright
website, located at https://www.wright.edu.cats/cw/. Users will be asked to authenticate with their
username and password to access the website.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
535
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
OPERATING SYSTEM
BURNING DATA TO A CD
Burning a CD or DVD is great for backing up data, transferring it to another computer, mailing it to
someone, or archiving older files to free up hard drive space. To burn a CD follow the steps below:
Insert a blank disc into your PC.
The Auto play dialog box appears, asking whether you intend for this CD or DVD to hold
computer files or music.
Click the “Burn files to disc” link.
Type the name for the disc, but before clicking next, review the following options:
o Like a USB Flash Drive: Live File System is a new format that allows you to drag files
and folders onto it in real time. You can think of it as a thumb drive.
With a CD/DVD player: Mastered format is the most widely used and allows you to drag the
files/folders into its window. The PC duplicates the items, placing it in an invisible, temporary
holding area until you’re ready to burn. You burn all files and folders at once.
Choose one of the options, and then click “Next.”
Add files and folders into the disc’s window with one of the following options:
o Drag the items into the open CD/DVD window or onto the disc burner’s icon in the
Computer window.
o Highlight the files you want burned onto the CD. Choose Organize -> Copy. Click in the
CD/DVD window, and then choose Organize -> Paste to copy the material there.
o Explore your hard drive and whenever you find a file/folder you’d like to be backed up,
right-click it.
Click the “Burn to disc” button near the top of the window.
Follow the prompts to finish burning your disc.
INTERNET SECURITY
The Internet can let hackers access your computer, unleash their viruses, set up remote hacking
tools, feed us spyware and try to trick us into giving them our credit card numbers. Windows 7 does
include added security behind the scenes, but we will focus on the following security measures that you
can see and change.
Security Center – Shows you at a glance where you’re safe and where you’re not. Click the buttons
or arrows on the right side of the screen to get more details about your security in any category. But if
you want to change those settings, click Control Panel Security Security Center.
Windows Firewall – Acts as a gatekeeper between you and the Internet. It examines all traffic, and
lets through only communications that it knows are safe; all other traffic is turned away at the door.
Protects both inbound and outbound traffic.
Windows Defender – Protects you against spyware in two ways. First, it’s a kind of silent sentinel
that sits in the background, watching your system. When it detects a piece of spyware trying to install
itself, Defender zaps it. Second, it scans your hard drive for infections every day, and removes what it
finds. Access it by going to Control Panel Security Windows Defender.
Phishing Filter – A phishing attack involves receiving an email that appears to be legitimate from a
bank, eBay, PayPal, or some other financial Web site. The message tells you that the site needs to
confirm account information, or warns that your account has been hacked, and needs you to help keep
it safe. Access it by going to Internet Explorer Tools Phishing Filter.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
536
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
OPERATING SYSTEM
Privacy and Cookies – Deposits preference files on your hard drive. Some cookies can be helpful,
such as ones that let your PC log into a site automatically or let you customize what the site looks like
and how to use it. On the other hand, some cookies can record which pages you visit on a site, how
long you spend on a site, what kind of information you like to find out, and so on. To check cookie
settings, open Internet Explorer and go to Tools Internet Options Privacy tab. Two types of
cookies are described below:
o First-party cookies: created by the site you are currently visiting and generally aren’t privacy
invaders.
o Third-party cookies: deposited by sites other than the one you’re on, normally via
advertisements.
Erasing Your Tracks – Internet Explorer logs every web site you visit, storing cookies and possibly
your passwords. In addition it can store graphic/text files to speed up the page when you visit those
sites again. To delete cookies and browsing history go to Tools Internet Options General.
Pop-up blocker – Pop-ups are more than annoying; they’re potentially dangerous. They’re tricks
hackers use to deposit spyware on your PC.
WINDOWS SIDEBAR
Windows also includes some other programs that make your life easier. These programs include
Internet Explorer, Windows Contacts, Windows DVD Maker and Windows Defender. To access go to
Start All Programs.
Internet Explorer – Provides you with a way to view websites on the Internet. This is a full featured
program and has many advanced options and security to make your web browsing safe and fun.
Windows Contacts – Provides a central directory for phone numbers, email addresses and mailing
addresses. Windows DVD Maker – Debuts with Windows 7 and only with the Premium or Ultimate
Editions. It allows you to turn your digital photos or camcorder movies into DVD’s that work on any
DVD player, complete with menus, slideshow controls, and other navigation features.
Windows Defender – As discussed in Internet Security topic.
Tip: Windows DVD maker requires Windows Movie Maker. You can download Windows Movie
Maker, free of charge, from Microsoft by navigating to http://download.live.com/moviemaker in your
favorite web browser.
Windows Live Essentials
Windows Live Essentials can be downloaded, free of charge, through Windows Update. The
programs provided additional software designed to increase user productivity and enjoyment.
Messenger – Instant Messaging program similar to IChat or AOL Instant Messenger (AIM).
Windows Mail – Outlook Express has been replaced by Windows Mail, an improved e-mail
program with enhancements such as junk e-mail filtering and protection against phishing
messages. To check these settings go to Tools -> Junk E-mail Options. It allows you to create
multiple accounts to check, create filters, and add signatures to your e-mail.
Windows Photo Gallery – Digital photo management that allows you to import photos, organize,
tag, rate, edit and share pictures.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
537
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
OPERATING SYSTEM
Windows Movie Maker – Allows you to edit your video from a camcorder or digital camera,
trimming out the boring parts, and dress it up with credits, music, and so on.
Windows Toolbar – Allows Windows Live and Hotmail users to quick access their email,
calendar, photos and more.
Writer –Allows users to create professional looking blogs. Even allows users to publish directly
to more blog services.
Family Safety –Provides additional parental controls to limit user accessibility to websites.
Microsoft Outlook Connector – Allows users to access their Windows Live & Hotmail accounts
via Outlook.
Microsoft Office Live Add-in – Allows Windows Live and Hotmail users to save and open
documents from their SkyDrive.
Silverlight – Enhances the user experience when they access websites that utilize Silverlight.
GADGETS
Gadgets are easy to use mini-programs that give you information at a glance
and provide easy access to frequently used tools. To access Gadgets, right-click
anywhere on an open space of your desktop, and click Gadgets. As you use your
computer to access information, perform tasks, and interact with software, you may at
times feel like you're facing information overload. You have to open a web browser
just to check the weather, open an application to view your calendar, and open a
calculator program just to add up a few numbers. Now, with Windows Gadgets the
specific information you need is at your fingertips.
DIFFERENT BUTTONS USED IN WINDOWS
1.
Text box :
2.
Check box:
3.
List box:
4.
Radio button:
5.
Drop down list box :
6.
Spinners :
7.
Slider :
8.
Command or push button:
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
538
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
FREE SOFTWARES
30 |
FREE
SOFTWARES
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
539
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
FREE SOFTWARES
CHAPTER -3
FREE SOFTWARE
Windows includes a wide array of simple programs that makes it easier to finish your day to
day tasks. Below you’ll find information on these. To access them, click on Start->All Programs-
>Accessories-> and then the appropriate icon.
Calculator – Contains both a simple and scientific calculator.
Command Prompt – Gives you access to the old DOS style command window.
Notepad – This is a simple text editor, mainly used to type a few notes.
Paint – A simple image editing and creation program.
WordPad – A word processing program with more options than Notepad, but not as advanced
as Microsoft Word.
CALCULATOR
Calculator is used to calculate arithmetic & Logical Calculations, there are 4 types in calculator
1.
Standard Calculator.
Alt+1
2.
Scientific Calculator.
Alt+2
3.
Programmer Calculator Alt+3
4.
Stastistics Calculator
Alt+4
MC
- Memory Cancel
MR
- Memory Recall
MS
- Memory Save
M+
- Memory Plus
Note : You can also do Unit conversion and Date calculations.
Unit Conversion
When you select the Unit Conversion mode, the Calculator will expand with a form on the left
side. This conversions pane has 3 drop-down menus.
From the top one, select the type of unit you want to convert.
In the next two menus, select which values you wish to convert to and from.
For instance, here we selected Temperature in the first menu, Degrees Fahrenheit in the second menu,
and Degrees Celsius in the third menu. Enter the value you wish to convert in the From box, and the
conversion will automatically appear in the bottom box.
The Calculator contains dozens of conversion values, including more uncommon ones. So if you’ve
ever wanted to know how many US gallons are in a UK gallon, or how many knots a supersonic jet
travels in an hour, this is a great tool for you!
You can also do Date calculations by using Calculator application of Windows 7. You can also specify
how many days, months, or even years are to be added or subtracted from the specified date. Once
you’ve entered the information, click Calculate and you’ll be presented with the resulting day and date.
NOTEPAD
Parts of a Window
1. Title bar: The top most bars in every window are title bar. It displays name or title of active
window. At the right corner it consists of controls menu box.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
540
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
FREE SOFTWARES
2. Control Box: It controls the screen activities like minimize, maximize or restore and close
move etc.
a. Minimize: It is used to shrink the window as an icon & places on the taskbar.
b. Maximize/Restore: It is used to enlarge the window to full screen.
c. Close: It is used to close the active window.
6. Menu Bar: Below the title bar is the menu it displays menus for the active window.
7. Scroll bar: It is used to see the hidden text of an active window. There are two types of scroll
bar namely.
a. Horizontal scroll bar.
b. Vertical scroll bar.
8. Working Area: It is a place where user can edit the text or draw the pictures.
9. Status Bar: The bottom most bar in every window is the status bar.
10. Mouse Pointer: The various shapes and meaning of mouse pointers:
o
Arrow shape
- We can select the options
o
I shape
- We can edit the text
o
Hourglass shape
- Processing is going on in the system.
Notepad is a Windows tool used to edit the text. It is also called as “Handy Text Editor”. In
Notepad we can edit the text & we can apply formatting like font, size or font style. The files of
Notepad application have the extension .TXT. It is purely text editor software, in
other words, we cannot insert pictures or we can’t apply colors for font.
FILE MENU
1. New (Ctrl+N): It is used to open new or blank file.
2. Open (Ctrl+O): It opens an existing file.
3. Save (Ctrl+S): It saves the active file under a given name.
4. Save As: It create a duplicate copy of an active file.
5. Page set up: It is used to set the paper size, margins, header & footer for the
file.
6. Print (Ctrl+P): It is used to get the print out of the active file.
7. Exit (Alt+F4): It is used to close the Notepad application.
EDIT MENU
1. Undo (Ctrl+Z): It is used to reverse the last action done by the user.
2. Cut (Ctrl+X): It is used to cut the selected contents from the active file and place
it in the Buffer.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
541
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
FREE SOFTWARES
3. Copy (Ctrl+C): It is used to copy the selected contents into the buffer.
4. Paste (Ctrl+V): It is used to insert cut or copied contents from the buffer to the active file.
5. Delete (Del): It is used to delete the selected contents permanently.
6. Find (Ctrl+F): It is used to search the word or character.
7. Find Next (F3): It is used to repeat the last search.
8. Replace (Ctrl+H): It is used to change the existing text with the new text.
9. Select All (Ctrl+A): It is used to select all the contents present in the active file.
10. Time & Date (F5): It is used to insert system date and time.
FORMAT MENU
1.
Word wrap: It is used to set the text contents with the left and right margins.
2.
Font: It is used to change the fonts, font size, and font style in the Notepad.
VIEW MENU
Status Bar: This option is used to show/ hide the status bar.
HELP MENU
Help Topic: This option is used to get the help about any topic from the
Notepad application.
PAINT BRUSH
It is a Windows tool used to draw the pictures. Microsoft Paint, which has also been known as
Paintbrush or Windows Paint, is a very simple and widely recognized image creating and editing
software. The version of paint in Windows 7 makes use of the Ribbon GUI. It also features "artistic"
brushes composed of varying shades of gray and some degree of transparency that give a more realistic
result. The paint files are stored with the extension .PNG, the default tool is Pencil.
Ribbon: In computer interface design, a ribbon is a graphical control element in the form of a
set of toolbars placed on several tabs. In 2007 Microsoft products began to introduce a form of modular
ribbon as their main interface where large, tabbed toolbars, filled with graphical buttons and other
graphical control elements, are grouped by functionality. Such ribbons use tabs to expose different sets
of controls, eliminating the need for numerous parallel toolbars. Contextual tabs are tabs that appear
only when the user needs them
The Paint Window
This is a typical view of the top of the Paint window.
At the very top is the Title Bar, just as in all programs, below it is a very simple Menu Bar and below
that is the Ribbon.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
542
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
FREE SOFTWARES
At the left end of the Title Bar the first item shows a little
paint palette. If clicked, this button opens a standard window menu,
offering Restore, Move, Size, Minimize, Maximize and Close. The
next 4 items make up the Quick Access Bar, Offering buttons for
Save, Undo, Redo, Customize. You'll also see other commands that
you can add if you wish. I've chosen to add New—for a new Paint
page, Open—to open a previously saved and closed picture, and Print
Preview.
You can click any of these items a second time to undo changes you've made to the Quick Access
Toolbar.
Adding Ribbon items to the Quick Access Toolbar
Many other items can be added to the Quick
Access Toolbar. On the Ribbon, right click on
anything you'd like to add to the Quick Access Toolbar and a menu will appear. This includes things
offered in sub-menus. I've added the Pencil tool and Paste Transparent. To remove items you've added
from the Ribbon, right click the unwanted icon and then click the Remove option.
Other things on the Title Bar
After the Quick Access items, you'll see the title of your picture followed by the name of the program—
Paint, of course. If you haven't yet saved your picture, the name will be shown as "Untitled".
THE RIBBON
All the tools, the color palette, and most commands are grouped together in the ribbon. The exceptions
are Save, Undo and Redo, which are shown at the left end of the title bar, in the Quick Access
Toolbar.
If you choose to use a very small window, the ribbon will appear like this. Drop-down arrows below
each item will give you access to everything in their menus. If, however, you use a very large window,
you will have many more menu items on display.
There is also an option to minimize the ribbon. If you choose this, the ribbon disappears entirely, but
pops into view if you click on the Home tab.
The Title Bar
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
543
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
FREE SOFTWARES
The Menu Bar
At the right-hand end of the Title Bar are the three usual window buttons,
Minimise, Maximise and Close. If your Paint Window is already maximized—taking up all of your
screen—the middle button will be Restore, which makes the window the size you usually have it.
The Menu bar has three items on the left and a Help button at the far
right.
Comprehensive Menu
1. New (Ctrl+N): It is used to open a new blank file.
2. Open (Ctrl+O): It is used to open an existing file.
3. Save (Ctrl+S): It is used to save an active file.
4. Save as: It is used to create a duplicate copy.
5. Print: It is a view, which appears before taking the printout.
6. Page Setup: It is used to set the paper size, margins, header, and footer for the
documents.
7. Print : It has three sub options
8. Print: (Ctrl+P): It is used to get the printout of the active file.
9. Page Setup: To change layout of picture.
10. Print Preview : It is used to preview the picture before printing
11. Send in email: It is used to send the contents of the active file to mail.
12. Set as desktop background: It is used to set the image on the desktop. It has three sub options
a. Fill: Fill the entire screen with the picture.
b. Tile: It displays the file contents side by side.
c. Center: Center the picture to the middle of the screen
d. Properties: Change the properties of the picture The Properties dialogue, for instance, will
give you information about the picture on which you're currently working, and let you
nominate whether you want to work in centimeters, inches or pixels.
13. About Paint: Displays about paint
14. Exit (Alt+F4): It is used to quit the paintbrush application.
Home Tab
For nearly everything you do, you'll
want the Home tab to be at the front.
The Home tab contains the Ribbon, from
which tools and colors are selected.
When you're making use of the View
tab, you can flick back and forth
between Home and View as often as you
need to.
View Tab
Zooming in and out is one of the features that can be used alone or in conjunction with the Zoom Tool
on the Ribbon or the slider on the Status Bar. Zoom in and Zoom out tools can be clicked repeatedly to
get a closer or more distant view.
The 100% option is handy when you've finished working in a very zoomed in
view. One click and you're back to normal.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
544
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
FREE SOFTWARES
On the Show or Hide part of this tab, you have the option of hiding the status bar. I wouldn't advise
you to do that. The status bar can be useful.
Gridlines are convenient if you want to align shapes accurately.
Rulers If you like. Turn them on and see what you think. Two measuring scales appear: horizontal (one
on top) and one on left side (vertical), which will be help full while creating/editing an image.
On the Display section, you can click for Full Screen View. You can also get a Full Screen View by
hitting F11. In either case, come back to a Normal view by pressing the Esc key.
Thumbnail is only available when you are zoomed in. It lets you see how changes you make are
affecting your picture in normal view.
The Clipboard Menu
The clipboard menu offers three options—Cut, Copy and Paste. Only when a
selection is active will the Cut and Copy icons show as being ready.
Paste is always active, because you may wish to Paste from a picture on your
computer. Say you've previously drawn and saved a small flower and now wish
to add it to your present drawing. You'd click the down arrow under Paste,
click Paste from and navigate to the saved picture, click its name and click Open.
You'd be returned to your work space and see the added picture inside a selection rectangle, ready for
you to drag to its permanent position.
The Image Menu—Select
Rectangular Select: It is used to select the objects in rectangle form
Freeform Select: It is used to select irregular part of picture
Select All: To select whole image
Invert Selection: To select everything in the picture except for the
currently selected area
Delete: To delete a selected object.
Transparent Selection: Used to make the background color in the
selection as transparent or opaque.
Crop: Used to crop a picture so only the part you selected appears in your
picture. Cropping lets you change the picture so only the selected object or
person is visible.
Resize: Used to resize or skew the picture.
This menu lets you make mirror images of selections, either use Rotate to rotate the whole
picture or a selected part of it.
Tools Menu
1. Pencil
: It is used to draw free hand drawings.
2. Eraser
: It is used to erase the unwanted drawings.
Rotate or flip
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
545
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
FREE SOFTWARES
3. Fill With Color
: It is used to fill the colors
for closed object.
4. Pick Color
: It is used to fill the colors for
closed objects.
5. Magnifier
: It is used to see the objects in
large size.
Brushes
: It is used to color the pictures. Brushes
let you paint in various widths and textures. We have
9 different types of brushes
6. Text
: It is used to edit the text.
7. Shapes Menu : Contains basic shapes of drawing.
8. Outline: To apply outline for a shape
9. Fill: To fill a color to a shape.
10. Size
: It is used to draw the straight lines of various thicknesses
HOW TO SAVE A CUTOUT
1. Save the picture you're working on.
2. Select the part you want to save as a cutout.
3. Click the Crop button.
4.
Go to the Paint button and open the menu.
5.
Click Save as
6. Be very sure that you do click Save as and not save.
7. Type a name for the cutout and click Save.
8. You'll be returned to the Paint window with the cutout displayed in it. You'll see that the name on
the Title bar is the name you used when saving the cutout.
9. Click the Open icon on your Quick Access Toolbar or from the Paint Button menu.
10. Open the picture with which you wish to continue working.
Line Thickness, the Size Tool
This tool becomes active only after you have chosen either a Brush or a Shape, so choose
your Brush or Shape and you'll then find you can click the down arrow under Size and
choose a line thickness. The line thicknesses offered vary according to the brush you've
chosen.
Colors
The Color section of the ribbon has three parts: Boxes showing the active colors—Color 1 and Color2,
the Color Palette and the Edit Colors button.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
546
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
FREE SOFTWARES
The Color Boxes :
Color 1 is the Foreground Color, and is always black when you open Paint or open a
different Paint page.
Color 2 is the Background Color, and is always white when you open Paint or open a
different Paint page.
The Color Palette
The two top lines of the Color Palette show all the colors
available whenever you are making a picture. The line of blank squares
at the bottom will show any colors you have edited during this session.
Once Paint is closed, those colors will vanish away.
Edit Colors
The Edit Colors button takes you into the Edit Colors dialogue. There you can click any
color on an extended palette and click the Add to Custom Colors button.
The Status Bar
The Status Bar sits at the very bottom of the Paint Window, where it offers information and can be used
to help as you work. We'll look at its features from left to right.
Cursor Position : Gives your Cursor Position, which is helpful when you want to position
something precisely.
Selection Size : Shows the size of a selection you're making, or of an object you're
drawing.
Image Size: Shows the size of your entire picture, even if it is very large and so not all
visible in the window. If you haven't changed the units in the Properties dialogue this
measurement will be in pixels.
Disk Size: Once you've saved a picture, this will show its Size on Disk. In a very small
window, this figure may not be shown.
Zoom Slider: The Zoom Slider is convenient if you're working in a
zoomed-in view and want to zoom out. However, you can't zoom in on
a particular spot, as you can with the Magnifier.
WORD PAD
It is a simple text documents or documents with complex formatting and graphics. You can link or
embed information from other documents into a WordPad document. You can save your WordPad file
as a rich text file and the extension name for word pad is .RTF. In the Word Pad we can format text &
also we can insert the pictures.
WordPad are a bit more friendly due to the ribbon bar, which was first introduced in Microsoft
Office 2007. WordPad first received its ribbon menu with the release of Windows 7.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
547
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
FREE SOFTWARES
The Windows Fax and Scan utility enables you to scan documents and pictures. Before you can scan
documents and pictures, you must have a scanner installed on your computer. Your scanner must be
listed in the Devices section of the Devices and Printers Control Panel window.
To check to see if your scanner is properly installed, open the Device Stage. Choose Start→Devices
and Printers. If Windows doesn’t automatically find your scanner, you can manually add it in the
Devices and Printers window by clicking the Add a Device button in the toolbar and following the
wizard’s commands.
How to scan a document or picture?
Choose Start→All Programs→Windows Fax and Scan.
Click the Scan button in the Navigation pane, then click the New Scan button on the toolbar.
1. Use the settings on the right to describe your scan.
By letting the computer know what you’re scanning, its color profile, and the type of file you plan to
create, you enable Windows Fax and Scan to create the highest quality scan.
2. Click the Preview button to see what your document will look like.
Make any last minute changes.
3. If you’re happy with the preview, click the Scan button.
Windows scans the document and presents you with an image of your document.
4. Click the Save As button and complete the necessary information.
Enter the filename, the type of graphics file you want saved, and then click the Save button.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
548
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
FREE SOFTWARES
WINWORD
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
549
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007
CHAPTER - 4
WORD 2007
Microsoft Word 2007 helps you produce professional-looking documents by providing a
comprehensive set of tools for creating and formatting your document in a new interface. Rich review,
commenting, and comparison capabilities help you quickly gather and manage feedback from
colleagues. Advanced data integration ensures that documents stay connected to important sources of
business information. Word 2007 provides editing and reviewing tools for creating polished documents
more easily than ever before. Word 2007 supports exporting your file to PDF (Portable Document
Format) & XPS (XML Paper Specification) formats. The extension name for word Documents is
.DOCX and word Template is .DOTX.
The first conspicuously new feature you'll encounter when you start Word will undoubtedly be
the Ribbon, which is part of the new interface called Microsoft Office Fluent user interface. On the
Ribbon are all the commands, styles, and resources you need, arranged on task-oriented tabs. The one
remaining toolbar is the Quick Access toolbar, where you can place your most frequently used
commands and resources for easy access, regardless of which tab of the Ribbon is active.
THE OFFICE BUTTON
The colorful icon in the top left hand corner of the Word window is the Office button. When
you point to the Office button with the mouse pointer it will turn orange. When you click the left mouse
button while pointing to the Office button, a menu will open that contains some of the most commonly
used commands which were found in the File drop-down menu in earlier versions of Word. Recent
documents are listed in the Recent Documents pane on the right side of the menu.
Office Button
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
550
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007
PARTS OF MS WORD 2007 WINDOW
THE RIBBON
The ‘Ribbon User Interface’ is a task-oriented Graphical User Interface (GUI). The Ribbon is
designed to help you quickly find the commands that you need to complete a task. Commands are
organized in logical groups, which are collected together under tabs. Each tab relates to a type of
activity, such as writing or laying out a page. To reduce clutter, some tabs are shown only when needed.
For example, the Picture Tools tab is shown only when a picture is selected. The new ribbon in Word
2007 looks like this:
The ribbon is divided into Tabs, Groups, and Commands. Each tab opens a different ribbon
with groups of commands inside
it. Microsoft has tried to make the
placement
of
the
commands
within both groups and tabs as
intuitive as possible to make them
easy to find. By using the Ribbon
system the user has many less mouse clicks to execute the desired command.
In the lower right hand corner of some groups is a small down pointing arrow. These are
referred to as Dialog Expanders or Launchers. Clicking on the arrow will open a Dialog window or a
Command pane. The dialog box may provide additional options that may not be contained on the
active tab. Most of the dialog boxes that appear should be familiar; many are taken directly from earlier
versions of the program.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
551
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007
The Ribbon has three types of Commands.
1. Simple Buttons
2. Drop-down menus Buttons
3. Launchers (or Dialog Expanders) Buttons
Simple Buttons work as Toggles or on/off switches. When the command is off it will be
surrounded by blue and look like all other commands. When a command button is on, it will be
surrounded by orange. A command will only work when it is on. Bold is an example of a button.
If you aren’t sure what a command is or what a command does,
place the mouse pointer over the command and hold it there. A text
box will open up. The text box contains the command name, the
keyboard shortcuts for the command, along with an explanation of the
command.
Drop-down menu buttons will have a down arrow to the right
of the command. Just like buttons, the drop-down menu command will
be surrounded by orange and the drop-down list will open
up. Change case control is an example of a drop-down menu.
Some commands are a combination
of a simple button and a drop-down menu
button.
There are two buttons for
these commands. The left button is a simple button and the
right buttons is drop-down menu arrow button. If one
clicks on the simple button the default value will be used, if
one click on the drop-down menu arrow there will be a
number of options available from which to choose. The
default value is the last used value for the command.
Underline is an example of a combination command.
Launcher (or Dialog Expanders) buttons are
usually displayed in the bottom right corner of some groups.
Clicking the launcher button will open up a series of options
either in a Task pane (such as the Clipboard) or a Dialog
window such as the Font group.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
552
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007
QUICK ACCESS & STATUS BAR
The Quick Access toolbar is one of the
new features in MS Word 2007. This toolbar is
located at the top of the workspace on the far left
next to the Office Button. Users can click on the
down arrow to see a dialog box that contains the
commands that can be added to the Quick Access
toolbar. This allows the user to choose to click
on one of these commands (shown as icons in the
toolbar) rather than having to click on the Office
Button and selecting the same command. Users
can also choose to show the Quick Access
toolbar below the Ribbon if that works better and
you can minimize the Ribbon from the range of
options as well. If you use certain commands more
often than others, for example Insert Hyperlink, you can choose this from the More Commands option
at the bottom of the dialog box.
The Status Bar is a thin toolbar that runs along the bottom of the Word workspace. This bar can
display information about the document being worked on, such as page number, word count, language,
and there are viewing options in the form of icons at the right hand side of the Status Bar. You can also
right click on the Status Bar and a dialog box will open with many more options that can be displayed.
Options include Line Number, Selection Mode, Column, and more. Each item that is selected in the
dialog box will be shown in the Status Bar.
Each document created in Word can be viewed in many different
ways, depending upon the user's preference. The default view option is
set to Print Layout, but this can be changed by using the various icons
located at the lower right hand corner of the Word workspace. There are
five different views that can quickly be changed by clicking on the icons.
It will take some practice to get back to some views because you may
need to close out of a certain view to get back to Print Layout view. It's a good idea to try out each of
the views and learn how to navigate through them quickly. The 5 different views are Print Layout,
Full Screen Reading, Web Layout, Outline, and Draft.
HOME TAB
Clipboard Group
The Home ribbon is made up of the most used commands in Word. The first
group on the Home ribbon is the Clipboard. Copy, Cut, Paste and Format Painter are
the commands within the Clipboard group. The Clipboard commands are on the Home
ribbon of Word and all other Office 2007 applications that use the ribbon. The dialog
expander arrow of the Clipboard group will open up the Clipboard pane, showing all items
that can be pasted. You can now have up to 24 items in the Clipboard pane.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
553
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007
Font Group
The second group of commands on the Home ribbon is the Font
group. The font group commands are format enhancing tool that
includes font typefaces, font size, font styles (bold, italics, underline,
etc.), colors and more. Remember that you can preview how the new
font will look by highlighting the text, and hovering over the new font typeface. The expander arrow in
the Font group will open up the Font dialog window.
The default font is Calibri, Font Size 11 in a NORMAL Template
Paragraph Group
The third group on the Home ribbon is the Paragraph
group. The paragraph group allows you to change Paragraph
Alignment (left, right, centered, or justified), adjust Line
Spacing within a paragraph, (1, 1.15, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3,) adjust
Spacing before and After paragraphs, working with paragraph
Indentation. This is also the area where you can add bullet
lists, number lists, or outlines form to a documents. We can also Increase and decrease indents, we
can apply Paragraph Marks, Apply Border for paragraph and color for paragraph. The Dialog expander
arrow will open the Paragraph dialog window.
Style Group
The fourth group on the Home ribbon is the
Style group. Styles are a collection of formatting
options that you can apply to text. When you use
styles to format your document, you can quickly
and easily apply a set of formatting choices
consistently throughout your document.
A style is a set of formatting characteristics, such as font name, size, color, paragraph
alignment and spacing. Some styles even include borders and shading. For example, instead of taking
three separate steps to format your heading as 16-point, bold, Cambria, you can achieve the same result
in one step by applying the built-in Heading 1 style. You do not need to remember the characteristics of
the Heading 1 style. For each heading in your document, you just click in the heading (you don’t even
need to select all the text), and then click Heading 1 in the gallery of styles. We can even edit Styles if
required using Change styles.
Editing Group
The Fifth and final group on the Home ribbon is the Editing Group. The
commands in the Editing group are Find, Replace, and Select. When you create a
document in Microsoft Word, you may decide to change a certain word or phrase that is
repeated throughout the document. Let the computer do the hard work with the Find and
Replace feature in Word and you can be sure you didn’t miss one.
Under the Find command there is the Go to command. The Go to command can be used to
immediate directly go to a page, a section or any marked location within your document.
The Select command can be used for different purposes:
To select all of the text in the document, click Select All.
To select shapes that are hidden, stacked, or behind text, click Select Objects, and then draw a box
over the shapes.
To select text with similar formatting, click Select Text with Similar Formatting.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
554
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007
INSERT TAB
Pages Group
1. Cover Page: It is used to
create cover page to the
document.
2. Blank Page: It is used to
insert a blank page to the document.
3.
Page Break (Ctrl+ Enter): It is used to
break the page. Page break are 2 types Automatic
Page break and Manual
page break(Ctrl Enter)
A. Tables Group: It is
used to insert number of columns and number of rows in fixed width and
height. We can insert columns to left, columns to right, above rows, below
rows, cell etc., We can also convert existing text to tables in word
1. Insert Table: It is used to insert number of columns and number of rows
in fixed width and height. We can insert columns to left, columns to right,
above rows, below rows, cell etc.,
a. Auto Fit to contents: Initially the columns are very narrow. Columns
are expanded as you enter text.
b. Auto Fit to window: The entire table will get adjusted to both left &
right margins.
c. Fixed column width: Initially columns are of fixed
width.
The width of the columns can be adjusted as
required.
2. Draw Table: This option is used to create a table by
drawing lines. We can select line style, line colors, line
width, Sort its contents (Ascending OR Descending) we
can set Text Direction.
3. Convert: It is used to convert existing table to text &
existing text to table.
4. Excel Spread sheet: It allows inserting excel sheet into a document.
5. Quick Tables: Quick Tables are the tables that are stored in galleries as building blocks. You can
access and reuse these Quick Tables anytime. If you frequently use a table with specific
formatting, then the table can be stored in Quick Tables gallery, so that
you need not recreate each time you need it.
Illustrations Group
A.
Picture: This option is used to insert the
pictures from file.
1.
Go to insert tab, click on Picture in
Illustrations group.
2. Select any image then click on OK button.
B.
Clipart: This option is used to insert the pictures installed with office
2007. We can insert Drawings, movies, sounds, or stock photography to
illustrate a specific concept.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
555
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007
Steps:
1. Go to insert tab, Click on Clip Art in Illustrations group.
2. Type the keywords in a search, and then click on go button.
3. Click on any clip to add into a document.
C. Shapes: This option is used to insert readymade shapes such as
rectangle, flowcharts, callouts, etc.
Steps:
1. Go to insert tab, click on Shapes in Illustrations group.
2. Select any shape, draw in a document.
D. Smart Art: This option is used to insert the Smart art
graphic to visually communicate information. Smart Art
graphics range from graphical lists and process diagrams to
more complex graphics such as cycle diagram, radial diagram,
Venn diagram, target diagram, pyramid diagram and
organization chart.
Steps:
1. Goto insert tab, click on Smart Art in Illustrations
group.
2. Select any Smart Art & then click on OK button.
E. Charts: It is used to insert the charts, there are 11
different types of charts like Column chart, Line, Pie, Bar,
Area, XY (scatter), Stock, Surface, Doughnut, Bubble and
Radar
Steps:
Goto insert tab, click on chart in Illustrations group.
Select the required chart, and then click on OK button.
Links Group
1. Hyperlink (Ctrl+K): It is used to place a link to a program or a
webpage or an image or a document.
Steps:
1. Go to links group from insert tab.
2. Click on Hyperlink, select any file or document
3. Finally click on OK button.
2.
Bookmark: It is used to mark a
specific location of a document. It helps
to identify & skip from one location to
another location. We can also make a hyperlink that directly jumps to
bookmark.
Steps:
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
556
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007
1. Type a text as Chapter 1
2. Place the pointer at chapter 1, Go to links group from insert tab.
3. Click on Bookmark, give the name as chapter 1as shown in above picture
4. Click on Add button.
3. Cross-Reference: Cross reference is a reference to an item that appears in another location in a
document. We can create cross reference to headings, footnotes, bookmark, numbered paragraphs
and so on. Cross references are automatically updated if the content is moved to another location.
By default cross references are inserted as hyperlinks.
Header & Footer Group
1. Header: It is to apply the text or image that repeats at top and of every page. We
apply page number, total number of pages, odd page, even page, line numbers,
etc.
2. Footer: Footer is a text that repeats at bottom of the document every page. We
apply page number, total number of pages, odd page, even page, line numbers, etc.
3. Page number: It automatically inserts page numbers, either at the header position or at the footer
position. We can change the format of page numbers, alignment and the starting number.
Text Group
1. Text Box: It is used to insert the text box, in which we can
type the text.
Steps:
i.
Go to text group in insert tab, click on Text box.
ii.
Select the different styles of text box.
iii.
Draw into a document.
2. Quick Parts: It is used to insert reusable pieces of contents, including fields, document properties
such as author, title, or any pre defined snippets you create.
3. Word Art: It is used to insert the decorative text into the document.
We can insert text horizontally or vertically.
Steps:
i.
Go to text group in insert tab, click on WordArt.
ii.
Click on any 1 pattern of Word art
iii.
Type the required text then click on Ok
Header area
CLICK HERE
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
557
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007
4. Dropcap: The first character of paragraph appears as a large capital letter. By
default drop cap is applied to 3 lines. We can drop up to 10 lines, with different
methods like dropped and in margins.
Steps:
1. Type a paragraph of text; Place the cursor near first letter of a
paragraph.
2. Go to insert tab, click on Drop Cap from Text group.
3. Select the dropped styles as Dropped or in margin.
5. Signature Line: It is used to insert the signature line.
6. Date & Time: It is used to insert the date & time.
Steps:
1. Go to insert tab, click on Date & Time from Text group.
2. Select the date or time format, click on Ok button.
7. Object: It allows to the user to insert & make changes to the selected
object like applying the brightness, contrast, size etc.,
Steps:
1. Go to text group, click on object, select object
2. Select the object type from a list then click on OK button as shown
in the below window.
8. Text from file: Used to insert text from other application.
Steps:
1. To add the text from other application click on object, select text
from file
2. Select the file or document, click on insert button.
Symbols Group
1.
Equation: Used to insert formulas into the document.
2.
Symbol: It is used to insert the symbols into the
document that are not present in keyboard. We can also
assign short cut keys to it.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
558
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007
PAGE LAYOUT TAB
Themes Group
This option is used to apply different themes to the cover page; we can
also set different font, styles & text color.
Steps:
1. To work with the themes, first insert the cover page.
2. Click on themes & change the themes styles.
Page Setup Group:
It is Used to set the margins, Orientations like Portrait & Landscape , sizes like A3, A4, A5,
letter, Legal etc., insert columns, Breaks like page break, column break
etc., to set line numbers, & Hyphenation(used to break line between
syllables of words) and settings. The default page is Letter, Margin is
Left :1.25 , Right :1.25 , Top:1 , Bottom: 1,Orientation is Portrait,
Column is 1,
Hyphenation:
Page background Group:
A.
Watermark
This option is used to apply water mark to the document; also we can
change the page color & add page borders.
Watermark
Page color
Page border
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
559
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007
Paragraph Group
1.
Indent: used to set the left and right indent to the margins. The
indents are classified into 2 types they are Normal indent and
Hanging indent.
2.
Spacing: It is used to set the spacing for the paragraph (before &
after)
Arrange Group
Using this option we can set the position of the picture or
object in the page, it also allows us to move the objects to forward,
front, backward, back etc., using text wrapping option we can fit the
picture or object to the text in different form. We can also align the
objects, Group, ungroup & rotate the objects.
REFERENCE TAB
Table of Contents Group
Table of Contents
You create a table of contents by choosing the heading
styles — for example, Heading 1, Heading 2, and Heading 3 or even
you can give the same headings to all — that you want to include in
the table of contents. Microsoft Office Word searches for headings
that match the style that you choose formats and indents the entry
text according to the heading style, and then inserts the table of
contents into the document.
Mark entries by using built-in heading styles
1. Select the heading to which you want to apply a heading style.
2. On the Home tab, in the Styles group, select the heading that you want.
For example, if you selected text that you want to style as a main heading, click the style
called Heading 1 in the Quick Style gallery.
Mark individual text entries
If you want the table of contents to include text that is not formatted as a heading, you can use
this procedure to mark individual text entries.
1. Select the text that you want to include in your table of contents.
2. On the References tab, in the Table of Contents group, click Add Text.
3. Click the level that you want to label your selection, such as Level 1 for a main level display in
the table of contents.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 until you have labeled all of the text that you want to appear in the
table of contents.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
560
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007
CREATE A TABLE OF CONTENTS
After you mark the entries for your table of contents, you are ready to build it.
Create a table of contents from built-in heading styles
Use this procedure if you created a document by using heading styles.
1. Click where you want to insert the table of contents, usually at the
beginning of a document.
2. On the References tab, in the Table of Contents group, click
Table of Contents, and then click the table of contents style that
you want.
Update the table of contents
If you added or removed headings or other table of contents
entries in your document, you can quickly update the table of contents.
1) On the References tab, in the Table of Contents group, click Update
Table.
2) Click Update page numbers only or Update entire table.
Footnotes Group
Insert Footnote: It is used to give a note at the end of the document. It is
available only if document contains footnote or end note. It shows the footnote
text inserted in the page.
Caption and Bibliography Group
1. Insert Caption: Using this option we can give a name to the image or object.
Steps:
1. Go to Insert Tab, Click on Picture from Illustrator Group.
2. Click on image, go to Reference Tab, and click on Insert Caption from Caption Group.
3. Click on New label & give a new name to the picture, finally click on OK button.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
561
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007
INSERT TABLE OF FIGURES
Using this option we can create a list of table
of figures which we have created caption.
Steps:
On the reference tab, click on insert table
of figures from caption group.
Change the different tab leader styles &
format, finally click on ok button.
Cross-reference: This option is used to insert the
given name to the image. (ex: “refer page no. 6
cross reference)
Steps:
On the reference tab, click on cross-reference
option from caption group. Select the caption
name from the referenced type list, then click on
insert button.
Index Group
An index lists the terms and topics that are discussed in a
document, along with the pages that they appear on. To create an
index, you mark the index entries by providing the name of the main
entry and the cross-reference in your document, and then you build
the index.
1. Mark Entry: This option is used to mark the text.
2. Insert Index: After marking all the text, it is used to create an Index
table.
3. Update Index: Used to update the changes done in the index text.
Steps:
1. Type a text as apple & select, go to reference Tab, click on Mark Entry.
2. Similar to all the text.
3. Click the pointer in the first page, go to reference Tab, click on Insert Index.
4. To update the changes in a table, use Update Index.
MAILINGS TAB
Create Group
1. Envelopes: It supports to stores the receiver’s address for
further use (to print envelopes).
Steps:
Go to Mailings Tab, click on Envelopes from Create group.
Type the Delivery address & return address, then click on
OK button.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
562
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007
2. Labels: Used to create labels.
Steps:
Go to Mailings Tab, click on Labels from Create group.
Type the field names and then click on options to choose
the label size.
Select the size from the list, click on OK button.
Finally click on new document.
A. Start Mail Merge Group
1. Start Mail Merge: This option used to start to create mail merge by
using Step By Step Mail Merge Wizard option.
2. Select Recipients: In this option type the new recipient’s details or to
select from the document to add in the letter.
3. Edit Recipient List: It is used to update the changes if
anything done in the recipients list.
B. Write & Insert Fields
1. Insert Merge Fields: To add the field names into the created letter.
C. Preview Results
1. Preview Results: This option is used to see the preview of the letter
& also we can be find the required recipient.
D. Finish
1. Finish & Merge: Used to finally to add all the receiver’s addresses to the created letter.
Steps To create Mail Merge using Direct Method:
Create a letter without receiver’s address.
Go to Mailings, select Start Mail Merge.
Select Step by step Mail merge wizard.
In step 1 click on next
In step 2 click on next
In step 3 select Type a new list option & click on next
Click on Customized columns
Delete all the field names or you can enter the details in required field names.
If you have deleted all the field names then click on Add, type the new field names like Name,
Address line 1, Address_line 2, Place, Pin code, Date & Time etc.,
Click on OK button.
Add the required records.
Save the documents & click on OK button
Again click on OK button.
Keep the cursor point below the “To”
Click on insert merge fields option from Write & insert fields group
Add the field names one by one, click on insert button.
Go to Finish group, click on Finish & merge option.
Select edit individual documents.
Finally click on OK button.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
563
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007
Steps To create Mail Merge using Table Method:
Take a new document.
Insert table, give field name in column as address.
Add “To” Addresses
Save & close the document.
Take a new document, create a letter without “To” address
Go to Mailings, select Start Mail Merge.
Select Step by Step Mail Merge Wizard.
In step 1 click on next
In step 2 click on next
In step 3 select use an existing list & click on Browse.
Select the document, click on open.
Click on insert fields, select the field name like address,
Click on insert & close the window.
Go to Finish group, click on Finish & merge option.
Select edit individual documents.
Finally click on OK button.
REVIEW TAB
Proofing Group
1. Spelling & Grammar (F7): It is used to check the spelling and grammatical
mistakes Red wavy line indicates spelling mistake and Green wavy line
indicates grammar mistakes.
Steps:
1. Type a wrong word, go to Spelling &
Grammar.
2. Select ed the correct spelling word
from the suggestions list,
3. Click on change button.
2. Research (Alt+click): It is used to
open the research task pane to search
through reference materials such as
dictionary,
encyclopedia
and
translation services.
3. Thesaurus (Shift+F7): It is used to show nearest meaning of the selected word.
Steps:
I.
Type a word & select, goto Thesaurus option,
II.
It lists out the meaning of the selected word.
4. Word Count: It display the total number of characters,
words, lines, paragraphs, pages etc.,
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
564
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007
Comments Group
1. New Comment: It is an extra note attached to the document for reference; it is non
printable item; it is an external reference included to a selected text.
2. Delete: This option used to delete the selected
comment.
3. Previous: This option used to see the previous
comment.
4. Next: This option used to see the next comment.
5.
Tracking Group
1. Track Changes: In this we can
change
inserted
text
colors,
formatted text colors and changed
lines.
You can easily make and view tracked changes and comments
while you work in a document. By default, Microsoft Office Word 2007
uses balloons to display deletions, comments, formatting changes, and
content that has moved. If you want to see all of your changes in line,
you can change settings so that tracked changes and comments display
the way you want.
2. Balloons: This option is used to show all the comments.
Changes Group
1. Accepts: This option is used to accept the changes done in the document.
2. Reject: This option is used to reject the changes done in the document.
3. Previous: It lets you to take to the previous track change text.
4. Next: It lets you to take to the next track change text.
Compare Group
Compare: This option is used to compare multiple versions of the
documents.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
565
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007
Protect Group
Protect Document: This option is used to protect the document by
giving the password.
Steps:
1.
Go to Review tab, Click on Protect Document.
2. Select Restrict Formatting & Editing option.
3. Select 1st & 2nd options, then select Yes start Enforce Protection.
4. Type the password, again type the same password.
5. Click on OK.
6. To Unprotect the Document.
7. Click on Stop Protection.
8. Type the same password.
VIEW TAB
Document Views Group
Word gives you several ways to view your document as you work on it, and
you'll find that your efficiency increases and your work become easier when
you use the optimal view for the task at hand. You can use either the View
tab on the Ribbon or any of the five view buttons at the bottom-right of the window to change your
view.
1. Print Layout View is the standard working view for print
documents and it shows you how your document will look
when it's printed—the placement of pictures, the
arrangement of columns, the distance of the text from the
edge of the page, and so on.
2.
Full Screen Reading View makes it easy to read
documents on your screen. The text is laid out in long
vertical pages (or screens), just like those you see in most
books. If you increase the size of the text for better
readability, the content simply flows from one screen to the
next. To maximize the area of the screen that's available for
the document's content, the elements you normally see in
the other views—the tabs, the Ribbon, and the status bar, for
example—are no longer visible.
3. Web Layout View is exclusively for working with online
documents as if they were Web pages. That is, all the
elements are displayed, but font size, line length, and page
length all adjust to fit the window, just as they do on many
Web pages.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
566
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007
4. Outline View displays your document as an outline, with the
paragraph formatting defining the levels of the outline. By default,
Word's standard heading styles have corresponding outline levels—
Heading 1 is level one, Heading 2 is level two, and so on—and other
paragraph styles, such as Normal, are treated as regular text. You can
use Outline view to organize your topics before you start writing, or
you can use it to reorganize an existing document.
5. Draft View is designed for speed of entry and editing. It's based
on the commercial publishing technique of creating galleys. You
place the text and other elements in one long, continuous column
that flows from one page to the next, and you deal with the
placement of elements after you've ironed out any content
problems. Draft view was called Normal view in earlier versions
of Word.
6. Print Preview shows you just how your document will look when you
print it. You can see a close-up view, one page at a time, or two or more
pages at once. Use Print Preview to make sure your document's layout is
exactly the way you want before you go ahead and print it.
Note: The default view is Print Layout.
Show/Hide Group
1. Ruler: This option is used to show or hide the ruler.
2. Gridlines: This option is used to show or hide the gridlines.
3. Document Map: This option is used to show or hide the document map.
4. Thumbnails: This option is used to show or hide the thumbnails.
Zoom Group
Zoom: It allows us to see the document in different zooms (Compression or
Expansion of document view). The default size is 100% & maximum we can set
500%. The minimum zoom size is 10%.
Window Group
1. New window: It is used to create duplicate of active
document window.
2. Arrange all: It is used to arrange all opened windows one by
one. All opened documents are shown on the screen.
3. Spilt: It is used to divide the window into two parts to view different parts of the document at the
same time. Windows are displayed one below the other.
4. View Side by Side: In this view two windows are displayed side by side. This view can be used to
compare two opened documents.
5. Synchronous Scrolling: Used to scroll the pages of all the opened documents simultaneously.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
567
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007
6. Switch Windows: This option used to switch between the documents.
Macros Group (Alt+F8)
1. View Macro: Displays the list of macros.
2. Record Macros: Used to store the action done in the document as a macro for later use.
3. Pause / Stop Recording: Using this option we can pause / stop the recording.
In the next step give a macro name, then click on OK button as shown in the below figure.
Picture Tools: If you want to work with this picture tools
1. First insert image,
2. Then click on image
3. Goto format in picture tools.
Drawing Tools: If you want to work with a drawing tools, first insert an object, select & goto Drawing
tools.
Position : We can re order the objects using Bring to Front
& Send to back option in arrange Group as shown in the
below
figure
.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
568
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007
Text Wrapping
Using this option we can set the object in Inline text, Square, Tight, Behind text etc., as shown in the
below picture.
In MS Word we can arrange the
objects to the left,, right, center, top,
bottom etc., as shown in the below
picture.
Steps:
A. Draw the multiple object using
Illustration group in insert tab.
B. Select all the objects using shift
key.
C. Goto Drawing tools, click on align button.
Group
We can group the multiple objects to make a single
object.
Steps:
1. Insert Multiple objects.
2. Select by holding shift key.
3. Goto format group in drawing tab
4. Click on group.
5. To ungroup click on ungroup option.
Size
Using size group we can resize (increase or
decrease) the size of the image or object.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
569
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007
61 | P a g e
SPREADSHEETS
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
570
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007
CHAPTER - 5
EXCEL 2007
INTRODUCTION
Excel 2007 is the spreadsheet application, which is used majorly for calculation & other tasks.
The Excel 2007 grids has 1,048,576 rows by 16,384 columns, which provides you with 1,500% more
rows and 6,300% more columns than you had available in Microsoft Excel 2003. For those of you who
are curious, columns now end at XFD instead of IV. In Excel 2007, you can quickly format the data in
your worksheet by applying a theme and by using a specific style. Themes can be shared across other
2007 Office release programs, such as Microsoft Word and PowerPoint, while styles are designed to
change the format of Excel-specific items, such as Excel tables, charts, PivotTables, shapes, or
diagrams.
In Office Excel 2007, you can quickly arrange your worksheet data to find the answers that you
need by using enhanced filtering and sorting. In Office Excel 2007, the default format for an Excel
WorkBook is the Excel 2007 XML-based file format (.XLSX). The first cell address is A1 and last cell
address us XFD 1,048,576. Each cell or active cell is surrounded by grid line (non-
printable line).
Fill Handle: At the right corner fill handle box is located which is used to fill the
contents for selected cell. We can select column by clicking on a column heading. we can
select a row by clicking on a Row heading. We can select any cell by the key
combination Ctrl + Mouse click. In each cell we can enter up to 255 characters.
Shortcut key for selecting a row is Shift+SpcBar. Shortcut key for selecting a column is
Crtl+SpcBar
By default we have 3 sheets in a WorkBook and we can insert as much as we require in a
WorkBook. The default WorkBook name is “BOOK 1”
Excel window consists of two types windows such as Application window and Document window.
Application window: It consists of title bar, Menu bar, Standard tool bar, Formatting toolbar
and Status bar.
Name Box : It displays the active cell addresss.
Formula Bar: In formula bar we can see the contents typed in a cell. The information that can
be entered or edited through the formula bar includes formulas, which are combinations of
letters, numbers and symbols that can help users perform calculations, such as tabulating the
values of an entire column.
Document Window: It consists of 16,384 columns and 1,048,576 rows with its heading and
also which displays sheet tab by default,. We are having 3 sheet and we can insert as much as
we required in a WorkBook
FILL HANDLE
NAME BOX
FORMULA BAR
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
571
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007
MS EXCEL WINDOW
Office Button
: The Microsoft Office Button replaces the File menu and is located in the upper-
left corner of these Microsoft Office programs. When you click the Microsoft Office Button, you see
the same basic commands available in earlier releases of Microsoft Office to open, save, and print your
file.
OFFICE BUTTON OPTIONS:
1. New (Ctrl+N): It is used to create a new blank WorkBook or template based WorkBook like
invoice, letter etc.,
2. Open (Ctrl+O): It is used to open the existing WorkBook.
3. Save (Ctrl+S): It is used to save the active WorkBook. The default extension of a excel WorkBook
is “.XLSX”
4. Save As (F12): It is used to create a duplicate copy of the active document.
Note: We can assign password to a document while saving to give protection to the document.
Steps to Set Password to a Workbook.
a. Go to office button
b. Click on save option
c. Select tools button
d. Select general option
e. Type the password to open again. Retype the same password.
f. Give the document name, finally click on save button.
5. Print (Ctrl+P): It is used to get Printout of the Workbook.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
572
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007
6. Print Preview (Ctrl+F2): Displays the worksheet as it
appears on the paper when printed. It shows all printable
information. It allows to shrink the document size and to
change the ruler settings.
7. Send: It allows sending the copy of a document in a mail
as an attachment through Internet.
8. Close (Ctrl+W): It is used to close the active document.
9. Recent documents: It list out the recently used
documents.
Excel Options:
Using this option we can set the color scheme, Auto
Correct, Save settings & Customize the Quick access toolbar
using Popular, Display, Proofing, Save, Advanced & Customize options.
HOME TAB
Clipboard Group
1. Cut (Ctrl+X): It cuts the selected portion text and places it on Clip board
2. Copy (Ctrl+C): This option is used to copy the selected word on to clipboard.
3. Paste: This option is used to paste in different ways : paste formulas, paste
values, no border, transpose, paste link, paste special, paste as hyperlink & paste as a
picture.
4. Paste Special: By using this option we can paste
only the required values, text, comments or formats
etc.
5. Office Clipboard: It stores the cut or copied text;
it stores up to 24 contents.
6. Format Painter: It copies the format styles of the
current cell/selected cells. We can apply the same styles to other cells.
Font Group
This group provides various icons to apply formatting to the text
such as:
Selecting font name, size, color, etc (default font is “Calibri”
and size is “11”.
Choosing the appearance of text in bold, italic or underlined
Selecting effects like superscript, subscript.
Choosing whether cell border is needed or not.
We can increase or decrease the font size.
A cell or a group of cells can be highlighted by filling them with any selected color.
Alignment Group
This group provides icons to provide different alignments for the contents of cells.
Vertical alignment: Top, Middle or Bottom
Horizontal alignment: Left, Center, or Right.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
573
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007
Text Direction: Contents of a cell can be displayed in any angle.
Icons for increasing and decreasing indent.
Two or more cells can be merged to form a single cell
The contents of a cell can be wrapped to fit in the selected column width.
By default text are left aligned and numbers are right aligned.
In Excel, you can also apply specific formatting to a cell. To apply formatting to a cell or group
of cells:
Select the cell to be formatted.
Click the Dialog Box arrow on the Alignment group of the
Home tab
There are several tabs on this dialog box that allow you to
modify properties of the cells.
Number tab: It displays the specific number format for the
cells. We can set the different number format like, general,
percentage, and dollar etc., & also to increase or decrease the
decimal point.
Alignment tab: Allows for the horizontal and vertical alignment
of text, wrap text, shrink text, merge cells and the direction of the
text.
Font tab: Allows for control of font face, font style, size, color, and
additional features.
Border tab: Applies Border styles and colors to a table which is selected.
Fill tab: fill colors and styles for the selected cell or table.
Styles Group
Conditional Formatting: Used to set different conditional formatting to the
cells by selecting different conditions. You might use conditional formatting to
locate dates that meet a certain criteria (such as falling on a Saturday or Sunday),
to call out highest or lowest value in a range, or to indicate values that fall under
or over a specified amount.
Steps:
Select the cell(s) to which you want to apply conditional formatting.
Click the Conditional Formatting button in the Styles group on the
Home tab.
Point to Highlight Cells Rules and then select the criteria you want
to use.
Enter the values you want to reference in the text box.
2. Format as Table: Used to apply quick formatting to the selected table.
Steps:
I.
Create a table as in above figure
II.
Select & goto format as table.
III.
Select any one format.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
574
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007
Cell Styles: By using this option we can set different heading levels to
the cell text.
Cells Group
1. Insert: This option is used for inserting the cells, rows & columns.
To insert new cells, rows, or columns in an Excel worksheet, follow these steps:
1. Select the cells, rows, or columns where you want the new, blank cells to appear.
2. Click the drop-down button attached to the Insert command button in the Cells group of the Home
tab.
3. Click Insert Cells on the drop-down menu.
The Insert dialog box opens with the following option
buttons:
Shift Cells Right: Select this option to shift existing
cells to the right to make room for the blank cells you
want to insert.
Shift Cells Down: Use this default option to shift
existing cells down.
Entire Row: Select this option to insert complete rows in the
cell range. You can also select the row number on the frame
before you choose the Insert command.
Entire Column: Select this option to insert complete columns
in the cell range. You can also select the column letter on the
frame before you choose the Insert command.
Delete: This option is used for deleting the cells, rows &
columns. To delete the actual cell selection rather than just clear out
the contents, follow these steps:
1. Select the cells, rows, or columns you want to delete.
2. Click the drop-down button attached to the Delete command
button in the Cells group of the Home tab.
3. Click Delete Cells on the drop-down menu.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
575
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007
The Delete dialog box opens, showing these options for filling in the gaps:
Shift Cells Left: This default option moves entries from neighboring
columns on the right to the left to fill in gaps created when you delete the
cell selection.
Shift Cells Up: Select this to move entries up from neighboring rows
below.
Entire Row: Select this to remove all the rows in the current cell
selection.
Entire Column: Select this to delete all the columns in the current cell
selection.
2. Format: Used to format cell sizes. We can set row height, the default row
height is 15, and we can also set to Auto fit row height. Similarly we can
set column width; the default column width is 8.43. In this we can show
or hide the rows & columns, also we can rename the sheet and copy &
move the sheet from one worksheet to another worksheet. We can also change tab color. Using
protect sheet option we can protect the sheet by giving the password.
Click the Format command in the Cells group on the Home tab. A menu will appear.
Select Column Width to enter a specific column measurement.
Select AutoFit Column Width to adjust the column width to fit its contents.
1. Click the Format command in the Cells group on the Home tab. A menu will appear.
2. Select Row Height to enter a specific row measurement.
3. Select AutoFit Row Height to adjust the row height to fit its contents.
Editing Group:
In editing group we can perform calculations using Autosum (Alt+=)(Sum,
Avg, count, max, min) option & the data pattern can be continued to adjacent cells in
any direction i.e., down, left, up, right, across worksheet, series (1,2,3, or Jan, Feb.,
march..) & Justify. Using Clear option we can be used to clear only the contents,
only the formats or only the comments of the selected cells. Clear option can also be used to clear
formats, comments and contents of the selected cells. The sort & filter option will be used to arrange
the data in ascending & descending order. The Find & Select option can be used to find the text or
number and we can also replace the text or number. We can move to specified cell using Go to option.
We can also work with objects.
In the Editing group, click FILL
» select the appropriate option:
Down: Repeats the contents of the first cell throughout the selected cells below it.
Right: Repeats the contents of the first cell throughout the selected cells to the right of it.
Up: Repeats the contents of the first cell throughout the selected cells above it.
Left: Repeats the contents of the first cell throughout the selected cells to the left of it.
Across Worksheets: Repeats the contents of the selected cells in another selected worksheet.
To Modify Column Width
To Modify the Row Height
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
576
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007
Series... fills in data that is part of a pattern, rather than simply repeating the data across
selected cells. This option brings up the Series dialog box, which allows you to select the type
of pattern you would like to use. Ex: If the first cell contains the day Sunday, Excel will fill the
following cells with Monday, Tuesday, etc.
Justify: Distributes text in the first selected cell throughout several selected rows.
NOTE: This option changes the contents of these cells by moving the data to fit within the new rows.
INSERT TAB
Tables Group
Pivot Table: A PivotTable report is an interactive way to quickly summarize
large amounts of data. Use a PivotTable report to analyze numerical data in depth and
to answer unanticipated questions about your data.
Steps to create a Pivot Table
1. Create a data as shown in the below picture.
2. Click any one cell that where you need the Pivot table result, here we have select A1 in sheet 2
3. Goto Insert tab & select Pivot table, a Create Pivot Table window will open
4. Click on Sheet 1 & select the table range as shown in the below picture & click on OK button
5. Drag & Drop the field names in their areas as show in the below picture.
6. Finally you can create a Pivot Table.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
577
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007
Pivot Chart: A PivotChart report provides a graphical representation of the data in a PivotTable
report (PivotTable report: An interactive, cross tabulated Excel report that summarizes and analyzes
data, such as database records, from various sources, including ones that are external to Excel). You can
change the layout and data that are displayed in a PivotChart report just as you can in a PivotTable
report. A PivotChart report always has an associated PivotTable report: The PivotTable report that
supplies the source data to the PivotChart report. It is created automatically when you create a new
PivotChart report. When you change the layout of either report, the other also changes.) That uses a
corresponding layout. Both reports have fields that correspond to each other. When you change the
position of a field in one report, the corresponding field in the other report also moves.
Illustrations Group
Picture: This option is used to insert the pictures.
Clipart: This option is used to insert the default clip arts.
Shapes: This option is used to insert the different Shapes.
SmartArt: This option is used to insert the Smart art objects.
A. Charts: Chart is a representation of the selected data,
which can be used to create the graphical representation,
it is easy to create professional looking charts. Simply by
choosing a chart type, a chart layout, and a chart style. There are 11 different types of charts are
present like as follows:
Column charts
Line charts
Pie charts
Bar charts
Area charts
XY (scatter) charts
Stock charts
Surface charts
Doughnut charts
Bubble charts
Radar charts
The default chart is column chart, you can apply special effects, such as shadow, reflection,
glow, soft edges, bevel, and 3-D rotation to chart element shapes, which gives your chart a finished
look.
Following are the steps to create a Chart:
1. On the worksheet, arrange the data that you want to plot in a chart.
2. Select the cells that contain the data that you want to use for the chart.
3. On the Insert tab, in the Charts group, select the chart type.
4. Then click a chart subtype that you want to use.
Chart Tools:
The Chart Tools appear on the Ribbon when you click on the chart. The tools are located on three
tabs: Design, Layout, and Format. Within the Design tab you can control the chart type, layout, styles,
and location.
Within the Layout tab you can control inserting pictures, shapes and text boxes, labels, axis,
background, and analysis.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
578
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007
Within the Format tab you can modify shape styles, word styles and size of the chart.
Links Group
Hyperlink (Ctrl+K): It is used to place a link to another document in the existing file.
Text Group
1. Text Box: It is used to insert the text box, in which we can enter
the text.
2. Header & Footer: This option is used to add header & footer to
the sheet.
Steps:
Click the Header & Footer button on the Insert tab
This will display the Header & Footer Design Tools Tab
To switch between the Header and Footer, click the Go to Header or Go to Footer button
To insert text: enter the text in the header or footer
To enter preprogrammed data such as page numbers, date, time, file name or sheet name, click the
appropriate button
To change the location of data, click the desired cell
3. Word Art: It is used to insert the decorative text into the document.
4. Signature Line: It is used to insert the signature line.
5. Object: It allows to the user to insert & make the changes of the selected object like applying the
brightness, contrast, size etc.,
6. Symbol: It is used to insert the symbols into the document that are not present in keyboard. We can
also assign short cut keys to it.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
579
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007
PAGE LAYOUT TAB
Themes Group:
This option is used to apply different themes to the cover page, we can also set
different font, styles & text color.
Page Setup Group
1. Margins: To set different margins to the document.
2. Orientation: We can set orientation like portrait or
landscape.
3. Size: This option is used to set the page size like A3,
A4, letter, legal etc.,
Here the default paper is Letter(8.5 X 11), Orientation : Portrait, Margins : left : 0.7”, Right :0.7” ,
Top:0.75” , Bottom:0.75” and Header : 0.3”, Footer :0.3” respectively.
4. Print Area: This option used to set / remove the printing area.
5. Break: Used to break the page in the different points.
6. Background: We can set/reset different background to the sheet.
7. Print Titles: In this option we can select or remove the titles like headings, gridlines and Page
order like Over then down & down then over as shown in the below picture
Scale to fit Group
1. Width: used to shrink the width of printed output fit to maximum number of
pages.
2. Height: used to shrink the height of printed output fit to maximum number of
pages.
3. Scale: This option lets you to adjust the height and width of the pages.
Sheet Option Group
1. Gridlines: Gridlines are the faint lines that appear around cells in Excel 2007.
They are used to distinguish cells on the worksheet. They are non printable lines.
This option is used to show/hide the Gridlines on the worksheet & to get printout
on the paper or not.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
580
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007
2. Headings: This option is used to show or hide the headings like A, B, C etc., & to get printout on
the paper or not.
Arrange Group:
Using this option we can set the position of the picture or object in the
page, it also allows arranging the objects to forward, front, backward, back etc.,
Using text wrapping option we can fit the picture or object to the text in
different form. We can also align the objects, Group & ungroup & rotate the
objects.
FORMULAS TAB
Function Library Group
Operator: It is symbol used to perform
calculations. There are three types of operators.
1. Arithmetical Operator: It is used to perform
only
arithmetic
operations
like
addition,
subtraction, multiplication, divisions etc., Ex: +,
-, *, /.
2. Reference Operators: It is used to compare two or more numbers. Ex: > or =, < or =.
3. Logical Operators: It is used to combine two or more conditions Ex: and, or, not.
a. Constants: Constants is a fixed value we cannot change the value of constants.
Ex: 10, 20, 30 etc.
b. Variable: It is a floating value we can change the value of variable.
Ex: A=10 or A=15, B=8 or B=13.
c. Formula: It is a combination of operators, (operands) constants, and variable to perform some
calculations.
Ex: C= a+b. here + is an operator, a and b are operands or variables.
d. Function: The readymade formula is called as functions.
There are different categories of functions like
Text Functions.
Date and Time Functions.
Statistical Functions.
Logical Functions.
Financial Functions
Mathematical and Trignometric Functions.
Lookup and references
Engineering Functions
Cube functions
Information functions
TEXT FUNCTIONS:
If you want to combine text and a number, like a date, into a readable format use
the TEXT function. For example, if you have the following information in separate cells, you can
use TEXT to create a meaningful sentence.
a. Character: This function returns or converts number into character.
Syntax: =Char(number)
Ex: =Char(65)
Result: A.
b. Code: This function returns or converts character into number.
Syntax: =Code("Character")
Ex: =Code ("A")
Result: 65.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
581
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007
c. Concatenate: This function combines or merges the given string. We can merge upto 30 strings.
Syntax: =Concatenate("string 1", "string 2", "string 3")
Ex: =concatenate ("com",”put”,”er”)
Result: computer.
d. Exact: This function returns a boolean value. If the strings are equal, it displays true and if the
strings are not equal it display false.
Syntax: =Exact("string 1", "string 2") Ex: =Exact("john", "john")
Result: True.
e. Find: This function finds the position of given character with in string.
Syntax: =Find("find text","string") Ex: =Find("p","computer") Result: 4
f. Right: This function displays specified number of characters from the right side.
Syntax: =Right("string”, “number of characters")
Ex: =Right("computer",4)
Result: uter.
g. Left: This function displays specified number of characters from the left side.
Syntax: =Left("string”, “number of characters")
Ex: =Left("computer",4)
Result: comp.
h. Length: This function returns length of the given string.
Syntax: =Length("string")
Ex: =Length("Kolar")
Result: 5
i. Lower: This function converts the given string to lower case letters.
Syntax: =Lower("capital string")
Ex: =Lower("NEWTON")
Result: newton
j. Upper: This function converts the given string to upper case letters.
Syntax: =Upper("small string") Ex: =Upper("india")
Result: INDIA
k. Mid: This function returns a substring of the given string. The sub string starts from the position
specified in the second field and the length of the substring is given in the third field.
Syntax: =Mid("string", starting number, number of characters)
Ex: =Mid("Cococola",3,4)
Result: Coco
l. Proper: This function returns the capitalized of first character in a given string.
Syntax: =Proper(“string”)
Ex: =Proper(“sAcHIn”)
Result: Sachin
m. Replace: This function replace old string with a new string using starting number and number of
characters.
Syntax:=Replace(“String”, starting no.,no. of characters, “new string”)
Ex: =Replace(“Maharani”,5,4, “Raja”)
Result: MahaRaja.
n. Repeat: This function repeats the given string into number of times.
Syntax: =Rept(“string”,”number of times”)
Ex: =Rept(“Mysore”,4)
Result: MysoreMysoreMysoreMysore.
o. Substitute: This function replaces or substitutes the part of the given string as specified by the
second and third fields.
Syntax: =Substitute(“String”,”old string”,”new string”)
Ex: =Substitute(“Cococola”,”cola”,” maza”)
Result: Cocomaza.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
582
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007
p. Trim: This function removes spaces from both ends (left and right) of the given string.
Syntax: =Trim(“String“)
Ex: =Trim(“India”)
Result: India
2. Statistical Functions:
a. Average: This function finds out percentage of given numbers or range of numbers.
Syntax: =Average(number 1, number 2,number 3)
Ex: =Average(89,88,65,87,97,87)
Result: 85.5
b. Count: This function counts the cells having numbers within the range of cells.
Syntax: =Count(Range)
Ex: =Count(A1:A6)
Result: 3
c. Counta: This function counts the cells having numbers and text within that range of
cells.
Syntax: =Counta(Range)
Ex: =Count(A1:A6)
Result: 5
d. Countblank: This function counts the number of blank cells within that range of
cells.
Syntax: =Countblank(Range)
Ex: =Countblank(A1:A6)
Result: 1
e. Countif: This function counts the cells having numbers using condition.
Syntax: =Countif(Range,”Condition”)
Ex: =Countif(A1:A6,”>35”)
Result: 2
3. Logical Functions
a. And: This function returns true if all the conditions are satisfied. It returns false if any one condition
is not satisfied..
Syntax: =And(condition1, condition2)
Ex: =And(6>4,4<8)
Result: True.
b. Or: This function returns true if any of the condition is satisfied and returns false if all the conditions
are not satisfied.
Syntax: =Or(condition1,condition2)
Ex: =Or(6>4,4>6)
Result: True.
c. NOT: This function returns complement of the result. If the condition is true, not(condition) is false
and vice versa.
Syntax: =Not(condition) Ex: =Not(6>9)
Result: True.
d. If: This function returns one of the two values depending on some condition. If the condition
evaluates to true, then the first value is returned; else the second value is returned. .
Syntax: =If(condition, “true block”, “false block”)
Ex: =If(D2>14, “Major”, “Minor”)
Result: Major.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
583
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007
4. Date and Time Functions:
a. Date: This function returns date in system date format given using year, month and day.
Syntax: =Date(year,month,day)
Ex: =Date(2010,5,25)
Result: 25-05-2010
b. Date value: This function returns serial number of the given date-text.
Syntax: =Datevalue(“Date”)
Ex: =Datevalue(“25-05-2010”)
Result: 40323.
c. Day: This function returns day of the given serial number.
Syntax: =Day(“serial number”)
Ex: =Day(“40323”)
Result: 25.
d. Month: This function returns the month of the given serial number.
Syntax: =Month(“serial number”)
Ex: =Month(“40323”)
Result: 5.
e. Year: This function returns year of the given serial number.
Syntax: =Year(“serial number”)
Ex: =Year(“40323”)
Result: 2010.
f. Days360: This function returns the number of days between given starting date and ending date. This
function assumes there are twelve 30-day months in an year.
Syntax: =Days360(“starting date”,”ending date”)
Ex: =Days360(“5/23/2010”,”6/23/2010”)
Result: 30
g. Today: This function returns system date.
Syntax: =Today( )
Ex: =Today( )
Result: 5/23/2010.
h. Now: This function returns system date and time.
Syntax: =Now( )
Ex: =Now( ) Result:7/28/2014 1:05:30 PM
i. Time: This function returns system time format.
Syntax: =Time(Hour,Minutes,Seconds)
Ex: =Time(1,25,45)
Result: 1:25 PM
j. Time value: This function returns serial number of given time.
Syntax: =Timevalue(“Hr:Min:Sec”)
Ex: =Timevalue(“8:20:50”)
Result: 0.347800926.
k. Hour: This function returns the hour of the given serial number.
Syntax: =Hour(“serial number”)
Ex: =Hour(“0.347800926”)
Result: 8
l. Minute: This function returns the minute of the given serial number.
Syntax: =Minute(“serial number”)
Ex: =Minute(“0.347800926”)
Result: 20
m. Second: This function returns the second of the given serial number.
Syntax: =Second (“serial number”)
Ex: =Second (“0.347800926”)
Result: 50
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
584
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007
n. WeekDay: This function returns the weekday of the given serial number.
Syntax: =Weekday(“serial number”)
Ex: =WeekDay(“0.347800926”)
Result: 5
5. Mathematical and Trigonometric functions.
a. Absolute: This option returns absolute value of a given number. Absolute value means the value
without its sign. positive value of given negative value.
Syntax: =Abs(negative value)
Ex: =Abs(-90)
Result: 90
=abs(75) Result: 75
b. Factorial: This function returns factorial of given number.
Syntax: =Fact(number)
Ex: =Fact(5)
Result: 120.
c. Even: This function rounds a positive number up and negative number down to the nearest even
integer. (returns next even number of given odd number.)
Syntax: =Even(odd number)
Ex: =Even(7)
Result: 8
=even(-5) Result: -6
d. Odd: This function rounds a positive number up and negative number down to the nearest odd
integer. (returns next odd number of given even number)
Syntax: =Odd(even number)
Ex: =Odd(8)
Result: 9.
=odd(-6) Result: -7
e. Integer: This function returns only integer value.
Syntax: =Int(number with decimal) Ex: =Int(10.50)
Result: 10
f. Ln(natural logarithm): This function returns natural logarithm of given number.
Syntax: =Ln(number)
Ex: =Ln(1000)
Result: 6.907755279
g. Log: This function returns logarithm of given number using base.
Syntax: =Log(number, base number)
Ex: =Log(100,2)
Result: .698970004
h. Log 10: This function returns logarithm of given number using base 10.
Syntax: = Log(number)
Ex: =Log(100,2)
Result: 6.643856
i. Square Root: This function returns square root of given number.
Syntax: =Sqrt(number)
Ex: =Sqrt(144)
Result: 12
j. Mod: This function finds out modulus of given number using and divisor. This function returns the
remainder after dividing the given number by the divisor.
Syntax: =Mod(number,divisor) Ex: =Mod(5,2)
Result: 1
k. Power: This function returns result of the given number raised to given power. .
Syntax: =Power(number,power) Ex:=Power(2,3)
Result: 8
l. Pi: This function returns default value of pi.
Syntax: =Pi()
Ex: =Pi()
Result: 3.1415
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
585
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007
m. Sum: This function returns sum of all numbers in the given range.finds out total of given numbers.
Syntax: =Sum(number1,number2,number3) or sum(A1:A5)
Ex: =Sum(10,20,30)
Result: 60
Sum(h1:h4)
Result:
n. Sumif: This function finds the sum of those numbers in the range that satisfy the given condition.
Syntax: =Sumif(range,”condition”)
Ex: =Sumif(A1:A5,”>50”)
Result: 2
o. Product: This function finds out product of all numbers in the given range. multiplication of given
number.
Syntax: =Product(Range)
Ex: =Product(A1:A2) Result: 6
p. Maximum: This function returns maximum value within a range.
Syntax: =Max(range)
Ex: =Max(A1:A5)
Result: 17
q. Minimum: This function returns minimum value within range.
Syntax: =Min(range)
Ex: =Min(A1:A5)
Result: 1
Defined Names Group
1. Define Name: We can give a name to the selected cells as shown in the below
picture.
2. Use in formula: The name given to the cell can be used in formulas instead
of their addresses. This option lists available names in the workbook and you are allowed to select
any one to use in the formula.
3. Create from selection: It allows us to automatically generate
names from the selected cells. The names may be listed in the
top/bottom/right/left side of the cells.
Formula Auditing Group
1. Trace precedents: It shows arrow to indicate what cells affect
the value of the currently selected cell.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
586
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007
2. Trace dependents: It shows arrow to indicate which are the cells affected by the currently selected
cell.
3. Trace Error: It shows arrow to the cells which leads to error along with the explanation
for the error.
4. Remove arrows: It removes all the arrows.(Precedent and dependent arrows)
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
587
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007
5. Remove precedents arrows: It removes only precedent arrows.
6. Remove dependents arrows: It removes only dependent arrows.
7. Watch Window: This option used to open the watch window, in this we can monitor the
values of certain cells as changes are made to the sheet.
Calculation Group
1. Calculation Option: Using this option we can specify when calculations are
performed. Calculations can be performed automatically or manually. Usually all
calculations are performed as soon as changes are made to the related cell.
2. Calculate now (F9): Used to update the calculation now in entire workbook. This
is
required only if automatic calculation has been turned off.
3. Calculate Sheet (Shift+F9): Used to update the calculation now in the entire sheet.
DATA TAB
Get External Data Group
1. From Access: This option is used to import the table from
MS Access database.
2. From Web: Import the data from the web.
3. From Text: Using this option we can import the text from
Notepad, WordPad applications etc.,
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
588
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007
Sort & Filter Group
1. Sort: This option is used to arrange the contents in ascending or
descending order.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
589
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007
2. Filter: Used to apply or remove the filters to the selected fields.
3. Clear: It lets you to clear the filter and display all the records.
4. Advanced filter: We can specify complex
criteria for filters. The filtered list can be in
place or can be copied to another location.
Steps:
1. First select all the data, go to filter.
2. Click in criteria range box, select place
& madras cell.
3. Click in copy to box & click in any 1
cell from a sheet.
Data Tools Group
1. Text to Columns: It is used to divide column contents into
multiple columns.
Steps:
1. Type the field names in a single cell as show in the
below picture
2. Click on “ text to columns” ; Wizard window appears on the screen. Choose the
appropriate option (delimited or fixed width) . click on next
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
590
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007
3. In step 2 click on next button
4. In step 3 click on finish button
2. Remove Duplicates: Using this option we can remove the duplicate records present in the selected
range of cell. In this you can find number 1 is repeated, to remove the duplicate: Select the data
range, click on remove duplicates and click on OK button.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
591
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007
3. Data validation: It is used to ensure that a valid data is entered in the selected range of cells. Set
the condition for selected cell or cells. We can also give the input message and error messages.
Steps:
1. Go to data validation change the allow condition from any value to whole number.
2. In data select between & give the numbers as minimum 1 & maximum 5, then click on ok button
3. Type the Error Alert message in the Error message box, finally click on ok button
4. Consolidate: This option is used to consolidate values from one sheet to another sheet using
functions like sum, average, count etc.
5. What if Analysis Group
a. Scenarios: This option changes references cell values then automatically changes the target
values.
Steps:
1. Type the values & get total.
2. Select the data except total.
3. Go to scenario manager from what if analysis option
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
592
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007
4. Click on Add button
5. Type the Scenario name as show in the below, then click on OK button.
6. Change the values if required then click on OK button.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
593
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007
7. Click on Summary button.
8. Finally click on OK button
9. Summary sheet will be ready
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
594
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007
b. Goal seek: This option is used to change the target value; the difference value will be added to
reference cell.
Steps:
1. Type the values & get the total
of it.
2. Click on the total cell, Goto goal
seek.
3. Enter the required value in the
“To value” field.
4. Click on the “By changing cell”
box & then click on any cell on
the worksheet.
5. Finally click on OK button
c. Data Table: A data table is a range of cells that shows how
changing certain values in your worksheet affect the results of
the formulas. Data tables provide a shortcut for calculating
multiple versions in one operation and a way to view and
compare the results of all of the different variations together
on your worksheet.
Steps:
1. Create a table by giving per day value & enter the
number of total days in a month.
2. Create a product of 185 x 30, we get 5550
3. Type the working days of the employees, & select
as above picture.
4. Go to Data Table & click on Column input cell.
5. Select the number B2 cell (30).
6. Finally click on OK button
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
595
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007
Outline Group
1. Group: It is used to group the selected rows and columns.
2. Ungroup: This option used to remove the grouping and we can also
show and hide grouping rows and columns.
3. Subtotal: This option is used to find different functions like sum,
average, count etc.
Steps:
1. Create a table as shown in the below picture.
2. Select the data & goto Subtotal.
3. Change the slno to course in “At each change in ”.
4. Finally click on OK button.
4. Show Detail: Used to expand the grouped cells.
5. Hide Detail: Used to group the selected cells.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
596
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007
REVIEW TAB
Proofing Group
Spelling (F7): This option checks the spelling mistakes.
Research(Alt+Click): It is used to search nearest meaning of the
selected word.
Thesaurus (Shft+F7): It is used to search nearest meaning of the
selected word, also can be replaced with the selected text.
Translate: Used to translate the selected text into different language.
Comments Group
1. New Comment: Used to create new comment.
2. Delete: Used to delete the comment.
3. Previous: To go to previous comment.
4. Next: To go to next comment.
5. Show / Hide Comment: Used to show or hide the comments at a time.
6. Show all comments: Used to show or hide all the comments at a time.
Changes Group
1. Protect Sheet: Used to protect the active sheet by giving
a password.
2. Protect WorkBook: Used to protect the active entire
WorkBook by giving a password.
3. Share WorkBook: It allows to share the WorkBook, so
that the other user can use the WorkBook.
4. Protect & Share WorkBook: Used to protect & share the WorkBook.
5. Allow users to edit ranges: Used to allow to the user to make changes in the sheet.
6. Track Changes
a. Highlight Changes: Used to highlights the changes done by the user.
b. Accept / Reject Changes: Used to accept or reject the changes done by the user.
c.
VIEW TAB
WorkBook Views Group:
We can see the document in 5 different views like print
1. Normal.
2. Page layout.
3. Page break Preview.
4. Custom Views.
5. Full Screen.
Show/ Hide Group
1. Ruler: This option is used to show or hide the ruler.
2. Gridlines: This option is used to show or hide the gridlines.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
597
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007
3. Message Bar: This option is used to show or hide the message bar.
4. Formula Bar: This option is used to show or hide the Formula bar.
5. Headings: This option is used to show or hide the headings of the sheet
Zoom Group
1. Zoom: Used to increase or decrease the zoom level. The minimum zoom
is 10 %, by default it will be 100 % & the maximum zoom level is 400 %.
2. 100%: It apply to 100 % zoom size, this is the default zoom size.
3. Zoom to Selection: Used to zoom only the selected range of cells.
Window Group
1. New Window: Used to create a new duplicate window of
the active sheet.
2. Arrange All : This option used to arrange all the open
window.
3. Freeze Panes: Used to freeze or unfreeze the sheet.
4. Split: Using this option we can split the sheet.
5. Hide: We can hide the active sheet.
6. Unhide: We can unhide the active sheet.
7. Save workspace: Used to save all the open WorkBook with a single name.
Note: All the 3 workbooks will be save with a single name.
8. Switch windows: Used to switch between open windows.
Macro’s (Alt+F8) Group
1. View Macro: It lists out the created macros.
2. Record Macro: Used to record the set of action done by the user in a document,
which can be used later to repeat the same actions.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
598
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
PRESENTATION SOFTWARE : POWERPOINT 2007
90 | P a g e
PRESENTATION
SOFTWARE
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
599
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
PRESENTATION SOFTWARE : POWERPOINT 2007
CHAPTER - 6
POWERPOINT 2007
INTRODUCTION
PowerPoint is a powerful presentation graphics program that provides everything you need to
produce an effective presentation in the form of on-screen slides, a slide presentation on a Web site, or
black-and-white or color overheads. The extension name for Ms PowerPoint Presentation is .PPTX.
The default slide orientation is Landscape. Power point 2007 used to help you produce professional
presentations, PowerPoint 2007 provides a comprehensive set of features that you can use to create and
format your information. You can create and add designer-quality SmartArt graphics with only a few
clicks of your mouse.
PowerPoint 2007 comes with new themes that offer you a wide range of options when you are
formatting your presentations. In the past, formatting a presentation took more time because you had to
choose the color and style options individually for your tables, charts, and graphics and make sure that
they matched one another. Themes simplify the process of creating professional presentations. Just
select the theme that you want, and PowerPoint 2007 does the rest. With one click, the background,
text, graphics, charts, and tables all change to reflect the theme that you select, ensuring that all
elements in your presentation complement one another. And best of all, you can apply the same theme
to a Word 2007 document or Excel 2007 worksheet that you apply to your presentation. The extension
of a Powerpoint file is *.pptx
We can work with different layout views like:
1. Normal View (Default view): Normal view is the main editing view, where you write and design
your presentation
2. Slide Sorter View: Slide Sorter view is a view that shows all the slides in a file at a time in
thumbnail form.
3. Notes Page View: You can type your notes in the Notes pane, which is located just below the Slide
pane in Normal view. Notes are not visible during the slide show.
4. Slide Show View(F5): Slide Show view takes up the full computer screen, like an actual
presentation. In this view, you see your presentation the way your audience will. You can see how
your graphics, timings, movies, animated effects (Animate: To add a special visual or sound effect
to text or an object. For example, you can have your text bullet points fly in from the left, one word
at a time, or hear the sound of applause when a picture is uncovered.) and transition effects will
effect during the actual presentation.
Using PowerPoint, you can prepare each component of a presentation: individual slides, speaker notes,
an outline, and audience handouts
Turn on/off Ruler: View Tab Show/Hide Group Ruler.
Turn on/off visual gridlines: View Tab Show/Hide Group Gridlines
Gridlines and rulers are used to measure and line up objects on a slide.
Basic Tips
It is best to outline your entire presentation before working too much on the style and layout of your
presentation. At the end concentrate on style and format of your slides as it consumes less time.
Keep in mind the content of your presentation is the most important part of it!
Keep your points short and straightforward. Points should be complimentary to your oral
presentation.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
600
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
PRESENTATION SOFTWARE : POWERPOINT 2007
PowerPoint allows you to add a lot of distracting sounds and excessive animations to your
presentation. It is best to keep all animation as simple as possible and only use sounds if absolutely
necessary.
Stay away from unusual fonts. If you are presenting on an unfamiliar computer, the font you have
chosen may not work. Arial and Times New Roman are common fonts.
Think of contrast. If you use a dark background, use light-colored text and vice versa. Refrain from
using backgrounds that will obscure your text color.
THE OFFICE LOGO
The first thing most people will need to relearn is where to go to
open a document, create a new one,
save your document and print.
Clicking the Office logo at the top
left of the screen will provide most
of the items formerly found under
the file menu including those listed
above. Beside the logo you also
will find a disk icon to save your document as well as the undo
and redo buttons. More buttons can be added to this “Quick
Access Toolbar” through the word options mentioned in the
next section.
As you can see here the Office logo opens up listing
your options for new, open etc. and also contains a list of your
recent documents for quick opening. Any of the items listed
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
601
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
PRESENTATION SOFTWARE : POWERPOINT 2007
with an arrow beside them will replace the recent documents on the right with the options associated
with the menu item. You should also see at the bottom right of this menu a button for exiting
PowerPoint and changing PowerPoint’s options.
Save as
The save as option will provide you with the most common file formats to save your document
in. The common ones are PowerPoint Presentation, PowerPoint Show, and PowerPoint 97-2003
Presentation. The last one is the option most people should be using currently, especially if they wish
to share documents with others who do not have the new version of Office.
Here you can choose from Print, Quick Print and Print Preview. Print brings up the standard
print dialog box, quick print will print one copy without any dialog box coming up and print preview
will bring up the print preview screen.
Prepare
The prepare menu’s most common options are Properties, Inspect Document, Mark as Final
and Run Compatibility Checker. The properties option allows you to setup metadata for the document
like Author, Title, keywords, comments and others. Inspect Document will scan the document for any
hidden data like comments and annotations, and any hidden collaboration data. This is very useful
when making a previously private document public. It will help you find any comments or changes
made previously that should not be made public. Mark as Final will mark the document as a final copy
and make it read only so changes cannot be made. The last common item, Run Compatibility Checker
will scan the document for new features that were used and show you these.
THE HOME TAB
The home tab the basic formatting tools found in PowerPoint 2007. You will find five sections,
Clipboard, Slides, Font, Paragraph and Editing. The options are similar to other office packages.
Slides
The slides section has tools to add new slides, change the layout of a slide, also
reset or delete a slide. Both the New Slide and Layout sections offer drop down menus
with predefined slide layouts to use.
Drawing
The main part of the drawing section
gives you a large number of shapes, lines
arrows and flowchart pictures. The arrange
icon is used to bring an item forward or
backwards on the screen or group and ungroup
objects. The quick styles icon gives a drop down with predefined shape style options or you can use the
shape fill, shape outline, or shape effects icons to create your own styles.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
602
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
PRESENTATION SOFTWARE : POWERPOINT 2007
INSERT TAB
The insert tab has five sections for inserting most types of objects. The sections are tables,
illustrations, links, text and media clips.
Media Clips
Sounds or movies can be added through this section. A large number file types can
be added here including, mp3, midi, wav , wma, wmv, avi and many others.
DESIGN TAB
The design tab has three sections, Page Setup, Themes and Background.
Page Setup
Page setup provides you with the tools to slide size and orientation. The slide
size option allow for some predefined sizes like letter, legal, overhead, and tv aspect
ratios like 4:3 standard resolution and 16:9 widescreen.
Themes
The themes section gives predefined colour, fonts and effects or you can choose your own.
Background
The background section lets you choose a background style or hide the
background on the selected slide..
ANIMATIONS TAB
The animations tab contains three sections, preview, animations and transitions to this slide.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
603
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
PRESENTATION SOFTWARE : POWERPOINT 2007
Preview
The preview section will show you’re the current slides animation to allow you to
check it is the way you want it.
Animations
Here you can create your own animations for use in the slide.
Transition to This Slide
The remainder of the Animations tab is taken up by the Transition to This Slide section. Here
you can apply different transitions to be used between slides like fades, slides and many more. You can
set options for speed, sounds, and timing.
SLIDE SHOW TAB
The Slide Show tab contains three sections, start slide show, set up and monitors.
Start Slide Show
The start slide show section is used to start your slide show
either from the beginning or the current slide. You can also use this
section to create a custom slide show. Custom slide shows can be
used to create one thirty minute presentation and one sixty minute
presentation using the same set of slides but omitting some for the
shorter show.
Set Up
The main features of this section are setup a slide show, record
narration and rehearse timings.
Monitors
This section provides the tools to change the resolution
of the slide show choose which monitor to display it on if you
have multiple monitors and use presenter view if you have
multiple monitors.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
604
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
PRESENTATION SOFTWARE : POWERPOINT 2007
REVIEW TAB
The review tab offers three sections which include proofing, comments, and protect.
Proofing
The proofing section provides the standard spelling check, a
thesaurus, research tools that include MSN search and Microsoft
Encarta encyclopedia. You will also find translation tools to help with
single words or the whole document. The translation of the entire
document is done by an online service called Wordlingo.
Comments
The comments section allows you to add comments to a
document for easier collaboration. You can cycle through the
comments to find out what notes you left for yourself or others and
you can delete a comment that was made when it is no longer
relevant.
Protect
The protect section gives you options to add a password and protect the document.
You can restrict changes to formatting and editing or the whole document. If you use
Windows Live you can also manage permissions for specific users who also have Windows
Live.
VIEW TAB
The view tab offers six sections which include presentation views, show/hide, zoom,
Color/Greyscale, window and macros.
Presentation Views
The presentation views section switches you between normal,
slide sorter, notes page, slide show, slide master, handout master and
notes master. Normal shows you one slide in the centre with
thumbnails of all slides to the left of the screen. Slide sorter fills the
centre with thumbnails of all slides which you can drag around to sort them. The notes page view
shows the slide on the top section and notes you add in a bottom section. Slide show will start the slide
show from the beginning. The Slide master, handout master and notes master views allow you to
change what the presentations themes will follow by working with a master setup. Each of these master
views also provide another tab to the ribbon.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
605
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
PRESENTATION SOFTWARE : POWERPOINT 2007
Show/Hide
The show/hide section will toggle certain tools on or off the screen including
rulers, gridlinesand message bar. The rulers will show along the top and left side of the
screen. Gridlines will cover your entire document inside the margins. They will be
visible on screen but don’t print. The message bar can only be displayed when there is a
message to be displayed. One common reason for the message bar to display is when
macros have been enabled or disabled.
Zoom
The zoom section provides tools to zoom into or out of the document. You can
choose your own zoom factor or use one of the predefined zoom factors.
Color/Greyscale
This section allows you to switch between color, grayscale or pure black
and white. This will allow you to see how slides will look when printed on a black
and white printer.
Window
The new window button will open your current document in a new
window. The arrange all button will take your currently open windows and
stack them one on top of the other. This is also where you can easily switch
between windows.
Macros
The macros section provides the tools required to work with and create basic macros.
You can view existing macros or record your own. Choose record macro from the drop down
and then perform the functions you do often, like change the page layout, and style of the
document. Once you have done those tasks then stop recording. You will be able to use that
macro over again to shorten the steps you need to take every time you need to perform that set of tasks.
APPLYING THEME:
A theme can make your presentation look more professional. The default theme uses black text on a
white background. This is somewhat boring and simple, but good for accessibility. To see the different
themes:
1. Click on the Design tab – the ribbon changes to show a number of different themes:
2. Move the mouse pointer over any of the themes – the current slide will display the chosen
theme.
3. For more schemes, click on the [More] button at the foot of the scroll bar on the right of the
themes.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
606
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
PRESENTATION SOFTWARE : POWERPOINT 2007
4. Click on your preferred theme - both slides should now display the new theme
The theme will then be applied to all the slides in your presentation
1. Colors -- Changes the color scheme of the current theme
2. Fonts -- Changes the font of the current theme
3. Effects -- Changes the effects of the current theme
LAYOUT
PowerPoint 2007 provides 9 standard layouts, People creating presentations in your
organization can then use either the built-in or your custom layouts to create their presentations.
On the View Tab goto Presentation views group click Normal
In Normal view, in the pane that contains the outline and slide tabs, click the slide tabs
Click the slide that you want to apply a layout to:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout and then select the layout you want.
The different Slide layouts are : Title Slide, Title with content, Section Header, Two
Content, Comparison, Title Only, Blank, Content with caption and Picture with caption.
SLIDE TRANSITIONS
Instead of simply moving abruptly from one slide to another during a presentation, slide
transitions allow slides to dissolve into each other, using a variety of different special effects. These can
make your on-screen presentation look even better and more professional.
1. Check you are in Normal view and
that the first slide is selected
2. Move to the Animations tab at the
top to show the following ribbon:
Across the middle of the ribbon, you’ll see certain transition effects. As you move over each one, you’ll
see the transition effect on the slide. Just to the right of these is a vertical scroll bar – use the up and
down arrows on the scroll bar to change the set of transition effects that are showing (there is also a
More arrow underneath that will show you all the different transition effects in one window).
3. Choose one of the transition effects for the first slide
Note that a small star symbol appears to the left of the first slide miniature - this indicates that a
transition has been setup on this slide. Next, explore the options in the Transition to This Slide group on
the ribbon:
4. Set the Transition Speed: of the transition effect to medium or slow to see the effect more clearly.
You can also set up a Transition Sound::
5. Under Advance Slide, set the next slide to appear Automatically After a set number of seconds by this
you can move slide automatically without having to click the mouse button.
6. Move to the next slide and repeat steps 3 to 5, choosing different effects
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
607
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
PRESENTATION SOFTWARE : POWERPOINT 2007
7. Finally save your presentation (press <Ctrl +S>) then run it (<F5>) to see the effects - press <Esc>
when you've seen enough
Having different transition effects between slides may add interest but it isn’t good practice. It distracts
from the talk and isn’t good for accessibility. It’s best to stick to one transition throughout (and only use
a different one for effect, if you need to). To standardize the transition:
8. Remove the current effects by choosing [No Transition] (the first one in the list of available effects)
then click on the [Apply to All] button
9. Next, choose your preferred transition (repeat steps 3 and 4) then click on [Apply to All]
10. Finally, repeat step 7 to see the effects
FORMATTING SLIDE DESIGN
1. Change the Background
Design Tabs Background Background Styles
Click on the Format Background button at the bottom. The Format Background dialog box will appear.
You can set the color, solid or gradient, transparency or choose picture/texture fill
Click the Close button to apply changes only to the current slide
Click on Apply to all to apply changes to all the slides.
Formatting Presentation Using the Slide Master
The Slide Master acts as a template for your entire presentation. Altering anything on the Slide Master
will change the formatting of all the slides in your presentation.
To open the Slide Master :View Tab >> Presentation Views >> Slide Master
The Slide Master Tab appears on the left-hand side of Home Tab
To Edit the Slide Master : Clicking on the Slide Master Tab provides a set of Slide Master
Formatting Groups:
Edit Master
Master Layout
Edit Theme
Background - set the background for all the slides o Page Setup
Close -- Click on Close button to go back to Normal View.
Choose the top Slide Master Slide in the left panel
You can edit the Background, Bullet styles, Slide Titles, and Title animations here.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
608
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
PRESENTATION SOFTWARE : POWERPOINT 2007
View
On Screen
Use To
Normal View
Shows the slides in miniature,
the slide in full, and speaker's
notes underneath
Edit contents of slides; try out
animation effects
Slide Sorter
Shows a miniature of each
slide in the current order
Add, delete and move slides;
rehearse timings
Slide Show
Plays
the
presentation
on
screen from the current slide
Practice presentation
MASTER SLIDES
The Master Slide is the design template or design theme used for the slides within your presentation.
There are 4 different master slides -- title master, notes master, handout master and the most common,
the slide master.
Slide Master: Dictates the format of your slides
Handout Master: Controls the look of printed handouts
Notes Master: Determines the characteristics of printed speaker notes
The default design template when you first start a Power Point presentation is a plain, white slide. This
plain, white slide and the font choices used on it were created in the slide master. All slides in a
presentation are created using the fonts, colors and graphics in the slide master, with the exception of
the Title slide (which uses the title master). Each new slide that you create takes on these aspects.
Many colorful, preset design templates are included with PowerPoint to make your presentations more
interesting. To make global changes to your slides, edit the master slide rather than each individual
slide.
Also Known As: The term master slide is often used incorrectly when referring to the slide master,
which is only one of the master slides.
a. A Slide Master is the top slide in a hierarchy of slides that stores information about the theme and
slide layouts of a presentation, including the background, color, fonts, effects, placeholder sizes, and
positioning. Every presentation contains at least one slide master. The key benefit to using slide masters
is that you can make universal style changes to every slide in your presentation, including ones added
later to the presentation. When you use a slide master, you save time because you don't have to type the
same information on more than one slide. The slide master especially comes in handy when you have
extremely long presentations with lots of slides. Because slide masters affect the look of your entire
presentation, when you create and edit a slide master or corresponding layouts, you work in Slide
Master view.
1. A slide master in Slide Master view
2. Slide layouts associated with the slide master
Note : When you want your presentation to contain two
or more different styles or themes (such as backgrounds,
colors, fonts, and effects), you need to insert a slide
master for each different theme.
b. Title Master: Title Master option is not available until you create a new Slide Master for that
presentation.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
609
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
PRESENTATION SOFTWARE : POWERPOINT 2007
Note Finish working on the slide master before you create or change the title master, because the title
master inherits some styles, such as font type and size, from the slide master. Also note that if you make
changes directly to the title master, those changes are preserved and are not affected by changes to the
slide master.
How to Create a Title Master
To create a title master, follow these steps:
1. On the View menu, point to Master, and then click Slide Master.
2. On the Insert menu, click New Title Master.
3. Make the changes that you want.
For example, you can insert text, change the fonts, change the color or size of the text, and add
a picture or text box. Make sure that you do not delete or add characters in the placeholder text. On
the Master Toolbar, click Close.
c. Handout Master : You can use the Handout Master in PowerPoint to set the appearance of all
printed handouts for a presentation. To access this view,
Goto ViewPresentation Views Click on Handout Master tab in the Ribbon. This will then
display the handout master for the presentation in the main window.
Doing this will display the handout master for the presentation in the main window. You will also
see the “Handout Master” tab appear in the Ribbon.
Select which handout layout to modify by selecting the desired layout from the “Slides Per Page”
drop-down in the “Page Setup” button group on the “Handout Master” tab in the Ribbon.
You can modify the placeholder information in the main window, if desired.
You can check or uncheck the placeholders shown in the “Placeholders” button group to add or
remove those items from the layout.
When finished, click the “Close Master View” button in the Close” button group on the “Handout
Master” tab to close the view.
d. Notes Master :
You can make changes to the notes master in PowerPoint to alter the appearance of the “Notes Page”
view of presentation slides. You can modify the content of the notes master in PowerPoint to impact the
layout of the notes page view of your presentation.
To alter the appearance of the “Notes Page” view of a presentation’s slides, click the “Notes
Master” button in the “Master Views” button group (“Presentation Views” button group in
2007) on the “View” tab in the Ribbon.
The notes master for the current presentation will be displayed in the main window and you
will also see the “Notes Master” tab appear in the Ribbon.
Modify the content of the notes master to change the layout of the notes page view within your
current presentation.
You can check or uncheck the placeholders shown in the “Placeholders” button group to add or
remove those items from the layout.
After changing your notes master, you can click the “Close Master View” button in the Close”
button group on the “Notes Master” tab to close the view.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
610
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
PRESENTATION SOFTWARE : POWERPOINT 2007
ANIMATION SCHEMES
PowerPoint allows information on your slides to appear one item at a time. This stops your audience
from reading ahead of you, making them concentrate on each point individually. Try the following to
animate your bullet points:
1. Click on a slide with a bulleted list on it (eg slide 2) and make sure that the Animations tab is still
showing on the Ribbon
2. Click within the bullet point area on the slide and then click on the list
arrow next to No Animation in the Animations group :
3. Only a few animation schemes are listed. Some bring in all the bullet
points together, eg Fade All At Once, while others bring them in one by
one, eg Fade By 1st Level Paragraphs. As you move the mouse over the
list, you are shown what each animation looks like on the slide. Try
setting up various animations for your slides:
4. From the list of animations choose one of them, Ex: Fly In By 1st Level
Paragraphs
5. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for another slide with bullet points, choosing a
different animation
Tip: As with slide transition, it isn't a good idea to use too many different animations as they can
distract the viewer. Always bear accessibility in mind and avoid some of the more 'exciting' animations.
To see more of the available animation schemes and to get to further animation options:
5. Choose one of the slides with bullet points that you’ve already animated and click on the slide title
(or a picture if there’s one on the slide)
On the right-hand side of your PowerPoint window, the Custom
Animation Task Pane should be showing (this can always be
displayed by clicking on the [Custom Animation] button in
the Animations group):
6. Click on the [Add Effect] button followed by Entrance
from the submenu and then More Effects...
7. Choose an entrance effect (they range from Basic to Subtle
to Moderate to Exciting!) then click [OK]
8. Click the [Play] button to check that the changes you have made look correct
To change the animation order:
9. Click on the object you want to change then use the [Re-Order] buttons to move it up or down the
list - click on [Play] again to check the animation is now correct
10. Finally, save your presentation (press <Ctrl s>) then run it from the first slide (press <F5>)
Tip: You can also set up Emphasis and Exit effects and Motion Paths - for example, after bringing a
picture into the slide, you may want to emphasize it by making it grow in size. When the slide is
finished, you can get the picture to exit along a particular motion path. This is all done via the [Add
Effect] button (as step 6, above).
11. End by closing the
Custom
Animation
Task
Pane
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
611
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
PRESENTATION SOFTWARE : POWERPOINT 2007
Tip: If you right click on a slide you can choose whether to Apply to All Slides or Apply to Selected
Slides.
Usually, all the slides in a presentation will have the same theme but, if your presentation is split into
different sections, then you could consider using a different theme for each section.
Most of the themes use contrasting text and background colours to maximize accessibility, ie light text
on a dark background or dark text on a light background. This helps to make the text clearer and easier
to read. Note that some themes contain pictures or patterns that could cause viewing problems for
certain people. You can always apply a different theme later if you decide the current one is unsuitable.
5. Press <Ctrl s>to [Save] your presentation again
LAYOUT
Microsoft Office PowerPoint 2007 includes five built-in,
standard layouts, or you can create custom layouts that meet your
specific organizational needs. There are totally 9 layout are there in
MS PowerPoint. People creating presentations in your organization
can then use either the built-in or your custom layouts to create their
presentations.
Presenting the presentation
a. Manual Presentation:
View Tab >> Presentation Views >> Slide Show To move to
the next slide in your presentation do one of the following:
Click the left mouse button
Hit the spacebar
Use the arrow keys on the keyboard: Up or Left keys to go to previous slide (Move backward),
Right or Down keys to go to next slide (Move forward). Click on the Esc key on keyboard to
go back to Normal view.
b. Automatic Presentation: Animations Tab>> Transition to this Slide >> Advance Slide
Click on the check box for "Automatically After."
Set the time to automatically change to the next slide after a certain duration of time. This
feature is useful ifs you are under a time constraint or if you want to present in a more movie-like style.
REHEARSE TIMING
You can rehearse your presentation to make sure that it fits within a certain time frame. While you
rehearse, use the Slide Timing feature to record the time that you need to present each slide, and then
use the recorded times to advance the slides automatically when you give your presentation to your
actual audience. The Slide Timing feature is ideal for creating a self-running presentation.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
612
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
PRESENTATION SOFTWARE : POWERPOINT 2007
Rehearse and time the delivery of a presentation
NOTE: Be prepared to start delivering your presentation immediately after you complete step 1 below.
1. On the Slide Show tab, in the Set Up group, click Rehearse Timings. The Rehearsal toolbar
appears, and the Slide Time box begins timing the presentation.
The Rehearsal toolbar :
Next (advance to next slide)
Pause
Slide Time
Repeat
Total time for presentation
2. While you time your presentation, do one or more of the following on the Rehearsal toolbar:
To move to the next slide, click Next.
To temporarily stop recording the time, click Pause.
To restart recording the time after pausing, click Pause.
To restart recording the time for the current slide, click Repeat.
3. After you set the time for the last slide, a message box displays the total time for the presentation
and prompts you to do one of the following:
To keep the recorded slide timings, click Yes.
To discard the recorded slide timings, click No.
Slide Sorter view appears and displays the time of each slide in your presentation.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
613
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
INTERNET
INTERNET
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
614
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
INTERNET
CHAPTER – 7
INTERNET
INTRODUCTION
The Internet is a global system of interconnected computer networks that use the standard
Internet protocol suite (TCP/IP) to serve several billion users worldwide. It is a network of networks
that consists of millions of private, public, academic, business, and government networks, of local to
global scope, that are linked by a broad array of electronic, wireless and optical networking
technologies. The Internet carries an extensive range of information resources and services, such as the
inter-linked hypertext documents of the World Wide Web (WWW) and the infrastructure to support
email.
Email is an important communications service available on the Internet. The concept of
sending electronic text messages between parties in a way analogous to mailing letters or memos
predates the creation of the Internet. Pictures, documents and other files are sent as email attachments.
It is a global collection of computer networks, which are connected through cables, satellites and
telephone lines. Through internet we can access the information from websites present all round the
world.
The Internet can be explained as a network of computers, designed to receive and send data in
the form of e-mails, blogs, webcasts, etc. To put it in simple words, it can be treated as a super-massive
server, armed with a plethora of information which is used by billions of people simultaneously. The
Internet is basically a network that connects other, smaller networks. All modern technologies are
connected by the Internet, thereby leaving no stone unturned. This digital world can be a playground for
some
and
a
battlefield
for
others.
The Internet has become an indispensable business tool, which has helped bring the world closer.
Receiving news from across the world, accessing knowledge resources, and shopping online are simply
a click away. The Internet has tremendous potential and a lot to offer in terms of services. However,
like every other innovation in science and technology, the Internet comes with its own advantages and
disadvantages.
APPLICATION OF INTERNET
1. Education.
2. Communication.
3. Business.
4. Banking.
5. Hospitals.
6. Industries.
7. Transportation.
8. Scientific fields etc.,
ADVANTAGES OF INTERNET
1. Faster Communication.
The Internet has been mankind's greatest means of communication yet. Newer innovations are
only making it faster and more reliable. Today, we can initiate real-time communication with
someone
who
is
in
another
part
of
the
world.
For more personal and interactive communication, it is possible to avail the facilities of video
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
615
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
INTERNET
conferencing, chat and messenger services. With the help of these services, the geographically
fragmented countries have come together to form a community that is able to share its thoughts on
global issues, that affect each and every one of us. The Internet has given us a common platform
and medium through which we are able to explore other cultures and ideologies.
2. Abundant Information Resources
The Internet is a treasure trove of information; which offers knowledge on any given topic
under the sun. Search engines make information accessible on various subject matters such as,
government law and services, trade fairs and conferences, market information, new innovations and
technical support, and even dispense advice on love and relationships matters.
It has become common practice to seek assistance from the web in order to research and gather
resources for homework, office presentations, and supplement one’s own research. The web also
updates news about the latest breakthroughs in the field of medicine, technology, and other domains
of science. Numerous websites such as America's Doctor, have made it possible to seek online advice
from specialist doctors without having to actually fix an appointment.
3. Inexhaustible Education
The Internet has become an essential propagator of knowledge, both through free as well as
paid services. The credibility of this form of education and whether it is safe, secure, and trustworthy,
is usually proven through the quality and authenticity of content presented by each website. The
World Wide Web has become a remarkable avenue for the academically unprivileged, to amass
greater knowledge and know-how on subjects.
The entire scope of homeschooling has expanded because of increased accessibility to videos of
teachers giving lectures, showing diagrams and explaining concepts, much like a real classroom.
Nonprofit organizations too have opened websites that seek volunteers and donations in order to help
the ones in need. There are also sites like Wikipedia, Coursera, Babbel, Archive, and
Teachertube, among others, that have dedicated themselves to the art of imparting knowledge to
people of all age groups.
4. Entertainment for Everyone
Entertainment is one of the foremost reasons why people prefer surfing the Web. In fact, the
Internet has gained much success by marketing for several multifaceted entertainment industries.
Finding the latest updates about celebrities and exploring lifestyle websites have become day-to-day
activities of many Internet consumers. On the other hand, even celebrities are using the Internet
effectively for promoting their cause and for keeping their fans happy.
There are innumerable games that can be download, either for a price or for free. Indeed,
online gaming has tasted dramatic and phenomenal success because of its ever-increasing demand
throughout the world.
5. Social Networking and Staying Connected
One cannot imagine a social life without Facebook or Twitter. These portals have become
our means to stay connected with friends and family, and stay in touch with the latest happenings in
the world. Social networking has also evolved as a great medium to connect with like-minded
individuals and become a part of interesting groups and communities.
Apart from finding long-lost friends, the Internet also makes it easier to search and apply for
jobs and business opportunities on forums and communities. There are public chat rooms where users
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
616
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
INTERNET
can meet new people. For those who are single, the Internet also provides the option to select a
suitable dating partner through secure online profiles, that can be filtered as per personal preferences.
6. Online Services and E-Commerce
Thanks to numerous monetary services, we can perform all our financial transactions online.
We can book tickets for a movie, transfer funds, pay utility bills and taxes without having to leave
our homes or offices. Travel websites for instance, offer quick booking schemes and plan itineraries
as
per
the
preferences
of
their
clients.
E-commerce is used for all type of business dealing that involves the transfer of money through the
Internet. Online transaction of money has become the norm with almost all kinds of business. E-
commerce, with its vast reach over a variety of products and services, makes it possible to have the
client's orders delivered at their doorsteps. Websites such as eBay allow customers to bid, buy, sell,
and even auction products online.
NETWORK:
A computer network is a telecommunications network that allows computers to exchange data.
The physical connection between networked computing devices is established using either cable media
or wireless media.
It is Internet TCP/IP network, which is confined to a particular organization or company, where
it resides.
Requirements to Get Internet Connection:
1. Personal Computer
2. Telephone Line Connection / Cell phone.
3. Modem.
4. Internet Account.
5. Browsing Software.
BROWSING SOFTWARE:
It is client software, known as browser and is used to access web information.
Ex: Google Chrome, Mozilla Firefox, Internet Explorer, Opera, Safari,Maxthon, Rockmelt,
Seamonkey-project.org, deepnetexplorer, avanthbrowser, etc.,
MODEM (MODULATOR AND DEMODULATOR):
To connect your computer to the Internet, you need a modem. A modem is a device that sends
and receives computer information over a telephone line or high-speed cable. Modems are sometimes
built into the system unit, but higher-speed modems are usually separate components.
ISP’S (INTERNET SERVICE PROVIDERS):
ISP’s are one who provides internet account to the user. BSNL, VSNL. Reliance, Aircel,
Docomo etc., are all service providers.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
617
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
INTERNET
WHAT IS AN E-MAIL ?
A hundred years ago a message took 7 days to travel from Coast to coast and even longer to
cross the ocean. With the advent of airmail, that time was cut to 3 or 4 days. Today, overnight may
Delivery is available in certain areas, for a hefty surcharge. But faxing And electronic mail provide faster
and less expensive delivery of messages. So it is electronic creation of mails, which is transferred from
one computer to another computer.
The way electronic mail works on the internet is similar to the way the postal system works.
The address is the most important part of both standard letters and Email messages. If the address is
incorrect, the Intended recipients will never see the message. When you send electronic mail, your local
post office reads the E-mail address and either delivers the message to another local mail Account or
sends it to the internet. The postal service collects mail and Takes it to the local post office for processing
and routing.
WHAT IS A WEBSITE?
A website is a collection of web pages (documents that are accessed through the Internet). A
web page is what you see on the screen when you type in a web address, click on a link, or put a query
in a search engine. A web page can contain any type of information, and can include text, color,
graphics, animation and sound.
When someone gives you their web address, it generally takes you to their website's home
page, which should introduce you to what that site offers in terms of information or other services.
From the home page, you can click on links to reach other sections of the site. A website can consist of
one page, or tens of thousands of pages, depending on what the site owner is trying to accomplish.
Why Do People Visit Websites?
Generally, people look at websites for two primary reasons:
1. To find information they need. This could be anything from a student looking for pictures of
frogs for a school project, to finding the latest stock quotes, to getting the address of the nearest Thai
restaurant.
2. To complete a task. Visitors may want to buy the latest best-seller, download a software
program, or participate in an online discussion about a favorite hobby.
The main thing to remember in creating a website is that you're not creating the website for
you; you already know about the information or service you have to offer. You're creating the site for
your visitors, so it should contain the content they want, and be organized in a way that makes sense,
even to an outsider.
A website is a means of communication, and it is only successful when its message is received
by the intended user.
WEB PAGE:
Web pages make up the World Wide Web. These documents are written in HTML (hypertext
markup language) and are translated by your Web browser. Web pages can either be static or dynamic.
Static pages show the same content each time they are viewed. Dynamic pages have content that can
change each time they are accessed. These pages are typically written in scripting languages such as
PHP, Perl, ASP, or JSP. The scripts in the pages run functions on the server that return things like the
date and time, and database information. All the information is returned as HTML code, so when the
page gets to your browser, all the browser has to do is translate the HTML.
Please note that a Web page is not the same thing as a Web site.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
618
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
INTERNET
A Web site is a collection of pages. A Web page is an individual HTML document. This is a good
distinction to know, as most techies have little tolerance for people who mix up the two terms.
Eg: www.rediffmail.com, www.google.com, www.yahoo.com etc.,
WWW means World Wide Web.
NETWORKING
It is interconnection between two or more computers and it is a telecommunications network
that allows computers to exchange data. The physical connection between networked computing
devices is established using either cable media or wireless media
Types of Network
1. LAN (Local Area Network): It is a connection between computers within a building or an area
with the range of 10 Kms.
2. MAN (Metropolitan Area Network): It is a connection between computers within 10 to
100Kms or from place to place.
3. WAN (Wide Area Network): World Wide Connection between computers from one country to
another country.
EXPANSIONS
WWW
World Wide Web.
HTTP
Hyper Text Transfer Protocol.
HTML
Hyper Text Markup Language.
TCP
Transmission Control Protocol
IP
Internet Protocol
DNS
Domain Name Servers
FTP
File Transfer Protocol
URL
Uniform Resource Locator
MAC
Media Access Control address
E-MAIL (ELECTRONIC MAIL ) :
It is reported that the first thing that 90 % of Internet users do when they connected to the net
is to check if they have received any emails. Internet has drastically changed the mail pattern and has
made it incredibly fast.
Free Email services have become the main way of communication on this modern web.
Today most of us owns a free email services like Gmail, Outlook, Yahoo, AOL,Mail.com, Yandex,
Inbox.com, icloud,etc.,
Gmail : It is the most used and best free email service around the globe. It has a very simple user
interface. It provides a storage space of 15GB free to its users, it has a better security(https) and it
has best anti-spam shield, and malware and phishing protection. Gmail also includes other
features like Google drive(we can send email attachments up to 10 GB.
Outlook : It is a free email service from Microsoft. Previously it was known as Hotmail. Like
Gmail, Outlook provides a cleaner user interface, better privacy than Gmail. It provides
practically unlimited storage. Skype is integrated right in Outlook.com, Social Media integration
let you to chat with your Face book Friends.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
619
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
INTERNET
Yahoo Mail : Yahoo Mail is another popular web based free email service provided by Yahoo. It
will provide 1 TB of free email storage. Yahoo messenger is already integrated in Yahoo mail.
Its anti-spam features are best in class. Its interface is similar to Outlook.com
AOL Mail : AOL is the short name of America Online. AOL mail is also a popular and free
email service. It features unlimited email storage, spam and virus protection, spell checker, etc.,
Zoho Mail : It has a cleaner looking user interface. It has best privacy features. Other feature
includes Zoho docs, best security upto 99.9% up time. IOS and Android apps
Mail.com : It is another free email service operated by United Internet which is an internet
company based in Germany. It provides unlimited email storage, great spam and virus protection.
You can access mail from mobile devices also. We can send attachment up to 50MB
SURFING OR BROWSING
Surfing the Internet is a term typically used to describe an undirected type of web of browsing
where users whimsically follow one interesting link to another without a planned search strategy or
definite objective. Surfing the net has become a popular pastime, for many Internet users.
DOWNLOAD
It is hard to find an Internet user, who has not used it to download music and movies. Apart from it,
there are lots of other things that can be downloaded using internet as well. Internet is a best place to
download top songs, music tunes, mp3 musics, videos and much more.
Some of the websites which offer free download to music are
www.Youtube.com,
www.clickmaza.com,
www.indiamp3.com,
www.archive.org,
www.seekasong.com,
www.airmp3.me,
www.get-music.net,
www.song.pk,etc.,
Some of the websites which offer free download to music are
www.freebookspot.com,
http://www.free-ebooks.net/
http://www.free-ebooks.net/
http://manybooks.net/,
http://freecomputerbooks.com/
https://www.scribd.com/
SEARCH FOR RELEVANT INFORMATION
If you are not sure about something, then one of the easiest way to know more about it is by searching it
on internet. Internet has got a huge database of information on almost every subject and one can easily
find out lots of information on any topic using internet.
Some of the search engines are :
www.google.com,
www.yahoo.com,
www.aol.com,
www.msn.com,
www.lycos.com,
www.AltaVista.com.
www.Ask.com,
www.answers.com,
www.search.com.
BOOK TICKETS
Online booking has made things really easy. Be it a movie ticket or flight ticket, you can book just
about anything using Internet. The process is very easy, convenient and super fast.
www.bookmyshow.com,
www.yathra.com,
www.makemytrip.com,
www.goibibo.com,
www.busindia.com,
www.travelguru.com,
https://www.irctc.co.in/
www.ticketplease.com
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
620
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
INTERNET
SHOP ONLINE
The use of internet is not limited merely to booking tickets. With help of net, you can do a full-fledged
online shopping. On popular e-stores like EBay, Amazon etc., one can find almost anything that he
needs to buy. These e-stores are reliable and you can find quality products at most competitive rates on
them; and all this can be done without even stepping out of your home! Some of the online shopping
websites are:
www.flipkart.com,
www.snapdeal.com,
www.amazon.in,
www.lenskart.com,
www.caratlane.com ,
www.myntra.com,
www.ebay.in,
www.bigbasket.com,
www.yepme.com
MAKE FRIENDS
One of the best things about internet is that is has made communication very easy and convenient.
World is a small place now and one can get connected to just about any part of the world without any
problem. There are many sites and forums on net, where you can find likeminded people and make
friends with them. All this is possible only due to internet.
Socialize
Social networks have got really big since last decade. Face book and Twitter are the new online
hangouts of net users and who likes to share all the latest happening of their life on these social
networks and keep their profile duly updated. Now it is possible to be in touch with all of your friends
and relatives, however big they may count in numbers and all this is possible due to social networks,
which acts as a very convenient and effective platform for online socialization.
www.facebook.com,
www.twitter.com,
www.youtube.com,
https://plus.google.com,
www.tagged.com,
www.linkedin.com, etc.,
8. E BANKING
Banking was never so easy and convenient before! Right from opening an account to operating it, E-
Banking has really been a big boon for everyone. Not only can one view his account activities but he
can also execute online transactions from the comfort of the home.
Axis bank, ICICI bank, Karnataka bank, State bank, Canara, etc., offer e banking facilities
9. DATA SHARING
Data sharing was never so easy and quick before! It doesn’t matter, if you have to send a file or
song, a picture or a eBook,; with help of internet, you can send just about anything at anywhere and that
too, in no time!
Some of the data sharing sites are : Drop box, Media fire, 4shared, Google Drive, I cloud, Box,
Mega, Zippy share, etc.,
10. ONLINE FREELANCER
Internet has also created great opportunities for people who are interested in working online as
freelancers. Be it writing or web designing, e-commerce or entrepreneurship, now it is possible for
everyone to show off his talent online and make a living out of it. Millions of freelancers make their
living online and this number is increasing substantially every year.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
621
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
INTERNET
Toptal, Elance, Freelancer, Craigslist, Guru, 99designs, Peopleperhour, etc.,
DISADVANTAGES OF THE INTERNET
1. Theft of Personal Information
The use of Internet for banking, social networking, or other services, often makes our
personal information vulnerable to theft. There are no fail-proof ways to securing names, account
numbers, addresses, photos, and credit card numbers from being stolen or misused by thieving
websites and individuals.
Unscrupulous hackers can access our sensitive information through unsecured connections by
planting phishing software. Needless to say, the damage caused by having our identities misused
and our accounts broken into, is often irreparable and most of all, embarrassing.
2. Spamming
Spamming refers to sending unwanted e-mails, which serve no purpose and needlessly obstruct the
computer system. Such illegal activities can be very frustrating as it makes it slower to access our
email accounts and makes the entire service unreliable for consumers.
Spammers usually use bots that bombard the receiver with an endless line of advertisements. This
can prove to be increasingly perplexing, as it keeps getting mixed with our more important emails.
Fortunately, email service providers often have security systems in place to guard against
spamming. Fortunately, it is possible to report an email as spam, so that all emails from the same
email id or IP address, are blocked.
3. Malware Threats
One of the most annoying problems with the Internet is the ease with which any malware can
infect our computers. Internet users are often plagued by virus attacks that harm their computers
and important files. Virus programs are inconspicuous and may get activated simply by clicking a
seemingly harmless link. Computers connected to the Internet are extremely prone to IP targeted
virus attacks that may end up crashing the system completely.
Internet virus can be of three types. The first type of virus affects files and goes directly for a
particular file or file type. The second type harms system and executable boot files. These can be
particularly nasty, as they can effectively stop the computer from starting again. Lastly, there's the
macro virus, which is the most common as well as the most harmless of them all. The macro virus
simply keep changing things like symbols on word files. The type of virus that can replicate and
spread itself is known as worms. When a virus is disguised as something else, it's known as a
Trojan.
Some of the anti – malware softwares are : Hitman Pro, Malwarebytes, Zemana, Emsisoft,
MSRT, NPE.
4. Social Isolation, Obesity, and Depression
The biggest problem with having the Internet is, its ability to create rifts between the real
and virtual world. The virtual world can often seem so alluring that once hooked, going back to real
life seems daunting. There is an addiction for everything that pertains to the web and that includes
excessive surfing, online gambling, social networking, and gaming addiction. There are now
psychiatric clinics and doctors that specifically cater to resolving the problems created by the
Internet. These addictions create both physical as well as mental issues that can lead to health
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
622
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
INTERNET
complications if left unattended. It is ironic that, while it is easy to find plenty of online support for
agoraphobia, the Internet itself can be a big cause or trigger for it.
The link between obesity and the Internet is rather easy to understand. The more one sits in front of the
computer, the lesser one exercises. At the end of the longish list of physical and emotional maladies, is
depression. Since all problems are so deeply linked with one another and with the Internet, it isn't
uncommon for people to be afflicted with multiple issues. Recent studies and research have gone deep
enough to actually differentiate between compulsive Internet use and excessive Internet use.
Furthermore, thanks to smartphones, holding a simple face-to-face conversation seems out of the
ordinary as compared to chatting online.
Thus, even though the Internet has the potential to make our lives simple and convenient, it also holds
the power to wreak havoc. Its influence on us is mostly dictated by the choices we make while being
online. With prudent use, we can manage to harness its unlimited potential and steer clear of its
adverse effects.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
623
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
NUDI
115 | P a g e
NUDI
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
624
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
NUDI
CHAPTER – 8
NUDI
£ÀÄr (PÀ£ÀßqÀ)
PÀ£ÀßqÀ °¦ vÀAvÁæA±ÀUÀ¼À ²µÀÖvÉ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ KPÀgÀÆ¥ÀvÉ
»£É߯É
PÀ£ÀßqÀ °¦ vÀAvÁæA±ÀUÀ¼ÀÄ EzÀĪÀgÉUÉ ªÀÄÄRåªÁV ¥ÀzÀ ¸ÀA¸ÀÌgÀuÉUÉ (Word processing, DTP) ªÀiÁvÀæ
§¼ÀPÉAiÀiÁUÀÄwÛªÉ. PÀ£ÁðlPÀ ¸ÀPÁðgÀªÀÅ vÀ£Àß J®è ªÀåªÀºÁgÀUÀ¼À£ÀÆß UÀtQÃPÀj¹ «zÀÄå£Áä£À DqÀ½vÀ ªÀåªÀ¸ÉÜAiÀÄ£ÀÄß eÁjUÉ
vÀgÀ®Ä ¤zsÀðj¹zÉ. PÀ£ÁðlPÀzÀ C¢üPÀÈvÀ DqÀ½vÀ ¨sÁµÉAiÀÄÄ PÀ£ÀßqÀ. J®è UÀtQÃPÀÈvÀ ªÀåªÀºÁgÀUÀ¼ÀÄ PÀ£ÀßqÀzÀ¯Éèà EgÀÄvÀÛªÉ.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ ¸ÀPÁðgÀzÀ ªÀiÁ£Àå ªÀiÁf ªÀÄÄRåªÀÄAwæ ²æÃ J¸ï JA PÀȵÀÚ CªÀgÀÄ ªÀiÁZïð 18, 2000gÀAzÀÄ ¥ÀæPÀn¹zÀ ¸ÀgÀPÁgÀzÀ
ªÀiÁ»w vÀAvÀæeÕÁ£À ¤ÃwAiÀİè EzÀ£ÀÄß ¸ÀàµÀÖªÁV £ÀªÀÄÆ¢¸À¯ÁVzÉ. DzÀÝjAzÀ PÀ£ÀßqÀ °¦ vÀAvÁæA±ÀUÀ¼À£ÀÄß zÀvÀÛ¸ÀA¸ÀÌgÀuÉUÀÆ
§¼À¸À¨ÉÃPÁVzÉ.
F »£É߯ÉAiÀÄ°è °¦ vÀAvÁæA±ÀUÀ½UÉ ²µÀÖvÉ (standard), KPÀgÀÆ¥ÀvÉUÀ¼ÀÄ (uniformity) CvÀåUÀvÀå.
QðªÀÄuÉ «£Áå¸À
UÀtPÀUÀ¼À°è PÀ£ÀßqÀzÀ §¼ÀPÉUÉ ºÀ®ªÁgÀÄ QðªÀÄuÉ «£Áå¸ÀUÀ¼ÀÄ ®¨sÀå«zÀÄÝzÀjAzÀ §¼ÀPÉzÁgÀgÀ°è UÉÆAzÀ®«vÀÄÛ.
DzÀÝjAzÀ UÀtPÀ ¥ÀjtvÀgÀÄ ºÁUÀÆ PÀ£ÀßqÀ ¨sÁµÁ vÀdÕgÀ ¸ÀºÀPÁgÀzÉÆA¢UÉ PÀ£ÀßqÀ UÀtPÀ ¥ÀjµÀvÀÄÛ ªÁå¥ÀPÀªÁV CzsÀåAiÀÄ£À
£Àqɹ gÀƦ¹zÀ QðªÀÄuÉ «£Áå¸ÀªÀ£ÀÄß PÀ£ÁðlPÀ ¸ÀPÁðgÀªÀÅ C¢üPÀÈvÀ «£Áå¸ÀªÉAzÀÄ ªÀiÁ£ÀåªÀiÁrzÉ. J¯Áè vÀAvÁæA±À
vÀAiÀiÁgÀPÀgÀÆ F «£Áå¸ÀªÀ£Éßà PÀqÁØAiÀĪÁV ¤ÃqÀ¨ÉÃPÉAzÀÄ C¢ü¸ÀÆZÀ£É ºÉÆgÀr¸À¯ÁVzÉ.
PÀ£ÀßqÀPÀÆÌ 26 QðUÀ¼ÀÄ
UÀtPÀ AiÀÄAvÀæUÀ¼À eÉÆvÉ EgÀĪÀ EAVèµï CPÀëgÀUÀ¼À QðªÀÄuÉUÀ¼À°è EgÀĪÀ 26 QðUÀ¼À£ÀÄß ªÀiÁvÀæªÉà PÀ£ÀßqÀPÀÆÌ
§¼À¹PÉÆ¼Àî¨ÉÃPÀÄ.
ªÉÆzÀ°UÉ UÀtPÀAiÀÄAvÀæzÀ QðªÀÄuÉAiÀİè EAVèµï CPÀëgÀUÀ½UÁV ¤UÀ¢AiÀiÁVgÀĪÀ QðUÀ¼À ¥ÉÊQ AiÀiÁªÀ QðAiÀÄÄ
AiÀiÁªÀ PÀ£ÀßqÀ CPÀëgÀPÉÌ JA§ÄzÀ£ÀÄß UÉÆvÀÄÛ¥Àr¸À¨ÉÃPÀÄ.
»ÃUÉ ¤zsÀðj¹zÀ £ÀAvÀgÀ QðUÀ¼À ªÉÄÃ¯É PÀ£ÀßqÀ CPÀëgÀUÀ¼À£ÀÄß EAVèµï CPÀëgÀUÀ¼À ¥ÀPÀÌzÀ°è §gÉAiÀħºÀÄzÀÄ CxÀªÁ PÀ£ÀßqÀ
CPÀëgÀUÀ¼À£ÀÄß ªÀÄÄ¢æ¹zÀ CAlÄaÃnUÀ¼À£ÀÄß QðUÀ¼À ªÉÄÃ¯É CAn¸À§ºÀÄzÀÄ.
PÀ£ÀßqÀ ¨sÁµÉAiÀİè PɼÀPÀAqÀ 51 CPÀëgÀUÀ¼ÀÄ/aºÉßUÀ¼ÀÄ FUÀ §¼ÀPÉAiÀİèªÉ.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
625
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
NUDI
117 | P
13 ¸ÀégÀUÀ¼ÀÄ (C, D, E, F, G, H, IÄ, J, K, L, M, N, O)
`C' ¸ÀégÀ ¸À»vÀªÁzÀ 25 ªÀVÃðAiÀÄ ªÀåAd£ÀUÀ¼ÀÄ (PÀ, R, UÀ, WÀ, Y, ZÀ, bÀ, d, gÀhÄ, k, l, oÀ, qÀ, qsÀ, t, vÀ, xÀ,
zÀ, zsÀ, £À, ¥À, ¥sÀ, §, ¨sÀ, ªÀÄ)
`C' ¸ÀégÀ ¸À»vÀªÁzÀ 9 CªÀVÃðAiÀÄ ªÀåAd£ÀUÀ¼ÀÄ (AiÀÄ, gÀ, ®, ªÀ, ±À, µÀ, ¸À, ºÀ, ¼À)
C£ÀĸÁégÀ(A), «¸ÀUÀð(B), CPÁðªÉÇvÀÄÛ (ð) ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ªÀÄÆ®ªÀåAd£ÀªÀ£ÀÄß ªÀÄÆr¸À®Ä §¼À¸ÀĪÀ CzsÁðPÀëgÀ aºÉß
(ï, ºÀ®Avï) - MlÄÖ 4 aºÉßUÀ¼ÀÄ.
EªÉ®èªÀÇ ¸ÉÃj 51 CPÀëgÀ/aºÉßUÀ¼ÁUÀÄvÀÛªÉ.
DzÀÝjAzÀ EAVèµïUÁV §¼À¸ÀĪÀ 26 QðUÀ¼ÀÄ [¸ÀºÀd(£ÁgÀä¯ï) ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ²¥sïÖ(MvÀÄÛ) MqÀ£É 52 ¸ÁzsÀåvÉUÀ¼ÀÄ] ªÀiÁvÀæªÉÃ
PÀ£ÀßqÀPÀÆÌ ¸ÁPÁUÀÄvÀÛzÉ.
ªÀÄÆ®ªÀåAd£À ¨ÉÃPÁzÁUÀ vÉgÉAiÀÄ ªÉÄÃ¯É CPÁgÁAvÀ ªÀåAd£À ªÀÄÆrzÀ £ÀAvÀgÀ 'ï' a£ÉíAiÀÄ QðAiÀÄ£ÀÄß MwÛ CzÀ£ÀÄß
ªÀÄÆ® ªÀåAd£ÀªÀ£ÁßV ¥ÀjªÀwð¸À§ºÀÄzÀÄ.
UÀÄtÂvÁPÀëgÀUÀ¼ÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¸ÀAAiÀÄPÁÛPÀëgÀUÀ¼À£ÀÆß F «£Áå¸À¢AzÀ¯Éà ¥ÀqÉAiÀħºÀÄzÀÄ.
vÀAvÁæA±ÀzÀ DgÀA¨sÀ
`£ÀÄr'AiÀÄ C£ÀĸÁÜ¥À£É DzÀ PÀÆqÀ¯É ¥ÀæzÀ±ÀðPÀvÉgÉ (ªÀiÁ¤lgï) ªÉÄÃ¯É Nudi 4.0/5.0 JA§ MAzÀÄ ¯ÁAbÀ£À (Icon)
ªÀÄÆrgÀÄvÀÛzÉ.
£ÀÄrAiÀÄ£ÀÄß §¼À¸À®Ä F ¯ÁAbÀ£ÀªÀ£ÀÄß JgÀqÀÄ ¨Áj QèQ̹.
QðªÀÄtÂAiÀÄ ªÉÄð£À SCROLL LOCK ¸ÀAPÉÃvÀ ¢Ã¥À ºÉÆwÛgÀÄvÀÛzÉ. QðªÀÄtÂAiÀÄ QðUÀ¼À£ÀÄß MwÛzÁUÀ PÀ£ÀßqÀ
CPÀëgÀUÀ¼ÀÄ ªÀÄÆqÀ¨ÉÃPÁzÀgÉ EzÀÄ ºÉÆwÛgÀ¨ÉÃPÀÄ. EzÀ£ÀÄß ºÉÆwÛ¸À®Ä/Dj¸À®Ä SCROLL LOCK QðAiÀÄ£ÀÄß MwÛj.
F UÀ £ÀÄr vÀAvÁæA±À
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
626
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
NUDI
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
627
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
628
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
NUDI
ªÉÄîÌAqÀ JgÀqÀÄ gÀÆ¥ÀUÀ¼ÀÆ PÀ£ÀßqÀzÀ°è §¼ÀPÉAiÀİèªÉ.
CgÀÑ£É
Arfcne
CZÀð£É
acFne
ªÀÄÆgÉÒ
mUrfCe
ªÀÄÆbÉð
mUCeF
¨sÀjÓ
Brfji
¨sÀfð
BjiF
¥ÁjÖ
pArfqi
¥Ánð
pAqiF
§gÀÄØ
brfwu
§qÀÄð
bwuF
¸ÀgÀà
srfp
¸À¥Àð
spF
PÀgÀæ£É
krfrne
¸ÀgÀé
Srfv
¸ÀªÀð
svF
¤gÉÝñÀ
nirfdES
¤zÉÃð±À
nidEFS
CgÀÌ
Arfk
CPÀð
akF
zÀÄgÉÎñÀéj
durfgESfvri
zÀÄUÉÃð±Àéj
dugEFSfvri
ºÀgÉÆëÃzÁÎgÀ
hrfxOdfgAr
ºÀµÉÆÃðzÁÎgÀ
hxOFdfgAr
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
629
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9
121 | P a g e
ACCOUNTING
SOFTWARE
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
630
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9
CHAPTER -9
ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE
INTRODUCTION TO TALLY ERP.9
Tally is the world’s fastest and most powerful concurrent Multi-lingual business Accounting
and Inventory Management software. Tally is comprehensive ERP software that goes far beyond the
basic functionalities of finance and accounts. It encompasses every critical aspect of an organization,
including payroll, inventory, manufacturing and banking to name a few. Tally is the perfect fit for
every organization right from a promising new start up to a high-flying business giant. Tally is
primarily designed exclusively to meet the needs of small and medium business. It is fully integrated,
affordable and highly reliable software.
Tally Software business was set up in 1986 by late S.S. Goenka, who was the founder of the
company Peutronics Private Limited, Bangalore. He mentored his son Bharat Goenka in creating
accounting software that would handle all financial accounts for his business. Bharat Goenka spent a
lot of months to develop path breaking technology. Tally is user friendly software used to solve all the
complicated accounting problems.
VERSIONS OF TALLY
Tally 4.5
Tally Ees 5.4
Tally Ees 6.3
Tally Ies 7.2
Tally Ies 8.1
Tally Ies 9.0
Tally.Erp 9
Advanced Features of Tally ERP.9
Tally 9 allows creation and maintenance of multiple companies concurrently up to 99,999
companies.
Tally 9 has an advanced features in complete Book-Keeping, Single and Double entry method,
Integrated ledgers, Receivables and Payables, Final statement etc.
It is flexible to use Multi-Currency accounting, Multiple Companies, Group consolidation etc.
It enables grouping of companies and provides consolidated reports. Change done in any
constituent or Branch Company is automatically updated in the grouped information.
To overcome difficulties, you have always On-line Help interactive in Tally 9 and also provide
user-definable security for the users.
You can also import or export data through XML and also E-mail reports of Financial statement.
Inventory control is flexible to use in Tally. You can maintain stock items, stock groups, godowns,
ordering, cancellation of materials, stock summary etc. can be done. Also Pure Inventory vouchers
are maintained in tally.
It has flexible Units of Measure, Multi-location Warehouse management, Multi price levels and
Drill down facility.
VAT, TDS, Service Tax, Excise of Traders, CST, FBT are the winning features in Tally 9.
TALLY USER CLASSIFICATION
Tally ERP 9, (integrated enterprise solution) latest version of tally, provides with two specific
classification Licensing. They are
Tally Silver for Single-User
Tally Gold for Multi-User
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
631
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9
Tally Silver For Single-User
The Single-user licensing allows the consumption of tally on only one computer with an option
of activating it online or offline. However, we can use the same tally license on another computer by
granting the license activated on the first and deactivating it on the other. If we are an Offline user, we
can take a request file to a computer, which has Internet connectivity and activate our copy of Tally
license easily.
Tally Gold For Multi-User
The multi-user licensing feature facilities the use of tally on any number of computers
connected to a local area network (LAN) with a provision of activating the license online or offline.
However, the method of activation is not different from the one followed in Single User licensing
system. After the successful installation of multi-user license on the license serve, we will have tally
icon, when windows starts and windows runs tally as a service in the background. The licensing clients
may install and use tally later on.
ACCOUNTING
Accounting is an art of business communications. It communicates the results of business
operations to various parties like proprietor, partnership concern, creditors, investors, private company,
public limited company, a joint venture companies, government, agencies etc.
Earlier days, Accounting was considered simply as a process of reloading business transactions.
Nowadays, Accounting is considered to be a tool of management providing vital information
concerning the organization’s future. So, Accounting today is thus more of an information system
rather than a mere recording system.
The American Institute of Certified Public Accounting (AICPA) give definitions for
“Accounts” as follows:
“Accounting is the art of recording, classifying and summarizing in significant manner and in terms
of money, transactions and events which are, in part, in part, at least of a financial character and
interpreting the results there of”
The American Accounting Association (AAA) defined as follows:
“Accounting is the process of identifying, measuring and communicating economic information to
permit informed judgments and decision by users of the information”
The Accounting Principles Board (APB) defined as follows:
“The function of accounting is to provide quantitative information, primarly as financial nature,
about economic entities, that is needed to be useful in making economic decision”.
As per the definition of many Accounts committee, Accounts involves the following nature:
1. Recording (Book-keeping)
2. Classifying (Ledger making)
3. Summarizing (Trial Balance, ,Balance Sheet)
Two Branches of Accounting
There are two branches of accounting namely: Financial Accounting, Management
Accounting
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
632
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9
(a)FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING: It is mainly confined to the preparation of financial
statements like Profit and Loss A/C, Balance Sheet, Financial reports, Graphs, Ratios etc. for the use of
outsiders like Shareholders, Creditors, Debenture holders, Companies, Banks, Financial Companies etc.
(b)MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING: Here the accounting is based on Management. The
accounts which provides important information to the management. The Management Accounting is the
application of professional information in such a way as to assist the management in the information of
policies and in the planning and control of the operations of the undertaking. It covers various
accounting areas such as Cost accounting, Budgetory control, Inventory control, Statistical methods,
Internal auditing etc.
Transaction:
A transaction is a business activity that involves the transfer of money or money’s worth
between two accounts
A transaction can be of two types
a. Cash Transaction: A cash transaction is one where money is immediately received or paid in the
form of cash.
b. Credit Transaction: A credit transaction is one where money is paid later, but the benefits are
enjoyed immediately.
TYPES OF TRANSACTIONS
a. Transactions including individuals/business entitites
b. Transactions including assets, goods, cash
c. Transaction including incomes, expenses, losses and gains.
RULES OF ACCOUNTING
The transaction in the journal are recorded on the basic of the rules of debit and credit. The
nature of accounts are classified in three categories (i) Personal account (ii)Real account (iii)Nominal
account.
(I)Personal Account: It includes the accounts of persons with whom the business deals. The
account deals with an individual person or corporate bodies or institutions. E.g. Kannan A/c Sujatha
A/c, new India Insurance A/c, Canara Bank A/c, BSNL A/c, St.John’s college A/c,etc.
The rule of Personal Account follows:
“Debit the Receiver”
Credit the Giver”
FOR EXAMPLE: Mr. Kannan received Rs. 100 as interest from Canara Bank. Here
Mr.Kannan is debited. Here the Money receiver is Mr kannan so, Mr.Kannan is dedited. here the money
giver is Canara bank. So, Canara bank is credited.
By the rule,
“Mr. Kannan A/c is the receiver
Canara bank the giver “
(II) Real Account: It includes the account which relate to such things which can be touched,
untouched, felt, measured etc. e.g. Land, Cash A/c, Building< Machinery A/c, Furniture A/c, Stock A/c,
Land A/c etc. Untouched A/c like Patents, Goodwill etc.
The rule of Real Account follows:
“Debit- What comes in?
Credit-What goes out?”
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
633
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9
For example, A Machinery has been purchased for business by cash. Here machinery comes
into the business. So, Machinery is debited. Here cash goes out (or) cash for the purchase of machinery.
So, Cash is credited. Ex: salary accounts, discount allowed, discount received, etc.,
By the rule,
“Debit- Machinery A/c (Comes in)
Credit-Cash A/c (Goes Out)”
(III)Nominal Account: The nature of nominal accounts relates to incomes and gains in the
business and also expenses and loses in the business e.g. Interest Received A/c, Interest Given A/c,
Rent Received A/c, Rent given A/c, Salary A/c, Commission paid A/c, Travelling Expenses A/c, Loss
A/c, Profit A/c, Income Earned A/c.
The rule of Nominal Account follows:
“Debit-All expenses and Loses
Credit-All gains and Incomes”
For Example, A Fruit stall merchant earned Rs.5000?-by selling fruits and he gives Rs.1000/-
as a rent for the fruit stall.
By the rule,
“Debit-Rent given A/c
Credit-Cash A/c”
A Table for easy understanding the nature of Accounting Rules follows:
Nature of Accounts
Debit
Credit
Personal A/c
The Receiver
The Giver
Real A/c
What comes in?
What goes out?
Nominal A/c
All Expenses and Loses
All Income and Gaines
BASIC ACCOUNTING TERMS
To help you understand accountancy better, we have explained commonly used accounting
terms below.
a. Assets : Assets refer to the properties that belong to the business (What we own), it will give
economic benefit in future.
Ex: Car by renting a car, we can benefit (money)
If we do a job, then we will have laptop Laptop is an asset of a company
b. Liability: Liabilities are what the business is obligated to pay to others (What we owe) which we
want to give to someone to something.
Ex: If we do jobs at a company, then we will get a salary from that company, the salary is
paid for me by that company, so salary is a liability for that company.
Note: Every asset has a liability attached to it.
Ex:
Mobile Phone Asset
Mobile Bill Liability
Car Asset
Car Maintenance Liability.
We have to pay liability to use Asset.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
634
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9
c. Income : It is different from asset. Income is one for which we can economically benefit which you
drive from asset in other words It is a revenue earned by a business minus the expense incurred in
order to earn such revenue.
Ex:
Car asset
Rent received income
d. Expense : It is different from liability. It is what we have to pay at present. Or in other words it is
the amount spent by a business to conduct its activities.
Ex : Car Asset
Rent paid Income
When we buy a car, we will be knowing that we have to pay for petrol, diesel, maintenance cost,
etc., so then it will be a liability. But when we pay for petrol, diesel, and maintenance charges, it
will become expense.
e. Revenue: The earnings of a business through its activities and operations.
f. Capital : It is the amount invested by a proprietor on his business
g. Debit (+): What comes in. It means addition in business
h. Credit (-): What goes out. It means substraction in business.
i.
Debtor : A debtor is a person who receives benefits from the business immediately, but is obligated
to pay for the same in future.
Ex: A buyer, who purchases goods from the business on credit, becomes a debtor to the business.
j.
Creditor: A person who provides benefit without receiving immediate payment for the same, and
who will claim the payment in future.
Ex: When the business purchases goods on credit from a supplier, the supplier becomes a creditor
to the business.
k. Stock : Unsold goods, raw materials, scrap, etc, that lie with the business
l.
Sales: Sales refer to the amount of goods sold by a business.
Sales made against immediate payment of cash are called cash sales
Sales on credit are called credit sales.
m. Sales Return : Goods that have been sold but are returned by the buyer before consumption, due to
reasons like poor quality, damage of goods, etc.,
n. Purchase: Purchase is the amount of goods bought by a business for further use or for reselling.
Purchase made against immediate payment of cash are called cash purchases
Purchase on credit are called credit purchases.
o. Purchase Return : Goods that have been purchased but are returned to the seller before
consumption due to reasons like poor quality, damage of goods, goods expired, etc.,
p. Proprietor : The Proprietor is the owner of the business.
q. Ledgers : Names of account which we created in tally when we write account. Whatever
transactions we do we have to create a ledger for that transaction.
r. Vouchers : Entries created when we do some transactions. When we pass a voucher, we create
entries.
DOUBLE ENTRY SYSTEMS OF ACCOUNTING :
Every financial transaction has two aspects, one where the business receives a benefit and the
other where it provides benefit. Therefore every transaction should be recorded in a such a way that its
effect is reflected in two places in a business. I.e., one will be debited, whereas the other will be
credited. The receiving aspect is termed the Debit aspect. The giving aspect is termed as Credit aspect.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
635
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9
GET STARTED WITH TALLY:
Steps to Create a Company
1. Double click on tally icon from the desktop. We will have a “Company info” menu on the
right side of the screen as shown below.
2. Select the option Create
Company By bringing down arrow
key and press enter. Company
Creation screen will be displaying
as show below.
Let
us
Explain
each
section separately:
Directory:
Directory
means the data storage location.
This is the place where tally store
all data we enter in tally. By default
the data storage will be inside the
installation folder. Data will be
stored in D:/, if we install tally in D
drive. But we can change it to different location by typing it manually.
Name:-Type the name of the Company in this field, for example say ‘Anubhav Traders’.
Address:-This is the place where we can enter the address of the company.
Statutory compliance for:-Select the country in which our business/ company is located.
Auto Backup Details : Set to Yes if you want Tally to create a backup of data of the company
automatically.
Company Details
Company Symbol : Enter according to country selected for the company.
Maintain : Accounts only To maintain only the financial a/c of company
Accounts with inventory To combine financial ac/c and inventory books for the company
Financial Year From This refers to the 12 month accounting period of the company. Ex :
For Anubhav Traders Financial year begins from 1-4-2016.
Books beginning from The date provided in the aforesaid field will be automatically
displayed here. If you have started with maintaining your books of accounts with mid-year, In Tally 9,
we can set the required date accordingly.
In the above company creation screen, we can enter company details, data storage etc.
Select Company
To select company
Shut Company
To unload a selected company
Create Company
To create a new company
Create Group Company
This option becomes active when more than one company is
selected
Alter
To alter information of existing company
Change Tally Vault
To alter Tally Vault password for a company
Split Company Data
To split the company data into financial period
Backup
A copy of the data should be kept in other media like CD or tally
locker
Restore
To getting back the earlier data in the working disk
Quit
To exit a company
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
636
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9
ACCOUNTS GROUP
A Group is the accounting group under which ledgers of the same nature can be classified.
Accounts group of tally provides a set of 28 pre-defined groups, of these 15 are primary groups and 13
are sub-groups.
Among the 15 primary groups, 9 groups are Balance Sheet items and the remaining 6 groups
are Profit and Loss a/c items.
1. Capital Account
a. Reserves & Surplus
2. Current Assets
a. Bank Account
b. Cash-in –hand
c. Deposits
d. Loans And Advances
e. Stock-in –hand
f. Sundry Debtors (Credit Sales)
3. Current Liabilities
a. Duties and Taxes
b. Provisions
c. Sundry creditors (Credit Purchase)
4. Fixed Assets
5. Investments
6. Loans
a. Bank OD (Over Draft)
b. Secured Loans
c. Unsecured Loans
7. Suspense Account
8. Miscellaneous Account
9. Sales Account
10. Purchase Account
11. Direct Income
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
637
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9
12. Indirect Income
13. Direct Expenses
14. Indirect Expenses
15. Branch/Divisions
1. Capital Account: This is a primary group to hold the capital and reserves & surplus of the
company. Accounts like Partners capital, share capital, Drawings etc belongs to this group.
a. Reserves and surplus:This is a sub group of capital account.Accounts like Capital
reserve, investment allowance reserve, share premium account, general reserve. This
group is also called as Retained Earnings.
2. Fixed Assets: The assets which cannot be easily converted into cash. Ex:: Land & Building, Plant
& machinery, Furniture etc.
3. Current assets: This is a primary group to keep the assets of the company.
a. Bank account: All bank saving or current accounts are created under this group. e.g SB
A\c, Current A\c can be placed under this group.
b. Cash-in hand: This will hold cash account only. Cash account is automatically created
(default group) when a company is created. Ex: Petty cash, cash at branch a/c, etc.,
c. Deposits: Accounts related to deposits like security deposits, fixed deposits, Recurring
Deposits and rental deposits can be created under this group
d. Loans and Advances: Accounts related to advances and loans of non-trading nature of
accounts like Advances against salaries, work contracts, Advances to purchase of fixed
assets, advance received from customers, etc. can be created in this group.
e. Stock in hand: This is used to hold the opening and closing stock figures of certain
accountants like Raw material, working progress, finished product etc
f. Sundry Debtor: This group is used to create the accounts of our customers (all parties
to whom credit sales are made)
4. Current Liabilities : This is a primary group to hold the outstanding and statutory liabilities of
company such as ESI, PF, TDS etc. deducted from salary of employees should be placed under this
group. It has three sub groups.
a. Duties & Taxes: Accounts of trade duties and taxes like excise, Local sales tax, Central
sales tax, excise, etc., can be open under this group.
b. Provisions: It is used to hold tax provisions in this group Ex: Provisions for
depreciation, Provision of taxation, provision for bad debts, provision for dividend, etc.,
c. Sundry Creditors : This group is used to create accounts for our suppliers (all parties
to whom credit purchase are made).
5. Investments: It holds the accounts of over all investments like shares, bonds, debenture,
government securities(NSC, reserve bank bonds, IDBI bonds) and invested in other companies are
placed under this group.
6. Loans: Accounts of loans taken by the company are created in this group . it has three groups .
a Bank over draft(Bank OCC A/c) : Over draft account of a bank like hypothecation
account , bills discount account etc. can be opened under this group.
B Secured loan: Accounts of loans taken by the company from financial corporation
upon furnishing security must be placed here. Debentures issued by the company can also be
placed here.
Eg: Sundaram finance, Ashok Leyland finance ,Banks etc.
C Unsecured loan : Accounts of loans taken by the company unconditionally from
outside parties. Without providing security. Deposits received by the company from others can
also be placed under this group.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
638
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9
7. Suspense account : Accounts of money received or paid by the company in suspense . If an
advance amount like Travelling advances is paid to marketing executives. It is used to record
amount paid or received temporarily or whose transactions is not yet known.
8. Miscellaneous Account: But there are so many expenses for which no account heads can be
created because of very few transactions for certain expenses. If an accountant creates individual
account heads for such type of transactions, then it will be very difficult to control. Therefore, all
these expense are booked under miscellaneous expenses account or general expenses account. For
example:- very small amount paid for donations or charities, membership fees for local
organizations , short and excess amount written off, festival celebration expenses and other
expenses for which no account head is available.
9. Sales account: A company sales comes under this group like sales account like company sales,
cement sales, tire sales, car sales, bricks sales etc.
10. Purchase account: A company purchased comes under this group like purchase account like
machinery purchased, furniture purchased etc.
11. Direct income : All income which do not have regular period to receive you money also use this
group for accounts like servicing , contract charges that follows sales of equipments. Eg
professional charges, received wages, received service charges etc.
12. Indirect income: The account of indirect income like rent received ,interest received, commission
received etc.
13. Direct expenses: The expenses which do not have any regular fixed period to pay there are
manufacturing or direct expenses. Ex: Wages , auto fair, freight charges, delivery charges etc.
14. Indirect expenses: which have limited or fixed period to pay and which are regular in nature. Eg
salary expenses, rent expenses, telephone expenses ,electricity expenses etc
15. Branches/ Divisions: All company branches are bank branches comes under this group. Eg Mysore
Branch, Vijayanagar Branch, etc.
List of Commonly used ledger in tally
Advertisement expenses
Direct expenses
Advertisement payable
Current liabilities
Air conditioner
Fixed assets
Audit fees
Indirect expenses
Bad debts
Indirect expenses
Bad debts received
Indirect incomes
Bank
Bank account
Bank charges
Indirect expenses
Bank loan
Loans & liabilities
Bank overdraft
BankOD
Bills payable
Current liabilities
Bills receivable
Current assets
Bonds
Current assets
Building
Fixed assets
Capital
Capital account
Car
Fixed assets
Car repair
Indirect expenses
Cash
Cash in hand
Cash at bank
Bank account
Closing stock
Stock in hand
Commission (cr.) / commission received
Indirect incomes
Commission (dr.)
Indirect expenses
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
639
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9
Computer
Fixed assets
Coolage
Direct expenses
Creditors
Sundry creditors
Debtors
Sundry debtors
Depreciation
Indirect expenses
Depreciation reserve
Current liabilities
Difference in trial balance (dr or cr)
Suspense account
Discount (cr.) / discount received
Indirect incomes
Discount (dr) / discount allowed
Indirect expenses
Donation
Indirect expenses
Drawing
Capital account
Electricity expenses
Indirect expenses
Factory
Fixed assets
Fire insurance
Indirect expenses
Furniture & fitting
Fixed assets
General expenses
Indirect expenses
General reserve
Current liabilities
Godown rent
Indirect expenses
Goods sent on consignment
Sales account
Goodwill
Fixed assets
Import duty
Direct expenses
Income on investments
Indirect incomes
Input vat 4%, 12.5%
Duties & taxes
Insurance
Indirect expenses
Insurance claim
Indirect incomes
Insurance company
Sundry debtors
Interest (dr.)
Indirect expenses
Interest on loan
Indirect expenses
Interest received (cr.)
Indirect incomes
Invest in govt. Bond
Investment
Investment
Investment
Labour charges
Indirect expenses
Land & building
Fixed assets
Legal expenses
Indirect expenses
Loan on mortgage, loans
Loans & liabilities
Machine & tools
Fixed assets
Machine repair
Indirect expenses
Manager’s commission
Indirect expenses
Manufacturing expenses
Direct expenses
Motor cycle
Fixed assets
Motor cycle repair
Indirect expenses
Mutual fund
Investment
Office expenses
Indirect expenses
Opening stock
Stock in hand
Output vat 4%, 12.5%
Duties & taxes
Outstanding expenses
Current liabilities
Packing exp.
Indirect expenses
Personal expenses/ drawings
Capital account
Petrol expenses
Indirect expenses
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
640
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9
Plant & machine
Fixed assets
Postage & telegram
Indirect expenses
Printing & advertisement
Indirect expenses
Printing & stationery
Indirect expenses
Printing, papers & advertisement
Indirect expenses
Production wages
Direct expenses
Provision for discount on debtors
Indirect expenses
Provision for office expenses
Current liabilities
Purchase
Purchase account
Purchase of new land
Fixed assets
Purchase of raw material
Purchase account
Purchase return
Purchase account
Refreshment expenses
Indirect expenses
Refrigerator
Fixed assets
Rent
Indirect expenses
Rent & tax
Indirect expenses
Rent payable
Current liabilities
Rent received
Indirect incomes
Repair & renovation
Indirect expenses
Repairing charges received
Indirect incomes
Salary
Indirect expenses
Wages
Direct expenses
Salary payable
Current liabilities
Sales
Sales account
Sales return
Sales account
Scooter
Fixed assets
Shares / bonds
Investments
Shop
Fixed assets
Shop expenses
Indirect expenses
Shop rent
Indirect expenses
Showroom repair
Indirect expenses
Stable expenses
Indirect expenses
Stamp & postage
Indirect expenses
Stationery
Indirect expenses
Stock (1st april and 31st march)
Stock in hand
Stock of material
Current assets
Sundry creditors
Sundry creditors
Sundry debtors
Sundry debtors
Telephone expenses
Indirect expenses
Telephone securities
Indirect expenses
Trade expenses
Indirect expenses
Travelling expenses
Indirect expenses
Typewriter
Fixed assets
Vat payable
Current liabilities
Vehicle repair
Indirect expenses
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
641
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9
Excersise 1: From the following information prepare a balance sheet to A M industrial company.
Particulars
Ledger group
Debit
Credit
Rayan traders
Sundry creditor
40000
Bad debts
Mis expenses
3400
Bad debts recoverd
In income
3400
Bank a/c
Bank a/c
5000
Bills receivable
Current assets
50000
Carriage inwards
Dir expenses
550
Commission received
In income
1400
Current assets
Current assets
140000
Depreciation expenses
In expenses
1600
Discount allowed
In expenses
2000
Discount received
Income
20000
Electricity charges
Dir expenses
5000
Excise duty payable
Provision
2600
Factory rent
In expenses
10000
Fixed deposit
Deposit/ assets
5400
Furniture
Fixed assets
15000
Particulars
Ledger group
Debit
Credit
General reserve
Reserves & surplus
70000
Suhana trading A/C
Sundry creditor
5400
Income tax payable
Provision
5000
Insurance premium
Current assets
3550
Loan taken
Loans liabilities
40000
Mr. Arbaz capital
Capital a/c
100000
Mr. Zain capital
Capital a/c
100000
Purchase machinery
Fixed assets
80000
Printing & stationery
In expenses
1600
Rent expenses
In expenses
7000
Purchases
Purchases a/c
150000
Rahul enterprises
Sundry debtors
54200
Rent advanced
Loans / advances
5400
Salary expenses
In expenses
15000
Sales
Sales a/c
220000
Interest received
In income
5600
Sales tax
Duties & taxes
4000
Srinidhi corporation
Sundry debtors
7700
Stock as on 1/1/2005
Stock in hand
55000
VOUCHER:-
A Voucher is a basic recording document. Daily business transactions are entered in Tally
through Vouchers. It is a key to all business information. Entering the business transactions through
Voucher called Voucher Entry. Tally has pre-defined voucher like Contra Voucher, Journal Voucher,
Sales Voucher, Purchase Voucher, Receipt Voucher, Payment Voucher and Memo Vouchers. Daily
Business transactions are entered on the basis of Voucher types. Follow the below steps for voucher
entry.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
642
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9
In the Gateway of Tally, Select Voucher Entry option.
The Accounting Voucher Creation screen display as
follows
By using the functional keys, you can choose the
voucher types like Receipt, payment, Contra, Journal etc.
VOUCHER TYPES FUNCTIONAL
KEYS
Receipt Voucher
F6
Payment Voucher
F5
Contra Voucher
F4
Journal Voucher
F7
Sales Voucher
F8
Credit Note
Ctrl + F8
Purchase Voucher
F9
Debit Note
Ctrl + F9
Memo Voucher
F10
Press F2 Functional key to change the Voucher date. Button panel of the Voucher Creation
screen contains all the Voucher types and functions.
Receipt Voucher
Receipt Voucher is used to enter all receipts of cash and bank (Receipt by cash or Receipt by
cheque or Receipt by demand draft). Even the amount received for the sale of Fixed assets e.g.
Furniture, Machinery etc. (not being the regular course of business) must be treated as Receipt
Voucher. Press F6 Function key to enter the Receipt Voucher.
Rules for Receipt Voucher:
Debit
Credit
a)Cash A/c
b)Bank A/c
a)The Giver of money or Sundry debtors
b)Income Received
c)Cash sales of Fixed Assets
e.g. Furniture, Machinery etc.
Activity 1: From the following transactions, prepare a Receipt Voucher entries for the
Barathwaj & Company
i.
i)Rs.5,000/-the amount received from Mr. Kumar
ii.
ii)Rs.2,000/-cheque and Rs.500/-cash given by Star & Company
iii.
iii)Rs.1,500/-commission received by cash.
iv.
iv)Rs.1,000/-cash sales on Waste machinery.
v.
v)Rs.2,500/-received for Interest by cheque.
rans
A/c Involved
Nature of A/c Debit/Credit
(i)
Kumar A/c
Cash A/c
Personal A/c
Real A/c
Credit
Debit
(ii)
Star & Company A/c
Cash A/c
Bank A/c
Personal A/c
Real A/c
Personal A/c
Credit
Debit
Debit
Commission A/c
Nominal A/c
Credit
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
643
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9
iii)
Cash A/c
Real A/c
Debit
(iv)
Waste Machinery A/c
Cash A/c
Real A/c
Real A/c
Credit
Debit
(v)
Interest Received A/c
Bank A/c
Nominal A/c
Personal A/c
Credit
Debit
Note: You should be clear in nature of Accounting Rules.
Now 5 transactions are entered in the Receipt Voucher by following steps:
*In the Gateway of Tally, choose Voucher Entry option. The Voucher Creation Screen displays
fig (T.17), in which Receipt Voucher is selected by using the Function key F6. Also pres F2 Function
key to enter the date. One by one five transactions are entered in the Voucher.
Transaction (i)
Transaction (ii)
Transaction (iii)
Transaction (iv)
Transaction (v)
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
644
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9
Payment Voucher
Payment Voucher records all the payments made through Bank and Cash. Even the amount
paid for the purchase of Fixed Assets like purchase of Machinery, Land, Furniture etc.(not being the
regular course of business)must be treated as payments. Cheque Printing is done only through Payment
voucher entry.
Rules for Payment Voucher:
Debit
Credit
a) The Ledger A/c of the Receiver Or Sundry creditors
b) Expenses A/C
c) Any cash purchase of Fixed Assets e.g. Land, Machinery etc.
a)Cash A/c
b)Bank A/c
From the following transactions, prepare Payment Voucher entries for the Barathwaj and Company
i)Rs.4500/-paid for Bonus.
ii)Rs.2000/-cheque paid for Salaries.
iii)Rs.450/-paid for Electric charges.
iv)Rs.1150/-paid for Telephone bill by KVB Bank Cheque.
v)Rs.3000/-purchase on Furniture. Here Rs.2000/- Canara bank cheque paid and rs.1000/-paid by cash.
vi)Rs.1000/-paid to M/s. Chitra * Company
Trans
A/c Involved
Nature of A/c
Debit/
Credit
Explanation
(i)
Bonus A/c
Cash A/c
Nominal A/c
Real A/c
Debit
Credit
Expenses &Loses
Cash goes out
(ii)
Salary A/c
Bank A/c
Nominal A/c
Personal A/c
Debit
Credit
Expense & Loses
Cheque given
(iii
Elect Charges A/c
Cash A/c
Nominal A/c
Real A/c
Debit
Credit
Expenses & Loses
Cash goes out
(iv
Telephone Charges A/c
KVB A/c
Nominal A/c
Personal A/c
Debit
Credit
Expenses & Loses
Cheque given
(v)
Fur A/c
Canara Bank A/c
Cash A/c
Real A/c
Personal A/c
Real A/c
Debit
Credit
Credit
Furniture comes in
Bank cheque given
Cash goes out
(vi
Chitra & Co. A/c
Cash A/c
Personal A/c
Real A/c
Debit
Credit
Receiver of the money
Cash goes out
*Press F5 Function key in the Voucher Creation screen to enter the Payment voucher.
Transaction (i)
Transaction (ii)
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
645
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9
Transaction (iii)
Transaction (iv)
Transaction (v)
Transaction (vi)
Contra Voucher
A contra entry is an entry in a business books of accounts, indicating transfer of funds from Cash
account to bank account, Bank account to cash account, One bank account to another bank account,
CASH A/c Vs BANK A/c.
If the cash amount is deposited into the Bank, then Bank A/c will be debited and Cash A/c will
be credited. If the cash amount is withdrawn from the Bank, then Cash A/c will be debited and Bank
A/c will be credited. If ‘A’ Bank cheque is deposited into ‘B’ Bank, then the ‘B’ Bank, then the ‘B’
Bank A/c will be debited and ‘A’ Bank will be credited.
From the following transaction, prepare a Contra voucher entries for the Barathwaj & Company.
(i)
Rs.2500/-cash deposited into Canara Bank.
(ii)
Rs.500/-cash withdraw from Canara Bank.
(iii)
Rs.5000/-Demand draft of State Bank of Mysore deposited to Canara Bank
(iv)
Rs.1000/-Canara Bank cheque and Rs.750/-cash deposited to Karnataka Bank.
(v)
Rs.1000/-of Canara Bank cheque given to Karnataka Bank for fund transfer.
(vi)
Rs.250/-cash withdraw from Karnataka Bank for local expenses.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
646
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9
Trans
A/c Involved
Nature of
A/c
Debit/Crdit Explanations
i)
Canara Bank A/c
Cash A/c
Personal
Real
Debit
Credit
Cash Received
Cash goes out
ii)
Canara Bank A/c
Cash A/c
Personal
Real
Credit
Debit
Cash given
Cash comes in
iii)
SB Mysore A/c
Canara Bank A/c
Personal
Personal
Credit
Debit
DD Given
DD Receiver
iv)
Cash A/c
Canara Bank A/c
Karnataka
Bank
A/c
Real
Personal
Personal
Credit
Credit
Debit
Cash goes out
Cheque Given
Cash & Cheque Receiver
v)
Canara Bank A/c
Karnataka
Bank
A/c
Personal
Personal
Credit
Debit
Cheque Giver
Cheque Receiver
vi)
Cash A/c
Karnataka
Bank
A/c
Real
Personal
Debit
Credit
Cash comes in
Cash Giver
*Press F4 Function key in the Voucher Creation Screen to enter the Contra Voucher.
Transaction (i)
Transaction (ii)
Transaction (iii)
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
647
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9
Transaction (iv)
Transaction (v)
Transaction (vi)
Journal Voucher
A Journal Voucher is used to pass adjustment Voucher entries. To adjust the debit and credit
amounts without involving cash or bank accounts. The amount adjusted between two Ledger accounts
are entered in the Journal Voucher. You can also make any credit purchases or sales any fixed assets
entry through this voucher. Depreciation on Fixed assets like machinery, furniture, motorcars etc. are
involved in this journal voucher.
Credit note Voucher (Sales Return):In business, due to certain reasons like delay in delivery, goods
damaged, overcharging etc. in which goods are return (Sales Return) from Sundry debtors (customers).
It is generally issued by the seller to the buyer
For Ex: On 1st April 2016, ABC Co., returned goods worth Rs. 5000.
Account
Debit
Credit
Voucher Entry
Buyer Ledger account
(ABC Co.)
5000
Sales Account
(Local Sales)
5,000
Debit note Voucher (purchase Return):In business, due to certain reasons like delay in delivery,
goods damaged, overcharging, poor quality, etc. in which goods are return (purchase Return)to Sundry
creditors(owners). Used for purchase returns.
For Sales Return and Purchase return for the following transactions, prepare a journal voucher, credit
note voucher & debit note voucher.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
648
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9
(i)
Depreciation Rs.2000/-on Machinery and Rs.500/-on Building is to be entered.
(ii)
M/s. Gokul Company returns the goods worth Rs.500/- as a damaged goods.
(iii)
Rs.1200/-worth goods Purchase return to M/s. Arasan & Company due to late in delivery.
(iv)
Returned goods of Rs. 5000/- to India Cement
(v)
Jain and Co returned goods of Rs.760/- as the goods quality was poor.
(vi)
A fund transferring is made for adjustment in business by barrowing Rs.3000/-from M/s. John
Agency and given to M/s. Jain & Company.
No
A/c Involved
Nature of A/c Debit/
Credit
Voucher type Explanation
(i)
Deposite A/c
Machinery A/c
Building A/c
Nominal
Real
Real
Debit
Credit
Credit
Journal
Voucher
Expenses & Loses
Cash goes out
Cash goes out
(ii)
Gokul & Company A/c
Sales Return A/c
Personal
Real
Credit
Debit
Credit note
Voucher
The giver of goods
Sold goods comes in
(iii) Arasan & Company A/c
Purchase Return A/c
Personal
Real
Debit
Credit
Debit note
voucher
Received the goods
Purchase goods goes out
(iv) India cement A/c
Purchase Return A/c
Personal
Real
Debit
Credit
Debit note
voucher
Received the goods
Purchase goods goes out
(v)
Jain & Company A/c
Sales Return A/c
Personal
Real
Credit
Debit
Credit note
voucher
The giver of goods
Sold goods comes in
(vi) John Agency A/c
Jain & Company A/c
Personal
Personal
Credit
Debit
Journal
voucher
The giver of money
Receiver of Money
*Press F7 Function key in the Voucher Creation screen.
Transactions (i)
Transactions (ii)
*Click Credit Note in the Button panel.
Transactions (iii)
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
649
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9
Transactions (iv)
Transactions (v)
Transactions (vi)
Sales Voucher
Sales voucher is used when the company sells some goods to the customers either by cash, cheque or on
credit basis. Sales made in the regular course of business (sales of fixed assets i cannot be entered in
sales voucher, we have to enter it in receipt voucher.)
Here
Ledger
A/c
of
the
Buyer
or
Customer
or
Sundry
debtors
are
debited
and
Sales A/c are credited. Also, Discount given to customers is debited and duties of taxes, packaging &
forwarding charges of the Sales A/c are credited.
Rules for Sales voucher:
Debit
Credit
The Ledger A/c of the Buyer Or Customers or
Sundry debtors Or Receiver
Any Sale A/c
Discount on sales
Duties of taxes, packaging and forwarding
charges of sales product.
From the following transactions, prepare a sales voucher entry for Barathwaj and Company
(i)
Rs. 50,000/-worth Cement sales to M/s. Gokul and Company on cash with the following
additional charges.
a) Local sales tax 4%
b) Central sales tax 2%
c) Pack and Forwarding charges Rs.750/-
(ii)
Rs. 4,050/-worth Bricks sold to M/s. Jain and Company
(iii)
Paint sales worth Rs.10,000/-to M/s. John agency and given discount 5%
(iv)
Cement sales Rs.7,000/-worth to M/s. Jain and Company and charged 3% for Local sales tax.
(v)
Cement sales Rs.3,75,000/-and Brick sales 60,000/-to M/s. John Agency.
(vi)
Bricks sales worth Rs.7,500/-to M/s. Gokul and Company and allow Rs.500/- discount for cash
sales.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
650
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9
No
A/c Involved
Nature of A/c
Debit/Credit
Explanation
I
Gokul & Co. A/c
Cement Sales A/c
Local Sales Tax A/c
Central Sales Tax A/c
Pack & Forw A/c
Personal
Real
Nominal
Nominal
Nominal
Debit
Credit
Credit
Credit
Credit
Receiver of the product
Cement goes out for sales
Incomes and Profit
Incomes and Profit
Incomes and Profit
Ii
Jain & Co. A/c
Bricks sales A/c
Personal
Real
Debit
Credit
Receiver of the product
Bricks goes out for sales
Iii
John Agency A/c
Paint sales A/c
Discount A/c
Personal
Real
Nominal
Debit
Credit
Debit
Receiver of the product
Paint goes out for sales
Expenses & Loses
iV
Jain & Co. A/c
Cement Sales A/c
Local Sales Tax A/c
Personal
Real
Nominal
Debit
Credit
Credit
Receiver of the product
Cement goes out for sales
Incomes & Gains
V
John Agency A/c
Cement Sales A/c
Bricks Sales A/c
Personal
Real
Real
Debit
Credit
Credit
Receiver of the product
Cement goes out for
sales
Bricks goes out for
sales
Vi
Gokul & Co. A/c
Brick sales A/c
Discount A/c
Personal
Real
Nominal
Debit
Credit
Debit
Receiver f the product
Bricks goes out for sales
Loses & Expenses
Press F8 Function key in the Voucher creation screen to enter sales voucher.
Transaction (i)
Transaction (ii)
Transaction (iii)
Transaction (iv)
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
651
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9
Transaction (v)
Transaction(vi)
Purchase Voucher
Purchase voucher is used when the company purchases some goods from the suppliers either by
cash, cheque or on credit basis. (Purchase of fixed assets will be entered in payment voucher)
Rules for Purchase Voucher:
Debit
Any Purchase A/c
Duties of taxes, packaging and forwarding
charges of purchase product.
Credit
The Ledger A/c of the Giver or Supplier or Sundry
creditors.
Discount given by supplier
From the following transactions, prepare a Purchase voucher for Barathwaj & Company
i) M/s. Ramco cement supplied Rs.2,00,040/-worth cement and allowed discount 3% for cash
purchase.
The
additional
charges
are
charged
for
purchase
as
follows:
a)Local Sales Tax 4%
b)Packing & Forwarding charges Rs.2000/-
ii) M/s. Arasan & Company supplied Rs.75,000/-worth bricks and allowed Rs.1000/-discount for the
purchase.
iii) Computer Purchase worth Rs.30,000/-and Printer Purchase worth Rs.5000/-are both purchased
from Excel systems. Additional Packaging & Forwarding charges Rs.1000/-are made for purchase.
iv) Accounting software worth Rs.22,000/-purchased from Data systems.
v) M/s. India cement supplied Rs.1,00,020/-worth cement and allowed discount Rs.5,000/-for cash
purchase.
Tr
an
A/c Involved
Nature of A/c
Debit/Cre
dit
Explanation
(i)
Ramco cement A/c
Cement Purch A/c
Discount A/c
Pack & Forw A/c
Local sales tax A/c
Personal
Real
Nominal
Nominal
Nominal
Credit
Debit
Credit
Debit
Debit
The giver of the product
Cement
comes
in
Incomes
&Gains
Loses & Expenses
Loses & Expenses
(ii)
Arasan & Co. A/c
Bricks Purch A/c
Discount A/c
Personal
Real
Nominal
Credit
Debit
Credit
The giver of the product
Bricks comes in
Incomes & Gains
(iii)
Excel Sys A/c
Comp Purch A/c
Printer Purch A/c
Pack & Forw A/c
Personal
Real
Real
Nominal
Credit
Debit
Debit
Debit
The giver of the product
Computer comes in
Printer comes in
Expenses & Loses
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
652
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9
(iv)
Data Sys A/c
Software A/c
Personal
Real
Credit
Debit
The giver of the product
Software comes in
(v)
India Cement A/c
Cement Purch A/c
Discount A/c
Personal
Real
Nominal
Credit
Debit
Credit
The giver of the product
Cement comes in
Incomes & Gains
*Press F9 Function key in the Voucher creation screen to enter the Purchase voucher.
Transaction (i)
Transaction (ii)
Transaction (iii)
Transaction (iv)
Transaction (v)
Memo Voucher
Memo Voucher is a purely non-accounting voucher, the entries in this voucher does not affect
the accounts. The entries in the voucher are not pasted into the ledger. So, they do not affect the final
result of the company. Tally stores memo voucher in a separate register called Memo Register.
Suspense Account like Travelling expenses, Post dated accounts like Post dated cheque given or
received are come under this Memo Voucher.
For example, A company gives an employee cash for paying travelling expenses before
travelling, the exact nature and cost of which are unknown. You could have entered a voucher stating
petty cash advance, a voucher to record the actual expenditure details when they are known, and
another voucher to record the return of surplus cash. So in simpler way we can use a Memo voucher to
enter advance and can be turned to a payment voucher after receiving the details of the expenditure
incurred. These transaction is entered in Memo Voucher as follows in next page:
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
653
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9
*Press F10 Function key in the Voucher creation screen to enter the Memo Voucher.
After Travelling is complied, the Memo voucher is transferred to Payment voucher e.g. the
actual travelling expenses for the sales executive is Rs.500/-
*Press F5 Function key for Payment Voucher.
Here Memo voucher is transferred to Payment voucher after the suspense account is cleared.
REPORTS IN TALLY
Tally creates the books of accounts and the financial statements based on the vouchers entered till date.
The Gateway of Tally displays a few reports directly, ie., the Balance Sheet, Profit and Loss a/c, Stock
Summary and Ratio Analysis as these statements are extremely critical for day to day business analysis.
Display a Voucher
In a day, many transactions of accounts are entered in Tally through in Tally Voucher entry. If you
want to see the Voucher entries follow the below step.
Day Book : The day book contains all the transactions made by a business, irrespective of the type of
transaction. By default the display is set to the date of the last voucher entry made. But this can be set to
list all the transactions made over a certain period. Transactions include all financial vouchers reversing
and memorandum journals as well as inventory vouchers.
*In the Gateway of Tally, select Display option. The Display menu displays as follows:
*Choose Day Book option from the Display menu.
*Press Alt+F1 keys to see the voucher entries in details.
Note: To display a Voucher for particular period press Alt+F2 keys.
Alter a Voucher
If you want to change the entries in the Voucher follow the bellow the below steps.
*In the Gateway of Tally select Display option.
* Then choose Day Book option from the Display menu.
*Select the particular Voucher entry account to change and then press ENTER key.
Then, you can alter the entries in that voucher
Gateway of Tally Display Day Book Enter
Delete a Voucher
If you want to delete a Voucher entry follow the bellow steps.
*In the Gateway of Tally, select Display option.
*Then choose Day Book option from the Display menu.
*Select the particular Voucher entry to delete and then press Alt+D keys.
*Are you sure to delete the voucher entry press ENTER key or “Y” to delete otherwise, press “N” in
the confirmation small box.
Gateway of Tally Display Day Book Alt +D
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
654
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9
Insert a Voucher
If you want to insert a Voucher entry follow the below steps:
*In the Gateway of Tally, select Display option.
*Then choose Day Book option from the Display menu.
*Choose the Voucher entry position in between other vouchers and press Alt+I keys.
A Voucher entry screen displays to enter the transactions of the Inserted Voucher.
Gateway of Tally Display Day Book ALT+I
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS :
Financial Statements summarize the individual transactions to show totals, ratios and statistics
required by users to analyze the company’s financial data in a variety of ways.
Balance Sheet
Profit and Loss A/c
Balance Sheet :
Balance Sheet is a financial statement that reports a business financial position as on a
specific date. It shows a balance between the assets and liabilities of a business.
Assets = liabilities + owner’s equity.
To view balance sheet:
Gateway of Tally Balance Sheet
Balance sheet gets updated instantly with every transaction is recorded.
Profit and Loss Account :
Profit and Loss account or Income statement is a periodic statement, which shows the net result of the
business operations for a specific period. All the expenses incurred and incomes earned during the
reporting period are recorded in the Profit and Loss account or Income and Expenditure account.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
655
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9
The profit and loss account in Tally displays the information based on the default primary Groups. It is
updated instantly with every transaction/voucher that is entered. No special processing is required to
produce a profit and loss account in Tally.
Gateway of Tally Profit &Loss a/c - click F1:Detailed To view the P & L a/c in detailed
format.
The P & L a/c is generated and updated immediately from the date of opening of books till the date of
last entry.
Trail Balance :
It is a summary report of all ledger balances to check whether the figures are correct and balanced.
Considering that the journal entries are error-free and posted correctly to the general ledger, the total of
all debit balances should be equal to the total credit balances.
Gateway of Tally Display Trial Balance
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
656
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9
RATIO ANALYSIS
The Ratio analysis report provides a critical overview of the company’s performance in the form of
ratios. Not only does this report provide an instant understanding of the working capital, the operating
cost percentage and the nett and gross profit perecentage, but also gives information about the payment
performance of debtors. The return on investment percentage and the return on working capital
percentage are other crititcal ratios available in this report. Ratio analysis in the final accounts shows
the principal groups and principal ratios
The principal groups: like working capital, ,cash in hand, Bank account, Bank o/d account, sundry
debtor, sundry creditor.
The principal ratios: shows the current ratio,quick ratio,recover turnover in days.
Formulas:
current ratio=current assets
C R =2:1
Quick ratio=Current assets-closing stock
Q R = 1:1
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
657
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9
BUDGETS
Budgets is an estimation of future income and expenses. Budgets are used to set targets and compare
against actual and get variances
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
658
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
659
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
COMMON SHORTCUTS
Commonly Used shortcut keys
Ctrl + A to select all
Ctrl + B to toggle the Bold attribute
Ctrl +C to copy
Ctrl +E to center align
Ctrl + F to find
Ctrl + G goto command
Ctrl + H Replace
Ctrl + I to toggle the Italic attribute
Ctrl +J justify align
Ctrl + L left align
Ctrl +N New file
Ctrl + O open a file
Ctrl + P Print a file
Ctrl +R Right align
Ctrl +S save
Ctrl + U to toggle the Underline attribute
Ctrl + X to cut selected text to the clipboard
Ctrl + V to paste text from clipboard
Ctrl + W to close a file
Ctrl + Z to undo the last action
Ctrl + Y to redo the last action
Ctrl + Shift + < to decrease font size one point
Ctrl + Shift + > to increase font size one point
Ctrl + Spacebar to remove character formatting
Ctrl + Shift + Spacebar to create a non-breaking space
Ctrl + Hyphen to create a non-breaking hyphen
Ctrl + Home to go to the start of the document
Ctrl + End to go to the end of the document
F1 Help
F7 Spell and Grammer Check
F12 Save as
Ctrl + up arrow to paragraph up
Ctrl + down arrow to paragraph down
Ctrl + left arrow to go to the word to the left
Ctrl + right arrow to go to the word to the right
Alt + F4 : Exit package
Alt + F10 Maximize
Ctrl + F6 will switch between multiple files in one office program
Excel
Enter Enters the contents of the active cell and moves to the cell below (by default)
Shift + Enter Enters the contents of the active cell and moves to the cell above (by default)
Tab Enters the contents of the active cell and moves one cell to the right
Shift + Tab Enters the contents of the active cell and moves one cell to the left
Common Short Cut Keys
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
660
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
COMMON SHORTCUTS
Ctrl + ' Enters the contents from the cell directly above into the active cell
Ctrl + ; Enters the current date into the active cell
Ctrl + Shift + ; Enters the current time into the active cell
Shift + Insert Enters the data from the clipboard
Delete Deletes the selection or one character to the right
Backspace Deletes the selection or one character to the left Shift + Delete Cuts the selection to
the clipboard
Ctrl + Shift + Page Down Selects the active worksheet and the one after it
Ctrl + Shift + Page Up Selects the active worksheet and the one before it
Ctrl + Shift + Spacebar Selects all the objects on the worksheet when an object is selected or
selects the whole worksheet
Ctrl + Spacebar Selects the current column
Shift + Arrow keys Selects the active cell and the cell in the given direction
Shift + Backspace Selects the active cell when multiple cells are selected
Shift + Spacebar Selects the current row
Ctrl + Shift + Arrow Key Extends the selection to the next cell adjacent to a blank cell in that
direction
Ctrl + Shift + End Extends the selection to the last used cell on the worksheet
Ctrl + Shift + Home Extends the selection to the beginning of the worksheet
Shift + Arrow Keys Extends the selection by one cell in that direction
Shift + Home Extends the selection to the first column
Shift + Page Down Extends the selection down one screen
Shift + Page Up Extends the selection up one screen
End + Shift + Arrow Keys Extends the selection to the next non-blank cell in that direction
End + Shift + End Extends the selection to the last cell in the current row*
End + Shift + Home Extends the selection to last used cell on the worksheet
Ctrl + Shift + ( ' or ) Applies the Time format "hh:mm" to the selection
Ctrl + Shift + (1 or !) Applies the Comma separated format "#,##0.00" to the selection
Ctrl + Shift + (4 or $) Applies the Currency format "£#,##0.00" to the selection
Ctrl + Shift + (5 or %) Applies the Percentage format "0%" to the selection
Ctrl + Shift + (# or ~) Applies the General format to the selection
Ctrl + (# or ~) Applies the Custom Date format "dd-mmm-yy" to the selection
Ctrl + Shift + (7 or &) Applies the outline border to the selection
Ctrl + Shift + (- or _ ) Removes all the borders from the selection
Arrow Keys Moves to the next cell in that direction
Ctrl + Tab Moves to the next open workbook or window
Alt + Tab Moves to the next application open on your computer
Enter Moves to the cell directly below
Tab Moves to the next cell on the right (or unprotected cell)
Home Moves to the first column in the current row
End + Arrow Keys Moves to the next non empty cell in that direction
End + Enter Moves to the last cell in the current row that is not blank
End + Home Moves to the last used cell on the active worksheet*
End + Home Moves to the last used cell on the active worksheet*
Page Down Moves to the next screen of rows down
Page Up Moves to the previous screen of rows up
Shift + Enter Moves to the cell directly above (opposite direction to Enter)
Shift + Tab Moves to the cell directly to the left (opposite direction to Tab)
Alt + Page Down Moves you one screen of columns to the right
Alt + Page Up Moves you one screen of columns to the left
Ctrl + Home Moves to cell "A1" on the active sheet
Ctrl + End Moves to the last used cell on the active worksheet*
Ctrl + Up Arrow Moves to the first row in the current region
Ctrl + Down Arrow Moves to the last row in the current region
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
661
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
COMMON SHORTCUTS
Ctrl + Left Arrow Moves to the first column in the current region
Ctrl + Right Arrow Moves to the last column in the current region
Ctrl + Page Up Moves to the previous worksheet in the workbook
Ctrl + Page Down Moves to the next worksheet in the workbook
Ctrl + Shift + Tab Moves to the previous open workbook or window
Scroll Lock + Arrow Keys Moves the workbook or window one cell the corresponding
direction
Scroll Lock + End Moves to the last cell in the current window
Scroll Lock + Home Moves to the first cell in the current window
Scroll Lock + Page Down Moves you down one screen (current selection unchanged
Scroll Lock + Page Up Moves you up one screen (current selection unchanged)
Enter Moves from top to bottom within a selection
Tab Moves from left to right within a selection
Ctrl + . Moves clockwise to the next corner within a selection
Shift + Tab Moves from right to left within a selection (opposite direction to Tab)
Alt + Ctrl + Left Arrow Moves to the left between non adjacent cells in a selection
Alt + Ctrl + Right Arrow Moves to the right between non adjacent cells in a selection
= Starts a Formula
Ctrl + ` Toggles between the value layer and the formula layer
Ctrl + Insert Copies the current selection to the clipboard
Ctrl + Shift + ( Unhides any hidden rows within the selection
Ctrl + Shift + ) Unhides any hidden columns within the selection
Ctrl + Shift + \ Select unequal cells
Alt Toggles the activation of the old Menu Bar
Alt + Shift + Left Arrow Displays the (Data > Group and Outline > UnGroup) dialog box
Alt + Shift + Right Arrow Displays the (Data > Group and Outline > Group) dialog box
Alt + Spacebar Activates the Control Box in the top left hand corner
End Toggles between switching End Mode on or off
Scroll Lock Toggles between switching Scroll Lock on or off
Shift + Insert Pastes the entry from the clipboard
Ctrl + 0 Hides the columns in the current selection
POWERPOINT SHORTCUTS
Alt+1
Align Left
Alt+3
Align Right
Alt+2
Align Horizontal Center
Alt+4
Distribute Objects Horizontally
Alt+Shift+1
Align Top
Alt+Shift+2
Align Vertical Center
Alt+Shift+3
Align Bottom
Alt+Shift+4
Distribute Objects Vertically
Alt+5
Align to Slide
Alt+Shift+W
Bring to Front
Alt+Shift+S
Bring Forward
Alt+Shift+A
Send Backward
Alt+Shift+Q
Send to Back
Ctrl+1
View – Normal
Ctrl+2
View – Outline
Ctrl+3
View – Notes
Ctrl+4
View – SlideSorter
Ctrl+5
View – Reading
Ctrl+Shift+Y
Increase Font Size
Ctrl+Shift+X
Decrease Font Size
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
662
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
COMMON SHORTCUTS
Ctrl+Shift+G
Object – Regroup
Ctrl+T
Open the dialog box for changing the font.
Shift+F3
Change the case of letters between sentence, lowercase, or
uppercase.
Ctrl+M
Insert a new slide.
Ctrl+Shift+D
Duplicate of a selected slide.
F5
Start the presentation from the beginning.
Shift+F5
Start the presentation from the current slide.
Ctrl+F1
Show or hide ribbon.
Alt, H, S, L, P
Launch the Selection pane.
Ctrl+Shift+F
Move a selected item forward.
Ctrl+Shift+B
Move a selected item backward.
F1
Open the Help window.
Shift+F4
Repeat the last Find action
Left-Arrow
Move one character to the left.
Right-Arrow
Move one character to the right.
Up-Arrow
Move one line up.
Down-Arrow
Move one line down.
Ctrl+Left-Arrow
Move one word to the left.
Ctrl+Right-Arrow
Move one word to the right.
End
Move to the end of a line.
Home
Move to the beginning of a line.
Ctrl+Up-Arrow
Move up one paragraph.
Ctrl+Down-Arrow
Move down one paragraph.
Ctrl+End
Move to the end of a text box.
Ctrl+Home
Move to the beginning of a text box.
Ctrl+Enter
In Microsoft Office PowerPoint, move to the next title or body
text placeholder. If it is the last placeholder on a slide, this will
insert a new slide with the same slide layout as the original
slide.
Shift+Right-Arrow
Select one character to the right.
Shift+Left-Arrow
Select one character to the left.
Ctrl+Shift+Right-
Arrow
Select to the end of a word.
Ctrl+Shift+Left-Arrow
Select to the beginning of a word.
Shift+Up-Arrow
Select one line up.
Shift+Down-Arrow
Select one line down.
Ctrl+Backspace
Delete one word to the left.
Delete
Delete one character to the right.
Ctrl+Delete
Delete one word to the right.
Ctrl+D
Duplicate of an marked object.
Ctrl+Spacebar
Remove manual character formatting, such as subscript and
superscript.
Ctrl+N
Build a new presentation.
Ctrl+Shift+S
Show or hide a focused item.
Alt+Shift+F10
Display the menu or message for a smart tag. If more than one
smart tag is present, switch to the next smart tag and display its
menu or message.
TALLY SHORTCUTS
Windows
Functionality
Availability
F1
To select a company
To select Accounts Button and
inventory Buttons
At all masters menu screen
At the Accounting / Inventory vouchers
creation and alteration screen
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
663
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
COMMON SHORTCUTS
F2
To change the menu period
To change the menu period
F3
To select the company
To change the menu period
F4
To select the Contra voucher
At Accounting / Inventory Voucher creation
and alteration screen
F5
To select the Payment voucher
At Accounting / Inventory Voucher creation
and alteration screen
F6
To select the Receipt voucher
At Accounting / Inventory Voucher creation
and alteration screen
F7
To select the Journal voucher
At Accounting / Inventory Voucher creation
and alteration screen
F8
To select the Sales voucher
At Accounting / Inventory Voucher creation
and alteration screen
F8
(CTRL+F8)
To select the Credit Note voucher
At Accounting / Inventory Voucher creation
and alteration screen
F9
To select the Purchase voucher
At Accounting / Inventory Voucher creation
and alteration screen
F9
(CTRL +
F9)
To select the Debit Note voucher
At Accounting / Inventory Voucher creation
and alteration screen
F10
To select the Reversing Journal
voucher
At Accounting / Inventory Voucher creation
and alteration screen
F10
To select the Memorandum voucher
At Accounting / Inventory Voucher creation
and alteration screen
F11
To select the Functions and Features
screen
At almost all screens in TALLY
F12
To select the Configure screen
At almost all screens in TALLY
ALT + 2
To Duplicate a voucher
At List of Vouchers – creates a voucher similar
to the one where you positioned the cursor and
used this key combination
ALT + A
To Add a voucher
At List of Vouchers – adds a voucher after the
one where you positioned the cursor and used
this key combination.
ALT + C
To create a master at a voucher screen
(if it has not been already assigned a
different function, as in reports like
Balance Sheet, where it adds a new
column to the report)
At voucher entry and alteration screens, at a
field where you have to select a master from a
list. If the necessary account has not been
created already, use this key combination to
create the master without quitting from the
voucher screen.
ALT + D
To delete a voucher
To delete a master
(if it has not been already assigned a
different function, as explained
above)
At Voucher and Master (Single) alteration
screens. Masters can be deleted subject to
conditions, as explained in the manual.
ALT + C
To create a master at a voucher screen
(if it has not been already assigned a
different function, as in reports like
Balance Sheet, where it adds a new
column to the report)
At voucher entry and alteration screens, at a
field where you have to select a master from a
list. If the necessary account has not been
created already, use this key combination to
create the master without quitting from the
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
664
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
COMMON SHORTCUTS
voucher screen.
ALT + D
To delete a voucher
To delete a master
(if it has not been already assigned a
different function, as explained
above)
At Voucher and Master (Single) alteration
screens. Masters can be deleted subject to
conditions, as explained in the manual.
ALT + E
To export the report in ASCII, SDF,
HTML OR XML format
At all reports screens in TALLY
ALT + I
To insert a voucher
At List of Vouchers – inserts a voucher before
the one where you positioned the cursor and
used this key combination.
ALT + R
To remove a line in a report
At all reports screens in TALLY
ALT + S
To bring back a line you removed
using ALT + R
At all reports screens in TALLY
ALT + X
To cancel a voucher in Day Book/List
of Vouchers
At all voucher screens in TALLY
CTRL + A
To accept a form – wherever you use
this key combination, that screen or
report gets accepted as it is.
At almost all screens in TALLY, except where
a specific detail has to be given before
accepting.
INTERNET SHORTCUTS
Ctrl+Tab – Switch to the next tab – in other words, the tab on the right. (Ctrl+Page Up
also works, but not in Internet Explorer.)
Ctrl+Shift+Tab – Switch to the previous tab – in other words, the tab on the left.
(Ctrl+Page Down also works, but not in Internet Explorer.)
Ctrl+W, Ctrl+F4 – Close the current tab.
Ctrl+Shift+T – Reopen the last closed tab
Ctrl+T – Open a new tab.
Ctrl+N – Open a new browser window.
Alt+F4 – Close the current window. (Works in all applications.)
Mouse Actions for Tabs
Middle Click a Tab – Close the tab.
Ctrl+Left Click, Middle Click – Open a link in a background tab.
Shift+Left Click – Open a link in a new browser window.
Ctrl+Shift+Left Click – Open a link in a foreground tab.
Navigation
Alt+Left Arrow, Backspace – Back.
Alt+Right Arrow, Shift+Backspace – Forward.
F5 – Reload.
Ctrl+F5 – Reload and skip the cache, re-downloading the entire website.
Escape – Stop.
Alt+Home – Open homepage
Ctrl+0 – Default zoom level.
Ctrl+H – Open the browsing history.
Ctrl+J – Open the download history.
Ctrl+D – Bookmark the current website.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
665
¨sÁUÀ 1
OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE
COMMON SHORTCUTS
Ctrl+Shift+Del – Open the Clear Browsing History window
Ctrl+L, Alt+D, F6 – Focus the address bar so you can begin typing.
Ctrl+Enter – Prefix www. and append .com to the text in the address bar, and then load
the website. For example, type howtogeek into the address bar and press Ctrl+Enter to
open www.howtogeek.com.
Alt+Enter – Open the location in the address bar in a new tab.
Ctrl+K, Ctrl+E – Focus the browser’s built-in search box or focus the address bar if the
browser doesn’t have a dedicated search box. (Ctrl+K doesn’t work in IE, Ctrl+E does.)
Alt+Enter – Perform a search from the search box in a new tab.
Ctrl+F, F3 – Open the in-page search box to search on the current page.
Ctrl+G, F3 – Find the next match of the searched text on the page.
Ctrl+Shift+G, Shift+F3 – Find the previous match of the searched text on the page
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
666
¨sÁUÀ 1
¥ÀjµÀÌøvÀ ¥ÀoÀåªÀ¸ÀÄÛ«£ÀAvÉ
¹zÀÝ¥Àr¹gÀĪÀ UÀtPÀAiÀÄAvÀæ
²PÀët ¥ÀoÀå¥ÀĸÀÛPÀ
UÁæ¦üPï r¸ÉÊ£Àgï
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
Starting InDesign
setting up the document
The InDesign interface
CHAPTER – 2 DISCOVERING THE DOCUMENT WINDOW
Document and guides
Zero Point
Units of Measurements
Grids
Panels
Workspace
Viewing the Page
The Tool Box
Working with a document
Closing a document
Creating an alternate layout
Inserting / Removing Pages
MASTER PAGES
CHAPTER 3 WORKING WITH TOOLS AND OBJECTS
Selection tool:
Deleting , moving , resizing elements
Cut, copy and paste an object
Aligning and distributing objects using the align dialog box
CHAPTER 4 WORKING WITH TEXT TOOLS
Type tool
Applying bullets and numbering
Adding automatic page numbering
The story editor
Spell check
Find and replace
Change case
Select text
CHAPTER 5 INTRODUCTION TO THREADED TEXT
CHAPTER 6 APPLY TRANSFORMATION TOOLS
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
667
¨sÁUÀ 1
Skewing/ Shearing an object
Flipping/reflecting an Object
Rotating an Object
Cropping an Object
Resizing an object
Scaling an Object
Moving an object
Repeat Transformations
Combining Effects :
CHAPTER 7 IMPORTING GRAPHICS
The Place Command
Layers
CHAPTER 8 WORKING WITH COLORS AND STROKES
Defining the Types of Colors
Working with Colors and Strokes
Using Swatches Panel
Creating a Gradient Swatch
Creating a Tint Swatches
CHAPTER 9 APPLYING EFFECTS
Using Effects on an Object
Effects panel overview
Display Effects panel options
Transparency effects
Changing Strokes
CHAPTER 10 WORKING WITH TABLES
Creating tables
Convert text to table
Convert a table into text
CHAPTER 11 PUBLISHING THE DOCUMENT AND BOOK
Performing the preflight check in the document
Saving a Document as PDF
Previewing and Exporting in grayscale
Printing a document
Print Present
Create a book file
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
668
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
PUBLISHING
SOFTWARE
INDESIGN CS6
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
669
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
Adobe InDesign is a Desktop Publishing Software (DTP) Application produced by Adobe Systems. It can be
used to create works such as Posters, Flyers, Brochures, Magazines, Newspapers and Books. InDesign is the
successor to Adobe PageMaker, which was acquired with the purchase of Aldus in late 1994. InDesign was
introduced by Adobe Systems in 1999 as the first DTP application. The first version, InDesign 1.0 was released
on 1999. InDesign CS6 now supports features such as XHTML exporting, professional typographical controls,
and long-document support. Using InDesign, you can produce professional-quality, full-color documents on
high-volume color printing presses, or print to a range of output devices, such as desktop printers and high-
resolution imaging devices, or export to a range of formats including PDF and EPUB.
STARTING INDESIGN
Click Start button All ProgramsAdobeAdobe InDesign CS6.
The Welcome Screen along with the workspace appears as shown in fig: 1.1
The welcome screen consists of the following section:
Open Recent Items: It shows the list of recently opened documents.
Create New: used to create New Document/Book/Library.
Community: Used to connect to various online InDesign related communities like Groups, Plug-in
and Exchange.
Helps and latest tips
Getting Started: It shows the getting started tips by opening an official Adobe website.
New Features: It displays the new features in InDesign CS6 compared to older versions by
opening its official website.
Resources: It shows the help topics for InDesign CS6 in an official website
Adobe InDesign CS6: Opens a Facebook link for InDesign with latest tips
SETTING UP THE DOCUMENT
To create a New Document, Click File menu NewIn Create New Section: Select Document (Ctrl + N).
A New Document dialog box appears Fig: 1.2 displays the New Document Dialog box, you can set up the
Fig 1.1 : InDesign Welcome Screen
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
670
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
page size, page orientation, bindings, margins, and columns all in one place. You can change these settings
at any time.
Options in New Document dialog box are:
Document
Preset: Choose a
preset if you have saved earlier
which includes page size, columns
and margins
Intent: If you are creating a
document to be output to PDF or
SWF for the web, choosing the
Web
option
changes
several
options in the dialog box, such as
turning
off
Facing
Pages,
changing the Orientation from
Portrait to Landscape, and using a
page size based on Monitor
Resolution.
Number of Pages: Type a value
for the total number of pages for this document.
Facing Pages: This option is used to make left and right pages face each other in a double-page Spread.
Deselect this option to let each page stand alone.
Starting Page #: Specify which Page number the document starts on.
Primary Text Frame: Select this option to add a Primary Text Frame on the Master page.
Page Size: Choose a Page size from the menu, or type values for Width and Height. There are Presets for
common sizes such as letter, legal, and tabloid. Default Page size is A4.
Orientation: Portrait and Landscape. Default orientation is Portrait
Binding: Can be set for Left to Right(used for normal binding of book) or Right to Left( used for Arabic book
binding)
Columns: Number of columns in a document can be set here. Default is 1
Gutter: The space between two columns is called as Gutter margin.
Margins::We can set Margins to InDesign document. By default Inside, Outside, Top and Bottom: 12.7mm or
0.5”
Note: You can change column and marginal settings for pages and Spreads. When you change the column and
margin setting on Master page, you change the setting for all pages to which master is applied. Changing the
columns and margins of regular pages affects only those pages which are selected.
Bleed: After clicking More Options Button, Bleed and Slug options appear, the Bleed area is used to align
objects that you want to extend all the way to the trim line of your printed document.
Fig 1.2 New Document Dialog Box
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
671
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Slug: The Slug area is used for instructions to the printer, sign-off forms, or other information related to your
document. The Slug area is discarded when the document is trimmed to its final page size.
After selecting the required options click OK button in New Document dialog box. A blank document named
Untitled-1.indd is created
NOTE: If you need to adjust any of this information while you are working, you can make changes at any time
by clicking File Document Setup.
THE INDESIGN INTERFACE
The default Workspace in InDesign includes: an Application bar, Menu bar, Control Panel, Tools Panel,
Panel group(dock), Document window(pasteboard), Work Area ,Spread controls, Status Bar.
Application Bar:
It is located at the top of the Window. It contains various elements like InDesign icon, Goto Bridge button,
Zoom controls, View controls, Screen mode drop down box, Arrange drop down box, Workspace
switcher, The search box. At the right end of the Application bar there are three buttons: minimize,
maximize and close
InDesign Icon : It allows you to Restore, Size, Move, Minimize, Maximize and Close the InDesign
Window.
Goto Bride button : opens Adobe Bride package.
Zoom Controls :Allows to zoom in or zoom out a document.
Screen Mode : Allows to view document in different screen modes like: Normal, Preview, Bleed, Slug and
presentation modes.
o Normal: Mode which will show Normally
Fig 1.3 : InDesign Interface
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
672
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
o Preview: It previews the document which is ready for printing.
o Bleed: It previews the printable area of the document with its predefined bleed area that
extends beyond the page boundaries.
o Slug: The Slug area is an area outside of the document page that contain printing related
instructions. It previews the document with all printalble objects with predefined slug area.
o Presentation: It preview the document in full screen size without menus (as shown in
Powerpoint slide show)
Arrange documents : It is used to arrange multiple documents if you have opened. It lets you arrange
documents as : Consolidate all, Tile all in a Grid, Tile All Horizontal, Tile All Vertically.
Workspace Switcher : InDesign lets you switch between the workspaces. You can customize a workspace as
needed. There are workspaces like Advanced, book, Digital publishing, Essentials, Interactive for PDF,
New in CS6, Printing and Proofing, Typography. You can also Create new workspace, Replace it, Remove
it.
The Search box: It is used to search data from internet.
Close: To close the application.
Restore/Maximize: toggles between Maximize (full screen) and Restore (Normal sized screen).
Minimize: collapsing the window into an icon on the taskbar
Menu bar
The Main Menu organizes commands in individual menus which are grouped according to the task they
perform. The different menus are:
File Menu: Has basic operation commands like creating a new file, opening, printing, importing,
exporting, closing a file.
Edit Menu: Allows you to edit the contents of the file by using cut, copy, paste, find, etc.,
Layout Menu: It works with various page layout related options like adding pages, guides, navigating
through pages, etc.,
Type Menu: Has text related options like font style, color, Alignment, inserting symbols, typing on
path, track changes, bullets, etc.,
Object Menu: Has object related options like: aligning object, arranging an object, applying
transformations, etc.,
Table Menu: Has options related to tables like inserting, deleting, merging, splitting tables/cells
View Menu: Has options to change view for a document like zoom, ruler, guides,
Window Menu: It allows you to perform work related to workspace (here we can turn on/off Panels)
Help Menu: Provides help
Control Panel
The Control Panel displays options for the currently selected Tool.
Tools Panel
The Tools Panel contains Tools for creating and editing images, artwork, page elements, and so on.
Related Tools are grouped together. The Toolbox contains Tools for drawing and editing images. Some of the
Tools are visible by default, while others are grouped in flyouts. Flyouts open to display a set of related Tools.
You can access the Tools in a flyout by clicking a small arrow in the lower-right corner of a Toolbox. It
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
673
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
contains related Tools. They can be selected by hovering over any of the Toolbox buttons which have flyout
arrows.
Tools/ Flyouts of InDesign are listed below:
Selection Tool allows you to select, resize, skew and re-position objects or
image
Direct Select Tool:allows you to select objects to reshape them. You can
also move objects independently within a frame
Page Tool: Allows you to create multiple pages of different sizes in a
single document.
Gap Tool:Used to adjust the gaps between objects.
Content Collector Tool : It enables you to collect contents such as images
or text from InDesign document.
Type Tool: Allows you to create a rectangular text frame, type, edit and
format text on a page.
Type on a Path Tool: Allows you to type text on an open or closed path.
Line: Used to draw lines
Pen Tool: Used to draw lines or curve segments
Add Anchor point Tool : Used to add anchor points to lines or curve
segments.
Delete Anchor point Tool: Used to delete anchor points to lines or curve
segments
Convert Direction point Tool : It toggles the direction point on an line or
curve segment.
Pencil Tool: Used to draw open or closed path
Smooth Tool: Used to remove unnecessary angles or anchor points from a
path
Erase Tool: Used to erase line segments and points
Creates an empty rectangular/ elliptical/ polygonal placeholder in a
document
Rectangle Tool :Allows you to draw Rectangles or square
Ellipse Tool: Allows you to draw Ellipse or Circle
Polygon Tool: Allows you to draw Polygonal or stars
Scissor Tool : It is used to cut a path into separate paths
Free Transform Tool: Used to move, rotate and reshape objects
Rotate Tool: Used to rotate objects
Scale Tool: Used to resize objects horizontally, vertically and
proportionally.
Shear Tool: Used to Tilt the object towards the dragged position of an
object
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
674
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Gradient Swatch Tool: Used to apply gradients
Gradient Feather Tool: Changes the gradient to gradually soften it in a
specified direction
Note Tool: Used to add Notes (information) to a specified area in a
document.
Eyedropper Tool: Select the color
Measure Tool: Used for measuring distances
Hand Tool: Allows to reposition page for optimal view
Zoom Tool: Used to zoom in or zoom out and view a document.
Fill and Stroke Tool: Used to apply fill and Outline (stroke) colors to an
object.
Formatting Affects Text : Applies fill and stroke to text.
Formatting Affects Container: Applies fill and stroke to containers.
Apply Color: Applies color to an object.
Apply Gradient: Applies Gradient to an object.
Apply None: Removes the applied color in an object.
Normal, Preview, Bleed, Slug, Presentation : Document Views
Panels
Panels help you monitor and modify your work. By using Panels you can add or remove various effects on an
object and a document. By default Panel group is located at right side of the workspace. The different Panels are
The pages Panel, Layers, Stroke, Color, Swatches, Links, Buttons and Forms Panel, Object States Panel, Layers
Panel, etc.,
Scrollbar
Scrollbar helps you to view different portion of your page. There are two types of scroll bar: Vertical scrollbar
and Horizontal scrollbar.
Ruler
Rulers: By default when you open any document you’ll see the Horizontal and Vertical Rulers on the top and
left side. They are very useful for arranging items in your document.
Pasteboard
Pasteboard : The white area that surrounds the page is called the pasteboard. It’s a work-space for temporarily
storing objects. The pasteboard is not a fixed size and it is not shared between Spreads. Each Spread has its own
pasteboard.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
675
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Page
Page: The most important part of the Indesign window is the page. Page is that area of the screen where we
type and place objects that we want to print. Anything, whether it is text or object, placed outside a page does
not print.
Page/Spread Controls : Page/ Spread controls indicates absolute page numbers in a document that has many
pages and makes it easy to jump from page to page in a document. To goto the next or previous page, click the
Next Page button or Previous Page button in the Page/Spread control tab. To go to the first or last page,
click the First Spread button
or Last Spread button
.
Pull-down menus: The Pull-down menus contain the commands. Click on a menu title in the menu bar to get
the Pull-down menu. Pull-down menus contain five types of commands.
Command with ellipsis: Clicking a command with an ellipsis displays a dialog box. Command dialog
boxes require you to enter more information, or they present you with more choice.
Commands with arrows: A right pointing arrow means there is a second-level menu (called a
submenu)
Commands with check marks: A check mark by the side of a command means the command is
toggled on (turned on). Clicking a command with a check mark removes the mark and toggles the
command off.
Commands that are dimmed: A dimmed command is not currently available. Often you must select
or highlight some text or objects before dimmed commands will darken and become available.
Commands with keyboard shortcuts: Sometimes a keyboard equivalent is displayed to the right of
the command. Pressing the keys gives you the same result as selecting the command indicated from the
menu. To open Pull –down menus, position the mouse pointer over the pull-down menu name you want
to activate, and click the mouse button. The menu drops down to see a submenu or invoke a menu
command, drag the mouse pointer over the menu command title (a right-facing arrow points to another
level of menus), and submenu will open. To pull the menu back, click outside the menu.
Note: You can customize menus and keyboard shortcuts in InDesign according to the need of the user.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
676
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
9 | P
CHAPTER – 2
DISCOVERING THE DOCUMENT WINDOW
DOCUMENT AND GUIDES
Page: A rectangle area surrounded by black lines, centered on the pasteboard is the Page. Page is the area of
the screen where we type text and place objects.
Spreads: A Spread is a set of pages viewed together, such as the two pages visible whenever you open a book
or magazine. Spreads appear in case of multiple pages and if facing Page option is selected in the New
Document dialog box.
Pasteboard: Working area outside a page where you can store objects that aren’t yet positioned on a
page. Every Page/Spread includes its own pasteboard.
Note: The pasteboard above and below each page or Spread is an inch deep. The pasteboard at both left and
right of a page or Spread is just as wide as the page. For example, a Spread composed of two 8-inch-wide pages
has 8 inches of pasteboard to the left and 8 inches of pasteboard to the right, plus 1 inch of pasteboard above
and 1 inch below.
Lines of other colors are Ruler
guides.
Column guides appear in front of
margin guides. When a column
guide is exactly in front of a margin
guide, it hides the margin guide.
Margin: A margin is a space separating text or other elements from the edge of the paper. If Facing Pages is
selected in the New Document or Document Setup dialog box, the Left and Right margin option names change
to Inside and Outside, so that you can specify additional inside margin space to accommodate binding. In the
above figure we observe Margin guide is in Magenta color.
Columns: A Column is a vertical area reserved for text. Most newspapers, for example, contain four or more
columns per page. You can specify the number of columns your text has to be divided in the New Document or
Document Setup dialog box. Column guides are indicated by Violet color.
Bleed Area: The Bleed area allows you to print objects that are arranged at the outer edge of the defined page
size. For a page of the required dimensions, if an object is positioned at its edge, some white may appear at the
edge of the printed area due to slight misAlignment during printing or trimming. For this reason, you should
position an object that is at the edge of the page of the required dimensions a little beyond the edge, and trim
Fig 2.1 : Document and Guides in Normal View Mode
A. Spread (black lines)
B. Page (black lines)
C. Margin guides (magenta lines) D. Column guides (violet lines)
E. Bleed area (red lines)
F. Slug area (blue lines)
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
677
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
after printing. Bleed area is shown by a red line on the document. You can set Bleed area settings from Bleed in
the Print dialog box.
Slug Area: The Slug area is discarded when the document is trimmed to its final page size. The Slug area holds
printing information, customized color bar information, or displays other instructions and descriptions for other
information in the document. Objects (including text frames) positioned in the Slug area are printed but will
disappear when the document is trimmed to its final page size. It is shown by Blue lines in the document.
Objects outside the Bleed or Slug area (whichever extends farther) do not print.
Rulers: Ruler is a measurement Tool that allows the user to align graphics, text, tables, or other elements on a
page. A horizontal ruler appears to the top and vertical ruler appears to the right of the grid. The default units
of measure for the Rulers are picas (a pica equals 12 points).
Show/Hide Rulers: Click View Menu Show Rulers or Hide Rulers. Both actions can be toggled with the
same hotkey (Ctrl + R).
Configuring Rulers: To change unit of measurement Click Edit Menu PreferencesUnits &
Increments click the Horizontal/Vertical drop-down button and select the desired option and Click OK.
ZERO POINT
The point where the Rulers intersect (horizontal and vertical) in the upper-left corner of the page is called the
zero point. The zero point is the starting place for all horizontal and vertical measurements. You can move the
zero point easily to measure distances from a specific part of your page. If you move the zero point, all the
objects on the page display new X: and Y: values even though they haven’t actually moved. Objects above or
to the left of the zero point will show negative X: and Y: values, and the X: and Y: values of other objects will
not relate to their actual position on the page or Spread.
To reset the zero point: Double-click the zero point window to reset it to the default location.
To move the zero point: Position the Pointer Tool on the crosshair in the Zero Point Window and
Drag to the new location. Release the mouse button, the zero point is reset.
To lock the zero point: To avoid accidental move of Zero point, use the context menu by right
Clicking near zero point window and choose Lock Zero Point.
To unlock zero point: Display the context menu and turn off lock zero point.
UNITS OF MEASUREMENTS
Points: Equal to 1⁄72 of an inch (or 1⁄12 of a pica). To enter values in points, Type pt after the value or p
before value (p6 or 6 pt).
Picas: Equal to 1⁄6 of an inch. To enter values in picas, type a p after the value (ex: 6p).
Note: You can combine measurements using both picas and points. Keeping in mind that 1 pica is equal to 12
points, you can enter 1½ picas as either 1.5p or 1p6.
Inches: An English measurement system that is divided into 16ths. To enter values in inches, type i, in,
inch, or " after the value. Ex: 3i, 3in, 3 inch, and 3"
Inches decimal: Inches divided into 10ths on the Ruler rather than 16ths. To enter values in inches
decimal, include a decimal point as appropriate and type i, in, inch, or " after the value.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
678
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Agates: Typically used in newspapers, an agate is 1⁄14 of an inch, usually the depth of a line in the small
type of classified ads, stock tables, and sports statistics boxes. To enter values in agates, type ag after the
value — Ex: 10ag.
Pixels: Typically used for Web pages and other on-screen documents, a pixel is the dot on a computer
monitor that is the smallest element visible; the thousands of pixels on-screen at their various colors make
up the image. To enter values in pixels, type px after the value Ex: 10px.
Millimeters: A metric measurement that is 1⁄10 of a centimeter. To enter values in millimeters, type mm
after the value, such as 14mm.
Centimeters: A metric measurement that is about 1⁄3 of an inch. To enter values in centimeters, type cm
after the value, ex: 2.3cm.
Ciceros: A European typesetting measurement that is slightly larger than a pica. To enter values in ciceros,
type c after the value — Ex: 2c.
Custom: This option lets you set a custom number of points as your measurement unit, placing a labeled
tick mark at every point increment you specify. You get to customize the number of tick marks between the
labeled marks by entering a value in the Points field.
GRIDS
The non-printable lines in a document are called as
Grid. Two types of Grids are available:
Baseline Grid : Used for aligning columns of
text. It resembles a ruled notebook paper. It
covers entire Spreads. Baseline Grids appear on
every Spread and cannot be assigned to any master
Document Grid: Used for aligning objects.
It resembles a graph paper. It covers entire
pasteboard. Document Grids appear on every Spread and cannot be assigned to any master. The document
Grid can appear in front or behind all guides, layers and objects but cannot be assigned to any layer.
Viewing Grids
Click View menuGrids & Guides, select Show Document
Grid or press Ctrl + ‘
Changing Grid Sectors
Click Edit Menu Preferences Grids, to specify
subdivisions per inch along both axes, in the Horizontal or
Vertical section, enter the desired numbers in the Gridline Every
and Subdivision fields.
Ruler Guides
Ruler guides are different from Grids in that they can be positioned freely on a page or on a pasteboard. You
can create two kinds of Ruler guides:
Page Guides: This appears only on the page on which you create.
Spread Guides: which Span all pages and the pasteboard of a multiple page Spread.
Fig : 2.3 : Grids Dialog Box
Fig 2.2:Left : Baseline Grid Right: Document Grid
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
679
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Creating a Ruler Guides: Select Selection Tool Click the horizontal ruler in the document window and
drag on the page A horizontal line, representing the horizontal grid is added to a page.
Similarly you can also add a Vertical Ruler guide also.
Deleting a Ruler Guides: Select the ruler guide which you want to delete ( horizontal or vertical guide) using
Direct Selection Tool Goto Edit menu clear (press del key)
Show/Hide Ruler Guides: Click View Menu Grids & Guides Show/Hide Guides.
PANELS
Panels help you monitor and modify your work. The different Panels are Page, Stroke, Info etc. By default
certain Panels are displayed and are located (docked) along the right edge of the InDesign window, but you can
add any Panel by selecting it from the window menu. Many
Panels have menus with Panel specific options. You can separate
group, stack, and dock Panels into your preferred layout.
A Dock is a collection of Panels or Panel groups displayed
together, generally in a vertical orientation. You dock and undock
Panels by moving them into and out of a dock.
To dock a Panel drag it by its tab into the dock at the top,
bottom, or in between other Panels.
To dock a Panel group, drag it by its title bar into the dock
To remove a Panel or Panel group, drag it out of the dock by its tab or title bar.
To move a Panel/ Panel group drag it by tab or title bar.
To control the display of Panels Click the Window menu and choose the Panel you want to display. When
the Panel is displayed, the option changes to hide Panel option
WORKSPACE
You create and manipulate your documents and files using various elements, such as Panels, bars, and
windows. Any arrangement of these elements is called a Workspace. The Application bar across the top
contains a Workspace switcher and menus. Each preset is optimized to perform some common tasks and
designed to user requirements to achieve efficiency.
You can create and customize your own workspace by arranging the Panels, windows, etc., By saving the
current size and position of Panels as a named Workspace, you can restore that Workspace even if you move or
close a Panel. The names of saved Workspaces appear in the Workspace switcher in the Application bar.
Save a Custom Workspace
With the Workspace in the configuration you want to save, Click Window menu Workspace New
Workspace, The New Workspace dialog box appears. Then type a name for your Workspace and click OK
button.
Display or Switch Workspaces
Select a Workspace name from the Workspace switcher in the Application bar.
Delete a Custom Workspace
Click Window menu Workspace Delete Workspace, from the dialog box, select the Workspace you
want to delete and then click Delete button.
Fig : 2.4 : Stroke Panel group
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
680
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
VIEWING THE PAGE
When a new document is created, it is initially displayed in the Fit Spread to Window. InDesign offers a
number of views of your document pages. Zoom option is available in Application Bar. You can shrink the
images to see the whole page upto 5%, or see varying enlargements of the page upto 4000% of actual size.
Alternatively, you can use the Zoom Tool to specify an area of the page to view, and to increase or decrease its
magnification. You can scroll within the window using the scroll bars or use the Hand Tool.
Other Page Views
Use commands on the View menu to display the page or pasteboard at preset views.
Zoom In
: To increase the magnification.
Zoom Out
: To decrease the magnification.
Fit Page to Window
: To check the overall composition of a page
Fit Spread to Window : To check the overall composition of two-pages Spread
Actual Size
: To see text and graphics as they will appear when printed.
Entire Pasteboard
: To find or view objects on the pasteboard.
Zoom To
: When precision is imperative. (200% to 400%)
THE TOOL BOX
The Toolbox has various sets of Tools used to design a document.
Selection Tools: Used for Selection of objects
Drawing and Type Tools : Used for editing text and drawing simple and complex shapes.
Transform Tools : Used to Resize, Reshape objects
Navigation Tools : Used to Navigate
Some Tools in the Toolbox have
additional Tools linked to them.
These Tools have small black
triangles in the lower right-hand
corner which is called flyouts. To
view the additional Tools click
and hold down on any Tool that
has a black triangle in the corner.
Fig : 2.5 (A): Tool Box
Fig : 2.5 (B) :Pen Flyout
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
681
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
WORKING WITH A DOCUMENT
A file created in InDesign is called Document and it is saved with the extension .indd. We have already seen
how to create a New document and the explanation of New Document dialog box is in our 1st Chapter. Let’s
see how to work with other file related options like opening an existing file, saving etc.
To Open a document created in Indesign
Click File Menu (Ctrl+ O), Open a File dialog box appears, in Look in Text box, browse to locate your file
location and select the file you want to open and click the Open button.
To Save a New document do this:
Click File menuSave (Ctrl+S) displays the Save As dialog box, the
insertion point is positioned in the File Name: text box. Type a file
name for this document. Click on the Save As Type: InDesign CS6
Document, Click Save to return to your document.
You assign a file name only once to new document. Each subsequent
time you open the document, you in fact open a copy of the
document. Any changes made to the opened document are made to
the copy until it is saved, then the original is updated with the
changes.
Note:- Remember, if you open an existing document and make some
changes you do not like, the simplest thing to do is just close the
document without saving it, then reopen it and start again.
Saving an Existing Document It is always a good idea to save your work very often but it safeguards you
from discarding changes due to power failure. To save your document, click the File menu and choose Save.
Saving a Document as Another Document
Click File menu Save As or press Shift+Ctrl+S keys together to display the Save As dialog box the
name of the current document is highlighted in the text box. Type a new name for the document. Click OK to
save the new document and return to the document window.
CLOSING A DOCUMENT
To close the active document: Click File menu Close(Ctrl+W). The document is closed without exiting
InDesign. To exit from InDesign package goto File Menu Quit (Ctrl +Q)
CREATING AN ALTERNATE LAYOUT
It helps you to modify the contents based on different types of a layout. It is used when you have a
common contents but it should be displayed in various devices such as iPad, iPhone, etc.,
This feature uses Liquid Page Rules, it automatically accommodates the contents to the size or
orientation of an alternate layout in InDesign document. The liquid page rules consists of various options such
as Re-center, scale, object based and guide based.
Select the type Tool Drag to create a text frame in work area. Type a text in text frame Select the text
frame using Selection Tool Goto Layout menu Liquid Layout. Then the liquid layout Panel appears
Fig : 2.6 : Save Dialog Box
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
682
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Select the Liquid page rule (Off/ Scale/ Re-center/ Guide based/ Object
based/ Controlled by master. Select Height, width, top left and right
checkboxes under Resize with page options.
Select Layout Create Alternate layout Now select the options in the
Liquid page rule click ok. Now we can have an alternate layout along with
original layout.
INSERTING / REMOVING PAGES
InDesign gives you complete freedom to add or remove pages. You can specify where you want to add a page
or which page/pages you want to delete. The pages you add have the page setup parameters you specified for
your existing pages.
To insert a page:
Click Layout menu Pages Add pages ( Shift+Ctrl+P )adds only single page.
To insert multiple Pages
Click Layout menu Pages Insert Pages, we get
Insert Page dialog box, there we can specify number of
pages we wish to insert in Pages text box, where to add
pages: before, after, beginning of the document, end of
document in Insert: drop down list box and you can also
choose the type of master from Master: drop down list
box.
Removing a page
Click Layout pagesRemove Pages. The Remove pages
dialog box appears Specify the page number you want to delete.
If you are removing only one page, enter the same page number
in both text boxes (for example, if you want to remove page 27,
type 27 in both text boxes). If you want to remove more than
one page, type the beginning and ending page numbers inclusive,
in the two text boxes (for example , if you want to remove pages 27 through 34, type those numbers in the two
text boxes ). Click Ok. InDesign displays a dialog warning you that the contents of the pages will be deleted
Click OK to confirm the removal and return to your document. Click Cancel to cancel the deletion.
MASTER PAGES
A Master page is a nonprinting page that you can use as the template for the rest of the pages in your document.
Master pages can contain text and graphic elements that will appear on all pages of a publication (i.e. headers,
footers, page numbers etc.) By default, every InDesign document you create contains two masters, one
for pages on the left and one for those on the right.
Multiple Master pages
Fig : 2.8 : Insert Page Dialog Box
Fig : 2.9 : Delete Page Dialog Box
Fig : 2.7 : Liquid layout
Dialog Box
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
683
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
You can create as many masters as you want or need – for example, you want a colored box down the left
margin of just some pages; you could create a master that has this look, and then apply it to only the pages that
need it.
To add a New Master, go to the Pages Panel, click on the far right arrow with three lines (circled at right)
and choose New Master….
In the subsequent dialog box, give it a name if you want and then click OK.
Select the appropriate master to change by double-clicking it, and then edit it as you wish.
To apply it to a page, drag the master icon onto the page icon in the Pages Panel, or right-click on the page
icon and choose Apply Master to Pages and choose the correct master for the page.
To view the default Master page
Make
sure
the Pages
Panel is
displayed,
by
going
to
the Window menu Pages.
Double-click on A-Master in the Pages Panel to display the Master page.
Remember, there is a left and a right page to the master, so be sure you
are on the page you want to be.
Applying Master to a Page
Goto WindowPages. In the Pages Panel, click the desired page icon (Note: Not the Master page icon).
Right-click the page, select Apply Masters to Page then Apply
Master dialog box appears. Visible whenever you open a book or
magazine.
If desired, click the To Pages drop-down menu and select the
desired options. Or, type in the page number in the To Pages field.
(Note: A range of page numbers can also be used with a comma or
hyphen)
Click OK.
Overriding Master pages
On occasion, you may need to change something about the master just on one page – for example, you don’t
want the page number to display on the first page of a chapter. You can do this without creating a whole new
master, but rather just override the one you are currently using.
In the Pages Panel right-click on the page icon for the page you want to change.
From the options, choose Override All Master page Items.
You can now click on any element on the page and change or delete it.
Deleting a Master
Deleting a master page from a document will not affect the settings of page margin, orientation,
character or Paragraph formatting,
Click Pages Panel from Panels group Select the master page you wish to delete Click the Panel
menu icon in Pages PanelSelect Delete master.
Fig : 2.10(a) : Pages Panel group
Fig : 2.10(b) : Apply Master Dialog
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
684
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
CHAPTER 3
WORKING WITH TOOLS AND OBJECTS
SELECTION TOOL:
The Selection Tool is used to select, move, resize, scale, and rotate objects on the page. It is the only
Tool that lets you drag objects around screen. To select any object on a document page, click on Selection Tool
and just click on the object.
You can even manipulate content within frames by using content grabber. It alone works as a position
Tool, rotation Tool. When you double click a text frame with the selection Tool, you will switch to the type
Tool. When you double click the contents of an object with the selection Tool, you will switch between
selecting contents and the frame.
Direct Selection Tool:
It is used to select objects that are inside other objects. (It is used to work on the contents of a frame, not the
frame itself. It is used to select individual handles on objects to reshape them or move within frames.)
Click the Direct Selection Tool Position the Tool over the point you want to movedrag the point to the
new position.
You can also move multiple points/object by creating a rectangular marquee around the points you want to
select using direct selection Tool or hold the shift key as you click to select the points. The selected point
appear solid
To move an object by dragging
Select the object using Selection Tool place the mouse pointer on the object you want to move the mouse
pointer changes to an arrowhead. Drag the object to move it.
To resize an object by dragging
Select the object using Selection Tool Press Shift if you want to constrain movement to vertical or
horizontal or to constrain the shape of an object as you resize it or to resize an imported graphic
proportionally. Drag the object handle to resize it. A two-way arrow (for resizing most objects) or a crossbar
(for resizing lines).
Page Tool
Use the page Tool for creating different page sizes within a document. Select Page Toollayout
menu pagethen use the options in the control page to change the page layout.
Gap Tool
It is used to adjust the spacing between objects. Press U to select the Gap Tool, place the pointer
between objects, drag to change the gap between aligned objects. Shift+drag to move the gap between only 2
nearest objects. Alt+drag move a gap and objects in same direction. Ctrl+Drag to resize the gap instead of
moving. Crlt+Alt+drag option to resize the gap and move the objects.
Collector Tool
When you select the Content Collector Tool, A pop-up “conveyer” appears at the bottom of the
screen, it allows the user to grab multiple pieces of contents (text/ objects) and repurpose throughout the same
or separate documents using Content Collector Tool.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
685
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
You can repurpose single or multiple pieces of content simply by dragging the content out of the conveyer
whilst choosing to keep or remove them from the conveyer. It is the fast way to replicate pieces of your
graphics across multiple layouts and documents.
To copy the contents to content conveyer
Select content collector Tool (B) then the content conveyer should appear at the bottom of the screen
click objects or stories to add them to the content conveyor at the bottom of the screen either by clicking or drag
select. The objects or stories will then appear within your content conveyer.
To use the contents in content conveyer
Goto new file/spread/page where you wish to place an object/story which you placed in content conveyer
Select Content placer Tool You can now click/select and drag to place content onto the page.
You can then use the content placer Tool to copy and link these object from the content conveyer into another
document. Press B to switch between the Content collector and the Content placer Tools.
Line
Line : This Tool lets you to draw lines at any angle. It also allows you to draw lines
of various thicknesses and at various angles.
Constrained line Tool: This Tool lets you draw horizontal lines; vertical lines or
lines at 45o, creating straight horizontal and vertical lines
Frames and Basic Shape Tools
The Frame and Shape Tools are redundant because both
Frames and Shapes can hold Text or Graphics or be empty.
The frames appear with a big X through them, making them
easier to spot when looking for frames to fill. Frame and Basic
shape Tools are used to draw Rectangle, Square, Ellipse,
Circle, Open or closed shapes, Polygons. It can be simply
inserted as an object or we can add text inside a shape Tool
using Frames
Rectangle Frames/Rectangular Shape: Used to create
rectangle or square placeholder
Ellipse Frames/Ellipse Shape Tool: Used to create circular
or elliptical place holder
Polygon Frames/Polygon Shape Tool: Used to create multi sided shape placeholder.
Inside Frames you can insert text or image.
Fig : 3.2: Lines and
Constrained Lines
Fig : 3.3: Basic Shape Tool in the above
line. Frames in the second line
Fig : 3.1: Content Conveyer
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
686
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
In the Toolbox, do one of the following:
To draw a line or shape: select the Line Tool
, the Ellipse
Tool
, the Rectangle Tool
or the Polygon Tool
.
(Click and hold the Rectangle Tool to open flyout and then you
can select either the Ellipse or Polygon Tool.) Drag in the
Document Window.
To draw a placeholder (empty) graphics/ shape frame, select the
Ellipse Frame Tool
, the Rectangle Frame Tool
, or the
Polygon Frame Tool
. Drag in the Document Window to
create the path or frame.
To draw from the center out, hold down Alt.
To constrain a line to 45° angles, or to constrain the width and
height of a path or frame to the same proportions, hold down Shift
as you drag.
\
To change the number of sides of a polygon, Select the polygon shape Tool click anywhere on a drawing
window, a dialog box appears: Specify Polygon width, height, number of sides, star inset and press ok
polygon will be placed in a page. If you do not specify polygon width and height but if you specify number
of sides and star inset and press ok then begin dragging, until you get a polygon of desired size.
To change Width:To edit a shape first select the shape using Selection Tool Place a mouse pointer on one of
the corner handles of the circle shape Drag the mouse pointer in the horizontal outward direction. The width
of the shape increase.
To change Height:To edit a shape first select the shape using Selection Tool Place a mouse pointer on one of
the corner handles of the circle shape Drag the mouse pointer in the downward direction. The height of the
shape increase.
To Round the box Corners do this:
Select a rectangle you want to change the corners. Click Object
menuCorner Options. The Rounded Corner dialog box appears
as in Fig:3.4. Select the corner size and shape you want and click
OK. The different shapes are None, Fancy, Bevel, Inset, Inverse
rounded, Rounded.
Use Live Corners
With Live Corners, you can apply corner effects to rectangular frames by
clicking the yellow box that appears on the frame and dragging. In
addition, you can apply a different corner effect and a different corner
radius to each corner.
Select a rectangular frame click the yellow box.
Four yellow diamonds appear on the selected frame, indicating
Live Corners mode.
Draw basic lines or shapes or frames.
Editing Shapes.
Fig : 3.5: Polygon options
Fig : 3.4 : Dragging to create a basic
circle
Fig : 3.6(a) : Rounded Corners Dialog
box
Fig : 3.6(b) : Rounded Corners
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
687
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
To add corner effects, do any of the following tasks:
To adjust the radii of all four corners together, drag one of the diamonds towards the center of the
frame.
To adjust a single corner, hold down Shift as you drag a diamond.
To cycle through the various effects, Alt-click a yellow diamond.
To stop editing corners, click anywhere outside the selected frame.
Guidelines for applying corner design:
If you’ve obtained plug-in software that adds more effects, the Corner Options command in the Stroke
Panel can include additional shapes.
Corner effects appear on all of a path’s corner points, but never on smooth points. The effects change
angles automatically when you move a path’s corner points.
If a corner effect significantly changes the path by, for example, creating a bulge inward or outward, it
may affect how a frame interacts with its contents or with other parts of the layout. Increasing the size
of a corner effect may push an existing text wrap or frame inset farther away from the frame.
You can’t edit a corner effect, but you can change its appearance by changing the corner radius or
modifying the stroke.
If you applied corner effects but can’t see them, make sure that the path uses corner points and that a
stroke color or gradient has been applied to it. Then increase the Size option in the Corner Options
dialog box, or increase the stroke weight in the Stroke Panel.
Fit an object to its frame
Select the frame of the object Choose Object Fitting and one of the following options:
Fit Content To Frame: Resizes content to fit a frame and allows the content proportions to be changed.
The frame will not change, but the content may appear to be stretched if the content and the frame have
different proportions.
Fit Frame To Content: Resizes a frame to fit its content. The frame’s proportions are altered to match the
content proportions, if necessary. This is useful for resetting a graphics frame that you accidentally altered.
Note: To fit a frame to its content quickly, double-click any corner handle on the frame. The frame resizes away
from the point you click. If you click a side handle, the frame resizes only in that dimension.
Center Content: Centers content within a frame. The proportions of the frame and its content are
preserved. The size of the content and frame are unaltered.
Fit Content Proportionally: Resizes content to fit a frame while preserving the content proportions. The
frame’s dimensions are not changed. If the content and the frame have different proportions, some empty
space will result.
Fill Frame Proportionally: Resizes content to fill the entire frame while preserving the content’s
proportions. The frame’s dimensions are not changed. If the content and the frame have different
proportions, some of the content will be cropped by the bounding box of the frame.
Note: The Fitting commands fit the outer edges of the content to the center of the frame’s stroke. If the frame has
a thick stroke weight, outer edges of the content will be obscured. You can adjust the frame’s stroke Alignment
to the center, inside, or outside of a frame edge. To remove undesired fitting settings applied using AutoFit,
choose Object Fitting Clear Frame Fitting Options.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
688
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
21 | P a g e
Pen
Pen Tool is used to create paths, which are straight or curved lines that consist of anchor points and line
segments. You can create simple or complex paths by clicking the pen Tool pointer on the page. Each time you
click the pen Tool pointer on the document, you create an anchor point. Line segments automatically fall into
place between every two anchor points. You start off by creating one anchor point, then creating another at a
different location. Once the second anchor point is created, a line segment is automatically placed between the 2
anchor points. The number of anchor points and line segments we need depends on the type of objects you
create. You can create an open path or closed path using Pen Tool.
Open Path : An open path is a path whose end points are not connected. (Ex: U, [, M,,Z)
Closed path: A closed paths are continuous lines that do not contain end points. i.e., when you create a
closed path, you end the drawing at the same point where you started it by clicking the pen Tool on the first
anchor point.
Note : For open path, you can apply only stroke. For closed path you can apply fill and stroke.
To Draw Straight line Segments
Using the Pen Tool, click once and release somewhere on the document(do not drag)
Move over a few inches and click again. A straight path segment should connect the 2 anchor points.
Select pen Tool, position the pen Tool where you want the straight segment to begin(do not drag)
Click again where you want the segment to end (Shift+ click to constrain the angle of the segment
to a 45 degree multiple)
Continue clicking to set anchor points for additional
straight segments
To close the path, position the pen Tool over the first
anchor point. Click to close the path. (objects paths
close path.)
To leave the path open Ctrl+Click anywhere away from
all objects(press enter key to leave the path open)
Select the Pen Tool. Position the Pen Tool where
you want the curve to begin, and hold down the mouse
button. The first anchor point appears, and the Pen Tool
pointer changes to an arrowhead.
Drag to set the slope of the curve segment you’re
creating, and then release the mouse button. In general, extend
the direction line about one third of the distance to the next
anchor point you plan to draw. (You can adjust one or both
sides of the direction line later.) Hold down the Shift key to
constrain the Tool to multiples of 45°.
Position the Pen Tool where you want the curve segment
to end, and do one of the following::
To Draw a Star
To Draw a Curve
Fig : 3.8(a): Drawing the first point in a curve
A. Positioning Pen Tool
B. Starting to drag (mouse button pressed)
C. Dragging to extend direction lines
Fig : 3.7: Pen Tool to draw line segments
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
689
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
To create a C-shaped curve, drag in a direction opposite to the previous direction line. Then release the
mouse button.
To create an S-shaped curve, drag in the same direction as the previous direction line. Then release the
mouse button.
Continue dragging the Pen Tool from different
locations to create a series of smooth curves. Note that you
are placing anchor points at the beginning and end of each
curve, not at the tip of the curve.
Note: Alt-drag direction lines to break out the direction
lines of an anchor point.
Complete the path by doing one of the following:
To close the path, position the Pen Tool over the first
(hollow) anchor point. A small circle appears next to the
Pen Tool pointer
when it is positioned correctly. Click
or drag to close the path.
Reposition anchor points as you draw
After you click to create an anchor point, keep the
mouse button pressed down, hold down the spacebar, and
drag to reposition the anchor point. Complete a path by
objectspathsclose path.
Used to add or remove additional anchor points into a drawing
Position the pen Tool pointer over the path between point 2 and point 3
Click anywhere on the path between the 2 points, An anchor point is added where you clicked
Click the Direct selection Tool click the new anchor point, then drag it to point 3.
Converting Points
Converting points on a path
Select the Direct selection Tool Select one or more points on path to convert
Select the pathfinder Panel by clicking Window Menu Object and Layout Pathfinder or Object
Menu Convert point Select a Convert command
Click the button with the convert command you want
o Plain : Changes points to have no direction points or lines
o Corner : Changes points to have independent direction lines.
o Smooth : Changes points to be a continuous curve with connected direction lines.
o Symmetrical : Changes point to smooth points with equal length directional lines.
Converting points on a path using the convert direction point Tool.
Select the Direct selection Tool Select a path to convert points
Select the convert direction point Tool on the Tools Panel
Drag a corner point to create a smooth point with no handles
Add Anchor Point
Fig : 3.8 (b): Drawing the Second point in a curve
A. Starting to drag 2nd smooth point
B. Dragging away from previous direction line,
creating a curve
C. Final curve
Fig : 3.8(C): Drawing an S curve
A. Starting to drag new smooth point
B. Dragging in same direction as previous direction
line, creating an S curve
C. Result after releasing mouse button
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
690
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Scissors
It is used to split or break a path into segments. If we want to separate 1
path into 2 parts ex: 1 circle into 2 halves then we can use this Tool, Use Direct
Selection Tool to move one point away from the other. Select the path
Select scissors ToolsPosition the cursor where you want to split the
pathclick to split the path at that point.
Note :Path that contains text cannot be split into 2 distinct segments
Selecting Multiple Elements
You can use the selection Tool to select objects. You can select a
single object, or you can select multiple objects and modify them all at
once. When objects overlap, you can select them through the stack of
objects. Use the following techniques to select objects. To select all objects
on the current page or Spread, click Edit menu and choose Select All.
Click an empty part or the page or click Edit menu and choose Deselect
All to deselect.
To select a single object, click the object with the pointer Tool To add objects to a selection,
hold down Shift as you click other objects.
To select several objects at once, drag the pointer Tool around multiple objects. Be sure to
include each object’s bounding box (as indicated by its selection handles) within the selection
area, not just the visible portion of the object.
To select an object underneath another object on the same layer, press Ctrl and click the object you
want to select. Each time you click, InDesign selects an object one level deeper in the stack of objects.
DELETING , MOVING , RESIZING ELEMENTS
Deleting an Object
When you delete an object, you break all links between a document and the original object. So, be careful while
deleting an object.
To delete an object do this: Select the object. Click Edit menu and choose Clear, or press, Backspace or
Delete key.
Moving and Resizing object
You can move and resize any object by dragging with the mouse or by using the Control Panel. You can also
move an object by pressing arrow keys on the keyboard.
Note:- You can move two or more objects simultaneously but you can resize only one object at a time unless
you first group the items you want to resize.
Dragging a side handle changes the width or height only but dragging a corner handle changes the width and
height simultaneously.
Object Resized with shift key
Line
Line angled at 45 degree increments
Ellipse
Circle
Rectangle
Square
Fig : 3.10: Selecting many objects
Fig : 3.9 : Left Original Image
Right : Image split using scissors
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
691
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Regular polygon
Even sided shape with all sides equal
Imported
Aspect ratio preserved
Group
Aspect ratio of the group is preserved
To Move an object using the Arrow keys do this:
Select the object To move the object incrementally by .01 inch (.25mm), press an arrow key. To move the
object incrementally by 0.1 inch (2.5mm) hold down Shift as you press an arrow key.
CUT, COPY AND PASTE AN OBJECT
Cut (Ctrl+X) option is used to move the selected text or objects from the document to the clipboard,
removing them from the page
Copy (Ctrl+C) option is used to copy the selected text or objects to the clipboard. The original objects
remain on the page.
Paste (Ctrl +V) Option is used to place the contents of the clipboard (the last thing you cut or copied) into
your document. The contents of the clipboard can be pasted repeatedly. Pasting does not affect the contents
of the clipboard or original contents.
Duplicate (Ctrl+Alt+Shift+D) option is used to copy and paste the selected text or objects on the page
without storing the copy in clipboard. It works faster than copy and paste. If you copy an object, its copy
is placed in a container called as clipboard. Then when you press paste, the copy is been placed from the
data stored in clipboard. So instead of using copy and paste you can directly use Edit Duplicate which
makes the duplicate copy of the selected object.
Duplicate objects into a Grid: By dragging and using modifier keys, you can create a Grid of object
identical to the object being duplicated. Select an object. Using the Selection Tool, hold down Alt key
and begin dragging. While still dragging, release the Alt key. Press the Left Arrow and Right Arrow
keys to change the number of columns. Press the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys to change the
number of rows. Drag a rectangle to specify the size of the Grid. Release the mouse button.
Duplicate a selected object as you transform
You can duplicate an object each time you change its position, orientation, or proportions. For example, you
can create a flower by drawing one petal, setting its Reference point at the base of the petal, and repeatedly
rotating at incremental angles, simultaneously duplicating to leave behind a new copy of the petal at each angle.
During a transformation, do one of the following:
If you’re dragging the Selection Tool
, the Rotate Tool
, the Scale Tool
, or the Shear Tool
, start
dragging, and then hold down Alt key after you begin dragging. To constrain the duplicate’s transformation,
Alt+Shift drag If you’re specifying a value in the Transform or Control Panel, press Alt+Enter after you’ve
typed the value. If you’re pressing arrow keys to move objects, hold down Alt as you press the keys.
Paste without formatting(Ctrl+Shift+V): Imagine you have a 60 pt Bodoni headline and some 12 point
Myriad body text. If you select a couple of words of body text, and try to paste it in the middle of the
headline, the pasted text will appear with the 12 point Myriad formatting, when the desired result is
probably to adopt the formatting of the headline. This where Paste without Formatting comes in. All you
have to do is copy the body text normally, then use Edit Paste without Formatting to paste the text
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
692
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
into the headline. The formatting of the body text will be left behind, and the text will adopt the formatting
of the new cursor location. It is mainly used when you need to copy text from other packages.
Paste Into (Ctrl+Alt+V): It is used to paste a text block inside an object. For using Paste Into, first you
need to copy text box (not text in text box) then Paste into option will be highlighted. Then select the object
into which you need to paste the text box and then go to Edit-Paste into. Then the text box is placed
inside the object.
Place and Link: When you copy text in other packages and paste it in InDesign, you can link a text file,
changes made in the original will trigger a request to update the link in InDesign, but it is one-way only.
There is no facility for moving the edits from InDesign back to the text doc other than exporting the story to
RTF or text.
Step and Repeat : Use the Step and Repeat command to instantly create rows or columns of duplicates.
For example, you can fill a page with evenly spaced duplicates of a single business card design. Select the
object or objects you want to duplicate. Choose Edit Step and Repeat. For Repeat Count,
specify how many duplicates you want to make, not counting the original. For Horizontal Offset and
Vertical Offset, specify how far to shift the position of each new duplicate from the previous duplicate
along the x and y axes, respectively, and click OK.
Note: To create a page full of duplicates, first use Step and Repeat with Vertical Offset set to 0 (zero); this will
create one row of duplicates. Then select the entire row and use Step and Repeat with Horizontal Offset set to 0;
this will repeat the row down the page.
Moving elements & Resizing using the using Control Panel
To move an object using the Control Panel do this:
Select the object. If the Control Panel is not displayed, click Window menu and choose Show Control
Panel. Select a Reference point in the proxy to specify the part of a selected graphic that moves if
the Reference point is a box, the object will move, if it is an arrow the object will change size as see in
Figure 3.8. Click the Reference point to toggle from one mode to the other. To move the object adjust
the values for X and Y
To resize an object using Control Panel do this:
Select the object. Click or double click to select the Reference point on the Proxy. If you click to select a
Reference point, it appear as a small rectangle on the proxy, and the equivalent location on the selected object
remains stationary as you resize the object. To maintain the original aspect ratio of the object. You can then
change either the X and W values or the Y and H values, depending on the selected Reference point. The related
values changes proportionally.
Specify a size in one of the following way:
1. If the Reference point is a box or a four way arrow, resize the object from the Reference point outward
by adjusting W and H or L options (Note that L Appears only if a line is selected.) W - Refers to the
width of the object H- refers to the height of the object.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
693
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
2. If the Reference point is a two way arrow move the Reference point to stretch or shrink the
object by adjusting values for W, H, and L, or for X and Y.
3. If you want to resize an object to a percentage of its original size, change the percentage values next
to W and H.
4. Click the Apply button.
ALIGNING AND DISTRIBUTING OBJECTS USING THE ALIGN DIALOG BOX
You can align objects in relation to one another, and then evenly distribute the spaces between the objects.
Align or distribute objects based on a common edge or based on the centers of objects. For example, select
the align right icon to move objects horizontally so that their right edges line up with the right edge of the
rightmost object.(To align objects to a Grid, use Rulers and guides). When you distribute objects, you can add
an even amount of space between their facing edges.
To Align and Distribute objects:
1. Select the objects you want to align and distribute.
2. Click Window Objects and Layout sub-menu and choose Align option.
3. If you are distributing objects, select one of the following methods for each
Direction (vertical and horizontal):
Align Panel is displayed at right side. Select one icon for each direction (horizontal or vertical) in
which you want to align or one of the axes.
Align Objects :
Align Left Edges, Align Horizontal centers, Align right edges, Align top edges, Align
Vertical centers, Align bottom edges
Distribute Objects:
Distribute Top Edges, Distribute Vertical Centers, Distribute Bottom Edges,
Distribute Horizontal Centers, Distribute Right Edges, Distribute Left Edges
Distribute Spacing:
Distribute Horizontal space, Distribute Vertical space
Use Spacing :
Specify the required amount of spacing• Select
Pencil
Pencil Tool lets you draw a freeform path as pen Tool. It lets you draw open and closed paths as if you were
drawing with a pencil on paper. It is most useful for fast sketching or creating a hand-drawn look.
Draw freeform paths with the Pencil Tool
Select the Pencil Tool
Select the stroke color and weight and fill None on the Stroke Panel Position
the Tool where you want the path to begin, and drag to draw a path.
Edit paths with the Pencil Tool
You can edit any path using the Pencil Tool and add freeform lines and shapes to any shape.
Add to a path with the Pencil Tool
Select an existing path. Select the Pencil Tool Position the pencil tip on an endpoint of the path. You can
tell you’re close enough to the endpoint when the small x next to the pencil tip disappears Drag to continue
the path.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
694
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Set Pencil Tool Options :
Double click on pencil Tool Enter fidelity value(5-20)Higher value creates fewer anchor points
Enter smoothness percentage (0-100%) a higher value creates smoother curves Click OK.
Eraser
You may want to delete parts of paths. Rather than selecting and deleting
individual points, you can use the Erase Tool to drag to delete parts of a path.
Select the path that you want to delete parts of. Choose the Erase Tool in
the Tools Panel Press and drag the Erase Tool along the path. Release
the mouse to display the new path .
Smooth Tool
If you create a path with some jagged edges, you can use the smooth Tool to remove extra anchor points to
smooth it out. (The path will be drawn with a fewer points) Select the Direct Selection Tool select the path
you want to smooth Select the Smooth Tool drag along the path to smooth it out. The path is reshaped
with fewer points
You can set Smooth Tool options:
Double click Smooth Tool Enter the fidelity value(5-20). Fidelity determines how far the mouse must move
before an anchor point is added. A higher value creates less anchor points and smoother path. Enter the
smoothness value (0-100). A higher value creates smoother curve. Select the keep selected check box to
keep paths selected after you draw them Click Ok
Working with Pathfinder.
If you are overlapping objects, you can use buttons on the
pathfinder Panel to create compound shapes, which are editable
and releasable (restoring original attributes.) You can use
pathfinder buttons (add, subtract, intersect, exclude overlap or
minus back) on almost any object, except placed or rasterized
images, mesh objects or a single group.
Select 2 or more overlapping objects - Goto Window
object and layout pathfinderSelect Add/ Subtract/
Intersect/ Extrude overlap/ Minus back.
Add: Used to join the outer edges of selected objects into
a compound shapes
Subtract: Use to remove objects in front of other objects
and still preserve paint attributes.
Intersect : Use to preserve object areas that intersect.
Exclude Overlap : Use to change overlapping areas to
transparency.
Minus back : Use to remove objects in the back, leaving only part of the front most objects.
Fig : 3.11: Eraser Tool
Fig : 3.12: Working with path finder
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
695
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
CHAPTER 4
WORKING WITH TEXT TOOLS
TYPE TOOL
Type Tool lets you create Text frames and select or type text. To create a Rectangular Text frame, click
and drag; Hold the shift key to create a perfect Square. To begin typing or editing click in a Text frame or in
any empty Frame and type.
Text frames can also be connected to other Text frames so that the text in one Frame can flow into
another Frame. Frames that are connected in this way are Threaded. Text that flows through one or more
threaded Frames is called Story. When you import a word file in InDesign it comes into your document as a
single story, regardless of the number of Frames it may occupy.
Text frames can have multiple columns. A Two column Text frame can sit on a four column page. Text
frames can also be placed on Master pages and still receive text on document pages.
If you use the same type of Text frame repeatedly, you can create an object style that includes Text
frame formatting such as stroke and fill colors, Text frame options, text wrap and transparency effects. When
you place/paste a text we don’t need to create a Text frame because InDesign automatically adds Frames based
on the page column settings
Creating Type directly
Select the Type Tool
then drag to define the width and height of a new Text frame. An insertion
point appears.
Click to place an insertion point if you haven’t defined the width and height of a new Text frame.
In the Control Panel, click the Character Formatting Control icon
or the Paragraph Formatting
Control icon
.
Specify formatting options. Then start typing text.
Creating Type in a Text frame
You can create a Rectangle/ellipse/Polygon text box of any size that you want. Then select Type Tool
Drag to create a Text frame Start typing if you type more than what a Text frame can hold, an
overflow symbol (a tiny red plus sign in the Square) appears on the edge of the Rectangle box. You can reshape
the Text frame object to display the text or create a thread link to another Text frame.
Filling a Text Frame with Placeholder
If you do not have any text at present to enter into the Text frame, then you can have InDesign insert
placeholder text. Create a empty Text frameSelect it right click the Text frame click fill with
placeholder text
Working with Paragraph Text
Paragraph attributes specify how your Paragraphs appear on the page, including Alignments, position of
indents and tabs, and the amount of space before and after the Paragraph. In InDesign, a Paragraph is any
contiguous text followed by a Paragraph return. You can apply attributes to selected Paragraphs, or you can
change the attributes of all Paragraphs of a particular Paragraph style. InDesign provides several ways to apply
Fig : 4.1:Control Panel A. Character Formatting controls B. Paragraph formatting controls
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
696
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Paragraph attributes, including the Paragraph Panel and Character Panel, which display a list of predefined
group of character and Paragraph attributes applied to selected Paragraphs, and the Control palette.
Using the type Tool, click an insertion point in a single Paragraph or select a range of Paragraphs. Click
Type Menu and choose Paragraph option. The Paragraph Specifications dialog box lets you apply
formatting not available on the Control palette. Select formatting options.
Type on Path
You can format text to flow along the
edge of an open or closed path of any shape.
Apply options and Effects to type on a path:
Slide it along the path, flip it over to the
other side of the path, or use the shape of
the path to distort the characters. Type on a
path has an in port and an out port just like
other Text frames, so you can thread text to
and from it. You can include only one Line of
type on a path, you can’t create type on a
path using compound paths, such as those
that result from using the Create Outlines command.
Select the Type On a Path ToolPosition the
pointer on the path until a small plus sign appears next to the
pointer
, and then follow these steps:
Click the path, an insertion point appears. To
confine the text to a specific portion of the path, click the
path where you would like the text to start, and drag along
the path to where you want the text to end, then release the
mouse. Then Type the text you want. If you clicked to place
the insertion point on the path, type will appear along the
entire length of the path. If you dragged, type will appear
only along the length you dragged.
Using the Selection Tool or the Type Tool, select the Type on a path Choose Type Type on a
Path Options, or double-click the Type On A Path Tool.
For Spacing, type a value in points. Higher values remove the extra space between characters
positioned on sharp Curves or Angles.
Modify Type on a path
Select direct selection Tool click on the type :Center/ left and right brackets appear around the
typedrag the bracket (not the Square to adjust the position of Type on the Path To change type on path
options click the type Menu type on pathoptions Specify the options (Effect, Flip, Align to Path and
Spacing) click Ok
Positions:
Swap slides: Drag the center bracket to the other side to change inner/outer position of the type along
the path
Create Outlines command.
Tighten character spacing around sharp turns and acute Angles
Fig :4.3: Changing Location of type on path
Fig :4.2: Type on a path. A. Start bracket B. In port C. Center
bracket D. End bracket E. Out port indicating threaded text
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
697
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Left : Drag to position the left side or starting point of the type along the path
Center: Drag left or right to position the type along the path.
Right : Drag to position the right side of the type along the path.
If the overflow symbol appears, deselect the Text frame select Direct Selection Tool drag a
corner to reshape the Text frame
Selecting and Deselect type text
Text : Drag the I beam cursor to select and highlight a word or Line of text.
Text range: Click to place the insertion point at the beginning of the text range, press shift and then
click at the end of the text range.
Word : double click a word of text
Paragraph : Triple click a Paragraph of text
All text (Ctrl+A): Click to place the insertion point, Go to Edit MenuSelect all
To deselect :Go to Edit Menu Deselect all
Editing Text with Autocorrect
Autocorrect feature automatically corrects common capitalization and spelling errors as you type. You
can add words and phrases to the autocorrect dictionary that you tend to Misspell.
Go to Edit Menu PreferencesAutocorrectEnable autocorrect check box Check mark
Autocorrect Capitalization errors and language(to select language Dictionary) click OK
To Add/Edit/Remove words from Autocorrect:
Add: type a misspelled word or an abbreviation to add it to the list of words that needs to be autocorrected
Edit: Select any word you want to change and make the necessary correction.
Remove: Select any words you want to delete.
Aligning Text
Alignment is the setting of text flow or image placement relative to a page, column (measure), table
cell or tab. The type Alignment setting is sometimes referred to as text Alignment, text justification or type
justification.
You can align text with the left or right edges of a text block (or with the inset of a Text frame), and
you can center or justify it. (Justified text is aligned with both the left and right edges of a text block or with
the left and right inset of a Text frame.)
Types of Alignments: Left, Center, Right, Justify with last Line aligned left, Justify with last Line
aligned right, Justify with last Line aligned center, Justify all Line, Align towards Spine, Align away from
Spine.
When you apply Align towards Spine to a Paragraph, text on a left-hand page is right-aligned, but
when the same text flows onto (or if the Frame is moved to) a right-hand page, it becomes left aligned.
Similarly, when you apply Align Away From Spine to a Paragraph, text on a left-hand page is left aligned,
while text on a right-hand page is right aligned. In Vertical Frames, Aligning to or Away from the Spine has no
effect, since Text Alignment is parallel to the Spine Direction. Do not align to Baseline Grid: Click to keep the
Paragraph text from aligning to the Baseline Grid. Align to Baseline Grid: To align the Paragraph text to the
Baseli`ne Grid.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
698
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
1. Select one or more Paragraphs, or edit a Paragraph style
2. Click Type Menu Paragraph and then choose an Alignment option.
Kashida : It is a type of justification used in some cursive scripts related to Arabic. Kashida justification is
accomplished by elongating characters at certain chosen points. Kashida justification can be combined with
white space justification to various extents.
Indent : Alignment and Indents give Paragraphs their fundamental appearance. Indentation helps readers
visually separate Paragraphs — the indent acts as the separator, like the blank Lines used to separate
Paragraphs in typewritten documents.
You can set Left Line Indent, Right Line indent, Left indent and right indent for a Paragraph. You can also set
the space before and after the Paragraph. You can align / un-align text to Baseline Grid also. Select the Type
Tool, select the Paragraph or multiple Paragraph Go to Type Menu Paragraph Enter the Left/Right
indent value To create a First Line or last Line indent, enter a first Line indent or last Line indent value or
use the up and down arrows to specify one.
Applying Spacing
You can control the Vertical space between Paragraphs by specifying the amount of space to insert
before or after selected Paragraphs or all Paragraphs of a certain style. To apply spacing between Paragraphs,
enter a value in Space Before Paragraph or Space After Paragraph and press enter key.
DropCap:
A Dropcap is the first letter of a Paragraph that's of a much bigger size than the rest that follow.
The letter formatting is such that the letter “˜drops down' to cover the few Lines following the first one.
This option is found in Type Menu Paragraph option. In InDesign you can set number of words and
number of Lines to which you can apply Dropcap. By default its value is 1
Note: InDesign never inserts space before a Paragraph set to begin at the top of a column or page (using the Page
Break Before or Column Break Before attribute). For those cases you must add the extra space manually by typing one
or more Paragraph returns.
To Increase or Decrease Space before or after a Paragraph:
Select the Paragraph you want to edit, Click Type Menu and choose Paragraph option. In the
Paragraph Space options, specify the values you want in the first Line indent and last Line indent box.
If you want a Line above or below a Paragraph, you can apply it to a Paragraph, so the Line stays with
the Paragraph as you add or delete a text. A Paragraph rule can also be applied as part of a style sheet. In the
Paragraph rules dialog box, we can set Style, Type, Weight, Color, Position, Width of the Paragraph Line
rule.
Select a Paragraph go to Options MenuParagraph Rules Preview select Rule above/ Rule
below from the list arrow, and then select rule on check box select Weight/ Color/ Type/ Tint/ Gap color/
Gap tint/ Overprint gap/ Width/ Offset/ Indent To keep the rule in the Text frame, select the keep in
Frame checkbox press OK.
To align a Paragraph:
Apply a Paragraph Rule
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
699
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
APPLYING BULLETS AND NUMBERING
The best way to draw attention to a list is to format the items with bullets or numbers. You can also
customize the list style. If you move, insert or delete items in a numbered list, InDesign sequentially renumbers
the list for you. To apply select the text on which you want to apply the bullet or number list using Type Tool
Click Type Bulleted and Numbered ListsApply Bullets/Apply Numbers.
Note : You can convert bullets/numbers to text. Go to type Menu point to bulleted & Numbered lists Click
convert bullets to text or convert numbering to text
ADDING AUTOMATIC PAGE NUMBERING
You can add Automatic Page Numbers to a document. The Master Page of an InDesign document is used to
apply automatic page numbering.
Select Master Page (A-Master) Select Type Tool & draw Frame at a location where you wish to Add
Page number (Bottom Left or Top Right) Go to TypeInsert Special CharacterMarkers Current
Page Number (Ctrl+Alt+Shift+N).
As you are currently working on A-Master the character A appears in the selected Text frame. If you
select a page other than Master page, then InDesign will actually display Page Number. But in Master page it
will display master name. In this example it will display as A
Note: The other special characters are: symbols (copyright, trademarks), markers(pg no, section markers),
hyphens and dashes(Em and En Dashes), quotation marks (single/double quotes) and other(includes tabs and
indents)
If you need to make adjustments to all the text in a Text frame, you can use the Text frame options
dialog box to make all your changes in one place.
Select the Text frame you want to changeGo to Object Menu Text frame Options Select
preview check box click General tab Select Columns/ Number/ Width/ Gutter/ Maximum/ Balance
columns/ Inset values.
Columns: Select to keep a fixed column width or number or allow a flexible width
Number: Specify number of columns
Width: Specify the column width you want.
Gutter: Specify the gutter space between the columns you want.
Maximum: For flexible width, specify the max. size before adding column.
Balance Columns: Select to automatically balance text across columns in a multiple column Text
frame
Inset values: top, bottom, left, right
Using the Selection Tool, drag the Frame. Using the Type Tool, hold down Ctrl and drag the Frame.
When you release the key, the Type Tool is still selected.
Do any of the following:
To resize using the Type Tool, hold down Ctrl and drag any Frame handle. If you hold down the
mouse button for one second before you begin dragging, the text will recompose while you resize the Frame.
Setting Text frame options
Move a Text frame
Resize a Text frame
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
700
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Note: If you click the Text frame instead of dragging it, you’ll lose your text selection or insertion point
location.
To resize using the Selection Tool, drag any of the
Frame handles on the Frame’s border. Hold down Ctrl key
to scale the text within the Frame.
To quickly fit the Frame to its content, use the
Selection Tool to select the Text frame, and double-click
any handle. For example, if you double-click the center
bottom handle, the bottom of the Frame snaps to the
bottom of the text. If you double-click the center right
handle, the height is preserved while the width narrows to
fill the Frame.
Note: You can also double-click a handle on an
overset Text frame to expand the height or width to fit all
text in the Frame. If a Text frame includes more overset
text than can reasonably fit on the page, the Text frame
isn’t resized.
To fit the Text frame to the content, select the Frame using the Selection Tool, and choose Object
Fitting Fit Frame to Content. The bottom of the Text frame fits the contents of the text. If a Text frame
includes more overset text than can reasonably fit on the page, the Text frame isn’t resized. To resize using the
Scale Tool
, drag to resize the Frame.
Inserting columns
You can create columns with fixed or flexible width and automatically balance text in the same
Textbox. You can Span a Paragraph across multiple columns or split a Paragraph into multiple columns within
the same Text frame. When you have a Paragraph Span across multiple columns, you can balance the text
before Spanning Paragraph.
Click to place the insertion point in the Paragraph you want to change Select Paragraph Panel
Go to Options MenuSpan Columns click Paragraph layout Click Span columns Specify Span/
Space Before or After Span.
To split columns: Go To Paragraph layout Split columns specify sub columns/ Space Before
or After Split/ Inside or Outside Gutter press OK.
Use Text frames on Master pages
Master pages can be used to Add Headers, Footers, Page Numbers, Watermarks, Text frames. When
you start a New document, you can select the Master Text frame option so that an empty Text frame is placed
on the document’s default Master page. This Frame has the column and margin attributes specified in the New
Document dialog box. Follow these Guidelines for using Text frames on Master pages: Set master Text
frames when you want each page in your document to contain a page-sized Text frame into which you can flow
or type your text. If your document requires more variation, such as pages with different numbers of Frames or
Frames of different lengths, leave the Master Text frame option deselected, and use the Type Tool to create
Text frames on masters.
Whether or not you select the Master Text frame option, you can add Text frames to a Master page to
act as Placeholders. You can thread these empty placeholder Frames together to establish a flow. Flow text into
master Text frames using the same procedures you would use with Frames created on document pages. If you
need to type text in a master Text frame on a document page, hold down Ctrl+Shift as you click the Text frame
on the document page. Then click in the Frame using the Type Tool and begin typing. You can use Smart Text
Reflow to add or remove pages automatically as you type and edit text. By default, when you type text at the
Fig :4.4: Double-click handle to resize Text frame
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
701
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
end of a threaded Text frame based on a Master
page, a new page is added, allowing you to continue
typing in the new Text frame. You can edit Smart
Text Reflow settings.
If you change the page margins, Text frames
adjust to the new margins only if the Enable Layout
Adjustment option is selected Selecting the Master
Text frame option does not affect whether new pages
are added when you Autoflow text.
Change Text frame properties
Use Text frame Options to change settings
such as the number of columns in the Frame, the
Vertical Alignment of text within the Frame, or the inset spacing, which is the distance of the margins between
the text and the Frame.
Note: If you need to use the same Text frame properties for multiple Text frames, create an object style that you
can apply to your Text frames.
Using the Selection Tool/Type Tool, select a Frame, click inside the Text frame or select text. Click Object
Text frame Options, or hold down Alt and then double-click the Text frame using a selection Tool. Change
Text frame options, and then click OK.(Text frame options are available when you’re defining an object style
for text boxes.) Add columns to a Text frame. (You can create columns within a Text frame by using the Text
frame Options dialog box.)
Note: You cannot create columns of unequal width
in a Text frame. To create columns of unequal width
or height, add threaded Text frames side-by-side on
either a document page or a Master page.
Using the Selection Tool, select a Frame, or using
the Type Tool, click inside the Text frame or select
text. Choose Object Text frame Options.
Specify the number of columns, the width of each
column, and the spacing between each column
(Gutter) for the Text frame.
(Optional) Select Fixed Column Width to maintain
column width when you resize the Frame. If this option is selected, resizing the Frame can change the number
of columns, but not their width. (Optional) Select Balanced Columns to make text even at the bottom of a
multi-column Text frame.
You can also change Text frame inset Spacing (margins) by Choose Object Text frame Options. In
General Tab Type the Offset distances you want for Top, Left, Bottom, and Right. If the Frame you’ve selected
has a non-rectangular shape, the Top, Left, Bottom, and Right options are dimmed, and an Inset option is
available instead. First Baseline offset options can be set using Baseline Options tab. The following options
appear in the Offset Menu under First Baseline:
Ascent: The height of the “d” character in the font falls below the top inset of the Text frame.
Cap Height: The top of uppercase letters touch the top inset of the Text frame.
Fig :4.5: Before (left) and after (right) setting inset and
creating two columns in a Text frame
Fig :4.6: Before (left) and after (right) balancing columns
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
702
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Leading: Use the text’s leading value as the distance between the Baseline of the first Line of text and the top
inset of the Frame.
X Height: The height of the “x” character in the font falls below the top inset of the Frame.
Fixed: Specify the distance between the Baseline of the first Line of text and the top inset of the Frame.
Min: Select a minimum value for the Baseline offset. For example, if Leading is selected and you specify a
minimum value of 1p, InDesign uses the leading value only when it’s greater than 1 pica.
Note: If you want to snap the top of the Text frame to a Grid, choose either Leading or Fixed so that you can
control the location of the first Baseline of text in Text frames.
Changing Font Style of the Text
Select text using Type Tool from the Tools Panel Apply the required font face, size from the drop down
list. Click the color Panel icon in the Panels group move the mouse pointer over the CMYK spectrum.
(Mouse pointer changes to Eyedropper Tool) Select a color from the spectrum. Then the color of the text
changes to the selected color.
Go to Type Menu character You can set Font face, Size, Leading, Kerning, Tracking, Scaling,
Baseline shift, Skew/Shear, Language, Font style (Underline, Bold, Subscript, etc.,)
Leading : Leading is the amount of space between the Baseline of one row of text to the Baseline of another
row of text.
Kerning: Kerning is adding to or taking away space between characters for a more balanced look.
Optical Kerning: Adjusts the Kerning between letters based on character shapes rather than
predefined kerning values
Metrics Kerning: Uses the built-in Kerning of the font. If the font designer took the time to
set up kerning pairs, this is a good option.
Scaling: Scaling allows you to make text Wider or Narrower for Horizontal text and taller or shorter for
Vertical text. You can adjust the height or width of your text using the preset values in the drop down Menu to
the right of the Vertical or Horizontal Scale Fields, type in your own value, or use the up and down arrows to
the left of the Vertical or Horizontal Scale Fields to adjust the scale one increment at a time.
Skewing: The Shear Tool or Skew on the Control and Transform palettes slants an object or text along its
Horizontal axis. It allows you to distort the text at an Angle to give it perspective. The Shear dialog box can
also shear an object along a Vertical or slanted axis. Skewing or Shearing may be used to create a shadow or
simulate some types of perspective.
Tracking: Tracking is similar to kerning, instead of adjusting the spacing between two characters, it adjusts the
spacing for an entire block of selected text. Typically we will track a Line of text or a few words depending on
the length and design application.
Determine Word and Character Counts
Place the insertion point in a Text frame to view counts for the entire thread of Frames (the story), or
select text to view counts only for the selected text. Choose Window Info. The Info Panel displays the
number of characters, words, Lines, and Paragraphs in a Text frame. The position of the insertion point
within the Text frame also appears.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
703
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Add Header and Footer
You can add Headers and Footers by clicking WindowpagesMaster-A. In Master-A or Master
page type the text above the margin or below the margin to get header and footer to whole document. When you
go to other pages, you can see Headers and Footers applied to all pages
To add content:
Choose Type Insert Special Character Markers Current Page Number.
Choose Type Text Variables Insert Variable File Name
Working with Glyphs
A Glyph is a style variation such as ligatures, ordinals, swashes and fractions for a given character in an
open type font. You can automatically insert alternate Glyphs with the open type Panel or insert them manually
with the Glyphs Panel to extend the font format.
Select the Type Tool select a character (to Insert/ Replace a Glyph) Go to Type Menu Select
Glyphs Select a different font and font style click the show list arrow, and then select a Glyphs category
Double click a glyph that you want to Insert/Replace.
Text Wrapping
You can wrap text around any object, including Text frames, imported images, and objects you draw in
InDesign. When you apply a text wrap to an object, InDesign creates a boundary around the object that repels
text. The object that text wraps around is called the Wrap object. Text wrap is also referred to as Runaround
Text. Keep in mind that text wrap options apply to the object being wrapped, not the text itself. Any change to
the wrap boundary will remain if you move the wrap object near a different Text frame.
To display the Text Wrap Panel, choose Window Text Wrap. Select a Text box/object, click the
type of Wrap you need to apply for the text box/inserted object. Specify Offset values Choose Show
Options from the Text Wrap Panel Menu to display additional options. Types of Text wraps:
Wrap Around Bounding Box:
: Creates a Rectangular wrap whose width and height are determined by the
bounding box of the selected object, including any offset distances you specify.
Wrap Around Object Shape:
: Also known as contour wrapping, creates a text wrap boundary that is the
same shape as the Frame you’ve selected (plus or minus any offset distances you specify).
Jump Object:
: Keeps text from appearing in any available space to the right or left of the Frame.
Jump To Next Column:
:Forces the surrounding Paragraph to the top of the next column or Text frame.
No Text Wrap: No text wrapping applied
Note Tool
You can use note Tool to add non – printing notes to text.
THE STORY EDITOR
If you want to focus solely on text in the document then we should use story editor because it displays
text and tables in a separate window with unformatted sequential columns and rows for easy editing. Any
Graphics, Shapes, Text formatting or other design elements in the document will not appear in the Story Editor.
The left side of the editor displays the Paragraph style and the right side displays the Editable text. You can
edit text in InDesign either on the layout page or in the story editor window. Writing and editing in a story
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
704
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
editor window allows the entire story to appear in the typeface, size, and spacing that you specify in
Preferences,
Text frames can also be connected to other Text frames so that the text in one Frame can flow into
another Frame. Frames that are connected in this way are Threaded. Text that flows through one or more
threaded Frames are called Story. The Story Editor is also where you can view Track changes to text.
Each Story appears in a different Story Editor window. All the text in the story appears in the story
editor, including overset text. You can open several story editor windows simultaneously, including multiple
instances of the same story. A Vertical Depth Ruler indicates how much text is filling the Frame, and a Line
indicates where text is overset. When you edit a story, changes are reflected in the layout window. Open stories
are listed in the Window Menu. You cannot create a new story in a story editor window.
You can view and edit tables in Story Editor, where text is displayed in sequential columns and rows
for easy editing. Quickly expand or collapse tables, and decide whether to view them by row or column. The
Story Editor also displays text that has been added, removed, or edited if you turn on Track Changes.
Select
the
Text
frame,
Choose Edit Edit In Story
Editor (Ctrl+Y).
In Story Editor, Choose
Edit Edit In Layout (Ctrl+Y).
When you use this method,
the layout view displays the same
text
selection
or
insertion-point
location as last appeared in the story
editor, and the story window remains
open but moves behind the layout
window. Click in the layout window.
The story window remains open but
moves behind the layout window.
Choose the document name from the
bottom of the Window Menu.
You can show or hide the style name column and the depth Ruler, expand or collapse footnotes, and
show or hide Paragraph break marks to indicate the start of new Paragraphs. These settings affect all open story
editor windows. With the story editor active, choose
View Story Editor Show Style Name Column or Hide Style Name Column. You can also
adjust the width of the style name column by dragging the Vertical bar.
With the Story Editor active, choose View Story Editor Show Depth Ruler or Hide Depth
Ruler/Expand or Collapse All Footnotes/ Show or Hide Paragraph breaks.
Story Editor Preferences
Use Story Editor Display Preferences to change the appearance of the Story Editor. Although the Story
Editor suppresses all but the most basic text styling attributes, some objects and attributes are represented,
including the following:
Open the Story Editor
Return to the layout window
Close the story editor window.
Show or hide Story Editor items
Fig :4.7: Story Editor Window A. Paragraph styles B. Drag
divider to adjust column width C. Vertical depth
Ruler D. Overset text indicator
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
705
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Attribute
Icon
Attribute
Icon
Table
Hidden conditional text
InLine objects
Note
XML tags
Footnotes
Variables
Index markers
Hyperlink sources
Deleted text
Hyperlink anchors
Added text
Cross-reference
Moved text
Here are some reasons to use the Story Editor:
1. When text is difficult to view or select: You may be working in a Newsletter Story which jumps
from page to page. Editing the Story in the Story Editor lets you work with the entire Story at one time in one
continuous stream.
2. When text is overset: If not all the text fits in a Story’s Frames, a red + sign appear at the bottom of
a Story. (If text or an object doesn’t fit in a table cell, it shows as a red dot.) But in the Story Editor, all the text
of the Story, even the portion that is overset, is visible. You can easily edit the Story to fit the Frames.
3. To work with footnotes or notes in the context of the Story: When you insert a footnote in a Story,
the text of the footnote appears at the bottom of the column or page. In the Story Editor, the footnote appears as
a marker in the context of the Story. You can click the marker to expand and view or edit the footnote. (You can
also choose View Story Editor Expand All Footnotes.) These notes can also be expanded or collapsed
in context in the Story Editor.
4. To easily work with Markers: for anchored objects, Text Variables, Cross References, and so on,
InDesign displays Markers in the Story Editor for a large number of the specialized features used in a text flow.
5. To work with overset text or Embedded Graphics in a table: The table text is displayed arranged
either by rows or columns. It’s much easier to select and work
6. To view Paragraph styles applied or to do a Depth Count on text: By default, the names of
Paragraph styles are displayed to the left of the text. A Depth counter is also displayed which shows the total
depth of text in the Story in the current Ruler units. You can turn those features on and off in the View Story
Editor Sub-menu.
SPELL CHECK
You can spell-check a selected range of text, in all of the text in a Story, in all stories in a document, or
in all stories in all open documents. Misspelled or unknown words, words typed twice in a row (such as “the
the”), and words with possible capitalization errors are
highlighted. In addition to checking the Spelling in a document,
you can also enable Dynamic Spelling so that potentially
misspelled words are Underlined while you type.
When you check Spelling, the dictionary for the
languages you assigned to the text is used. You can quickly add
words to the dictionary. Edit SpellingCheck Spelling. You
can check Spelling for entire document or check from the
insertion point or check Spelling of the selected text or check all
text in the currently selected Frame.
Fig :4.8: Most basic text styling attributes
Fig :4.9: Spell check dialog box and Menu
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
706
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
FIND AND REPLACE
1. Choose Edit Find/ Change. This opens the Find/Change
palette, so you can jump into the text and edit it without closing
the palette.
2. In the Find What area, type the text you want to find. (You can
leave this blank if you simply want to change formatting.)
3. In the Change To area, type the text you want to replace it
with.
4. Choose an option from the Search Menu to specify the scope of
your search: All Documents, Document, Story, To End of
Story, and Selection. (If necessary, you can jump into the
document and select a Story, an insertion point, or text to
search.)
5. Check Whole Word if you don't want to find variations of the
Find What text (such as plurals).
6. Check Case Sensitive if you only want to find text with the exact capitalization pattern shown in the Find
What field. When this option is checked, the capitalization in the Change To field is used for changes as
well.
7. If you want to consider formatting in the search, click the More Options button to expand the Find/Change
palette
8. Use the Format buttons in the Find Format Settings and Change Format Settings area to specify the
formatting you want to find and replace.
9. Click Find Next to start the search. When you locate the found text, click Change To Replace it with the
Change To text and formatting or click Find Next again to skip it.
CHANGE CASE
When formatting an article, sometimes you will need to change the font case in order to emphasize the
texts or sentences. Actually it is dreary (boring) to type the text you want to change case one by one, and you
don’t have to do it manually. The different type of change case are:
Upper Case : Make all selected characters capital.
Lower Case : Make all selected characters small letters.
Title Case : Capitalizes the first letter of each word to Capital.
Sentence Case: Make all selected text in sentence case format i.e., capitalize each word after punctuations,
etc.,
Other Styles:
Subscript: Reduces and lowers the text below the baseline.
Superscript: Reduces and raises the text above the baseLine.
Underline: Underlines the text.
Strikethrough: Adds a Line through the text.
Fig :4.10: Find and Replace Dialog Box
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
707
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
SELECT TEXT
Drag the I-bar cursor over a character, word, or an entire text block to select it.
Using the Selection Tool , hold down Ctrl
and click to select the Text frame. Select the Type
Tool, and then click inside the Text frame or select
text.
Choose
Type
Show
Hidden
Characters. If hidden characters still do not appear,
turn off preview mode. Choose ViewScreen
ModeNormal and choose View Overprint
Preview to deselect it.
Nonprinting characters such as those for
spaces, tabs, ends of Paragraphs, index markers, and
end of Story appears. These special characters are
visible only in a document window and a Story
editor window; they don’t print or output to formats
such as PDF and XML. The hidden characters appear in the same color as the layer color.
Control column, Frame, and page breaks by inserting special break characters in the text. Using the
Type Tool, click to place the insertion point where you want the break to occur. Choose Type Insert Break
Character, and then choose a break option from the Sub-menu.
Note: You can also create breaks by using the Enter key. For a column break, press Enter; for a Frame break,
press Shift+Enter; and for a page break, press Ctrl+Enter.
To remove a break character, choose Type Show Hidden Characters so that you can see
nonprinting characters, and then select and delete the break character.
The following options appear on the Type Insert Break Character Menu:
Column break
Flows text to the next column in the current Text frame. If the Frame has only one
column, the text goes to the next threaded Frame.
Frame break
Flows text to the next threaded Text frame, regardless of the current Text frame’s
column setup.
Page break
Flows text to the next page with a Text frame threaded to the current Text frame.
Odd page break
Flows text to the next odd-numbered page with a Text frame threaded to the current
Text frame.
Select text in a Frame that is covered
View hidden (nonprinting) characters :
Add column, Frame, and page breaks
Break options
Fig :4.11 (a) : Normal Text (b) : Showing Hidden
characters
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
708
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Even page break
Flows text to the next even-numbered page with a Text frame threaded to the current
Text frame.
Paragraph Return
Inserts a Paragraph return (the same as pressing Enter or Return).
Forced Line Break
Forces a Line to break where the character is inserted, starting a new Line without
starting a new Paragraph (the same as pressing Shift+Enter). A forced Line break is
also called a soft return.
Discretionary Line Break
Indicates where a Line of text should break if the Line needs to break. A
discretionary Line break is similar to a discretionary hyphen, only no hyphen is added
where the Line breaks.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
709
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
CHAPTER 5
INTRODUCTION TO THREADED TEXT
If you are working with huge texts then you can directly type the text in InDesign with proper
alignments and text flow or you can just directly import a text from other packages like word, notepad,
CorelDraw, etc., using FilePlace command. Threading text within InDesign can hugely improve the
experience of editing and amending copy while working on layouts. The process of threading text is linking two
or more Text frames allowing text to flow from one separate Frame to another.
A Text can be placed in InDesign either by selecting a Text frame or it can
be placed in any shapes or it can create its own Text frame box. When you Go to
File Place, You will notice that the first few Lines of your text are displayed as
part of the cursor (Fig 5.1). This feature gives you the chance to confirm you’ve
chosen the right text file. The next thing you should pay attention to is the
particular look of the cursor, which changes based on where you place it. For
example, if you hover the cursor above a blank area (not over an existing
Frame), you’ll see dotted corner Lines appear at the top left (again, Fig 5.1). This
dotted-Line cursor indicates that if you click
or drag here,
InDesign will place the text inside a new
Frame. It also
indicates that if there is more text that can
fit inside that
one Frame, the extra text will become
overset (it will
appear cut off).
Select the Type Tool from the Tool
box and draw
a Text frame over 2 columns by clicking
and
dragging
over the area you want to cover Go to
Type
Menu
select fill with placeholder text option
now reduce
the Text frame to one column by selecting
the text using
Selection Tool and dragging the middle
handle that sits
on the Vertical edge of the Frame until it
snaps
to
1
columns if a text is over-flown you will
notice a red
box containing a + mark at the bottom right
side
of
the
Text frame. Now draw another Text
frameUsing
the selection Tool, click once on the red box
(out-port)
in
the first Frame then the cursor will change to thread icon and a small preview Paragraph will appear, the text is
next placed to second column by clicking on the Text frame which has been created earlier. This 1st and 2nd
column text are called as threaded text. To view text threads go to View Menu ExtrasShow Text
Threads. To undo a thread use the selection Tool and double click on the import of the Text frame if you want
to unthread text.
Knowing the Symbols
Flow / Flowing – When content text starts in one Frame and continues to others.
Thread / Threading – Frames which are linked; when they have flowing text among them.
In port – Icon displayed on the upper-left side of the Frame.
Out port – Icon displayed on the lower-right side of the Frame.
Refer to the following graphic; it resumes the meaning of the three symbols featured at In ports and Out
ports.
Fig :5.1(a): Loaded cursor
thumbnail
Fig: 5.2 : Inport and outport
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
710
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Step 1: Create Your Layout
Even thought you can always insert Text frames later it’s recommended to
at least have a general idea of the page layout. Create Text frames and
image frame according your needs. For this example, I have created 3
making sure the first Frame isn’t big enough to include all the content
(text).
Step 2: Select Text
For illustration purposes, let’s use a simple document with 30 Lines of text
in it so it will be easy for you to see how the content automatically fits the
Frames with any modification done.
Step 3: Fill the First Text frame
You can copy and paste text to your clipboard or use the “Place” feature to
select a document. Paste the text into the first Frame, you’ll notice the red
“+” mark at the out port (lower right side of the Frame), that indicates
content has been left out.
Step 4: Fill the Other Text frames
Click over the red “+” in the out port and you’ll notice your mouse pointer
has changed. Move on to the next Text frame and the pointer will display a
chain icon, this indicates your text will be threaded, click over the Text
frame and see how it has automatically filled up to capacity. If you had
activated the “show text threads” option you’ll see a Line between
both boxes. Repeat this step until all the content has been placed to
your document.
After linking the 3 Text frames the document should look similar to
the image below.
Fig : 5.4(b) Text that need to
placed in Text frame.
Fig: 5.4(a) : Creating layout of
text and image Frame
Fig: 5.3 : Symbols Featured At Inport And Outports
Fig : 5.4(c) Overflown text that has been
placed in Text frame.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
711
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
What Happens If I Edit the Content?
A really cool feature of working with text threading is that
when you edit the content it will accommodate automatically. For
example let’s increase the text size of the first Line, as it would be a
title, you’ll notice the content has been distributed among the linked
Text frames. And it doesn’t stops there, it also works when you add
content and even between pages.
Using a Primary Text frame
If you are flowing text into a document with a lot of pages,
you may want to specify a primary Text frame when you create the
document. Primary Text frames have special powers that make them
much more versatile than their predecessors when changing the master
applied to a page. In order to get the primary Text frame to
automatically create new pages as you flow text, you need to make
sure that Smart Text Reflow is turned on in the Type pane of the
Preferences dialog box. It’s a good idea to enable the Limit to
Primary Text frames option, so that, for example, a single overset
Line in a threaded Story won’t accidentally create new pages.
You might also want to turn on Delete Empty Pages if you expect
your text to flow forward and backward.
Once you’ve got your primary Text frame on the Master
page, you can simply load your cursor (with the Place command)
and click on top of one of the Frames. The text automatically
flows into that Frame, and InDesign creates as many pages as are
necessary to hold all the text.
You can see the Lines that connect Text frames, it is
“Show Text Threads,” not text links (View Extras Show
Text Threads).
Creating your own Primary Text frames
If you didn’t turn on the Primary Text frame checkbox
when you started your document, then create your own custom
primary Text frames. Open the Master page and draw as many
Frames as you need. For instance, a Story Book publisher I know
uses 3 linked Frames on the page. Click the out-port on the first
Frame to load the cursor. Click inside the next Frame that you
want to link. Then click on the out port of the second Frame, and
link to the third Frame. Repeat until all the Frames have been
linked. (You might want to choose View Extras Show Text
Threads (Fig:5.6) to keep track of which Frames are linked.)
Fig : 5.4(d) Threaded text
Fig : 5.5: Document Setup Dialog box
Fig: 5.6: Text threads show how the
Frames are linked.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
712
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Your Frames are now linked, but they don’t yet have
the special abilities of primary Text frames. But when you
select any of the linked Frames, you’ll see a small icon on the
upper left corner. The icon displays a simple Frame (Fig:5.7).
This indicates that it is an ordinary Text frame. Click that
icon. It changes to a Frame with an arrow extending from the
out-port position. That means the Frame has changed to a
primary Text frame. You can have as many linked Frames as
you want in the primary Text frames, but you can have only one primary Text frame Story on each master. That
is, just one primary thread per Spread.
Understanding Text Flow
Once you understand how to flow text, you can speed through your long document projects. This Table
will help you choose which type of text flow you will want to use.
Fig: 5.7: Icons indicating ordinary Text
frames (left) and primary Text frames
(right)
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
713
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
CHAPTER 6
APPLY TRANSFORMATION TOOLS
Transforming Objects in InDesign means Positioning or moving objects in a Story to a different place
on the screen. InDesign treats both text and Graphics as objects therefore the Transformation that
InDesigSkewn offers are applied to both Graphics and text objects. The Transformation can be applied using
the manual method that is clicking the corresponding Tool from the Tool box and applying the
Transformations. Alternatively, you can use the control palette to apply the Transformations.
In InDesign Moving, Rotating, Skewing/Shearing and reflecting are collectively called as
Transformations You can Transform any unlocked object. Fill patterns and PostScript screen Angle are not
Transformed.
SKEWING/ SHEARING AN OBJECT
Selected images or text block with any letter Paragraph are Skewed by using the nudge buttons adjacent
to the Skew symbol in the Control palette or by entering a Skew Angle in the box. Use the Control palette to
Skew an object Horizontally by +85 degrees at .01-degree increments. You can Skew any unlocked object,
including a text block or a grouped item.
To Skew on object
Click on the object or text with the Selection Tool or highlight text with the Type Tool. Click a point
on the Proxy, the object is Skewed from this point. Type an Angle measurement in the Skew (object) or
Shear X Angle (text) field (same field - different name). Positive values Skew to the right. Negative values
Skew to the left. Press Enter or Choose an Angle from the drop-down Menu. Text is given a false italic with
the Skew Tool, use it with caution.
TO CREATE THE SHADOW USING SKEWING:
Select the top copy with the Selection Tool or highlight text with the Type Tool In the Swatches,
select a Tint percentage in the Tint % field. • Send the shadow to the back. Go to Object Arrange Send
to Back (Ctrl + Shift + [ ) Reposition the shadow if necessary using the arrow keys.
FLIPPING/REFLECTING AN OBJECT
It creates a mirror image of an object. The object Flips across an invisible axis at the specified reference
point. An object can be either Flipped Horizontally or Vertically.
Note : When an object is Flipped, the color of the Flip and Rotate indicator present in control panel changes from black to
white with a black Outline
To Flip an object:
Select an image using Selection Tool Click Flip Horizontal button from control panel to Flip image in
Horizontal direction. If you click to select a reference point, it appears as a small Rectangle on the Proxy, and
the equivalent location on the selected object remains stationary as you reflect the object. If you double click to
select a reference point it appears as a two or four way arrow and the equivalent location on the selected object
moves as you reflect the object.
ROTATING AN OBJECT
The process of moving an object in the clockwise or anti clockwise directions at a fixed reference point
is called Rotating. You can Rotate an object by using control panel or ObjectTransform Rotate (CW
clockwise, CCW counter clock wise)
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
714
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Select an imageselect Rotate Tool from free Transformation Tool in Tools Menu. By default the
reference point of an object is located at the center of the object. Place the mouse pointer anywhere on or
around the object, hold the mouse button and move it to Rotate an image. The image Rotates around the
reference point.
Note : The reference point can be relocated to the new place and the object Rotates around the new location of
the reference point. (After selecting image, select rotation Tool. Then place the center dot to wherever required
so that you can relocate reference point.)
CROPPING AN OBJECT
Cropping trims away unwanted areas of the image. Select the image using selection Tool Crop an
image by dragging one of the eight handles, which are small hollow Squares, located at the Corners, sides,
top and bottom of the image Frame. For example, to Crop away a portion of the top, hold the mouse button and
drag the handle located top-center of the image's Frame. Crop two edges of the image at once by dragging one
of the corner handles. To Crop the top and left edges of the image at the same time, for instance, drag the handle
at the upper left corner of the image Frame.
RESIZING AN OBJECT
Resizing is simply changing the Width and Height values of an object. As you resize an object,
temporary guides appear, indicating that the object is aligned with an edge or center of the page or is the same
height or width as another page item.
To resize a Frame, drag any handle using the Selection Tool. Hold down Ctrl key while dragging, the
Frame and the content are Scaled. Adding the Shift key Scales proportionally.
Note: If Auto-Fit is selected, resizing the Frame resizes the image within the Frame.
To resize the content of a Graphics Frame, use the Selection Tool to click the content grabber or direct-select
the graphic, and then drag any of the Graphics Frame handles.
To resize a Frame or its content to a precise size, select the object and enter the size in the width (W) or height
(H) fields on the Control panel.
Note: To maintain the original proportions of the object when using the Control panel, make sure the
Constrain Proportions icon
is selected.
To resize both the Frame and content, use the Scale X Percentage and Scale Y Percentage fields, not the W
and H fields. The W and H fields change only the selected Frame or content, not both. Rather than specifying
percentages, you can type dimensions by including the unit of measurement, such as “6p.”
To resize a Frame or its content to a percentage of its current size, select the object and enter the percentage in
the width or height fields on the Transform panel.
To create a copy of the selected object with the new size applied to the copy, type a value in the width or
height fields on the Transform panel and then hold down Alt key as you press Enter.
Note: After you resize a Frame or object, you can use a fitting option (Object Fitting) to fit the content
to the Frame or the Frame to the content.
SCALING AN OBJECT
It is used to increase or decrease the size on an object. If we maintain the ratio between the dimensions
of the object it is called Proportionate scaling. If the size of the object changes along with the ratio between
the dimensions of that object then it is called as dis-proportionate scaling. It is always a better idea to Scale an
image proportionately.
Select an image you need to Scale using selection Tool Object MenuTransform Scale Select
a percentage in the Scale X percentage or Scale Y percentage from the dialog box press OK.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
715
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Note: When you select a Scale percentage in either X or Y, then the percentage value of the other box also
changes to Scale an image proportionally.
Resizing and scaling are different actions in InDesign. Resizing is simply changing the Width and
Height values of an object. Scaling involves using a percentage value related to the original Scale (100%) of the
Frame. The difference between resizing and scaling isn’t always apparent. A good way to see the difference is
to resize and Scale a Text frame that has a stroke applied to it. When you double the size of the Text frame, the
text size and stroke weight remain the same. When you double the Scale of the Text frame, the text size and
stroke weight also double.
Resizing a Frame: By default, when the Frame (and not the Frame contents) is selected, changing the values of
the Width and Height fields changes only the Frame, not its contents, regardless of which selection Tool is
active.
Scaling a Frame and its contents: When the Frame is selected with the Selection Tool, changing the values of
the Scale X Percentage and Scale Y Percentage fields changes the Frame and its contents. If Auto-Fit is
selected, the Frame and its contents are resized together.
Resizing or scaling Frame contents: If you want to change only the content (resize or Scale) of a Frame, click
the Content Grabber or use the Direct Selection Tool to select the contents. Once selected, you can use the
Width and Height fields or the Scale fields, depending on your preference.
MOVING AN OBJECT
You can move an object just simply by selecting an object using selection Tool and dragging it to the
new location where you want to place the image.
REPEAT TRANSFORMATIONS
You can repeat Transformations, such as moving, scaling, Rotating, Resizing, Reflecting, Shearing, and
Fitting. You can repeat either a single Transformation or a sequence of Transformations, and you can apply
those Transformations to more than one object at a time. InDesign remembers all Transformations until you
select a different object or perform a different task.
Note: Not all Transformations are recorded. For example, modifying a path or its points is not recorded
as a Transformation.
Select one or more objects, and perform all the Transformations you want to repeat. Select the object or
objects to which you want to apply the same Transformations. Choose Object Transform Again and then
select one of the following options:
Transform Again: Applies the last single Transform operation to the selection.
Transform Again Individually: Applies the last single Transform operation to each selected object
individually, rather than as a group.
Transform Sequence Again: Applies the last sequence of Transform operations to the selection.
Transform Sequence Again Individually: Applies the last sequence of Transform operations to each selected
object individually.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
716
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Clear Transformations: Select the object or objects that have been Transformed. Choose Clear
Transformations from the Transform or Control panel Menu. Unless all values are the default values, clearing
Transformations results in a change of appearance for the objects.
Note: If the Scale values were reset at 100%, clearing the Transformations will not change the Scale.
COMBINING EFFECTS :
Combining the multiple objects in to a single unit is called as Grouping.
Grouping & Ungrouping
You can combine several objects into a group so that the objects are treated as a unit. This allows you to
move or Transform a number of objects together. For example, you might group the objects in a logo design so
that you can move and resize the logo as one unit. A group, when selected, appears with four handles at the
Corners that define the bounding box of all objects in the group. Individual objects within a group can be
selected and modified. For example, you can reformat text within a text object that is grouped with an image.
To group objects:
Using the pointer Tool, press Shift and select the objects to be grouped. One or more of the objects you select
can be a group, but if you select two or more groups note that all selected objects (including those within
groups) form a single, un-nested group.
Choose Object Menu click Group option (Ctrl +G )
To select text or an individual object within a group:
Select the Selection Tool (to select Graphics or text objects), or the text Tool (to edit text).If selecting
an object within the group, press Ctrl and select the object. To select text, click an insertion point in the text.
To ungroup objects do this:
Select the group. Choose Object Menu and click Ungroup (Ctrl+Shift+G) option. The objects retain the
changes you made while the objects were grouped.
Rules for grouping objects:
The following rules apply while grouping the objects:
Text objects can be resized as part of a group, but text maintains its type and Paragraph specifications. For
example, type size does not change when the text block is resized.
Groups cannot be nested-that is, a group can be grouped with other objects (including another group) but if
you ungroup, the original group is also ungrouped.
The aspect ratio of all objects in the group is retained if you press Shift key while resizing a group (or if you
use the proportional resizing option in the Control palette).
A newly created group moves to the front of the stacking order. Objects in a group retain their stacking
order in relation to each other until you change their stacking order with commands from the
ObjectsArrange sub Menu.
If the objects were grouped from different layers, the group is assigned to the layer of the topmost object in
the selection.
If you prefer to manipulate an object manually, the Control panel can still help you work precisely:
when visible, it provides immediate feedback about the object you are modifying, such as the Exact Position,
Size, or Rotation Angle.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
717
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Lock or Unlock Objects
You can use the Lock command to specify that you don’t want certain objects to move in your
document. Locked objects stay locked when a document is saved, closed, and then reopened. As long as an
object is locked, it cannot be moved. However, you can select locked objects if you turn off the Prevent
Selection of Locked Objects option in General preferences. When you select a locked object, you can change
attributes such as color.
Select the object or objects that you want to lock in place. To lock the objects, choose Object
Lock(Ctrl+L). To unlock an object, click the lock icon. To unlock the objects on the current Spread, choose
Object Unlock All On Spread.(Ctrl+Alt+L)
Note: You can also use the Layers panel to lock or unlock both objects and layers. When you lock a layer, the Positions of
all objects on a layer are locked, and the objects cannot be selected.
Hide Objects
Hidden objects are not printed or exported, and they cannot be selected. To hide an object, select it and
choose Object Hide(Ctrl+3).. To show hidden objects, choose Object Show All On
Spread(Ctrl+Alt+3).
Create Nonprinting Objects
You might want to create objects that appear onscreen, but will not be printed or appear in portable
versions of the document. Select the object or Text frame that you don’t want to be printed. Open the
Attributes panel (Window Output Attributes). In the Attributes panel, select Nonprinting..
Note: You can also use layers to selectively hide or show elements in a document, and you can assign layers a
non-printing status. One or more of the objects you select can be a group, but if you select two or more groups,
then all selected objects (including those within groups) from a single, un-nested group.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
718
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Chapter 7
IMPORTING GRAPHICS
The Place command is the primary method used to insert Graphics into InDesign because it provides
the highest level of support for resolution, file formats, multipage PDF and INDD files, and color. To place
Graphics is also referred to as Import images and insert pictures. You can also copy and paste an image to
InDesign (Import). Pasting, however, embeds a graphic in a document; the link to the original graphic file is
broken and doesn’t appear in the Links panel, and you can’t update the graphic from the original file. These
options appear when you select Show Import Options in the Place dialog box. InDesign applies the default
settings or the last settings used in placing a Graphics file of that
type. The names of Graphics you’ve placed (Imported) appear in the
Links panel (Window Links) (Shift+Ctrl+D).
Note: If you place or drag a graphic from a removable media, such as
a CD, the link breaks when you remove that media from your system.
Graphic File Formats
Graphic files will store Graphics. There are different types of
graphic file formats. Some formats deal with bitmap pictures only,
some formats deal with vector pictures only and other formats deal
with both bitmap and vector pictures. The extension used in a
filename in indicative of the file format. For example, the .bmp extension is used for graphic files with a
particular bitmap format, which is also called BMP format. Likewise, with other files. The various graphic file
formats are:
BMP: The term is derived from bitmap. Needless to say , this file format is meant for bitmap Graphics. It is
supported by windows and hence by all windows application. This is Perhaps, the commonest among the
formats. The filename extension is .bmp. You can open .bmp files in almost every graphic application. .BMP
files are bulky and need more memory compared to other formats. Advanced color processing is not possible
with this format, since the results are generally far from satisfactory.
DCS: Desktop Color Separations (DCS) is a version of standard EPS format. This are intended to be used in a
pre-separated, host based workflow. InDesign can rebuild a composite image from DCS 2.0/1.0 separations
files. The DCS 1.0 format supports CMYK files without spot channels.
PCX: The pcx format supports RGB, indexed color, GrayScale and bitmap color modes as well as RLE
compression method which is loseless. This is not ideal for commercially printed or online documents. It can
provide acceptable quality only when printed on low resolution or non-postscript printers.
PNG: Portable Network Graphics uses adjustable, loseless compression to display photos. It supports
transparency in an alpha channel or a designated color. PNG is best used for online documents.
SCT: Scitex format is used for high end image processing on Scitex computers which produce high quality
printing. It supports RGB, CMYK, and GrayScale file but does not support alpha channels.
EPS: Encapsulated Post Script is a comprehensive format meant for both vector and bitmap Graphics. We
utilize this format if the printer we use is a Post script one. The filename extension is .EPS. EPS is a cousin of
Adobe’s page description language Post-Script. If used properly, and with a Post Script printer, this format
gives the best possible results.
Fig: 7.1: Links Panel
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
719
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
GIF: Graphics Interchange format is meant for bitmap Graphics. It is developed by CompuServe, a very
popular on Line service. It is the most popular format on websites. The filename extension is.gif
JPEG: This is a file format and file compression technique approved by the Joint Photographic Experts’
group. The filename extension is .jpg. It is meant for bitmap Graphics. JPEG compression results in file size
reduction and loss of quality. Almost every bitmap image editing application supports this format.
TIFF: Tagged Image File Format, developed by Aldus and Microsoft, is meant for bitmap Graphics. The
filename extension is .tif. Most bitmap image editing applications support this format.
WMF: Windows Metafile Format, developed by Microsoft, is meant for both bitmap and vector Graphics.
The filename extension is .wmf. It is not friendly with PostScript. Almost all windows- based applications
support this format.
EMF: Enhanced Metafile Format is nothing but the 32-bit version of WMF format.
CDR: This is a proprietary file formats of Corel Draw meant for vector Graphics. The filename extension is
CDR. You can open these files in almost every vector illustration application. You can also open these files in
Corel Photo Paint by converting them into bitmap images.
PSD: This is a proprietary file format of Adobe Photoshop, meant for bitmap Graphics. PSD is derived
from Photo Document. The filename extension is .PSD. Apart from Photoshop, a number of other bitmap
image editing applications (e.g Corel Photo Paint) can open these files.
THE PLACE COMMAND
To Import a graphic without first creating a Frame, make sure that nothing in the document is selected.
To Import a graphic into an existing Frame, select the Frame. If the new image is larger than the Frame, you can
refit the Frame later by choosing Object Fitting [fitting command]. To replace an existing image, select its
Graphics Frame. Choose File Place and select one or more Graphics files of any available format. If you
select multiple files, you can click or drag in the document to place the selected files one at a time. To replace
an object you selected, select Replace Selected Item. To add a caption based on the image metadata, select
Create Static Captions. To set format-specific Import options, do one of the following:
Select Show Import Options, and then click Open. Or Hold down Shift as you click Open or Shift-
double-click a filename. To Import into a new Frame, drag to create a Frame. Or, click the loaded Graphics
icon
in the layout at the place where you want the upper-left corner of the graphic to appear.
Note: When you drag to create a Frame, the Frame has the same proportions as the graphic unless you Shift-
drag.
To Import into an existing Frame which is not selected, click the loaded Graphics icon anywhere in
that Frame. Replace Selected Item must be selected then image automatically appears in that Frame. To
replace an existing graphic, hold down Alt and click the loaded Graphics icon on the graphic you want to
replace. To place the next graphic or the next page of a multipage PDF, click the loaded Graphics icon in the
layout where desired. If necessary, you can scroll to a different location or change pages without losing the
loaded Graphics icon.
Note: The image you place may appear to have a low resolution, depending on your settings. The display setting
of an image does not affect final output of the file.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
720
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
LAYERS
Layers are used in digital image editing to separate different elements of an image. A layer can be
compared to a transparency on which imaging effects or images are applied and placed over or under an image.
Create layers
You can add layers at any time using the New Layer command on the Layers panel menu or the New
Layer button at the bottom of the Layers panel. The number of layers a document can have is limited only by
the RAM available to InDesign. Choose Window Layers. To create a new layer, do any of the following:
To create a new layer above the selected layer, click the New Layer button.
To create a new layer below the selected layer, hold down Ctrl key as you click the New Layer button.
To create a new layer at the top of the list, hold down Ctrl+Shift key as you click the New Layer button.
To create a new layer and open the New Layer dialog box, hold down Alt key as you click the New Layer
button.
InDesign (.indd) Import options
InDesign preserves the layout, Graphics, and typography in a placed INDD file. However, the file is
treated as an object, and you can’t edit it, although you can control the visibility of layers and choose which
pages of a multi-page INDD file to Import. When you place an InDesign file and select Show Import
Options in the Place dialog box, you see a dialog box containing the following options:
Show preview: Preview a page before you place it. You can type a page number or click the arrows to preview
a page in a multi-page document.
Pages: Specify the pages you want to place: the page displayed in the preview, all pages, or a range of pages.
Crop to: Specify how much of the page or pages to place, the page itself or the Bleed or Slug areas on the
pasteboard.
When you Import Photoshop PSD files, layered PDFs, and INDD files, you can control the visibility of
top-level layers. Adjusting layer visibility in InDesign lets you vary an illustration depending on context. You
can adjust layer visibility either when you place a file or by using the Object Layer Options dialog box.
Choose File Place and select a Graphics file. To replace a selected object, select Replace
Selected Item. Select Show Import Options, and then click Open. In the Image Import Options or Place
dialog box, click the Layers tab to view a preview of the image, click Show Preview.
(PDFs only) If you’re placing a page from a multipage PDF, click the arrows, or type a page number
under the preview image to preview a specific page. (Photoshop PSD files only) If the image contains
layer comps, choose the layer comp you want to display from the Layer Comp pop-up Menu.
Set the When Updating Link option as desired:
Use Photoshop’s/PDF’s Layer Visibility: Matches the layer visibility settings to those of the linked file when
you update the link.
Keep Layer Visibility Overrides: Maintains the layer visibility settings as they were when the file was
originally placed.
Click OK.
Control layer visibility in Imported images
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
721
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
CHAPTER 8
WORKING WITH COLORS AND STROKES
DEFINING THE TYPES OF COLORS
The most widely used Colors are process, spot and RGB. The Process Color is a combination of
CMYK. The spot is any Color formed by an ink that requires its own printing plate (pure or mixed). The RGB
Color uses a combination of Red, Green, Blue Colors to produce different Colors. The Color modes are
available in Window ColorColor -click the options Menu:
The Process Color
It uses CMYK Color model. It is used when a printing job requires huge range of Color shades. But
CMYK Color model has a smaller range of Colors compared to the Colors of a monitor. Use process Colors
when a job requires so many Colors that using individual spot inks would be expensive or impractical, as when
printing Color photographs.
The Spot Color
Any Color that originates by an ink, either mixed or pure is known as spot Color. It uses a combination
of CMYK to produce all other Colors. It is used to produce accurate Colors and when Color precision is critical.
For creating a company logo, the final appearance of a spot Color is determined by how the ink is mixed and
printed on paper.
The RGB Color
It is a combination of 3 primary Colors. This Color can be combined in various proportions to obtain
any Color from the spectrum. It is a Screen Color in the sense, used for displaying images on electronic
devises. RGB Color is device dependent
WORKING WITH COLORS AND STROKES
You can use Swatches panel, Fill Tool, Color Panel to apply Colors to a document. You can also
change the Color model such as RGB, CMYK in the Color Panel as required. Strokes can be applied on Frames
of an object, path.
Applying Color to an Object
Select an Object, Fill or Stroke using the Selection Tool Click the Fill or Stroke Color box on the
Tools panel to choose Color click the Apply Color button on the Tools panel to apply Color or apply none
to apply no Color.
You can use any of the methods to change the active fill or Stroke Colors: Select window Color Color-
To display Color panel. Place the mouse pointer on the CMYK spectrum then the shape of the mouse
changes to eyedropper Tool then select any Color from CMYK spectrum. Or Select the Swatches panel click
a Color swatch to change the Color. Or click the fill or Stroke Color box on the control panel then click a
Color swatch to change the Color. Or Double click the fill or Stroke Color box to open the Color picker dialog
box select a Color or enter Color values click ok.
To apply Stroke Color: Window Stroke In Stroke panel : Select Weight, Color, Type of Stroke
like Dashed, Dotted, etc, To switch the Current Fill and Stroke Color, click on the Swap fill and Stroke icon
on the Tools panel.
Note : The default Colors are Black for Stroke and white for fill
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
722
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
USING SWATCHES PANEL
The Swatches panel is used to create and name Color,
Gradients, and Tints and to quickly apply them to documents. Swatches
are similar to Paragraph and Character styles, any change you made in
Swatches will affect all objects to which the swatch is applied. It will
make easier to modify Color schemes without having to locate and
adjust each individual object.
Swatch Types
Colors: Icons on the Swatches Panel identify the spot
and
process
Color types, and LAB
, RGB
, CMYK
, and Mixed
Ink
Color modes. Default Color is CMYK
Tints: A percentage value next to a swatch in the Swatches panel
indicates a Tint of a Spot or Process Color.
Gradients: An icon on the Swatches panel indicates whether a
Gradient is Radial
or Linear
.
None: The None swatch, removes the Stroke or fill from an object.
You can’t edit or remove this swatch.
Paper: Paper is a built-in swatch that simulates the paper Color on
which you’re printing. Objects behind a paper-Colored object won’t
print.
Black: Black is a built-in, 100% process Color Black defined using
the CMYK Color model. You can’t edit or remove this swatch.
Registration: Registration
is a built-in swatch that causes
objects to print on every separation from a PostScript printer. For
example, registration marks use the Registration Color, so that
printing plates can be aligned precisely on a press.
Creating a Color Swatch
Swatches can include Spot or Process Colors, RGB or Lab Colors, Gradients, or Tints. When you place
an image that contains spot Colors, the Colors are automatically added as Swatches to the Swatches panel. You
can apply these Swatches to objects in your document, but you cannot Redefine or Delete the Swatches.
Click the Swatches panel icon in the panels group. The Swatches panel appears (By default we have
Colors (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, None, Registration, Paper, Black) Select the New Color swatch
option from Panel Menu In the dialog box, uncheck Name and Color value, Type new name for Color
swatch in the swatch name box, select Color type from drop down list, select a Color mode Drag the slides to
change the Color mode ColorsClick ok. The new Color swatch is added to the Swatches panel.
To Delete swatch go to WindowColorSwatchesselect the swatch you want to deleteclick
delete swatch buttonIf you want to select multiple Swatches hold Shift key/Ctrl key.
Go to WindowColorSwatches-Show all Swatches/ Show Color Swatches/ Show Gradient
Swatches To display Swatches by Size, click the Options Menu choose Name, Small name, Small Swatch
or Large Swatch
Add/Delete a swatch
Change the Swatches Panel display
Fig: 8.1: Swatches Panel, Gradient
Panel and Color Panel Group.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
723
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
CREATING A GRADIENT SWATCH
A Gradient is formed as a result of successive blending of 2 or more Colors. We can apply Gradient
Swatches on Text, Lines, Frames, Fills and Strokes of an object. Gradients can be created from spot Colors,
Process Colors or Mixed Colors using any Color modes. There are 2 types of Gradients like Radial and Linear.
You can adjust the number and blend of Gradient Colors by adding or changing Color stops. After you create a
Gradient Colors by apply it to objects just like any other Swatch in the Swatches panel. You can also create a
Gradient using Gradient panel. The Gradient is unnamed and not saved unless you store it in a swatch.
Window
ColorSwatches
Click
Options
Then
click
new
Gradient swatch Enter a name for the
Gradient swatch click the type list
arrow, and then select a Gradient type :
Radial or Linear click the left Color stop
to set Color stop of Gradient ramp click the
stop Color list arrow, select a Color type, and
then use sliders to create the Color you want.
To add Color stops, click below the
Gradient spectrum in the blank area.
Drag sliders to change CMYK Colors or type
percentages of Colors. To set the Position of
the Color stop type location percentage and press ok Click add to add the Gradient to Swatches panel and
continue to add Gradients click ok
Select an object using selection Tool Double click the Gradient swatch Tool from the Tools
panelSelect Type (Linear/Radial) The select Gradient type is applied to an object.
Gradient feather Tool
The Gradient feather Tool on the Tools panel allows you to
add an opacity or transparency to a Gradient for an object. The
Gradient feather Tool works just like Gradient Tool. You can
change how Gradients blend, Angle of Gradient, location of radial
Gradient, etc.,
Select the object with a Gradient that you want to change
Click the Gradient feather Tool on the Tools Panel Double
click the Gradient feather Tool to manually apply Gradient feather
In the effects dialog box, specify Type /Angle/Add Color stops/
Remove Color Stops /Reverse Color Stop To apply or adjust a
Gradient feather, drag across the Gradient in the object. The first
drag point is the first Color stop and the last drag point is the last
Color stop To save the edited Gradient click the new swatch button on the Swatches panel.
CREATING A TINT SWATCHES
It is used to set the Tint or shade percentage of a base Color. This brings the lighter shade of the
required Color on the object. To apply the required Tint effect to the Color, first select the Color swatch from
the swatch panel and specify the Tint percentage of that Color..After you create a Tint Color swatch, it appears
in the Swatches panel list with the new Tint percentage in the name.
Applying Gradients
Fig: 8.2: Gradient Swatch panel and Gradient applied to Polygon
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
724
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Saving a swatch
The Swatches which are created are saved in the swatch panel by default. If you want to use the same
Color swatch in different applications like Photoshop, illustrator, etc., then the Swatches can be saved in any
location of the computer with .ase extension.
Select the swatch from Swatch panel Click Panel MenuSelect Save SwatchesSelect the
location to save the swatch from Save in drop down list by specifying a file name Click Save.
Deleting a Swatch
You can also delete a swatch that is no longer required just by clicking the delete swatch button
available at the bottom of the Swatches panel.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
725
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
CHAPTER 9
APPLYING EFFECTS
You can apply various effects to an Object in InDesign to make it more attractive and appealing. There
are several effects such as Drop shadow, Feather, Bevel and Emboss, Transparency, Glow, Emboss, etc.,
USING EFFECTS ON AN OBJECT
TRANSPARENCY EFFECTS
When you create an Object in Adobe InDesign, by default it appears Solid; that is, it has Opacity of
100%. You can apply effects to Objects using Opacity and Blends. Overlap Objects, add Transparency to
Objects, or knock out shapes behind Objects. You can make the items Transparent in a variety of ways. For
example, you can vary the Opacity from 100% (completely Opaque) to 0% (completely Transparent). When
you decrease Opacity, the underlying artwork becomes visible through the surface of the Object, Stroke, Fill, or
Text. You use the Effects panel to specify the Opacity an Object, its Stroke, its Fill, or its Text, You can decide
how the Object itself, its Stroke, Fill or Text Blend with Objects beneath.
EFFECTS PANEL OVERVIEW
Use the Effects panel (Window Effects) to specify the Opacity
and Blending mode of Objects and groups, isolate Blending to a
particular group, knock out Objects inside a group, or apply a
Transparency effect.
Opacity: Determines the Opacity of an Object, Stroke, Fill, or
Text.
Level: Tells you the Object, Stroke, Fill, and Text Opacity settings
of the Object, as well as whether Transparency effects have been
applied. Click the triAngle to the left of the word Object (or Group
or Graphic) to hide or display these level settings. The FX icon
appears on a level after you apply Transparency settings there, and
you can double-click the FX icon to edit the settings.
Blending Mode: Specifies how Colors in Transparent
Objects interact with the Objects behind them.
Isolate Blending: Applies a Blending mode to a selected
group of Objects.
Knockout Group: Makes the Opacity and Blending
attributes of every Object in a group knock out, or block
out, underlying Objects in the group.
Clear All button: Clears effects—Stroke, Fill, or Text—
from an Object, sets the Blend mode to Normal, and
changes the Opacity setting to 100% throughout the Object.
FX button : Displays a list of Transparency effects.
Fig: 9.1(b): Different Blending Effects
like Multiply, Exclusion, Overlay, Screen,
Normal, Hard light, Luminosity
Fig: 9.1: Add and edit transparency
effects in the Effects panel A. Blending
mode B. Levels C. FX icon D. Clear
effects E. FX button
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
726
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
DISPLAY EFFECTS PANEL OPTIONS
Choose Window Effects and, if necessary, open the
Effects panel Menu and choose Show Options. The Effects panel
options are also available in the Effects dialog box (select an Object
and
choose Object Effects Transparency) and, in simplified form,
on
the Control panel.
Apply Transparency effects
Select an Object. To apply effects to a graphic, select the graphic
with the Direct Selection Tool. Choose Window Effects to
display the Effects panel Select a level to designate which parts or part of the Object you want to change:
Object: Affects the entire Object—its Stroke, Fill, and Text.
Graphic: Affects only the graphic selected with the Direct Selection Tool. Effects you apply to the graphic
remain with it when you paste the graphic in a different Frame.
Group: Affects all Objects and Text in the group. (Use the Direct Selection Tool to apply effects to Objects
within a group.)
Stroke: Affects only the Object’s Stroke (including its gap Color).
Fill: Affects only the Object’s Fill.
Text: Affects only Text inside the Object, not the Text frame. Effects you apply to Text affect all the Text in
the Object; you can’t apply an effect to individual words or letters. You can also choose a level setting in the
Control panel: Click the Apply Effect To Object button
and select Object, Stroke, Fill, or Text.
Do any of the following to open the Effects dialog box:
In the Effects panel or Control panel, click the FX button
and choose an effect from the Menu. Or
Choose Object Effects, and then choose an effect name On the Effects panel, click the triangle to display
level settings if necessary, and then double-click a level setting—Object, Stroke, Fill, or Text - on the Effects
panel. By double-clicking, you both open the Effects dialog box and choose a level setting. Choose options
and settings for the effect. Click OK.
Edit a Transparency effect
Select the Object or Objects to which the effect has been applied. Select the level with the effect you
want to edit, click the FX button
in the Effects panel, and choose the name of an effect. Edit the effect.
Copy Transparency effects
To copy effects between Objects, select the Object with the effect you want to copy, select the Object’s
FX icon
in the Effects panel, and drag the FX icon to the other Object. You can drag and drop effects
between Objects only to and from the same level. Or To copy effects from one level to another in the same
Object, Alt-drag FX icon from one level to another (Stroke, Fill, or Text) on the Effects panel.
Note: You can move effects from one level to another in the same Object by dragging the FX icon. Clear Transparency
effects from an Object
Clear Effects
To clear all effects but maintain the Blending and Opacity settings, select a level and choose Clear
Effects on the Effects panel Menu or drag the FX icon
from the Stroke, Fill, or Text level in the Effects
panel to the Trash icon. To clear multiple levels (Stroke, Fill, or Text) of an effect, select the levels and click
Fig: 9.2: Effects Panel
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
727
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
the Trash icon. To remove an individual effect from an Object, open the Effects dialog box and deselect a
Transparency effect.
TRANSPARENCY EFFECTS
InDesign offers nine Transparency effects. Many of the settings and options for creating these effects
are similar.
Drop Shadow: Adds a shadow that falls behind the Object, Stroke, Fill, or Text.
Inner Shadow: Adds a shadow that falls just inside the edges of the Object, Stroke, Fill, or Text, giving it a
recessed appearance.
Select an Object go to Object Menu EffectsDrop Shadow/Inner ShadowSelect a Blending mode
and Opacity for shadow effect or specify distance, Angle, offset values to Position the shadow click
OK.
Note: The Spread and choke options determine the amount of Transparency used for the outer or inner part of
the shadow. The noise option add random shift to the Colors to the drop shadow.
Outer Glow and Inner Glow: Add glows that emanate from the outside or inside edges of the Object, Stroke,
Fill, or Text.
Select Object go to Object MenuEffects Select outer glow/inner glow Set Blending options
press OK.
Fig: 9.3: Effects: A. Drop Shadow B. Inner Shadow C. Outer
Glow D. Inner Glow E. Bevel and Emboss F. Satin G. Basic
Feather H. Directional Feather I. Gradient Feather
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
728
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Bevel and Emboss: Adds various combinations of highlights and shadows to give Text and images a three-
dimensional appearance.
Select Object go to Object Menu EffectsBevel and Emboss Specify Shading Options/ Structure
Optionclick OK.
Satin: Adds interior shading that makes a satiny finish.
Basic Feather, Directional Feather, and Gradient Feather: Soften the edges of an Object by fading them to
Transparent.
Select an Object go to Object MenuEffectsspecify basic feather/directional feather/Gradient
feather click OK
Many Transparency effect settings and options are the same across different effects. Common Transparency
settings and options include the following:
Angle and Altitude: Determine the lighting Angle at which a lighting effect is applied. A setting of 0 is
equivalent to ground level; 90 is directly above the Object. Click the Angle radius or enter a degree
measurement. Select Use Global Light if you want a uniform lighting Angle for all Objects. Used by the Drop
Shadow, Inner Shadow, Bevel and Emboss, Satin, and Feather effects.
Blending Mode: Specifies how Colors in Transparent Objects interact with the Objects behind them. Used by
the Drop Shadow, Inner Shadow, Outer Glow, Inner Glow, and Satin effects.
Choke: Along with the Size setting, determines how much of the shadow or glow is Opaque and how much is
Transparent; large settings increase Opacity and small settings increase Transparency. Used by the Inner
Shadow, Inner Glow, and Feather effects.
Distance: Specifies the offset distance for the Drop Shadow, Inner Shadow, or Satin effect.
Noise: Specifies the amount of random elements in the Opacity of a glow or shadow as you enter a value or
drag the slider. Used by the Drop Shadow, Inner Shadow, Outer Glow, Inner Glow, and Feather effects.
Opacity: Determines the Opacity of an effect; drag the slider or enter a percentage measurement. Used by the
Drop Shadow, Inner Shadow, Outer Glow, Inner Glow, Gradient Feather, Bevel and Emboss, and Satin effects.
Size: Specifies the amount of shadow or glow. Used by the Drop Shadow, Inner Shadow, Outer Glow, Inner
Glow, and Satin effects.
Spread: Determines the Transparency of the blur within the shadow or glow effect as established by the Size
setting. A higher percentage makes the blur more Opaque. Used by the Drop Shadow and Outer Glow.
Technique: These settings determine how the edge of a Transparency effect interacts with background Colors.
Softer and Precise are available for the Outer Glow and Inner Glow effects:
Softer: Applies a blur to the edge of the effect. At larger sizes, doesn’t preserve detailed features.
Precise: Preserves the edge of the effect, including its Corners and other sharp details. Preserves features better
than the Softer technique.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
729
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Use Global Light: Applies the global light setting to the shadow, used by the Drop Shadow, Bevel and
Emboss, and Inner Shadow effects.
X Offset and Y Offset: Offsets the shadow on the x- or y-axis by the amount you specify, Used by the Drop
Shadow and Inner Shadow effects.
Drop Shadow
The Drop Shadow effect creates a 3D shadow. You can offset the drop
shadow along the x or y axis, as well as vary the Blending mode, Color,
Opacity, distance, Angle, and size of the drop shadow. Use these options to
determine how the drop shadow interacts with Objects and Transparency
effects:
Object Knocks Out Shadow: The Object appears in front of the drop
shadow that it casts.
Shadow Honors Other Effects: The drop shadow factors in other
Transparency effects. For example, if the Object is Feathered on one side, you
can make the drop-shadow disregard the feathering such that the shadow
doesn’t fade out, or make the shadow look Feathered in the same way as the
Object is Feathered. Click the Drop Shadow button
on the Control panel to quickly apply a drop shadow to
or remove a drop shadow from an Object, a Stroke, a Fill, or Text.
Note: To select a Color for a drop shadow, click the Set Shadow Color button (next to the Blending
Mode Menu) and choose a Color.
Inner Shadow
The Inner Shadow effect places the shadow inside the Object,
giving the impression that the Object is recessed. You can offset the
inner shadow along different axes and vary the Blending mode,
Opacity, distance, Angle, size, noise, and choke of the shadow.
Outer Glow
The Outer Glow effect makes the glow emanate from under
the Object. You can set the Blending mode, Opacity, technique,
noise, size, and Spread.
Inner Glow
The Inner Glow effect causes an Object to glow from the inside
out. Choose the Blending mode, Opacity, technique, size, noise and choke settings, as well as the Source
setting:
Source: Specifies the source for the glow. Choose Center to apply a glow that emanates from the
center; choose Edge to apply a glow that emanates from the Object’s boundaries.
Bevel and Emboss
Use the Bevel and Emboss effect to give Objects a realistic, three-dimensional look. The Structure
settings determine the Object’s size and shape:
Style: Specifies the bevel style: Outer Bevel creates the bevel on the outside edges of the Object; Inner
Bevel creates the bevel on the inside edges; Emboss simulates the effect of embossing the Object against
underlying Objects; Pillow Emboss simulates the effect of stamping the edges of the Object into underlying
Objects.
Fig: 9.5: A. Normal B. Outer Glow
C. Inner Glow
Fig: 9.4: A. Normal B. Drop
Shadow C. Inner Shadow
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
730
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Size: Determines the size of the bevel or emboss effect.
Technique: Determines how the edge of the bevel or emboss effect
interacts with background Colors: Smooth blurs the edges slightly (and
doesn’t preserve detailed features at larger sizes); Chisel Soft blurs the
edges, but not as much as the Smooth technique (it preserves detailed
features better than the Smooth technique but not as well as the Chisel Hard
technique); Chisel Hard provides a harder, more conspicuous edge (it
preserves detailed features better than the Smooth or Chisel Soft
techniques).
Soften: In addition to the Technique setting, blurs the effect to Reduce
unwanted artifacts and rough edges.
Direction: Choose Up or Down to make the effect appear pushed up or
down.
Depth: Specifies the depth of the bevel or emboss effect. The Shading settings determine how light interacts
with the Object:
Angle and Altitude: Sets the height of the light source. A setting of 0 is equivalent to ground level; 90 is
directly above the Object.
Use Global Light: Applies the global light source as specified for all Transparency effects. Choosing this
option overrides any Angle and Altitude settings.
Highlight and Shadow: Specifies the Blending mode for the bevel or emboss highlight and shadow.
Satin
Use the Satin effect to give Objects a smooth, satin-like finish. Choose the Blending mode, Opacity, Angle,
distance, and size settings, as well as whether to invert Colors and transparencies:
Invert: Select this option to reverse the Colored and Transparent areas of the Object.
Basic Feather: The Feather effect softens (fades) the edges of an Object over a distance that you specify:
Feather Width: Sets the distance over which the Object fades from Opaque to Transparent.
Choke: Along with the Feather Width setting, determines how much of the softening glow is Opaque and how
much is Transparent; a large setting increases Opacity and a small setting increases Transparency.
Corners: Choose Sharp, Rounded, or Diffused:
Sharp: Follows the outer edge of the shape, including sharp Corners. This option is appropriate for star-like
Objects and a special effect on a rectangular shape.
Rounded: Rounds the corner by the feather radius; essentially, the shape is first inset, then outset, to form the
two contours. This option works well with Rectangles.
Diffused: Uses the Adobe Illustrator method, which makes the edges of the Object fade from Opaque to
Transparent.
Fig: 9.6: A. Outer Bevel B. Inner Bevel
C. Emboss D. Satin
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
731
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Noise: Specifies the amount of random elements in the softening glow. Use this option to soften the glow.
Directional Feather
The Directional Feather effect softens the edges of an Object by
fading the edges to Transparent from directions that you specify.
For example, you can apply feathering to the top and bottom of the
Object, not the left or right side.
Feather Widths: Set the distance over which the top, bottom, left
side, and right side of the Object fade to Transparent. Select the
Lock option to fade each side of the Object by the same distance.
Noise: Specifies the amount of random elements in the softening
glow. Use this option to create a softer glow.
Choke: Along with the Width settings, determines how much of
the glow is Opaque and how much is Transparent; large settings increase Opacity and small settings increase
Transparency.
Shape : Choose an option—First Edge Only, Leading Edges, or All Edges—to demarcate the Object’s original
shape.
Angle : Rotates the Frame of reference for the feathering effect such that, as long as you don’t enter a multiple
of 90 degrees, the feathering edges are Skewed rather than parallel to the Object.
Gradient Feather : Use the Gradient Feather effect to soften the areas of an Object by fading them to
Transparent.
Gradient Stops: Create one Gradient stop for each gradation in Transparency that you want for your Object.
To create a Gradient stop, click below the Gradient Slider (drag a Gradient stop away from the slider to remove
a stop). To adjust the Position of a stop, drag it left or right, or select it and then drag the Location slider. To
adjust the mid-point between two Opacity stops, drag a Diamond above the Gradient Slider. Where the
Diamond is located determines how abrupt or gradual the transition between stops is.
Reverse Gradient : Click to reverse the direction of the gradations. This box is located to the right of the
Gradient Slider.
Opacity : Specifies the Transparency between Gradient points. Select a point and drag the Opacity slider.
Location : Adjusts the Position of a Gradient stop. Select a Gradient stop before dragging the slider or entering
a measurement.
Type : Linear shades from the starting Gradient point to the ending Gradient point in a Straight Line; Radial
shades from the starting point to the ending point in a circular pattern.
Angle : For Linear Gradients, establishes the Angle of the gradation Lines. At 90 degrees, for example, the
Lines run Horizontally; at 180 degrees, the Lines run Vertically.
Fig: 9.7: A. Original B. Basic Feather
C. Directional Feather D. Gradient Feather
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
732
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Use Global Light : You can apply a uniform lighting Angle to Transparency effects in which shading is a
factor: Drop Shadow, Inner Shadow, and Bevel and Emboss. When you choose Use Global Light with these
effects, lighting is determined by the global setting in the Global Light dialog box.
Do the following to open the Global Light dialog box:
Choose Global Light from the Effects panel Menu. Or Choose Object Effects Global Light. Enter a
value or drag the Angle radius to set the Angle and Altitude, and click OK.
Set the Opacity of an Object.
You can apply Transparency to a single Object or selected Objects (including Graphics and Text
frames), but not to individual Text characters or layers. However, Imported Graphics with those types of
Transparency effects will appear and print correctly.
Select the Object or Objects. Choose Object, Stroke, Fill, or Text with any of these techniques:
On the Control panel or Effects panel, type a value for Opacity or click the arrow next to the Opacity setting
and drag the slider. As the Opacity value of Objects is Reduced, the Transparency increases.
Note: If you direct-select and cut or copy an Object from a Transparent group in InDesign, and then paste the
Object somewhere else in the document, the pasted Object won’t be Transparent unless it was previously
selected individually and had Transparency applied.
Apply Transparency to groups
Besides applying Transparency effects to single Objects, you
can
apply them to groups. If you simply select Objects and change
their individual Opacity settings, the selected Objects’ Opacity
will
change relative to that of the others. Any overlapping areas
will
show an accumulated Opacity.
In contrast, if you target a group that has been created
with the Group command, and then change the Opacity, the
group is treated as a single Object by the Effects panel (the
Effects panel shows only one level option—Group), and the
opacities within the group don’t change. In other words,
Objects within the group don’t interact with each other in Transparency.
Change the appearance of Transparent artwork on screen
Use the Display Performance dialog box to set Transparency preferences. These preferences determine the on-
screen quality of Transparent Objects in new documents and in documents saved with modified preferences.
You can also set the preferences to turn on or off the display of Transparency in the document. Turning off
Transparency in the display preferences doesn’t turn off Transparency when printing or Exporting the file.
Note: Before you print a file containing Transparency effects, make sure that you check the Transparency
preferences first. Printing automatically flattens the artwork, and may affect the appearance of the
Transparency effects.
Choose Edit Preferences Display Performance Select an option (Fast, Typical, High Quality) in the
Adjust View Settings section to determine the on-screen resolution of any effect in the document. The settings
you change apply only to the option you select here: Fast turns off Transparency and sets the resolution to
24 dpi. Typical displays low-resolution effects and sets the resolution to 72 dpi. High Quality improves the
display of effects, especially in PDF and EPS files, and sets the resolution to 144 dpi. Drag the Transparency
Fig: 9.8: Individual Objects selected and
set to 50% Opacity (left) and group
selected and set to 50% Opacity (right)
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
733
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
slider. The default setting is Medium Quality, which displays drop shadows and feathering. Click OK. When
inks overlap with Blend modes, choose View Overprint Preview. This option ensures that you can see on
screen how any inks interact with Transparency.
Note: Use the View Menu to quickly change Transparency display between Fast Display, Typical Display, and
High Quality Display.
Apply an effect to type on a path
1. Using the Selection Tool or the Type Tool, select the type on a path.
2. Choose Type Type on a Path Options, or double-click the Type On A Path Tool.
3. Choose one of the following in the Effect Menu, and then click OK:
To keep the center of each character’s baseline parallel to the path’s tangent, choose Rainbow. This is
the default setting. To keep characters’ Vertical edges perfectly Vertical regardless of the path shape, while
letting characters’ Horizontal edges follow the path, choose Skew. To keep characters’ Horizontal edges
perfectly Horizontal regardless of the path shape, while keeping each character’s Vertical edge perpendicular to
the path, choose 3D Ribbon. To keep the left edge of each character’s baseline on the path without Rotating
any characters, choose Stair Step. To keep the center of each character’s baseline on the path while keeping
each Vertical edge in Line with the path’s center point, choose Gravity. You can control this option’s
perspective effect by adjusting the arc of the Text’s path.
CHANGING STROKES
You can modify Objects in a number of ways in InDesign For example you can resize, Rotate and add
Color to Objects. For Objects drawn with InDesign drawing Tools you can also change Stroke that is the width
of Lines drawn with the drawing Tools, and the width of borders around Rectangles, ellipses, and Polygon as
well as the Fill patterns. To add Strokes, Select the Object Go to WindowStrokes. Then Strokes panel is
displayed, There click on the required Stroke. You can change the width of Stroke, style, thickness of Stroke,
you can even set arrow at the starting or ending point of a Line, you can add cap, joint, miter limit, gap Color,
gap Tint and Color of the Stroke.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
734
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
CHAPTER 10
WORKING WITH TABLES
A table is an Object made up of rows and columns used to organize huge amount of data in an effective
way. The intersection of row and column is called as cell. You can create a table directly in InDesign or Import
it from MS-Word or any other package. You can also apply styles to the table. In InDesign a table is placed in a
Text frame, which might be larger or smaller than the table. You can drag the corner of the Text frame to adjust
the Frame.
If the Text frame is smaller than the table, an overflow symbol appears in the bottom right corner. The
overflow symbol works the same for tables as it does for normal Text. When the table overflows, you can repeat
the header and footer rows of a table when it appears in a different Text frame on the same or different page.
When you create a table, InDesign automatically creates Strokes around cells to format it. You cannot remove
or customize the Strokes or add Fills by using the Strokes and Fills tab on the cell option dialog box. You can
apply a border to the table. If you want to make formatting to the next level, you can add an alternating pattern
to rows or columns to make it easier to read information in a table.
CREATING TABLES
A table consists of rows and columns of cells. A cell is like a Text frame in which you can add Text,
Inline Graphics, or other tables. You can create tables from scratch or by converting them from existing Text.
You can also embed a table within a table.
Create a Table from Scratch
Place a cursor where you need to insert a table
Select Type Tool and create a Text frame where you wish
to insert table. Go to Table Menu Insert Table
Then a table dialog box appears
Enter Body Rows (No. of rows), Columns,{
Header Rows(Enter no. to set the no. of Heading rows),
Footer Rows(Enter no. of footer rows) } click the Table
style list arrow and then select a table style click Ok.
Adding Text to table
You can use the table to organize the data in an efficient
way using a structured format. If you have already inserted a
table, click the cursor into a cell where you need to enter
Text/data. Set the Font face, Size, Style Type the Text in
that cell. To move to next cell press tab key/ place the cursor to
next cell using mouse.
Working with rows and Column
You can modify the table which has been inserted either
by adding extra rows and columns or by deleting the unwanted
rows and columns.
Select any cell, where you want to insert a new column
Go to Table Insert Row. Then the insert row dialog box
appears. You can insert a row above or below a particular cell. You can insert as many rows you want. Enter the
number of rows you wish to insert in Number : spin box and select where it should be inserted (above/ below)
and press ok.
Inserting Rows and Columns
Fig: 10.1: Insert Table Dialog Box
Fig: 10.2: Cell Options Dialog Box
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
735
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Note : The above procedure is same for inserting column also but for column we can insert it to left or right side
of the particular cell.
You can change the row height and column width using Cell options. You can keep all the rows and
columns with similar or varying heights and widths.
To Change Row Height
Select a row from the table for which you want to increase/decrease the height. Go to Table
Options Cell options Rows and columns The cell options dialog box appears. Select on the option
Row Height drop down list. (Exactly, ) Type a value in row height spin box to define the row height. You
can specify minimum and maximum height of a row here. Click ok
Note : The same applies to column also.
If you want to delete any unnecessary data in a
table you can delete a particular, Table, column, rows
of a table. You can delete rows and columns by a.
Select the table options or the delete option from the
table for deleting rows and columns. Select a
row/column/table you want to delete from the table
Go to Table Delete Row/Column/Table
A title gives the professional look to the table.
You can include the title in the header of the table. The
header region appears just below the top margin of the
page. If the table is large and divided into several
sections. Then headers are vital to help users to
familiarize the data in a table.
Select a row in the table where you want to
add Header Table Table Options Headers
and Footers Select a number from the Header
rows spin box Ok type the Text in the header
of the table
To align a Text present in a cell of the
table, and to make table attractive we align cells.
There are 4 types of alignment like align right, left,
center and align towards spine. You can apply any of
these alignment required.
To align cells, Select cells Click align center from Control panel
You can also merge cells if required by selecting cells then go to TableMerge cells.
To split cells select cells you want to split Go to Table Split cell Horizontally/Split cell
Vertically.
Changing the Row Height and Column Width
Deleting Rows and Columns
Inserting a Header in a table
Aligning, Splitting and Merging Cells
Fig: 10.3: Header and Footer window in Table option
Fig: 10.4: Merging and Splitting of Cells
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
736
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Defining Cell and Table Styles
A table styles accumulates several attributes to format tables such as cell insets, Paragraph styles,
Strokes, etc.,
It can be created using Cell Styles panel and can be
applied to any cells. To do select the cells Go to
Window Styles Cell styles Click the Panel Menu
icon to view cell styles panel Select the New cell style
option Type the name of a style and in Text tab : type
cell insets for top, bottom, left and right in Text tab. In
Vertical justification tab select Align type as top or bottom
or center or justify Vertically. Click the Strokes and Fills
tab on the left pane of the new cell style dialog box there
you can set Stroke weight, Color, type, cell Fill, gap Color,
gap Tint, and Tint. You can also add diagonal Lines if
required by using diagonal Lines tab at the left side of your cell styles panel.
To Apply a Cell Style
Select the cell Select the cell style from the list of styles in the Cell
styles panel. The style is applied to the cell. Similarly you can create
a table style also. Go to windowstylesTable styles And follow
the same steps used for creating a cell style. In Table style can be
applied for whole table, row, column and you can apply Fill to a table.
In Table Strokes and Fills you can change the border of a table, add
Colors to the background of a table,
CONVERT TEXT TO TABLE
Select the Text that you want to convert into a table click the
table Menu, and then click convert Text to table click the column
separator list arrow, and then select a separator: tab, comma or
Paragraph. click the row separator list arrow, and then select a
separator : tab, comma or Paragraph. Enter a column number to set the
number of columns in the table. click the table style list arrow, and
then select a table style click ok.
CONVERT A TABLE INTO TEXT
Click to place the insertion point inside any cell in the table click the table Menu and then click
convert table to Text click the column separator list arrow and then select a separator like tab or comma
or Paragraph click the row separator list arrow, and then select a separator like tab or comma or
Paragraph click Ok.
Creating a Cell Style
Fig: 10.5: Cell Styles Dialog Box
Fig: 10.6: Convert Text to table
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
737
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
CHAPTER 11
PUBLISHING THE DOCUMENT AND BOOK
Publishing is a process of finalizing the document for print. You can publish short documents like
advertisements, broachers, etc., and long documents like books, user manual, etc., There are several features to
perform different publishing and printing operations such as the PreFlight option to check errors in the
document and printing layouts. You can save a document as a PDF file, PNG format, etc.,
PERFORMING THE PREFLIGHT CHECK IN THE DOCUMENT
PreFlight option is used to check a document for errors before printing. This option checks all the
images, Objects, Colors, Text in a document and displays the errors. The error are displayed in Error pane of the
PreFlight panel. The errors are classified into Links, Colors, images, Objects, Text and Document categories.
The error is checked based on the criteria defined in the PreFlight profile. You can fix errors by manually
correcting errors in each page. InDesign
automatically updates the PreFlight error
status as you correct errors.
To do error check, open a document
to which you need to check Go to
windowoutputPreFlight
PreFlight
panel is opened, Click the panel Menu
Select Define profiles option Here type
a name for the new profile, select the Color
check box to find all errors related to the
Colors used in the document. (Checkmark
which
ever
items
you
need
to
do
PreFlightLinks, Color, Images, Objects,
Text, Document)Click ok. The newly created profile appears in PreFlight panel. Select the new profile
from the panel
The PreFlight panel begins checking the document for the type of errors defined in the New profile.
Click right faced triangle corresponding to the document error category in the error page. The document
category expands to display the error type Select the Bleed and Slug option in the Document category
Click the right faced triangle corresponding to info option to view the error description Click close to close
the panel.
SAVING A DOCUMENT AS PDF
Go to File Adobe PDF Presents Press Qualify The Export dialog box appears. Type the
file name and press save.
Instead of PDF in Export dialog box save as type select as PNG to convert the document from
InDesign to PNG format.
PREVIEWING AND EXPORTING IN GRAYSCALE
This option is used to Export a file in GrayScale format or to print a file in GrayScale. It previews the
content of a document such as Objects, images, Text in GrayScale.
Open a document Click viewProof Setup CustomSelect Gray option from the Device to
stimulate drop down list. Click ok.
To view it back in Color Mode go to view Proof Setup Document CMYK option
Fig: 11.1: PreFlight profile dialog box (Define profile)
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
738
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Exporting a PDF in GrayScale
Go to File Adobe PDF Presents Press Qualify The Export dialog box appears. select the
output tab in the left pane In Color tab select Color conversion select convert to destination then
Destination box is highlighted there select GrayClick Export button in the Export Adobe PDF.
PRINTING A DOCUMENT
Printing is one of the most Important features in any package. It is used when you want to create a hard
copy of the document which you created. But before printing we have to preview the document to check about
margin or how they look before printing. You can make any changes if required before printing.
Previewing a document
Click the preview option from the flyout of the screen mode button. Different screen modes are : normal,
preview, Bleed, Slug, presentation.
You can print a whole document or print only range of pages.
File Print Select Default option from the print present Select printer In pages option select
AllPrint.
Printing using range of Pages
File Print Select Custom option from the print present Select Printer In pages option select
RangesType the range of pages you wish to printPrint.
Note : To print contiguous page use “-“, for non-contiguous use “,”
PRINT PRESENT
Print presents are print settings that you can save and use in an InDesign. It is helpful when you want to
get hardcopy of the document with the same print settings frequently. It helps us to get accurate prints of the
documents when multiple prints are required.
To create : File Print presents Define Click New Type a new print present name, select printer name,
select the pages type and sequence you need to print commonlySelect other options if required Press ok
CREATE A BOOK FILE
A book file is a collection of documents that can share styles, Swatches, Master pages, and other items.
You can sequentially number pages in booked documents, print selected documents in a book, or Export them
to PDF. One document can belong to multiple book files.
One of the documents added to a book file is the style source. By default, the style source is the first
document in the book, but you can select a new style source at any time. When you synchronize documents in a
book, the specified styles and Swatches from the style source replace those in other booked documents. Choose
File New Book.-->Type a name for the book, specify a location, and then click Save.--> The Book panel
appears. The book file is saved with the file name extension .indb. Add documents to the book file.
Add documents to a book files:
When you create a book file, it opens in the Book panel. The Book panel is the working area of a book
file, where you add, remove, or rearrange documents. Choose Add Document in the Book panel Menu, or click
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
739
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
the plus button
at the bottom of the Book panel. Select the Adobe InDesign document or documents you
want to add, and then click Open.
Note: You can drag and drop files onto the Book panel from an Explorer window. You can also drag a
document from one book to another. Hold down Alt to copy the document.
If you included documents created in earlier versions of InDesign, they will be converted to Adobe InDesign
CS6 format when added to the book. In the Save As dialog box, specify a new name for the converted
document (or leave the name as is), and then click Save.
Note: You must convert Adobe PageMaker or QuarkXPress documents before adding them to the book file.
If necessary, change the order of the documents in the panel by dragging them up or down to the appropriate
locations in the list. To designate a document as the style source, click the box next to the document’s name in
the panel. To open a document in a book file, double-click the document name in the Book panel.
Manage book files
Each open book file appears on its own tab in the Book panel. If multiple books are open at the same
time, click a tab to bring that book to the front and access its panel Menu.
Icons in the Book panel indicate a document’s current status, such as open
, missing
(the
document was moved, renamed, or deleted), modified
(the document was edited or its page or section
numbers changed while the book was closed), or in use
(if someone else has the document open in a
managed workflow). No icon appears next to closed documents.
Note: To view the pathname of any document in a book, hold the mouse pointer over the document name until
a Tooltip appears. Or, choose Document Information from the Book panel Menu.
Save a book file
Book files are separate from document files. For example, when you choose the Save Book command,
InDesign saves the changes to the book, not the documents in the book.
Do one of the following:
To save a book under a new name, choose Save Book As in the Book panel Menu, specify a location and
filename, and click Save.
To save an existing book under the same name, choose Save Book in the Book panel Menu, or click the
Save button
at the bottom of the Book panel.
Note: If you are sharing book files over a server, make sure that you have a file management system in
place so that you don’t save over each other’s changes accidentally.
Close a book file
To close a single book, choose Close Book in the book’s panel Menu. To close all open books docked
together in the same panel, click the close button on the Book panel’s title bar.
Remove book documents
Select the document in the Book panel. Choose Remove Document in the Book panel Menu.
Removing the document from the book file doesn’t delete the file on disk; the document is removed
only from the book file.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
740
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Replace book documents
Select the document in the Book panel. Choose Replace Document in the Book panel Menu, locate
the document you want to replace it with, and then click Open.
Open a book file in Explorer or Finder
In the books panel, select a document. From the books panel Menu, choose Reveal In Explorer A
browser window opens that displays the selected file.
Synchronize book documents
When you synchronize documents in a book, the items you specify—styles, variables, Master pages,
trap presets, cross-reference formats, conditional Text settings, numbered lists, and Swatches—are copied from
the style source to the specified documents in the book, replacing any items that have identical names. If items
in the style source are not found in the documents being synchronized, they are added. Items that are not
included in the style source are left as is in the documents being synchronized.
Select items to synchronize Choose Synchronize Options in the Book panel Menu. Select the
items you want to copy from the style source to other book documents. Be sure to select all styles included in
the definition of other styles. For example, an Object style may contain paragraph and character styles, which in
turn include Swatches. Select Smart Match Style Groups to avoid duplicating uniquely named styles that
have been moved into or out of style groups. Suppose the style source includes a character style in a style
group, and the documents being synchronized include this same character style outside the style group. If this
option is selected, the character style is moved into the style group in synchronized documents.
If this option is not selected, a second instance of the character style is created in the style group with
options that match the style source. The character style outside the style group does not change. click ok.
Note: If a document contains multiple styles that have the same name (for example, Character Style 1 in a style
group and Character Style 1 outside of a style group), InDesign behaves as if the option is not selected. For best
results, create styles with unique names.
Synchronize documents in a book file
You can synchronize the book while documents in the
book are closed. InDesign opens the closed documents, makes
any changes, and then saves and closes the documents.
Documents that are open when you synchronize are changed but
not saved. In the Book panel, click the blank box next to the
document that you want to be the style source; the style source
icon
indicates which document is the style source.
Selected style source
Make sure that the items you want copied from the style source are selected in the Synchronize Options
dialog box.
In the Book panel, select the documents you want to synchronize with the style source document. If no
document is selected, the entire book will be synchronized.
Note: To make sure that no documents are selected, click the blank Gray area below the booked documents—
you may need to scroll or resize the Book panel. You can also hold down Ctrl and click a selected document to
deselect it.
Choose Synchronize Selected Documents or Synchronize Book from the Book panel Menu, or click the
Synchronize button
at the bottom of the Book panel.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
741
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE
INDESIGN CS6
Note: Choosing Edit Undo will undo changes only in documents that are open at the time synchronization
occurs.
Synchronize Master pages
Master pages are synchronized in the same way as other items—Master pages with the same name
(such as A-Master) as those in the style source are replaced. Synchronizing masters is useful for documents that
use the same design elements, such as running headers and footers. However, if you want to preserve page
items on a Master page in documents other than the style source, either don’t synchronize Master pages or
create Master pages with different names.
It’s also a good idea to synchronize Master pages using only one style source. If you need to
synchronize using a different style source, deselect the Master pages option in the Synchronize Options dialog
box before doing so.
Print or output a book file
One advantage of using a book file is that you can use a single command to output—for print, PreFlight,
package, or Export to EPUB or PDF—selected booked documents or the entire book.
In the Book panel, do one of the following:
To output specific documents, select the desired documents.
To output the entire book, make sure no documents are selected.
Choose an output command (such as Print Book or Print Selected Documents) in the Book panel Menu.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
742
¨sÁUÀ 1
CORELDRAWX6
CHAPTER1BASICSOFCORELDRAW
Introduction.........................................................................................................
Vectorimages......................................................................................................
Bitmapsgraphics(rasterimages).........................................................................
Coreldrawterminology........................................................................................
Startingcoreldrawx6...........................................................................................
Exploringtoolbox.................................................................................................
Startingandopeningdrawings.............................................................................
Startingnewdrawings.........................................................................................
Openingexistingdrawings...................................................................................
Previewingthedrawing(screenpreview)............................................................
Specifyingthepagelayout...................................................................................
Savingdrawings...................................................................................................
CHAPTER2GRIDSANDGUIDELINES
Gridsandguidelines.............................................................................................
Changingtheorderofobjects..............................................................................
CHAPTER3WORKINGWITHDRAWINGTOOLS.............................
Drawinglines.......................................................................................................
Drawingrectanglesandsquares...........................................................................
Drawingellipses,circles,arcs,andpieshapes......................................................
Drawingpolygonsandstars.................................................................................
Drawingspirals....................................................................................................
Drawingpredefinedshapes..................................................................................
Drawingbyusingshaperecognition.....................................................................
CHAPTER4EXPLORINGCROPTOOLS
CropTool.............................................................................................................
StraighteningBitmaps..........................................................................................
UsingPickToolForSelectingObjects...................................................................
FreehandPickTool...............................................................................................
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
743
¨sÁUÀ 1
CHAPTER5WORKINGWITHIMAGES...............................................
Copying,duplicating,anddeletingobjects.........................................................
Copyingobjectproperties,transformations,andeffects....................................
Findingandreplacingobjects.............................................................................
Insertingbarcodes..............................................................................................
Creating,editing,anddeletingsymbols..............................................................
Cloningobjects...................................................................................................
Positioningobjects.............................................................................................
Groupingobjects................................................................................................
Lockingobjects...................................................................................................
Combiningobjects..............................................................................................
Aligninganddistributingobjects........................................................................
Snappingobjects................................................................................................
Usingcurveobjects............................................................................................
Totrimanobject................................................................................................
Weldingandintersectinganobject....................................................................
CHAPTER6WORKINGWITHTEXT....................................................
Addingandmanipulatingtext............................................................................
Addingartistictext.............................................................................................
Fittingtexttoapath..........................................................................................
Changingtextcase.............................................................................................
Adjustingcharacterandwordspacing................................................................
Addingbulletstotext.........................................................................................
Insertingdropcaps.............................................................................................
Changingcharacterpositionandangle...............................................................
AligningText......................................................................................................
Addingtabsandindents.....................................................................................
Displayingnonprintingcharacters......................................................................
CHAPTER7.................................................................................................
WORKINGWITHTRANSFORMATIONTOOLS..................................
Sizingandscalingobjects...................................................................................
Rotatingandmirroringobjects...........................................................................
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
744
¨sÁUÀ 1
CHAPTER8LAYERS..............................................................................
Creatinglayers...................................................................................................
Viewinglayers,pages,andobjects.....................................................................
Todeletealayer................................................................................................
Changinglayerproperties..................................................................................
Showingandhidinglayers..................................................................................
Printingandexportinglayers.............................................................................
Settingalayer’seditingproperties.....................................................................
Renaminglayers.................................................................................................
Usinglayercolortoviewobjects........................................................................
Tocopyalayer...................................................................................................
CHAPTER9WORKINGWITHCOLORS..............................................
Workingwithcolor.............................................................................................
Fillingobjects.....................................................................................................
Applyingpatternfills..........................................................................................
Applyingtexturefills..........................................................................................
Applyingpostscripttexturefills..........................................................................
Applyingmeshfills.............................................................................................
Workingwithfills...............................................................................................
CHAPTER10ADDINGEFFECTS
Contour..............................................................................................................
Applyingperspectivetoobjects.........................................................................
Creatingextrusions............................................................................................
Creatingbeveleffects.........................................................................................
Dropshadow......................................................................................................
Blendingobjects.................................................................................................
Applyinglenses..................................................................................................
Creatingrollovers...............................................................................................
Powerclip...........................................................................................................
CHAPTER11IMPORTING....................................................................
Whyprovidethesedifferentformats?...............................................................
Importingfiles....................................................................................................
Convertingvectorgraphicstobitmaps...............................................................
Creatingobjectsfortheweb..............................................................................
CHAPTER12PRINTINGADRAWING...............................................1
Printingyourwork................................................................................................
Layingoutprintjobs.............................................................................................
Previewingprintjobs............................................................................................
Applyingprintstyles.............................................................................................
Printingcolorseparations.....................................................................................
Workingwithshortcutkeys..................................................................................
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
745
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
CORELDRAW
X6
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
746
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
CHAPTER 1
BASICS OF CORELDRAW
INTRODUCTION
CorelDRAW is a comprehensive vector based drawing program that makes it easy to create a professio
nal artwork from simple logos to intricate technical illustrations. Corel is one of the world’s top software
companies, with more than 100 million active users in over 75 countries. The software helps people to
express their ideas and share their stories in more exciting, creative, and persuasive ways. The industry
has responded with hundreds of awards for software innovation, design, and value. CorelDRAW
Graphics Suite X6 offers several workflow innovations that help you be more efficient and productive.
The suite’s content library includes:
x
10,1000 high quality clipart and digital images
x
1,000 professional, high resolution digital photos
x
1,000 open type fonts, including premium fonts like Helvetica
x
350 vehicle templates
x
800 frames and more….
Computer imaging applications are based on creating either vector graphics or bitmap graphics.
Graphical elements in a vector file are called objects. Each object is a self contained entity with
properties such as color, shape, outline, size and position on the screen included in its definition. In
CorelDRAW X6, the redesigned Object Properties docker now presents only object-dependent
formatting options and properties. CorelDRAW X6 introduces additional shaping tools that provide new
creative options for refining your vector objects. CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X6 provides support for
64-bit processors, which lets you work faster than ever before with large files, The extension of
CorelDRAW file is .CDR.
The enhanced import and export support for Adobe Illustrator CS5 and Adobe Photoshop CS5, as well as
import support for Adobe Acrobat X and Microsoft Publisher 2010, ensure that you can exchange files
with colleagues and clients. With new advanced OpenType support, and enhanced complex script
support for working with foreign language text, CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X6 makes it easier than ever
before to layout your project. The new and improved odd, even, and all-pages Master Layers make it
easier to create page-specific designs for your multi-page documents. If you are laying out multi-page
documents, such as brochures and flyers, it’s now easy to incorporate page-specific headers, footers, and
page numbers. In addition, page numbers are automatically updated when you add or delete pages in
your document. You can also insert a page number inside existing artistic or paragraph text.
CorelDRAW X6 provides interactive frames that help you efficiently generate mock-ups of design ideas.
The interactive frame functionality has also been implemented in a collection of pre-designed picture
frames included with the suite, giving you stylish, content-ready design assets that you can customize
with ease. In CorelDRAW X6, the revamped styles engine introduces a new Object Styles docker that
simplifies the creation, application, and management of styles. A style is a set of properties that governs
the appearance of objects in your document. CorelDRAW X6 also introduces new style sets, you can
create and apply styles and style sets to graphic objects, artistic and paragraph text, callout and dimension
objects, and objects created with Artistic Media tools. The new Color Styles docker lets you add the
colors used in a document as color styles. The new color harmony functionality lets you group a
document’s color styles so that you can quickly and easily produce iterative designs with varying color
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
747
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
schemes. By combining two or more color styles into a harmony, you are linking the colors into a hue-
based relationship. You can also edit the individual color styles in a harmony.
In addition, you can also create a special type of color harmony called a gradient, which consists of one
master color style and a number of varying shades of that color. When you alter the master color, the
gradient colors automatically adjust to the same degree that the master color was altered. This is
especially useful when outputting multiple color variations of the same design.
Computer graphics fall into two main categories: Vector graphics and Bitmaps.
VECTORIMAGES
Vector graphics are made of lines and curves, and they
are generated from mathematical descriptions that
determine the position, length, and direction in which
lines are drawn. Vector graphics are also called as object
oriented or draw images, are defined mathematically as
a series of points joined by lines and curves. Graphical
elements in a vector file are called objects. Vector
graphics are ideal for logos and illustrations because they
are resolution-independent and can be scaled to any size,
or printed and displayed at any resolution, without losing
detail and quality. In addition, you can produce sharp
and crisp outlines with vector graphics.
BITMAPSGRAPHICS(RASTERIMAGES)
Bitmaps images are composed of small squares called pixels; each pixel is mapped to a location in an
image and has numerical color values. Bitmaps are excellent for photographs and digital paintings
because they reproduce color gradations well. Bitmaps are resolution-dependent; that is, they represent a
fixed number of pixels. They look good at their actual size, but they can appear jagged or lose image
quality when scaled, or when displayed or printed at a resolution higher than their original resolution.
You can create vector graphics in CorelDRAW. You can also import bitmaps (such as JPEG and TIFF
files) into CorelDRAW and add them to your drawings.
CORELDRAWTERMINOLOGY
Before you get started with CorelDRAW, you should be familiar with the following terms.
Term
Description
Object
An element in a drawing such as an image, shape, line, text, curve, symbol, or layer
Drawing
The work you create in CorelDRAW; for example, custom artwork, logos, posters, and
newsletters
Vector
graphic
An image generated from mathematical descriptions that determine the position, length,
and direction in which lines are drawn
Bitmap
An image composed of grids of pixels or dots
Docker
A window that contains available commands and settings relevant to a specific tool or
task
Flyout
A button that opens a group of related tools or menu items
Fig 1.1 : Above : Vector Graphics
Below : Bitmap Graphics
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
748
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
List box
A list of options that drops down when a user clicks the down arrow button
Artistic text
A type of text to which you can apply special effects, such as shadows
Paragraph
text
A type of text to which you can apply formatting options, and which can be edited in
large blocks
STARTINGCORELDRAWX6
Goto Start MenuÆAll programsÆCorelDRAW Graphics Suite X6Æ CorelDRAW X6 Æ The
welcome screen appears as shown in fig 1.2. The Welcome screen appears when you start CorelDRAW.
The Welcome screen gives you easy access to application resources and lets you quickly complete
common tasks. You can also access the Welcome screen after starting the application by clicking
Windows menu Æ Welcome Screen. It has 5 tabs:
x
Quick start: It has options to create new blank document or new blank template, It also has records
of recently opened files.
x
What’s New: List that explains new features in CorelDRAW X6.
x
Learning Tools: It shows tips and tricks, video tutorials, guidebook and provide online resources
x
Gallery: You can also find out about the new features in CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X6 and get
inspired by graphic designs
x
Updates: Shows any package related updates if available.
Fig 1.2 : CorelDRAW Welcome Screen
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
749
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
To create a new graphic image from scratch select quick start tab in welcome screen window Æ New
Blank Document Æ When you do, you will see an empty CorelDRAW X6 window. When you launch
CorelDRAW, the Application window opens containing a drawing window. The CorelDRAW
application window appears as shown in fig:1.3. Circled numbers correspond to the numbers in the
following table, which describes the main components of the application window.
Sections of the
Screen
Description
1. Toolbox
A docked bar with tools for creating, filling, and modifying objects in the drawing.
2. Title bar
The area displays the package name with version (CorelDRAW X6) and name of
currently opened drawing. By default it will be named as Untitled
3. Menu bar
The area containing pull-down menu options
4. Toolbar
A detachable bar that contains shortcuts to menu and other commands
5. Update text
toolbar
A temporary toolbar that allows you to update legacy documents in order to edit the
text using the CorelDRAW X6 text controls.
6.
Drawing
window
The drawing window is the whole work area in the middle of your CorelDRAW X6
window, excluding the toolbars, toolbox and status bar.
7. Property bar
A detachable bar with commands that relate to the active tool or object. For example,
when the text tool is active, the text property bar displays commands that create and
edit text.
8.
Docker
windows
A window containing available commands and settings relevant to a specific tool or
task. The dockable window can be docked to any edge of the application window.
9. Rulers
Horizontal and vertical borders that are used to determine the size and position of
objects in a drawing
10. Document
palette
A dockable bar that lets you keep track of colors that are used in a document.
Fig 1.3 : CorelDRAW Application Window
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
750
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
Sections of the
Screen
Description
11.
Document
navigator
The area at the bottom left of the application window that contains controls
for moving between pages and adding pages
12.
Drawing
page
The rectangular area inside the drawing window. It is the printable area of
your work area. You can store graphic image you do not want to print in the
area of the drawing window ie., outside drawing page.
13. Status bar
An area at the bottom of the application window that contains information
about object properties such as type, size, color, fill, and resolution. It shows
the current cursor position. The X value (first one) represents the distance
from the left edge of the drawing. The Y value (the second one) represents
the distance your current point is from the bottom of the drawing page.
14. Navigator
A button at the lower-right corner that opens a smaller display to help you
move around a drawing
15.
Color
palette
A dockable bar that contains color swatches
EXPLORINGTOOLBOX
The toolbox contains tools for drawing and
editing images. Some of the tools are visible by
default, while others are grouped in fly outs.
Fly outs open to display a set of related
CorelDRAW tools. You can access the tools in
a flyout by clicking a small arrow in the lower-
right corner of a toolbox. It contains related tools.
They can be selected by hovering over any of the toolbox buttons which have flyout arrows. Flyouts
function like toolbars when you drag them away from the toolbox. In the default workspace, clicking the
flyout arrow on the Shape tool opens the Shape edit flyout.
Flyouts
PICK TOOL FLYOUT
Pick Tool lets you select, size, skew and rotate objects
Freehand Pick tool lets you select objects by using a
freehand selection marquee
Fig 1.4 : Exploring Toolbox
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
751
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
SHAPE EDIT TOOL FLYOUT
Shape tool lets you edit the shape of objects
Smudge brush tool lets you distort a vector object by
dragging along its outline
Roughen brush tool lets you distort the outline of a
vector based object by dragging along the outline
The free Transform tool lets you transform an object
using Free rotation, angle reflection, Scale, Skew
The Smear tool lets you shape an object by pulling
extensions or making indents along its outline.
The Twirl tool lets you create Swirl effects by
dragging along the edges of an objects.
The Attract tool lets you shape objects by attracting
nodes to the cursor.
The Repel tool lets you shape objects by pushing away
nodes from the cursor
CROP TOOL FLYOUT
The Crop Tool lets you remove unwanted areas in
objects.
The Knife Tool lets you cut through objects
The Eraser Tool lets you remove areas of your
drawings.
The Virtual Segment Delete Tool lets you delete
portions of objects that are between intersections.
ZOOM TOOL FLYOUT
The Zoom Tool lets you change the magnification
level in the drawing window.
The Pan Tool lets you control which part of the
drawing is visible in the drawing window.
The Freehand tool lets you draw single line segments
and curves
The 2-point line tool lets you draw a straight two-point
line segment
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
752
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
CURVE TOOL FLYOUT
The Bézier tool lets you draw curves one segment at a
time
The Artistic
media tool
provides
access
to
the Brush, Sprayer, Calligraphic, and Pressure tools.
The Pen tool lets you draw curves one segment at a
time.
The B-spline tool lets you draw curved lines by setting
control points that shape the curve without breaking it
into segments.
The Polyline tool lets you draw lines and curves in
preview mode.
The 3-point curve tool lets you draw a curve by
defining the start, end, and center points.
SMART TOOL FLYOUT
The Smart fill tool lets you create objects from
enclosed areas and then apply a fill to those objects
The Smart drawing tool converts your freehand
strokes to basic shapes and smoothed curves.
RECTANGLE TOOL FLYOUT
The Rectangle tool lets you draw rectangles and
squares.
The 3-point rectangle tool lets you draw rectangles at
an angle
ELLIPSE TOOL FLYOUT
The Ellipse tool lets you draw ellipses and circles.
The 3-point ellipse tool lets you draw ellipses at an
angle.
The Polygon tool lets you draw symmetrical polygons
and stars.
The Star tool lets you draw perfect stars.
The Complex star tool lets you draw complex stars
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
753
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
OBJECT TOOL FLYOUT
that have intersecting sides.
The Graph paper tool lets you draw a grid of lines
similar to that on graph paper
The Spiral tool lets you draw symmetrical and
logarithmic spirals.
BASIC SHAPES TOOL FLYOUT
The Basic shapes tool lets you choose from a full set of
shapes, including hexagram, a smiley face, and a right-
angle triangle
The Arrow shapes tool lets you draw arrows of
various shape, direction, and number of heads
The Flowchart shapes tool lets you draw flowchart
symbols
The Banner shapes tool lets you draw ribbon objects
and explosion shapes
The Callout shapes tool lets you draw callouts and
labels.
TEXT TOOL
The Text tool lets you type words directly on the
screen as artistic or paragraph text
TABLE TOOL
The Table tool lets you draw and edit tables
DIMENSION TOOL FLYOUT
The Parallel dimension tool lets you draw slanted
dimension lines
The Horizontal or vertical dimension tool lets you
draw horizontal or vertical dimension lines
The Angular dimension tool lets you draw angular
dimension lines
The Segment dimension tool lets you display the
distance between end nodes in single or multiple
segments
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
754
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
The 3-point callout tool lets you draw a callout with a
two-segment leader line
CONNECTOR TOOL FLYOUT
The Straight-line connector tool lets you draw a
straight connector line
The Right-angle connector tool lets you draw a right
angle connector line
The Right-angle round connector tool lets you draw a
right-angle connector line with curved corners
The Edit anchor tool lets you modify connector line
anchor points
INTERACTIVE TOOL FLYOUT
The Blend tool lets you blend two objects
The Contour tool lets you apply a contour to an object
The Distort tool lets you apply a Push or Pull
distortion, a Zipper distortion, or a Twister distortion to
an object
The Drop shadow tool lets you apply a drop shadow to
an object
The Envelope tool lets you shape an object by
dragging the nodes of the envelope
The Extrude tool lets you apply the illusion of depth to
objects
The Transparency tool lets you apply transparencies
to objects
EYEDROPPER TOOL FLYOUT
The Color eyedropper tool lets you select and copy a
color from an object on the drawing window or the
desktop
The Attributes eyedropper tool lets you select and
copy object properties, such as line thickness, size and
effects, from an object on the drawing window
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
755
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
OUTLINE TOOL FLYOUT
The Outline tool opens a flyout that gives you quick
access to items such as the Outline pen dialog box
and Outline color dialog box
FILL TOOL FLYOUT
The Fill tool opens a flyout that gives you quick access
to items such as the fill dialog boxes
INTERACTIVE FILL TOOL
FLYOUT
The Interactive fill tool lets you apply various fills
The Mesh fill tool lets you apply a mesh grid to an
object
STARTINGANDOPENINGDRAWINGS
ToStartCorelDRAW
CorelDRAW lets you start a new drawing from a blank page, a
template, or an existing drawing. A blank page gives you the
freedom to specify every aspect of a drawing. A template provides
you with a starting point and leaves the amount of customization up
to you.
STARTINGNEWDRAWINGS
File ÆNewÆBlank Document ÆType a filename in the Name text
box. Æ From the Preset destination list box, choose an output
destination for the drawing: ÆSelect paper size, unit of
measurements Æ number of pages you wish to insert ÆEnter
Fig 1.5 : Create New Dialog Box
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
756
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
primary color mode Æresolution ÆPreview Mode : Enhance/ Simple wireframe/ wireframe/Normal/
Draft/Pixel Æpress ok.
The Different CorelDRAW Present are:
x
CorelDRAW Default: Applies CorelDRAW default settings for creating graphics that are destined
for printing.
x
Default CMYK: Applies settings for creating graphics that are destined for commercial printing.
x
Default RGB: Applies settings for creating graphics that are destined for printing to a high-fidelity
printer
x
Web: Applies settings for creating graphics that are destined for the Internet
x
Custom: Lets you customize destination settings for a document
When starting a new drawing, CorelDRAW lets you specify page, document, and color management
settings. You can choose from a list of preset settings, which are based on how you intend to use the
drawing. For example, you can choose the Web option if you are creating a drawing for the Internet, or
the Default CMYK option if you are creating a document destined for commercial printing. However, if
the preset settings are not suitable for the drawing that you want to create, you can also customize the
settings and save them for future use.
OPENINGEXISTINGDRAWINGS
CorelDRAW lets you open existing drawings saved to the CorelDRAW (CDR) format as well as
drawings and projects saved to various file formats such as Corel DESIGNER (DSF or DES), Adobe
Illustrator (AI), Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF), Encapsulated PostScript (EPS), and Computer
Graphics Metafile (CGM). However, you may not be able to open certain files, depending on their file
type and contents. In such cases, you can try importing the files as objects in an open drawing.
Goto File ÆOpen ÆLocate the folder where the file is storedÆClick on a filename ÆPress
Open
PREVIEWINGTHEDRAWING(SCREENPREVIEW)
You can preview a drawing to see how it will look when printed or exported. When you preview a
drawing, only the objects on the drawing page and in the immediate area of the drawing window are
displayed, and you can see all layers that are set to print in the Object manager docker. If you want a
closer look at specific objects in a drawing, you can select and preview them. When you preview selected
objects, the rest of the drawing is hidden
ToPreviewaDrawing
Click View menu Æ Full-screen preview Æ Click/press anywhere on the screen, to return to the
application window. Æ You can press Page up and Page down to preview pages in a multipage drawing.
WorkingwithViews
You can save a view of any part of a drawing. For example, you can save a view of an object at 230%
magnification and then return to this specific view at any time. If a document contains multiple pages,
you can view them all at once by using the Page Sorter view. You can also display consecutive left-hand
and right-hand pages on the screen at the same time (facing pages) and create objects that span two pages
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
757
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
ToSaveaView
Goto Tools menu ÆView Manager Æ Use the Zoom tools in the view manager docker to set up a view
ÆClick the Add current view button.
If you disable the page icon next to a saved view in the docker, CorelDRAW switches to the
magnification level only, not the page, when you switch to that view. Similarly, if you disable the
magnifying glass icon, CorelDRAW switches to the page only, not the magnification level.
ToSwitchtoasavedview
Click Tools Æview manager ÆClick a view in the view manager docker.
Toviewallpagesinamultipagedocument
Click View ÆPage sorter view
Toviewfacingpages
Click Layout ÆPage setup Æ In the Document list of categories, click Layout Æ Enable the Facing
pages check box Æ Choose one of the following settings for the Start on list box: Left side/right side.
Left side Æ starts the document on a left hand page. Right side: Starts the document on a right hand
page.
WorkingwithotherviewsofCorelDRAW
You can control how you see and work with your page by selecting from view options. The viewing
mode you choose affects the amount of time it takes for a drawing to open or be displayed on the
monitor. For example, a drawing displayed in Simple Wireframe view takes less time to refresh or open
than does a drawing displayed in Enhanced view.
x
Simple Wireframe: Displays an outline of the drawing by hiding fills, extrusions, contours, drop
shadows, and intermediate blend shapes; also displays the bitmaps in monochrome. This mode lets
you quickly preview basic elements in a drawing.
x
Wireframe: Displays a drawing in simple wireframe mode plus intermediate blend shapes.
x
Draft: Displays fills and bitmaps with a low resolution. This mode eliminates some detail to allow
you to focus on the color balances in a drawing.
x
Normal : Displays a drawing without PostScript fills or high-resolution bitmaps. This mode
refreshes and opens slightly faster than the Enhanced mode.
x
Enhanced: It is the default view. It displays a drawing with PostScript fills, high-resolution bitmaps,
and anti-aliased vector graphics.
x
Pixels: displays a pixel-based rendition of the drawing, which allows you to zoom in on an area of an
object, and then position and size the object more precisely. This view also lets you see what the
drawing will look like when it is exported to a bitmap file format.
x
Simulate overprints: simulates the color of areas where overlapping objects were set to overprint
and displays PostScript fills, high-resolution bitmaps, and anti-aliased vector graphics.
x
Rasterize complex effects: Rasterizes the display of complex effects, such as transparencies, bevels,
and drop shadows when in Enhanced view. This option is useful for previewing how the complex
effects will be printed. To ensure the successful printing of complex effects, most printers require
complex effects to be rasterized.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
758
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
SPECIFYINGTHEPAGELAYOUT
You can begin working on a drawing by specifying settings for the size, orientation, and layout style of
the page.
There are two options for specifying a page size: choosing a preset page size or creating your own. You
can choose from many preset page sizes ranging from legal-size paper and envelopes to posters and Web
pages. If a preset page size does not meet your needs, you can create a custom page size by specifying a
drawing’s dimensions.
The orientation of the page can be Landscape or Portrait. With landscape orientation the drawing’s
width is greater than its height, and with portrait orientation the drawing’s height is greater than its
width. Any pages you add to a drawing project assume the current orientation; however, you can give
single pages in a drawing project a different orientation. The options you choose when specifying the
page layout can be used as a default for all new drawings you create. You can also adjust the page size
and orientation settings to match the standard paper settings for printing.
Tosetthedefaultpagelayout
Click Tools menu Æ Options. Æ In the list of categories, click Document ÆEnable the Save options
as defaults for new documents check box. ÆEnable the Page options check box.
The next new document is created with the page size and orientation options that were last specified with
the Resize current page only check box disabled.
SAVINGDRAWINGS
By default, drawings are saved to the CorelDRAW file format (CDR) and are compatible with the latest
version of the application. You can also save a drawing that is compatible with an earlier version of
CorelDRAW Graphics Suite. You can save a drawing to other vector file formats as well. If you want to
use a drawing in another application, you must save it to a file format that is supported by that
application. When you save a drawing, CorelDRAW lets you add reference information so that you can
easily find and organize drawings later on.
Goto File ÆSaveÆType a filename in the filename box Æ locate the folder where you want to save the
file Æ Choose the file format from the Save as type dropdown box Æclick Save.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
759
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
CHAPTER 2
GRIDS AND GUIDELINES
GRIDSANDGUIDELINES
Grids and guidelines are tools that enable you to easily position a selected object to a horizontal or
vertical location or both. Working with the grid displayed is like working on graph paper. You can use
grids to align your object to a position. The grids and guidelines are non-printing lines placed to align
and place the objects in your drawing.
You can draw a grid and set the number of rows and columns. A grid is a grouped set of rectangles that
you can break apart. To draw select Graph paper tool Æ Type values in the top and bottom portions of
the Columns and rows box
on the property bar Æ The value you type in the top portion
specifies the number of columns; the value you type in the bottom portion specifies the number of rows
ÆPoint to where you want the grid to appear Ædrag diagonally to draw a grid.
Note : I f you want to draw the grid from its center point outward, hold down Shift as you drag; if you
want to draw a grid with square cells, hold down Ctrl as you drag.
ToUngroupagrid
Select a grid using pick tool ÆGoto Arrange menu ÆUngroup
Guidelines are of two types Vertical & Horizontal. Figure 2.1 shows a Horizontal and Vertical
guideline.
DefiningGrids
. The intersecting horizontal and vertical lines are called Gridlines. You can also adjust the distance
between the grids and number of lines(frequency) between each vertical and horizontal unit, can be set
according to your requirement.
There are 3 types of grids: Document grid, Baseline grid and Pixel Grid
Fig 2.1 : Horizontal and Vertical Guideline
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
760
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
x
Document Grid: The document grid is a series of non-printing intersecting lines that you can display
in the drawing window. You can use the document grid to precisely align and position objects.
x
Baseline Grid : A series of evenly spaced
horizontal lines that follow the pattern of a ruled
notebook and help align text and objects.
x
Pixel Grid : It displays a pixel based rendition
of the drawing, which allows you to zoom in an
area of an object, then position and size the
object more precisely.
To display grids do this:
1. Click View menu Æ Grid Æ Document
Grid/Baseline Grid/ Pixel Grid.
To customize grids do this:
Click View menu ÆSetup Æ Grid and Ruler Setup. The Option dialog box appears as in Figure 2.2.
Here you can set all types of Grids.
2. Click Grid lines per inch /inches apart, to specify the distance between each gridline. Type the
values: Horizontal: type the distance between horizontal grid. Vertical: type the distance between
vertical grid.
3. To display the grids as lines, click the Show grid as line radio button. To display the grids as dots,
click the Show grid as dots radio button.
4. . To display the grid click Show grid check box.
To place a Vertical Guideline, do this:
x
Drag on the ruler on the left side of the Drawing window, and pull it to the position you want to place
the guide.
x
Alternatively, Click View menu Æ snap to ÆGuideline SetupÆ The dialog box appears. In the
dialog box, click the Vertical and type the number then click Add button.
To place horizontal guideline do this:
x
Drag on the ruler situated on the top of the drawing window, and pull it until the line placed at
the desired location.
x
Alternatively, click View menu Æsnap to Æ Guideline SetupÆ The dialog box that appears :
In the dialog box, click on Horizontal and type the number then click on Add button.
Snap to Grid feature will make the grid coordinates act like magnets that attract the object you are
moving If you want to move an object to a location not a grid coordinate, you will find it difficult with
snap to Grid turned on. You can place custom defined horizontal and vertical guidelines on your page
and use them to align objects to a required position. CorelDRAW allows you to snap your object that is
you can force your object that is being drawn to align automatically to a point on another object.
Note:- The hotkey for toggling snap to Grid on and off is Ctrl+Y.
Fig 2.2 : Customizing Gridlines
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
761
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
To snap to guidelines do this:
1. Click on View menu Æsnap to Æ choose Snap to Guidelines. Now the guidelines will act as
magnetic borders.
To remove guidelines do this:
1. Select the guideline you want to remove with the pick tool.
2. Press the Delete button or Right click and select Delete option from floating menu.
UsingDynamicGuides
You can use Dynamic Guides to place objects in
relation to other objects as you draw them You can
display Dynamic Guides to help you precisely move,
align, and draw objects in relation to other objects.
Dynamic Guides are temporary guidelines that you
can pull from the following snap points in objects:
center, node, quadrant, and text baseline.
The object from the snap point that was used to create the dynamic guide, which helps you position the
object precisely.. You can also display intersecting Dynamic Guides and then place an object at the
intersection. In the above figure the dynamic guide was pulled from a node in the object on the left. The
screen tip next to the node displays the angle of the dynamic guide (0º) The object on the right was
dragged along the dynamic guide and positioned precisely 1.5 inches away from the node that was used
to generate the dynamic guide.
Dynamic Guides contain invisible divisions, called ticks, to which your pointer gravitates. Ticks let you
move objects with precision along a dynamic guide. You can adjust tick spacing to suit your needs, and
you can disable snapping to ticks. You can turn off Dynamic Guides at any time.
ToenableordisableDynamicGuides
Click View Æ Dynamic Guides. A check mark beside the Dynamic Guides command indicates that
Dynamic Guides are enabled. You can toggle Dynamic Guides on and off by pressing Shift + Alt + D.
Tosetdynamicguideoptions
Click View ÆSetup ÆDynamic Guides setup Æ On the Dynamic Guides page of the Options dialog
box, enable angle screen tip/ distance screen tip check boxes:. Æ Type a value in the Tick spacing box
to change the distance between the invisible divisions on the Dynamic Guides Æ In the Guides area,
enable or disable the angle check boxes to choose the angles at which to create the Dynamic Guides Æ
Enable the Extend along segment check box to create Dynamic Guides that are extensions of line
segments.
Angle screen tip: Lets you display or hide the angle of Dynamic Guides. Distance screen tip: lets you
display or hide the distance from the snap point that is used to create a dynamic guide. When you enable
an angle check box, a preview of the dynamic guide appears in the Guides preview window
Fig 2.3 : Dynamic Guides
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
762
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
You can align objects interactively on the drawing
page by using alignment Guides. Alignment Guides
are temporary guidelines that appear when you create,
resize, or move objects in relation to other nearby
objects. While Dynamic Guides provide precise
measurements for creating technical illustrations,
alignment Guides are useful in page layout to align
text or graphic elements quickly and accurately.
Alignment Guides help you align the center of an object
with the center of another object (center to center) or the
edge of an object with the edge of another object (edge to
edge). In addition, you can align the edge of an object with
the center of another object (edge to center).
Alignment Guides appear as an object is moved. If you
want to align an object at a set distance from the edge of
another object, you can set margins for the alignment Guides. After you specify the margins, you can
choose how the edge Guides appear: they can follow either the margins, or both the margins and the
edges of the object. In the above figure Left: Alignment Guides following the margins only (around the
object at the top). Right: Alignment Guides following the margin (vertical guide) and the object’s edge
(horizontal guide)
Alignment Guides are turned off by default. You can easily enable or disable alignment Guides, or
modify their default settings. You can choose whether alignment Guides appear for individual objects in
a group, or for the bounding box of the group as a whole.
ToenableordisablealignmentGuides
Click View ÆAlignment Guides.
You can also enable or disable alignment Guides by clicking Layout menu ÆLayout toolbar or
Window ÆToolbars ÆLayout. You can also enable alignment Guides by pressing Shift + Alt + A.
To modify alignment guide settings: Click View ÆSetup ÆAlignment Guides setup Æ
Toplaceanobjectinrelationtoanotherobject
With Dynamic Guides enabled, select an object Æ Drag the object to an eligible snap point of the target
object Æ When the snap point of the target object becomes highlighted, drag the object along the
dynamic guide to position it.
If you want to move the object by a specific snap point, move the pointer over the snap point until the
snap point becomes highlighted. The eligible snap points: the node, center, quadrant, and text baseline
snap points; appear only when the corresponding snapping modes are activated.
CHANGINGTHEORDEROFOBJECTS
You can change the stacking order of objects on a layer or a page by sending objects to the front or back
of other objects. You can also position objects precisely in the stacking order, as well as reverse the
stacking order of multiple objects.
Using alignment Guides
Fig 2.4 : Alignment Guides
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
763
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
Tomoveanobjectinthestackingorder
Select an object ÆClick Arrange ÆOrder, and then click any one of the following commands
To front of page : moves the selected object in front of all other objects on the page. To back of page:
moves the selected object behind all other objects on the page. To front of layer: moves the selected
object in front of all other objects on the active layer. To back of layer: moves the selected object behind
all other objects on the active layer. Forward one: moves the selected object forward one position. If the
selected object is in front of all other objects on the active layer, it is moved to the layer above. Back
one: moves the selected object behind one position. If the selected object is behind all other objects on
the selected layer, it is moved to the layer below. In front of: moves the selected object in front of the
object that you click in the drawing window. Behind :moves the selected object behind the object that
you click in the drawing window.
An object cannot be moved to a locked (non-editable) layer; instead, it is moved to the closest editable
layer. An Order command is unavailable if the selected object is already positioned in the specified
stacking order.
Toreversetheorderofmultipleobjects
Select the objects Æ Click Arrange Æ Order
Reverse order
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
764
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
CHAPTER 3
WORKING WITH DRAWING TOOLS
DRAWINGLINES
CorelDRAW lets you add lines and brushstrokes by using a variety of techniques and tools. After you
draw lines or apply brushstrokes to lines, you can format them. You can also format the outlines that
surround objects. CorelDRAW provides preset objects that you can spray along a line. You can also
create flow and dimension lines in drawings. Lines, Rectangle, square are the basic shapes of a drawing.
CorelDRAW X6 lets you draw various types of lines like straight line, freehand lines, calligraphic lines
and Bezier lines. The Curve flyout offers a wide variety of tools for drawing lines — whether freehand
or precise, straight or curved!
Freehand tool: lets you draw lines and curves as if you were sketching on a sketch pad. If you make a
mistake while drawing freehand curves, you can erase the unwanted part immediately and continue
drawing. To use freehand tool:
Select freehand tool Æ
Polyline tool : lets you draw freehand lines (with curved and straight segments) as if you were sketching
on a sketch pad. the Polyline tool is easier to use for quickly drawing a complex line that consists of
alternating curved and straight segments.
Select Polyline tool Æto draw straight segment, click where you want to start the line segment and then
click where you want to end. To draw curved segment: click where you want to start the segment and
drag across the drawing page. Æ You can add as many segments as you want. You can also close an
open object by clicking the close curve button on the property bar.
To Draw
Action
Curved Line
Click where you want to start the curved line and drag.
Straight Line
Click where you want to start the line & click where you want the
line to end.
Control the smoothness of a curved
line
Type a value in the Freehand smoothing box on the property
bar. Higher values produce smoother curves.
Reposition a line
Hold down left mouse buttons, and drag the line to a new
position.
Place a copy of a line in the drawing
Hold down the right mouse button, and drag the line to a new
position. Click Copy here
Add line segments to an existing
line
Click the end node of a selected line, and click where you want
the new segment to end
Create a closed shape from two or
more connected lines
In a line that contains two segments, click the end node, and then
click the start node.
You can constrain a line created with the Freehand tool to a predefined angle, called a constrain angle,
by holding down Ctrl while you drag. This feature is useful for drawing straight vertical and horizontal
lines. .
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
765
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
2Ǧpoint line tool: lets you draw a straight two-point line segment. This tool also allows you to create 2
point straight lines, perpendicular 2-point line and tangent 2-point line to objects.
To draw a straight line: Select 2 point line tool Æ point to where you want to start the line and drag to
draw the line.
To draw a perpendicular line: Select 2 point line tool Æ On the property bar, click : Perpendicular 2
point line button Æ click the edge of an object, and drag to where you want the line to end.
If you want to draw a line that is perpendicular to 2 objects, drag to edge of the second object,
and release the mouse button where the perpendicular snap point appears. To extend the line
beyond the 2nd object, hold CTRL key when the perpendicular snap point appears and drag to
where you want the line to end.
To draw a tangent line : Select 2 point line tool Æ On the property bar, click : Tangential 2 point line
button Æ click the edge of a curved segment in an object, and drag to where you want the tangent line to
end.
If you want to draw a line that is tangent to 2 object, drag the edge of the 2nd object and release
the mouse button when the tangent snap point appears. When the quadrant snap points coincides
with tangent snap point, the quadrant snap points appears.
Bézier tool : lets you draw lines one segment at a time by placing each node with precision and
controlling the shape of each curved segment.
Select Bezier tool Æ To draw a curved segment, click where you want to place the 1st node, and the
control handle to where you want to place the next node. Æ Release the mouse button and drag the
control handle to create the curve. To draw a straight segment, click where you want to start the line
segment and click where you want to end it. ÆPress space bar to finish the line.
You can also
Draw
a
curved
segment
followed by a straight segment
Draw a curved segment, double-click the end node, and click where
you want the straight segment to end.
Draw
a
straight
segment
followed by a curved segment
Draw a straight segment. Click the endpoint of the segment, drag to
where you want, and release the mouse button. Drag to draw a curve.
Change curve angle to preset
increments as you draw
While holding down Ctrl, drag a control handle
Pen tool : lets you draw lines one segment (curved or straight) at a time by placing each node with
precision and controlling the shape of each curved segment. When we are using this tool we can preview
the line segments you are drawing.
Select Pen tool ÆTo draw curved segment : click where you want to place the first node and then drag
the control handle to where you need to place next node Ærelease the mouse button and drag the control
handle to create the curve you want. To draw straight segment : click where you want to start the line
segment and click where you want to end it. Æ Double click to finish the line.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
766
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
You can also
Preview a line
while drawing
Enable the Preview mode button in the property bar. Click on the drawing page, and
release the mouse button. Move the mouse, and click to finish the line.
Add a node to a
line
Enable the Automatically add or delete nodes button on the property bar. Point to
where in the line you want to add a node, and click when the pointer changes to the
Add nodes state.
Delete a node
from a line
Point to a node, and click when the pointer changes to the Delete nodes state.
BǦSpline tool: lets you draw curved lines and b splines by setting control points that shape the curve
without breaking it into segments. B-Splines touch the first and last control points and are pulled by the
point.
Select B-Spline tool ÆClick where you want to start the line Æclick to set as many control points as you
need to shape a line. Æ double click to finish the line.
Reshape the line by
using control points
Select the line by using the Shape tool , and reposition the control points to
reshape the line
Float a control point
Select the line by using the Shape tool , click a clamped control point, and
click the Make control point floating button on the property bar
Clamp a control point
Select the line by using the Shape tool , click a floating control point, and click
the Make control point clamped button on the property bar.
Add a control point
Select the line by using the Shape tool , and double-click along a control line.
Delete a control point
Select the line by using the Shape tool , and double-click the control point that
you want to delete
Select multiple control
points
Select the line by using the Shape tool , and hold down Shift while you click
on the control points that you want to select
Smartdrawingtool
The Smart drawing tool lets you use shape recognition to draw straight and curved lines.
3 point curve tool: lets you draw a curve by defining the start, end, and center points Select the 3 point
curve tool Æ click where you want to start the curve, and drag to where you want the curve to end Æ
release the mouse button and click where you want the center of the curve to be. To draw a symmetrical
curve hold shift while dragging. To draw a circular curve hold ctrl while dragging.
DRAWINGRECTANGLESANDSQUARES
CorelDRAW lets you draw rectangles and squares. You can draw a rectangle or square by dragging
diagonally with the Rectangle tool or by specifying the width and
height with the 3-point rectangle tool. The 3-point rectangle tool
lets you quickly draw rectangles at an angle.
You can also draw a rectangle or square with rounded, scalloped
or chamfered corners. You can modify each corner individually or
apply the changes to all corners. In addition, you can specify that
all corners scale relative to the object. You can also specify the
Fig
3.
1: Above : 3-point
rectangle by first drawing its
baseline Below: drawing its
height.
default corner size for drawing rectangles and squares.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
767
¨sÁUÀ 1
Todrawarectangleorsquarebydraggingdiagonally:
Draw a rectangle
In the toolbox, click the Rectangle tool. Drag in the drawing window until the
rectangle is the size you want.
Draw a square
In the toolbox, click the Rectangle tool. Hold down Ctrl, and drag in the drawing
window until the square is the size you want
You can draw a rectangle from its center outward by holding down Shift as you drag. You can also draw
a square from its center outward by holding down Shift + Ctrl as you drag. You can draw a rectangle that
covers the drawing page by double-clicking the Rectangle tool.
Todrawarectanglebyspecifyingheightandwidth
In the toolbox, click the 3-point rectangle tool Æ In the drawing window, point to where you want to
start the rectangle, drag to draw the width, and release the mouse button Æ Move the pointer to draw the
height, and click. Æ To adjust the size of the rectangle, type values in the Object size boxes on the
property bar. Æ To constrain the angle of the baseline to a preset increment, known as constrain angle,
hold down Ctrl as you drag.
Todrawarectangleorsquarewithrounded,scalloped,orchamferedcorners
Click a rectangle or square. Æ Click one of the following buttons on the property bar Æselect rounded
corner/scalloped corner/ chamfered corner Æ Type values in the Corner radius areas on the
property bar. Æ click apply.
Round corner
— produces a curved corner
Scalloped corner
— replaces a corner with an edge that has a curved notch
Chamfered corner
— replaces a corner with a flat edge
You can apply the same changes to all the corners by clicking the edit corners button together on the
property bar. Click the Relative corner scaling button the property bar to disable the scaling of corners
relative to object.
You can also modify the corners of a selected rectangle or square by clicking the Shape tool , clicking a
corner option button on the property bar, then dragging a corner node toward the shape’s center. If you
prefer to modify only one corner, hold down Ctrl, then drag a corner node toward the shape’s center.
To specify the default corner size of drawing rectangles and square : click tools menu Æ options
ÆDouble click toolbox from the workspace list of categories Æclick rectangle tool Æ in the rectangle
corners area, type values in the boxes.
DRAWINGELLIPSES,CIRCLES,ARCS,ANDPIESHAPES
You can draw an ellipse or circle by dragging diagonally with the Ellipse tool, or you can draw an ellipse
by using the 3-point ellipse tool to specify its width and height. The 3-point ellipse tool lets you quickly
create an ellipse at an angle, eliminating the need to rotate the ellipse.
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
768
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
Using the Ellipse tool, you can draw a new arc or pie shape,
or you can draw an ellipse or circle and then change it to an
arc or a pie shape. You can also change the default properties
of new objects that are drawn with the Ellipse tool. For
example, you can set the default properties so that all new
shapes you draw are arcs or pie shapes.
Note: You can draw Ellipse as you draw rectangle
Todrawanarcorapieshape
You can draw an ellipse or a circle from its center outward by holding down Shift as you drag.
To
Command
Draw an arc
In the toolbox, click the Ellipse tool . Click the Arc button on the property bar. Drag in
the drawing window until the arc is the shape you want.
Draw a pie
shape
In the toolbox, click the Ellipse tool . Click the Pie button on the property bar. Drag in
the drawing window until the pie is the shape you want.
To draw an arc, the ellipse or circle must have an outline. You can change the direction of a selected arc
or pie shape by clicking the Change direction button on the property bar. You can constrain the
movement of the node to 15-degree increments by holding down Ctrl as you drag.
DRAWINGPOLYGONSANDSTARS
CorelDRAW lets you draw polygons and two types of stars: perfect and complex. Perfect stars are
traditional-looking stars and can have a fill applied to the entire star shape. Complex stars have
intersecting sides and produce original results with a fill applied. You can modify polygons and stars.
For example, you can change the number of sides on a polygon or the number of points on a star, and you
can sharpen the points of a star. You can also use the Shape tool to reshape polygons and complex stars,
just as you would with any other curve object.
Todrawapolygon
In the toolbox, click the Polygon tool Æ and drag in the drawing window to draw a polygon of required
size . You can draw a polygon from its center by holding down Shift as you drag. You can draw a
symmetrical polygon by holding down Ctrl as you drag.
Fig 3. 2: Above :3-point ellipse by first
drawing its baseline Below: drawing its
height.
Fig 3. 3: Left : Drawing arc Right : Drawing Star and polygon
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
769
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
Tomodifyapolygon
To
Do the following
Change the number of sides
of a polygon
Select a polygon, type a value in the Points or sides box on the property
bar, and press Enter
Reshape a polygon into a star
Select a polygon, click the Shape tool , and drag a node on the polygon
until the star is the shape you want.
Todrawastar
To
Do the following
Draw a perfect
star
In the toolbox, click the Star tool , and drag in the drawing window until the star is
the size you want.
Draw a complex
star
In the toolbox, click the Complex star tool
, and drag in the drawing window
until the star is the size you want.
You can draw a star from its center by holding down Shift as you drag. You can draw a symmetrical star
by holding down Ctrl as you drag
Tomodifyastar
To
Do the following
Change the number of points on
a star
Select a star, type a value in the Points or sides box on the property
bar, and press Enter.
Sharpen a star’s points
Select a star, and type a value in the Sharpness box on the property
bar.
Reshape a star
Select a star, click the Shape tool
, and drag a node on the star.
When you use the Shape tool to reshape a perfect star, the node movement is constrained. Also, on
perfect stars, you cannot add or delete nodes, nor can you convert line segments to curves.
DRAWINGSPIRALS
You can draw two types of spirals: symmetrical and logarithmic. Symmetrical spirals expand evenly
so that the distance between each revolution is equal. Logarithmic spirals expand with increasingly
larger distances between revolutions. You can set the rate by which a logarithmic spiral expands outward.
To draw a spiral: select the spiral tool Æ type a value in Spiral revolution box on property bar Æ In
property bar select the type of spiral (Symmetrical/Logarithmic spiral) Æ If you want to change the
amount by which the spiral expands as it moves outward, move the Spiral expansion factor slider Æ
Drag diagonally in the drawing window until the spiral is of required size.
Fig : 3.4 : Left to right: The Shape tool was used to change a
polygon into a star that can be shaped as a curve object. The line
segments of the star were then converted to curves and adjusted to
produce the starfish shape
Fig : 3.5 :Drawing Spirals
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
770
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
Note : You can draw a spiral from its center outward by holding down Shift as you drag. You can also
draw a spiral with even horizontal and vertical dimensions by holding Ctrl key as you drag.
DRAWINGPREDEFINEDSHAPES
Using the Perfect Shapes collection, you can draw
predefined shapes. Certain shapes specifically basic
shapes, arrow shapes, banner shapes, and callout
shapes — contain diamond-shaped handles that are
called glyphs. You can drag a glyph to modify the
appearance of a shape. You can Add text to the
inside or outside of the shape. For example, you
might want to put a label inside a flowchart symbol
or a callout.
In the toolbox, click one of the following toolsÆ Basic shape tools/ Arrow shapes/ Flowchart shapes/
banner shapes/ callout shapes Æ Open the Perfect Shapes picker on the property bar, and click a shape.
Æ Drag in the drawing window until the shape is of required size you want.
Like other shapes, shapes that are drawn with a Perfect Shapes tool can be modified.
Select a shape that contains a glyph Æ Drag a glyph until you achieve the shape you want.
Note: The right-angle, heart, lightning bolt, explosion, and flowchart shapes do not contain glyphs
Toaddtexttoapredefinedshape:
Click the Text tool Æ Position the cursor inside the shape’s outline until it changes to a text cursor Æ
Type inside the shape, choose a font, and format the text.
DRAWINGBYUSINGSHAPERECOGNITION
You can use the Smart drawing tool to
draw freehand strokes that can be
recognized and converted to basic shapes.
Rectangles and ellipses are translated to
native CorelDRAW objects; trapezoids
and parallelograms are translated to
Perfect Shapes objects; lines, triangles,
squares, diamonds, circles, and arrows are translated to curve objects. If an object is not converted to a
shape, it is smoothed. Objects and curves drawn with shape recognition are editable. You can set the
amount of time to elapse between making a pen stroke and the implementation of shape recognition. For
example, if the timer is set to one second and you draw a circle, shape recognition takes effect one
second after you draw the circle. You can make corrections as you draw. You can also change the
thickness and line style of a shape that was drawn by using shape recognition.
Fig : 3.6: Using the Shape tool, you can
drag a glyph to alter a shape.
Fig : 3.7: Drawing shape using shape recognition
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
771
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
Todrawashapeorlinebyusingshaperecognition
Click the smart drawing tool ÆChoose a recognition level from the Shape recognition level list box on
the property box Æ choose a smoothing level from the smart smoothing level list box on the property
bar ÆDraw a shape or line in the drawing window.
Note : The Smart drawing tool property bar is displayed only when the Smart drawing tool is selected
Tosetshaperecognitiondelay
Goto Tools menu Æoptions Æ in the workspace list of categories select smart drawing tool Æ move the
drawing assistance delay slider. (min delay is 10 ms; max is 2 sec)
Tomakeacorrectionwhileusingshaperecognition
Before the delay recognition period has elapsed, hold down Shift, and drag over the area you want to
correct. You must start erasing the shape or line from the last point drawn
Tochangetheoutlinethicknessofanobjectdrawnwithshaperecognition
Click the Smart drawing tool ÆClick the shapeÆ From the outline width list box on the property bar,
choose an outline thickness.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
772
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
CHAPTER 4
EXPLORING CROP TOOLS
CROPTOOL
Cropping lets you quickly remove unwanted areas in objects and imported graphics, eliminating the need
to ungroup objects, break linked groups apart, or convert objects to curves. You can crop vector objects
and bitmaps. When cropping objects, you define a rectangular area (cropping area) that you want to keep.
Object portions outside the cropping area are removed. You can specify the exact position and size of the
cropping area, and you can rotate and resize it. You can crop only selected objects without affecting other
objects in a drawing, or you can crop all objects on the drawing page.
To crop objects: Select the object you want to crop Æselect crop tool Ædrag to define a cropping area
Æ double click inside the cropping area.
You can also
Specify the exact position of the
cropping area
Type values in the Crop position boxes on the property bar, and
press Enter.
Specify the exact size of the cropping
area
Type values in the Crop size boxes on the property bar, and
press Enter.
Rotate the cropping area
Type values in the Angle of rotation box.
Remove the cropping area
Click the Clear crop marquee button.
KNIFETOOL
You can split a bitmap or vector object in two and reshape it by redrawing its path. You can split a closed
object along a straight or jagged line. CorelDRAW lets you choose between splitting an object into two
objects, or leaving it as one object composed of two or more sub paths. You can specify whether you
want to close paths automatically or keep them open. The knife tool snaps upright when positioned
properly.
Select Knife toolÆ Position the Knife tool over the object’s outline where you want to start cutting. Æ
click the outline to start cutting Æ position the knife over the objects outline where you want to stop
cutting and click again.
You can also
Split an object along a
freehand line
Point to where you want to start the cut, and drag to where you want it to
end.
Split an object along a
Bézier line
Hold down Shift, click where you want to start cutting an object, drag the
control handle to where you want to position the next node, and click.
Continue clicking to add more straight segments to the line. If you want to
add a curved segment, point to where you want to place the node and drag
to shape the curve. If you want to constrain the line by 15-degree
increments, hold down Shift + Ctrl.
Split an object into two
subpaths
Click the Keep as one object button
on the property bar.
Split
an
object
while
keeping only one of its
parts
Click the object’s outline where you want to start the cut, and point to
where you want the cut to end. Press Tab once or twice until only the part
of the object that you want to keep is selected, and then click.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
773
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
EraserTool
To erase a portions of an object. The Eraser tool works just like a pencil eraser, removing any part of the
image over which you click and drag. Erasing automatically closes any affected paths and converts the
object to curves. If you erase connecting lines, CorelDRAW creates sub paths rather than individual
objects
Note : You can change the size of the eraser nib by changing the eraser thickness box on the property bar
and you can change the shape of the eraser nib by clicking the eraser shape button the property bar.
Select an object Æ select eraser tool Æ drag over the object
VirtualLineSegment
You can delete multiple line segments at one time by dragging the points to enclose or intersect all target
segment. You can also weld line segments. The Virtual segment delete tool snaps upright when
positioned properly. If you want to delete multiple line segments at one time, click the pointer to drag a
marquee around all line segments you want to delete. The Virtual segment delete tool does not work on
linked groups such as drop shadows, text, or images. Select the Virtual segment delete toolÆ Move the
pointer to the line segment you want to delete. Æ Click the line segment.
CROPPINGBITMAPS
Cropping removes unwanted areas of a bitmap. To crop a bitmap into a rectangular shape, you can use
the Crop tool. To crop a bitmap into an irregular shape, you can use the Shape tool and the Crop bitmap
command.
Click the Shape toolÆ.Select a bitmap. Æ Drag the corner nodes to reshape the bitmap. Æ If you want
to add a node, double-click the node boundary (dotted line) by using the Shape tool where you want the
node to appear. Æ Click BitmapsÆ Crop bitmap.
STRAIGHTENINGBITMAPS
This feature is useful for straightening photos that were taken or scanned at an angle. You can rotate an
image by typing a rotation angle. You can specify a custom rotation angle from -15 to 15 degrees.
If you want to change the orientation of the image before straightening it, you can start by rotating the
image 90 degrees clockwise and 90 degrees counterclockwise. A grid is displayed in the preview window
to help you straighten the image. You can make more precise adjustments by controlling the cell size of
the grid. By default, the straightened image is cropped to the cropping area that is displayed in the
preview window. The final image has the same aspect ratio as the original image, but it has smaller
dimensions. However, you can preserve the original width and height of the image by cropping and
resampling the image.
Original image (left); straightened and cropped image (right)
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
774
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
You can also produce an image at an angle by disabling cropping and then using the Crop tool to crop the
image in the drawing window.
Select an image. Æ Click Bitmaps Æ Straighten image. Æ Move the Rotate image slider, or type a
value between 15 and -15 in the Rotate image box. If necessary, move the Grid slider to adjust the size
of the grid cells. Æ To crop and straighten the image, enable the Crop image check box.
You can also
Change the grid color
Choose a color from the Grid color picker.
Align an image area with a gridline
Using the Pan tool
, drag the image until the area is aligned
with the gridline.
You can use the Pan tool only after you zoom in on the image.
Rotate the image 90 degrees in either
direction
Click the Rotate counterclockwise
button or the Rotate
clockwise button
.
Hide or display the grid
Disable or enable the Grid check box.
Adjust the rotation angle by 0.1-
degree increments
Click in the Rotate image box, and press the Up arrow or Down
arrow key.
Reset the image to its original
orientation
Click Reset.
Zoom in or out
Using the Zoom in
or Zoom out
tool, click in the
preview window.
Fit an image in the preview window
Click the Zoom to fit
button.
Display an image at its actual size
Click the 100%
button.
USINGPICKTOOLFORSELECTINGOBJECTS
Before you can change an object, you must select it. You can select visible objects, objects that are
hidden from view by other objects, and a single object in a group or a nested group.
To
Do the following
Select an object
Click the Pick tool , and then click an object.
Select multiple objects
Click the Pick tool , hold down Shift, and click each object that you
want to select.
Marquee select objects by using a
rectangular selection area
Click the Pick tool , and drag around the objects that you want to
select.
To constrain the selection area to a square, hold down Ctrl while
dragging.
Marquee select objects by using a
selection area of irregular shape
Click the Freehand pick tool , and drag around the objects that you
want to select.
Objects that are only partially enclosed by the selection area are not
selected.
To select objects that are only partially enclosed by the selection
area, hold down Alt while dragging.
To constrain the selection area to a rectangular shape, hold
down Ctrl while dragging
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
775
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
Select Pick tool , hold down Shift, and click each object that you want to include in the selection
groupÆ Press Ctrl + a number from 0 to 9 Æ The number you pressed is associated with the new
selection group.
Todeselectobjects
To
Do the following
Deselect all objects
Click the Pick tool , and click a blank space in the drawing
window.
Deselect a single object among
multiple selected objects
Hold down Shift, click the Pick tool, and then click the
object.
Tochangehowunfilledobjectsareselected
Click Tools ÆOptions Æ In the Workspace list of categories, click Toolbox Æ Pick tool. Æ Enable or
disable the Treat all objects as filled check box.
Enabling the check box lets you select an unfilled object by clicking on its outline or the area enclosed by
the outline; disabling the check box lets you select an unfilled object by clicking only on its outline.
FREEHANDPICKTOOL
The Freehand pick tool lets you select objects by using a freehand selection marquee
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
776
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
CHAPTER 5
WORKING WITH IMAGES
COPYING,DUPLICATING,ANDDELETINGOBJECTS
CorelDRAW provides you with several ways to copy objects. When you no longer need an object, you
can delete it.
Cutting,copying,andpasting
You can cut or copy an object to place it on the Clipboard and paste it into a drawing or another
application. Cutting an object places it on the Clipboard and removes it from the drawing. Copying an
object places it on the Clipboard but keeps the original in the drawing.
To cut or copy an object : Select an object. Æ Click Edit, and click cut / copy Æ place the cursor
where you need to place the text Æ go to Edit menu ÆPaste.
Duplicating
Duplicating an object places a copy directly in the drawing window and does not use the Clipboard.
Duplicating is faster than copying and pasting. Also, when duplicating an object, you can specify the
distance between the duplicate and the original object along the x and y axes. This distance is known as
the offset.
To Duplicate an object: Select an object. Æ Click Edit, and click duplicate
Copyingobjectsataspecifiedposition
You can create multiple copies of objects simultaneously, while specifying their position, without using
the Clipboard. For example, you can distribute object copies horizontally, to the left or right of the
original object; or you can distribute copies of objects vertically, below or above the original object. You
can specify the spacing between copies of objects, or you can specify the offset at which copies of
objects are created in relation to each other
Select an object Æ goto edit menu Æ step and repeat Æ type a value in the number of copies box Æclick
apply.
Note : You can distribute copies of objects horizontally, vertically and offset all copies of objects by a
specified distance.
Tocreateacopyofobjectsquickly
In the toolbox, click the Pick tool Æ press the Spacebar while moving, rotating or transforming the
object.
Tocopysize,position,orrotationfromoneobjecttoanother
In the toolbox, click the Attributes eyedropper tool Æ Click the Transformations flyout on the
property bar, and enable size/ rotation/ position check boxes: Æ Click the object whose transformations
you want to copy Æ The Attributes eyedropper tool automatically switches to the Apply object
attributes mode Æ Click the object to which you want to apply the copied transformations.
COPYINGOBJECTPROPERTIES,TRANSFORMATIONS,ANDEFFECTS
CorelDRAW lets you copy attributes from one object to another. You can copy object properties such as
outline, fill, and text properties. You can copy object transformations such as sizing, rotating, and
positioning. You can also copy effects applied to an object.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
777
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
Tocopyfill,outline,ortextpropertiesfromoneobjecttoanother
In the toolbox, click the Attributes eyedropper toolÆ Click the Properties flyout on the property bar,
and enable outline/fill/text Æ Click the object whose properties you want to copy. Æ The Attributes
eyedropper tool automatically switches to the Apply object attributes mode Æ Click the object to
which you want to apply the copied properties.
FINDINGANDREPLACINGOBJECTS
You can use the Find and Replace wizards to locate and edit objects in a large drawing.
Using search criteria that you specify, the Find wizard Guides you step-by-step when you need to find
and select objects in a drawing. The search criteria can include object type and its related properties, fill
and outline properties, vector effects applied to objects, or the name of an object or style. For example,
you can search for and select all rectangles with rounded corners and without fill, or all text on a path.
You can also search for objects that contain the same properties as a selected object. You can change the
search criteria in the middle of a search. You can also save search criteria for later use.
The Replace wizard Guides you through the process of finding objects that contain the properties you
specify and then replacing those properties with others. For example, you can replace all object fills of a
certain color with fills of a different color. You can also replace color models and palettes, outline
properties, and text attributes, such as font and font size. You can also search for specific words and
replace them with other words
Tofindandselectobjects
Click Edit Æ Find and replace(Ctrl + F) ÆFind objects Æ Follow the instructions in the Find wizard.
If you save an object search, you can reactivate the last search you performed by clicking Edit ÆFind
and replace ÆRecent search
To replace object properties
Click Edit
Find and replace
Replace objects Æ Follow the instructions in the Replace wizard
INSERTINGBARCODES
The Barcode wizard in CorelDRAW lets you add bar codes to drawings. A bar code is a group of bars,
spaces, and sometimes numbers that is designed to be scanned and read into computer memory. Bar
codes are most commonly used to identify merchandise, inventory, and documents. The Barcode wizard
Guides you through the process of inserting a bar code. If you need additional information at any step,
you can consult the Help in the Barcode wizard.
To insert a bar code
Click Edit
Insert barcode Æ Follow the instructions in the Barcode wizard.
A bar code is inserted into a drawing as an object
CREATING,EDITING,ANDDELETINGSYMBOLS
Symbols are objects that are defined once and can be referenced many times in a drawing. You can have
multiple instances of a symbol in a drawing with little impact on file size. Symbols make editing a
drawing quicker and easier, as changes made to a symbol are automatically inherited by all instances
To create a symbol: Select an object or multiple objects. Click Edit
Symbol
New symbol Æ Type
a name for the symbol in the Create new symbol dialog box.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
778
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
To edit a symbol : In the Symbol manager docker, choose a symbol from the list Æ To open the
Symbol manager docker, click Edit
Symbol
Symbol manager Æ Click the Edit symbol button Æ
Modify the objects on the drawing page Æ Click the Finish editing object tab in the bottom-left corner
of the drawing window.
To delete a symbol: In the Symbol manager docker, choose a symbol from the list Æ Click the Delete
symbol button When you delete a symbol, all instances of the symbol are removed from the drawing.
Tomakealinkedsymbolinternal
Select a symbol in the drawing window Æ Click Edit
Symbol
Break link Æ If there are other
instances of the symbol in the drawing, you are given the choice to break the link to all instances. If you
do, the internal symbol will then apply to all the instances.
CLONINGOBJECTS
When you clone an object, you create a copy of
an object that is linked to the original. Any
changes you make to the original object are
reflected automatically in the clone. Changes
you make to the clone are not automatically
reflected in the original, however. You can
remove changes made to the clone by reverting to the original. Cloning lets you modify multiple copies
of an object simultaneously by changing the master object. The object on the left was cloned twice.
Different fill and outline properties were applied to the clones. The clone on the right was also reshaped
Tocloneanobject
Select an object. ÆGoto edit menu Æ clone.
You can also : Select the master object of a clone by right clicking the clone and click Select master.
Select the clone objects of a master by right clicking the master and click Select clones.
Note : You can clone a master object multiple times, but you cannot clone a clone
POSITIONINGOBJECTS
You can position objects by dragging them to a new location, by nudging, or by specifying their
horizontal and vertical coordinates. Nudging lets you move an object in increments by pressing the
Arrow keys. The increment value is known as “nudge distance.” Micro-nudging lets you move an
object by a fraction of the nudge distance. Super-nudging lets you move an object by a multiple of the
nudge distance. By default, you can nudge objects in 0.1-inch increments, but you can change this
increment value to suit your needs. You can also change micro-nudge and super-nudge values.
To position an object, you can set horizontal and vertical coordinates that are relative to the center anchor
point, or other anchor point, of the object. You can also move an object to another page.
ToMoveanobject
Select an object Æ Point to the center of the bounding box Æ the position cursor appears, drag the object
to a new position in the drawing.
Fig 5.1 : Cloning an object
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
779
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
You can move an object to another page by
dragging the object over a page number tab at the
bottom of the document window and then
dragging the object into the document window
Tomoveanobjectwhiledrawing
Start drawing a shape such as a rectangle, ellipse, or polygon Æ Hold down the right mouse button
without releasing the left mouse button, and drag the unfinished object to its new position Æ Release the
right mouse button, and continue drawing .
To nudge an object
To
Do the following
Nudge a selected object by the nudge distance
Press an Arrow key.
Nudge a selected object by a fraction of the nudge distance
(micro-nudge)
Hold down Ctrl, and press an Arrow
key.
Nudge a selected object by a multiple of the nudge distance
(super-nudge)
Hold down Shift, and press an Arrow
key.
To set nudge distance: Click Tools ÆOptions Æ In the Document list of categories, click Rulers Æ
Type a value in the Nudge box ÆType super nudge/micro nudge .
You can also set the nudge distance by deselecting all objects and typing a value in the Nudge distance
box on the property bar. To save the new nudge distances to use in new drawings, click Tools ÆSave
settings as default
Topositionanobjectbyxandycoordinates
Select an object Æ If you want to change the object origin, click a point on the Object origin button on
the property bar. Æ Type values in x and y to position the object in x and y axis. The x and y values
specify the exact position of the object originÆ Press Enter
The object origin, also known as “anchor point” or “reference point,” can be the center of an object or
any one of the object’s selection handles. The object origin remains stationary when an object is
positioned by typing values in the x and y boxes on the property bar.
Topositionanobjectbychanginganchorpoints
Select an object. Æ Click Window
Dockers
Transformations
Position Æ Disable the Relative
position check box in the Transformation docker Æspecify H and V values for the position of an
object along the horizontal and vertical axis Æ Enable the check box that corresponds to the anchor point
that you want to set Æ click apply
By default, the point of origin (0,0) is at the lower-left corner of the drawing page When you enable the
Relative position check box on the Transformation docker, the position of the center anchor point is
identified as 0,0 in the H and V boxes. When you specify a different position in the H and V boxes, the
values represent a change from the current position as measured from the center anchor point of the
object.
Fig 5.2 : Moving an object
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
780
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
GROUPINGOBJECTS
When you group two or more objects, they are
treated as a single unit but retain their individual
attributes. Grouping lets you apply the same
formatting, properties, and other changes to all
the objects within the group at the same time. In
addition, grouping helps prevent accidental
changes to the position of an object in relation to
other objects. You can also create nested
groups by grouping together existing groups.
You can add objects to or remove objects from a group. You can also edit a single object in a group
without ungrouping the objects. If you want to edit multiple objects in a group at the same time, you must
first ungroup the objects. If a group contains nested groups, you can ungroup all objects in the nested
groups simultaneously.
To group an object: Select an objects Æ goto arrange menu Æ group.
You can select objects from different layers and group them; however, after objects are grouped, they
reside on the same layer and are stacked on top of one another. You can create a nested group by
selecting two or more groups of objects and clicking Arrange ÆGroup. You can also group objects by
dragging an object in the Object manager docker over another object. If the Object manager docker is
not open, click Window ÆDockersÆObject manager. You can also group objects by clicking the
Group button on the property bar
Toaddanobjecttoagroup
In the Object manager docker, drag the object to the group. If the Object manager docker is not open,
click WindowÆ Dockers ÆObject manager
Toremoveanobjectfromagroup
In the Object manager docker, drag an object outside the group. If the Object manager docker is not
open, click WindowÆ Dockers ÆObject manager. To delete an object in a group, select the object in
the object list, and click Edit ÆDelete
Toeditanobjectinagroup
Click the Pick tool Æ Hold down Ctrl, and click an object in a group to select it Æ Edit the object. You
can also select an object in a group by clicking the object in the Object manager docker. If the Object
manager docker is not open, click WindowÆ DockersÆ Object manager
Toungroupobjects
Select one or more groups Æ Click Arrange, Æ Select Ungroup / Ungroup All.
Ungroup — breaks a group into individual objects, or a nested group into multiple groups. Ungroup all
— breaks one or more groups into individual objects, including objects within nested groups. Choosing
Ungroup all also ungroups all nested groups. To preserve nested groups, select Ungroup.
Fig 5.3 : Grouping an object
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
781
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
LOCKINGOBJECTS
Locking an object prevents you from accidentally moving, sizing, transforming, filling, or otherwise
changing it. You can lock single, multiple, or grouped objects. To change a locked object, you need to
unlock it first. You can unlock one object at a time, or all locked objects at the same time.
Tolockanobject
Select an object, and click Arrange ÆLock object.
You cannot lock linked objects, such as blends, contours, or text inside an object. You also cannot lock
objects within groups or linked groups. You can also lock an object by right-clicking it and then clicking
Lock object
Tounlockobjects
Select a locked object, and click Arrange ÆUnLock object / Unlock all objects. You can also unlock
an object by right-clicking it and then clicking Unlock object
COMBININGOBJECTS
Combining two or more objects creates a single object with common
fill and outline attributes. You can combine rectangles, ellipses,
polygons, stars, spirals, graphs, or text so that they are converted to a
single curve object. If you need to modify the attributes of an object
that has been combined from separate objects, you can break apart the
combined object. You can extract a subpath from a combined object to
create two separate objects. You can also weld two or more objects to
create a single object. in the fig: 4.4 The two objects (left) are
combined to create a single object (right). The new object has the fill
and outline properties of the last object selected.
To combine objects
Combined text objects become larger blocks of text. You can also
combine selected objects by clicking the Combine button on the
property bar. You can close open lines in a combined object by
clicking Arrange ÆJoin curves and choosing settings in the Join
curves docker.
Select the objects to be combined. Æ Click Arrange ÆCombine
To break apart a combined object
If you break apart a combined object that contains
artistic text, the text breaks apart into lines first, and
then into words. Paragraph text breaks into separate
paragraphs.
Select a combined object Æ Click Arrange
Break
curve apart.
To extract a subpath from a combined object
Click the Shape tool , and select a segment, node, or
group of nodes on a combined object Æ Click the Extract subpath button on the property bar Æ After
you extract the subpath, the fill and outline properties of the path are removed from the combined object.
Fig 5.4 : Combining an object
Fig 5.5 : Align and Distribute an
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
782
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
ALIGNINGANDDISTRIBUTINGOBJECTS
CorelDRAW lets you precisely align and distribute objects in a drawing. You can align objects with each
other and with parts of the drawing page, such as the center, edges, and grid. When you align objects
with objects, you can line them up by their centers or by their edges. You can align multiple objects
horizontally or vertically with the center of the drawing page.
Single or multiple objects can also be arranged along the edge of the page and to the nearest point on a
grid. Distributing objects automatically adds spacing between them based on their width, height, and
center points. You can distribute objects so that their center points or selected edges (for example, top
or right) appear at equal intervals. You can also distribute objects so that there is equal space between
them. You can distribute objects over the extent of the bounding box surrounding them or over the entire
drawing page.
Toalignanobjectwithanotherobject
If you select the objects one at a time, the last object selected is the reference point for aligning the other
objects. If you marquee select the objects before you align them, the object that is positioned in the
upper-left corner of the selection is used as a reference.
Select the objects Æ Click Arrange
Align and distribute
Align and distribute Æ Click the align
tab Æ Specify vertical alignment, horizontal alignment, or both. Æ From the Align objects to list box,
choose Active objects
To align objects along the vertical axis, enable the Left, Center, or Right check box To align objects
along the horizontal axis, enable the Top, Center, or Bottom check box.
If you are aligning text objects, choose one of the following from the For text source objects use list
box:
First-line baseline — uses the baseline of the first line of text as a reference point. Last-line baseline —
uses the baseline of the last line of text as a reference point. Bounding box — uses the bounding box of a
text object as a reference point
You can also align objects by clicking Arrange ÆAlign and distribute and clicking any of the first six
alignment commands. The letter next to a command name indicates the keyboard shortcut that you can
use to align objects. You can also open the Align and distribute dialog box by selecting the objects and
clicking the Align and distribute button on the property bar.
Todistributeobjects
Select the objects Æ Click Arrange ÆAlign and distribute ÆAlign and distribute. Æ Click the
Distribute tab Æ
To distribute the objects horizontally, enable one of the following options from the top-right row: Left
— evenly spaces the left edges of the objects. Center — evenly spaces the center points of the objects.
Spacing — places equal intervals between the selected objects Right — evenly spaces the right edges of
the objects
To distribute the objects vertically, enable one of the following options from the column on the left:
Top — evenly spaces the top edges of the objects. Center — evenly spaces the center points of the
objects. Spacing — places equal intervals between the selected objects. Bottom — evenly spaces the
bottom edges of the objects
To indicate the area over which the objects are distributed, enable one of the following options
Extent of selection — distributes the objects over the area of the bounding box surrounding them.
Extent of page — distributes the objects over the drawing page
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
783
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
Fig : 5.6 : Top row: Options for distributing objects horizontally. 1) The Left option evenly spaces the left edges. 2) The
Center option evenly spaces the center points. Bottom row: Options for distributing objects vertically. 3) The Top option
evenly spaces the top edges. 4) The Center option evenly spaces the center points.
SNAPPINGOBJECTS
When you move or draw an object, you can snap it to another object in a drawing. You can snap an
object to various snap points on the target object. When you move the pointer close to a snap point, the
snap point becomes highlighted, which identifies it as the pointer’s snapping target.
ToSnapobjects
Select the object that you want to snap to the target object Æ Move the pointer over the object until the
snap point becomes highlighted. Drag the object close to the target object until the snap point on the
target object becomes highlighted
To snap an object as you draw it, drag in the drawing window until the snap point in the target object
becomes highlighted.
USINGCURVEOBJECTS
A curve object has nodes and control
handles, which you can use to change the
object’s shape. A curve object can be any
shape, including a straight or curved line.
An object’s nodes are the small squares
that appear along the object’s outline. The
line between two nodes is called a
segment. Segments can be curved or
straight. Each node has a control handle
for each curved segment connected to it.
Control handles help you adjust the curve
Fig 5.7 : Components of a curve: control handles,
segments, nodes
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
784
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
of a segment.
Curve objects created in CorelDRAW follow a path that gives them their defining shape. A path can be
open (for example, a line) or closed (for example, an ellipse) and can sometimes include subpaths. Most
objects that are added to a drawing are not curve objects, with the exception of spirals, freehand lines,
and Bézier lines. Therefore, if you want to customize the shape of an object or text object, it is
recommended that you convert it to a curve object
To convert an object to curves : Select the object Æ Click Arrange menu ÆConvert to curves Æ
You can convert artistic text to curves so that you can shape individual characters. Bitmaps cannot be
converted to curve objects.
Adding,removing,joining,andaligningnodes
When you add nodes, you increase the number of segments
and, therefore, the amount of control you have over the
shape of the object. You can delete selected nodes to
simplify an object’s shape.
When curve objects contain many nodes, it is difficult to
edit and output them to plotter and other devices. You can
have the number of nodes in a curve object reduced
automatically. Reducing the number of nodes removes
overlapping nodes and can smooth a curve object. This feature
is especially useful for reducing the number of nodes in
objects imported from other applications. You can join the
start and end nodes of an open path such as a line to create a
closed object..
Toaddordeleteanode
To
Do the following
Add a node
In the toolbox, click the Shape tool, select a curve object, and double-click where you
want to add a node.
Delete
a
node
In the toolbox, click the Shape tool, select a curve object, and double-click a node.
Toreducethenumberofnodesinacurveobject
Select shape tool ÆTo reduce the number of nodes in the entire object: click the Select all nodes button
on property bar. To reduce the number of nodes in a part of a curve object, marquee select the part you
want to change. ÆClick Reduce nodes on the property bar to have overlapping and redundant nodes are
automatically removed. Or move the curve smoothness slider to control the number of nodes that are
removed. Removing many nodes can reshape the curve object.
Note : You can close multiple subpaths in an object by clicking Arrange ÆJoin curves and choosing
settings in the Join curves docker.
To join the end nodes of a single subpath: Select shape tool Æ click a sub path Æ click the close curve
button on the property bar.
To join the nodes of multiple subpaths: Select shape tool Æpress shift and click a node from each
subpath Æ click the extend curve to close button on the property bar.
Note : If you want to join nodes from separate curve objects, you must first combine them into a single
curve object, and then join the end nodes of the new subpaths.
Fig 5.8 : Reducing the number of nodes to
smooth a curve object
Fig 5.9 : Aligning nodes horizontally
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
785
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
To align Nodes: Select shape tool Æ select a curve object Æ press shift and select the nodes you want to
align Æ click the align nodes button on the property bar.
TOTRIMANOBJECT
Select the source object Æpress shift and click the target object Ægoto Arrange menu Æshaping
Ætrim.
To Trim front or back objects : Marquee select the source and target objects. Æ click arrange
ÆshapingÆ and click front minus back(removes the back object from the front one)/ back minus front
(removes the front object from the back one)
ToTrimoverlappingareasamongobjects
Marquee select the objects you want to trimÆ goto arrange menu Æshaping Æsimplify.
WELDINGANDINTERSECTINGANOBJECT
You can create irregular shapes by welding and intersecting objects. You can weld or intersect almost
any object, including clones, objects on different layers, and single objects with intersecting lines.
However, you cannot weld or intersect paragraph text, dimension lines, or masters of clones.
WELDING/INTERSECTING:
Select the source object Æpress shift and click the target object Ægoto Arrange menu Æshaping
ÆWeld/Intersect.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
786
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
CHAPTER 6
WORKING WITH TEXT
ADDINGANDMANIPULATINGTEXT
CorelDRAW provides multiple ways to add and manipulate text (also known as ‘type’). You can create
two types of text objects: artistic text and paragraph text. Artistic text is useful for adding a single word
or a short line of text. Paragraph text is suitable for creating text-intensive documents, such as newsletters
or brochures. You can change the position and appearance of text. For example, you can fit text to a path,
wrap text around objects, or rotate text. You can also format the appearance of characters and paragraphs.
Importingandpastingtext
You can import text in a new or existing document. This allows you to type text in a word processor and
then add it to a CorelDRAW document. CorelDRAW supports the following text file formats: ANSI
Text (TXT), Microsoft Word Document (DOC) files, Microsoft Word Open XML Document (DOCX)
files, WordPerfect file (WPD) Rich Text Format (RTF) files.
Toimporttextinadocument
Using the Text tool
, position the cursor in the text frame where you want to import the text. Æ Click
File ÆImport Æ Choose file Æ click import. Æ In the Importing/Pasting text dialog box select any
maintain fonts and formatting/ maintain formatting only / discard fonts and formatting.
If you want to apply CMYK black to the imported black text, enable the Force CMYK black check box.
ADDINGARTISTICTEXT
Artistic text is useful for adding single words or short lines
of text, such as headlines, to a document. You can then
apply a wide range of effects to the artistic text, such as
drop shadows or a contour. You can add artistic text
along an open or closed path or fit existing artistic to a
path. In addition, you can assign hyperlinks to text
To add artistic text
Using the Text tool , click anywhere on the drawing
page, and type.
You can convert artistic text to paragraph text by
selecting the artistic text using the Pick tool and then
clicking Text ÆConvert to paragraph text.
Addingparagraphtext
You add paragraph text in a document by using text frames. Paragraph text, also known as “block text,”
is generally reserved for larger bodies of text that have greater formatting requirements. You can insert a
text frame directly in the drawing window. You can also place text inside a graphic object, which
increases the number of different shapes that you can use as text frames. You can create a text frame
from a closed object and then type text inside the frame. You can separate the frame from the object at
any time, so that you can modify them independently. You can convert a text frame back to an object.
Fig 6.1: Artistic text
Fig 6.2: Adding paragraph text inside
graphic object
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
787
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
If you want to see the layout of your
document before you add the final
content, you can fill the text frames
with temporary placeholder text. You
can also use custom placeholder text.
By default, text frames have a fixed
size, regardless of how much text you
add to them. You can increase or
decrease the frame size, so that the text
fits in the frame. If you add more text than
a frame allows, the text continues past the
lower-right border of the text frame, but
remains hidden. The color of the frame
turns
red to alert you that there's
additional text. You can fix the overflow
manually by increasing the frame size,
adjusting the text size, adjusting the column
width, or linking the frame to another text
frame.
You can also choose to automatically adjust the point size of text so that it fits neatly inside a frame. If
the text overflows, CorelDRAW automatically decreases the point size; if you have little text, the
application expands it to fill the frame. You can also change the formatting of selected paragraph text
frames and any frames to which they are linked
Toaddparagraphtext
Click the Text tool Æ Drag in the drawing window to size the paragraph text frame Æ Type in the text
frame.
Set text frame column
width
to
adjust
automatically to fit the
text
Click Window ÆDockers ÆObject properties. In the Object Properties
docker, click the Frame button to display the frame-related options. In the
Frame area, click the Columns buttons. In the Column settings dialog box,
enable the Automatically adjust frame width option.
Apply
a
background
color to a text frame
Open the Background color picker, and click a color.
Set text frame column
width
to
adjust
automatically to fit the
text
Click Window ÆDockersÆObject properties. In the Object Properties
docker, click the Frame button to display the frame-related options. In the
Frame area, click the Columns buttons. In the Column settings dialog box,
enable the Automatically adjust frame width option.
You can use the Pick tool to adjust the size of a paragraph text frame. Click the text frame, and drag any
selection handle
Fig 6.3 : Text frame with overflown text.
Fig 6.4 : text adjustment
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
788
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
Tocreateaframefromanobject
Using the Pick tool , click the object in which you want to insert a text frame. Or Using a shape tool,
draw a closed shape. Æ Select the object, and click Text ÆParagraph text frame ÆCreate empty text
frame.
Create a text frame from
an object by using the
Text tool
Click the Text toolÆMove the pointer over the outline of the object, and
click the object when the pointer changes to an Insert in object pointer
.
Type inside the text frame.
Create a text frame from
an object from the right-
click menu
Right-click the object, and click Frame type ÆCreate empty text frame.
Create a text frame from
an object by using the
Layout toolbar
Click Window ÆToolbarsÆLayout or Layout ÆLayout toolbar. Using
the Pick tool , click the object in which you want to insert a text frame.
Click the Text frame button.
If the frame contains content, the content is deleted when the frame reverts to a regular object. You can
also click the No frame button on the Layout toolbar. To open the Layout toolbar, click Window
ÆToolbars ÆLayout or Layout ÆLayout toolbar.
Toseparateatextframefromanobject
Click the Pick tool Æ Select the object that includes the text frame Æ Click Arrange ÆBreak
paragraph text inside a path apart Æ The text frame and the object can now be moved or edited
separately.
When you separate a text frame from some objects, such as ellipses or stars, the text does not retain the
shape of the object. Alternatively, the text is contained in a standard rectangular text frame.
To adjust text to fill the text frame
If you choose to fit text to a frame that is linked to other frames, the application adjusts the size of text in
all linked text frames.
Select a text frame Æ Click Text ÆParagraph text frame ÆFit text to frame.
To align paragraph text to the baseline grid
Click View ÆGrid ÆBaseline grid Æ Select a text frame Æ Click Text ÆAlign to baseline grid
FITTINGTEXTTOAPATH
You can add artistic text along the path of an open object (for example, a line) or a closed object (for
example, a square). You can also fit existing text to a path. Paragraph text in a text frame can be fitted to
open paths only. After you fit text to a path, you can adjust the text position relative to that path. For
example, you can mirror the text horizontally, vertically, or both. Using tick spacing, you can specify an
exact distance between the text and the path.
CorelDRAW treats text fitted to a path as one object; however, you can separate the text from the object
if you no longer want it to be part of the path. When you separate text from a curved or closed path, the
text retains the shape of the object to which it was fitted. You can also modify the text and path
properties independently. The text reverts to its original appearance when you straighten it
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
789
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
Aligningtextbyusingthebaselinegrid
You can align text within a frame or in different frames by using the baseline grid. This is useful, for
example, when you want to align two or more text frames that contain different fonts, font sizes, and
spacing.
To add text along a path
Using the Pick tool, select a path Æ Click Text ÆFit text to path Æ type along the path.
The text cursor is inserted on the path. If the path is open, the text cursor is inserted at the beginning of
the path. If the path is closed, the text cursor is inserted at the center of the path. Text cannot be added to
the path of another text object. You can also fit text to a path by clicking the Text tool and pointing to a
path. When the pointer changes to a Fit to path pointer, click where you want the text to begin, and type.
Artistic text can be fitted to open or closed paths. Paragraph text can be fitted to open paths only. Text
cannot be fitted to the path of another text object
CHANGINGTEXTCASE
CorelDRAW lets you change the text case of artistic and paragraph text. For example, you can apply
small caps to acronyms so they visually blend with the text. This is a useful formatting technique for
headings, such as book or chapter titles. You can automatically convert text to lowercase or uppercase
without deleting or retyping letters.
Note : If the Object properties docker is not open, click Window
Dockers
Object properties.
To change the text case
Using the Text tool , select a character or a block of text Æ In the Object properties docker, click the
Character button to display the character-related options Æ In the Character area of the Object
properties docker, choose any of the following options from the Caps list box
x
None — turns off all of the features in the list.
x
All caps — substitutes lowercase characters with upper case equivalents.
x
Titling caps — applies the OpenType version of the feature if the font supports it.
x
Small caps (auto) — applies the OpenType version of the feature if the font supports it.
x
All small caps — substitutes characters with a scaled-down version of the upper case characters.
x
Small caps from caps — applies the OpenType version of the feature if the font supports it.
Fig 6.5 : Text and curve as separate objects (upper left), choosing a path with Fit Text to Path tool
(upper middle), aligning text while fitting it to path (upper right), text fitted to path (lower left),
interactive feedback about offset distance (lower middle), and text and curve stretched horizontally by
200% (lower right)
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
790
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
You can also change text case by selecting a character or a block of text, clicking Text ÆChange case,
and enabling an option in the Change case dialog box.
ADJUSTINGCHARACTERANDWORDSPACING
You can improve text readability by adjusting the character and word spacing. When letters or words are
too close together, or too far apart, they become difficult to read. CorelDRAW offers you different tools
for controlling text spacing.
Characterspacing
You can change the spacing between characters (also known as "letter spacing") in a block of text. For
example, fully justifying a block of text may insert too much space between characters, which creates a
visual imbalance. To improve readability, you can decrease the character spacing. If you want to change
the spacing between several characters, you need to adjust the kerning.
Using the Text tool
, position the cursor in a block of text or Using the Pick tool , click an artistic
text object or a text frame Æ In the Object properties docker, click the Paragraph button to display the
paragraph-related options Æ In the Paragraph area of the Object properties docker, type a value in the
Character spacing box.
Values for adjusting spacing represent a percentage of the space character. The Character values range
from -100 to 2000 percent. All other values range from 0 to 2000 percent
You can also change the character spacing proportionally by clicking the Shape tool Æ selecting the
text object, and dragging the Interactive horizontal spacing arrow in the lower-right corner of the text
object.
Wordspacing
You can also adjust the spacing between words.
Using the Text tool , position the cursor in a block of text or Using the Pick tool , click an artistic text
object or a text frame Æ In the Object properties docker, click the Paragraph button to display the
paragraph-related options Æ In the Paragraph area of the Object properties docker, type a value in the
Word spacing box.
You can also change the word spacing proportionally by clicking the Shape tool , holding down Shift,
selecting the text object, and dragging the Interactive horizontal spacing arrow in the lower-right
corner of the text object.
Adjustinglineandparagraphspacing
You can change the spacing between lines of text, which is also known as “leading” or “interline
spacing.” When changing the line spacing for artistic text, it applies only to the lines of text that are
separated by a hard return. The line spacing of paragraph text applies only to the lines of text within the
same paragraph. In CorelDRAW, you can also adjust line spacing of a text object by using the Shape
tool
To adjust interline spacing
Using the Text tool , select the paragraph text Æ In the Object properties docker, click the Paragraph
button to display the paragraph-related options Æ In the Paragraph area of the Object properties
docker, choose one of the following units of measurement. % of Char height/ points or percentage of
point size
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
791
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
Percentage of character height — lets you use a percentage value that is relative to the character height.
Points — lets you use points. % of Pt.size — lets you use a percentage value that is relative to the
character point size Æ Type a value in the Line spacing box.
You can also change the spacing between lines proportionally by clicking the Shape tool , selecting the
text object, and dragging the Interactive vertical spacing arrow in the lower-left corner of the text
object.
To adjust the spacing between paragraphs
Using the Text tool , select the paragraph text Æ In the Object properties docker, click the Paragraph
button to display the paragraph-related options Æ In the Paragraph area of the Object properties
docker, Type a value in one of the following boxes:
Before paragraph spacing — lets you specify the amount of space to insert above the paragraph text.
After paragraph spacing — lets you specify the amount of space to insert below the paragraph text.
You can also use this procedure to adjust the spacing between items in a bulleted list
ADDINGBULLETSTOTEXT
You can use bulleted lists to format information. You can wrap text around bullets, or you can offset a
bullet from text to create a hanging indent. CorelDRAW lets you customize bullets by changing their
size, position, and distance from text. You can also change the spacing between items in a bulleted list.
Using the Text tool , select the paragraph text Æ In the Object properties docker, click the Paragraph
button to display the paragraph-related options Æ In the Paragraph area of the Object properties
docker, click the arrow button located at the bottom of paragraph area to display additional options Æ
enable the bullets check box Æ click the bullet settings button Æ In the bullets dialog box, perform a task
from the following table
To
Do the following
Preview text with bullets
Enable the Preview check box.
Choose a font
In the Appearance area, choose a font from the Font list box.
Choose a symbol
Open the Symbol picker, and click a symbol.
Set a bullet size
Type a value in the Size box.
Adjust the bullet position
Type a value in the Baseline shift box.
Set the distance from the text
frame
In the Spacing area, type a value in the Text frame to bullet box.
Set the distance between the
bullet and the text
Type a value in the Bullet to text box
You can also
Add a bullet with a hanging
indent
Enable the Use hanging indent style for bulleted lists check box.
Change the color of a bullet
Select the bullet with the Text tool , and click a color on the color palette.
Remove bullets
In the Paragraph area of the Object Properties docker, disable the
Bullets check box.
Indent
an
entire
bullet
paragraph
In the Paragraph area of the Object properties docker, type the same
value in the First line indent and Left line indent boxes.
You can adjust the spacing in between bullets by increasing or decreasing the space before and after a
paragraph. Bullets are inserted at the beginning of each new line that is preceded by a return.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
792
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
INSERTINGDROPCAPS
Applying drop caps, also known as initial
caps, to paragraphs enlarges the initial letter
and insets it into the body of text. You can
customize a drop cap by changing different
settings. For example, you can change the
distance between the drop cap and the body of
text, or specify the number of lines of text that
you want to appear next to the drop cap. You can remove the drop cap at any point without deleting the
letter. You can preview a drop cap before you add it to a drawing. The changes you make are temporarily
applied to the text in the drawing window, so you can see how the drop cap will look when you add it.
Using the Text tool , select the paragraph text Æ In the Object properties docker, click the Paragraph
button to display the paragraph-related options Æ In the Paragraph area of the Object properties
docker, click the arrow button located at the bottom of paragraph area to display additional options Æ
enable the Dropcap box Æ click the dropcap settings buttons Æ In the dropcap dialog box, perform a
task from the following table.
To
Do
Specify the number of lines next to a
drop cap
In the Appearance area, type a value in the Number of lines
dropped box.
Set the distance between the drop cap
and the body of text
In the Appearance area, type a value in the Space after drop
cap box.
This sets the space to the right of the drop cap.
Preview a drop cap
Enable the Preview check box.
Offset the drop cap from the body of
text
Enable the Use hanging indent style for drop cap check box.
Remove drop caps
In the Paragraph area of the Object Properties docker,
disable the Drop caps check box.
CHANGING CHARACTER POSITION AND
ANGLE
You can modify the appearance of text by
shifting
the
characters
vertically
or
horizontally, which changes the position of the
selected characters relative to the surrounding
characters. You can also rotate characters
by specifying an angle of rotation.
Using the Text tool , select the paragraph
text Æ In the Object properties docker,
click the Character button to display the
character-related options Æ In the
Character area of the Object properties
docker, click the arrow button located at
the bottom of Character area to display
additional options to shift characters
Fig 6.6 : Applying DropCap
Fig 6.8 : align a text object with other objects by using the baseline of
the first line, the baseline of the last line, or the edge of the text
frame.
Fig 6.7 : Different examples of rotating
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
793
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
horizontally/ vertically.
Note : type the value in object properties Æcharacter Æcharacter angle box to rotate a character in
coreldraw.
ALIGNINGTEXT
CorelDRAW lets you align text in various ways. You can align paragraph text horizontally and vertically
in relation to its text frame. You can align paragraph text with the baseline grid. You can also align text
to a selected object.
Artistic text can be aligned horizontally, but not vertically. When you align artistic text, the entire text
object is aligned in relation to the bounding box. If characters have not been shifted horizontally,
applying no alignment produces the same result as applying left alignment
Toaligntexthorizontally
Using the Text tool , select the text that you want to align OR Using the Pick tool , click an artistic text
object or a text frame whose content you want to align Æ In the Object properties docker, click the
Paragraph button to display the paragraph-related options Æ In the Paragraph area of the Object
properties docker, click any type of alignment
The types of alignment are : None — applies the default alignment setting. Align left — aligns text with
the left side of the text frame or the bounding box of artistic text. Center — centers text within the text
frame. Align right — aligns text with the right side of the text frame and the bounding box of artistic
text. Full justify — aligns text, with the exception of the last line, with the left and right sides of the text
frame. Force justify — aligns text, including the last line, with the left and right sides of the text frame.
You can also align text horizontally by clicking the Horizontal alignment button on the property bar and
choosing an alignment style from the list box. The property bar displays an icon that corresponds to the
current alignment style
Toalignparagraphtextvertically
Using the Pick tool , click a text frame Æ In the Object properties docker, click the Frame button to
display the frame- related options . Æ In the Frame area of the Object properties docker, choose an
alignment option from the Vertical alignment list box.
Toaligntextwithanobject
Using the Pick tool , hold down Shift, click the text object, and then click the object Æ Click Arrange
Align and distribute
Align and distribute Æ Choose one of the For text source objects use list
box.(first line baseline/ last line baseline / bounding box) Æ Enable any one horizontal alignment check
boxes (left, center, right)Æ enable any one vertical alignment check box (top, center, bottom) Æ click
apply.
Source object list box: First line baseline — uses the baseline of the first line of text to align the
objects Last line baseline — uses the baseline of the last line of text to align the objects. Bounding box
— aligns text with its bounding box.
If you select the text objects one at a time, the last object selected is the reference point for aligning the
other objects. If you marquee select the objects before you align them, the object that is positioned in the
upper-left corner of the selection is used. If you have applied a linear transformation, such as rotation, to
the text and are aligning objects with a baseline, the objects align with the baseline point of the starting
edge of the text object. You can also align text objects by selecting them and clicking the Align and
distribute button on the property bar.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
794
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
ADDINGTABSANDINDENTS
You can modify existing tab stops by changing their alignment. You can also add trailing leader
characters, so that dots, or other characters, automatically precede the tab stops. In addition, you can add
new tab stops and remove existing tab stops.
Indenting changes the space between a text frame and the text that it contains. You can add and remove
indents without deleting or retyping text. You can indent an entire paragraph, the first line of a paragraph,
or all lines of a paragraph except the first line (a hanging indent). You can also indent from the right side
of the text frame.
To modify a tab stop
Click Window ÆDockers ÆObject properties. Æ In the Object properties docker, click the
Paragraph button to display the paragraph-related options Æ In the Paragraph area of the Object
properties docker, click the arrow button
located at the bottom of Paragraph area to display
additional options Æ Click the Tab settings button Æ Perform a task from the following table.
To
Do the following
Change the alignment of tab
stops
Click the cell in the Alignment column, and choose an alignment option
from the list box.
Set tab stops with trailing
leader characters
Click the cell in the Leaders column, and choose On from the list box.
Delete a tab stop
Click the cell, and click Remove.
Change the default leader
character
Click Leader options, open the Character picker, and click a character.
Change the default leader
spacing
Click Leader options, and type a value in the Spacing box.
You can also add, move, or delete tab stops on the horizontal ruler at the top of the drawing window.
Click to add a tab stop, drag a tab marker to move it, and drag a tab marker off the ruler to delete it.
To add a tab stop
Using the Text tool, select the paragraph text Æ Click WindowÆ Dockers ÆObject properties Æ In
the Object properties docker, click the Paragraph button to display the paragraph-related options Æ In
the Paragraph area of the Object properties docker, click the arrow button
located at the bottom of
Paragraph area to display additional optionsÆ Click the Tab settings buttonÆ . Click Add Æ Click
the new cell in the Tabs column, and type a value.
To indent paragraph text
Using the Text tool, select the paragraph text Æ Click Window ÆDockers ÆObject properties Æ In
the Object properties docker, click the Paragraph button to display the paragraph-related options Æ In
the Paragraph area of the Object properties docker type values for first line indent/left line indent/
right line indent in the following boxesÆ press ok.
First line indent — indents the first line of text relative to the left side of the frame. Left line indent —
creates a hanging indent relative to the left side of the text frame; all lines, except the first line, are
indented. Right line indent — indents the text relative to the right side of the frame
You can remove indents by typing 0 in the First Line indent, Left line indent, and Right line indent
boxes. You can indent an entire paragraph by typing the same value in both the First line indent and the
Left line indent boxes.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
795
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
DISPLAYINGNONPRINTINGCHARACTERS
You can display nonprinting characters, such as spaces, tabs, and formatting codes. For example, when
you display nonprinting characters, a space appears as a tiny black dot, a non breaking space appears as a
circle, and an em space appears as a line. When enabled, nonprinting characters are displayed only when
you add or edit text.
To display nonprinting characters : Click Text ÆShow nonprinting characters
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
796
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
CHAPTER 7
WORKING WITH TRANSFORMATION TOOLS
SIZINGANDSCALINGOBJECTS
CorelDRAW lets you size and scale objects. In both cases, you change the dimensions of an object
proportionally by preserving its aspect ratio. You can change the dimensions of an object by specifying
precise values or by changing the object interactively. When you scale an object, you change its
dimensions by a specified percentage
To
Size a selected object
Drag any of the corner selection handles.
Set a precise size
Type values in the Object size boxes on the property
bar.
Size a selected object from its center
Hold down Shift, and drag one of the corner selection
handles.
Size a selected object to a multiple of
its original size
Hold down Ctrl, and drag one of the corner selection
handles.
Stretch and size a selected object
simultaneously
Hold down Alt, and drag one of the corner selection
handles.
The anchor point of an object, also known as “object origin,” remains stationary when you resize the
object by typing values in the Object size boxes on the property bar. If you want to change the object
origin, click a point on the Object origin button on the property bar. You can also size an object by
clicking Arrange ÆTransformations ÆSize and then typing values in the Transformation docker.
To scale an object
Select an object ÆIn the toolbox, click the Free transform tool Æ Click the Free scale button on the
property bar. Æ If you want to change the object origin, click a point on the Object origin button on the
property bar Æ Type a percentage by which you want to scale the object in the Scale factor boxes on the
property bar
You can also
Apply the scaling according to the object’s
position rather than the x and y coordinates
Click the Relative to object button
on the property bar.
Scale an object using the Transformation
docker
Click WindowÆDockersÆTransformationsÆ Scale.
Leave the original object unchanged and
apply the transformation to a copy
Click the Apply to duplicate button on the property bar, or
type a number in the Copies box in the Transformation
docker.
The object origin, also known as “anchor point” or “reference point,” can be the center of an object or
any one of the object’s selection handles. The object origin remains stationary when an object is scaled
by typing values in the Scale factor boxes on the property bar. You can also scale an object by dragging
a corner selection handle. You can also scale an object by using the Transform toolbar. To open the
toolbar, click Window
Toolbars
Transform.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
797
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
ROTATINGANDMIRRORINGOBJECTS
CorelDRAW lets you rotate and create mirror images of objects. You
can rotate an object by specifying horizontal and vertical coordinates.
You can move the center of rotation to a specific ruler coordinate or to
a point that is relative to the current position of the object. Mirroring
an object flips it from left to right or top to bottom. By default, the
mirror anchor point is in the center of the object.
To rotate an object
Select an object Æ In the toolbox, click the Free transform tool
Æ Click the Free rotation button on the property bar Æ Type a value in the Angle of rotation box on
the property bar.
You can also
Apply the rotation according to the
object’s position rather than the x and y
coordinates
Click the Relative to object button on the property bar.
Use rotation handles to rotate an object
Using the Pick tool, click the object twice to display the
rotation handles. Drag a rotation handle clockwise or
counterclockwise.
Rotate
an
object
using
the
Transformation docker
Click Window ÆDockers ÆTransformations Rotate.
Torotateanobjectaroundarulercoordinate
Select an object Æ Click Window Æ Dockers ÆTransformations Rotate. Æ Disable the Relative
center check box Æ Type a value in the Angle box Æ Type values for H or v center boxes to specify the
point on the horizontal ruler/vertical ruler around which the object rotates ÆEnter.
Tomirroranobject
Select an objectÆ Click WindowÆ Docker Æ Transformations Scale Æ In the transformation docker
select Horizontal mirror/Vertical mirror Æ click apply.
Horizontal mirror — lets you
flip the object from left to right.
Vertical mirror — lets you flip
the object from top to bottom.
If you want to flip the object on a
specific anchor point, enable the check
box that corresponds to the anchor point you want to set. You can also mirror a selected object by
holding down Ctrl and dragging a selection handle to the opposite side of the object. You can also mirror
a selected object by clicking the Mirror horizontally or the Mirror vertically button on the property
bar.
Fig 7.1 : Rotating objects around a
single point.
Fig 7.2 : Mirroring an object from top to bottom
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
798
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
CHAPTER 8
LAYERS
CREATINGLAYERS
All CorelDRAW drawings consist of stacked objects. The vertical order of these objects — the stacking
order — contributes to the appearance of
the drawing. An effective way to organize
these objects is by using invisible planes
called layers.
.
Layering gives you added flexibility when
you organize and edit the objects in
complex drawings. You can divide a
drawing into multiple layers, each containing a
portion of the drawing’s contents. For example,
you can use layers to organize an architectural
plan for a building. You can organize the building’s various components (for example, plumbing,
electrical, structural) by placing them on separate layers.
Locallayersandmasterlayers
All content is placed on a layer. Content that applies to a specific page is
placed on a local layer. Content that applies to all pages in a document
can be placed on a global layer called a master layer. Master layers are
stored on a virtual page called the Master Page. The Object manager
docker displays the default layer structure. The names of active page and
layer appear at the top. You can create master layers for all pages, for
even pages, or for odd pages. The Master Page is a virtual page that
contains the information that applies to all pages in a document. You can
add one or more layers to a master page to hold content such as headers,
footers, or a static background. By default, a master page contains the
following layers:
Each new file is created with a default page (Page 1) and a Master Page. The default page contains the
following layers:
Guides — stores page-specific (local) guidelines. All objects placed on the Guides layer appear as
outlines only, and the outlines act as guidelines.
Layer 1 — represents the default local layer. When you draw objects on the page, the objects are added
to this layer unless you choose a different layer.
Guides (all pages) — contains the guidelines that are used for all pages of the document. All objects
placed on the Guides layer appear as outlines only, and the outlines act as guidelines.
Desktop — contains objects that are outside the borders of the drawing page. This layer lets you store
objects that you may want to include in the drawing at a later time
Document grid — contains the document grid that is used for all pages of the document. The document
grid is always the bottom layer
Fig 8.1 : Drawings can be assembled by placing objects on
various levels or layers
Fig 8.2 : Object manager docker
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
799
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
The default layers on the master page cannot be deleted or copied. Layers that you add to the master page
appear at the top of the stacking order unless the stacking order is changed in the Current page, layers
only view in the Object manager docker (accessible through the Layer manager view flyout).
To add content to a layer, you must first select the layer so that it becomes the active layer.
VIEWINGLAYERS,PAGES,ANDOBJECTS
You can choose different views that let you display pages, layers, or all the objects in your document.
The view you choose depends on the complexity of your document and the task you are performing. For
example, in a long multipage document, you can choose a pages-only view so that you can navigate the
document more easily and view only one page at a time. The Current page, layers only view lets you
view and reorder all the layers that affect the current page, including the master layers.
Tocreatealayer
If the Object manager docker is not open, click Tools ÆObject manager Æ Perform a task from the
following table:
To
Do the following
Create a local layer
In the upper-right corner of the Object manager docker, click the flyout
button , and click New layer.
Create a master layer
for all pages
In the upper-right corner of the Object manager docker, click the flyout
button , and click New master layer (all pages).
Create a master layer
for odd pages
In the upper-right corner of the Object manager docker, click the flyout
button , and click New master layer (odd pages).
This command is available only when the active page is an odd page.
Create a master layer
for even pages
In the upper-right corner of the Object manager docker, click the flyout
button , and click New master layer (even pages).
This command is available only when the active page is an even page.
To use a layer in the drawing, you must first make the layer active by clicking the layer name in the
Object manager docker. The layer name appears in a red bold font to indicate that it is the active layer.
When you start a drawing, the default layer (Layer 1) is the active layer. Master layers are always added
to the master page. Content added to these layers is visible on all pages of the document, all odd pages, or
all even pages, depending on the type of master layer that you have chosen. Master layers for odd and
even pages cannot be created in Facing Pages view. If you have created odd and even master pages
before switching to Facing Pages view, the odd and even master pages will be converted to all-page
master layers.
Tomakealayeractive
If the Object manager docker is not open, click Tools
Object manager Æ In the Object manager
docker, click the layer name Æ The layer name appears in a red bold font to indicate that it is the active
layer
TODELETEALAYER
If the Object manager docker is not open, click Tools
Object manager Æ Click the name of a layer
Æ Click the flyout button , and click Delete layer.
When you delete a layer, you also delete all the objects on it. To preserve an object, move it to a different
layer before you delete the current layer. You can delete any unlocked layer except the following default
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
800
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
layers: Document grid, Desktop, and Guides. You can also delete a layer by right-clicking the layer
name in the Object manager docker and choosing Delete
CHANGINGLAYERPROPERTIES
For each new layer that you create, the display, editing, and printing and exporting properties are enabled
by default. You can change these properties at any time. You can also turn a local layer into a master
layer, or a master layer into a local layer. For information about master layers, see Creating layers.
To change layer properties
If the Object manager docker is not open, click Tools ÆObject manager Æ Right-click the layer, and
click Properties Æ Specify the settings you want
SHOWINGANDHIDINGLAYERS
You can choose to show or hide layers in a drawing. Hiding a layer lets you identify and edit the objects
on other layers. It also reduces the time required for your drawing to refresh when you edit it.
To show or hide a layer
If the Object manager docker is not open, click Tools ÆObject manager Æ Click the Show or hide
icon beside the layer name.
The layer is hidden when the Show or hide icon is grayed out. Objects on a hidden layer are displayed in
the printed or exported drawing unless the layer’s printing and exporting properties are disabled. You can
also show or hide a layer by right-clicking the layer in the Object manager docker and then clicking
Visible.
PRINTINGANDEXPORTINGLAYERS
You can set printing and exporting properties for a layer to control whether a layer is displayed in the
printed or exported drawing. Note that hidden layers are displayed in the final output if the printing and
exporting properties are enabled. The Document grid layer cannot be printed or exported.
To enable or disable printing and exporting of a layer
Fig 8.3: The icons to the left of a layer’s name let you change the layer’s properties.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
801
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
If the Object manager docker is not open, click Tools ÆObject managerÆ Click the Enable or
disable printing and exporting icon beside the layer name.
Disabling the printing and exporting of a layer prevents its contents from appearing in the printed or
exported drawing, or in full-screen previews. You can also enable or disable the printing and exporting of
a layer by right- clicking the layer in the Object manager docker and clicking Printable.
SETTINGALAYER’SEDITINGPROPERTIES
You can allow editing of the objects on all layers or restrict editing so that you can only edit objects on
the active layer. You can also lock a layer to prevent accidental changes to the objects it contains. When
you lock a layer, you cannot select or edit the objects on that layer.
To set the editing properties of a layer
If the Object manager docker is not open, click Tools ÆObject managerÆ In the Object manager
docker, click the name of the layer that you want to edit. The layer name appears in a red bold font to
indicate that the layer is active Æ Perform a task from the following table
To
Do the following
Lock or unlock a layer
Click the Lock or unlock icon beside the layer name.
Allow editing on all layers
Click the flyout button , and click Edit across layers.
Allow editing on the active layer only Click the flyout button , and disable Edit across layers.
If you disable editing across layers, you can work only on the active layer and the Desktop layer. You
cannot select or edit objects on inactive layers. You can also allow editing on all layers by clicking the
Edit across layers button in the Object manager docker. Editing across layers is enabled when the
button appears pressed. Clicking the button again restricts editing to the active layer. You can also lock
or unlock a layer by right-clicking the layer in the Object manager docker and then clicking Editable
RENAMINGLAYERS
You can rename layers to indicate their contents, their position in the stacking order, or their relationship
with other layers.
If the Object manager docker is not open, click Tools ÆObject manager Æ Right-click the layer
name, and click Rename.
Layer names may not be preserved when you save a CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X6 file to a previous
version. You can also rename a layer by clicking the layer name twice and typing a new name.
USINGLAYERCOLORTOVIEWOBJECTS
You can change the layer color so that objects on the layer are displayed with the layer color when you
use Wireframe view. For example, if you place various components of an architectural plan (plumbing,
electrical, structural) on separate layers, you can use layer color to quickly identify to which component
the objects belong.
Torenamealayer
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
802
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
In the Object manager docker, double-click the color swatch that appears to the left of the layer name,
and choose a color. Objects on the layer are displayed with the layer color when you use Wireframe view
(View
Wireframe). You can also choose to display only the objects on a specific layer in Wireframe
view by right-clicking the layer name, choosing Properties, and enabling the Override full color view
check box in the layer properties dialog box
You can move or copy layers on a single page or between pages. You can also move or copy selected
objects to new layers, including layers on the master page. Moving and copying layers affects the
stacking order. Moving or copying an object to a layer below its current layer causes the object to
become the top object on its new layer. Similarly, moving or copying an object to a layer above its
current layer causes the object to become the bottom object on its new layer.
To move a layer
If the Object manager docker is not open, click Tools ÆObject manager. Æ In the layers list, drag a
layer name to a new position
TOCOPYALAYER
If the Object manager docker is not open, click Tools ÆObject manager. Æ In the layers list, right
click the layer that you want to copy, and click copy. Æ Right-click the layer above which you want to
place the copied layer, and click Paste. The layer and the objects it contains are pasted above the selected
layer.
To move or copy an object to another layer
If the Object manager docker is not open, click Tools
Object manager. Æ Click an object in the
Object manager docker. Æ Click the flyout button and click either move to layer or copy to layer Æ
click the destination layer.
You can also move an object to another layer by using an Order command. When you move objects to
or from a layer, the layer must be unlocked
Tochangethelayercolor
Moving and copying layers and objects
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
803
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
CHAPTER 9
WORKING WITH COLORS
WORKINGWITHCOLOR
CorelDRAW lets you choose and create colors by using a wide variety of industry-standard color
palettes, color mixers, and color models. You can store frequently used colors for future use by using the
Document palette, or creating and editing custom color palettes.
You can also create and save colors for future use by using color styles. You can customize how a color
palette appears on your screen by changing the size of swatches, the number of rows, and other
properties.
Understandingcolormodels
You need a precise method to define colors. Color models provide various methods to define colors, each
model defining colors through the use of specific color components. There is a range of color models to
choose from when creating graphics.
The CMYK color model, which is used in printing, uses the components cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow
(Y), and black (K) to define color. Values for these components range from 0 to 100 and represent
percentages.
The RGB color model uses the components red (R), green (G), and blue (B) to define the amounts of red,
green, and blue light in a given color. In a 24-bit image, each component is expressed as a number from 0
to 255. In an image with a higher bit rate, such as a 48-bit image, the value range is greater. The
combination of these components defines a single color. RGB is the most commonly used color model,
because it allows a broad range of colors to be stored and displayed.
The HSB color model uses hue (H), saturation (S), and brightness (B) as components for defining color.
HSB is also known as HSV (with the components hue, saturation, and value). Hue describes the pigment
of a color and is expressed in degrees to represent the location on the standard color wheel. For example,
red is 0 degrees, yellow is 60 degrees, green is 120 degrees, cyan is 180 degrees, blue is 240 degrees, and
magenta is 300 degrees.
The grayscale color model defines color by using only one component, lightness, which is measured in
values ranging from 0 to 255. Each grayscale color has equal values of the red, green, and blue
components of the RGB color model. Changing a color photo to grayscale creates a black-and-white
photo.
FILLINGOBJECTS
CMYKcolormodel
RGBcolormodel
HSBcolormodel
Grayscalecolormodel
You can add colored, patterned, textured, and other fills to the inside of objects or other enclosed areas.
You can customize a fill and set it as a default, so that each object you draw has the same fill.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
804
¨sÁUÀ 1
Applyinguniformfills
You can apply a uniform fill to objects. Uniform fills are solid colors that you can choose or create by
using color models and color palettes.
Select an object. Æ Click a color on the color palette
If you want to mix colors in a uniform fill, press Ctrl and click another color on the color palette. You
can also choose a uniform fill by clicking any of the following controls. the Uniform fill button in the
Fill section of the Object properties docker. The Uniform fill button in the toolbox. The Interactive fill
tool in the toolbox, and then choosing Uniform fill from the Fill type list box on the property bar.
Applyingfountainfills
A fountain fill is a smooth progression of two or more colors that adds depth to an object. Fountain fills
are also known as Gradient fills. There are four types of fountain fills: linear, radial, conical, and
square. A linear fountain fill flows in a straight line across the object, a conical fountain fill creates the
illusion of light hitting a cone, a radial fountain fill radiates from the center of the object, and a square
fountain fill is dispersed in concentric squares from the center of the object.
You can apply preset fountain fills, two-color fountain fills, and custom fountain fills to objects.
Custom fountain fills can contain two or more colors, which you can position anywhere in the fill’s
progression. After you create a custom fountain fill, you can save it as a preset.
Select an object. Æ Click Edit ÆObject properties Æ In the Object properties docker, click the
Fountain fill button to display fountain fill options Æ Select a fountain fill type Æ Click the arrow
button to display more fill options Æ Choose a fill from the Fill presets list box.
You can also apply a preset fountain fill by clicking the Fountain fill button in the toolbox and choosing
a fill from the Fountain fill dialog box You can add a color to a fountain fill by dragging a color from the
color palette to an object’s interactive vector handle.
Toapplyapresetfountainfill
Fig 9.1: The 4 types of fountain fills (left to right): linear, radial, conical, and square
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
805
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
Select an object Æ Click Edit ÆObject properties. Æ In the Object properties docker, click the
Fountain fill button to display fountain fill options Æ Select a fountain fill type Æ Enable the Two-
color blend option Æ Open the From color picker, and click a color Æ Open the To color picker, and
click a color Æ Move the fill midpoint slider to adjust the color progression between the start and end fill
colors Æ Click the arrow button to display more fill options Æ Specify the settings you want.
You can also apply a two-color fountain fill by clicking the Interactive fill tool in the toolbox and
choosing a fountain fill from the Fill type list box on the property bar. You can mix colors in a two-color
fountain fill by selecting one of the interactive vector handles, pressing Ctrl, and clicking a color on the
color palette
Select an object Æ Click Edit
Object properties. Æ In the Object properties docker, click the
Fountain fill button to display fountain fill options Æ Select a fountain fill type Æ Enable the Custom
color blend option Æ Click the first color swatch above the color band, open the Current color picker,
and click a color on the color palette. Æ Click the end color swatch above the color band, open the
Current color picker, and click a color on the color palette Æ To adjust the midpoint between the colors,
double-click between the two color swatches on the color band, and drag the new color swatch. If you
want to specify the exact position of the midpoint, type a value in the Position box Æ Click the arrow
button to display more fill options Æ Specify the attributes you want.
You can also apply a custom fountain fill by doing one of the following: clicking the Fountain fill button
in the toolbox, and specifying the fill attributes in the Fountain fill dialog box. clicking the Interactive
fill tool in the toolbox, and dragging colors from the color palette in the document window onto the
object’s interactive vector handles
To change the fountain fill print and display quality
Select an object Æ In the toolbox, click the Interactive fill tool Æ Choose a fountain fill from the Fill
type list box on the property bar Æ Click the Lock fountain steps button on the property bar, type a
value in the Fountain steps box, and press Enter .
When the Fountain steps box is locked, the number of steps in the printed fountain fill is determined by
the value specified in the Print dialog box.
To set the display quality for fountain fills
Click Tools
Options Æ In the list of categories, double-click Workspace, and click Display Æ Type
a value in the Preview fountain steps box
APPLYINGPATTERNFILLS
You can fill objects with two-color, full-color, or bitmap pattern fills.
A two-color pattern fill is composed of only the two colors that you choose. A full-color pattern fill (also
known as “vector pattern”) is a more complex vector graphic that can be composed of lines and fills. A
full-color fill can have color or transparent background. A bitmap pattern fill is a bitmap image whose
complexity is determined by its size, image resolution, and bit depth.
ToapplyatwoǦcolorfountainfill
Toapplyacustomfountainfill
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
806
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
Fig: 9.2 :Examples of bitmap pattern fills
CorelDRAW Graphics Suite provides a collection of full-color (vector) and bitmap pattern fills that you
can access and search. You can preview thumbnails of the available pattern fills.
You can also create your own pattern fills. For example, you can create pattern fills from objects that you
draw or images that you import.
You can change the tile size of pattern fills. You can also specify exactly where these fills begin by
setting the tile origin. CorelDRAW also lets you offset tiles in a fill. Adjusting the horizontal or vertical
position of the first tile, relative to the top of the object, affects the rest of the fill.
You can mirror the fill so that alternating tiles are reflections of each other. If you want a pattern fill to
change according to actions you perform on the filled object, you can set the fill to transform with the
object. For example, if you enlarge the object, the pattern becomes larger while the number of tiles
remains the same.
You can apply a pattern
of two or more colors to
an object.
To apply a two-color
pattern fill
Select an object Æ Click
Edit
ÆObject
properties Æ
In the
Object
properties
docker, click the Pattern
fill
button to display
pattern fill options Æ In the Type area, click the Two-color pattern fill button Æ Choose a fill from the
Pattern fill picker. Open the Front color picker, and click a color Æ Open the Back color picker, and
click a color .
You can also mix colors in a two-color pattern fill by pressing Ctrl and clicking a color on the color
palette. You can also apply a pattern fill by clicking the Interactive fill tool in the toolbox and choosing
Two-color pattern from the Fill type list box on the property bar. You can mix a color with only one of
the colors in the fill by pressing Ctrl and dragging a color to the interactive handle
To apply a full-color or bitmap pattern fill
Select an object Æ Click Edit
Object properties Æ In the Object properties docker, click the
Pattern fill button to display pattern fill options Æ In the Type area, click the Fill color pattern fill/
Bitmap pattern fill button Æ Choose a fill from the Pattern fill picker.
Fig 9.3: Pattern fill
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
807
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
You can also apply a full-color or a bitmap pattern fill by clicking the Interactive fill tool in the toolbox
and choosing an option from the Fill type list box on the property bar
To create a two-color pattern fill
Select an object Æ In the toolbox, click the Pattern fill button Æ Enable the 2-color option Æ Open
front color picker to choose a foreground color/ back to choose a background color Æ click create.
To create a two-color pattern fill from an image
Click Tools ÆCreate ÆPattern fill Æ Enable the Two-color option Æ In the Resolution area, enable
low/medium/high resolution Æclick ok. Æ Select the image or area of the image that you want to use in
the pattern
Low — creates a low-resolution, two-color pattern .Medium — creates a medium-resolution, two-color
pattern. High — creates a high-resolution, two-color pattern
To create a full-color pattern from an image
Click Tools ÆCreate
Pattern fill Æ Enable the Full-color option Æclick ok Æ Select the image or
area of the image that you want to use in the pattern Æ In the Create pattern dialog box, click OK Æ.
In the Save vector pattern dialog box, type a filename for the pattern in the File name box. Full-color
patterns can have transparent or color background
To create a pattern fill from an imported image
Select an objectÆ In the toolbox, click the Pattern fill button Æ Enable 2 color/ full color/ bitmap
Æclick load Æ In the Import dialog box, locate the image that you want to use, and double-click the
filename .
To change the size of pattern tiles
Select an object Æ Click Edit ÆObject properties
ÆIn the Object properties docker, click the
Pattern fill button to display pattern fill options Æ Select a pattern fill type Æ To display more pattern
fill options, click the arrow button located below the tile size buttons Æ Type the value for tile width or
height Æ You can also change the size of pattern tiles by doing one of the following: clicking the
Pattern fill button in the toolbox and choosing a size in the Pattern fill dialog box clicking the
Interactive fill tool in the toolbox, selecting an object, and clicking the Small tile, Medium tile, or
Large tile button on the property bar.
You can also skew or rotate tiles by clicking the Interactive fill tool in the toolbox, selecting an object,
and dragging the skewing or rotation handles to change the appearance of the pattern.
APPLYINGTEXTUREFILLS
A texture fill is a randomly generated fill that you can use to give your objects a natural appearance.
CorelDRAW provides preset textures, and each texture has a set of options that you can change. You can
use colors from any color model or palette to customize texture fills. Texture fills can hold only RGB
colors; however, other color models and palettes can be used as a reference to select colors. You can
change the tile size of texture fills. Increasing the resolution of a texture tile increases the accuracy of the
fill. You can also specify exactly where these fills begin by setting the tile origin. CorelDRAW also lets
you offset tiles in a fill. Adjusting the horizontal or vertical position of the first tile, relative to the top of
the object, affects the rest of the fill. You can rotate or skew the fill, adjust the tile size, and change the
center of the texture to create a custom fill. If you want a texture fill to change according to the actions
you perform on the filled object, you can set the fill to transform with the object. For example, if you
enlarge the filled object, the texture becomes larger while the number of tiles remains the same. Texture
fills can enhance a drawing. However, they also increase the size of a file and the time it takes to print, so
you may want to use them in moderation.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
808
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
To apply a texture fill
Select an object ÆClick Edit
Object properties
Æ In the Object properties docker, click the
Texture fill button to display texture fill options. Æ Choose a texture library from the Texture fill list
box Æ Choose a texture from the Texture fill picker. You can also apply a texture fill by clicking the
Texture fill button in the toolbox and choosing a texture in the Texture fill dialog box.
You can also
Change the size of texture tiles
Click Tiling, and type values in the Width and Height
boxes.
Move the center of the texture fill up, down,
left, or right
Click Tiling, and type values in the X and Y boxes in
the Origin area.
Specify a row or column offset as a
percentage of the tile’s width or height
Click Tiling, and enable the Row or Column option.
Type a value in the % of tile size box.
Rotate the texture fill at a specified angle
Click Tiling, and type a value in the Rotate box.
Modify the texture shape
Click Tiling, and type a value in the Skew box.
Apply object changes to the texture fill
Enable the Transform fill with object check box.
Arrange the tiles so that alternating tiles are
reflections of each other
Click Tiling, and enable the Mirror fill check box.
APPLYINGPOSTSCRIPTTEXTUREFILLS
You can apply PostScript texture fills to objects. A PostScript texture fill is created in the PostScript
language. Some textures are very complex, and large objects that contain PostScript texture fills may take
time to print or to update on the screen. Depending on the view mode you are using, the letters “PS” —
rather than the fill — may appear. When you apply a PostScript texture fill, you can change several
properties, such as the size, line width, and the amount of gray that appears in the texture's foreground
and background.
Select an object Æ Click Edit ÆObject properties Æ In the Object properties docker, click the
Postscript fill button to display postscript fill options Æ Choose a fill from the PostScript fill textures
list box
If you want to change the fill properties, click the PostScript fill properties button and specify the
settings you want. You can also apply a PostScript fill by clicking the Interactive fill tool, choosing
PostScript fill from the Fill type list box on the property bar, and choosing a fill from the PostScript fill
textures list box
APPLYINGMESHFILLS
When you fill an object with a mesh fill, you can
create unique effects. For example, you can create
smooth color transitions in any direction without
having to create blends or contours. When you
apply a mesh fill, you specify the number of
columns and rows in the grid, and you specify the
grid’s intersecting points. After you have created a
mesh object, you can edit the mesh fill grid by
adding and removing nodes or intersections. You
can also remove the mesh.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
809
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
A mesh fill can be applied only to closed
objects or a single path. If you want to apply a
mesh fill to a complex object, you must first
create a mesh-filled object and combine it with
the complex object to form a PowerClip object.
You can add color to a patch of a mesh fill
and to the individual intersection nodes. You
can also choose to mix colors for a more blended appearance.
In addition, you can smooth the color in a mesh fill to reduce the appearance of hard edges. You can also
reveal objects underneath a selected area by applying transparency to the mesh fill.
To apply a mesh to an object
Select an object. Æ In the toolbox, click the Mesh fill tool Æ Type the number of columns in the top
portion of the Grid size box on the property bar. Type the number of rows in the bottom portion of the
Grid size box on the property bar, and press Enter . Adjust the grid nodes on the object.
To fill a mesh with color
Select a mesh-filled object. Æ In the toolbox, click the Mesh fill tool Æ Drag a color from the color
palette to a patch in the object
To smooth the appearance of color in a mesh fill
Select a mesh-filled object Æ In the toolbox, click the Mesh fill tool Æ Click the Smooth mesh color
button on the property bar.
To apply transparency to a mesh fill
Select a mesh-filled object. Æ In the toolbox, click the Mesh fill tool Æ Click a node to select part of the
mesh Æ On the property bar, move the Transparency slider to the right to increase the transparency of
the selected area
You can apply fills to any enclosed area by using the Smart fill tool. Unlike other fill tools, which fill
only objects, the Smart fill tool detects the edges of an area and creates a closed path so that the area can
be filled. For example, if you draw a freehand line that crosses over itself to create loops, the Smart fill
tool can detect the edges of the loops and fill them. As long as the paths of one or more objects
completely enclose an area, it can be filled.
Applying fills to areas
Fig 9.4: Mesh fill applied to get realistic look
Fig 9.5: the original spiral object is duplicated and offset, resulting in enclosed
areas that can be filled by using the Smart fill tool
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
810
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
Because the Smart fill tool
creates a path around the
area, it essentially creates a
new object that can be
filled, moved, copied, or
edited. This means that the
tool can be used in one of
two ways: to fill an area or
to create a new object from
an area. When you use the Smart fill tool on areas that already have fills applied to them, remember the
following:
An object with transparency applied to it is considered completely transparent — paths under any area of
the object are detected, regardless of whether the specific area appears opaque. PostScript fills are
considered transparent — paths under any area of a PostScript fill are detected. All fills other than
PostScript fills are considered opaque — paths under these fills are not detected
To apply a fill to an enclosed area
In the toolbox, click the Smart fill tool On the property bar, choose one use default/ fill tool/ specify/
nofill/ fill color options from the Fill options list box Æ From the Outline options box, choose use
default/specify/no outline Æ Click inside the enclosed area that you want to fill . :
Fill options :
Use default — lets you fill the area with the Fill tool default setting Specify — lets you fill the area with
a solid color by choosing a color from the Fill color picker on the property bar. No fill — applies no fill
to the area.
Outline options:
Use default — lets you apply the default outline setting. Specify — lets you choose a line width from the
Outline width box and a line color from the Outline color color picker. No outline — applies no outline
to the area.
WORKINGWITHFILLS
There are a number of tasks that are common to all types of fills. You can choose a default fill color so
that every object that you add to a drawing has the same fill. You can also remove a fill, copy it to
another object, or use it to fill an area surrounded by an open curve.
Tochooseadefaultfillcolor
Click a blank area on the drawing page to deselect all objects. Æ In the toolbox, click the Uniform fill
button Æ In the Change document defaults dialog box, enable the check boxes for the types of objects
whose default fill you want to change Æ In the Uniform fill dialog box, specify any fill settings.
You can also change the default fill color by editing the default style sets in the Styles docker.
Toremoveafill
Select an object Æ Click Edit
Object properties Æ In the Objects properties docker, click the No
fill button
You can also remove a fill by clicking the Fill flyout in the toolbox, and then clicking the No fill button.
To copy a fill to another object
Using the Pick tool , select the object from which you want to copy the fill Æ With the right mouse
button, drag the first object over the destination object, to which you want to apply the fill Æ A blue
Fig 9.6: Using the Smart fill tool to fill enclosed areas.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
811
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
outline of the first object follows the pointer to the destination object Æ When the pointer changes to a
crosshair pointer , release the mouse button, and choose Copy fill here from the context menu.
You can also use the Attributes eyedropper tool to copy a fill. You can also sample the color of an
existing object and apply the sampled color to another object as a uniform fill.
To show fills in open curves
Click Tools
Options Æ In the list of categories, double-click Document, and click General. Æ Enable
the Fill open curves check box
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
812
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
CHAPTER 10
ADDING EFFECTS
You can create the illusion of three-dimensional (3D) depth in objects by adding contour,
perspective, extrusion, bevel, or drop shadow effects.
Tocopyeffectsfromoneobjecttoanother
In the toolbox, click the Attributes eyedropper tool Æ Click the Effects flyout on the property bar, and
enable perspective/ envelop/ blend/ extrude/ contour/ lens/ powerclip/ drop shadow/ distortion Æ
Click the object whose effects you want to copy Æ: Click the object to which you want to apply the
copied effects.
The Attributes eyedropper tool automatically switches to the Apply object attributes mode.
Toremoveaneffectfromanobject
Select an object that has a perspective effect. Æ Click Effects ÆClear perspective/Extrusion/ blend
/contour/lens
CONTOUR
You can contour an object to create a series of concentric
lines that progress to the inside or outside of the object.
CorelDRAW also lets you set the number and distance of the
contour lines. After contouring an object, you can copy
or clone its contour settings to another object. You can also
change the colors of the fill between the contour lines and the
contour outlines themselves. You can set a color progression
in the contour effect, where one color blends into another.
The color progression can follow a straight, clockwise, or
counterclockwise path through the color range of your
choice. You can also choose how contour corners appear.
For example, you can use pointed or rounded corners, or
you can bevel (square off) sharp contour corners. You can
separate an object from its contour lines. A center contour
has been applied to the above object. The number of
contour lines, as well as the distance between lines, can be
changed. An outside contour has been applied to the above object. Note that an outside contour projects
from the outside edge of the object.
Tocontouranobject:
Select the Contour tool Æ Click an object or a set of grouped objects, and drag the start handle toward
the center to create an inside contour or away from the center to create an outside contour Æ Move the
object slider to change the number of contour steps
Fig 10.1:Contouring objects
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
813
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
You can also
Add contour lines to the center of the
selected object
Click the To center button .
Specify the number of contour lines
Click the Inside contour or Outside contour button on the
property bar, and type a value in the Contour steps box on the
property bar.
Specify the distance between contour
lines
Type a value in the Contour offset box on the property bar.
Accelerate contour line progression
Click the Object and color acceleration button on the property
bar, and move the object slider.
Use pointed contour corners
Click the Mitered corners button .
Use rounded contour corners
Click the Round corners button .
The effect of this control is more obvious with outside
contours.
Use beveled contour corners
Click the Bevel corners button .
You can create contours by clicking Effects Æ Contour and specifying the settings you want in
the Contour docker.
Tosetthefillcolorforacontourobject
In the toolbox, click the Contour tool Æ Select a contour object ÆOpen the Fill color picker on the
property bar, and click a color:
If you cannot apply the fill color, you need to make sure the Fill color option is enabled on the status bar
Tospecifyanoutlinecolorforthecontourobject
In the toolbox, click the contour tool Æ select a contour object Æ open the outline color picker on the
property bar, and click a color.
Tosetthefillprogression
In the toolbox, click the Contour tool Æ Select a contour object Æclick linear contorur colors/ clockwise
contour colors/ counterclockwise contour colors.
Toseparateanobjectfromitscontourlines
Using the Pick tool
, select a contoured object Æ Click Arrange
Break contour group apart.
APPLYINGPERSPECTIVETOOBJECTS
You can create a perspective effect by
shortening one or two sides of an object.
This effect gives an object the appearance of
receding in one or two directions, thereby
creating aone-point perspective or a two-
point perspective. Perspective effects can be
added to objects or grouped objects. You can
also add a perspective effect to linked groups,
such as contours, blends, and extrusions. You
can’t add perspective effects to paragraph text, bitmaps, or symbols. After you apply a perspective effect,
you can copy it to other objects in a drawing, adjust it, or remove it from the object.
Fig 10.2 : The original graphic (left) with one-point (middle)
and two-point (right) perspectives applied to it.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
814
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
To apply a perspective
To
Apply
a
one-point
perspective
Click Effects
Add perspective. Press Ctrl, and drag a node.
Apply
a
two-point
perspective
Click Effects
Add perspective. Drag the nodes on the outside of the grid to
apply the effect you want.
Pressing Ctrl constrains the node’s movement to the horizontal or vertical axis to create a one-point
perspective effect. You can move opposing nodes the same distance in opposite directions by
pressing Ctrl + Shift as you drag.
Toadjusttheperspective
In the toolbox, click the Shape tool Æ Select an object that has a perspective effect Æ Drag a node to a
new position.You can also adjust the perspective by dragging one or both of the vanishing points.
CREATINGEXTRUSIONS
You can make objects appear 3D by creating extrusions. You can create extrusions by projecting points
from an object and joining them to create an illusion of three dimensions. After you create an extrusion,
you can copy or clone its attributes to a selected object. Cloning and copying transfer the extrusion
attributes of an extruded object to another. However, the cloned extrusion settings cannot be edited
independently from the master. You can change an extruded form by rotating it and rounding its corners.
Extrudedfills
You can apply fills to an entire extrusion or only to
the extruded surfaces. You can cover each surface
individually with the fill, or you can drape the fill so
that it blankets the entire object with no breaks to the
pattern or texture.
Left to right: a simple shape, the shape with an
extruded fill of solid color, the shape with an
extruded gradient fill and a rotation applied.
Lighting
You can enhance extrusions by applying light sources. You can add up to three light sources to project
toward the extruded object with varying intensity. When you no longer need light sources, you can
remove them.
Vanishingpoints
You can create a vector extrusion in which the lines of the extrusion converge at a vanishing point. The
vanishing point of a vector extrusion can be copied to another object so that both objects appear to recede
toward the same point.
TocreateanExtrusions
Select object using pick tool Æselect extrude tool ÆChoose a preset from the Presets list box on the
property bar. Æ Choose an extrusion type from the Extrusion type list box on the property bar Æ select
an object Æ Drag the object’s selection handles to set the direction and depth of the extrusion
Fig 10.3 : Applying Extrusions
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
815
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
ToapplyafilltoanExtrusions
Select an extruded object with the Extrude tool ÆSelect use object fill/ use solid color/ use color shading.
ToapplybevelededgestoanExtrusions
Select an Extrude tool ÆSelect an extruded object Æ click the extrusion bevels button on the property
bar Æ enable the use bevel check box Æ type a value in the bevel depth box. Æ
ToaddlightanExtrusions
Select an extruded object ÆSelect use extrusion lighting button on the property bar Æ click any 3 light
buttons Æ the light appears as numbered circles in the preview window Æ drag the numbered circles in
the light intensity preview window to position the lights. ÆEnable the full color range check box to look
more realistc.
CREATINGBEVELEFFECTS
A bevel effect adds 3D depth to a graphic or text object by making its edges appear sloped (cut at an
angle). Bevel effects can contain both spot and process (CMYK) colors, so they are ideal for printing.
You can remove a bevel effect at any time. Bevel effects can be applied only to vector objects and text,
not to bitmaps. You can choose bevel styles like soft edge and emboss. Soft edge creates beveled
surfaces that appear shaded in some areas and Emboss makes a object appear as a relief.
Beveledsurfaces
You can control the intensity of the bevel effect by specifying the width of the beveled surface.
Lightandcolor
An object with a bevel effect appears lit by white ambient (surrounding) light and a spotlight. The
ambient light is of low intensity and cannot be changed. The spotlight is also white by default, but you
can change its color, intensity, and location. Changing the spotlight color affects the color of the beveled
surfaces. Changing the spotlight’s intensity lightens or darkens the beveled surfaces. Changing the
location of the spotlight determines which beveled surfaces appear lit.
You can change the location of the spotlight by specifying its direction and altitude. Direction determines
where the light source is located in the plane of the object (for example, to the left or right of an object).
Altitude determines how high the spotlight is located in relation to the object’s plane. For example, you
can place the spotlight flush with the horizon (altitude of 0°) or directly above the object (altitude of 90°).
In addition, you can change the color of the beveled surfaces that are in shadow by specifying a shadow
color.
Tocreateasoftedgebeveleffect:
Select an object that is closed and has a fill applied to it Ægoto effects menu Æ bevel Æ In the bevel
docker, select the soft edge from the style list box -Æ enable to center/distance.
You can also
Change the color of beveled
surfaces in shadow
Choose a color from the Shadow color picker.
Beveled surfaces change to a shade of the specified
shadow color.
Choose a spotlight color
Choose a color from the Light color picker.
Change the intensity of the Move the Intensity slider.
spotlight
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
816
¨sÁUÀ 1
Specify
the
position
of
the
spotlight
Move either direction/altitude sliders:
Direction values range from 0° to 360°; altitude values
range from 0° to 90
Direction value range from 0 deg to 360 deg and altitude values ranges from 0 deg to 90 deg.
Tocreateanembosseffect
Select an object that is closed and has a fill applied to it Æ goto effects menu Æ bevel Æ In the bevel
docker, select the emboss from the style list box -Æ enable to distance slider Æclick apply.
DROPSHADOW
Drop shadows simulate light falling on an object from one of five particular perspectives: flat, right, left,
bottom, and top. You can add drop shadows to most objects or groups of objects, including artistic text,
paragraph text, and bitmaps. When you add a drop shadow, you can change its perspective, and you can
adjust attributes such as color, opacity, fade level, angle, and feathering. After you create a drop shadow,
you can copy it or clone it to a selected object. When you copy a drop shadow, the original and copy
have no connection and can be edited independently.
Toaddadropshadoweffect
Select drop shadow tool ÆSelect an objectÆ drag from the center or side of the object until the drop
shadow is the size you want Æ specify any attributes on the property bar.
Drop shadows cannot be added to lined groups, such as blended objects, contoured objects, beveled
objects, extruded objects, objects created without the artistic media tool or other drop shadows.
To add a cuttable shadow: Select an object Æ click edit menu Æ duplicate Æ click a dark color on the
onscreen color palate Æ click arrange menu Æ order Æbehind and click the original to position the
duplicate behind it. Æ adjust the position of the duplicate.
To separate a drop shadow from an object: Select an object drop shadow Æ click arrange menu
Æbreak drop shadow group apart Æ drag the shadow.
BLENDINGOBJECTS
CorelDRAW lets you create blends, such as straight-line blends, blends along a path, and compound
blends. Blends are often used for creating realistic shadows and highlights in objects. A straight-line
blend shows a progression in shape and size from one object to another. The outline and fill colors of the
intermediate objects progress along a straight-line path across the color spectrum. The outlines of
intermediate objects show a gradual progression in thickness and shape.
After you create a blend, you can copy or clone its settings to other objects. When you copy a blend, the
object takes on all the blend-related settings, except for the outline and fill attributes. When you clone a
blend, changes you make to the original blend (also called the master) are applied to the clone
To
Do the following
Blend
along
a
straight line
In the toolbox, click the Blend tool. Select the first object, and drag over
the second object. If you want to reset the blend, press Esc as you drag.
Blend
an
object
along a freehand
path
In the toolbox, click the Blend tool. Select the first object. Hold down
Alt, and drag to draw a line to the second object.
Fit a blend to a path In the toolbox, click the Blend tool. Click the blend. Click the Path
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
817
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
properties button on the property bar. Click New path. Using the curved
arrow, click the path to which you want to fit the blend.
Stretch the blend
over an entire path
Select a blend that is already fitted on a path. Click the More blend
options button on the property bar, and enable the Blend along full path
check box.
Create a compound
blend
Using the Blend tool, drag from an object to the start or end object of
another blend
Tosetthenumberofintermediateobjectsinablend
Select a blend Æ type a value in the blend objects box on the property bar Æ press enter
Tosetthedistancebetweenobjectsinablendthatisfittoapath
Select a blend that is fit to a path Æ click the blend spacing button on the property bar Æ type a value in
the blend objects box on the property bar Æpress enter.
If you have used the blend along full path command, the blend spacing button is not available.
Tosetthecolorprogressioninablend
Select a blend Æ on the property bar select direct blend/ clockwise blend/ counterclockwise blend
Tomapthenodesofablend
Select a blend Æ click the more blend options button on the property bar, and click map nodes Æ click a
nodes on the start object and on the end object.
To
Do the following
Select the start or end
object
Select a blend, click the Starting and ending objects button on the property bar,
and click Show start, or Show end.
Change the start or end
object of a blend
Select a blend; click the Starting and ending objects button on the property bar,
and click New start, or New end. Click an object outside the blend that you want to
use as the start or end of the blend.
Fuse the start or end
object in a split or
compound blend
Hold down Ctrl, click a middle object in a blend, and then click a start or end object.
Click the More blend options button on the property bar. If you have selected the
start object, click the Fuse start button. If you have selected the end object, click the
Fuse end button
You can reverse the direction of the blend by clicking Arrange
Order
Reverse order
Note : you can also change blend path, split a blend and remove a blend.
APPLYINGLENSES
Lenses
change
how
the
object area beneath the lens
appears,
not
the
actual
properties and attributes of
the objects. You can apply
lenses to any vector object,
such as a rectangle, ellipse,
closed path, or polygon. You
can
also
change
the
appearance of artistic text
Fig 10.4 : The lens types applied to the original (far left): (left to right) Heat map,
Magnify, and Custom color
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
818
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
and bitmaps. When you apply a lens over a vector object, the lens itself becomes a vector image.
Likewise, if the lens is placed over a bitmap, the lens also becomes a bitmap. After you apply a lens, you
can copy it and use it with another object.
Lens
Description
Brighten
Lets you brighten and darken object areas and set the rate of the brightness and darkness
Color add
Lets you simulate an additive light model. The colors of the objects beneath the lens are
added to the color of the lens as if you were mixing colors of light. You can choose the
color and the amount of color you want to add.
Color limit
Lets you view an object area with only black and the lens color showing through. For
example, if you place a green color limit lens over a bitmap, all colors except green and
black are filtered out in the lens area.
Custom color
map
Lets you change all the colors of the object area beneath the lens to a color ranging
between two colors you specify. You can choose the range’s start and end colors and
the progression between the two colors. The progression can follow a direct, forward, or
reverse route through the color spectrum.
Fish eye
Lets you distort, magnify, or shrink the objects beneath the lens, according to the
percentage value you specify
Heat map
Lets you create the effect of an infrared image by mimicking the heat levels of colors in
object areas beneath the lens
Invert
Lets you change the colors beneath the lens to their complementary CMYK colors.
Complementary colors are colors that are opposite each other on the color wheel.
Magnify
Lets you magnify an area on an object by an amount that you specify. The magnify lens
overrides the original object’s fill, making the object look transparent.
Tinted
grayscale
Lets you change the colors of object areas beneath the lens to their grayscale
equivalents. Tinted grayscale lenses are particularly effective for creating sepia-tone
effects.
Transparency
Lets you make an object look like a piece of tinted film or colored glass
Wireframe
Lets you display the object area beneath the lens with the outline or fill color of your
choice. For example, if you set red for the outline and blue for the fill, all areas beneath
the lens appear to have red outlines and blue fills.
Tinted
grayscale
Lets you change the colors of object areas beneath the lens to their grayscale
equivalents. Tinted grayscale lenses are particularly effective for creating sepia-tone
effects.
Toapplyalens
Select an object.ÆClick EffectsÆLens. ÆChoose a lens type from the list box in the Lens docker.
ÆSpecify the settings you want.
You cannot apply the lens effect directly to linked groups such as contoured objects, beveled objects,
extruded objects, drop shadows, paragraph text, or objects created with the Artistic media tool. You can
preview the different types of lenses in real time without auto- applying them to a drawing by clicking
the Lock button and then choosing a lens and settings to preview. When you find the lens you want to
use, click Apply, or click the Lock button again to resume auto-applying the lenses while previewing
them.
Tocopyalens
Select the object to which you want to copy the lens. ÆClick Effects Copy effect Lens from. Æ Click
the object from which you want to copy the lens.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
819
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
CREATINGROLLOVERS
Rollovers are interactive objects that change in appearance when you click or point to them. You can
create rollovers using objects. To create a rollover, you add the following rollover states: Normal: The
default state of a button when no mouse activity is associated with the button.
Over: the state of a
button when the pointer passes over it. Down: the state of a clicked button
You can apply different object properties to each of the rollover states. You can also preview the rollover
states. To add a rollover object to a Web design, you must save the rollover to a the Macromedia Flash
(SWF) format.
Tocreatearolloverobject
Select an object. Æ Click Effects Rollover Create rollover.
Tomodifyanobject’srolloverstate
Click WindowÆToolbars Internet. ÆThe Internet toolbar appears. ÆClick the rollover object to select
it. ÆOn the Internet toolbar, click the Edit rollover button. ÆFrom the Active rollover state list box,
choose a state: normal/over/down Æ Modify the object properties, such as the color. Æ Click
the
Finish editing rollover button.
You can also
Delete a rollover state
On the Internet toolbar, click the Deletes rollover state
button .
Duplicate a rollover state
On the Internet toolbar, click the Duplicate states button .
Undo a rollover
On the Internet toolbar, click the Extract all objects from
rollover button .
Specify what frame appears when the
rollover is clicked
On the Internet toolbar, choose a target frame from the
Target frame list box.
You cannot close a drawing in which you are editing a rollover. You must finish editing first
Toviewrolloverproperties
Click WindowÆ DockersÆ Object manager.
ÆClick the page and layer where the rollover
resides. ÆClick the rollover name, and expand
the Normal, Over, and Down states.
You can preview a rollover object’s states in the
drawing page by clicking the Live preview of
rollovers button on the Internet toolbar. To quit
previewing the rollover so that you can edit it,
click the Live preview of rollovers button .
You cannot undo while previewing a rollover
POWERCLIP
CorelDRAW lets you place vector objects and bitmaps, such as photos, inside other objects, or frames. A
frame can be any object, for example artistic text or a rectangle. When the object is larger than the frame,
the object, called the contents, is cropped to fit the form of the frame. This creates a PowerClip object.
Fig 10.5 : Rollovers showing Normal (left), Over (center), and
Down (right) states
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
820
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
You can create more complex PowerClip objects by placing
one PowerClip object inside another PowerClip object to produce a nested PowerClip object. You can
also copy the contents of one PowerClip object to another PowerClip object.
Note : In the PowerClip object, the artistic text is
the frame, and the bitmap forms the contents. The
bitmap is shaped to the letters of the artistic text
You can create an empty PowerClip frame from an
object, or convert a PowerClip frame back to an
object. Creating empty PowerClip frames or text
frames is useful when you want to define the
layout of your document before adding the content.
After you create an empty PowerClip frame, you
can add contents to it. You can also add contents to a PowerClip frame that already contains another
object.
Note: Creating empty PowerClip frames and text frames is useful when you want to visualize your page layout
before adding the contents
: After you create a PowerClip object, you can select or edit its contents, or
reposition the contents inside the frame. Whenever a PowerClip object is
selected, a floating toolbar appears.
The PowerClip toolbar lets you edit, select, extract, lock, or reposition the contents inside the frame. The
toolbar appears whenever a PowerClip object is selected.
You can lock the PowerClip contents, so that when you move the frame, the content moves with it. If you
want to delete the contents of a PowerClip object or modify it without affecting the frame, you can
extract the contents.
TocreateaPowerClipobject
Select the object that you want to use as the PowerClip contents ÆGoto Effects menu ÆPowerClip Æ
place inside frame Æclick the object that you want to use as a frame.
If you want to create a nested PowerClip object, drag the PowerClip object inside another PowerClip
object, and hold down the W key as you release the mouse button to place the object inside the frame.
You can also right-click an object or a group of objects, click PowerClip inside, and then click the object
that you want to use as a container. If the content is placed so that it falls outside the frame in its current
position, it is automatically centered inside the frame to make it visible. To change this setting, click
Tools
Options, choose Edit in the Workspace list of categories, and set the options you want in the
PowerClip frame area.
TocreateanemptyPowerClipframe
Select an object that you want to use as a frame Æ select effects Æ PowerClip Æ create empty
PowerClip frame. You can also right-click the object, choose Frame type, and click Create empty
PowerClip frame. You. can also click the PowerClip frame button on the Layout toolbar. To open the
Layout toolbar, click Window
Toolbars
Layout or Layout
Layout toolbar.
Fig 10.6(a) :Original Artistic text and
image
Fig 10.6 (b) : PowerClipped image
Fig 10.7: Empty PowerClip frames and text frames
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
821
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
ToaddcontenttoaPowerClipframe
Drag an object to the PowerClip frame Æ when the object approaches the frame, the frame is highlighted
Æ to add the object to an empty PowerClip frame, release the mouse button. To add the objects to a full
PowerClip frame, hold down the W key as you release the mouse button.
You can also drag content to the PowerClip frame directly from Corel CONNECT, or from the Connect
docker If the content is placed so that it falls outside the frame, it is automatically centered inside the
frame to make it visible. To change this setting, click Tools
Options, choose Edit in the Workspace
list of categories, and set the options you want in the PowerClip frame area.
To convert a PowerClip frame back to an object
Right-click the PowerClip frame, chooses Frame type, and click None.
If the frame contains content, the content is deleted when the frame reverts to a regular object. To avoid
losing the content, you can first extract it from the PowerClip object You can also click the No frame
button on the Layout toolbar. To open the Layout toolbar, click Window
Toolbars
Layout or
Layout
Layout toolbar.
To select the contents of the PowerClip object
Select the PowerClip object Æ the PowerClip toolbar appears Æ click the select contents button on the
PowerClip toolbox
To position the contents inside the PowerClip frame
Select the PowerClip object Æ perform a task from the following table
To
Do the following
Center
the
contents
inside
the
PowerClip
frame
Click Effects
PowerClip
Center contents.
Fit the contents
proportionally
inside
the
PowerClip frame
Click Effects
PowerClip
Fit contents proportionally.
The content is resized so that its longest dimension fits inside the frame.
The content is not distorted, and its aspect ratio is preserved. The whole
content is visible, but there may be empty areas in the frame.
Fill
the
PowerClip frame
proportionally
Click Effects
PowerClip
Fill frame proportionally.
The content is resized so that it fills the frame without being distorted. The
content’s aspect ratio is preserved. The frame is full, but there may be parts
of the content that fall outside the frame and are not visible.
Fill
the
PowerClip frame
by stretching the
contents
Click Effects
PowerClip
Stretch contents to fill frame.
The content is resized and distorted so that it fills the frame. The content’s
aspect ratio is not preserved. The frame is full, and all of the content is
visible.
The Fit contents proportionally, Fill frame proportionally, and the Stretch contents to fill
frame commands modify the PowerClip contents. The content remains modified even if you
extract it from the frame. You can also position the contents by clicking the Fit contents button
on the PowerClip toolbar and clicking a command
To copy the contents of the PowerClip object: Select the object Æ goto effects menu Æ copy effect Æ
PowerClip from Æ click a PowerClip object.
To edit the contents of the PowerClip object: Select the object Æ goto effects menu Æedit PowerClip
Æ edit the contents of the PowerClip object Æ click effects menu Æ PowerClip Æfinish editing this
level.
While you edit the contents, the frame appears in Wireframe mode and cannot be selected or edited You
can also double-click the PowerClip object to enable it for editing, or select the PowerClip object and
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
822
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
click the Edit PowerClip button on the PowerClip toolbar. When you have finished editing the contents,
click the Stop editing contents button
To lock or unlock the contents of a PowerClip object: Select an PowerClip objectgs Æ goto effects
menu ÆPowerClip Æ lock contents to PowerClip.
If you move the frame while the content is unlocked, the content remains stationary and is not visible
until you move the frame over it You can also right-click a PowerClip object and click Lock contents to
PowerClip, or you can select the PowerClip object and click the Lock contents to PowerClip button on
the PowerClip toolbar.
To extract the contents of a PowerClip object: Select the PowerClip object Æ goto effects menu Æ
PowerClip Æ extract contents
The contents remains in the same location, but it is separated from the frame. The PowerClip frame
remains as an empty PowerClip frame. You must extract the contents of each level in a nested PowerClip
separately You can also select the PowerClip object and click the Extract contents button on the
PowerClip toolbar
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
823
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
CHAPTER 11
IMPORTING
WHYPROVIDETHESEDIFFERENTFORMATS?
A file format defines how an application stores information in a file. If you want to use a file created in a
different application than the one you are currently using, you must import that file. Conversely, if you
create a file in one application and want to use it in another application, you must export the file to a
different file format.
When you name a file, an application automatically appends a filename extension, usually three
characters in length; for example, .CDR, .BMP, .TIFF, AND .EPS. This filename extension helps you
and the computer differentiate between files of different formats.
IMPORTINGFILES
You can import files created in other applications. For example, you can import an Adobe Portable
Document Format (PDF), JPEG, or Adobe Illustrator (AI) file. You can import a file and place it in the
active application window as an object. You can also resize and center a file as you import it. The
imported file becomes part of the active file. You can also import a bitmap as an externally linked image.
When you import a linked bitmap, edits to the original (external) file are automatically updated in the
imported file.
While importing a bitmap, you can resample it to reduce the file size, or crop it to eliminate unused areas
of the image. You can also crop a bitmap to select only the exact area and size of the image that you want
to import.
When you import a file from an earlier version of CorelDRAW that contains text in a language different
from the language of your operating system, you can use code page settings to ensure that object names,
keywords, and notes saved with the file are displayed correctly.
To import a file into an active drawing
Click File
Import Æ Choose the folder where the file is stored
Working with bitmaps
You can convert a vector graphic to a bitmap. You can also import and crop bitmaps in CorelDRAW.
You can also add color masks, watermarks, and special effects, and you can change the color and tone of
the images.
CONVERTINGVECTORGRAPHICSTOBITMAPS
Converting a vector graphic or object to a bitmap lets you apply special effects to the object with
CorelDRAW. The process of converting a vector graphic to a bitmap is also known as “rasterizing.”
When you convert the vector graphic, you can select the color mode of the bitmap. A color mode
determines the number and kind of colors that make up the bitmap, so the file size is also affected. You
can also specify settings for such controls as dithering, anti-aliasing, overprinting black, and background
transparency. When you export a file to a bitmap file format, such as TIFF, JPEG, CPT, or PSD, the
same bitmap conversion options are available.
To convert a vector graphic to a bitmap
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
824
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
Select an object Æ Click Bitmaps
Convert to bitmap. Æ Choose a resolution from the Resolution
list box Æ Choose a color mode from the Color mode list box Æ Enable any of the following check
boxes:
Dithered — simulates a greater number of colors than those available. This option is available for
images that use 256 or fewer colors. Always overprint black — overprints black when black is the top
color. Enabling this option prevents gaps from appearing between black objects and underlying objects
when you print bitmaps. Anti-aliasing — smoothes the edges of the bitmap. Transparent background
— makes the background of the bitmap transparent .
You can change the black threshold for the Always overprint black option. If you export a vector file to
a bitmap format, such as GIF, you are prompted to set the bitmap conversion options described in the
procedure above before you export the file . Making the background of a bitmap transparent lets you see
images or a background otherwise obscured by the bitmap background
To convert a vector graphic to a bitmap when exporting
Click File
Export Æ Choose the folder where you want to save the file ÆChoose a bitmap file format
from the Save as type list box, and type a filename in the File name list box Æ Set the options you want,
and click Export. In the Convert to bitmap dialog box, type values in one of the following pairs of
boxes. Width and Height — let you specify the image dimensions. Width % and Height % — let you
resize the image to a percentage of its original size Æ To specify the resolution, type a value in the
Resolution box Æ Choose a color mode from the Color mode list box. Enable any of the following
check boxes: Dithered — simulates a greater number of colors than those available. This option is
available for images that use 256 or fewer colors. Always overprint black — overprints black when
black is the top color. Enabling this option when you print bitmaps prevents gaps from appearing
between black objects and underlying objects Æ In the Options area, enable anti-aliasing/ maintain
layers/ transparent background option: Anti-aliasing — smoothens the edges of the bitmap. Maintain
layers — preserves layers . Transparent background — makes the background of the bitmap
transparent.
You can change the black threshold for the Always overprint black option. Not all options in the
Convert to bitmap dialog box are available for all bitmap file formats. Making the background of a
bitmap transparent lets you see images or a background otherwise obscured by the bitmap background.
You can export a document as a PDF file. A PDF file can be viewed, shared, and printed on any platform
provided that users have Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Reader, or a PDF-compatible reader installed on their
computers. A PDF file can also be uploaded to an intranet or the Web. You can also export an individual
selection or an entire document to a PDF file.
When you export a document as a PDF file, you can choose from several PDF presets, which apply
specific settings. For example, with the Web preset, the resolution of the images in the PDF file is
optimized for the Web.
You can also create a new PDF preset or edit any existing preset. PDF file security settings are not saved
with a PDF preset. If you have used symbols in a document, they will be supported in the PDF file.
ToexportadocumentasaPDFfile
Click File
Export. / You can also save a PDF file by clicking File
Save as Æ Choose PDF - Adobe
Portable Document Format from the Save as type list box Æ Locate the folder in which you want to
save the file. Æ Type a filename in the File name box Æ Click Export
Exporting documents as PDF files
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
825
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
CREATINGOBJECTSFORTHEWEB
CorelDRAW lets you export objects that are optimized for viewing in a Web browser. You can also
create interactive rollovers from CorelDRAW objects. In addition, you can add hyperlinks and
bookmarks to a drawing. After creating the Web-compatible object in CorelDRAW, you can add the
object to a design using a Web-authoring tool. You can also export the object to HTML
Exporting to HTML
You can ensure that your CorelDRAW files and objects publish to HTML successfully by setting
document elements to be HTML-compatible, selecting the settings you want, and checking Preflight
issues. You can then publish to HTML. The resulting HTML code and images can be used in HTML
authoring software for creating a Web site or page.
Click File
Export HTML. Æ Set the following options in the Export HTML dialog box:
General — contains options for HTML layout, folders for HTML file and images, and FTP site and
export range. You can also select, add, and remove presets. Details — contains details of HTML files
produced, and allows you to change the page name and file name. Images — lists all images for the
current HTML export. You can set individual objects to JPEG, GIF, and PNG formats. Click Options to
select presets for each image type. Advanced — provides options for generating JavaScript for rollovers
and cascading style sheets, and maintaining links to external files. Summary — shows statistics for files
according to various download speeds. Issues — displays a list of potential issues, including
explanations, suggestions, and tips.
CorelDRAW assigns the extension .htm to documents you publish in the HTML format. By default,
HTML files share the same name as the CorelDRAW (CDR) source file and are saved in the last folder
you used to store exported Web documents
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
826
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
CHAPTER 12
PRINTING A DRAWING
PRINTINGYOURWORK
Using CorelDRAW, you can print one or more copies of the same drawing. You can also specify the
page type and the page range that you want to print. Before printing a drawing, you can specify printer
properties, including paper size and device options. For example, you can specify printer features such as
duplexing stapling.
Tosetprinterproperties
Click File Æ Print. Æ Click the General tab. Æ In the Destination area, choose a printer from the
Printer list box. Æ Click Preferences. Æ Set any properties in the dialog box.
Toprintyourwork
Click FileÆ Print. Æ Click the General tab. Æ In the Destination area, choose a printer from the
Printer list box. Æ In the Destination area, choose a page size and orientation option from the Page list
box. Æ In the Copies area, type a value in the Number of copies box. Æ If you want the copies collated,
enable the Collate check box. Æ In the Print range area, enable one of the following options:
Current document — prints the active drawing. Current page — prints the active page . Pages —
prints the pages that you specify. Documents — prints the documents that you specify . Selection —
prints the objects that you have selected.
If you enable the Pages option, you can choose to print a range of pages, only even pages, only odd
pages, or both even and odd pages. You can also automatically match the printer orientation to the
document orientation: In the Destination area, choose Match orientation from the Page list box. Apply
the printer’s default page size: In the Destination area, choose Use printer default from the Page list box.
LAYINGOUTPRINTJOBS
You can lay out a print job by specifying the size, position, and scale. Tiling a print job prints portions of
each page on separate sheets of paper that you can assemble into one sheet. You would, for example, tile
a print job that is larger than your printer paper.
Click File ÆPrint. Æ Click the Layout tab.Æ In the Image position and size area, enable either As in
document/fit to page/ reposition images to options: As in document: maintains the image size as it is in
the document .Fit to page: sizes and positions the print job to fit to a printed page. Reposition images
to: lets you reposition the print job by choosing a position from the list box .Enabling the Reposition
images to option lets you specify size, position, and scale in the corresponding boxes. Æ You can also
choose an imposition layout, such as 2 x 2 (4-up) or 2 x 3 (6-up), from the Imposition layout list box. For
more information, see Working with imposition layouts.
Tospecifythesizeandpositionofaprintjob
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
827
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
Click FileÆPrint. ÆClick the Layout tab. ÆIn the Image position and size area, enable the Print
tiled pages check box. ÆType values in the following boxes: Tile overlap — lets you specify the
amount by which to overlap tiles. % of page width — lets you specify the percentage of the page width
the tiles will occupy. You can include tiling alignment marks by enabling the Tiling marks check box.
PREVIEWINGPRINTJOBS
You can preview your work to show how the position and size of the print job will appear on paper. For a
detailed view, you can zoom in on an area. You can view how the individual color separations will
appear when printed. Before printing your work, you can view a summary of issues for a print job to find
potential printing problems. For example, you can check the current print job for print errors, possible
print problems, and suggestions for resolving issues.
Topreviewaprintjob
• Click FileÆPrint preview. Æ To close the print preview, click File Close print preview.
You can quickly preview a print job in the Print dialog box by clicking File Print and clicking the Mini
preview button .
Tomagnifythepreviewpage
Click FileÆ Print preview. ÆClick ViewÆ Zoom. Æ Enable the Percent option, and type a value in the
box.
You can also magnify the preview page by choosing a preset zoom level. You can also zoom in on a
portion of the print preview by clicking the Zoom tool in the toolbox and marquee selecting an area.
Topreviewcolorseparations
Click FileÆPrint preview. Æ On the property bar, click the Enable color separations button.
You can preview the composite by clicking ViewÆPreview separationsÆComposite. You can view
individual color separations by clicking the tabs at the bottom of the application window.
Toviewasummaryofissuesforaprintjob
Click FileÆ Print. Æ Click the Preflight tab.
If there are no print job issues, the tab name displays as No issues. If there are issues, the tab name
displays the number of issues that were found. If you want to exclude certain issues from the preflight
check, click Settings, double-click Printing, and disable any check boxes that correspond to issues you
want overlooked.
APPLYINGPRINTSTYLES
A print style is a set of saved printing options. Each print style is a separate file. This lets you move a
print style from one computer to another, back up a print style, and keep document-specific styles in the
same directory as the document file. You can select an existing print style, create a new print style, or
edit a print style and save the changes. You can also delete print styles.
Totileaprintjob
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
828
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
Tochooseaprintstyle
Click FileÆ Print. Æ Click the General tab. Æ Choose coreldraw defaults/ browse from the Print style
list box:
Tocreateaprintstyle
Click FileÆPrint. Æ Click the General tab. Æ Set any printing options.Æ Click Save asÆ Choose the
folder where you want to save the print style. Æ Type a name for the style in the Filename box. You can
also save a print style by clicking File Print preview, and clicking the Save print style as button.
Toeditaprintstyle
Click FileÆPrint. Æ Choose a print style from the Print style list box. ÆModify any of the printing
options. ÆClick Save as. ÆChoose the folder where the print style is stored. ÆClick the filename. Æ
Click Save.
You should save the modified settings as a print style or apply the changes before canceling; otherwise,
you’ll lose all the modified settings.
Todeleteaprintstyle
Click FileÆPrint preview. ÆSelect a print style. ÆClick the Delete print style button .
PRINTINGCOLORSEPARATIONS
When you send color work to a print service provider or printing shop, either you or the print service
provider must create color separations. Color separations are necessary because a typical printing press
applies only one color of ink at a time to a sheet of paper. You can specify the color separations to print,
including the order in which they print. Printing presses produce color using either process color or spot
color, or both. You can convert the spot colors to process colors at printing time. When setting halftone
screens to print color separations, we recommend that you use the default settings; otherwise, screens can
be improperly set and result in undesirable moiré patterns and poor color reproduction. However, if you
are using an image setter, the screen technology should be set to match the type of image setter the print
service provider uses. Before customizing a halftone screen, consult the print service provider to
determine the correct setting. If you have overprinted areas, you can choose how you want those areas to
print. For more information about overprinting, see Working with color trapping and overprinting.
Toprintcolorseparations
Click FileÆPrint. ÆClick the Color tab. Æ Enable the Print separations option.
If you want to print specific color separations, click the Separations tab, and enable the corresponding
check box in the list of color separations. You can change the order in which color separations print, by
enabling the Use advanced settings check box in the Options area. In the separations list at the bottom of
the dialog box, click in the Order column next to the color separation that you want to change. Chose a
new order value from the list box. If you want to print separations using a color profile that is different
from the document color profile, you can click the Color tab and choose a color profile from the Correct
colors using color profile list box.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
829
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
Toconvertspotcolorstoprocesscolors
Click FileÆ Print. ÆClick the Color tab. ÆEnable the Print separations option. ÆEnable the Convert
spot colors to check box.
Changing the spot colors to process colors does not affect the original CorelDRAW file; it affects the
way colors are sent to the printer.
Tocustomizeahalftonescreen
Click FileÆPrint. ÆClick the Color tab. ÆEnable the Print separations option. ÆClick the Separations
tab. ÆIn the Options area, enable the Use advanced settings check box. Click Advanced. ÆChange any
of the Screening technology/resolution/ basic screen/ halftone type settings:
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
830
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
159 | P a g e
WORKINGWITHSHORTCUTKEYS
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
831
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
832
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
833
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
834
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
835
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
836
¨sÁUÀ 1
CHAPTER 1 PHOTOSHOP CS6
Introduction
Photoshop cs6 requirements
Starting photoshop cs6
Setting up the document
Create a new document
Interface
Photoshop tool bar
Screen modes
Saving files
Reverting files
Closing a file
CHAPTER 2 INTRODUCTION TO PALETTES
The Tools palette
Photoshop workspace
CHAPTER 3 LAYERS
Navigating and organizing layers
Types of layers
Parts of a layer
Layer features
CHAPTER 4 TOOLS PANEL
Overview and functions of tools panel
Selection tools
Crop and slice tools
Retouching tools
Painting tools
Working with brushes
Drawing and type tools
When you should use vector path tools
Annotation & measuring tools
Navigation tools
Converting type layer to standard layer
CHAPTER 5 WORKING WITH IMAGES
Vector and bitmap images
Understanding image resolution
Change the size of a document
Editing images
Changing the canvas size
Transformation of objects in photoshop
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
837
¨sÁUÀ 1
Fast scanning in photoshop
Selecting foreground and background colors
Using color picker palette
Using eyedropper tool
Using swatches palette
Selecting colors using swatches palette
CHAPTER 6 PHOTOSHOP COLOR MODES
Rgb color mode:
Cmyk color mode:
Indexed color mode:
Grayscale color mode
Duotone color mode
Bitmap color mode
Lab color mode
Multichannel color mode
Making color adjustments
Adjustments panel overview
Color adjustment commands:
CHAPTER 7
USING FILTERS AND AUTOMATE COMMANDS
Using filters
Filter gallery
Artistic filters
Blur filters
Brush stroke filters
Distort filters
Noise filters
Pixelate filters
Render filters
Sharpen filters
Sketch filters
Stylize filters
Texture filters
Other filters
Digimarc filters
CHAPTER 8 ACTIONS
Guidelines for recording actions
Photoshop Menus
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
838
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
PHOTOSHOP
CS6
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
839
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
CHAPTER 1
PHOTOSHOP CS6
INTRODUCTION
Photoshop is a Raster graphics editor (Bitmap) developed and published by Adobe Systems.
Photoshop is a massive program and it would take a volume of several thousand pages to cover every
parameter of every function. It is a powerful Image editing software for multimedia professionals like
photographers, designers, etc., With this software we can explore our creativity and achieve the highest
quality results. As you begin the process of learning Photoshop, you will quickly come to realize that,
there are often multiple way of accomplishing the same task. It is not necessary for you to learn all the
different ways; you only need to remember any one method that fits with the way we prefer to work. This
may be menus, icons, right clicking, keyboard shortcut; it is completely upto the user’s choice.
Photoshop’s ability to manipulate digital Images, restore old photographs, and we can create
digital artwork from scratch. The Images created with any digital camera or photographic film Images
converted to digital format through the use of a scanner. Once an Image is opened in Photoshop, the
designer can manipulate the Image in different ways, such as correcting color, Reducing dust and
scratches in an old Image, you can generate JPEG, PNG or GIF Image assets from the contents of a
Layer or Layer group from a Photoshop file. Photoshop files have default file extension as .PSD, which
stands for "Photoshop Document." A PSD file has a maximum height and width of 30,000 Pixels, and a
length limit of 2 Gigabytes.
Because of Photoshop's popularity, PSD files are widely used and supported by most competing
software. The .PSD file format can be exported to and from Adobe's other apps like Adobe
Illustrator, Adobe InDesign, and After Effects, to make professional standard DVDs and provide non-
linear editing and special effects services, such as Backgrounds, textures, and so on, for television, film,
and Internet.
Photoshop's primary strength is as a Pixel-based Image editor, unlike vector-based Image editors.
Photoshop also enables vector graphics editing through its Paths, Pen Tools, Shape Tools, Shape Layers,
Type Tools, Import command, and Smart Object functions. These Tools and commands are convenient to
combine Pixel-based and vector-based Images in one Photoshop document, because it may not be
necessary to use more than one program. To create very complex vector graphics with numerous Shapes
and colors, it may be easier to use software that was created primarily for that purpose, such as Adobe
Illustrator, Corel DRAW. Photoshop's non-destructive Smart Objects can also import complex vector
Shapes
PHOTOSHOP CS6 REQUIREMENTS
Intel P4 or AMD Athlon 64 Processor or more
Microsoft Windows 7 with SP 1 or more
1 GB RAM, Hard Disk space for installation
1024 X 768 display(1280 X 800 recommended) with 16 bit color and 512 MB or more RAM
Internet Connection
DVD drive
OpenGL 2.0 capable system
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
840
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
STARTING PHOTOSHOP CS6
Click on Start Button Programs Adobe Photoshop CS6
SETTING UP THE DOCUMENT
Setting up your document correctly from the start will make your job much easier as you work
through your project. This will require some advanced planning. For example, if your final output will be
a brochure, you may need to set up your document to be Horizontal and double-sided.
CREATE A NEW DOCUMENT
Click File menu New. This will
open the Document Setup dialog box. Here
you will be able to name your file, Select the
Preset set up the correct page size(specify
width and height)for your document, Page
size represents the final size you want after
bleeds or trimming other marks outside the
page. In the Preset dropdown menu you can
find such common sizes as letter, legal,
tabloid, etc. Typing in exact values for
Height and Width gives you more control
over the Size and Orientation of your page.
Resolution : Resolution is the number of Pixels on a printed area of an Image. The higher the resolution,
the more Pixels there are on the page, the better the quality of the Image. However, high resolution
increases the size of the file. The standard recommended resolution for printed Images is 150-300, for
Web Images it is 72. Color Mode Choose a color mode that will best fit your project. For example, when
making a graphic for a web site, choose RGB. When making an Image for print choose CMYK.
Background Contents Choose the Background: white, color or Transparent. When you have enteRed all
the details, press OK button.
INTERFACE
Adobe Photoshop is a powerful
Tool for editing photographs and
graphics. The first step in learning
Photoshop is to familiarize user self
with the Photoshop Interface, which
consist of 5 basic components:
Menu
Bar:
It
contains
all
of
Photoshop’s available options.
Tool Bar: It has various Tools for
editing the Image.
Fig 1.1 : Photoshop Document Setup Window
Fig 1.2 : Photoshop Interface
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
841
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
Options Bar: Set the options for the currently selected Tool.
Palettes/Panels: Palettes contain functions that help you monitor and modify Images. It has various
panes to control different aspect of the projects and includes Layers, channels, paths, history, etc. By
default, Palettes are stacked together in groups. The Palettes that are usually visible are: Color,
Adjustments and Layers. If none of the Palettes are visible, goto Window Menu choose the Palettes
you need.
Image Window: Contains the Image to be edited.
Rulers: helps you position Images or elements precisely. Rulers appear along the top and left side of the
Image window. If not viewed, Click View Menu Rulers or Ctrl+R.
Status bar: displayed at the bottom of document window and displays useful information such as
current magnification, file size, etc.,
PHOTOSHOP TOOL BAR
If the Tool Bar is not visible, click
Window Menu Tools, the Tool Bar will be
displayed.
The Tool Bar is illustrated below. Note
that the actual Tools displayed will depend on the
settings left by the last user. In most instances,
clicking and holding on one of the buttons can
access several Tools. This illustration shows many
of the typical Tools.
In Photoshop CS6 the Toolbar may be
displayed in one of two ways. A long narrow Tool
bar may appear when the Tools option is selected
from the menu under Window. The Tool Bar can
also be set to a have a more compact appearance.
The Images below illustrate the differences.
A small pair of
arrow heads above and
to the left of the Tool Bar control whether the Tool Bar is extended or
compact. When the arrows point to the left, the Tool Bar is compact. When
they point to the right, the Toolbar is extended.
Some Tools in the Toolbar have additional “hidden” Tools. These
Tools have small triangles in the lower right-hand corner, these are called
as flyouts. To view the “hidden” Tools, click and hold down on any Tool
that has flyout.
Fig 1.3 : Modes of Photoshop Toolbar
Left : Compact Mode Right : Extended Mode
Fig 1.4 : Paintbucket Flyout
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
842
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
Many of the buttons on the Toolbar control more than one Tool or different modes for the same
Tool. Example: the Paint Bucket Tool
button hides the button for the Gradient Tool. Click either
the Paint Bucket button or the Gradient Tool button, whichever is displayed. A popout menu will appear
for you to select.
NAME
PURPOSE
Rectangular Marquee Tool (M)
Used for making Rectangular or Square selection
Elliptical Marquee Tool (M)
Used for making Circular or Elliptical selection
Single Row Marquee Tool
Use to make Single Row selection
Single Column Marquee Tool
Use to make Single Column selection
Move Tool (V)
Use to Move Image or objects
Lasso Tool (L)
Use to make Free form selection with a mouse click
Polygonal Lasso Tool (L)
Use to make Straight edge selection
Magnetic Lasso Tool (L)
Use to make Automatic Free form selection on edges
Magic Wand Tool (W)
Use to select similar color in an Image
Crop Tool (C)
Use to Crop an Image
Slice Tool (C)
Use to create Slices in an Image
Slice Select Tool (C)
Use to select Slices in an Image
Spot Healing Brush Tool (J)
Use to remove imperfections & blemishes from an Image
Healing Brush Tool (J)
Use to Repair Pixels by Blending them seamlessly
Patch Tool (J)
Use to repair the selected area with Pixel of another area
Red Eye Tool (J)
Use to remove Red Eye effect from an Image
Brush Tool (B)
Use to paint an Image with specified color
Pencil Tool (B)
Use to paint hard-edged Stroke
Color Replacement Tool (B)
Use to replace specific colors
Clone stamp Tool (S)
Use to Clone and duplicate the selected area
Pattern Stamp Tool (S)
Use to Paint an Image using source specified in History state
History Brush Tool (Y)
Use to Erase some region from an Image
Art History Tool (Y)
Use to Erase Pixels from similar Colored area
Erase Tool (E)
Use to Fill Gradients
Paint Bucket Tool (G)
Use to Fill with Foreground color
Blur Tool
Use to blur an Image
Sharpen Tool
Use to sharpen an Image
Smudge Tool
Use to smudge an Image as if it is retouched by a finger
Dodge Tool (O)
Use to lighten Pixels in an Image
Burn Tool(O)
Use to darken Pixel in an Image
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
843
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
NAME
PURPOSE
Sponge Tool(O)
Use to change the saturation of color in a selection area
Path selection Tool (A)
Use to path, with all Anchor points, created by Pen Tool
Direct Selection Tool (A)
Use to change Anchor’s placement in a path created by Pen Tool
Horizontal Type Tool (T)
Use to type in Horizontal way
Vertical Type Tool(T)
Use to type text in Vertical way
Horizontal Type Mask Tool (T)
To create a selection in the shape of type in a Horizontal text
Vertical Type Mask Tool (T)
To create a selection in the shape of type in a Vertical text
Pen Tool (P)
Use to create Lines and Curves with automatic Anchor points
Freedom Pen Tool (P)
To create Lines and Curves with automatic Anchor points
Add Anchor point Tool
Use to add Anchor points in a path created by Pen Tool
Delete Anchor Point
Use to delete Anchor points from a path created by Pen Tool
Convert Point Tool
Use to reshape Curves in a path created by Pen Tool
Rectangle Tool (Shape) (U)
Use to draw Rectangle or Square Shapes
Round Rectangle Tool (U)
Use to draw Round edged Rectangle or Square Shapes
Ellipse Tool( U)
Use to draw Round or Elliptical Shapes
Polygon Tool (U)
Use to draw Polygonal Shape
Line Tool (U)
Use to draw Straight Lines
Custom Shape Tool (U)
Use to draw custom Shapes
Notes Tool (I)
Use to add text note in an Image
Audio Annotation Tool
Use to add Audible a Note in an Image
Eye Dropper Tool (II)
Use to select color from an Image
Color Sampler Tool (I)
Use to create color samplers in an Image
Measure Tool (I)
Position an Image precisely between any two points
Hand Tool (H)
Use to navigate in an Image
Zoom Tool (Z)
Use to Zoom out an Image
Set Back and Foreground Colors
Select and toggle between Back and Foreground colors
Edit in Standard Mode
Use to edit an Image in Standard Screen Mode
Edit in Quick mask Mode
Use to edit an Image in quick Mask Mode
Standard Screen Mode
Use to view an Image in standard Screen Mode
Full Screen Mode with Menu bar
Use to view an Image in full Screen Mode with menu bar
Full Screen Mode
Use to view an Image in full Screen Mode without menu bar
Edit in Image Ready
Use to open and edit an Image in Image Ready
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
844
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
SCREEN MODES
The term Screen Modes, refers to the way of viewing the documents. Photoshop provides three
types of Screen Modes. To change from one mode to another, we use the Screen Mode Flyout at the
bottom of the Tools Panel and select the requiRed mode
This is the default mode for viewing documents. In standard mode, a document appears in its
standard form. In this mode, an Image is displayed with all the screen components, such as title bar,
menu bar etc. To view an Image in this mode, click on the Screen Mode button on the Tools Panel and
select Standard Screen Mode.
To see an Image in this mode, click on the Screen Mode Button on the Tools Panel and select
Full Screen Mode with Menu Bar. Observe that the Title bars of Photoshop program and recently open
file disappears and light Grey Background Fills empty area around the Image
To display an Image in full Screen Mode, click on the Screen Mode Button on the Tools Panel
and select Full Screen Mode. In this mode, we can see the Image set against a neutral Black
Background. The Title bar, Menu bar and Taskbar - all disappear, but we can still see the Toolbox,
Options bar, and different Palettes on the screen.
We can also switch between different modes by click View Menu Screen Modes click on
the requiRed Screen Mode.
SAVING FILES
To save a file undertake the steps given below:
1.
Click on the File menu in the menu bar. The list of options appears. Click on the Save option
from this list The Save As dialog box appears on the screen
By default, all file gets saved in My Documents Folder. However, you may select your own desiRed folder
to save the file.
2.
Type a File name in the box beside the File Name option Click on the save button. The
Save As dialog box closes and the file is saved with the specified name under the specified
folder.
REVERTING FILES
Many a times, we accidentally make unwanted changes to our files. If the number of changes is
large, rectifying each and every change consumes a lot of time. To avoid this waste of time and effort,
we can use the Revert option of the File menu. This option will ignore all the changes we have made and
will transform the file to its last saved version. To revert a file, you many undertake the following steps:
Standard Screen Mode
Full Screen Mode with Menu Bar
Full Screen Mode
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
845
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
Click on the File menu in the menu bar. Select Revert option. The current file is reverted to
its last saved version.
CLOSING A FILE
After saving the changes we have made to our file, we can close it. The content of the file
remains unchanged until we open it again and make changes to it. Let us see how to close a file. To
close a file, you may undertake the following steps:
Click on the File menu. Move the mouse pointer over the Close option and click the left
mouse-button.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
846
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
CHAPTER 2
INTRODUCTION TO PALETTES
Photoshop contains over two dozen Palettes that can be shown or hidden by using
the Window menu and selecting the Palette you wish to reveal. Palettes with a checkmark beside their
names indicate that they are open in your Photoshop workspace and
clicking those check marked Palettes will hide them.
Palettes can be organized in many different ways in the
Photoshop workspace. One way is by grouping several Palettes
together in a window and in tabs. If you look at the Image, notice that
next
to
the Layers Palette there
are
tabs
for
the Channels and Paths Palettes
which
are
grouped
in
the
single Palette window. Additionally, Palettes can be collapsed or
minimized in your Photoshop workspace and can be hard to
locate. Collapsed Palettes will appear as icons and can be expanded
by clicking on the icon of the Palette.
THE TOOLS PALETTE
It is the Palette that houses all of Photoshop's wonderful Tools.
Click on the Tool icon to select that Tool.
Point your cursor over the Tool icon to reveal its name and (keyboard shortcut).
Click and hold down on any Tool icon that has a white triangle in the bottom
right to reveal related tools nested underneath.
THE OPTIONS PALETTE
Think of the Options Palette as the sidekick to the Tools Palette. Whenever you select a Tool
from the Tools Palette, the Options Palette will display all of the options for that selected Tool. Ex: if you
select the Type Tool, the Options Palette will display options related to text such as font, type size, color
and more options as shown below.
The Options Palette is located just below your Menu bar. It's conveniently located so that you
can quickly and easily adjust your Tool's properties as you use them.
Note: If you ever find your Tools or Options Palettes missing, Go to Window menu select either
Tools or Options from the list to reveal the Palettes.
Fig 2.1 : Layer Palette
Fig 2.2 : Tools Palette
Fig 2.3 : Options Palette
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
847
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
LAYERS AND ADJUSTMENTS PALETTES
The Layers Palette is the home for all of your Layer information
where it can be stoRed and organized. It lists all Layers in an Image, and a
thumbnail of Layer contents appears to the left of the Layer name. You use
the Layers Palette to Create, Hide, Display, Copy, Merge, and Delete
Layers.
The Adjustments Palette is where you
would select Adjustments that you wish to
apply to Layers. This Palette includes many
different Adjustments including Exposure,
Color balance, Saturation, and Brightness/
Contrast.
COLOR PALETTE
The Color Palette is where you can select and change
our Foreground and Background colors that will be used with
brushes and Fills. Look at the screenshot of the Color
Palette shown and take note of the two stacked boxes, shown as
Black and white. Here top box (Black) is the Foreground color
and the bottom box (white) is the Background color.
Note: Click on the list icon (
) in the Color Palette to change
the color mode from RGB to CMYK, Grayscale, Lab, and more.
To change the color, select either the Foreground and
Background color box in the Color Palette by clicking on it. Then,
use either the sliders or click in the spectrum below the sliders to
select a new color. If you do not like using the sliders, double
click on a color box to bring up the Color Picker
Also know that you can select and change
Foreground and Background colors within your Tools
Palette by using this mini color Palette located near the
bottom of the Tools Palette.
SWATCHES PALETTE
The Swatches Palette stores colors that you need to use often. You can add or delete colors from
the Palette or display different libraries of colors for different projects.
HISTORY PALETTE
The History Palette is a log of all the Actions you perform within Photoshop. By default,
the History Palette contains the last 20 changes to your Image. Each time you change the Image, a new
state is added to the History Palette. To jump to a particular state, click on that state name in the History
Palette and all other Actions after that state will become Greyed out and italicized.
Fig 2.4 : Adjustment Palette
Fig 2.5 : Layers Palette
Fig 2.6 (a): Color Palette
Fig 2.6 (b) : Color Picker Dialog Box
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
848
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
Note: If you go back to a previous state and then perform a new action, you will record over all previous
Actions and edits.
The Snapshot command lets you take a snapshot of any state in the History Palette of your
Image. The new snapshot is added to a list of snapshots located at the top of History Palette. To create a
snapshot:
1. Select the state that you want to capture.
2. Click the New Snapshot icon (
) at the bottom of History Palette
Note : When you close the Image file, the snapshots and states in the History Palette are not saved.
HISTOGRAM PALETTE
A Histogram illustrates how Pixels in an Image are distributed by graphing the number of Pixels
at each color intensity level. The Histogram Palette shows whether the Image contains enough detail in
the shadows (shown in the left part of the Histogram), Midtones (shown in the middle), and Highlights
(Shown in the right part of the Histogram) to make a good correction.
NAVIGATOR PALETTE
The Navigator Palette is used for navigating through an Image. It provides a handy Tool, all in
one Tool for scrolling and zooming. It is especially used when we are working on a large Image that
does not fit entirely on the screen.
INFO PALETTE
The Info Palette shows the color values beneath the pointer and depending on the Tool in use,
gives other useful information like hint on using selected Tool, it gives document status information and
can display 8 bit, 16 bit or 32 bit values.
STYLES PALETTE
You can view and select preset styles from the Styles Palette.
Fig : 2.7 : [Left Image: Shows the current state and recent Actions performed | Right
Image: Shows going back to a previous state]
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
849
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
ACTION PALETTE
You use the Actions Palette to record, play, edit, and delete individual Actions (Fig.PS-1-23).
This Palette also lets you save and load action files. You can use the Actions Palette for the following
purposes:
To expand and collapse sets , Actions, and commands, Click the triangle to the left of the set,
Actions Palette. Alt-click the triangle to expand or collapse all Actions in a set or all commands
in an action.
To display Actions as buttons, choose Button Mode from the Actions Palette menu. Choose
Button Mode again to return to list mode. You can’t view individual commands or sets in
Button mode.
To select Actions in the Action Palette, click an action name. Ctrl-click action names to select
multiple, non-contiguous Actions. Shift-click action names to select multiple, contiguous
Actions.
CHANNELS PALETTE
The Channels Palette lets you create and manage channels. The Palette lists all channels in the
Image – composite channel first (for RGB, CMYK, and Lab Images). A thumbnail of the channel’s
contents appears to the left of the channel name: the thumbnails automatically updated as you edit the
channel.
You can use the Channels Palette for following purposes:
You can use the Palette to view any combination of channels in the document window. For
example, you can view an Alpha channel and the composite channel together to see how
changes made in the Alpha channel relate to the entire Image.
Individual channels are displayed in Grayscale. In RGB, CMYK or Lab Images, you can view
the individual channels in color. If more than one channel is active, the channels always appear
in color.
You can change the default to show the individual color channels in color. When a channel is
visible in the Image, an eye icon appears to its left in the Palette.
In Alpha channels, selected Pixels appear as white; unselected Pixels appear as Black (partially
selected Pixels appear as Grey). These are the channel default options.
If you display an Alpha channels at the same time as color channel, the Alpha channel appears
as a Transparent color overlay, analogous to a printer’s rubylith or a sheet of acetate. To
change the color of this overlay or set other Alpha channel options, choose channel options
from the channel Palette menu
PATHS PALETTE
The paths Palette lists the name and the thumbnails Image of each save paths, the current work
paths, and the current vector mask. Turning thumbnails off can improve performance.
PHOTOSHOP WORKSPACE
You create and manipulate your documents and files using various elements, such as
panels/Palettes, bars, and windows. Any arrangement of these elements is called a workspace. (The
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
850
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
workspaces of different Adobe applications share similar appearances so that you can move between the
applications easily.)
Depending on how you work, your workspace may reflect any combination. For example, when
you work with text, you would need the Character and Paragraph panels, but you might not need the
Styles or Histogram panel.
Rather than making you Redesign your workspace every time you begin a new project,
Photoshop gives you ways to use pRedefined workspaces or create your own customized workspaces.
Photoshop includes pRedefined workspaces including Essentials (Default),New in Cs6,Design, Painting,
What’s New, 3D, Motion, Photography, and Typography.
To view workspace, click on Window Menu Workspaces select any one workspace sub
menu. When you create or change a workspace, Photoshop auto-saves any changes (even if you exit
Photoshop) until you reset it.
To create a new workspace
Arrange the panels into a specific working order click on Window Menu Workspace
New Workspace Type a name for the workspace. The names of saved workspaces appear in the
workspace list.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
851
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
CHAPTER 3
LAYERS
Layers are one of Photoshop’s
most powerful features as they are
individual slices of information that can be
stacked or moved to create your Image
composition. With Layers, you can Draw,
Edit, Paste, and Reposition elements on
one Layer without disturbing the others.
This graphic shows how Layers would be stacked to create a composite. Layers contain both Transparent
and Opaque elements, so keep this in mind when stacking. Looking at the example, notice that the top
Layer that contains text saying, "Photoshop 'till you drop!". Only the text in that Layer is Opaque and the
rest of the Layer is Transparent so that information below it - the person, cursor, and Background color
are still seen. In Photoshop, Transparency is identified by a white and Grey checkeRed pattern .
NAVIGATING AND ORGANIZING LAYERS
The organization of Layers and the ability to easily navigate are
very important factors when working with Layers. This section will show
you, how to select, move, create folders, search, and organize Layers.
Selecting a Layer
In order to perform any action in Photoshop, you first need to select a
Layer. To select a Layer, just click on Layer in the Layers Palette. The
Layer will turn Blue to indicate that it has been selected. To select
several Layers, hold down the CTRL key on your keyboard and click
on each Layer you would like to have selected. To select consecutive
Layers, select the first Layer and then hold the SHIFT key and select the
last Layer.
Moving Layers
It is important to know how to move Layers, so that you are able to
change the order of them as needed.
Select the Layer(s) you wish to move.
Click and hold your mouse and drag the Layer to the desiRed position.
A thick line will appear between Layers to indicate where the Layer
will be dropped. Once you have the Layer where you want it, release your
mouse and the Layer will be moved to the new location.
Almost every Photoshop document has more than one Layer and those Layers can quickly become
overwhelming and make it hard to find anything. Fortunately, there are some Tools that helps to find
different types of Layers
Finding Layers
Fig 3.1 : Example of a Selected
Layer
Fig 3.1(b) : Dragging the
Selected Layer
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
852
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
Click on the Search Dropdown (
): to select whether you
want to search Layers by Kind, Name, Effect, Mode, Attribute, or
Color. After selecting a search method, use the options to the right of
the Search Dropdown to select additional attributes to return search results.
Another feature to keep your Layers organized is to create folders,
also known as groups. You can add Layers to a group and organize them
however you wish.
Create a new folder by clicking the "Create a new group" button (
)
at the bottom of the Layers Palette.
Drag Layers onto the group folder Layer, to add them to the group.
Double-click on the Group Name in the Layers Palette to rename it.
TYPES OF LAYERS
There are many types of Layers! Some Layers are pieces of a
final Image that you are putting together, some are shape or text Layers
(created automatically), and some are Fill or Adjustment Layers. Fill or
Adjustment Layers allow you to play with different colors or effects
without changing your main Image. If you change your mind, you can
delete or alter the Fill or Adjustment Layer, and your original Image
Layer is still intact.
Background Layer
Whenever you first open an Image in Photoshop, the default
Layer containing that Image will be called the Background Layer and
this Layer is Protected or Locked, many filters and effects cannot be
applied to Background Layers. To unprotect the Background, double-click Layer's name in the Layers
Palette, a dialog box will appear where you can change the Layer Name and other details if you'd like,
click OK and your Layer will now be unprotected.
Image Layer
Image Layers are Layers that contain any Image information.
Whenever we create a new Layer, by default it is an Image Layer.
The Layer Thumbnail of Image Layers contains a preview of the
contents of that Layer
Adjustment Layer
Adjustment Layers are Layers that contain only Image
Adjustment information and can be deleted or modified at any
time. Adjustment Layers are a recommended way to make color and
tone Adjustments to your Images because they are non-destructive to your Image. Adjustment
Layers are very flexible by allowing the user to easily modify, mask or delete them. Double clicking on
the Layer Thumbnail will allow you to make changes to the Adjustment Layer.
Creating Groups
Fig 3.2(a): Search Box and
Create new group
Fig 3.2(b) : Drag Layers into new
group
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
853
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
Type Layer
Type Layers contain only Text type. They can be created
and edited through the use of the Type Tool (
).
Fill Layer
Fill Layers can contain Solid colors, Gradients, or Patterns.
Create a new Fill Layer by going to Layer in the menu and
selecting New
Fill
Layer and
selecting
either Solid
Color, Gradient, or Pattern.
Shape Layer
Shape Layers contain Shapes drawn using the Shape Tools.
To edit a shape Layer, select the Layer and the Shape Tool for
options.
PARTS OF A LAYER
Understanding the parts of the Layer will help you better understand many Layer features and
how Layers work. Layers are more than just a singular objects, but they can contain many parts and
features that help you use Layers to your full advantage. A screenshot of a Layer and an explanation of
all the major parts and features and shown
below.
Layer Thumbnail
This thumbnail shows the contents of the
current Layer or Adjustment icon if it is an
Adjustment Layer.
Tip: Press the CTRL key and click on
the Layer. Thumbnail to create a selection of
all the contents of that Layer.
Layer Mask
A Layer Mask is like the stencil to a Layer. Layer Masks allow
certain parts of a particular Layer to be shown or hidden. Areas of white in
the masks are displayed, while areas of Black are hidden.
Looking at Layer Masks
Without a Layer Mask, the entire Image would have an orange
Fill. With a Layer Mask, you can indicate which parts of the Layer should
be shown (white) and which areas should be hidden (Black). Look at the
circular Layer Mask in the Image to the left and compare it to the orange
Circle on the Image to see how the mask works.
Create a new mask by selecting a Layer and then clicking the (
)
icon at the bottom of the Layers Palette.
Fig : 3.4: Layer Mask
Fig 3.3 :Layer Thumbnail
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
854
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
Edit a mask by selecting the Layer Mask Thumbnail within the Layer and use the paintbrush to paint
Tip: Press CTRL key and click on the mask thumbnail to create a selection of all the contents of that
mask.
Change
Mask
Properties by
going
to Window and
then
selecting Properties to reveal the Properties Palette.
Layer Name : This indicates the name of the Layer. By default,
the name will be determined by the type of Layer it is.
Rename a Layer by double-clicking on the Layer Nametype a
new name Press ENTER key.
Hide or Show a Layer by clicking on the eyeball icon to toggle
visibility. This is a handy Layer feature that allows to show/hide
particular Layers without having to delete them.
Layer and Mask Link : This link icon appears whenever you add
a Layer Mask to a Layer. The link helps ensure that any changes
to the Layer is also applied to the Layer mask.
Link or Unlink a Layer Mask by clicking on the link icon (
)
in the Layer.
LAYER FEATURES
Layers are so powerful because of many features and
effects that can be applied to Layers. Learning Layer features will
help you create some creative and unique effects for all of your
Images or composites. We have outlined some of the major
features of Layers in this section.
Opacity and Fill
The Opacity and Fill commands
allow you to change the Opacity (or
Transparency) of a Layer. Both commands
work the same, but with one difference.
In the Circles shown below, notice
that the Opacity change affects both the Fill
and Stroke of the Circle and the Fill change
affects only the Fill and not the Stroke of the
Circle. Opacity and Fill changes can
drastically change the appearance of a Layer
and are recommended when trying to blend objects or make Adjustments more subtle.
Fig : 3.5: Visibility Mode
Fig : 3.6(a): Opacity and Fill
Fig : 3.6(b): Opacity and Fill with example
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
855
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
Locking Layers
Locking Layers can be a handy Tool when working in Photoshop. There are several ways to lock
the Layer or Layer contents. Each Layer can be locked by selecting the Layer, and then selecting the type
of lock.
Layer Buttons
There are several buttons at the bottom of the Layers
Palette, which we will explore in this section. Many of these buttons
perform Actions that can be found in other locations within the
program, but are also in the Layers Palette for convenience and ease.
These buttons are outlined below:
Link Layers - Select two or more Layers and click this
button to link them together. Linking means that they will all move
together.
Add a new Layer style - This button allows you to add a
new Layer style without going to Layer and selecting Layer Style in
the menu.
Add Layer mask - Clicking this will add a new Layer mask
to the selected Layer.
Create new Fill or Adjustment Layer - This button allows
you to add a New Fill or make Adjustment without using
the Adjustments Palette.
Create a new group - Click this to create a new group
(folder). Drag Layers into this group to organize them.
Create a new Layer - Clicking this will create a new, empty
Layer.
Delete Layer - Select a Layer or multiple Layers and click
this button to permanently delete them.
Blending Modes
Blending modes affect the appearance of Layers and how they will display. Blending
modes are broken down into five different groupings that affect the Layer differently.
The best way to use Blending Modes is to mix and match
them and experiment with different variations.
Fig : 3.7: Locked Layer
Fig : 3.8: Layer Palette
Fig : 3.9(a): Blending modes 3.9(b) Blending Modes Options
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
856
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
Merging and Flattening Layers
If you ever need to combine several Layers or need to flatten the entire Image, then use the
merge and flatten commands.
Combine or merge several Layers by selecting the Layers, and then right-clicking on the Layer
Name of one of the selected Layers. Select "Merge Selected" from the menu and all selected
Layers will be combined into one.
Combine or merge only visible Layers, by right clicking on the Layer Name of any visible Layer
and selecting "Merge Visible".
Flatten an entire Image by right-clicking on the Layer Name of any Layer and selecting "Flatten
Image"
Fig : 3.10: Layer Options
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
857
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
184 | P a g e
CHAPTER 4
TOOLS PANEL
The Tools Panel contains a set of Tools, which are used for creating and editing Images. When
you start Photoshop, the Tools Panel appears at the left side of the screen. The Option bar at the bottom
of menu bar displays options specific to the Tool we have selected from the Tools Panel. Ex: if we
select Marquee Tool, Option bar displays options specific to Marquee Tool such as the Single selection
mode or Add/ Subtract selection mode, Feather Pixels of the selection, Style of selection and Height and
Width of selection.
OVERVIEW AND FUNCTIONS OF TOOLS PANEL
Fig : 4.1: Exploring Toolbox
Fig : 4.1: Exploring Photoshop Toolbox
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
858
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
Because Photoshop has so many features, it is not possible to discuss every Tool and option available,
in this document. These Tools are classified into groups depending upon their functionality. The groups
are as follows:
Selection Tools
Crop and Slice Tools
Measuring Tools
Retouching Tools
Painting Tools
Drawing and Type Tools
Navigation Tools
Before learning the usage of any Tool in the Tools Panel, we have to understand another
important feature - Flyouts. As the Tools Panel contains many Tools, displaying all the Tools will make
the Tools Panel huge and obstructing. Therefore, some Tools in the Tools panel have additional
“hidden” Tools. These Tools have small Black triangles in the lower right-hand corner these are called as
Flyouts. To view the “hidden” Tools, click and hold down on any Tool that has a Grey triangle in the
corner.
SELECTION TOOLS
Photoshop is used exclusively for working with Images. Very often, instead of working on entire
Image, we need to work on portion of an Image. Photoshop is equipped with various Tools that enable
selecting parts of an Image. The selection Tools are categorized under two major groups. They are
Marquee Selection Tools.
The Lasso selection Tools.
The Marquee Selection Tools
The Marquee Selection Tools help us select areas of an
Image in geometrical patterns. The Tools contained in the Marquee
Selection Flyout are:
Rectangular Marquee: This Tool allows us to select portion of an
Image in the shape of Rectangle or Square.
Elliptical Marquee: This Tool allows us to select portion of an Image in Elliptical or circular Shapes.
Single Row Marquee: This Tool allows us to select a single row of Pixels of an Image.
Single Column Marquee: this Tool allows us to select a single
column of Pixels of an Image.
For making Rectangular/Square/Elliptical/Circular/Row/ Column
selection, undertake the following steps:
1. Open the Image in which selection has to be made.
Making Selections with Marquee Tools
Fig : 4.3: Selection using
Rectangular marquee
Fig : 4.2: Marquee Tool Flyout
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
859
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
2. Click on the small arrow on the bottom right side of the Marquee Tool
3. From there click on any Tool depending upon your shape of selection
4. Place the mouse pointer on the Image and drag around the area you want to select.
The Marquee Option Bar
T
he different options available in Marquee Option bar are:
New Selection: Allows us to make a new selection. Any previous selection will be discarded.
Add to Selection: Allows us to add some more areas of the Image to the existing selection.
Subtract from selection: Allows us to subtract some of the portion of the Image from the
selection.
Intersect with Selection: It selects only intersected part of 2 selections
Feather: Used to create soft edges around the selection. (Value can be enteRed between 0px to
1000px).
Anti-alias: Used to create BlurRed, Softer edged selection. This can be used only when Elliptical
Marquee Tool is active.
Style: It has various different styles with which we can make a selection.
Normal : It creates default normal selection
Fixed Size : Create selection of specific dimension
Fixed Aspect Ratio : Creates proportional selection.
In selection area: Width and Height is displayed by the cursor.
Redefine Edge : This will view the current selection against different Backgrounds for easy
editing. By default it is enabled.
Note : Other selections like Elliptical Marquee is also same.
Lasso Tools
Lasso Tools are used to make freeform selection. Under Lasso Tool, there is a group of Tools
which you can use to make freeform selections in an Image. They are
1. Freehand Lasso Tool or just Lasso Tool: Allows us to
make freeform selections in an Image.
2. Polygon Lasso Tool: Allows us to make freeform selections
in an Image in the form of Polygonal areas. We click at different points to obtain a selection as a
Polygon with points as its vertices.
3. Magnetic Lasso Tool: While moving on the area to be selected, this
Tool automatically sticks to the edges of the Image, making the
selection very easy.
New options that appear in the Magnetic Lasso Tool option bar are:
Width : To specify a detection width, enter a Pixel value for Width. The
Magnetic Lasso Tool detects edges only within the specified distance from
the pointer.
Fig : 4.4: Marquee Option Bar
Fig : 4.3: Selection using
Lasoo Tool
Fig : 4.4: Lasoo Tool Flyout
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
860
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
Note: To change the lasso pointer so that it indicates the lasso width, press the Caps Lock key. You can
change the pointer while the Tool is selected but not in use. Press the right bracket (]) to increase the
Magnetic Lasso edge width by 1 Pixel; press the left bracket ([) to decrease the width by 1 Pixel.
Contrast : To specify the lasso’s sensitivity to edges in the Image. Enter a value between 1% and 100%
for Contrast. Higher the value, the greater is the Contrast between the edges and the Background.
Frequency: To specify the rate at which the lasso sets fastening points, enter a value between 0 and 100
for Frequency. A higher value Anchors the selection border in place more quickly.
Note: On an Image with well-defined edges, try a higher width and higher edge Contrast, and trace the
border roughly. On an Image with softer edges, try a lower width and lower edge Contrast, and trace the
border more precisely.
Stylus Pressure: If you are working with a stylus tablet, select or deselect the Stylus Pressure option.
When the option is selected, an increase in stylus pressure decreases the edge width.
Move Tool
The Move Tool is used for moving Image or portion of the Image from one
location to another.
1. Click on the Move Tool from the Tools Panel.
2. Place the mouse pointer over the Image or the selected part of the Image.
3. Drag the mouse pointer to move the selected part of the Image to some other
location.
Quick Selection Tool
The Quick Selection Tool makes it easier to select the areas of an Image we want; because the
selection expands outward and automatically finds
and follows defined edges in the Image.
Select Quick selection Tool Click and
drag the mouse over the area to start selection you
can vary brush size, hardness, spacing, angle,
roundness, pen pressure or stylus wheel options also.
Continue dragging the mouse pointer until you
select the desiRed area . Select the sample all
Layers to do selection based on all Layers and auto
Enhance to Reduce roughness and pixilation in the
selection edge.
Magic Wand
The Magic Wand is used to select adjacent areas of the same color in the Image. The selection
depends upon the Tolerance setting. Higher the Tolerance setting value, the wider the range of selected
Pixels.
Fig : 4.5: Selection using Quick Selection Tool
Fig : 4.4: Move Tool
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
861
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
To make selection using Magic Wand
1. Click on the Magic Wand Tool in the
Tools Panel.
2. In the Option bar, enter the tolerance
value in the Tolerance option. A low
tolerance value will select colors very
similar to the Pixel you click and a high
value will select a broader range of
colors.
3. Click on any part of the Image. All the
adjacent Pixels with the same color
within the Tolerance range are selected.
Options present in Magic Wand Option bar :
Anti-alias: Defines a Smooth edge.
Contiguous: Selects only adjacent area with the same color. Otherwise all Pixels in the entire Image
with the same color are selected.
Sample All Layers: Selects colors using data from all the visible Layers. Otherwise, Magic Wand Tool
selects color only from Active Layer.
CROP AND SLICE TOOLS
Crop Tool
- The Crop Tool is used to trim the Image. It is an important Tool for making
Adjustments to the overall size of an Image. Crop Tool affects the size of the whole Image, not just a
single Layer.
To crop an Image with the Crop Tool, follow these instructions:
Choose the Crop Tool
from the Tools panel or press C. The shape of the mouse-pointer changes
to the crop Tool cursor.
Fig : 4.6: Selection using Magic Wand Tool
Fig : 4.7 (a) : Original Image
(B) Cropped Image
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
862
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
Place the mouse-pointer on the Image and drag it to create a Rectangular selection over the part the
part of the Image you want to retain.
Release the left mouse button. Instantly Crop Marquee appears with handles on the corners and sides.
This crop Marquee can be moved, resized and rotated.
To rotate the crop box move the cursor to one of the corner markers and drag the cursor.
Press the Enter key or double click inside the crop Marquee or Press
button in the Options Panel
to crop the Image.
Slice Tool
The slice Tools in Photoshop are particularly useful for Web
designer’s as these allow them to divide an Image up into Rectangular
sections, and the slices can then used in Photoshop to specify how
each individual slice will be optimized, what file format a slice area should be saved in and what
compression settings should be used.
Slice Select Tool :
To slice an Image you use the Slice Tool to drag across an Image to manually define a user-slice,
and as you create such user-slices, Photoshop automatically generates additional auto-slices that divide
up the other areas. You can then use the slice select Tool to go back and edit the size of each slice
afterwards. Ctrl key lets you toggle between these two Tools but the slice Tool automatically becomes
the slice select Tool whenever you move over a user slice, thus allowing you to edit it without having to
manually Select the Slice Select Tool each time. The default setting is to show Slice numbers. But if the
slice numbers are currently hidden and you want to see the slice numbers displayed next to each slice,
then go to the Guides, Grid and Slices preferences and check the ‘Show Slice Numbers’ option.
RETOUCHING TOOLS
The Retouching Tools enable us to change or edit Pixel arrangements in a number of ways.
Retouching Tools are mainly used for editing and some of the retouching Tools are:
Spot Healing Brush Tool:
This Tool quickly removes blemishes and other imperfections in your photograph. The spot
healing brush Tool works similar to Healing brush, but it doesn’t require you to specify a sample spot.
The Spot Healing Brush automatically samples from around the retouched area.
1. Open an Image, select the Spot healing Brush Tool from the Tools Panel.
2. Choose the Brush Size in the Option bar. A brush size that is slightly larger than the area to
want to retouch will be better.
3. Choose Type option in the Option bar between Proximity Match or Create Texture.
4. Click over the check box beside the Sample All Layers option in the Option bar to sample data
from all visible Layers. Deselect Sample All Layers to sample only from the active Layer.
5. Click the area you want to fix, or click and drag over a large area. The spot is being corrected.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
863
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
190 | P a g e
Healing Brush Tool
-
Healing Brush Tool lets you correct imperfections,
causing them to disappear. It is used to remove blemishes
(dust marks and scratches) from photographs.
To retouch using sampled Pixels:
1. Select the Healing Brush
Tool.
2. Set Brush size and Style on the Options bar, select the
Sampled option.
3. Click Alt key somewhere on your Image to define a
sampling point.
4. Paint with the Healing Brush
Tool on the damaged
area.
Patch Tool
Patch Tool lets you repair a selected area with Pixels from another area or a pattern but is used to
repair areas of a photograph that are larger than the typical scratch.
Red Eye Tool
Using this Tool you can remove the Red Eye effect from the photographs. Red Eye is caused by
the reflection of a camera and direct flash in an eye retina. By default, Red Eye Tool uses a large brush
and makes the areas around the pupil Black. You can change the default settings in the Option bar to fit
the size you require and just click on the Red area of the eye.
Clone Stamp Tool
The Clone Tool is used to copy portions of a Layer from one area to another. It is similar to
the Rubber Stamp Tool found in earlier versions of Photoshop. It is used for cloning or duplicating
selected areas of an Image.
1. Open an Image, Select the clone stamp Tool from the Tools panel.
2. Click the Brush size from the Brush Preset picker Options bar
3. Select the Brush tip.
4. Set the Sampling point by positioning the mouse pointer in the Image. Hold down the Alt key and
click on the part of the Image to be Cloned
5. Click and drag the mouse pointer to Fill the sample of an Image with the cloned Pixels.
Pattern Stamp Tool
It is similar to Clone Stamp Tool but, it only clones the pRedefined areas of Pixels with pattern
rather than from a source point in the Image. For using Pattern Stamp Tool, we first define a pattern
using Define Pattern option in the Edit Menu and then we clone this pattern using Pattern Stamp Tool.
Open an Image from which the pattern is to be defined.
Select the area to be used as a pattern using any Selection Tool.
Click Edit Menu Define Pattern.
A default name is given to the pattern, however we can change the default name with the name of
your choice. Click OK button.
Open the Image to which the pattern is to be applied and click Pattern Stamp Tool.
Place the mouse pointer on the Image and drag it over a part of the Image to Fill it with the pattern.
Fig : 4.8(a) :Retouch using Sampling Pixel
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
864
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
Fig : 4.9: Applying blur to left
and right Image
Eraser Tool
The Eraser is used to remove portions of an Image and it works like an ordinary Eraser. When
working on the Background Layer, it removes the Pixels to Transparency, when working on some other
Layer, the Pixels of that Layer are removed to expose the Pixel in the Background Layer.
In the Tools Panel, select the Eraser Tool.
On the Options bar, you can select the brush size, style, erasing mode, Opacity, and flow. There are
three erasing modes:
1. Brush: The Eraser Tool takes the shape of a brush similar to Paintbrush Tool.
2. Pencil: The Eraser Tool takes the shape of a pencil similar to Pencil Tool.
3. Block: The Eraser takes the shape of a wooden block. Here size of Eraser Tool is fixed.
Place the mouse pointer on the area of the Image to be erased and drag the mouse pointer.
Background Eraser Tool
The Background Eraser
Tool erases Pixel of an Image to Transparency.
In the Tools Panel, select the Background Eraser ool.
Choose Brush size, Style, Sampling (Erasing mode), Limits and Tolerance in the Option Bar.
The Sampling option in the Options bar allows to select one of three erasing modes:
a) Continuous: (Default method) : Allows to erase everything.
b) Once: Allows to Erase only color you first click on.
c) Background Swatch: Only allows erasing Pixels that contain current Background color.
d) Limits defines range of the Tool: all over Image (Dis-contiguous), only adjacent areas
(Contiguous) or only inside Pixels (Find Edges).
e) Tolerance option sets the Tool's sensitivity.
f) Protect Foreground Color option disallows erasing Pixels that contain current Foreground
color.
Place the mouse pointer on the area of the Image to be erased and drag the mouse pointer.
Magic Eraser Tool
This Tool can be compaRed to Magic wand Tool, which is used to select similar Colored areas in
an Image based on Tolerance settings. The Magic Eraser Tool is used to erase Pixels from similar
Colored areas of an Image based on the Tolerance value.
Blur Tool
The Blur Tool is used to selectively blur areas of a Layer. The
amount of blur can be controlled. It is especially handy when blending
colors or objects.
1. In the Toolbox, select the Blur
Tool.
2. Choose brush size, style, mode and Tool strength from the
option bar.
3. Drag on the Image.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
865
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
Fig : 4.10(a) Before Dodge Tool 4.10(b) : After Dodge Tool Applied
Sharpen Tool
The Sharpen Tool is used to increases Contrast clarity of blur Images with soft edges.
Sharpening enhances the definition of edges in an Image.
1. In the Tools Panel, select the Sharpen
Tool.
2. Choose Brush size, Style, Tools Strength and Effect’s Mode from Option bar
3. Drag on the Image.
Smudge Tool
The Smudge Tool creates the effect of Smudging wet paint with a figure. The smudge Tool
selects the color of the Pixels where you first click and smears the Pixels in whichever direction you drag
the brush.
1. In the Tools Panel, select the Smudge
Tool.
2. Choose Brush size, Style, Tool's Strength and Mode
3. Drag on the Image.
Dodge Tool
Lightens Pixels where user paints. The unnecessary dark portions of an Image can be made lighter.
1. In the Tools Panel, select the Dodge
Tool.
2. Select Brush size, Hardness, Exposure (Stroke Strength) and Tools range: Shadows, Midtones or
Highlights from the Option bar.
3. Drag on the Image.
Burn Tool
Burn Tool works opposite to Dodge Tool. It Darkens Pixels in an Image
In the Toolbox, select the Burn
Tool.
Select brush size, hardness, exposure (Stroke strength) and Tools range: Shadows, Midtones or
Highlights from the Option bar.
Drag on the Image.
Note : If your goal is to dodge or burn a large area of a picture such as a sky or someone’s face, then the
best way to go about doing this is to add a Levels or Curves Adjustment Layer to lighten or darken the
entire Image.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
866
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
Sponge Tool
You can use the Sponge Tool to paint in localized Adjustments that will modify the saturation of an
Image. The sponge Tool has two modes: Saturate increases the color saturation, while De-saturate
decreases the color saturation.
1. In the Tools Panel, select the Sponge
Tool.
2. Choose Brush size, Style, Mode, Flow from the Option bar.
3. Drag on the Image.
PAINTING TOOLS
Painting Tools such as Brush, Pencil and Paint Bucket Tools can be used to create different kinds of
painting Strokes.
Brush Tool
Brush Tool lets to draws brush Strokes of different thicknesses and colors and also paints with the
current Foreground color. It works like an ordinary brush. By default, the Brush Tool creates soft
Strokes of color and the Pencil Tool creates hard-edged, freehand Lines. However, once you apply a
brush Stroke, there is no simple way to select the entire brush Stroke and move it to a new location in the
Image.
To use Brush Tool or Pencil Tool
1. Specify Foreground color
2. Select Brush or Pencil Tool
3. Choose a brush, size, blending mode, Opacity, Flow from the Option bar
4. For the Pencil Tool, select Auto Erase to paint the Background color over areas containing the
Foreground color
5. Drag in the Image to paint
Fig : 4.11: Retouching Tools
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
867
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
To Draw a Straight Line : Click a starting point in an Image, then hold down shift and click an ending
point.
6. When using the brush Tool as an Airbrush, hold the mouse button without dragging to build up color.
Pencil Tool
It has hard edges Strokes. The pencil always paints a hard edge that is not anti-aliased, it is
mainly used to Fill an area in a single shade or to draw a basic drawing.
Paintbrush Tool
The Paintbrush Tool and the Pencil Tool let you paint the current Foreground color on an Image. The
Tools create different effects.
History Brush
It makes a copy of the Image as it was in a previous state, then uses the content of this copy to paint with.
The History Brush
Tool paints with a history state or snapshot.
1. In the Tools Panel, select the History Brush
Tool.
2. Choose brush size, style, Airbrush mode, Blending mode, Opacity, Flow from the Option bar.
3. In the History Palette, select a source history state or snapshot.
4. Paint with the selected history state.
Art History Brush
It paints with stylized Strokes. Like History Brush Tool, Art History brush Tool uses a specified history
state as a source data.
1. Select the Art History brush Tool
2. Select a brush and set brush options: Blending Mode, Opacity, Style, Area, Tolerance from the
option bar.
Area: Enter a value to specify the area coveRed by the paint Strokes. The greater the size, the larger
the coveRed area and the more numerous the Strokes.
Tolerance: Enter a value or drag the slider to limit the regions where paint Strokes can be applied. A
low tolerance lets you paint unlimited Strokes anywhere in the Image. A high tolerance limits paint
Strokes to areas that differ considerably from the color in the source state or snapshot
3. Drag on the Image.
WORKING WITH BRUSHES
The brush you select determines many characteristics of the resulting Stroke. Photoshop has
many different varieties of preset brushes to Fill a wide range of uses. In Photoshop we can also create
custom brushes using the brushes Palette.
Using the Brushes Palettes
Fig : 4.12: Brush Tool Options
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
868
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
The Brushes Palettes lets you select preset brushes
and design custom brushes
Displaying the Brushes Palette
Click on Window Menu-Brushes
Displaying options in the brushes Palette
Select an item name on the left side of the Palette. The
available options for the selected item appears on the right
side of the Palette.
To select a preset brush
Click a brush in the brush pop-up Palette
Specify a diameter for the brush by dragging the
slider/enter the value. If the brush has a dual tip, both the
primary and dual brush tips are scaled.
Click use sample size to use the original diameter of the brush tip. This option is available only if the
brush tip shape is based on a sample.
To change how Preset brushes are displayed
Choose a display option from the Brush pop-up Palette menu or Brushes Palette menu.
Text only to view the brushes as a list
Small or large thumbnail to view the brushes as thumbnails
Small or large list to view the brushes as a list with thumbnails
Stroke Thumbnail to view a sample brush Stroke with each brush thumbnail.
To return to the default library of preset brushes
Select Reset Brushes from the Brush pop-up Palette menu or Brushes Palette menu
You can either replace the current list or append the default library to the current list.
Create a New Brush
You can customize brush tips by editing their options and create new brush tip Shapes by
sampling Pixels in an Image. The brush tip you select determines the shape, diameter and other
characteristics of a brush mark.
Using any Selection Tool, select the Image area you want to use as a custom brush. The Brush shape
can be up to 2500 Pixels by 2500 Pixels in size.
When painting, you can’t adjust the hardness of Sampled brushes. To create a brush with Sharp
edges, set Feather to zero Pixels. To create a Brush with soft edges, increase the Feather setting.
Choose Edit Define Brush Preset.
Name the Brush, and click OK.
Note: If you select a color Image, the brush tip Image is converted to Grayscale. Any Layer mask applied
to the Image doesn’t affect the definition of the brush tip.
Fig : 4.13: Brush Presents
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
869
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
Gradient Tool
The Gradient Tool can be used to Fill an area with transitions of one color to another. There are five
types of Gradient Fill:
1. Linear: this Fill is applied from the starting to the end in a Straight
line.
2. Radial: this Fill is applied from the starting to the end point in a
circular pattern.
3. Angle: this Fill is applied from the starting to the end point in an
angle pattern.
4. Reflected: this Fill applies symmetric linear Gradients on either side
of the starting point.
5. Diamond: this Fill applies shades from the beginning point onwards
in a diamond pattern
a) Open an Image.
b) Choose the Gradient Tool from the Tools Panel.
c) Click inside the Gradient sample in the option bar to open the Gradient Editor dialog box.
d) Select any of the Gradients from the Preset box, or create a new Gradient from the Gradient.
e) Also select Gradient type, Smoothness in the Gradient Editor dialog box.
f) Set the Opacity to 100% in the option bar.
g) Click and drag with the left mouse button in the area where you want to apply Gradient
Paint Bucket
This Tool is used to color Pixels with the Foreground color based on tolerance setting. It Fills
the entire area with the Foreground color or with pattern with just one mouse click. It is especially useful
when used with a Marquee.
To Fill with Foreground/Pattern color:
In the Tools Panel, select the Paint Bucket
Tool.
Select Foreground or Pattern according to your choice in the Fill Mode of the Option bar. Also if
pattern is selected, select a pattern you require.
Also adjust Tolerance, Contiguous, Blending mode in the option bar.
Click on your Image to Fill the area.
Color Replacement Tool
It replaces a selected color with a new color. You can paint over a targeted
color with a corrective color. The Hue and Saturation modes are also useful if you
want to modify these color components individually. There are various ways one
can change the color of an object. The color replacement Tool offers a simple easy-
to-use solution.
Ex: I wanted to change the color of the purple shirt to Dark Yellow.
1. Double-clicked the Foreground color in the Tools panel. This opens
Fig : 4.14: Gradient Dialog box
Fig : 4.16(a): Original
Image
Fig : 4.15: The PaintBucket Tool Options bar
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
870
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
the Color Picker dialog and let us selected a dark Yellow as the new
Foreground color.
2. Select the shirt with selection Tool.
3. Click the Color replacement Tool.
4. Set the other options in Option Bar like
Mode: Color,
Sampling: Continuous/Once/ Background Swatch,
Limits: Find Edges/ Discontiguous / Contiguous,
Tolerance and to define a smooth edge in the corrected area, select Anti-
aliased.
5. Drag in the Image to replace the targeted color.
DRAWING AND TYPE TOOLS
Pen Tool
Photoshop provides multiple Pen Tools. The standard Pen Tool
draws with the greatest precision; the Freeform Pen Tool draws paths as
if you were drawing with pencil on paper, and the Magnetic pen option
lets you draw a path that snaps to the edges of defined areas in your
Image. You can use the Pen Tools in conjunction with the shape Tools to
create complex Shapes.
When you use the standard Pen Tool, the following options are available in the options bar:
In the Tools panel, select the Pen
Tool.
On the Options bar, select Auto Add/Delete to add an Anchor point when you click a line Segment
or delete an Anchor point
Select Rubber band next to shape button to preview path Segment as you draw.
Click or drag the mouse pointer to set Anchor points for additional Segments.
To complete the path in the following way:
To end an open path: keep the Ctrl key pressed and click the left mouse button away from the path.
To close a path, position the pen pointer over the first Anchor point, a small loop appears, position it
correctly and click to close the path.
Press [Shift] key while drawing to constrain the Segment angle to a multiple of 45°.
WHEN YOU SHOULD USE VECTOR PATH TOOLS
If you need to isolate an object or create a cut-out, the only way to do so is to use the pen and pen
modifier Tools to draw a path outline. You see, with a photograph like this, there is very little color
differentiation between the object and the Background, and it would be very difficult for selection Tool
to accurately pRedict the edges in this Image.
4.16(b) : Image after color replacement
Fig : 4.17: Pen Tool flyout
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
871
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
Freeform Pen Tool
The Freeform Pen Tool operates more or less exactly like the lasso Tool. The main difference is
that the Freeform Pen Tool automatically evens out the rough edges as you draw an outline in order to
produce a pen path that uses as few Anchor points as possible. The Freeform Pen Tool Options bar is
shown in Figure 5 below.
Magnetic Pen Tool mode
The Freehand Pen Tool has a Magnetic mode. When this is checked, the Pen Tool behaves just
like the magnetic lasso, except that the path points can be saved as a path instead of being converted
directly to a selection.
Add Anchor Tool
When the add Anchor point Tool is selected you can use it to click on a path Segment to Add a
new Anchor point to a path. But the thing is, if you have the normal Pen Tool selected (with the Auto
Add/Delete option selected in the Pen Tool Options bar) and move close over a pen path Segment, it will
automatically convert to the add Anchor point Tool mode. So there is effectively no need to bother with
selecting the add Anchor point Tool. You can access the add Anchor point Tool without having to switch
Tools.
Delete Anchor point Tool
When the delete Anchor point Tool is selected you can use it to click on an existing Anchor point
to delete it.
Fig 4.18 Example of an Image where it is easier and quicker to use the Pen Tool to draw a path
outline of the figures in this sculpture
Fig: 4.19: The freeform Pen Tool Options bar.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
872
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
Convert point Tool
Convert Point Tool is used to curve Straight Line to create a Shape but that line should be created
by using Pen Tool. A path consists of one or more Straight or Curved Segments. Anchor points mark the
end points of the path Segment. On Curved Segment, each selected Anchor point displays one or two
direction Lines, ending in direction points. So we use the Convert point Tool to curve the Straight Lines.
Path Selection Tool
Selecting a path component or Segment displays all the Anchor points on the selected portions
including any direction Lines and direction points if the selected Segment is Curved.
1. Open an Image and create path using Pen Tool.
2. Now click over the Path selection Tool in the Tools Panel.
3. Entire path created in Image gets selected.
Rectangle Tool
This Tool helps you to draw Rectangle/Circle.
Rounded Rectangle Tool
This Tool also helps us to draw Rectangle with the corners
rounded.
Ellipse Tool
Ellipse Tool is used to draw Ellipse/ Circle
Polygon Tool
Helps us to draw Polygon and Stars
Line Tool
Helps us to draw Lines.
Custom Shape Tool
Helps us to draw Shapes other than Geometric Shapes. The Custom shape Tool has a collection
of pRedefined Shapes like Star, Flower, Common Signs, etc.,
ANNOTATION & MEASURING TOOLS
Notes Tool
It makes notes and voice annotations that can be attached to an Image.
Ruler Tool
Ruler Tool is used to measures distances, locations and angles.
Count Tool
Count Tools is used to count objects in an Image.
Fig : 4.20 : Rectangle Flyout
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
873
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
Eyedropper Tool
Takes color samples from colors on the page and displays them in the Color Boxes. Select the
Tool, click on the color in the Image you wish to sample. The Color Box will display this color.
NAVIGATION TOOLS
Zoom Tool
This is a very handy Tool used to quickly zoom in or out of an Image.
Hand Tool
Hand Tool allows users to slide the Image around the Image area in order to view different
sections of the Image within its window.
Type Tool
Type refers to text. This is the Tool that is used to add text to an Image and to edit existing text.
Size, color, and other attributes of the text can be specified and adjusted. It has Horizontal type,
Vertical Type, Horizontal type mask, Vertical Type Mask.
Horizontal: It creates the text in Horizontal orientation i.e Normal.
Vertical: It creates the text in Vertical orientation (i.e top to bottom)
Horizontal Type Mask: It creates Horizontal Type Shaped Selections.
Vertical Type Mask: It creates Vertical Type Shaped Selections
With the Type Tool selected, your mouse cursor will change into what's commonly referRed to
as an "I-beam". As soon as we select the Type Tool, the Options Bar along the top of the screen updates
to show us options related to the Type Tool.
Creating Point Type Text
Whenever we type some text, it is created on a separate Layer called the Type Layer.
1. Open the Image to which you want to add text.
2. Click on the Type Tool in the Tools Panel.
3. Keep the mouse pointer on the Image and click to type text.
4. When you have finished typing the text, click on some other Tool on the Tools Panel. The Type
is created in a new Layer and is displayed in the Layers Palette.
Creating Paragraph Type
When you enter paragraph type, the Lines of
text wrap to fit the dimensions of the bounding box.
You can also enter multiple paragraphs. You can resize
the bounding box and also apply transformation Tools
on bounding box.
Steps to create Paragraph text
1. Click on the Type Tool in the Tools Panel.
2. Click on change Text Orientation button to
Fig : 4.21: Text Types
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
874
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
create either Horizontal or Vertical
3. Drag diagonally to define a bounding box for the Text.
4. Now whatever you type will appear inside the bounding box.
Resizing the bounding box
If you enter more text than the text that fit in the bounding box then overflow icon will appears
on the bounding box.
1. Click on the Type Tool
2. Click on the text to display its boundary box.
3. Drag one of the corner handle of the bounding box to increase or decrease the size of the
bounding box. Use Shift key while dragging to maintain the proportion of the bounding box.
Rotating the bounding box along with text
1. Place the mouse pointer slightly outside the bounding box. The mouse pointer turns into a bi-
headed Curved arrow.
2. Drag and rotate the mouse while keeping the left mouse button pressed. You will notice even the
text rotates.
Convert Point Type to Paragraph Type
1. Click on the Point Type text
2. Click Layer Menu Type Convert to Paragraph text
Convert Paragraph type to Point Type
When you convert from paragraph type to point type, a carriage return is added at the end of each
line of type
1. Select the type Layer in the Layer panel
2. Choose LayerTypeConvert to Point Text
Changing the Typing setting
We have many options for our text to appear impressive. These options can be applied using the
character Palette. But most of these options appear also in the Option bar and are listed below:
Text Orientation button: To create text either Vertical oriented or Horizontal oriented.
Font Style: To change the style of letters.
Font size: To increase or decrease the size of characters.
Alignment: To align the text to center, right, left
Color button: To change the color of the text.
Warping a type Layer enables us to add a variety of special Effects and Shapes to the text. For
example we can arrange the in-different Shapes. For warping the type carry out the following steps:
1. Open the Image, click on Type Tool and type Text in the Image.
2. Click on the Layer Menu Type Warp Text. A dialog box appears.
3. Click on the down arrow button beside Style option. A List of all the available warp style
appears (Ex: Arc Upper, Arc Lower, Arch, Flag etc)
Warping type
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
875
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
4. Select a style of your choice and click OK button
Type Masking
When we use the Horizontal Type Mask Tool or Vertical Type Mask Tool, we create a selection
in the shape of the type. Type selection appear on the active Layer, and can be moved, copied, Stroked or
Filled just like any other selection.
For type masking, carry out the following steps
1. Open an Image in which you want to create type mask.
2. From the Flyout of Type Tool, select Horizontal Type Mask/Vertical Type mask.
3. Click anywhere in the Image and type some text. The Text appears in the base color of the Image.
4. Click the mouse button on any Tool in the Toolbox to deselect the type Tool. Now the text on Image
appears in a selection form.
5. Click Edit Menu Copy
6. Click Edit Menu Paste. A New Layer appears in the Layer Palette. But nothing will be visible.
7. To make the text visible, click Layer Menu Layer Style Drop shadow. The drop shadow
dialog box appears. Set the Effect style and click over the OK button.
1. Select the Horizontal/Vertical type Tool/Horizontal Type Mask Tool/Vertical Type Mask Tool
2. Position the pointer so that the Baseline indicator of the Type Tool is on the path and click. After you
click, an Insertion point appears on the path.
3. Enter the Type, Horizontal Type appears along the path, perpendicular to the baseline. Vertical
Type appears along the path, parallel to baseline.
1. To Move Text, click and drag the type along the path. Be careful not to drag across the path.
2. To Flip Text to the other side of the path, click and drag the type across the path.
3. To Move Type across a path without changing the direction of the type, use the baseline shift option
in the Character panel.
Note : If you created type that runs from left to right across the top of a Circle, you can enter a negative
number in the baseline shift text box to drop the type so that it flows inside the top of the Circle.
CONVERTING TYPE LAYER TO STANDARD LAYER
We can convert a type into a standard Layer so that we can use commands and Tools on the
Layer that could not be used when the Layer was Type Layer.
1. Open an Image containing a Type Layer.
2. Click on the Type Layer in the Layer Palette.
3. Click on Layer Menu Rasterize Type. Now the T icon in the Layer Palette is removed
indicating that it is no more a type Layer and has been converted to a standard Layer.
Enter type along a path
Move or Flip on a Path
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
876
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
CHAPTER 5
WORKING WITH IMAGES
VECTOR AND BITMAP IMAGES
Vector Images are made up of Lines and Curves and Bitmap Images are made up of Pixels.
Bitmap Images are resolution dependent; they contain a fixed number of Pixels. Enlarging a bitmap
graphic Redistributes the Pixels in the grid, it makes the edges of the Image to appear jagged. Vector
Images are made up of objects like Lines and Curves so they are resolution independent. They can be
displayed on output devices of varying resolution without losing quality.
UNDERSTANDING IMAGE RESOLUTION
Resolution refers to number of Pixels in an Image. It is
measuRed in Pixels per inch (ppi). An Image with high resolution
produces high quality of Image because it has more Pixels. Images
in Photoshop can vary from low resolution (72 ppi or 96 ppi) to
high resolution (300 ppi or higher).
In Photoshop if the Image resolution is higher than the
monitor resolution, the Image appears larger onscreen than its
specified print dimensions. Ex : when we display a 1”x1”, 144 ppi
Image on a 72ppi monitor, the Image Fills a 2x2 inch area of the
screen. The lower the resolution of the Image appears pixilated
or blurRed as compaRed to the higher resolution Image. The
number of Pixels per unit of length on a monitor is the monitor
resolution. Image Pixels are translated directly into the monitor
Pixels.While printing, we will use term dpi (dots per inch on
the page while printing) instead of ppi.
Note : DPI refers to the resolution of a printing device not the
resolution of an Image.
Pixels are not visible at 100% zoom level. Digital
Images are made up of binary numbers 0s and 1s, which
represent the color of a single Pixel. In Raster Images each
Pixels value can be randomly different to the next, which
suits it perfectly to create photo realistic Image or it can be
of same color for that needs continuous tone of colors. We
can also change the resolution of an Image either by resizing
an Image or resizing the Canvas.
Resizing : Refers to changing Pixel dimension of an Image
onscreen but also its Image quality and its printed
characters.
Fig : 5.1: Original Image 72dpi
Fig : 5.1(b): Dimension Dialog box
Fig : 5.1(c): High Resolution Image(500 dpi)
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
877
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
To change the resolution of an Image : Open an Image in Photoshop, Click Image menu Image
Size(Ctrl+Alt+I) Type a value in the Resolution box in the Document Size sectionPress OK button.
Note : As we change the resolution value of an Image, then the width and height of a Image also changes.
CHANGE THE SIZE OF A DOCUMENT
We can change the size of an Image, by either changing the size of the Canvas or resize the
Image itself. Resizing Image means specify Image size in terms of printed dimensions and Image
resolutions. Pixel dimension means specifying the total Pixel dimensions of an Image along with height
and width. Ex: If a Pixel dimension is 200 X 200 then, an Image has total of 40,000 Pixels
To change the size of a document change height and width of an Image in Image Menu
Image Size. If we want to keep the Pixel dimension same but change the resolution of an Image, then
Goto Image MenuImage Size Uncheck Resample Image. Then the Photoshop adjusts the
document size to accommodate the Pixels without making any changes to the Pixel dimension. Re-
sampling an Image refers to changing the Pixel dimensions of an Image.
EDITING IMAGES
Once an Image is opened in Photoshop, many types of editing can be done such as Rotate, Crop,
Resize, etc.
Rotate an Image
Rotate Canvas command is used to Flip the Image Vertically or Horizontally. This command
does not work on individual Layers or parts of Layers or selection n borders or paths. You can rotate an
Image at a pRedefined angle or specifying the angle of your choice.
Goto Image menu Image Rotation Flip Canvas HorizontalPress OK
For Angle rotation : Click Image menuImage RotationArbitraryIn the rotate Canvas choose
Angle option CW(Clock Wise) or CCW(Counter Clock Wise). The default value 0 gets highlighted.
Type the desiRed value in the Angle Box Press Ok.
Cropping an Image
Cropping means trimming an Image. It is used to remove unwanted portion of an Image. It Reduces the
size of the file. Cropping can be done with the Crop Tool or the Crop command.
Fig : 5.2(a): Original Image
Fig: 5.2(b): Rotated Image
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
878
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
To crop an Image with the Crop Tool, follow these instructions:
Choose the Crop Tool
from the Tools Panel or press C. The shape of the mouse-pointer changes
to the crop Tool cursor.
Place the mouse-pointer on the Image and drag it to create a Rectangular selection over the part the
part of the Image you want to retain.
Release the left mouse button. Instantly Crop Marquee appears with handles on the corners and sides.
This crop Marquee can be moved, resized and rotated. Pressing Shift, the size of the box will be
changed proportionally.
To rotate the crop box move the cursor to one of the corner markers and drag the cursor.
Press the Enter key or double click inside the crop Marquee or Press
button in the Options Panel
to crop the Image. Or Goto Image menu Crop
CHANGING THE CANVAS SIZE
The Canvas size is full editable area of an Image. The Canvas size command lets you add or
remove workspace around an existing Image. Increasing the Canvas size adds space around an existing
Image, while decreasing the Canvas size crops the Image. When you increase Canvas size, it Fills the
extra area with the current Background Fill color. Increasing your Canvas size can come in handy if
you’re trying to add a frame or border around your Image
Image Menu Canvas size (Alt +Ctrl+ C)it displays current Canvas size and file size in
Current size section Enter new height and width of Canvas in New Size sectionOK
Fig : 5.4(a): Original Image
Fig : 5.4(b) : Canvased Image
Fig : 5.3: Original Image
Fig : 5.3(b) : Cropped
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
879
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
206 | P a g e
TRANSFORMATION OF OBJECTS IN PHOTOSHOP
After an object is inserted in a new Layer, we can use Layer transformation commands to
transform the object. To transform the Layer or the selected fragment we can use one of the commands
Transform or Free Transform from the Edit menu. Free Transform option will help you to perform all
transformations at one time. If you select the command Edit Free Transform, the Layer or the
selected fragment will be enclosed in a frame with eight markers, and in the Options Palette a number of
parameters for Adjustment will appear.
Other transformation commands: Scale, Rotate, Skew, Distort, Perspective, Warp, Rotate 180°,
Rotate 90° CW, Rotate 90° CCW, Flip Horizontal, Flip Vertical.)
Scale – Scaling stands for changing the size of a selection. To adjust the size of the selection of the
Image within the area you should move one of the eight markers. To change the scale proportionally you
should drag the marker in the corner keeping the Shift key pressed. You can enter values for the W and
H parameters in percentage from the original size directly in the
Options Palette. For the size to be changed proportionally, you should activate the relation sign between
the W and H parameters.
Flip – To Flip an Image you should move one of the markers behind the opposite marker. Ex: If you drag
the left marker all the way to the right side of the right marker, the Image will Flip Horizontally.
However, if you want to Flip the Image, you'd better use the commands Flip Horizontal and Flip
Vertical from the Edit Menu Transform.
To Flip an Image, you can also use the following commands from the Image menu Rotate Canvas.
Flip Horizontal - It mirrors the Image as to the standing axis, i.e. interchanges the left and the right parts
of the Image;
Flip Vertical - It mirrors the Image as to the Horizontal axis, i.e. it turns the Image upside down.
Rotate – To rotate an Image you should bring the cursor to the marker in the corner so that the cursor
transforms in a two-side rounded arrow, press the left
mouse and keeping it pressed, drag the cursor. You can
set the rotation angle in the Options Palette using the
Rotate parameter.
You can apply the following commands:
180°
- It rotates the Image by 180 degrees.
90° CW
- It rotates the Image by 90 degrees clockwise.
90° CCW
- It rotates the Image by 90 degrees anticlockwise.
Arbitrary
- This command rotates the Image by an arbitrary angle. For this purpose:
Goto Image menu rotate Canvas enter the value of the rotation angle in degrees Specify the
direction of the rotation – clockwise(cw) or anticlockwise (ccw) press the button OK.
Fig: 5.5: Options Palette
Fig : 5.6: Image Rotation Options
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
880
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
Skew – To Skew an Image you should drag the marker on the side, the upper and the lower marker
keeping the Ctrl key pressed. You can adjust the Skew transformation option in the Options Palette
setting the H and V parameters.
Distort – It is possible to distort an Image by
dragging
a
corner
marker
keeping
the Ctrl key pressed.
Warp – A part of the Image, could now be
distorted or transformed into a new shape.
Perspective – to create a perspective you should drag a corner marker keeping the Ctrl and Shift keys
pressed. If you want to drag two points at a time, you should drag a corner marker keeping the Ctrl,
Alt and Shift keys pressed. To confirm the transformation press Enter key or double-click with the left
mouse button inside the object. You can as well press the button
in the Options Palette. To cancel
the transformation press Esc or the button
in the Options Palette.
FAST SCANNING IN PHOTOSHOP
When you place photos on the scanner you
do not need to align them precisely. Just put them
on the board and scan them all at once. You can
import a scanned Image by clicking File
Import. When the photos are imported, Click on
File Menu Automate Crop And Straighten
Photos. Your photos will be aligned, cropped and
put to separate documents.
SELECTING FOREGROUND AND BACKGROUND COLORS
The two colouRed boxes in the Tools Panel indicate the current Foreground color and the
Background color. The Default Foreground color is Black and the Default Background color is
White.
When you use the Type Tools, the Painting Tools,
or the Shape Tools, Foreground color is applied.
The Foreground color is also the beginning color
of a default Gradient applied by the Gradient Tool.
The Background color is the color you apply with
the Eraser Tool and is the ending color of the
default Gradient.
When you increase the size of your Canvas, the additional Canvas gets Filled with the
Background color (if you don’t have any other Layers). Clicking the small icon labeled default colors or
simply press the D key to return the colors to the defaults. To switch the Foreground and Background
Fig : 5.7: Example of some Transformation Tool like Skew,
Distort, Perspective
Fig : 5.9: Foreground and Background color in Tools
Fig : 5.8: Fast Scanning option
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
881
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
colors, click the Curved arrow in the Tools panel or press the X key. Here are a few tips to help you get a
handle on using Tools with Foreground and Background colors:
Blend the Foreground and Background by using the Gradient Tool: When you drag with the
Gradient Tool across the Canvas and the Gradient is set to the default, you get a blending of the
Foreground and Background colors.
Fill selected areas with the Foreground color: Just click with the Paint Bucket Tool in the selected
areas based on a Tolerance setting.
Apply the Background color by erasing: If you’re working on a Background, rather than a Layer, you
can use the Eraser Tool to apply the Background color. Some people prefer to say you’re erasing to the
Background or Canvas color. If you use the Eraser Tool on a Layer, you erase to Transparency.
Add more Background to your Canvas and Fill it with the Background color: When you enlarge
your Canvas size, Photoshop, by default, automatically Fills the added Canvas with the Background
color. If you enlarge a Layer, the extra Canvas is Transparent.
We can set the current Foreground or the Background color using the following
Color Picker Palette
Eyedropper Palette
Swatches Palette
USING COLOR PICKER PALETTE
When you click either the Foreground or
Background color swatch in the Tools panel of
Photoshop, Color Picker dialog box is appears. This
huge dialog box allows you to select a color from the
color spectrum (color slider) or define your color
numerically.
Drag the color slider to get the color you want.
To fine-tune your choice, click in the large Square on
the left. This Square area is called a color field. The
circular icon targets your selected shade. The dialog box
displays your new chosen color, as well as the current
original Foreground or Background color.
The numeric values also change accordingly to
represent the exact shade you’ve chosen.
Alternatively, if you know the numeric values of the color you want to use, you can plug in the
values in the text boxes on the right side of the Color Picker. For example, RGB values are based on
Brightness levels, from 0 to 255, with 0 being Black and 255 being the pure color or white. CMYK
values are based on percentages (0 to 100) of the four process colors — Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and
Black. You can enter the hexadecimal formula (six digit Alpha numeric color code) for web colors.
When you’re satisfied with the color, click OK.
Fig : 5.10: Color Picker Dialog Box
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
882
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
Note : Choosing a color visually is fine for web or multimedia work, but not recommended for print
work. Among other reasons, your monitor uses an RGB (Red, Green, and Blue) color model, whereas
printers use a CMYK (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black) model.
You can add new color to your Swatches panel if desiRed. Click the Add to Swatches button.
Name your new swatch and click OK.
USING EYEDROPPER TOOL
Suppose you want to use color of some other Image, but you are not able to locate that color in
the Color Picker Palette since the Palette contains a large number of colors. In such situation,
Eyedropper Tool helps in locating the desiRed color. The Eyedropper takes the sample color from an
Image and sets it as the Foreground or Background color.
Selecting Foreground/Background with Eyedropper
Tool
In the Tools panel, select the Eyedropper
Tool.
Click somewhere on your Image to define the Foreground color. Look how Foreground selector
on the Toolbox changes.
Click holding Alt key to set the Background color.
In the Options bar, you can change sample size (the Eyedropper's range):
o the "Point Sample" picks up the color from the Pixel you click on
o all the other samples read average values from larger areas (movie).
Note : You can toggle between Foreground and Background colors by pressing the X.
USING SWATCHES PALETTE
Swatches allow you to save and select colors so that you can quickly use them again in your
workflow. By default, the swatches panel holds over 100 pRedefined color swatches, and has the ability
to save as many user defined swatches as you desire. We can change a color or delete it in a swatch
SELECTING COLORS USING SWATCHES PALETTE
Click Foreground color on the Tools Panel and then click a color in the Swatch Palette or press
CTRL key and press on the color swatch with the left mouse button to select Background color.
Adding Colors to the Swatch Palette
Fig : 5.11: Swatches Palette
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
883
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
Open an Image Select the desiRed color from your Image using Eye-dropper Tool. Then the
color appears in the Foreground color box Click the empty area in the swatches Palette. The
color swatch name dialog box appears, Enter Name and press OK.
CAMERA RAW
Camera Raw software is included as a plug‑in with Adobe After Effects and Adobe Photoshop,
and also adds functionality to Adobe Bridge. Camera Raw gives each of these applications the ability to
import and work with camera raw files. You can also use Camera Raw to work with JPEG and TIFF
files. You must have Photoshop or After Effects installed to open files in the Camera Raw dialog box
from Bridge. However, if Photoshop or After Effects is not installed, you can still preview the Images
and see their metadata in Bridge. If another application is associated with the Image file type, it’s
possible to open the file in that application from Bridge.
Using Bridge, you can apply, copy, and clear Image settings, and you can see previews and
metadata for camera raw files without opening them in the Camera Raw dialog box. The preview in
Bridge is a JPEG Image generated using the current Image settings; the preview is not the raw camera
data itself, which would appear as a very dark Grayscale Image.
You can modify the default settings that Camera Raw uses for a particular model of camera. For
each camera model, you can also modify the defaults for a particular ISO setting or a particular camera
(by serial number). You can modify and save Image settings as presets for use with other Images. When
you use Camera Raw to make Adjustments (including Straightening and cropping) to a camera raw
Image, the Image’s original camera raw data is preserved. The Adjustments are stoRed for each Image in
either the Camera Raw database, as metadata embedded in the Image file, or in a sidecar XMP file (a
metadata file that accompanies a camera raw file). After you process and edit a camera raw file using the
Camera Raw plug‑in, an icon appears in the Image thumbnail in Bridge. If you open a camera raw file in
Photoshop, you can save the Image in other Image formats, such as PSD, JPEG, Large Document Format
(PSB), TIFF, Cineon, Photoshop Raw, PNG, or PBM. From the Camera Raw dialog box in Photoshop,
you can save the processed files in Digital Negative (DNG), JPEG, TIFF, or Photoshop (PSD) formats.
Although Photoshop Camera Raw software can open and edit a camera raw Image file, it cannot save an
Image in a camera raw format.
Note: In Photoshop, the Camera Raw dialog box is automatically suppressed when you use a
batch of files for a web photo gallery, picture package, or contact sheet, or when you use the Place
command.
Different camera models save camera raw Images in many different formats, and the data must
be interpreted differently for these formats. Camera Raw includes profiles for many camera models, and
it can interpret many camera raw formats.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
884
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
CHAPTER 6
PHOTOSHOP COLOR MODES
A color model is a method to translate the light
captuRed in an Image into digital form that the computer and
other devices can understand. Each color model breaks the
light into one or more channels and then assigns an intensity
level of each channel for each Pixel in the Image. Choosing a
color mode also determines which Tools and file formats are
available. Photoshop has 8 different color modes.
RGB COLOR MODE:
RGB Color is the most versatile and widely used of all the Photoshop modes. It’s the mode in
which digital cameras save your photos; the only mode in which all the Photoshop Tool options and
filters are accessible; and the mode of choice for export to the Web, Mobile devices, Video, Multimedia
programs, and most Inkjet printers. The Mode of this document is RGB Color, so it contains three
channels. (1 Red, 1 Green, 1 Blue). RGB is consideRed as device dependant color mode because colors
in Images created in RGB color mode will appear differently on various devices like TFT, Mobile, TV,
PDA’s, etc,.
CMYK COLOR MODE:
In the CMYK mode, each Pixel is assigned a percentage value for each of the process inks. The
lightest (highlight) colors are assigned small percentages of process ink colors; the darker (shadow)
colors are assigned higher percentages. For example, a bright Red might contain 2% Cyan, 93%
Magenta, 90% Yellow, and 0% Black. In CMYK Images, pure white is generated when all four
components have values of 0%.
Use the CMYK mode when preparing an Image to be printed using process colors. Converting an
RGB Image into CMYK creates a color separation. If you start with an RGB Image, it’s best to edit first
in RGB and then convert to CMYK at the end of your editing process.
INDEXED COLOR MODE:
Indexed Color mode produces 8-bit Image files with upto 256 colors. When converting to
indexed color, Photoshop builds a Color Lookup Table (CLUT), which stores and indexes the colors in
the Image. If a color in the original Image does not appear in the table, the program chooses the closest
one or uses dithering to simulate the color using available colors.
Although its Palette of colors is limited, indexed color can Reduce file size yet maintain the
visual quality needed for multimedia presentations, web pages etc. Limited editing is available in this
mode. For extensive editing, you should convert temporarily to RGB mode
Fig : 6.1: Color Modes
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
885
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
GRAYSCALE COLOR MODE
Grayscale mode uses different shades of Grey in an Image. In 8-bit Images, there can be up to
256 shades of Grey. Every Pixel of a Grayscale Image has a Brightness value ranging from 0 (Black) to
255 (white). In 16-and 32-bit Images, the number of shades in an Image is much greater than in 8-bit
Images.
Grayscale values can also be measuRed as percentages of Black ink coverage (0% is equal to
white, 100% to Black). Grayscale mode uses the range defined by the working space setting that you
specify in the Color Settings dialog box.
DUOTONE COLOR MODE
The Duotone mode defines an Image in two colors. To convert an Image to the Duotone mode,
we first have to convert it into the Grayscale mode.
BITMAP COLOR MODE
Bitmap mode uses one of two color values (Black or White) to represent the Pixels in an Image.
Images in Bitmap mode are called bitmapped 1-bit Images because they have a bit depth of 1.
LAB COLOR MODE
The Lab color model is based on the human perception of color. The numeric values in Lab
describe all the colors that a person with normal vision sees. Because Lab describes how a color looks
rather than how much of a particular colorant is needed for a device (such as a monitor, desktop printer,
or digital camera) to produce colors, Lab is consideRed to be a device-independent color model. Color
management systems use Lab as a color reference to pRedictably transform a color from one color space
to another color space.
The Lab Color mode has a lightness component (L) that can range from 0 to 100. In the Adobe
Color Picker and Color panel, the a component (Green-Red axis) and the b component (Blue-Yellow
axis) can range from +127 to –128.
MULTICHANNEL COLOR MODE
Multichannel mode Images contain 256 levels of Grey in each channel and are useful for
specialized printing.
These Guide lines apply when converting Images to Multichannel mode:
Layers are unsupported and therefore flattened.
Color channels in the original Image become spot color channels in the converted Image.
Converting a CMYK Image to Multichannel mode creates Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black
Spot Channels.
Converting an RGB Image to Multichannel mode creates Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow Spot
Channels.
Deleting a channel from an RGB, CMYK, or Lab Image automatically converts the Image to
Multichannel mode, Flattening Layers.
To export a multichannel Image, save it in Photoshop DCS 2.0 format.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
886
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
MAKING COLOR ADJUSTMENTS
The process of color corrections using the Tools and methods are known as color Adjustments.
The Adjustment panel is active by default. The powerful Tools in Photoshop can enhance, repair, and
correct the color and Tonality (lightness, darkness, and Contrast) in an Image.
You can adjust the color in an Image in different ways. The most flexible method is to use an
Adjustment Layer. When you select a color Adjustment Tool in the Adjustments panel, Photoshop
automatically creates an Adjustment Layer. Adjustment Layers let you experiment with color and Tonal
Adjustments without permanently modifying the Pixels in the Image. The color and Tonal changes reside
within the Adjustment Layer, which acts as a covering through which the underlying Image Layers
appear.
Here are some points to consider before making color and Tonal Adjustments.
Work with a monitor that’s calibrated and profiled. For critical Image editing, calibration and
profiling are essential. Otherwise, the Image you see on your monitor looks different on other
monitors or when printed.
Plan to use Adjustment Layers to adjust the Tonal range and color balance of your Image.
Adjustment Layers let you go back and make successive Tonal Adjustments without discarding
or permanently modifying data from the Image Layer. Accessing the color and Tonal commands
in the Adjustments panel automatically creates Adjustment Layers.
If you don’t want to use Adjustment Layers, you can apply Adjustments directly to an Image
Layer. Remember that some Image information is discarded, when making a color or Tonal
Adjustment directly to an Image Layer.
For critical work and maximum preservation of Image data, it’s best if the Image you work with
is 16 bits per channel (16-bit Image) rather than 8 bits per channel (8-bit Image). Data is
discarded when you make Tonal and Color Adjustments. The loss of Image information is more
critical in an 8-bit Image than a 16-bit Image. Generally, 16-bit Images have a larger file size
than 8-bit Images.
Duplicate or make a copy of the Image file. Working on a copy of your Image preserves the
original in the event you want to use the Image in its original state.
Remove any flaws such as Dust spots, Blemishes, and Scratches from the Image before making
color and Tonal Adjustments.
Open the Info or Histogram panel in Expanded View. As you evaluate and correct the Image,
both panels display invaluable feedback on your Adjustments.
You can make a selection or use a mask to confine your color and Tonal Adjustments to part of
an Image. Another way to apply color and Tonal Adjustments selectively is to set up your
document with Image components on different Layers. Color and Tonal Adjustments are applied
to only one Layer at a time. Only the Image components on the targeted Layer are affected.
ADJUSTMENTS PANEL OVERVIEW
The Tools for making color and Tonal Adjustments can be found in the Adjustments panel.
Clicking a Tool icon selects an Adjustment and automatically creates an Adjustment Layer. The
Adjustments you make using the controls and options in the Adjustments panel create nondestructive
Adjustment Layers.
The Properties panel has a Presets menu with the Adjustment presets. Presets are available for
Levels, Curves, Exposure, Hue/Saturation, Black & White, Channel Mixer and Selective Color. Clicking
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
887
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
a preset applies it to the Image using an Adjustment Layer. You can always save Adjustment settings as a
preset, which is added to the presets list.
Clicking an Adjustment icon or a preset displays the settings options for the specific Adjustment.
1. If you want to make Adjustments to a portion of your Image, select that portion. If you make no
selection, the Adjustment is applied to the entire Image.
2. Do one of the following:
Click an Adjustment icon in the Adjustments panel.
Create an Adjustment Layer.
Double-click the thumbnail of an existing Adjustment Layer in the Layers panel.
Note: You can also choose Image Adjustments, and choose a command from the submenu to
apply Adjustments directly to the Image Layer. Keep in mind that this method discards Image
information.
Apply a correction using the Adjustments panel
1. In the Adjustments panel, click an Adjustment icon or choose an Adjustment from the panel
menu.
2. Use the controls and options in the Properties panel to apply the settings you want.
Other necessary options requiRed to know:
To toggle the visibility of the Adjustment, click the Toggle Layer Visibility button
.
To return the Adjustment to its original settings, click the Reset button
.
To discard an Adjustment, click the Delete This Adjustment Layer button
.
To expand the width of the Adjustment panel, drag a bottom corner of the panel.
COLOR ADJUSTMENT COMMANDS:
You can choose from the following Color Adjustment commands:
Color Correction : This command is useful for various types of color corrections.
Levels : The Histogram represents color levels with Black on the left and white on the right. It
corrects the Tonal range of an Image which represents the amount of Contrast in the Image.
Auto Levels : It will automatically shift the darkest Pixels to Black and the lightest Pixels to
white. It can greatly improve Contrast in dark or Shadow Images.
Auto Contrast : It adjusts the overall Contrast and Mixture of colors in an Image.
Auto Color : It looks for the Darkest and Lightest points in the Image and balances out the
colors. It remover the unpleasant casts created by scanners and digital cameras.
Curves : It adjusts the whole Tonal range of an Image.
Color Balance : It changes the whole mixture of colors in an Image for generalized color
correction. Shadows, Mudstones, Highlights help in selecting the Tonal range.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
888
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
Hue/Saturation : It adjusts the Hue, Saturation and Brightness of a specific color component in
an Image.
Selective Color : It is a technique used by high end scanners and separations program to increase
and decrease the amount of process colors in primary color components in an Image.
Channel Mixer: It makes the color from Multiple channels- Red, Green and Blue. Its main
purpose is to create special Effects on our Images.
Brightness/Contrast : It makes simple Adjustments to the Tonal range or an Image or to every
Pixel in the Image
De-Saturate : It changes colors or Brightness values on an Image, but are typically used for
enhancing color and producing special effects.
Invert: It inverts the color of an Image. It is used to make a positive Black and white Image
negative or to make a positive from a scanned Black and white negative.
Equalize: It Redistributes the Brightness values of the Pixels in an Image so that more evenly
represent the range of Brightness levels .
Threshold: It converts Grayscale or color Images to high- Contrast Black-and- white Images.
Posterize: It leads us specify the number of Tonal levels for each channel in an Image and then
maps Pixels to closest matching levels.
Gradient map: The equivalent Grayscale range of an Image to the colors of a specified
Gradient Fill. We can specify more than one color.
Match color: It matches colors between multiple Images and Layers and matches the color from
one Image to another Image.
Shadow/highlight: It is suitable for correcting photos. The Adjustment is useful for brightening
the areas of shadows in an Image.
Variation: It adjusts the color balance, Contrast and saturation of an Image by showing user
thumbnails of alternatives .
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
889
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
CHAPTER 7
USING FILTERS AND AUTOMATE COMMANDS
You can use filters in Photoshop to change the look of your Images. For example, you can apply
special effects that turn an Image into an artistic rendering of a photograph. You can apply filters to a
selected area or to an entire Layer.
Not all filters work on all Images. You can’t use some filters on Images in Grayscale mode and
can’t use any filters in bitmap mode or index color mode. Many other filters will not work on 16-bit
Images. Once you have applied a filter, you can continue to reapply it to increase the effect. Filters can
change the Brightness value, saturation, Hue and position of Pixels in relation to other Pixels of an
Image. Filters can be various types such as Blurring, Lens correction, Lens Blur, Noise Reduction,
Liquify and Vanishing Point filters.
USING FILTERS
You can use filters to clean up or retouch your photos, apply special art effects that give your
Image the appearance of a sketch or impressionistic painting, or create unique transformations using
distortions and lighting effects. The filters provided by Adobe appear in the Filter menu. Some filters
provided by third-party developers are available as Plug‑Ins. Once installed, these Plug-in filters appear
at the bottom of the Filter menu.
Smart Filters, applied to Smart Objects, lets you use filters nondestructively. Smart Filters are
stoRed as Layer effects in the Layers Palette and can be readjusted at any time, working from the original
Image data contained in the Smart Object. To use filters, choose the appropriate submenu command
from the Filter menu. Once you have applied a filter, you can continue to reapply it to increase the effect.
These guideLines can help you to work with Filters
Filters are applied to the active, visible Layer or a selection
Most filters can be applied cumulatively using the Filter Gallery. All filters can be applied
individually.
Filters cannot be applied to Bitmap mode or indexed color Images.
Some filters work only on RGB Images.
All filters can be applied to 8 bit Images. Only the following filters can be applied to 16 bit Images.
Blur, Average Blur, Blur More, Gaussian Blur, Motion Blur, Noise, Add Noise, Despeckle, Dust and
Scratches, Median, Sharpen, Sharpen Edges, Sharpen More, Unsharp Mask, Stylize, Emboss, Find
Edges and Solarize.
Some filters are processed entirely in RAM. If all your available RAM is used to process a filter
effect, you may get an error message.
Selecting the area Filtering
To apply filter to an entire Layer, must be first select/activate that Layer.
To apply filter to an area of a Layer, select that area.
To apply a filter nondestructively so you can change your filter settings later, select the Smart Object
that contains the Image content you want to filter.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
890
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
FILTER GALLERY
The Filter Gallery provides a preview of many of the special effects filters. You can apply
multiple filters, turn on or off the effect of a filter, reset options for a filter, and change the order in
which filters are applied. When you are satisfied with the preview, you can then apply it to your
Image. Not all filters in the Filter menu are available in the Filter Gallery.
Click on Filter MenuFilter GallerySelect the filter name which you want to apply from a
range of filters available.
If available, select the Preview option to preview the filter in the document window.Depending
on the filter and how you are applying it, use the following tips to preview the filter:
Use the + button or - button under the preview window to zoom in or zoom out on the preview.
Click the zoom bar (where the zoom percentage appears) to choose a zoom percentage.
Drag in the preview window to center a specific area of the Image in the window.
Click the Show/Hide button at the top of the dialog box to hide the filter thumbnails.
Click the eye icon next to a filter to hide the effect in the preview
Image.
You can adjust the filter settings or select a new filter to preview.
Apply Filters from menu
You can apply a filter from the Filter menu, selecting a
submenu to select the effect you want. If no dialog box appears, the
filter effect is applied.
If a dialog box or the Filter Gallery appears, enter values or
select options, and then click OK. If you do not get the results you
Fig :8.2: Filter Gallery Dialog Box
Fig : 7.1: Filter Menu
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
891
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
want, click Cancel.
ARTISTIC FILTERS
Filters from the Artistic submenu help you achieve painterly and artistic effects for a fine arts or
commercial project. For example, use the Cutout filter for collages or typography. These filters replicate
natural or traditional media effects. All the Artistic filters can be applied through the Filter Gallery.
Colored Pencil: Draws an Image using Colored pencils on a solid Background. Edges are retained
and given a rough crosshatch appearance; the solid Background color shows through the smoother
areas.
Note: For a parchment effect, change the Background color just before applying the Colored Pencil filter
to a selected area.
Cutout: Makes an Image appear as though it were constructed from roughly cut pieces of Colored
paper. High-Contrast Images appear as if in silhouette, and Colored Images are built up from several
Layers of Colored paper.
Dry Brush: Paints the edges of the Image using a dry brush technique. The filter simplifies an Image
by Reducing its range of colors to areas of common color.
Film Grain: Applies an even pattern to the shadow tones and mid-tones. A smoother, more saturated
pattern is added to the lighter areas. This filter is useful for eliminating banding in blends and
visually unifying elements from various sources.
Fresco : Paints an Image in a coarse style using short, rounded, and hastily applied daubs.
Neon Glow : Adds various types of glows to the objects in an Image. This filter is useful for
colorizing an Image while softening its look.
Paint Daubs: Lets you choose from various brush sizes (from 1 to 50) and types for a painterly
effect. Brush types include Simple, Light Rough, Dark Rough, Wide Sharp, Wide Blurry, and
Sparkle.
Palette Knife: Reduces detail in an Image to give the effect of a thinly painted Canvas that reveals
the texture underneath.
Plastic Wrap: Coats the Image in shiny plastic, accentuating the surface detail.
Poster Edges: Reduces the number of colors in an Image (posterizes it)
Rough Pastels: Applies Strokes of pastel chalk on a textuRed Background. In areas of bright color,
the chalk appears thick with little texture; in darker areas, the chalk appears scraped off to reveal the
texture.
Smudge Stick: Softens an Image using short diagonal Strokes to smudge or smear the darker areas.
Lighter areas become brighter and lose detail.
Sponge: Creates Images with highly textuRed areas of Contrasting color, simulating the effect of
sponge painting.
Under painting: Paints the Image on a textuRed Background, and then paints the final Image over it.
Watercolor: Paints the Image in a watercolor style using a medium brush loaded with water and
color, simplifying details. Where significant Tonal changes occur at the edges, the filter saturates the
color.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
892
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
BLUR FILTERS
The Blur filters soften a selection or an entire Image, and are useful for retouching. They smooth
transitions by averaging the Pixels next to the hard edges of defined Lines and shaded areas in an Image.
Average: Finds the average color of an Image or selection, and then Fills the Image or selection with
the color to create a smooth look. For example, if you select an area of grass, the filter changes the
area into a homogeneous patch of Green.
Blur and Blur More: Eliminate noise where significant color transitions occur in an Image. Blur
filters smooth transitions by averaging the Pixels next to the hard edges of defined Lines and shaded
areas. The effect of the Blur More filter is three or four times stronger than that of the Blur filter.
Box Blur: Blurs an Image based on the average color value of neighboring Pixels. This filter is
useful for creating special effects. You can adjust the size of the area used to calculate the average
value for a given Pixel; a larger radius results in greater blurring.
Gaussian Blur: Quickly blurs a selection by an adjustable amount. Gaussian refers to the bell-
shaped curve that is generated when Photoshop applies a weighted average to the Pixels.
The Gaussian Blurfilter adds low-frequency detail and can produce a hazy effect.
Note: When Gaussian Blur, Box Blur, Motion Blur, or Shape Blur are applied to a selected
Image area, they will sometimes produce visually unexpected results near the edges of the selection. This is
because these blur filters will use Image data from outside the selected area to create the new, blurRed
Pixels inside the selected area. For example, if the selection represents a Background area that you want
to blur while keeping the Foreground sharp, the edges of the blurRed Background area will be
contaminated with colors from the Foreground, producing a fuzzy, muddy-looking outline around the
Foreground. To avoid this effect in such cases, you can use Smart Blur or Lens Blur.
Lens Blur: Adds blur to an Image to give the effect of a narrower depth of field so that some objects
in the Image stay in focus and others areas are blurRed.
Motion Blur: Blurs in the specified direction (from –360º to +360º) and at a specified intensity
(from 1 to 999). The filter’s effect is analogous to taking a picture of a moving object with a fixed
exposure time.
Radial Blur: Simulates the blur of a zooming or rotating camera to produce a soft blur. Choose Spin
to blur along concentric circular Lines, and then specify a degree of rotation. Choose Zoom to blur
along radial Lines, as if zooming into or out of the Image, and specify a value from 1 to 100. Blur
quality ranges from Draft (for fast but grainy results) or Good and Best for smoother results, which
are indistinguishable from each other except on a large selection. Specify the origin of the blur by
dragging the pattern in the Blur Center box.
Shape Blur: Uses the specified kernel to create the blur. Choose a kernel from the list of custom
shape presets, and use the radius slider to adjust its size. You can load different shape libraries by
clicking the triangle and choosing from the list. Radius determines the size of the kernel; the larger
the kernel, the greater the blur.
Smart Blur: Blurs an Image with precision. You can specify a radius, a threshold, and a blur quality.
The Radius value determines the size of the area searched for dissimilar Pixels. The Threshold value
determines how dissimilar the Pixels must be before they are affected. You also can set a mode for
the entire selection (Normal) or for the edges of color transitions (Edge Only and Overlay Edge).
Where significant Contrast occurs, Edge Only applies Black-and-white edges, and Overlay Edge
applies white.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
893
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
Surface Blur : Blurs an Image while preserving edges. This filter is useful for creating special
effects and for removing noise or graininess. The Radius option specifies the size of the area sampled
for the blur. The Threshold option controls how much the Tonal values of neighboring Pixels must
diverge from the center Pixel value before being part of the blur. Pixels with Tonal value differences
less than the Threshold value are excluded from the blur.
BRUSH STROKE FILTERS
Like the Artistic filters, the Brush Stroke filters give a painterly or fine-arts look using different
brush and ink Stroke effects. Some of the filters add grain, paint, noise, edge detail, or texture. All the
Brush Stroke filters can be applied through the Filter Gallery.
Accented Edges: Accentuates the edges of an Image. When the edge Brightness control is set to a
high value, the accents resemble white chalk; when set to a low value, the accents resemble Black
ink.
Angled Strokes: Repaints an Image using diagonal Strokes, with lighter and darker areas painted in
Strokes going in opposite directions.
Crosshatch: Preserves the details and features of the original Image while adding texture and
roughening the edges of the Colored areas with simulated pencil hatching. The Strength option (with
values from 1 to 3) determines the number of hatching passes.
Dark Strokes: Paints dark areas with short, tight, dark Strokes, and lighter areas with long, white
Strokes.
Ink OutLines: Redraws an Image with fine narrow Lines over the original details, in pen-and-ink
style.
Spatter: Replicates the effect of a spatter airbrush. Increasing the options simplifies the overall
effect.
Sprayed Strokes: Repaints an Image, using its dominant colors, with angled, sprayed Strokes of
color.
DISTORT FILTERS
The Distort filters geometrically distort an Image, creating 3D or other reshaping effects. Note
that these filters can be very memory-intensive. The Diffuse Glow, Glass, and Ocean Ripple filters can
be applied through the Filter Gallery.
Diffuse Glow: Renders an Image as though it were viewed through a soft diffusion filter. The filter
adds see-through white noise, with the glow fading from the center of a selection.
Displace: Uses an Image, called a displacement map, to determine how to distort a selection. For
example, using a parabola-shaped displacement map, you can create an Image that appears to be
printed on a cloth held up by its corners.
Glass: Makes an Image appear as if it were being viewed through different types of glass. You can
choose a glass effect or create your own glass surface as a Photoshop file and apply it. You can
adjust scaling, distortion, and smoothness settings. When using surface controls with a file, follow
the instructions for the Displace filter.
Ocean Ripple: Adds randomly spaced ripples to the surface of the Image so that it appears to be
underwater.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
894
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
Pinch: Squeezes a selection. A positive value up to 100% shifts a selection toward its center; a
negative value up to – 100% shifts a selection outward.
Polar Coordinates: Converts a selection from its Rectangular to polar coordinates, and vice versa,
according to a selected option. You can use this filter to create a cylinder anamorphosis—an art form
popular in the 18th century—in which the distorted Image appears normal when viewed in a
mirroRed cylinder.
Ripple: Creates an undulating pattern on a selection, like ripples on the surface of a pond. For greater
control, use the Wave filter. Options include the number and size of ripples.
Shear: Distorts an Image along a curve. Specify the curve by dragging the line in the box. You can
adjust any point along the curve. Click Default to change the curve back to a Straight line. In
addition, you choose how to treat undistorted areas.
Spherize: Gives objects a 3D effect by wrapping a selection around a spherical shape, distorting the
Image and stretching it to fit the selected curve.
Twirl : Rotates a selection more sharply in the center than at the edges. Specifying an angle produces
a twirl pattern.
Wave: Works much as the Ripple filter does, but with greater control. Options include the number of
wave generators, wavelength (distance from one wave crest to the next), height of the wave, and
wave type: Sine (rolling), Triangle, or Square. The Randomize option applies random values. You
can also define undistorted areas.
ZigZag: Distorts a selection radically, depending on the radius of the Pixels in your selection.
The Ridges option sets the number of direction reversals of the zigzag from the center of the
selection to its edge. You also specify how to displace the Pixels: Pond Ripples displaces Pixels to
the upper-left or lower right, Out From Center displaces Pixels toward or away from the center of the
selection, and Around Center rotates Pixels around the center.
NOISE FILTERS
The Noise filters add or remove noise, or Pixels with randomly distributed color levels. This
helps to blend a selection into the surrounding Pixels. Noise filters can create unusual textures or remove
problem areas, such as dust and scratches.
Add Noise : Applies random Pixels to an Image, simulating the effect of shooting pictures on high-
speed film. You can also use the Add Noise filter to Reduce banding in featheRed selections or
graduated Fills or to give a more realistic look to heavily retouched areas. Options for noise
distribution include Uniform and Gaussian. Uniform distributes color values of noise using random
numbers between 0 and plus or minus the specified value, creating a subtle effect. Gaussian
distributes color values of noise along a bell-shaped curve, creating a speckled effect. The
Monochromatic option applies the filter to only the Tonal elements in the Image without changing
the colors.
Despeckle: Detects the edges in an Image (areas where significant color changes occur) and blurs all
of the selection except those edges. This blurring removes noise while preserving detail.
Dust & Scratches: Reduces noise by changing dissimilar Pixels. To achieve a balance between
sharpening the Image and hiding defects, try various combinations of Radius and Threshold settings.
Or apply the filter to selected areas in the Image. Median
Reduces noise in an Image by blending the Brightness of Pixels within a selection. The filter searches
the radius of a Pixel selection for Pixels of similar Brightness, discarding Pixels that differ too much
from adjacent Pixels, and replaces the center Pixel with the median Brightness value of the searched
Pixels. This filter is useful for eliminating or Reducing the effect of motion on an Image.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
895
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
Reduce Noise: Reduces noise while preserving edges based on user settings affecting the overall
Image or individual channels.
PIXELATE FILTERS
The filters in the Pixelate submenu sharply define a selection by clumping Pixels of similar color
values in cells.
Color Halftone : Simulates the effect of using an enlarged halftone screen on each channel of the
Image. For each channel, the filter divides the Image into Rectangles and replaces each Rectangle
with a Circle. The Circle size is proportional to the Brightness of the Rectangle.
Crystallize Clumps Pixels into a solid color in a Polygon shape.
Facet : Clumps Pixels of solid or similar colors into blocks of like-Colored Pixels. You can use this
filter to make a scanned Image look hand-painted or to make a realistic Image resemble an abstract
painting.
Fragment: Creates four copies of the Pixels in the selection, averages them, and offsets them from
each other.
Mezzotint: Converts an Image to a random pattern of Black-and-white areas or of fully saturated
colors in a color Image. To use the filter, choose a dot pattern from the Type menu in the Mezzotint
dialog box.
Mosaic : Clumps Pixels into Square blocks. The Pixels in a given block are the same color, and the
colors of the blocks represent the colors in the selection.
Pointillize: Breaks up the color in an Image into randomly placed dots, as in a pointillist painting,
and uses the Background color as a Canvas area between the dots.
RENDER FILTERS
The Render filters create 3D Shapes, cloud patterns, refraction patterns, and simulated light
reflections in an Image. You can also manipulate objects in 3D space, create 3D objects (cubes, spheres,
and cylinders), and create texture Fills from Grayscale files to produce 3D-like effects for lighting.
Clouds: Generates a soft cloud pattern using random values that vary between the Foreground and
the Background colors. To generate a more stark cloud pattern, hold down Alt (Windows) or Option
(Mac OS) as you choose Filter Render Clouds. When you apply the Clouds filter, the Image
data on the active Layer is replaced.
Difference Clouds: Uses randomly generated values that vary between the Foreground and
Background color to produce a cloud pattern. The filter blends the cloud data with the existing Pixels
in the same way the Difference mode blends colors. The first time you choose this filter, portions of
the Image are inverted in a cloud pattern. Applying the filter several times creates rib and vein
patterns that resemble a marble texture. When you apply the Difference Clouds filter, the Image data
on the active Layer is replaced.
Fibers: Creates the look of woven fibers using the Foreground and Background colors. You use the
Variance slider to control how the colors vary (a low value produces long streaks of color, and a high
value results in very short fibers with more varied distribution of color). The Strength slider controls
how each fiber looks. A low setting produces a loose weave, and a high setting produces short,
stringy fibers. Click the Randomize button to change how the pattern looks; you can click the button
a number of times until you find a pattern you like. When you apply the Fibers filter, the Image data
on the active Layer is replaced.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
896
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
Lens Flare: Simulates the refraction caused by shining a bright light into a camera lens. Specify a
location for the center of the flare by clicking anywhere inside the Image thumbnail or by dragging
its cross hair.
Lighting Effects: Lets you produce myriad lighting effects on RGB Images by varying 17 light
styles, three light types, and four sets of light properties. You can also use textures from Grayscale
files (called bump maps) to produce 3D-like effects and save your own styles for use in other Images.
Note: Lighting Effects is unavailable in 64-bit versions of Mac OS.
SHARPEN FILTERS
The Sharpen filters focus blurRed Images by increasing the Contrast of adjacent Pixels.
Sharpen and Sharpen More : Focus a selection and improve its clarity. The Sharpen More filter
applies a stronger sharpening effect than does the Sharpen filter.
Sharpen Edges and Unsharp Mask: Find the areas in the Image where significant color changes
occur and sharpen them. The Sharpen Edges filter sharpens only edges while preserving the overall
smoothness of the Image. Use this filter to sharpen edges without specifying an amount. For
professional color correction, use the Unsharp Mask filter to adjust the Contrast of edge detail and
produce a lighter and darker line on each side of the edge. This process emphasizes the edge and
creates the illusion of a sharper Image.
Smart Sharpen: Sharpens an Image by letting you set the sharpening algorithm or control the
amount of sharpening that occurs in shadows and highlights. This is the recommended way to
sharpen if you don’t have a particular sharpening filter in mind.
SKETCH FILTERS
Filters in the Sketch submenu add texture to Images, often for a 3D effect. The filters also are
useful for creating a fine-arts or hand-drawn look. Many of the Sketch filters use the Foreground and
Background color as they Redraw the Image. All the Sketch filters can be applied through the Filter
Gallery.
Bas Relief: Transforms an Image so that it appears carved in low relief and lit to accent the surface
variations. Dark areas of the Image take on the Foreground color, and light colors use the
Background color.
Chalk & Charcoal : Redraws highlights and Midtones with a solid midtone Grey Background
drawn in coarse chalk. Shadow areas are replaced with Black diagonal charcoal Lines. The charcoal
is drawn in the Foreground color; the chalk, in the Background color.
Charcoal : Creates a posterized, smudged effect. Major edges are boldly drawn, and Midtones are
sketched using a diagonal Stroke. Charcoal is the Foreground color, and the Background is the color
of the paper.
Chrome: Renders the Image as if it had a polished chrome surface. Highlights are high points, and
shadows are low points in the reflecting surface. After applying the filter, use the Levels dialog box
to add more Contrast to the Image.
Conté Crayon : Replicates the texture of dense dark and pure white Conté crayons on an Image. The
Conté Crayon filter uses the Foreground color for dark areas and the Background color for light
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
897
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
areas. For a truer effect, change the Foreground color to one of the common Conté Crayon colors
(Black, sepia, or sanguine) before applying the filter. For a muted effect, change the Background
color to white, add some of the Foreground color to the white Background, and then apply the filter.
Graphic Pen : Uses fine, linear ink Strokes to capture the details in the original Image. The effect is
especially striking with scanned Images. The filter replaces color in the original Image, using the
Foreground color for ink and the Background color for paper.
Halftone Pattern: Simulates the effect of a halftone screen while maintaining the continuous range
of tones.
Note Paper : Creates an Image that appears to be constructed of handmade paper. This filter
simplifies Images and combines the effects of the Stylize > Emboss and Texture > Grain filters. Dark
areas of the Image appear as holes in the top Layer of paper, revealing the Background color.
Photocopy: Simulates the effect of photocopying an Image. Large dark areas tend to be copied only
around their edges, and Midtones fall away to either solid Black or solid white.
Plaster: Molds an Image from 3D plaster, and then colorizes the result using the Foreground and
Background color. Dark areas are raised, and light areas are recessed.
Reticulation : Simulates the controlled shrinking and distortion of film emulsion to create an Image
that appears clumped in the shadows and lightly grained in the highlights.
Stamp: Simplifies the Image so that it appears to be created with a rubber or wood stamp. This filter
is best used with Black-and-white Images.
Torn Edges:Reconstructs the Image so that it appears composed of ragged, torn pieces of paper, and
then colorizes the Image using the Foreground and Background colors. This filter is particularly
useful for text or high-Contrast objects.
Water Paper: Uses blotchy daubs that appear painted onto fibrous, damp paper, causing the colors
to flow and blend.
STYLIZE FILTERS
The Stylize filters produce a painted or impressionistic effect on a selection by displacing Pixels
and by finding and heightening Contrast in an Image. After using filters like Find Edges and Trace
Contour that highlight edges, you can apply the Invert command to outline the edges of a color Image
with Colored Lines or to outline the edges of a Grayscale Image with white Lines.
Diffuse: Shuffles Pixels in a selection to soften focus according to the selected option: Normal
moves Pixels randomly (ignoring color values), Darken Only replaces light Pixels with darker ones,
and Lighten Only replaces dark Pixels with lighter ones. Anisotropic shuffles Pixels in the direction
of the least change in color.
Emboss : Makes a selection appear raised or stamped by converting its Fill color to Grey and tracing
the edges with the original Fill color. Options include an embossing angle (from –360° to recess the
surface, to +360° to raise the surface), height, and a percentage (1% to 500%) for the amount of color
within the selection. To retain color and detail when embossing, use the Fade command after
applying the Emboss filter.
Extrude : Gives a 3D texture to a selection or Layer.
Find Edges: Identifies the areas of the Image with significant transitions and emphasizes the edges.
Like the Trace Counter filter, Find Edges outLines the edges of an Image with dark Lines against a
white Background and is useful for creating a border around an Image.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
898
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
Glowing Edges : Identifies the edges of color and adds a neon-like glow to them. This filter can be
applied cumulatively.
Solarize: Blends a negative and a positive Image—similar to exposing a photographic print briefly to
light during development.
Tiles: Breaks up an Image into a series of tiles, creating an offset between the selection and its
original position. You can choose one of the following to Fill the area between the tiles: the
Background color, the Foreground color, a reverse version of the Image, or an unalteRed version of
the Image, which puts the tiled version on top of the original and reveals part of the original Image
underneath the tiled edges.
Trace Contour: Finds the transitions of major Brightness areas and thinly outLines them for each
color channel, for an effect similar to the Lines in a contour map.
Wind : Places tiny Horizontal Lines in the Image to create a windblown effect. Methods include
Wind; Blast, for a more dramatic wind effect; and Stagger, which offsets the Lines in the Image.
TEXTURE FILTERS
Use the Texture filters to simulate the appearance of depth or substance, or to add an organic
look.
Craquelure: Paints an Image onto a high-relief plaster surface, producing a fine network of cracks
that follow the contours of the Image. Use this filter to create an embossing effect with Images that
contain a broad range of color or Grayscale values.
Grain: Adds texture to an Image by simulating different kinds of grain—Regular, Soft, Sprinkles,
Clumped, Contrasty, Enlarged, Stippled, Horizontal, Vertical, and Speckle, available from the Grain
Type menu.
Mosaic Tiles : Renders the Image so that it appears to be made up of small chips or tiles and adds
grout between the tiles. (In Contrast, the Pixelate > Mosaic filter breaks up an Image into blocks of
different-Colored Pixels.)
Patchwork: Breaks up an Image into Squares Filled with the pRedominant color in that area of the
Image. The filter randomly Reduces or increases the tile depth to replicate the highlights and
shadows.
Stained Glass : Repaints an Image as single-Colored adjacent cells outlined in the Foreground color.
Texturizer: Applies a texture you select or create to an Image.
Video filters : The Video submenu contains the De-Interlace and NTSC Colors filters.
De-Interlace: Smooths moving Images captuRed on video by removing either the odd or even
interlaced Lines in a video Image. You can choose to replace the discarded Lines by duplication or
interpolation.
NTSC Colors: Restricts the gamut of colors to those acceptable for television reproduction, to
prevent oversaturated colors from bleeding across television scan Lines.
OTHER FILTERS
Filters in the Other submenu let you create your own filters, use filters to modify masks, offset a
selection within an Image, and make quick color Adjustments.
Custom : Lets you design your own filter effect. With the Custom filter, you can change the
Brightness values of each Pixel in the Image according to a pRedefined mathematical operation
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
899
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
known as convolution. Each Pixel is reassigned a value based on the values of surrounding Pixels.
This operation is similar to the Add and Subtract calculations for channels.
You can save the custom filters you create and use them with other Photoshop Images.
High Pass: Retains edge details in the specified radius where sharp color transitions occur and
suppresses the rest of the Image. (A radius of 0.1 Pixel keeps only edge Pixels.) The filter removes
low-frequency detail from an Image and has an effect opposite to that of the Gaussian Blur filter.
It is helpful to apply the High Pass filter to a continuous-tone Image before using the Threshold
command or converting the Image to Bitmap mode. The filter is useful for extracting line art and
large Black-and-white areas from scanned Images.
Maximum and Minimum : The Maximum and Minimum filters are useful for modifying masks.
The Maximum filter has the effect of applying a spread (dilation)—spreading out white areas and
choking in Black areas. The Minimum filter has the effect of applying a choke (erosion)—shrinking
white areas and spreading out the Black areas. Like the Median filter, the Maximum and Minimum
filters operate on selected Pixels. Within a specified radius, the Maximum and Minimum filters
replace the current Pixel’s Brightness value with the highest or lowest Brightness value of the
surrounding Pixels.
These filters, especially with larger radii, tend to promote either corners or Curves in the
Image contours. In Photoshop CC, you can choose from the Preserve menu to favor Squareness or
roundness as you specify the radius value.
Offset: Moves a selection a specified Horizontal or Vertical amount, leaving an empty space at the
selection’s original location. You can Fill the empty area with the current Background color, with
another part of the Image, or with your choice of Fill if the selection is near the edge of an Image.
DIGIMARC FILTERS
The Digimarc filters embed a digital watermark into an Image to store copyright information.
Note: Digimarc plug-ins requires a 32-bit operating system. They are unsupported in 64-bit
versions of Windows.
Vanishing Point The Vanishing Point feature preserves correct perspective in edits of Images that
contain perspective planes (for instance, the sides of a building or any Rectangular object).
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
900
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
CHAPTER 8
ACTIONS
An action is a series of tasks that you play back on a single file or a batch of files—menu
commands, panel options, tool actions, and so on. For example, you can create an Action that changes
the size of an image, applies an effect to the image, and then saves the file in the desired format. Actions
can include steps that let you perform tasks that cannot be recorded (for example, using a painting tool).
Actions can also include modal controls that let you enter values in a dialog box while playing an action.
In Photoshop, actions are the basis for droplets, which are small applications that automatically process
all files that are dragged onto their icon.
Photoshop come with predefined actions installed that help you perform common tasks. You can use
these actions as is, customize them to meet your needs, or create new actions. Actions are stored in sets to
help you organize them. You can record, edit, customize, and batch-process actions, and you can manage
groups of actions by working with action sets.
Actions Panel Overview
You use the Actions panel (Window Actions) to
record, play, edit, and delete individual actions. This panel also
lets you save and load action files.
Expand and collapse sets, actions, and commands
Click the triangle to the left of the set, action, or command in the
Actions panel. Alt-click the triangle to expand or collapse all
actions in a set or all commands in an action.
View actions by Name only
Choose Button Mode from the Actions panel menu. Choose
Button Mode again to return to list mode.
Note: You can’t view individual commands or sets in Button
mode.
Select actions in the Actions panel
Click an action name. Shift-click action names to select multiple, contiguous actions, and Ctrl-click
action names to select multiple, dis-contiguous actions.
GUIDELINES FOR RECORDING ACTIONS
Keep in mind the following guidelines when recording actions:
You can record most—but not all—commands in an action.
You can record operations that you perform with the Marquee, Move, Polygon, Lasso, Magic Wand,
Crop, Slice, Magic Eraser, Gradient, Paint Bucket, Type, Shape, Notes, Eyedropper, and Color
Sampler tools—as well as those that you perform in the History, Swatches, Color, Paths, Channels,
Layers, Styles, and Actions panels.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
901
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
228 | P
Results depend on file and program setting variables, such as the active layer and the foreground
color. For example, a 3-pixel Gaussian blur won’t create the same effect on a 72-ppi file as on a
144-ppi file. Nor will Color Balance work on a grayscale file.
When you record actions that include specifying settings in dialog boxes and panels, the action will
reflect the settings in effect at the time of the recording. If you change a setting in a dialog box or
panel while recording an action, the changed value is recorded.
Note: Most dialog boxes retain the settings specified at the previous use. Check carefully that those are the
values you want to record.
Modal operations and tools—as well as tools that record position—use the units currently specified
for the ruler. A modal operation or tool is one that requires you to press Enter or Return to apply its
effect, such as transforming or cropping. Tools that record position include the Marquee, Slice,
Gradient, Magic Wand, Lasso, Shape, Path, Eyedropper, and Notes tools.
Note: If you record an action that will be played on files of different sizes, set the ruler units to
percentages. As a result, the action will always play back in the same relative position in the image.
You can record the Play command listed on the Actions panel menu to cause one action to play
another.
Record an action
When you create a new action, the commands and tools you use are added to the action until you
stop recording.
Note: To guard against mistakes, work in a copy: At the beginning of the action before applying other
commands, record the File Save As command and select As A Copy. Alternatively, you can click the
New Snapshot button on the History panel to make a snapshot of the image before recording the action.
Open a file.
In the Actions panel, click the Create New Action button
, or choose New Action from the
Actions panel menu.
Enter an action name, select an action set, and set additional options:
Function Key : Assigns a keyboard shortcut to the action. You can choose any combination of a
function key, the Ctrl key and the Shift key (for example, Ctrl+Shift+F3), with these exceptions:
but you cannot use the F1,F4,F6 key, with Ctrl key.
Note: If you assign an action the same shortcut that is used for a command, the shortcut will apply the
action rather than the command.
Color : Assigns a color for display in Button mode. Click Begin Recording. The Begin
Recording button in the Actions panel turns red
.
Note: When recording the Save As command, do not change the filename. If you enter a new filename,
that new name is recorded and used each time you run the action. Before saving, if you navigate to a
different folder, you can specify a different location without having to specify a filename.
Perform the operations and commands you want to record.
Not all tasks in actions can be recorded directly; however, you can insert most nonrecordable
tasks using commands in the Actions panel menu.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
902
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
To stop recording, either click the Stop Playing/Recording button, or choose Stop Recording
from the Actions panel menu, or press the Esc key.
Note: To resume recording in the same action, choose Start Recording from the Actions panel menu.
Record a path
The Insert path command lets you include a complex path as part of an action ( a path created by
pen tool.) When the action is played back, the work path is set to the recorded path. You can insert a path
when recording an action or after it has been recorde.
Start recording an action or Select an action name to record a path at the end of the
action
Select an existing path from the Paths panel
Choose Insert path from the Actions panel menu.
If you record multiple Insert Path commands in a single action, each path replaces the previous one in the
target file. To add multiple paths, record a Save Path command using the Paths panel after recording each
Insert Path command.
Insert a stop
You can include stops in an action that let you perform a task that cannot be recorded
(for example, using a painting tool). After you complete the task, click the Play button in the Actions
panel to complete the action.
Choose where to insert the stop by
o Select an actions name to insert a stop at the end of action
o Select a command to insert a stop after the command.
Chose insert stop from the Actions panel menu
Type the message you want to appear.
If you want the option to continue the action without stopping, select Allow Continue
Click Ok
You can insert a stop when recording an action or after it has been recorded.
You can also change setting when playing an Action by inserting a Modal control. A Modal control
pauses an action so that you can specify values. You can set Modal control in button mode. To enable or
disable Modal controls of all commands in an action, click the box to the left of the action name. To
enable or disable Modal controls for all actions in a set, click the box to the left of the set name.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
903
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
PHOTOSHOP MENUS
The File menu is home to commands that lets you open and close documents, import and export files,
browse files in Adobe Bridge, print documents, and so on.
New
Creates a new document
Open
To open an existing document
Browse in Bridge
Launches Adobe Bridge in a separate window so you can import, organize, or
locate Images you want to work with.
Browse in Mini Bridge Launches a mini version of Adobe Bridge in its very own panel at the bottom of
your Photoshop window.
Open As Smart Object Lets you open a file as a linked Smart Object in a new psd document
Open Recent
Displays a list of documents you've opened recently
Close
Closes the current document.
Close All
Closes every document you have open in Photoshop.
Close and Go To Bridge Closes the current document and opens the full version of Bridge so you can
browse for other Images.
Save
Saves the current document to your hard drive.
Save As
Saves a copy of the current file with a new name or in a different format.
Check In
It kept track of the changes each person made to each file and acted like a
librarian, letting you check out files when you needed to work on them.
Earlier versions of Photoshop included a little application called Version Cue,
which was useful if you worked and exchanged files with other folks using
Adobe's Creative Suite. It also organized documents and recorded other
important bits of information about the files you used.
Save for Web
Save a copy of the current document in formats that work well with web
browsers
Revert File
Returns it to its last saved state by deleting the changes made after saving
Place
Places an Image or other Psd-supported file format as a Smart Object.
The artwork appears on its own Layer, surrounded by a bounding box you can
use to resize it.
Import
Importing a variety of info into Photoshop.
Variable Data Sets let you import files that are Filled with info Photoshop needs
to make customized Images based on a template file.
Video Frames to Layers lets you open a movie file's frames as individual Layers
in a new document.
Images from Device lets you use a scanner to get a picture, drawing, or anything
else off paper and into Photoshop on a Mac (see the box on page 57 for more on
scanning). Make sure you've installed the scanner's software so Photoshop can
communicate with it (if you haven't installed the software, you won't see it in the
submenu)
Notes lets you import annotations into your Image from PDF documents.
WIA Support is available on PCs running Windows and lets you import Images
from an attached digital camera, memory card, or scanner.
Export
Choose this menu item to export your Image as paths so you can open them
File Menu
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
904
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
with Adobe Illustrator.
Automate
To automate tasks you do over and over in Photoshop by saving them as
Actions.
This menu item lists the built-in Actions that come with Photoshop.
Scripts
Scripts go hand in hand with automation because they also handle repetitive or
complex tasks for you.
File Info
Provides information about file.
Choose this item to see info about the current document, including when it was
created, how big the Image is, its name, copyright information, and so on. You
can add and edit these details, too.
Setting an Image to print.
Choosing this item opens the newly Redesigned Photoshop Print Settings dialog
box and lets you choose things like the number of copies, print quality, and
which printer to use After you get the settings just right, click Print to send your
document to the printer.
Print One Copy
Choose this option to make Photoshop send the current document to the
printer.
You normally use without giving you a chance to change any settings first.
Think of Print One Copy as a quick-and-dirty way to print an Image without
encountering a slew of dialog boxes.
Exit
To quit the Photoshop application
This menu is where you'll find the Copy and Paste commands, Transform options
Undo
Use this command to erase the last thing you did.
Step Forward
If you backtrack through your Image edits, you can move forward through them
again by choosing this command
Step Backward
It works just like Undo, but you can use it to go back more than one step.
Fade
This command lets you change the Opacity and blend mode of the last edit you
performed. It works on filters, Image Adjustments, and so on.
Cut
Copies the selected item to your computer's memory and deletes the original.
Copy
Copies the selected item to your computer's memory but leaves the original
intact.
Copy Merged
This command makes a merged copy of all the visible Layers in a selected area.
If you're editing a multi-LayeRed document, this is a handy way to quickly
consolidate and copy a certain part of the Image—the area you've selected—onto
a single Layer without having to select that area on each Layer.
Paste
Places objects you've copied to your computer's memory into the current
document.
Paste Special
It gives you a few different options, including pasting one selection into another
(by choosing Paste Into).
For example, if you copy a selection (an Image, say) and then create a selection
in another document (such as a picture frame, you can use this command to
make Photoshop paste the contents of that first selection into the second one,
Edit Menu
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
905
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
complete with a Layer mask. The other commands listed here are "Paste in
Place" and Place Outside.
Clear
This command deletes whatever you've selected from the active Layer.
Check Spelling
If you add text to your Image, this command checks it for spelling errors.
Find and Replace Text This command lets you find specific words or phrases in your document and (if
you like) replace them with different text
Fill
This command Fills the selected area with the color of your choice. If you
haven't selected anything, it Fills the whole Layer instead.
Stroke
This command adds a Colored Stroke, or outline, to your current selection
Content-Aware Scale
This feature lets you change the size of an Image without distorting the
important parts, like people
Free Transform
This command lets you scale, stretch, warp, distort, and rotate the selected
object.
Transform
Transform works like Free Transform but lets you change only one aspect of the
selected object at a time.
For example, you can rotate the object, but can't scale it at the same time. Note:
The Free Transform and Transform features work on individual Layers (as many
as you've activated), not on your entire document.
Auto-Align Layers
This command makes it easy to create panoramas from a group of similar
Images.
When you run it, Photoshop looks for the common elements in each photo and
aligns them automatically.
Auto-Blend Layers
This option lets you combine the best parts of similar Images into a single
Image.
Photoshop creates all the necessary Layer masks for you.
Define Brush Preset
Choose this option to convert the selected object into a custom brush
Define Pattern
This item makes a custom pattern out of your current selection.
Define Custom Shape This option turns the selected path or vector mask into a custom shape.
Purge
This item lets you clear Photoshop's undo list,
Adobe PDF Presets
This item lets you manage, edit, and add groups of settings you can use when
making PDF versions of Images.
Presets
lets you edit or combine groups into new libraries as well as delete groups
You can manage groups of custom brushes, patterns, Shapes, colors, and styles
by selecting this menu item.
Remote Connections
This command lets you allow a wireless device or other program to connect with
Photoshop.
Color Settings
This item brings up Photoshop's advanced color settings so you can control
color-management and device profiles.
Assign Profile
This option is part of Photoshop's color-management system.
From here, you can assign specific color profiles to individual documents or
disable color management
Convert to Profile
This option lets you change an Image's color-management profile.
Keyboard Shortcuts
Choose this item to customize Photoshop's keyboard shortcuts,
Menus
Choose this option to see all of Photoshop's menus.
Note : the Preferences option appears at the bottom of the Edit menu.
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
906
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
This menu groups together features for working with Images and your Canvas. You can resize
documents, adjust Curves and Levels, duplicate Images, and rotate Images from here.
Mode
This is where you change the current document's color mode and bit depth
You can choose from Bitmap, Grayscale, Duotone, Indexed Color, RGB,
CMYK, Lab, and Multichannel color modes and 8-, 16-, and 32-bit Images.
Adjustments
can change the colors and overall Tonal quality of your Image.
Auto Tone
It analyzes the current Image and tries to adjust its overall colors to make it look
better.
Auto Contrast
It adjusts the Contrast between light and dark areas in your Images so that
highlights look brighter and shadows look darker.
Auto Color:
Artificial lighting can Skew the colors in Images, so use this command to shift
them back so they look more natural.
Image Size
This option lets you change your Image's resolution and dimensions.
Canvas Size
Option to change document's dimensions without changing its file size or
resolution.
Use this command if you need more space in a document but don't want to resize
its content
Image Rotation
Use item's options to rotate your Image and Canvas.
You can choose one of the presets—like 180° or 90° CW (clockwise)—or
choose Arbitrary and then enter the number of degrees you want to turn the
Image.
Crop
This command lets you remove unwanted area of the Image.
It lets you remove the edges of an Image in order to produce a more visually
pleasing composition or change its size. Photoshop keeps the area inside the crop
box and removes everything else, leaving you with an Image that's physically
smaller than it was before.
Trim
Like Crop, this command lets you trim away the edges of an Image based on the
color in each corner or on Transparent Pixels.
This command is incredibly handy when you need to produce the smallest Image
possible.
Reveal All
This command shows you all your Image's hidden edges if you've cropped non-
destructively.
Duplicate
Makes a copy of your current document and lets you give the duplicated
document a new name.
Apply Image
This command lets you combine a Layer and channel from one document with a
Layer and channel from another document using the blend mode and Opacity of
your choice.
Calculations
This command works a lot like Apply Image, but instead of combining Layers
and channels, it combines only channels;
Variables
It lets you designate areas of a document as placeholders for other Images or text
that Photoshop adds automatically from a specified data source
It lets you create powerful document templates that you can use to generate
several versions of the same basic design (with different Images and/or text)
automatically.
Images Menu
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
907
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
Apply Data Set
Once you've created a document template containing variables, you can choose
this menu item to tell Photoshop where the variable data—the other Images and/
or text—lives so it can automatically create the various versions of the
document.
Trap
This command lets you set the spread of objects in your Images, which controls
how much colors overlap where they intersect.
This setting is important in offset printing.
This menu, not surprisingly, has controls for working with Layers. From here you can add and delete
Layers, create Layer masks, and merge Layers, among other things.
New
This command adds a Layer or Layer group to your Image.
Duplicate Layer
This makes a copy of the current Layer.
Delete
To delete a Layer. (pressing the Delete key/Backspace also works.)
Rename Layer
To rename a Layer name.
Layer Style
Go here to set the current Layer's blending options and apply effects like drop
shadows, glows, and Gradient overlays.
Smart Filter
This option lets you delete or disable a Smart Filter mask.
New Fill Layer
Fill a Layer with a solid color, Gradient, or pattern
The neat thing about Fill Layers is that, when you change Canvas size,
Photoshop automatically Fills in the extra space with the color, Gradient, or
pattern you picked.
New Adjustment Layer This option creates a new Adjustment Layer so you can apply nondestructive
changes to your Images.
Layer Mask
From here you can show, hide, delete, and apply Layer masks (page 116).
Vector Mask
This option is like Layer Mask item above, but it lets you work with vector-
based objects.
Create Clipping Mask This command lets you attach Layers to one another so the content of one Layer
shows through the shape of what's on the Layer below.
Smart Objects
It includes Tools for working with Smart Objectsediting them, duplicating
them, and so on.
Video Layers
This item lets you add, remove, and paint video Layers.
You can also use this item's options to restore video frames, manage color, edit
video and animation Layers, and set when video Layers appear in a timeline.
Rasterize
It converts text, vector-based objects, Smart Objects, Shapes, 3-D objects, and
video frames into raster-based objects.
New Layer Based Slice This item adds slices for Web layouts to the currently selected Layer based on its
content
Group Layers
Use this command to group active Layers together
Ungroup Layers
To ungroup the Layers which are previously grouped
Hide Layers
Use this command to hide Layers.
Arrange
It lets you change the order of Layers and Layer groups in the Layers panel.
Combine Shapes
It lets you combine and intersect objects on Shape Layers that you've drawn
using Photoshop's built-in Shape Tools
Align Type
It lets you align content that lives on different Layers;
Layer Menu:
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
908
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
Distribute
It aligns the contents of 3 or more Layers along the object's edges or center
points.
Lock Layers
Lock All Layers in Group :This command lets you lock the activated Layers, or
lock all the Layers in a group so you don't accidentally edit or change them.
Link Layers
Use this command to hook Layers together so they move as if they were a single
Layer.
Select Linked Layers
Choose a linked Layer and then pick this menu item to activate all the Layers
linked to it.
Merge Layers
This command combines the active Layers/Layer groups into a single Layer.
Merge Visible
To combine all your Image's visible Layers into a single Layer.
Flatten Image
This command merges all your Image's Layers into the Background Layer.
Matting
This option removes the extra Pixels surrounding an object's edge after you've
isolated it from its original Background.
After you apply matting, the item's edge should look cleaner and more natural.
Type
This menu item gives you access to new Character and Paragraph Styles panels.
Anti-Alias
Use this option to control how much blurring occurs on the edges of text to make
the letter forms smoother
Orientation
This command lets you switch between Horizontal / Vertical text.
Open Type
This item gives you fast access to the extra formatting goodness contained in
some Open Type fonts.
Create Work Path
To create an editable path out of the active Type Layer, which lets you change
the shape of individual characters.
Convert to Shape
This command creates a Shape Layer out of an active Type Layer.
Rasterize Type Layer This command converts a vector-based Type Layer into un-editable Pixels.
Convert to
Paragraph Text
This command converts point text (the kind that can dangle off the edge of your
document) to paragraph text (a text box) and vice-versa.
Wrap Text:
Use this command you can reshape text in a variety of ways.
Font Preview Size
It lets you change the size of font previews visible in the Fonts menus that live in
the Options bar and Character panel.
Update All Text Layers
It updates all the Layer in a document to the current version of the
program.
Replace All Missing Fonts
To replace all the missing fonts in a document with a different font.
The items in this menu let you grab Layers, pick colors, use Quick Mask mode, and more.
All
This command places marching ants around the perimeter of your document and
grabs everything on the currently active Layer.
Deselect
Used to get rid of the marching ants and deactivate a selection.
Reselect
Used to reactivate the last selection you created.
Inverse
It will inverse the selection area.
All Layers
It activates all the visible Layers in the Layers panel at once.
Deselect Layers
To deactivate the currently active Layers.
Similar Layers
Choose similar Layers at once
Select Menu
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
909
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
Color Range
It lets you select areas in your Image based on color.
Refine Edge
It opens a dialog box that lets you fine-tune the edges of a selection, which is
helpful when wispy bits like hair or fur are involved.
Modify
It lets you tweak the edge of your current selection by expanding or shrinking it,
feathering it, grabbing just its border, or smoothing it.
Grow
It finds and grabs Pixels that match the colors around the area you have selected.
(The Pixels have to be adjacent to your selection)
Similar
Like the Grow command, this option will find all the Pixels in your Image that
match the selected area's colors, but it finds similar-Colored Pixels anywhere in
your Image.
Transform Selection
It lets you resize the currently selected area with a bounding box (just like Free
Transform)
Load Selection
It activates a selection you previously saved so you can use it again
Save Selection
Use this option to save a selection for future use.
This menu is packed with all kinds of effects you can apply to Images. It groups filters by type: Artistic,
Blur, Sharpen, and so on.
Last Filter
It applies the last filter you used with the same settings for the current Layer or
object.
Convert for
Smart Filters
To convert a regular Layer to a Smart Object so you can use Smart Filters
Filter Gallery
Choose this option to see a preview of how your Image will look if you apply
various filters.
It's available for several filter categories, and it's a good way to learn how those
filters affect your Image
Adaptive Wide Angle It easily fix distortion problems common when shooting with a wide-angle or
fish-eye lens
Lens Correction
It lets you add a beautifully darkened edge vignette, it will also correct all
manner of lens distortion,
Liquify
It lets you push, pull, and move Pixels in all sorts of ways in order to change
reality.
Oil Paint
It lets you create a painting from a photo by tweaking a series of sliders.
Vanishing Point
This filter helps you maintain an Image's perspective while you paint, clone, or
add other Images to it.
Filter
This category includes filters that make Images look like a painting or drawing.
Blur
These filters change the focus in all or part of an Image.
Field Blur, Iris Blur, Tilt-Shift that are useful for creating shallow-depth-of-field
effects after you take the photo.
Brush Strokes
This category make your Image look like it was painted, penciled, or spray
painted, among other effects; see page 660 for details.
Distort
These filters create geometric patterns based on your Image, including ripple,
twirl, and zigzag effects.
Noise
This Filters that can help smooth areas of an Image that don't blend well, fix dust
and scratches in photos, and remove graininess.
Filter Menu
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
910
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
You can also use these filters to add grain to give an Image more texture and
depth.
Pixelate
Filters convert Images or selections into groups of geometric Shapes and
patterns.
Render
These filters let you add cloud patterns, fiber patterns, and lens flares, and adjust
an Image's lighting.
Sharpen
Filters in this category to make blurry or out-of-focus Images clearer.
Sketch
It will you add artistic effects to make Images look like they were hand drawn
with charcoal, crayons, graphic pens, and so on.
Stylize
This will accentuate the edges in an Image in order to do things like turn Images
into collections of blocks or dots, a pencil sketch, You can use the Emboss filter
in this category to sharpen a blurry Image.
Video
It will de interlace (smooth) Images that you've grabbed from videos, and restrict
Images to colors that display properly on TVs .
Other
This catch-all category includes options that let you build your own custom
filters and adjust a Layer mask's size, among other things.
Digimarc
These filters let you add a watermark and copyright info to Images.
Browse Filters Online This option fires up your web browser and takes you to the Adobe website so
you can browse and download even more filters.
This menu gives you all sorts of different ways of looking at Images, from zooming in or out to adding
guides and rulers.
Proof Setup
Use the items to create a proof, a sample version of your Image that simulates
what the finished piece will look like.
You can simulate how your Image colors will look on a PC monitor or in another
color mode—even how a color-blind person would see them.
Proof Colors
This option turns soft proofing on or off.
View
It make Photoshop highlight areas of your Image that fall outside of the safe
color range, or gamut, for the color mode you're working in.
Pixel Aspect Ratio
This item lets you change the shape of your Image's Pixels for specific projects.
Correction
When working with Pixels that are not Square so your Images do not look
stretched when viewed on your computer monitor.
32-bit Preview Options It compensates for washed-out highlights and overly dark shadows.
Because the dynamic range in 32-bit HDR Images is greater than the color range
most monitors can display
Zoom In:
This command works like a magnifying glass and used to increase magnification
Zoom Out
This command decreases your Image's magnification level.
Fit on Screen
It adjusts your view of the current Image & window to Fill your screen.
Actual Pixels
Option to see your Image at its actual size.
Print Size
It shows the actual printing size of an Image.
Screen Mode
It lets you choose how you want to view Images.
Extras If option turned on, you can add alignment helpers like guides and grids
to your Images
Show Window
This submenu lists the extra items you can display and use while you're editing
Images: guides, Layer edges, notes, and more.
View Menu
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
911
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
Rulers
It shows or hides the Horizontal and Vertical rulers.
Snap
Choose this item to turn snapping on or off.
(Snapping lets you align objects with guides and other items.
Snap To
Items objects snap to: guides, grids, Layers, slices, document bounds, or all of
those things.
Lock Guides
It will lock guides.
Clear Guides
to get rid of all the guides you've added to the current document.
New Guide
Lets you add Vertical and Horizontal guides to an Image.
Lock Slices
Choose this item to keep your Image slices where they are.
Clear Slices
Removes all the slices from the current Image.
Window
It lets you arrange open documents, view or hide panels, and so on.
Arrange
It organizes your open document windows.
From here, you can do things like open and close panels, set the same
magnification level across all your documents, minimize windows, and bring all
your documents in front of other windows.
Workspace
It will rearrange Photoshop's panels, menus, and Tools to make it easier to
perform certain tasks like painting or working with text.
Extensions
A list of the Photoshop extensions installed on your machine, like the
collaborative, online color-scheme generator called Kurler .
Actions
Used to open the Actions panel, here you can see a list of the Actions that came
with Photoshop and ones you have created.
You can also use this panel to manage Actions.
Adjustments
We can add Adjustment Layers that you can use to nondestructively alter an
Image's color and lighting.
Brush
Select and edit Photoshop built-in brushes, as well as user defined brushes.
Brush Presets
To view a painting sample, as well as edit & store our own customized settings
for brushes.
Channels
This panel shows the different color channels contained in your document.
Character
Here you can find all sorts of settings for working with text.
Character Styles
It will save and apply character text formatting options.
Clone Source
This panel groups together settings for using the Clone Tools.
Color
Use this panel to view and change your Foreground and Background colors.
Histogram
This panel includes a graph (called a Histogram) that shows you information
about the Pixels in your Image
History
Displays a timeline of the edits you've made to the current document.
It also shows what the Image looked like last time you saved it and lets you
restore the Image to any previous state.
Info
It includes info about where your cursor is, the color of the Pixels it's hovering
over, and the size of your current selection (if you have one).
Layer Comps
Use this panel to view and organize groups of Layers you can use to show
different versions of your Image in a single document
Layers
You can add, delete, and organize your document's Layers from this panel.
Navigator
This panel lets you change how much you're zoomed in on an Image and which
part of the Image you're viewing.
Window Menu
PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, UÀÄgÀĪÁgÀ, ªÉÄà 18, 2017
912
¨sÁUÀ 1
GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE
PHOTOSHOP CS6
Notes:
You can view, edit, and delete notes from this panel
Paragraph
We can control the paragraph-wide settings for text in documents
Paragraph Styles
Create and apply paragraph formatting options.
Paths
You can keep track of all the paths in your Image with this panel.
You can also use it to change the stacking order of the paths as well as add and
delete them.
Properties
This panel lets you tweak the settings for Adjustment Layers as well as Pixel- or
vector-based Layer masks.
Styles
To apply Photoshop's built-in styles to your Images,& to create and save your
own custom styles.
Swatches
You can view and pick colors from libraries of color chips.
Photoshop includes a long list of popular libraries including several Pantone,
Toyo, and Trumatch color groups.
Timeline
This command opens the Timeline panel
(Animation in previous versions of the program) that you can use to create a
frame-based animation or a video project complete with multiple clips,
transitions, audio, and more.
Tool Presets
If you regularly use the same settings for a particular Tool, use this panel to save
them as a preset so you can use them again later.
Options
This menu item shows or hides the Options bar
Tools
To show or hide the Tools panel
Open Documents
The bottom portion of the Window menu doesn't actually have a label, but it's
where Photoshop lists all the documents you have open (in Alphabetical order).
If you don't know how to do something in Photoshop, you may find the answer in this menu. It includes a
link to Adobe's online help system, several tutorials, and op-tions for activating and deactivating your
copy of Photoshop (see online Appendix A). You need an active Internet connection to use almost every
item in this menu.
PR-95
SC-500
Help Menu
ªÀÄÄzÀæPÀgÀÄ ºÁUÀÆ ¥ÀæPÁ±ÀPÀgÀÄ:- ¸ÀAPÀ®£Á¢üPÁjUÀ¼ÀÄ, PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, ¸ÀPÁðj PÉÃAzÀæ ªÀÄÄzÀæuÁ®AiÀÄ, ¨ÉAUÀ¼ÀÆgÀÄ-59.
R.N.I. No. KARBIL/2001/47147 POSTAL REGN. No. RNP/KA/BGS/2202/2017-19
Licensed to post without prepayment WPP No. 297